Glass. 
 Book 
 
1 ! 
 
NEW METRO 
 
 OF LEARNING. THE 
 
 SEEM AN LANGUAGE: 
 
 EMBRACING BOTH TEE 
 
 QVnalgtic anb Stmtljetic fHobes of Instruction ; 
 
 A PLAIN AND PRACTICAL WAY OF ACQUIRING THE AR1 
 
 OF 
 
 READING, SPEAKING, AND COMPOSING GEMAN. 
 
 8^ 
 
 W. H. WOODBUKY, A.M., 
 
 AUTHOR OF "SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN," "ELEMENTARY GERMAN READIB, 
 
 " ECLECTIC GERMAN READER," " GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENO LISH-GERMAN 
 
 READER." " NEW METHOD FOR GERMANS TO LEARN ENGLISH," OR : 
 
 "Sleue SDtet^obe jur Srlemung ber englifdjeit ©pracfye," etc. 
 
 2Ber frembc (Bpradjen md)t fennt, u>ei§ nicijts son fetner ctgnctt. 
 
 ©oetH 
 
 NEW YO'KK: 
 iVISON, PHINNEY & COMPANY 
 
 48 & 50 WALKER STREET. 
 
 CHICAGO: 
 
 S. C. GRIGGS & COMPANY, 
 
 89 & 41 LAKE STREET. 
 
 18 6 3. 
 
Just Publish 
 A e Exercises in Wo bt's New Method 
 
 with the German Language. 
 
 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1S55, by 
 
 W. II. WOODBURY, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States, for the Southern 
 
 District of New York, 
 
 By Transfer 
 
 APR II 1919 
 
 stereotyped bt 
 
 Smith & McDousal, 
 
 82 & 8-i Beekman-st 
 
JAMES N. M°ELLIGOTT, LL.L>. 
 
 IN WHOM AEE FOTTND 
 HIGH MORAL WORTH, RAKE PHILOLOGICAL ATTAINMENTS, 
 
 EXTRAORDINARY SUCCESS AS A PRACTICAL EDUCATOR, 
 
 AND AN ABLE AND ELOQUENT ADVOCATE OF 
 
 THE CAUSE OF GENERAL EDUCATION, 
 
 QLl)i5 boinmc 
 
 13 MOST. CORDIALLY DEDICATED 
 IY Hlfl FRIEND, 
 
 THE AUTHOR 
 
WOODBURY'S GERMAN SERIES. 
 
 I. NEW METHOD WITH GERMAN. 
 
 523 pp. 12mo. — Price, 
 
 II. KEY TO NEW METHOD 
 
 80 pp. 12mo. — Pric 
 
 III. SHORTER COURSE WITH GERMAN. 
 
 230 pp. 12mo — Price 
 
 IV. KEY TO SHORTER COURSE. 
 
 80 pp. 12mo.— Pric 
 
 V. ELEMENTARY GERMAN READER. 
 
 250 pp. 12mo. — Price, 
 
 VI. ECLECTIC GERMAN READER. 
 
 280 pp. 12mo.— Price, 
 
 Vfl. GERMAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-GERMAN READER, 
 
 70 pp. 12mo. — Price, 
 
 vi n. mmbhutp^ meut Wti^vht 
 %ux (Srhrnung ber engitfdjen ©pracfyc* 
 SPmS 
 
 «^ « » ^ t » -^> 
 
 iTa0qucUe'0 Ixtnc\) 0cru0. 
 
 I. FRENCH COURSE. 
 
 500 pp. 12mo. — Price 
 
 II. KEY TO FRENCH COURSE. 
 
 140 pp. 12mo. — Price, 
 
 III. COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 
 
 260 pp. 12mo.— Price 
 
 IV. TELEMAQUE. 
 
 390 pp. 12mo.— Price, 
 
 V. NAPOLEON. 
 
 274 pp. 12mo.— Price, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The German Language is now deservedly ranked among the 
 leading studies in many of our High Schools and Academies. 
 Its treasures in every department of knowledge, in every variety 
 of composition, are certainly among the wonders of literary 
 achievement. Among European tongues it holds a decided su- 
 periority of rank ; surpassing them all in the abundance of 
 its words, in the richness of its internal resources, and in its 
 wonderful flexibility. Hence the propriety of its place among 
 liberal studies. 
 
 But the motives to the study of this language reach far be- 
 yond the circles of literary life. Celerity and cheapness of 
 travel, growing out of recent improvements in navigation, have 
 united in producing an easy intercourse between Germany and 
 America. Besides, we have already in our midst an immense 
 and daily augmenting German population. The language of 
 this people is spoken extensively among us. and has hence come 
 to have a high practical value. It is often set down as an in- 
 dispensable qualification even for a common clerkship. 
 
 Such being the character and importance of the German lan- 
 guage, various attempts have been made, as was natural, to 
 give greater facility in learning it. Some of these are unques- 
 tionably excellent works ; executed, according to the plan which 
 they have adopted, in a manner skillful and judicious. But just 
 here, in plan, as it seems to the present writer, all of them are 
 more or less lacking; and out of this conviction has ansen the 
 present volume. 
 
 The grounds of this conviction may be briefly stated. Years 
 ago, when the author, with something of enthusiasm, resolved, 
 if possible, to master the language, and for that, among other 
 
VI r R E F A E . 
 
 purposes, resided for some time in Germany, he found his ar 
 dor not a little abated by the circumstance, that, in no one of 
 the numerous grammars which he had collected about him, was 
 he able to pursue his studies on what he deemed philosophical 
 principles. The methods of the books were in one sense va- 
 rious ; but all were plainly divisible into two extremely oppo- 
 site classes. In one class theory held the sway ; in the other 
 practice was supreme. The one seemed bent upon grounding 
 the pupil in set rules and forms, and anxious chiefly to present 
 and impress the language, as a thing of science, a systematic 
 whole. The other appeared to deal almost exclusively in sep- 
 arate and independent facts ; intent only on exhibiting and 
 teaching the German tongue, as a thing of art, a medium of com- 
 mon communication. That such a knowledge of the language as 
 he had proposed to himself to acquire, could never be obtained 
 by either of these methods exclusively, was perfectly evident. 
 That not only the surest, but even the shortest route to his ob- 
 ject, might be found in the due combination of the two, seemed 
 not less obvious. For art has her only just basis in the science 
 that lies underneath ; without which she is liable to frequent 
 failure and perpetual uncertainty. 
 
 The attempt, then, in this book is to unite and narmonize 
 more fully two things, which, in teaching a language, ought 
 never to be separated : the theoretical and the practical. This 
 leading feature being announced, we now proceed to specify 
 some details of the plan. , 
 
 It assumes in the outset, as ever afterward, the position of 
 the careful and considerate living teacher ; that is, introduces 
 one by one the easier forms and usages of the language, and 
 directs attention to the more obvious differences between the 
 German and the English. It here seeks to avoid the error of 
 frightening the beginner with a formidable array of rules, de- 
 clensions and conjugations, which he is, as yet, in no wise pre 
 pared to entertain. 
 
 After a certain amount of progress in these preliminary 
 steps, the pupil is put upon the exercise of composing in Ger- 
 man. To this end he is taught to regard every German sen- 
 tence, given him for translation, as a model on which he is to 
 
P Pv E F A C E . Vll 
 
 build one cf his own. He is in no wise trammeled as to the 
 thought ; he is under no necessity of divesting it of some par- 
 ticular English dress, given it by the hand of another ; but is 
 encouraged to take any thought which may suggest itself, and, 
 under the guidance of his model sentence and what other light 
 he has received, to put it into a German garb. In this way, 
 he comes gradually to feel the difference between the English 
 and the German modes of expression, and thence derives ac- 
 curacy and readiness in making them. Conjointly with this 
 process, and in order to its more complete success, the practice 
 of turning English sentences into German, as well as German 
 into English, is carried on in a series of exercises at once pro- 
 gressive, comprehensive and systematic. 
 
 It supplies the learner throughout all these various exercises 
 with the materials necessary to their due performance. Every 
 lesson is headed with the statement and illustration of all new 
 principles involved, an explanation of difficult words and 
 phrases, and a vocabulary alphabetically arranged. Nothing, 
 indeed, is left unsupplied, which the student can not readily 
 obtain for himself. 
 
 It does not, however, in regard to grammatical instruction, 
 leave the learner here. For, although it embraces sornewdiere 
 or other in the previous course, all the leading facts and fea- 
 tures of the language, it purposely deals with them rather as 
 individuals than as components of a grammatical system. It 
 takes them analytically, not synthetically. But now, having 
 accomplished its purpose in this respect, it invites the attention 
 of the student to a new and more scientific aspect of them. 
 They come before him now, not as new things, but in new re- 
 lations. He has all the advantage of an impressive review, 
 and at the same time gives discipline to his mind, by giving 
 order to its acquisitions. 
 
 It furthermore, as is plain, adapts itself to all classes of 
 teachers and learners. Those who insist upon the more purely 
 practical method, who regard every thing beyond as superflu- 
 ous, if not pernicious, will find the course contained in the first 
 part, all-sufficient, it is believed, to answer their demands. 
 To those, on the other hand, who can tolerate nothing short of 
 
Y1H PREFACE. 
 
 a strictly systematic course, first and last, the second part will, 
 it is hoped, be found no unacceptable offering. To those, 
 finally, who sympathize with the author in the view that these 
 two methods can and ought to be united in teaching a language, 
 the entire work is presented with all the confidence of expe- 
 rienced success. 
 
 To render it yet more complete in itself, a carefully selected 
 series of Heading Lessons, from the best German writers, has 
 been added, together with a full vocabulary (pp. 471 and 505). 
 
 Throughout the volume, great care has been taken to furnish 
 in every particular, however trivial it might seem, the most 
 reliable instruction. And in this respect, as in others, it is 
 hoped, the work will be found especially acceptable to that 
 large class of students who aim at the acquisition of the lan- 
 guage mainly without the aid of a teacher. Indeed, for their 
 purposes, many features in the system will prove peculiarly 
 serviceable. 
 
 In the matter of declension and conjugation — in the account 
 of derivatives and compounds — in the tabular views of verbs, 
 regular and irregular, simple and compound — in the illustra- 
 tions of the powers and uses of the prepositions and other par- 
 ticles — in short, in all leading points, the author has sought 
 to present those views only which are now recognized as the 
 best and truest by the highest German authorities. To the 
 labors of Becker and IIeyse especially is he indebted ; though 
 numerous are the works on German grammar, which have 
 been consulted in view of this publication. 
 
 Finally, with the sincere desire that this course of study may 
 subserve the purpose of rendering the German language and 
 literature more easy of access, and with a grateful acknowiedg 
 ment of the friendly aid which has been received from several 
 gentlemen of known ability in linguistic science, the work is 
 respectfully submitted. 
 
 New York, October, 1855. 
 
CONTENTS OP THE LESSONS. 
 
 PAGB 
 
 LESSON I.— German Alphabet 19 
 
 LESSON II.— Sounds of letters.— I. Vowels.— II. Umlauts.— 
 III. Diphthongs. — IV. Consonants. — V. Compound Conso- 
 nants. — VI. Accent 20 
 
 LESSON III— Current hand 22 
 
 LESSON IV. — 1. Forms of definite article. — 2. £akn present sin- 
 gular 23 
 
 LESSON V. — oingcn and SSartcn present singular. — 1. Root. — 
 2. Form of Conjugation 24 
 
 LESSON VI.— Interrogative Conjugation 26 
 
 LESSON VII. — 1. Verbs irregular present singular. — 2. Gender 
 of Nouns 27 
 
 LESSON VIII. — 1. Cases. — 2. Declension of Nouns.— 3. Nouns of 
 Old dccl. ending in c, cf, en, er, d)en, tetn. — -i. Old decl. with def. 
 Art. Agreement of article with noun. — 5. Verbs with dat. and ace. 29 
 
 LESSON IX. — 1. Genitive, how rendered. — 2. Nouns adding e3 in 
 gen. Occasional omission of e in gen. and dat. 31 
 
 LESSON X. — 1. Demonstrative pronouns SMefer and Setter. — 
 2. Often rendered by latter — -former. — 3. The word one. — ±. Decl. 
 of btefer, etc. — ;>. 3d:i and SHrgcjfea pres. sing 33 
 
 LESSON XI. — 1. Dative with prepositions. — 2. Dative with verbs 
 of motion. — ?>. Omission of prep. — 4. Of, how expressed in Ger- 
 man. — 5. Position of Prep 36 
 
 LESSON XII.— 1. Indef. Art.— 2. 3. Poss. Prons. — I. Decl. of indef. 
 Art., etc. — 5. e when often dropped. — 6. Words in apposition. . . 88 
 
 LESSON XIII. — 1. Interrogative Pronouns. — 2. 3Ba-5 fur separat- 
 ed. — 3. 85kld)er and roaS fur in exclamations. — 4. SBeLi) in ques- 
 tions. — 5. Sin rendered by a one. — 6. 23a3 for 'coaxnm. Decl. of 
 rocr and toaS. — 7. Gen. of wav. — 8. SBcintr, etc 41 
 
 LESSON XIV. — 1. Adjectives used predicatively. — 2. Used attri- 
 butively.— 3 Old decl. of Adjs. — 4. Agreement of Adj. with 
 Nouns. — 5. Attributive and predicative forms of Adj. — 6. Adjs. 
 pieceded by ctn>ct3, Xoa$ and tttd)t3. — 7. Adjs. referring to noun 
 understood 44 
 
X CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. 
 
 TA.an 
 
 LESSON XV.— 1. New decl. of Adjs.— 2. Form of New decl. in 
 nom. — 8. Final syllable of mandjer, etc., so?netimes dropped. — 
 4. Adj. placed after noun. — 5. Adj. formed from nouns 47 
 
 LESSON XVI.— 1. Mixed decl. of Adjs.— 2. Adjs. following meitl, 
 etc. — 3. ©igen. Endings of Mixed decl. nom. — 4. Gin as nu- 
 meral. — 5. Inflection of etn and fein. — 6. Gin preceded by def. art. 50 
 
 LESSON XVIL— 1. Connected view of Old, New and Mixed de- 
 clensions. — 2. Words requiring adj. in New decl.— 3. Words re- 
 quiring adj . in Mixed decl 51 
 
 LESSON XVIII.— 1. Indefinite pronouns.— 2. 3. Scbermaim.— 4. 3e* 
 manb. — 5. SZiemanb. — 6. 9?td)t with Semanb and (£troa3.— 7. (Etncr 
 and Reiner 56 
 
 LESSON XIX. — 1. 2. Indefinite pronoun man. — 3. ©ar, and ganj 
 unb gar 59 
 
 LESSON XX. — 1. Prepositions with dat. — 2. Prepositions with 
 ace. — 3. Prepositions with dat. and ace. — 4. Preps, and def. art. 
 contracted. Examples of an, J) on, ctuf, au3 and nadj 61 
 
 LESSON XXI.— 1. Negative conjugation.— 2. Position of 9?td)t.— 
 
 3. In interrogative sentences. — 4. ©onbern and Slber. — 5. 6. 9KcI)t 
 roat)r ? — 7. 9?id)t with 9?o^>. — 8. Sludj ntd)t, and) fein, etc 64 
 
 LESSON XXII. — 1. New decl. ending in unaccented ar, c, cr, ef. — 
 
 2. Nouns not ending in ar, etc. — 3. Adj. or Part, used substan- 
 tively. — 5. For determining decl 67 
 
 oESSON XXIIL— Feminine gender.— 1. Decl. of Me, btefe and 
 meinc. — 2. Decl. - i'Adjs. in fern. gen. Old decl. — 3. New decl. — 
 
 4. Deci. of Fern Nouns. — 5. 6. Appellations of Females. — 7. 5(, c, 
 
 u, umlauted before the suffix in 70 
 
 LESSON XXIV.— 1. Formation and Gen. of Diminutives.— 2. Use 
 of Diminutives. — 3. $rd'ulettt and Sftdbdjen. — 4. 5. Compound 
 Nouns. Nouns with Nouns. — 6. With Preps., etc. — 7. With 
 Adjs. — 8. Compound Adjs. — 9. 10. Nouns separated by hyphea. — 
 
 11. 12. 13. Gender of Compound Nouns 74 
 
 LESSON XXV.— Plan of Composing German.— 1. Art. ; and adj. 
 Prons., Plural. Decl. in all Genders of Plur. — 2. Adjs. — 3. Old 
 decl. — 4. 5. Plural of Nouns of Old decl., Neuter. — 6. 7. Masc. — 
 8. Fern. — 9. Decl. of Nouns in Plural. — 10. -paben, <Setn and Sofeen, 
 
 pres. plur 7fa 
 
 LESSON XXVI.— 1. Irreg. Plur. of Nouns.— 2. Neuter Nouns.— 
 
 3. Masc. Nouns. — 4. Nouns ending in tljimt. — 5. Plural of 2J2amt. — 
 6. 2eute and S3oIf. — 7. Styjtl, etc.— 8. Gutter and Softer.— 9. %?.l, 
 etc. — 1 0. Sing., how used 84 
 
 LESSON XXVIL— 1. Decl. of Pers. Prons.— 2. Second Pers. Sing.— 
 8. Second Pers. Plur. — 4. Third Pers. Sing. — 5. Thiid Pers. Plur. 87 
 
CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. XI 
 
 PA(JB 
 
 LESSON XXV JUL — I. 2. Gen. of Pers. Prons.— 3. Dat. with son.— 
 
 4. Pron ouns refei ring to Neuter Appellations of Persons. — 
 
 5. Gender of Prons. representing inanimate objects. — G. Adverbs 
 substituted for pron. and prep. — 7. Use of e3 as gram. subj. — 
 8. Position of. — 9. 10. Various uses of e<3. — 11. Prons. of differ- 
 ent persons. — 12. Pron. repeated. — 13. Gen. of a Pers. Pron. be- 
 fore Numerals 9 J 
 
 LESSON XXIX.— 1. Reflexive use of Pers. Prons.— 2. ®'id).— 3. 4. 
 5. Sel&jt. — 6. Reflexive pronouns used as reciprocal. — 7. <2id) 
 rendered by Pers. Pron. — 8. Position of Pers. .Pron. in inter- 
 rogative sentences. — 9. 10. 11. Reflexive Verbs 9fi 
 
 LESSON XXX.— New decl. plur.—l. Adjs.— 2. Nouns.— 3. Fern. 
 Nouns. — 4. 5. 6. Decl. of Proper Names. — 7. Foreign Proper 
 Names. — 8. Proper Names of Places and Countries. — 9. Connected 
 View of the Art., Demonst. and Poss. Prons., Adj. and Nouns, 
 in all Decls 100 
 
 LESSON XXXI.— -Irreg. decl. of Nouns. — 1. Nouns inflected ac- 
 cording to New decl. — 2. Mixed decl. of Adjs. in plur. — 3. $eld 
 and grtcbe. — 4. £er @(§mer§. — 5. Nouns taking Old decl. in sing., 
 and Neio in plur. — 6. Decl. of SBauer and Stitgc. — 7. Sett and 
 £cmb. — 8. <3ce. — 9. Mixed decl. of Adj 106 
 
 LESSON XXXIL— Comparison of Adjs.— 1. Comparative.— 2. Su- 
 perlative. — 3. When umlauted. — 4. Irregular. — 5. How declin- 
 ed. — 6. Superlative after am. — 7. Superlative combined with 
 ..r. — 8. Comparative by means of S)ie{;r, iSiiiicjcr, etc. — 9. Par- 
 ticiples, how declined. — 10. Sc-bejlo and jc-je. — 11. Position of 
 subject and verb 109 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. — 1. Adjs. used substantively. — 2. As abstract 
 Nouns. — 3. S3e|l — 4. Comparative of 9?al}C. — 5. Formation of 
 Adjs. from Proper Names of Countries and Cities. — 6. From Pro- 
 per Names of Per so ns. — 7. Denoting a sect 113 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. — 1. Sitel and Sauter, omission of inflectional 
 endings. — 2. Several Adjs. qualifying the same noun. — 3. In 
 nom. and ace. Neut. — 4. Adj. denoting a language. — 5 Form of 
 the New decl.— 6. Sentences used adjectively. — 7. Adjs. used 
 adverbially. — 8. 9. Adverbs. — 10. Comparative of 25tti, etc.... 117 
 
 LESSON XXXV.— 1. Absolute Poss. Prons.— 2. 3. Used substan- 
 tively. — 4. 5fteirtc3a,letd)en, etc. — 5. ©fetdjen J2> 
 
 LESSON XXXVL— 1. Conjugation of &abcn.— 2. Idioms with 
 £a£cn. — 3. Position of the main verb in compound tenses. — 
 4. Verb with two objects connected by a conj. — 5. Two or more 
 nouns in sing. — ri. With collective nouns. — 7. With words as 
 titles, in sing. 12n 
 
Xll CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. 
 
 PAtfl 
 
 LESSON XX XVIL— Conjugation of SlieBen.— 1. Present Parti- 
 ciple.— 2. 3. Perfect Parti cip.e. — 4. Inflection of the Participles. — 
 
 5. Preamt, sing. — 6. Plur. — 7. Imperfect, sing. — 8. Plur. — 9. Per- 
 fect an 1 Pluperfect— 10. Future.— 11. 12. Orthographic and 
 euphonic changes. — 13. Imperative 129 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII.— Use of the Tenses.— 1. Present.— 2.'lmpcr> 
 feet.— 3. Perfect. — 4. Future Tenses. — 5. 6. Imperative. £>u and 
 3ifr, @te« — 7. Verb repeated or wholly omitted 134 
 
 LESSON XXXIX.— 1. Relative Prons.— 2. Decl. of the relative 
 bcr. — 3. Use of gen. — 4. 2BclcI)cr, t, t§, used in the sense of some, 
 any. — 5. Construction of sentences with rel. Prons. — 6. Words 
 requiring the same construction. Principal and Subordinate 
 Sentences. — 7. Relative clause and principal sentence. Exam- 
 ples of ] 38 
 
 LESSON XL.— 1. SEBer and 2Ba3 as relative.— 2. SSer for Scmanb.— 
 3. Use of ©a3. — 4. Pronominal Adverbs. — 5. Agreement of the 
 Verb with relative. — 6. Position and omission of relative. — 
 7. Relative repeated. — 8. Omission of Copula 142 
 
 LESSON LXL— 1. Determinative Pronouns.— 2, ©erjenige.— 3. Dcr 
 for £>erjemge. — 4. ;Derfel6e. — 5. (Seller, followed by a relative.— 
 
 6. Followed by t»ie. — 7. Omitted. — 8. Used with indef. art.— 
 
 9. Used as a substitute for a demonst. or a pers. Pron 145 
 
 LESSON XLIL— 1. Def. art.— 2. Art. with kibe, tyll, % foW&er, 
 
 tine and ju. — 3. Indef. art 149 
 
 WESSON XLIIL— 1. Omission of art.— 2. 9?ad) £aufc, etc.— 3. Omis- 
 sion or retention of art. — 4. Before the substantively used in- 
 Cnitive. — 5. Omission formerly more common. — 6. With ju be- 
 fore the dat ] 53 
 
 LESSON XLIV. — 1. Demonstrative Pronouns. — 2. Demonstiat. 
 2)er with noun.— 3. Rendered by pers. pron. — 4. Used before 
 the gen. — 5. £)cffen, £>ercn. — 6. ©eg in compounds. — 7. !Dtcfe3 
 
 and t»eld>e3 with the verb ©ein. — 8. Sfcen 156 
 
 LESSON XLV. — 1. Auxiliaries of mode. — 2. Conjugation of the 
 mode auxiliaries. — 3. Formation of Plur. — 4. Surfert. — 5. $t'6n* 
 nen.— 6. ilmfytn with JTbnnen.— 7. Cftogen.— 8. SP^iiffen. — 9. ©oflen.— 
 
 10. SMcn.— 11. £a|fen.— 12. Conjugation of.— Id. Form of Per- 
 fect an I Pluperfect. — 14. Position of infinitive form of the Par- 
 ticiple. — 15. Omission of main verb 16i 
 
 LESSON XL VI. — 1, Conjuration of ©etn. — 2. Idioms with <2>cttt. — 
 
 3. Conjugation of SBerbetU — 4. SBerbett as an independent verb. . 107 
 LESSON XLV1L— 1. "Irregular" Verbs.— 2. Form of infinitive.— 
 
CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. yill 
 
 PXQa 
 
 & 4. 5. Formation of Imperfect Tense and Perfect Participle. — • 
 6. Irregular in Present tense. — 7. Formation of second and third 
 persona 172 
 
 LESSON XLVIIJ. — Use of the auxiliaries $afcert and Sera. — 1. £a= 
 ben. — 2. Sent with what verbs used. — 3. £al>cn or Sctn 179 
 
 LESSON XLIX. — 1. Infinitive without u;. — 2. <S$fijtyett with fat;* 
 rcrt, fiifjrett, retten and ge!jen. — Infinitive as the Subject or 06/Vcif of 
 a veih. — 4. As a Vow/?. — 5. After Sfajlatt, Dtuie and lint. — 6. Used 
 passively. — 7. %Q'i\f en followed by an infinitive 1 82 
 
 LESSON L. — Participles and Imperative. — 1. Present participle 
 used attributively and predicativch/. — 2. Perfect participle. — - 
 3. Perfect participle for Imperative. — 4. Future participle. — 
 
 5. Imperative. — 6. 2>ahtrd), bap 185 
 
 LESSON LI. — 1. Compound verbs separable. — 2. 3. 4. Position of 
 
 the particle. — 5. Prefixel to a verb not accented on the first 
 
 syllable. — G. Signification of. 188 
 
 LESSON LII. — Adverbs. — 1. <Da, etc., with verbs of rest. — 2. $er 
 and £>m compounded with other words. — 3. Separated from 
 tvc. — 4. Rendered by a Preposition. — 5. Formation of adverbs. — 
 
 6. Formed of various parts of speech 191 
 
 LESSON LIIL — Collocation of words. — 1. Words requiring the 
 
 verbs at the end of the sentence. — 2. Words followed by the 
 correlative jV. — 3. The correlative fo followed hy bod) or ben* 
 nodj. — 4. 9l£er ; etc. — 5. Inversion of subject and verb. — 6. Con- 
 junction omitted in translation. — 7. Position of Adverbs with 
 Adjs. — 8. With Verbs. — 9. Adverbs of time and manner 194 
 
 LESSON LIY. — Compound verbs inseparable. — 1. Unaccented 
 particles.— 2. 3. Unaccented or accented. — 4. Augment 199 
 
 LESSON LV. — Subjunctive. Conjugation of *3cin, £aften and 3Ber* 
 ben. — 1. Use of Subjunctive. — 2. Perfect and Pluperfect rendered 
 by Present and Perfect. — 3. Subjunctive for Imperative. — 4. 5. 
 Formation of Subjunctive of regular verbs. — 6. Of irregular verbs 201 
 
 LESSON LTI. — Conditional. Conjugation of ©ettt, ^x'izw and 2Ber* 
 ben. — 1. Use of Conditional. — 2. Imperfect and Pluperfect of Sub- 
 junctive substituted. — 3. a. b. c. d. Employment of Conditional 208 
 
 LESSON LYII. — 1. Impersonal Verbs. — 2. Omission of ec. — 
 3. X'dintten, bihifen. — 4. ©efcen used impersonally. — 5. $el)ten, etc. 
 — 6. Impersonal and reflexive 21 J 
 
 LESSON LVIII. — 1. Paradigm of a Passive verb. — 2. Formation of 
 Passive Verbs. — 3. Omission of 2Berben. — 4. Used impersonally 2H 
 
 LESSON LXIX.— 1. Proper and common Names. — 2. Date. — 
 3. Nouns of weight, &c. — 4. When the latter noun is qualified 
 by some other word. — 5. 2Jtaf«-— 6. (Sin tyaax. ....... 218 
 
XIV CONTENTS OF THE LESSONS. 
 
 PAQB 
 
 LESSON LX,— 1. Prepositions -with gen.— 2. £d'ng3 and 2ro£.— 
 
 3. giUhttg.— 4. £al&, \alUn or tyafber, uno,ead)tet and n>esett.— 5. Urn 
 totflen. — 6. £al&ett, etc., in compounds. — 7. Stnftatt. — 8. SSegen pre- 
 ceded by von 220 
 
 LESSON LXL— 1. Adjs. with gen.— 2. With ace— 3. SJoH.— 
 
 4. gvof).— 5. @d)itlbig.— 6. SBertf). — 7. Gen. used in denoting rela- 
 tion of magnitude. — 8. Used adverbially. — 9. Denoting posses- 
 sion. — 10. Gen. of Pers. prons. used partitively. — 11. Gen. used 
 partitively. — 12. As predicate after the verb ©ettt 224 
 
 LESSON LXII. — 1. Reflexive Verbs with gen. — 2. Impersonal 
 Verbs with gen. — 3. Transitive Verba with gen. — 4. Verbs fol- 
 lowed by prepositions. — 5. Verbs with gen. and ace. — G. 9Id)ten 
 and SBarten.— 7. barren. — 8. ©cbertfen. — 9. Sadjen, <Spotten and SBaltcn 228 
 
 LESSON LXIII. — 1. Adjs. with dat.— 2. Dat. substituted for a 
 poss. pron. — 3. Occasional use of the first and second persons 
 of prons. in dat. — 4. Dat. with kt, »ott and ju 234 
 
 LESSON LXIV.— 1. Verbs with dat— 2. Verbs governing dat. or 
 ace— 3. Soften 237 
 
 LESSON LXV.— Indefinite Numerals.— 1. Sfober.— 2. SBetbe.— 
 3. 33eik$. — 4. Stn>aa. — 5. (So etwaS.— 6. Srgettb. — 7.8. 9. Steland 
 SBemg.— 10. Superlative of SieL— 11. Wit, aU.— 12. Plur. of M. 241 
 
 LESSON LXVL— -Prepositions construed with dat.— 1. 2lu$.— 
 
 2. SfuHcr. — 3. Set. — 4. ©tttgegett. — 5. ©egeniikr. — 6. SD2 it. — 7. Sfltt 
 compounded with verbs.— 8. 9lad). — 9. Wad) after its object. — 
 10. Db.— 11. Sett.— 12. ©on.— 13. 3u.— 14. Qn preceded by auf 
 or nad). — 15. The dat. with ju in connection with SEerben. — 
 
 16. Idioms with ju and ttad) 245 
 
 LESSON LXVIL— Prepositions with ace— 1. £)ttrd) — 2. %\u. — 
 
 3. ©egen. — 4. Dfyne. — 5. Urn. — 6. Urn in compounds. — 7. Ace with 
 
 ttm rendered by our nom , 249 
 
 LESSON LX^III. — Prepositions governing dat. and ace — 1. Slit — 
 
 2. Idioms with am— 3. Sluf.— 4. Sn. — 5. Iteber. — 6. tluter.— 7. SJcr. 251 
 LESSON LXIX.— Adverbs and Conjunctions.— 1. 2t6er. — 2. §11* 
 letit.— 3. $1$.— 4. Stlfb.— 5. 2(ud).— 6. S3aib.— 7. SBtg. — 8. ©a.— 
 9. ©ajj.— 10. ©enn.— 11. £)od).— 12. g&cru— 13. (£§e.— 14. Srfi— 
 15. <£t»a.— 16. ©ar.— 17. ©era.— 18. ©tetd).— 19. Smmer.— 20. 3a. 
 —21. 3e.— 22. tfettt.— 23. 9?od).— 24. 9ran.— 25. 9rar.— 26. <Sd)on.— 
 27. ©o.— 28. ©onft. — 29. Unb.— 30. S3tcHeid)t.— 31. 2Bte.— 32. 3H3 
 tine. — 33. SEBte after an adjective in the comparative. — 34. SBo^I. 
 
 — 35. 2Bofyt denoting a supposition or probability 254 
 
 LESSON LXX.— 1. Modes of Address, £err, grew and grd'utefo *>e 
 fore Proper names. — 2. Before words denoting relationship 260 
 
INDEX TO THE LESSONS/ 
 
 Lessons. 
 
 ffter, fonfeern, 21. 4. 69. 1. 
 
 Abbreviations 70. 
 
 Ace. 8. 1. With preps., 20. 2. 
 Ace. ordat. with preps., 20.3. 
 With verbs, 61. 2. Ace. or 
 gen. with adj., 61. 2. 3. With 
 verbs, 62.5. 
 
 Sldvcn and marten, 62. 6. 
 
 Adjs.,14. Attrib., 14.2. Old dec., 
 i4. 3. Agreement, 14. 4. Pre- 
 ceded by etwaS, &c, 14. 6. 
 Referring to noun under- 
 stood, 14. 7. New deel., 15. 1. 
 Denoting material, 15. 5. 
 Mixed deel., 16. 1. Connected 
 view, 17. Old deel. plnr., 25-3. 
 New deel. plur., 30. 1. Mixed 
 deel. plur., 31. 9. Comparison 
 of, 32. Compar., 32. 1. Su- 
 perl., 32. 2. Irregul. comp., 
 32. 4. Superlative after am, 
 32. 6. Superl. suffixed to aft, 
 32. 7. Comp. by adverbs, 
 32. 8. Used substantively, 
 33. 1. Abstract, 33. 2. Formed 
 from countries, <fec, 33. 5. 
 From persons, 33. 6- Denot- 
 ing sect, 33. 7. Omission of 
 infl. endings, 34. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 
 Used abverbially, 34. 7. Re- 
 quiring gen., 61. 1. Ace, 
 61. 2. Dat., 63.1 
 
 Adverbs, pronominal, 2S. 6. 
 Formation of adverbs, 34. 8. 
 9. 52. 5. 6. Nouns used as, 61. 8. 
 
 5nictn, 69.2. 
 
 Sifter, prefixed to superlatives, 32. 7. 
 
 2113, 69. 3. Omission after fo, 69. 3. 
 note. 
 
 813 »ie, 69. 32. 
 
 liESfiOtTd 
 
 STIfb, 69.4 
 
 2(m, with the superlative, . . .32. 6. 
 
 3tn, 68. 1. Idioms with 68. 2. 
 
 Slnfrcr, bet cmbevc, 65. 1. 
 
 Slnbcrd, 65. 1.6. 
 
 Stnflatt, before infinitive, . . . .49. 5. 
 
 Slntfatt or ft.m, 60. 7. 
 
 Apposition, rule for, 12. 6. 
 
 Arts., deel. of, 8. 4. 12. 4. Fern., 
 23. 1. Plur., 25. 1. Contract- 
 ed with preps., 20. 4. Use 
 of, 42. Omission of, 43. 
 
 Attributive adjective, 14. 1. 
 
 Stud), 69. 5. 2(u.l) mdn,- and) few, 
 <fce, after a negation, 21. 8. 
 
 STuf, 68.3. 
 
 90l3, 66. 1. 
 
 Slider, 66.2. 
 
 Auxiliary verbs, 45. 46. Use of 
 the auxiliaries ipbca and fe Lit, 48. 
 
 Salt), 69. 6. 
 
 SBeftnben, 29. 10. 
 
 SBc&alten, 62. 1. obs. 
 
 33ct, 66.3. 
 
 Sctbe, 65. 2. 
 
 SSetbeS, 65. 3. 
 
 SMd, 69.7. 
 
 (Cardinal numbers, § 44.) 
 
 Cases, 8. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 
 
 £l)en, diminutives in, 24. 1. Re- 
 presented by prons. masc. 
 or fern., 28. 1, 
 
 Collocation of words, 53. 
 
 Comparison of adjs.,32. Comps. 
 and sups., deel. of, 32. 5. Ir- 
 reg. forms of, 32. 4 
 
 Composing German, plan of, 25 
 
 Compound adjectives, 24. 8 
 
 Compound nouns, formation 
 of, 24. 4. Gender of, 24. 11 
 
 * See Contents of Lessons, p. ix ; also Genera Index, p. 518. 
 
XVI 
 
 INDEX TO THE LESSONS. 
 
 Lessons. 
 
 Compound verl s, separable, 51. 
 Inseparable, 54. 
 
 Conditional mo >d, 56. 
 
 Conjugation of verbs, reg., 3*7. 
 Irreg., 47. 
 
 Conjunctions, examples illus- 
 trating the use of, 69. 
 
 Connected view of article, &c, 30. 9. 
 
 Consonants, classification and 
 pronunciation of, 2. IV. V. 
 
 £>a, 52. 1, 69. 8. Compounded 
 with other words 52. 2. 
 
 SDa'fiir (nid)t3 bafitr fonnen),. . . .45. 6. 
 
 T>akf peculiar use of, 44. 7. 
 
 S>ap, 69.9. 
 
 Dat., after certain preps., 20. 1. 
 With adjs., 63. 1. Substi- 
 tuted for poss. pron., 63. 2. 
 Peculiar use of 63. 3. With 
 verbs 64. 
 
 Declension, of the arts., 8. 4. 
 12.4. 23. 1. 25. 1. Of nouns, 
 8. 2. Old form, 8. 3. 25. 9. 
 New form, 22. 30. 2. Of 
 adjs., 14. 15. 16. 23. 2. 3. 25. 
 2. 3. 30. 1. Of pei s. prons., 
 27. 1. Of comps. and su- 
 perls.. 32. 5. Of absolute 
 poss. prons., 35. Of adj., art., 
 noun, demonst. and poss. 
 prons., 30. 9. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns, . .10. 44. 
 
 2)cnn, 69. 10. 
 
 £)er, determinative, when ab- 
 solute, its form in the gen. 
 plur., 41. 3. -Relative, 39. 
 
 ©crjentge, 41. 1. 
 
 ©crfelbe, 41.4. 
 
 ©ef^alfe, 53.6. 
 
 ©efto,.^ 32. 10. 
 
 Determinative pronouns, ... . 41. 
 
 SMcfer and jener distinguished, 10. 1. 
 
 ©iefeS, bieS, peculiar use of, . .44. 7. 
 
 Diminutives, 24. 1. 2. Gend. of 
 prons. referring to, 28. 4. 
 
 Diphthongs, sounds of, 2. III. 
 
 £>lu1), 69. 11. 
 
 £>urd), 67. 1. 
 
 £>ihfen, remarks on, 45. 4. 
 
 Gben, 69. 12. Before demonst. 
 or determinative, 44. 8. 
 
 GfK, 69.13. 
 
 <£igen, 16.3. 
 
 Lessons. 
 
 (£tner, 18.7 
 
 Sin spctctr, ...59. 6. 
 
 (En, suffix, forming adjectives, 15. 5. 
 
 (Entqegen 66. 4. 
 
 (Snttang, CO. 3. 
 
 (Erfr, 69.14. 
 
 S3, peculiar use of, 28. 7. 8. 9. 10. 
 
 ©3 fei benn, ..69. 10. 
 
 <St»a, .69.15. 
 
 (EtroaS, 65.4. 
 
 gefclen, 57.5. 
 
 Femin. nouns, indeclinable in 
 sing 28.4. 
 
 Srau, grautcin, 70. 1. 2. 
 
 ftxtf, 61.4. 
 
 gitr, 67.2. 
 
 Future tenses, how formed, 37. 10. 
 Observations on the use of, 38. 4. 
 
 ©cmj unb gar, 19. 3. 
 
 ®ar, 19. 3. 69.16. 
 
 ©e, prefixed to the perfect 
 part., 37. 2. Inserted between 
 the prefix and the radical in 
 compound verbs separable, 
 51. 3. Excluded from the 
 perfect part, of compound 
 verbs inseparable, 54. 1. 
 
 ©eben, impersonally used,. . .57. 4. 
 
 ©egcn, 67.8. 
 
 ©egcnitber, 66. 5. 
 
 Gen., with preps., 60. "With 
 adjs., 61. Used adverbially, 
 61. 8. With reflexive verbs, 
 62.1. After the impersonal 
 e$ gclitjle?, Ac, 62. 2. With 
 transitive verbs, 62. 3 
 
 ©emtg, 53.7. 
 
 ©em, 69.17. 
 
 ©leid), 69.18. 
 
 $aben, conjugation of, 36. 1. 
 Idioms with, 36. 2. When 
 and how used as an auxili- 
 ary, 48. I. 3. 
 
 £atb, fyalben or fyalber, 60. 4. 
 
 £albeii, roegen and urn— widen 
 with the gen. of pers. prons., 60. 6. 
 
 $au$r n.xd) or JU, 43. 2. 
 
 ■t>ett3en, 49. 1. ohs. 
 
 £er and f)Ln, 52. 2. 3. 
 
 £err, 70. 1.2. 
 
 £tn, 52. 2.3. 
 
 £olcnIaffen, 49 6. 
 
 Smmer, 69.1ft 
 
 J 
 
INDEX TO THE LESSONS. 
 
 XV11 
 
 Lussoxs. 
 
 Iraper. mood, past part, in 
 place of, 50. 3. Observations 
 on the several uses of, ... .50. 5 
 
 Imperfect, how formed, 37. 7. 8. 
 Observations on the use of, 38. 2. 
 
 Impersonal verbs, 57. 
 
 Stw GS. 4. 
 
 Indefinite numerals, 65. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns, 18. 
 
 Indefinite pronoun man, . .19. 1. 2. 
 
 Indicative mood, forimper., 3S. 1. c. 
 
 Infinitive mood, use of, in place 
 of past part., 45. 13. With- 
 out \K, 49. 1. As a neuter 
 noun, 49, 4. Active form 
 used passively, 49. 6. An- 
 swering after bletbert, getyett, 
 <fcc, to our present part.,. .49. 1. 
 
 Interrogative conjugation,. . . C. 1. 
 
 Interrogative pronouns, 13. 
 
 Srgetib, G5. 6. 
 
 Irregular verbs 47. 
 
 3a, 39.20. 
 
 3c, 69. 21. Before compara- 
 tive 32. 10. 
 
 3eucrandDtcfcv, distinguished, 10. 1. 
 
 tfetn, G9, 22. 
 
 Reiner, 18.7. 
 
 $eine3 s o o :i betben, 65. 2. 
 
 5?cnncn, remarks on, 45. 5. 
 
 £aitg$, 60.2. 
 
 Sajfcn, remark on, 45. 11. 
 
 £ein, diminutives in, 24. 1. Rep- 
 resented by a pron. masc. 
 or fem 28. 4. 
 
 Sftan, its use, 19. 1. 2. 
 
 Win, 66.6. 
 
 2)iit, with verbs 66. 7. 
 
 Mixed declension of adjectives, 16. 
 
 5ftb$en, remarks on, 45 7 . 
 
 Moods, indicative, 37. Infini- 
 tive, 49. Subjunctive, 55. 
 Conditional, 58. Imperative, 50. 5. 
 
 SRiijffn, remark on, 45. 8. 
 
 9Jad), 66.8. 
 
 9hib, following the word it 
 governs, 63. 9. 16. 
 
 Negative conjugation, 21. 
 
 9Zi$ttt>a§r? 21.5. 
 
 9to$, 69. 23. 
 
 Nouns, deck of, 8. 2. Old form 
 of, 8. 4. New form of, 22. 
 Old iecl. plur., 25. 9. Irreg. 
 
 Lessons. 
 plur., 26. New deck plur., 
 30. 2. Fem. plur., 30. 3. Pro- 
 per names, deck of. 30. 4. 
 Foreign proper names, 30. 
 7. S. Irreg. deck of nouns, 31. 
 
 (Numbers, §44. § 45.) 
 
 9?1U1, 69.24. 
 
 9iur, 69.25. 
 
 Db, 66. 10. 
 
 Dlinc, 67. 4. Followed by the 
 infinitive, 49. 5. 
 
 (Ordinal numbers, § 45.) 
 
 Paradigm of fjaben, 36. 1. Of 
 lieben, 37. Of fcin, 46. 1. Of 
 rocrben, 46. 3. Of a passive 
 verb, 58. 1. 
 
 Participles, how formed, 37. 
 1. 2. Declined like adjs., 
 37. 4. Past part, for the im- 
 per., 50. 3. Future part.. . .50.4. 
 
 Particles, 51.54 
 
 Passive verb, mode of forming, 
 53. 2. Paradigm of, 58. 1. 
 Other methods expressing 
 passivity 19. 1. 29. 10. 
 
 Perfect tense, how formed, 37. 
 9. Observat. on the use of, 38. 3. 
 
 Pers. prons., deck of, 27. 1. 
 Second pers. sing., 27. 2. Se- 
 cond pers. plur., 27. 3. Third 
 pers. sing. 27. 4. Third pers. 
 plur. 27. 5. Observations on 
 the use of pers. prons, 28. 
 Used as reflexives, 29. 1. 
 Construed with tjalbcn, rue* 
 acn and uni — Yotfltn, 60. 6 
 
 Pluperf., how formed, 37. 9 
 
 Plurals, of art, and adj. prons., 
 25. L Of adjs., 25. 2. Old 
 deck, 25. 3. Nouns of old 
 deck, neut,, 25. 4. 5. Masc, 
 25. 6. 7. Fem., 25. 8. Irreg. 
 plur. of nouns, 26. New decl. 
 plur., of adjs., 30. 1. Of 
 nouns, 30. 2. 3. 
 
 Poss. prons., 12. 2. "When ab- 
 solute 35. 
 
 Prefixes of verbs, compound 
 sep., 51. Insep. 51-. 1. Sep. 
 and insep 1 4 & 
 
 Preps., position of, 11. 5. With 
 dat., 20. 1. With ace, 20. 2. 
 With dat. or ppc. 20. 3. With 
 
XV111 
 
 INDEX TO THE LESSONS. 
 
 Lessons, 
 gen., GO. Examples of the 
 use of, 66. G7. G8. 
 
 Prons., poss., 12. 2. Absolute 
 poss, 35. Interrog., 13. In- 
 def., 18. Pers., 27. 28. Reflex, 
 and recip., 29. Rel., 39. 40. 
 Determin. 41. Demonst. . . 44. 
 
 Proper names, decl. of, 30. 4. 
 Of countries, Ac, 30. 8. 
 
 Quantity, weight, &c, nouns 
 denoting, 59. 3. 
 
 mitfybtn, 36.2. 
 
 Reciprocal pronouns, 29. 6. 
 
 Reflexive pronouns, 29. 1. 
 
 Reflexive verbs, 29. 9. Equiv- 
 alent to intransitives or 
 passives, 29. 10. 
 
 9tetl)e, 46. 2. 
 
 Relat. prons., 39. 40. Never 
 omitted 40. 7. 
 
 ©d)on, 69. 26. 
 
 ©dnttb fein, 46.2. 
 
 ©d)utDu\ G1.5. 
 
 ©eht, paradigm of, 46. 1. When 
 and how used as auxiliary, 48. 
 
 (Sett, 66. 11. 
 
 ©clbft or fel&er, 29. 3. 4. 
 
 ©clbft, before a noun, 29. 5. 
 
 ©0, 69.27. 
 
 ©o StlwaS, 65.5. 
 
 ©oldjer, 41. 5. 
 
 ©ollen, remarks on, 45. 9. As 
 imper., 50. 5. obs. 
 
 Some, 39. 4. 
 
 ©onft, 69. 28. 
 
 ©patfrett getjen, fafyren, <fec.,. . .49. 2. 
 
 Subjunctive mood, observa- 
 tions on the several uses of, 55. 
 
 Tenses, use of, present, 38. 1. 
 Imperfect, 38. 2. Perfect, 
 38. 3. Futures, 38. 4. 
 
 Srofr GO. 2 
 
 tlel>er, 68.5. 
 
 UI)r, 65.7. 
 
 Urn, 67.5. 
 
 Urn, in compounds, 67. 6. 
 
 Lesson* 
 
 Urn, ace. with, 67. 7. 
 
 II m — widen, , 60. 5. 
 
 Umfytn, with fonnen, 45. 6. 
 
 Umlauts, sounds of, 2. II. 
 
 Unb, 69. 29. 
 
 Unrest fyaben, 36. 2 
 
 Hitter, 68. 6. 
 
 Unter titer 2iugert, 68. 6. 
 
 Verbs, reflex., 29. 9. 10. Aux., 
 45. Irreg., 47. Compound, 
 sep., 51. Insep., 54. Impers., 
 57. Passive, 58. 
 
 SBtet, when declined, . . .65. 7. 8. 9. 
 
 SHelletdjt, 69. 30. 
 
 SJofl, 61.3. 
 
 ©on, 66. 12. With the dative, 
 instead of the genitive, ... 11. 4. 
 
 SSor, 68.7. 
 
 Vowels, classification and pro- 
 nunciation of, 2. 1. 
 
 2BctS, interrog., 13. Rel., ... 40. 
 
 2Ba3, for roarum, 13. 6. 
 
 2Ba3 fur etn, 13. 
 
 SBcgcrt, ...60. 4. 6. 
 
 SBcldjer, interrog., 13. Rel., . . 39. 
 
 2Bemg, when declined,. .65. 7. 8. 9. 
 
 2Ber, interrog., 13. Rel 40. 
 
 SBerben, paradigm of, 46. 3. As 
 an independent verb, 46. 4. 
 With the dat., 46. 4. obs. 
 
 Bertl), 61. 6. 
 
 SBte, 69. 31. 33. SBte inel,. . .65. 7. 
 
 2Ste beftnben ©te ftd) ? 29. 10. 
 
 SBtffcn, before an infinitive, 49. 7. 
 
 2Bo, compounded with other 
 words, 52. 
 
 2Bof)I, 69.34 
 
 S3 o 1)1, denoting doubt, suppo- 
 sition, <fec, 69. 35. 
 
 Swollen, remarks on, 45. 10 
 
 3u, 66. 1 3. Between the parts 
 of a compound verb 51. 3. 
 
 3u, 66. 13. It 15. 16. 
 
 Sufotge, 60 2 
 
 Bu ©runbe ge^en, rtdjten, 43. 6 
 
 Bit £aufe, 43.2 
 
WOODBUBF'S NEW METHOD 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 
 
 
 Cation I. 
 
 
 
 
 THE LETTERS. 
 
 
 German Alphabet. 
 
 
 Seutfdjea SUpljaoei 
 
 German. 
 
 
 English Pronunciation, 
 
 
 Examples. 
 
 51 a 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 ah 
 
 
 mt. 
 
 S3 & 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 bay 
 
 
 33cten. 
 
 G c 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 tsay 
 
 
 (Seter. 
 
 D b 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 day 
 
 
 £cl)nen. 
 
 e e 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 e (as in 
 
 prey) 
 
 dbtiu 
 
 B f 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 eff 
 
 
 Rett. 
 
 © 9 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 m 
 
 
 (Men. 
 
 * * 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 hah 
 
 
 £a|m 
 
 3* i 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 i (as in 
 
 pique) 
 
 3t)nen. 
 
 3* i 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 yote 
 
 
 3d*. 
 
 fl t 
 
 
 
 k 
 
 kah 
 
 
 Jtaty. 
 
 Z I 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ell 
 
 
 (SCle. 
 
 m m 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 emm 
 
 
 6mpor\ 
 
 ft n 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 enn 
 
 
 gnOe. 
 
 D o 
 
 
 
 
 
 oh 
 
 
 Dt)r. 
 
 » » 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 pay 
 
 
 Veto, 
 
 D q 
 
 
 
 q 
 
 koo 
 
 
 Dual, 
 
 31 r 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 err (as in error) 
 
 grfi. 
 
 e f« 
 
 (21. 
 
 
 s 
 
 ess 
 
 
 6 [fen* 
 
 s t 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 tay 
 
 
 i|ee. 
 
 U u 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 o (as in 
 
 do) 
 
 lifer. 
 
 53 » 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 fow (as in fowl) 
 
 SSolf. 
 
 2Q to 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 vay 
 
 
 SBefen. 
 
 3e t 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 ix 
 
 
 Sir. 
 
 8 9 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 ipsilon 
 
 
 ©ojlem\ 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 z 
 
 tset 
 
 
 3ettc(. 
 
 * S before a consonant answers to J, as in ffnj before a vovrel if 
 answers to Y, as in 3a§r. 
 
20 SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. 
 
 ch, d) = tsay-hah; ck, cf=tsay-kah ; sch, fd)=es-tsay-hah, 
 f[=es-es; st, ft=es-tay; sz, § = es-tset ; tz, jp^tay-tset. 
 
 LESSON II. faction II. 
 
 SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 I. Vowels. 
 
 ^. 21, a sounds like a in ah, marl : 2Hm, @aal, 23Iath 
 
 2. ®, e sounds like e in tete, very : (Ernft, jpeer, iperr. 
 
 3. 3; i sounds like i in pique, ill: 3f) r , ^3^ $ittb« 
 
 4. D, o sounds like o, oo, in no, door: Dl)r, Sftonfc, Soot. 
 
 5. U, u sounds like o, oo, in do, moor : Ufyr, £unS, Ufer. 
 
 6. §}, ^ sounds like i in 3fyr, 23ifr, Sfop, @ty£/ ©tynip. 
 
 A vowel when doubled, or followed by fc in the same syllable, is 
 thereby lengthened; preceding a double consunant it is shortened. 
 
 "Words in this and the following lessons, unless otherwise noted, 
 take the primary accent on the first syllable. 
 
 II. Umlauts. 
 
 The Umlauts are produced by a union of e with a, p, it, respectively, 
 as in 9lefyre or SUfyxz, Del or Dl, ueber or itber. Except when they are 
 capitals, however, the e is more commonly expressed by two dots; 
 thus, a, 6, ii, (instead of cte, oe, ue). 
 
 1. 2le, a sounds nearly like e in Slepfel, ©artner, fpat 
 
 2. De, b sounds as heard in Del, $)cfrel, d)btfye. 
 
 3. Uc, ii sounds as heard in ttefcel, flitter, ©lit. 
 
 For 5 and it we have in English no corresponding sounds. Oel 
 and <Sitb, for example, might be understood if pronounced ail ana 
 seed; 1 utthis is by no means the correct pronunciation. The French eu 
 in pew, answers most nearly, perhaps, to o; andw in the word vu to ii, 
 
 III. Diphthongs. 
 
 h 2U, at (or at)) sounds like ay in aye : 
 
 2. 2tu, ail sounds like ou in flour 
 
 3. (Si, ei (or ety) sounds like i in die: 
 
 4. (Su, eu sounds nearly like oi in oil : 
 
 5. %tu, an sounds nearly like eu in : 
 
 M, 
 
 9Rat. 
 
 $CLU$ f 
 
 maut. 
 
 Seln, 
 
 $ein. 
 
 (Elite, 
 
 £eu. 
 
 ^fiufer, Slcugclrr 
 
SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 21 
 
 IV. Consonants. 
 
 1 23, t, f, \, f, I, m, rt, p, q, r, a, p^, ff and ft sound like b, d. 
 
 f, h, k, ], m,n, p, q, x, ck, ph, ss and st. 
 
 2. (S, c before c (or a), i and 9 in the same syllable ^unds 
 
 like 3 (fc) ; otherwise like ! : (Seter, cknf, (Sepal', 
 
 3. ©, a, at the beginning of a syllable sounds like y in gun. 
 
 After n, in the same syllable, it sounds like our g hard 
 in like position : Slngjt, Sterna,, gar. Otherwise its sound 
 usually approaches that of ct): Sag, regnen, $!agb. 
 
 4. £>, $ in the midst or at the end of a syllable ii silent, but 
 
 serves to lengthen its vowel : 9JM)r, 2ot)n, Z^vin, •D'httlj* 
 
 5. 3, J sounds like y consonant : Saljr, 3ut>e, 3aratar, 3uM. 
 
 6. 3t, r is uttered with a trill or vibration of the tongue, and 
 
 with greater stress than our r : 9totjr, 53rot>. 
 
 7. @, f at the beginning of a syllable followed by a vowel, 
 
 has a sound between that of z and s: <Sol)tt, ftnfc* Other- 
 wise it sounds like s: ©a*, tt>a3. At the end of a word 
 
 g, instead of f, is employed. 
 
 8. Z, t sounds like t in test: £crt, 2tyt. Where in English t 
 
 sounds like sh, t has the sound of 3 (ts) : (Station, station. 
 
 9. 23, » sounds like / in fit: Setter. In foreign words & sounds 
 
 like to 1 Sene'fctg, 5$erfai'tfe£. 
 
 10. 2£, it) has a sound between that of w and v: 2Mt, SBaffer* 
 
 After a consonant, in the same syllable, it sounds like w : 
 (Setter, groet, 
 
 11. 3, 3 sounds like ts: 3^1, 3afim, 3ittrt, $el3, Simmer. 
 
 V Compound Consonants. 
 
 1. (Ef), d) in primitive words, followed by 3, sounds like Jci 
 £acc;3, ©acfc^. Otherwise d) has its guttural sound : £udj 
 nad>, tyod}.* In foreign words d) retains its original sound: 
 £§or, dormant'. 
 
 * To aid in producing this sound take, for experiment, the above 
 -word bed) : pronounce fyo precisely like our word ho! cbserring only 
 to give as full and distinct a breathing at the close as at the beginning ; 
 thus, hoh=^Q&j. When not preceded by a, 0, or u, however, a slight 
 hissing sound of s or sh naturally attaches to the d); id), red)t, reid). 
 
22 VOWELS AND CONSOS A.NTS. 
 
 2. <5$, fdj sounds like sh : (Sdjttur, @$tft>, ©^iKcr, ©djule. 
 
 3. $ (though compounded of f and 3) sounds like ([, aud occurs 
 
 only at the end of a syllable : gu§, nafj, fyajjlid). 
 
 4. J (compounded of t and 3) sounds like 3 and like jj, is used 
 
 only at the end of a syllable : $la|3, jhtjjen, nit^tid^. 
 
 VI. Accent, 
 
 1 In words compounded with a separable particle (§ 90 and 
 
 91), as also, with the prefix im, the primary accent is on 
 the first syllable : ah "fallen, a&'gefatten, un'gefatlig, Un'fatL 
 
 2 (E i final, and also { r (or ier), in verbs ending in ir e n (or 
 
 tcrcn), take the accent : (Bd)rei6eret', poli'ren, rifft'mu 
 
 3, Foreign words that have dropped the original endings, 
 
 usually take the accent on the last syllable : a. Wlmixal', 
 (EontrajV. Those that have taken German endings are gen- 
 erally accented on the penult: h. Srctnjo'ftfd), 5lpott)e'fcr, 
 Those that remain unchanged in form, often retain the 
 original accent: c. Solle'gtum, Sftmtfte'rium. 
 
 4. Nearly all words, except those above noted, are accented on 
 
 the radical or primitive syllable, thus corresponding to our 
 words of Anglo-Saxon origin : $Btrtt>'mut)le, greunfc'fdjflft, 
 ubmrad/jm, untcrnet/men, serftel/cn, le'bcn. Scbcn'ruj is 
 one of the very few exceptions to this latter rule. 
 
 In German as in English, the accent is often varied for the sake of 
 contrast or emphasis: Gr i|t rtidjt b e'fefyrt, fonbern »er'fcfyrr, he is not 
 converted, but per' verted. 
 
 Exercise 1 Stttfgct&e 1. 
 
 Vowels, Umlauts, Diphthongs. 
 
 (a) STCter, Sfol, 9u)Ie. (e) <£rbe, fic$ro, mtfr, 2tteer, itctr. (t, 9) 3fl, 
 
 tyn, <3tyl, (Symbol'. (0) D$r, £ot>3, bort. (u) ttrtter, 3M;nu (at, tt) 
 
 Sttain, mem. (aw) gaujh (an, cu) £aitte, $reunb, tyeute. (a'/ e) Slebrcn, 
 
 geber, ©effel. (3) SDefen, $oren. (it) liber, 3Ru§le. 
 
 Exercise 2. 2tuf$abe 2* 
 
 Consonants and Double Consonants. 
 
 (c) Gabett', Gafar, Giber, Gtaffc, (Section'. (9) ©abet, Qe^en, ®ift, 
 ©onbel, ritf)ig, Slina.. (j) 3a. (r) Keif, rar. (f, e) ©u{j, SRetS. (t) 
 Xitel, Nation'. (to) Safe, toon, (ro) SBort, 2Bmb, ©cfyroert. ($) Binf, 
 £01*. ($) gla#«, ttadjfen, GtyaoS, £id)t, G^auffee'. (fc$) ©$aft, tfieifek 
 <fr f) 9teiS, meffeit. (ft, 5) fllofe, furs. 
 

 k L m n o / p /(j r ■ s ■ t 
 
 ^ * /X //9 ^/ h l t/J k l m n 
 o //p /q r / s g t u v w 
 
 
 
 ,*/£' C_^s^^"^-^-* C^e^rfez^- '~&>7r^r~&ht^A~- 
 
 
 'j-^-r- cz>c--7Z''yo?-zrz--\ 
 
 
 ^^t^^^W^ C^vyr^?/ A^Z~7t^y-7fr£/ 
 
 n' r^i^>'-re 
 
 '/*-* ll^Z--^- 
 
 
 v-nC-tk z-it^/ t^f^t^-i 
 
 ^t-^-t-v-n^&t-n^? 
 
 /?/ 
 
 
FORMS OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. ETC. 
 
 23 
 
 LESSON IV. Section IV. 
 
 FORMS OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. In German the definite article has, in the nominative 
 singular, a distinct form for each gender : 
 
 Masculine, ber , the; feminine, tie, the; neuter, bad, the. 
 
 2 £afrert, to have, in the present tense singular. 
 
 Affirmatively. 
 
 1st. prs. id) fyafre, I have; 
 2d. prs. <8ie ftafren, you have; 
 3a?. prs. cr I) at, he has; 
 
 33ctfptcf e. 
 
 £a£en <Sle bad Ceber? 
 
 Sftetn, id) fyabe bad 33rob« 
 
 £atbcr ©lafet bad ©lad? 
 
 3a, cr §at bad ©lad unb bad ©otb. 
 
 Interrogatively. 
 
 $a*e id)? have I ] 
 fyafrcn Sic? have you] 
 fyat cr ? has he ? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Have you the leather ? 
 
 Ko, I have the bread. 
 
 Has the glazier the glass? 
 
 Yes, he has the glass and the gold, 
 
 VOCABULARY TO TnE EXERCISES. 
 
 ( 
 
 1)ai> SBrcb, the hread; 
 ©ad, the* n . 
 2>er, the \ seel )> 
 
 Gr, he; 
 
 (Ed, it; 
 S)ad ©lad, the glass; 
 Iba* ©olb, the gold; 
 
 £abert, to have (see 2); 
 
 3d), I ; 
 
 3a, yes ; 
 
 Exercise 4. 
 
 QaZ £cbcr, the leather. 
 
 9?etn, no; 
 
 Cbcr, or; 
 "Der ©attler, the saddler, 
 Xtx 8d)mtcb, the smith; 
 
 <5tc, you; 
 2)cd<3tlber, the silver; 
 
 Unb, and; 
 
 *&*$, what; 
 
 SSer. who. 
 
 Slufga&e 4. 
 
 1. SDa^ Men etc ? * 2. 3$ 5«^e 35rot.* 3. 2Ba$ $at bet 
 ©attfer ? ■ 4. gr r-at tag ©las. 5. SBag §afce t$ ? 6. eie f;a&en 
 ©ofo. 7. &afceit ©ie tas ©lag? 8. Stein, id) Mec bag Serer. 
 9. £at er bag ©titer? 10. 9iein, er ^at tas ©olD. 11. £abe 
 icb bag 23rot ? 12. 3a, Sic f)a£cn eg. 13. ©cr $at bag Sctcr? 
 14. £er (Battler $at eg. 15. ©er $at bag ©ttfcer? 16. £cr 
 ©chnict fcat eg. IT. £at rer ©attler tag ©lag ot>er bag ©ofo? 
 18. (Er fyat bag ©oil) una tag ©ttfrer. 
 
 * For use of capitals in writing German, see p. 207, note. Writing in the Gei- 
 an character (L. III.) will soon render it familiar, and at the same time be welJ 
 tapted to fix in the memory the forms and meanings of the words. 
 
24 conjugation of ©tngen and SBartert. 
 
 Exercise 5. 21 uf gate 5. 
 
 1. Have you the bread ? 2. Yes, I have it. 3. Has he the 
 glass ? 4. No, he has the bread. 5. Who has the bread ? 6. 
 I have it. 7. Have I the glass or the gold ? 8. You have the 
 glass and the gold. 9. Has the saddler the bread or the leather? 
 ] 0. He has the bread and the leather. 1 1. What has the smith ? 
 12. He has the gold and the glass. 13. What has the saddler ) 
 ] i. He has the gold. 15. Who has the silver? 16. I have it. 
 17. Have you the gold? 18. No, the saddler has it. 
 
 LESSON V. lection V. 
 
 ©trig en and 28 art en in the present tense singular. 
 
 1st prs. id) ftng-e, I sing; 
 2a 7 . prs. (Sic fing-cn, you sing ; 
 Zd. prs. cr fmg-t, he sings; 
 
 id) mart-e, I wait ; 
 @ie ttart-en, you wait ; 
 cr tuart-ct, he waits. 
 
 1. Thus the present tense singular is indicated by c for the 
 first person, en for the second, and t (or et*) for the third: that 
 part preceding these endings being the root. 
 
 2. For the three forms common in English, the German has 
 but one: thus, id) fmgc, I sing, I do sing, I am singing. 
 
 3. Like ftngen and ftartcn are conjugated in the same tense 
 and number, unless otherwise designated, the verbs in this 
 and subsequent exercises. 
 
 33etfptele. Examples. 
 
 T^er SDfamt ftngt ba3 £teb. The man is singing the song. 
 
 3u) Ijore roaS <3te fageit. I hear what you are saying. 
 
 1)a3 .ft tub jpirft imb fingt. The child is playing and singing. 
 
 ©ie lioren ttaS id) [age. You hear what I say. 
 
 3d) fvuife bad 3)a£ter'. I am buying the paper. 
 
 £>er ^iillcr trtnft $affee imb £ljee. The miller drinks coffee and tea. 
 
 * "When the root ends in b or t, the 3d. person adds e to the t; thus, 
 roart-etr instead of toart-t; e is also often added or omitted according 
 to the choice of different -writers. 
 
 
FORMS OF THE ARTICLE, CONJUGATION OF §a()CU, ETC. 25 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 T>a% 93uc6, the book; 
 T>er gftfty, the fish; 
 
 SUegeiti (see 3.) to fly: 
 !£a3 $lei[d), the meat; 
 £er glcif^cr» the butcher; 
 
 £oren, to hear; 
 
 Jkufen, to buy; 
 £>er Rod), the cook; 
 £>a$ $orn, the grain; 
 ©a$ 2ttc$I, the flour; 
 
 Dcr Sftuffer, the miller; 
 
 ©agctt, to say ; 
 
 ©t^retfeett, to write; 
 £>er ©cfyitlcr, the scholar ; 
 2)er <5d)tt>an, the swan; 
 
 ©cfyunmmen, to swim: 
 
 ©tnant, to sing ; 
 
 Srtnfen, to drink ; 
 
 SBarten, to wait; 
 2)a3 Safer, the water. 
 
 Exercise 6. 2lufga&e 6. 
 
 1 . £er <&MUx fauffc bag 23ud). 2. £cr SO^utfcr lauft bag $om. 
 3, 2Ber lauft bag 33rob? 4. £)er ^od) lauft bag Sr'ob uub bag 
 $leifd). 5. 3$ ffin wag @te fageu. 6. 3d) trinfe 333a|fer. 1. £er 
 gifd) fdjmtmmt, ber ©djrnan fitegt. 8. Tcr ©filter fdjrctfct mag 
 er f)ort. 9. @r fyort mag @te fageu uub mag tdj fage* 10. 3d) 
 ^ijre mz ber Wilder fagt. 11* SBer martet? 12. 3^ marte. 
 13. $8a$ fagt ber @d)mteb? 14. SBer ftngt? 15. £er glrtf^et 
 flngt uub ftrfntt. 16. SSer lauft bag glcl$? IT. £er Gutter 
 ober ber ©cfymieb lauft eg. 18. @te laufcu 23rob, er lauft gleifd), 
 uub id) laufe 37?eX)L 
 
 Exercise T. Slufgafce T* 
 
 1. The miller is writing. 2. Who is buying the meat? 3. 
 The cook is buying it. 4. I hear what you say. 5. The miller 
 buys the grain and the cook buys the flour. G. The butcher 
 is singing. T. Who is singing'? 8. Who sings ? 9. The cook 
 is singing. 10. The saddler is buying the book. 11. Who 
 buys bread? 12. The miller is drinking water. 13. The fish 
 swims, the swan flies and swims. 14, The butcher buys flour, 
 you buy meat, and I buy bread. 15. Who hears what I say? 
 16. 1 hear what you say. IT. You hear what he says. 18. 
 Who is buying meat ? 19. The saddler or the smith is buy- 
 ing it. 
 
26 
 
 INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 Section VI. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 L German verbs in the present and imperfect, when used 
 interrogatively, precede the subject, like have and be in English • 
 2Ba3 tyafcert <Sie ? What have you ? 
 
 SBaS fagett <Stc ? What do you say? (What say you?) 
 
 SBotjier? Where is he? 
 
 SBc ttx^ttt er? Where does he live ? (Where lives he?) 
 
 2. PRESENT TENSE SINGULAR OF THE IRREGULAR VERB S3 i f f t tt 
 
 Interrogatively, 
 rctify id) ? do I know 1 
 ttnjjett <8ie ? do you know ? 
 iueifj er ? does he know *? 
 
 t$ weifi, I know ; 
 ©ie nuffen, you know ; 
 er wetjjj, he knows ; 
 
 8eifoielc, 
 
 SfBtffen <3te m$ t<$ felje ? 
 ©cljj ber Sftann roo <3ie wofnen? 
 ©ort fte$t ber Sciger ; screen 
 i»ag er fagt ? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Do you know what I see? 
 Does the man know where you 1' re? 
 Yonder stands the hunter, do you 
 understand what he says ? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 ©eT SMcfer, the baker; 
 ©er Skuer, the peasant; 
 
 SMen, see p. 414. 
 ©a$ (Stfcrt, the iron ; 
 ©a3©elb, the money; 
 ©er ®olbfd)mieb, the goldsmith ; 
 
 Imminent, to hammer; 
 
 •Speulett, to howl; 
 ©er £>unb, the dog; 
 ©er 3ager, the hunter; 
 
 ©aS £)I (or Del, L. 2. II. 2.) the oil, 
 
 ©a3 9)apter', the paper; 
 ©a3$ulr, the desk; 
 2)aS ©aij, the salt ; 
 
 ©erfau'fen, to sell (L. 2. VI. 4); 
 
 SJerfie'tyert, to understand; 
 
 SB aim, when; 
 
 SBarum', why; 
 
 2Bc, where ; 
 ©er SBoIf, the wolf. 
 
 Exercise 8. StufgaBe 8. 
 
 1 . 2Bag ^akn @ie ? 2. 2Bag laufen ©ie ? 3. £at ber £od) 
 Das papier ? 4. flauft ber $c$ bag Srob? 5. SBag t)ar ber 
 33adfer, unb wag fauft er ? 6. S3ag lauft ber Sader, unb wag »er* 
 fauft er? ?♦ SBarum aerfauft ber ©otbfd)mieb bag (Sifter? 8. 
 £ auft ber $od) bag Del tmb bag ©ala ? 9. $3ann imb too ftngt ber 
 33auer? 10. SCag ftngt ber 3ager? 11. tfauft ter ©<$itfer bag 
 SPuIt ? 12. $erftel)t ber 23auer toat id) fage ? 13. SBarum tjam* 
 tnert ber ©cfymieb bag Stfen ? 14. §at Ocr battler t ag Sifen ? 15. 
 
GENDER OF NOUNS. 27 
 
 SDarum kilt ter fcimb ? 1 6. SCarum f)eutt fcer 2Mf ? it. SBeig 
 fcer ©duilcr roarum tdj tx»arte? 18, £ort fte^t bcr Sauer, serfte* 
 ^en ©ic »a3 er fagt? 
 
 Exercise 9. Slttfgafce 9- 
 
 1. What has the baker? 2. What does the baker buy ? 3. 
 What does the baker sell ? 4. Is the dog barking 1 ? 5. Why- 
 is he barking ? 6. Where does he stand, and what does he 
 understand ? 7. Why is the goldsmith waiting ? 8. Does the 
 peasant buy the grain % 9. When does the smith hammer the 
 iron ? 10. Where does the scholar sell the desk ? 11. Does 
 the goldsmith hammer the gold? 12. Where does the cook 
 buy the salt? 13. Does the saddler sell the oil? 14. Is the 
 wolf howling ? 15. Why is he howling ? 16. When and where 
 does the hunter sing? It. Is the baker or the peasant waiting 1 
 18. Does the peasant know what the baker says ? 
 
 LESSON VII. Section VII. 
 
 VERBS IRREGULAR IN THE PRESENT SINGULAR INDICATIVE. 
 
 1. In the third person singular of several verbs, the root 
 vowel e is changed to t or ie, while in that of some others a, 
 and u, take the Umlaut (L. 47. 6. and § 78, p. 346) : 
 
 id) fcredae, I break ; 
 
 <Ste Bred) en, you break ; 
 
 er fcridjt (not Brecfrt), he breaks ; 
 
 id) felje, I see ; 
 
 ©te fel)en, you see; 
 
 er |'iel)t (not fetyt), he sees. 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. 
 
 2. In German some names of inanimate objects are called 
 masculine, and some feminine;* while some names of animate 
 objects are called neuter : 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 
 
 £cr SMnter, the winter ; %)u Sittte, the ink ; £a3 $tnb, the child. 
 
 * This is true of nearly all languages. Many words, however, though 
 denoting the same objects, are regarded in different languages as being 
 of different genders. Thus, for brig, the French, brie is masculine, while 
 the German, Srigg is feminine. For head, the German $opf, is mascu- 
 line, the French, tete is feminine, and the Latin, caput is neuter. 
 
28 
 
 GENDER OF NOUNS. 
 
 SSetfptele. 
 
 BtefibaS £tnb bag SBud)? 
 SBag fagt ber Ccfyrcr? 
 ©ag flinb fjat bag 35rcb. 
 SBer fauft bag $ferb? 
 £>er Conner roUt, ber d\tc\tn fd'tlt. 
 SSerfauft ber SBauer bag $alb unb bag 
 term? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Does the jhild read the book ? 
 "What does the teacher say? 
 The child has the bread. 
 Who is buying the horse ? 
 The thunder rolls, the rain falls. 
 Does the peasant sell the calf and 
 the lamb ? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SBrt^ert, to break; (L.41. 6.) 
 
 £)ormerrtf to thunder; 
 
 (SnttDe'ber, either; 
 IDer (Sfftg, the vinegar; 
 
 fallen, to fall ; (L. 41. 6.) 
 £)er ^affee, the coffee; 
 £>ag talfc, the calf; 
 £>er $aufmann, the merchant ; 
 
 £ad)en, to laugh; 
 Qa^ £amm, the lamb ; 
 5)er £efyrer, the teacher; 
 
 Sefert, to read; (L. 41. 6.) 
 
 9lod>, nor; 
 T)er §)feffer, the pepper; 
 Dag ©d)af, or ©cl)aaf, the sheep; 
 £)er @d)nee, the snow; 
 
 <Sd)netben, to cut; 
 £>er <5enf, the mustard; 
 !Der Sfyee, the tea; 
 
 SBeber, neither; 
 
 2Bie, how; 
 £>cr Qudtx, the sugar. 
 
 Exercise 10. SlufgaBe 10. 
 
 1. Sarum Bremen @te bas 23rob? 2. Sefen (Ste ba$ 23ud)? 
 3. $auft ber gleifcfyer bag ©ctyaaf ober bas Samm? 4. £r !auft 
 tteber bas <Sd)aaf uod) bas Samm, er fauft ba3 $aI6. 5. £riuft 
 ber ^aufmann entrceber ^affce ober £()ee ? 6. 3Ba3 fauft ber Sto&j ? 
 ?. (Er fauft (Efftg, $feffer, ©cnf uub 3uder. 8 - SSann fat(t ber 
 ©c^nee? 9. SSarum triufeu ©te SBaffer? 10. SSarum trinftber 
 ^aufmann 23ier? 11. $erfiet)en (£te tray ber 2et)rer fagt? 12. 
 #13ren (Bit ttas bad $mb fagt? 13. SCer tterfauft ^affee, %i)ti 
 unb 3ucfer? 14. SBarum fauft ber 3dger S3rob? 15. SSerftefyeu 
 @te ttaS ber $leifd)er lieft? 16. SBarum lac^t ber @d)ii(er ? J 7, 
 <Dag $inb fdjneibet bag papier. 18. ®3 bonnert. 
 
 Exercise 11. 2Iufgafte 11. 
 
 1. Is the teacher reading 1 ? 2. What is he reading*? 3. Is 
 the cook breaking the bread? 4. No, he is cutting it. 5. 
 Why d.oes the butcher buy the calf, the sheep and the lamb 1 
 6. What does the child sing? 1. Is the hunter drinking tea or 
 coffee? 8. Why is the cookx buying mustard, pepper, sugar 
 and vinegar? 9. Do you know when the snow falls? 10. 
 Why are you laughing ? 11. Do you know how the child sings? 
 
CASES, DECLENSION OF NOUNS AND DEFINITE ARTICLE. 29 
 
 12. Does the child know how you read"? 13. Does the child 
 break the bread? 14. The scholar understands what you say. 
 15. Do you know why I am laughing'? 16. Does it thunder] 
 IT. What are you buying, bread or flour? 13. I am buying 
 neither bread nor flour. 
 
 LESSON VIII. flection VIII. 
 
 CASES. 
 
 1. There are in German four cases ; namely, the 
 Nominative, which answers to our nominative ; the 
 Genitive, which answers mainly to our possessive ; the 
 Dative, for which we have no exact equivalent ; and the 
 Accusative, which answers to the English objective. 
 
 The dative denotes the object for cr in relation to which an action 
 is performed, and is usually rendered by our objective governed by a 
 preposition. 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 2. Nouns have two forms of declension, called the old and 
 the new. 
 
 3. Nouns of the old declension that end in e, el, en, er, djen 
 and lent, form the genitive by adding $ ; the dative and accusa- 
 tive remaining like the nominative. 
 
 4. OLD DECLENSION OF NOUNS, MASCULINE AND NEUTER, 
 WITH THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 N. frcr SDMer, the painter; 
 
 G. ted SSMerS, the pa' ^r's ; 
 
 D. fcem SJcaler, to thv V-ier: 
 
 A. ten Scaler, the painter. 
 
 t>a3 (Slfen, the iron; 
 
 fceS (EtfenS, of the iron (L. 9) ; 
 
 bem Sifen, to or for the iron ; 
 
 ba3 Sifen, the iron. 
 
 &altn <Sie be$ 3RaIer8 SBudj? Have you the painter's book? 
 
 9?eut, idj fyifce be3 ©djitlerS S3ud). No, I have the scholar's book. 
 
 2)a3 £eber gefyort bem 6'attler. The eatker belongs to the saddler 
 
 Th« arti lie agrees with its noun in gee ler, case anu number. 
 
30 VERBS CONSTRUED WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 VERBS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 5 When the dative and accusative are both governed by 
 the same verb, the dative comes first ; except that the accusative, 
 if it be a personal pronoun, precedes the dative. 
 
 ©er $reunb »erfprid)t bem ©cttler bct3 The friend promises (to) the saddler 
 
 ©elb. the money. 
 
 SBarnm gte&t er e3 bem ©djneiber ? Why does he give it to the tailor 
 (Er mctdjt bm Setjrer em SPutt. He is making (for) the teacher 
 
 desk. 
 
 S3 eifp i ele* 
 
 ©a3 SfBerf lofct ben Sftetjrer, 
 ©a3 fltnb $at beS (3d)uter3 SBleifiift, 
 SBer fd)icft bem Sdcfer ben SRtng? 
 2Barum tabeln ©ie ben <5d}iiler ? 
 ©e^ort ba$ £ud) bem Befcer? 
 SJerfauft er e$ bem ©djneiber ? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 The work praises the master. 
 The child has the scholar's pencil. 
 Who sends the baker the ring ? 
 Why do you blame the scholar? 
 Does the cloth belong to the weaverl 
 Does he sell it to the tailor ? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 ©er ©all, the ball; 
 
 ©er aSIeiftift, the pencil; 
 
 ©er SBricfr the letter; 
 
 ©er S3 ruber, the brother; 
 
 ©er ©ecfel, the cover; 
 
 ©eben, to give; (L. 47. 6.) 
 ©e[)5'ren, to belong (L. 2. VL 4) ; 
 
 ©er ©lafer, the glazier; 
 
 ©er £ut, the hat ; 
 
 ©er ktUntr, the waiter; 
 
 Exercise 12. 
 
 ©er Sfftcmn, the man; 
 ©aSSpferb, the horse; 
 ©er Stetjj, the rice ; 
 ©er £Ring, the ring ; 
 
 ©cfyicfen, to send; 
 ©er ©ta&l, the steel; 
 ©er <Btod, the cane; 
 ©er <Snu)I, the chair; 
 ©er Sif#, the table; 
 ©er SSeijen, the wheat. 
 
 SlufgaBe 12, 
 
 I* £)ag $inb gteBt bem ©center ben 33au\ 2. SBer serfanft bem 
 (Slafer ben £>ecM, ben @tu$l unb bas Stfen ? 3. £er Decfel ge* 
 t)ort bem ©lajer, ber 9ting ge^ort bem ©filler, nnb ber Sfeijitft ge 
 t/ort bem ^eftner, 4. £)es SBatferS 23rnber lauft ben §ut, ben (£tod 
 ben @tnt)l nnb ben &{($♦ 5. Scfcn @ie beg SagerS Srtef? 6 
 9lein, id) gebe bem Sager Sen 33rtef, 7. SSerfauft ber Wlann nn 
 3tci§ nnb ben SBeijcn? 8. (Er v>erlauft bem Saner im 2tei§ nnb 
 fd)idt bem Stutter ben 2£et$en, 9, SBarum pmmert ber ©camlet) 
 bag (Eifert nnb ben ©tafyt? 10, ©c$ort bad ©efi> bem 33auer obei 
 bem 31eifd)er? 11, @* ge^ort bem Sauer. mil) bag $[erb geprt 
 
GENITIVE RENDERED BY THE OBJECTIVE. 31 
 
 bent gletfdjet* 12* Sag fagt ba$ $inb tern ©attlcr ? 13. SBarum 
 $icft bcr 33auer bent Gutter ben SBetjen? 14. £>er Sftiitfer fdjtdft 
 bent 23aner ba3 2Re$ f nnb ber Matter fcerfauft el bent jMncr. 15* 
 SCer ucrfauft bent @d)uler ben SMetfHft nnb ba» papier? 
 
 Exercise 13, 2lnfgabe 13* 
 
 1. Who sells the saddler the iron and the steel 1 2. Has 
 the glazier's brother the waiter's letter 1 3. No, the waiter has 
 the letter. 4. The child has the scholar's pencil and ring. 5. 
 Tho cover belongs to the glazier, the. hat belongs to the scholar. 
 6. The man sells the hunter the horse and the dog. 7. The 
 child gives the scholar the paper and the pencil. 8. What 
 does the peasant send to the miller 1 9. Who sends the miller 
 the grain and the money] 10. The peasant sells the miller 
 the wheat, and the miller sends the waiter the flour. 11. The 
 rice belongs to the waiter, the wheat belongs to the peasant, 
 the table belongs to the teacher, and the chair belongs to the 
 scholar. 12. Who hammers the steel and the iron ? 13. Why- 
 does the cook buy the tea, the coffee, the oil, the pepper, the 
 salt and the vinegar? 14. Does the cane belong to the saddler 
 or to the tailor ? 15. Is the smith buying the iron or the steel ? 
 
 LESSON IX. Ccction IX. 
 
 genitive rendered by the objective. 
 
 1. The genitive more commonly follows its governing 
 noun, and may be rendered either by our possessive, or by the 
 objective governed by of: 
 
 £afcen <5ie ba$ SSudj bc$ Have you tlie book of Haveyou the scholar's 
 ©diuierS? the scholar? book? 
 
 NOUNS ADDING eS IN THE GENITIVE. 
 
 2. Nouns of the old declension, not ending in e, el, en, et, 
 <5) e n and I e i n , add e 6 in the genitive and e in the dative ; the 
 accusative remaining like the nominative (compare L. 8. 3.) : 
 SBcr tjat be$ Jbdje3 S3rob ? Who has the cook's bread ? 
 
 2Ba3 sevfaufen <5ie bcm £odje? What do ycu stll to the cook ? 
 
32 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 Scmanb ijer'auft bent ©djiutebe ben Somebody is soiling the smith the 
 ©rafjt unb baS (Stfen. steel and the iron. 
 
 X'er <3rf)mieb Qtefct bent $inbe ba<3 The smith gives the child the mo- 
 ©elb unb ba*3 33rob. ney and the bread. 
 
 3. Note, however, that nouns of this class sometimes drop the 
 e of the genitive, and, occasionally, that of the dative (§ 13. 
 3. p. 274): 
 
 Shtf beS #cgt3 ($O0te3) ©efjetjj. At the bailiff's command. 
 
 8Bn fyat beS $aufmann3 9)ferb ? Who has the merchant's horse ? 
 
 33etfpiele* 
 
 £)er $tfdjer ^erfauft bent Jtodje ben 
 
 5fal unb bm 2a$3» 
 2Ber §at benSBogen, ben^fett, unb ben 
 
 @to<f beS flinbeS ? 
 SGBer gieftt bent spferbe baS §eu? 
 £>a£ $tnb gie&t bent ©cfyaafe bag £eu. 
 £)er Sruber be3 JttubeS serfauft bent 
 
 Sflanne ben SRtng unb ben ©tod* 
 ©efjort biefeS SBrett bent ^aufntanne 
 
 cber bent ©djntlebe ? 
 fftein, *.§ geprt bent Stntmerntanne* 
 
 Examples. 
 
 The fisherman sells the cook the 
 
 eel and the salmon. 
 Who has the bow, the arrow and 
 
 the cane of the child ? 
 Who gives the horse the hay ? 
 The child gives the sheep the hay. 
 The brother of the child sells the 
 
 man the ring and the cane. 
 Does this board belong to the 
 
 merchant or to the smith ? 
 Wo, it belongs to the carpenter. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>er 9TaI, the eel ; 
 £)er SBaum, the tree ; 
 2>cr SBogen, the bow; 
 £>a3 23rett, the board; 
 £)a3 %&§, the cask, barrel; 
 £>er S'tfdjer, the fisherman; 
 T>a3 ©ant, the yarn; 
 2)a3 ©ra£, the grass; 
 1)a$ §eu, the hay; 
 Da 3 £ufm, the fowl; 
 Dcr flalf, the lime ; 
 
 Der -ftaufmann, the merchant; 
 Der ^iifer, the cooper; 
 DaS ilupfer, the copper ; 
 Der $Pfeii, the arrow; 
 Der ©attel, the saddle ; 
 Dcr <Sof)n, the son ; 
 Der ©paten, the spade; 
 
 ©pielen, to play; 
 
 2)erfpred)en (L. 7.) to promise 
 Der SBalb, the forest; 
 DaS Sinn, the tin. 
 
 Exercise 14. 
 
 SCufgaBe 14. 
 
 U Scrfpridjt ber Sifter bem ^od)e ben 2tat? 2. ©etjen <Ste ben 
 SBalb? 3. Serfauft ber Saner bem $iifer ben 23anm? 4. 3a, 
 nnfc ber Pilfer serfanft bem Sftutter bas gag. 5. ©efyort ber 23ogen 
 tern Sftamte ? 6. Der 23ogen gefyort bem ^anne, nnb ber §)feU a,e* 
 
liefer and ^cmv — lesson x. 33 
 
 hort tern .fttnbe. 1* $3cr aerfauft tern @d)miebe bag ^inn nnb bag 
 tfupfer? 8. @ii)icft bcr Battler tern 9ftanne ben ©attet? 9. 2Ber 
 ijcrfauft rem ilaufmamt bag ®arn, bag £>en unb ben $a(f ? 10* 
 ©eljort bag 23rett bem Svuber be^ <8$miebeg ? 11, 2Ber fcfytcft bem 
 (Scfcmtete ben ©paten? 12, ©efyort bag ®rag bem ©djmtebe? 
 13, Serfaufl ber $od) bem $inbe bag £4n ? 14, ^ettt, bag $tnb 
 tcrfauft eg bem ^octye. 15, £er ^aufmann l)at bag Stfen beg 
 ©a^mteteg^nb bag ©ilBer beg ©olbfdjmtebeg. 16. £ag $ino fptelt 
 unb ber (Shiran fltegt. 
 
 Exercise 15. SIufgaBe 15 
 
 1. Who sells the merchant the tin and the copper % 2. The 
 copper belongs to the merchant, he sells it to the smith. 6. 
 Who sells the cook the eel and the fowl % 4. Who promises 
 the child the bow and the arrow % 5. Does the peas.int sell 
 the merchant the forest 1 6. No, he sells the cooper the tree. 
 1. The peasant has the spade of the fisherman. 8. Who sells 
 the man the lime, the cask and the board 1 9. The brother of 
 the cook sends the smith the bread, the meat and the flour. 
 10. The brother of the miller has the horse and the saddle ol 
 the smith. 11. The child gives the horse and the sheep th* 
 hay. 12. Does the cooper or the miller buy the yarn of the 
 peasant? 13. The brother of the merchant buys it. 14. Who 
 sells the smith the iron and the steel'? 15. Who sells th« 
 goldsmith the silver? 16. Who is playing, and what is flying 2 
 
 LESSON X. lection X. 
 
 demonstrative pronouns £)tefer and 3etter, 
 
 1. liefer (this,) refers to the nearer, and jener (that,) to the 
 more remote of two objects. When not contrasted with jener, 
 however, biefer may often be rendered by that : 
 
 *£)tefer Jlajfee ijr kffcr aU jener. This coffee is better than that 
 
 IDiefeS SBrcb i{l fceffer aU jene§. This bread is better than that. 
 
 Sffite alt ijl biefeS $ferb ? How old is that horse ? 
 2* 
 
84 LESSON X. 
 
 2. Dtej'cr may often be rendered by the latter and jener by 
 the former : 
 
 3d) fenne ben ^awfmann imt> ben STrjt; I know the merchant and the p ^ay- 
 biefer ijr retd), jener ifl arm. sician ; the latter is rich, the 
 
 former is poor. 
 
 3. For the word one after a pronoun or adjective no corres- 
 ponding word is employed in German : 
 
 !£tefer £ifd) geprt bem <SdjuIer unb This table belongs to the scholar \ 
 
 jener bem Cetyrer* and that (one) to the teacher. 
 
 3rner ijr alt, biefer ijr neu* That one is old, this one is new. 
 
 4. DECLENSION OF ©tefet COMPARED WITH ARTICLE £> t X* 
 
 Masc. Neut. {Lesson VIII.) 
 
 N. bief-er, bief-es, this; (N. ber, bas), 
 
 G. btef-es, btef-es, of this; (G. beS, bes)» 
 
 D. bief-em, btef-em, to or for this; (D. bem, bem), 
 
 A. bief-en, btef-es, this; (A. ben, baz). 
 
 Like biefer are declined the following indefinite numerals and 
 adjective pronouns, which, like the definite article, have a dis- 
 tinct form for each gender (the characteristic of the nominative 
 masculine being r, and that of the neuter 6) : 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 alter, aHeS, all (§53. 3.); 
 einiger, eimgeS, some ; 
 etlictyer, etltcfyeg, some ; 
 jeter, jebeS, every; 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 jener, jenesS, • that ; 
 manner, mancfye3, many a; 
 folder, jblcks, such ; 
 Neither, tteld)e3, which, what. 
 
 5. <5ein and SSergeffen in the present tense singular. 
 
 id) Mtt, I am ; 
 @te finb, you are ; 
 cr tjt, he is. 
 
 id) fcergeffe, I forget ; 
 @ie ttergeffen, you forget ; 
 er »era,tjjt, be forgets. 
 
 33etfptele. Examples. 
 
 Diefer SSttctnn ijr reidj, jener if! arm. This man is rich, that one is poor. 
 
 £er $rufjttng wnb attcfi bcr $erf>jt $at The spring and also the a utumnhaa 
 
 fetne $reuben, biefer fcrittgt $rii$te, its pleasures, the latter brings 
 
 jener SBtumen. fruits, the former flowers. 
 
©em and 5Biffen in the present tense singular. 35 
 
 Diefer SKann tft eht 2Mer. 
 
 3dj Mn arm, after idj Vm sufrieben. 
 
 3$ lefe biefen Srtcf* 
 
 That man is a painter. 
 
 I am poor, but I am contented. 
 
 I am reading (L. V. 2.) this letter. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 STUer, all (see decl. biefer); 
 
 Strati poor ; 
 
 SMefer* this (see 1.); 
 <Der ©a Utter, the gardener; 
 £)fr ©aul, the horse, nag; 
 
 ©rojj, large; 
 
 ©tit, good ; 
 
 £art, hard; 
 £>aS $au$, the house; 
 
 3eber, every; 
 
 Setter, that; 
 £>a$ fltnb, the child ; 
 
 Exercise 16. 
 
 Sttandjer, many a ; 
 
 md)t, not ; 
 
 0teicr> rich ; 
 
 ©eitt, to be (infinitive L, X 5)i 
 ©cr ©^ttetbcr, the tailor; 
 
 vSdjiht, beautiful ; 
 
 <Sold)er, such; 
 £>cr Safer, the father; 
 
 SSatyr, true ; 
 
 23eld)er, which, what; 
 
 2Btffcn, to know (p. 358.) 
 
 Slufgafce 16. 
 
 1. Diefer Sutler ift ber (Boljn jenes SBcmerS* 2. %mtv 23auer 
 ift ber Setter biefeS 23auer3. 3. 3^cr ©cut! gcX;ort jenem Sflutfer* 
 4. Oe^en ©ie biefen ©arten unb jenes £au$? 5. Sitter <Stat)t ijl 
 Ijart. 6. Sftidjt atte3 (Sifen ift gut. 7. £at jeber <8d)mieb folc^en 
 ©ta$I unb folded (gifett ? 8. 9ttdjr jeber £unb ift grof. 9. $ian* 
 c^er yjlam ift arm. 10. $aufen <Ste biefen Sftutg ober jenen? 
 11. SBarum !aufen @tc jenen SRing unb nidjt biefen? 12. 2M* 
 $em ©djneiber fdjiden @te biefes Xu& ? 13. $3e(djc<3 Zu§ fd)icfen 
 @ie biefem ©dmeiber ? 14. $3as biefer 9ft cum fagt ift teak. 15, 
 Sieft ber Seljrer biefen 53rtef ober jenen? 16. $t\$t jeber Wlann ift 
 reicfc, nid}t jebee 23ud) ift gut. IT. SBijfeit @ie was biefer (Partner 
 toerfpridjt biefem $mbe? 18. (Bolder <sta$I ift nid)t quL 19. 
 3jt fo!d)e3 papier fc^on? 20. SMdjem ©attter sjcrlauft biefer 
 Sftann biefem Seber ? 2L Sa$ ttergijst er ? 
 
 Exercise IT. $ufga£e IT* 
 
 1. Which paper has this scholar'? 2. He has the pare? of 
 that child. 3. Which pencil has this child ? 4. It has the pen- 
 cil of that scholar. 5. To which teachei does this man send the 
 book 1 6. Which steel and which iron does this smith buy ? 
 7. Is every house large and good 1 8. Is every horse beautiful ] 
 D. What tree is large? 10. What tree do you see? 11. Has 
 
36 LESSON XI. 
 
 every miller such wheat and such flour? 12. Is not many a 
 man rich? 13. Is all iron hard? 14. Is all steel hard and 
 good? 15. Does this garden belong to this gardener, or to 
 that miller? 16. Is the father of this scholar reading the book 
 of the smith? 11. Which tailor is poor, this one or that one? 
 18. Who is rich ? 1 3. Who is singing ? (L. V. 2.) 20. That 
 child says you have the ball, is it true ? 21. That tree is large 
 and beautiful. 22. That tree is falling. 
 
 LESSON XI. Section XI. 
 
 DATIVE WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 1. The dative is often preceded by prepositions, and then 
 answers to our objective : 
 
 (5r fommt au8 bem £aufe» He is coming out of the house. 
 
 £>er SKamt ijl in bem £aufe. The man is in the house. 
 
 £>a$ ^tttb fpiett nut bem £unbe» The child is playing with the dog. 
 
 £>er SSxxum. jlefyt ijor bm £aufe. The tree stands before the house. 
 
 DATIVE WITH VERBS OF MOTION. 
 
 2. After verbs denoting direction toward, 3 u must be placed 
 before the name of a, person, and nctd), before the name of a 
 place or country ; gu and nacfy being both rendered by to : 
 
 Sr gefjt iu bem 5lmtmamt (§ 13. 3)» He goes to the magistrate. 
 (£r ge§t nctd) bem £>orfe» He goes to the village. 
 
 3. Where in English the preposition may be omitted, it ia 
 
 not usually employed in German : 
 
 L^ -v. c o„ ^ r j I send the teacher the book. 
 
 3<* foidfe bem Setter ba$ 33ud). j j gend the book to the teacher> 
 
 ©r S teM btm ©d)ncibcr baS ©elb. j He S ives the tailor the mon( ?- 
 
 1 He gives the money to the tailor. 
 
 XSdj fdjtcfe ba<3 JTtnb ju bem Setjrer* I send the child to the teacher. 
 
 £>ct3 $inb fjet)t ju bem ©djnciber. The child goes to the tailor. 
 
 4. Of, when denoting relation (instead of possession L. 9. 1.), 
 must be expressed in German by a'corresponding preposition , 
 3d) fpredje son bem QJctrtner, I am speaking of the gaidener. 
 
 (not, id) fpredje be3 ©artncr£). (Compare Lesson 9. 1.) 
 
POSITION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 37 
 
 POSITION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 5. Prepositions precede the words which they govern, and 
 can not, as in English, stand at the end of a sentence : 
 
 3fttt roetdjcm SBtetjltft "With what pencil is "What pencil is he writ- 
 he writing ? 
 In which house is he? 
 Do you know of which 
 book he speaks ? 
 
 fd)retbt er? 
 3n ft client £au ( "e iji er ? 
 2Hffen<Ste »onroetd)em 
 
 S3ud)e er fprid)t? 
 
 ing with ? 
 Which house is he in ? 
 Do you know which 
 
 book he speaks of? 
 
 23eif'piete. 
 
 £)cr ©djmieb ge"t)t £it bem ©lafer. 
 2Ba3 fd)tdt er bem ©lafer ? 
 SBer Ijat baa 33ud) beS SetjrerS? 
 2Ba$ fagen <Ste sort bem £ef)rer? 
 SBiffen Sie in roeldjem £aufe ber ©la* 
 
 fer roormt? 
 Soften <Sie ben <Bo^n be3 SKutferS ? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 The smith goes to the glazier. 
 "What does he send the glazier ? 
 Who has the book of the teacher ? 
 "What do you say of the teacher ? 
 Do you know which house the 
 
 glazier lives in ? 
 Do you praise the miller's son? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 ©er 9(bler, the eagle, 
 
 9(13, than, as; 
 £)er 9(mbop, the anvil; 
 ©er 9lnfcr, the anchor; 
 ©er 91pfel, the apple; 
 
 Slrbet'ten, to work; 
 ©er SIrbei'ter, the laborer; 
 ©er 9frm, the arm; 
 ©er Strjt, the physician; 
 ©a3 9dige, the eye; 
 
 3fu8, out of; 
 
 ®efjen, to go; 
 ©er £cnig, the honey; 
 
 $ommen, to come; 
 ©a$ 2id)t, the candle; 
 
 9)?cf)r, more; 
 
 Wit, with; 
 
 9k d> to, after ;> 
 
 <£pred)en, to speak; (L. VIL) 
 
 ©el)r, very; 
 1 S3 on, of, from; 
 
 3u, to (see 2.). 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 2Iufgabe 18* 
 
 1. itommt ber 3Sger cms bem £aufe, ober getjt er nafy bem 
 taufe? 2. 2Ber. fcfyreiftj: metjr ate ber 2Irgt? 3. SBann get)en <3te 
 rtad) bem SBalbe? 4. 2Ba$ fagt ber Matter son biefem 2id)te ? 5. 
 SSartrt gcljt ba$ $inb git bem 2Ir6eiter imb roann nacfy bem £orfe? 
 
 6. £a$ $inb get)t tteber gu bem 2Meiter nod) na$ bem SMbe. 
 
 7. 3 U foment 2lrgte gcl)t ber ©lafcr? 8. SGarum fatft ber Slpfel 
 ton ^tm SBcmme? 9. SBijfen @ie ton meld)em 2Imoo§ ber @&mieb 
 [priest ? 10, $3a3 fagt ber Olafer ton bem 2tnfer ? 11. 5lrbeitet 
 
38 LESSON XI. 
 
 fcer ©^iilcr nut sent S3auer? 12* £)er Wetter ctrMtet mtt fcem 
 Saner. 13. 2>as Singe fces SfoterS ift fcfyim. 14. 2Ba3 fagen ©te 
 ijon fcem £omg ? 15. £er Slrm fctefeS (Sd)mtei>c3 tft grog. 1G. 
 £)er 25rnber biefe^ 23aner3 ift arm. 11. 9Jftt melcfyem Sleiftifte 
 fd)reiftt tcr Se^rer? 18. SBtjfen @te mit wetdjem SBlelfHfte er 
 
 Exercise 19. Slnfgace 19. 
 
 1. Are you writing the letter with the pencil of the scholar 1 
 2. What does the child say of the honey ? 3. Has this laborer 
 more grain than flour, and more copper than gold ? 4. Do 
 you know what pencil the man is writing with 1 5. Yes, I 
 know which one he is writing with. 6. Why is the hunter 
 coming out of the forest, and why is the child coming out of 
 the house 1 ? 1. When does the laborer go to the forest? 8. 
 When do you go to the teacher 1 ? 9. What does he say of the 
 eagle 1 10. Is the eye of the eagle large % 11. Does the apple 
 fall from the tree 1 ? 12. The miller is coming from the house 
 of the goldsmith, and the child is going to the house of the mil 
 ler. 13. Do you see that anchor 1 14. With which smith 
 does the miller work 1 15. The arm of the smith is large. 
 16. The brother of the baker is poor. 11. Which forest is the 
 physician going to 1 18. He is going neither to this one, nor 
 to that one (L. X. 3.). 
 
 LESSON XII. Section XtL 
 
 INDEFINITE ARTICLE, 
 
 1. The form of the indefinite article is less varied than that 
 c f the definite ; having for its accusative masculine only, a chap 
 acteristic ending : 
 
 Norn, masculine, etn, a ; JSTom. neuter, eht, a. 
 Ace. masculine, eitt-en, a ; Ace. neuter, tin, a. 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS LESSON XII. 39 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 2. The possessive pronouns constitute in German a distinct 
 class of words, answering in signification to the possessive case 
 of our personal pronouns. Like the article, they are subject 
 to inflection, and agree in gender, number and case with their 
 nouns : 
 
 3$ ffabt mcut3)a)jicnmb ntehtenSSatf. I have my paper and my ball. 
 
 $at Sfyr ftrcunb bad 33ud) metncS SJet* Has your .friend the book of my 
 
 ter3 ober 3f)re3 Dnfetd? cousin, or of your uncle? 
 
 ©djneiben <5ie 3 for 33rcb mit ineiitcm Are you cutting your bread with 
 
 2Ke|Ter ? my knife ? 
 
 3. The indefinite article and the possessive pronouns (unlike 
 Hefer, L. X. 4.) add by inflection, except in the nom. and ace. 
 neuter, another syllable to the form of the nominative : 
 
 £>er ©e$n unfer-e3 9f a^fcarS tft etn The son of our neighbor is a friend 
 g-rcimb biefeS 3ager$. of this hunter. 
 
 4. DECLENSION OF INDEF. ARTICLE COMPARED WITH DEFINITE 
 
 Masc. Neut. {Lesson VIII. 3.) 
 
 N. ein, ein, a; (N. tcr, fcaS.). 
 
 G. ebt-eS, ettt-eS, of a; (G. te3, fcc$.) 
 
 D. em-em, cin-cm, to or for a ; (D. tern, tent.) 
 
 A. cut-en, ein, a; (A. ten, &<*£♦) 
 
 Like the indefinite article ein, are declined : 
 tttein, my ; [citt, bis, its ; nnfer, our ; tfjr, their ; 
 fcein, thy ; U)r, her ; cner, your ; fetn, no. 
 
 5. When a word which ends in ct, en, er, takes an additional 
 syllable beginning with e, one e is often dropped : 
 
 imf-erS, for imfer-eg ; nnf-erm, for unfer-em ; etc. 
 
 WORDS IN APPOSITION. 
 
 6. Words in apposition must agree in case (§ 133) : 
 
 Unfer Sftadjfcar, ber ©aitter, Ijat ba<3 Our neighbor, the saddler, has the 
 $Pferb feineS $reimbe$,be£ ©ctccto. horse of his friend, the tanner. 
 
40 
 
 lesson xn. 
 
 (5r ge^t mtt fetnem $etrer, bemSMer, He is going with his cousin, the 
 ttacfy $ari3. painter, to Paris. 
 
 • Setfptete. 
 
 3$r greunb tytt Stjren Sricf unb 3§r 
 
 Sud) Sfyrem SBntber gefefyicft. 
 2Ba3 tyat fetn^reunb in fetnem Coffer? 
 3$ f)ak fetn (Stfen unb feinen ©taf)I. 
 SRetn £tfdj jM)t in meinem Simmer* 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Your friend has sent your letter 
 and your book to your brother. 
 What has his friend in his trunk! 
 I have no iron and no steel. 
 My table is standing in my room. 
 
 £>er Sawn jM)t jttrifefyen unferm ■panfe The tree stands between our house 
 
 unb Sfvem ©arten. and your garden. 
 
 T>a$ $tnb $ctt fetn Sfteffer unb feinen The child has its knife and its ball 
 
 SB all in fetnem £ute. in its hat. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Sin, at; 
 
 3Iuf, on; 
 
 £>enn (conjunction), for; 
 
 (Sfje (adverb), ere, before; 
 
 (£tn (ma.se. or neut.), a, an; 
 ©aS $euer, the fire; 
 £)er $rcunb, the friend; 
 2)er £>awmer, the hammer; 
 
 Winter, behind; 
 
 3fyr (masc. or neut), your; 
 
 3n, in, into; 
 
 $ein (m. or n.), not any, no; 
 
 £tegen, to lie; 
 
 Sftetn (masc. or neut), my; 
 £)er Dfen, the stove; 
 
 ©etn (masc. or neut), his, its; 
 
 (Sifccn, to sit; 
 
 ©tel)en, to stand; 
 
 UeBer, over; 
 
 Unfer (masc. or neut), our; 
 
 Uttter, under, among; 
 
 ©or (preposition), before; 
 £>a$ Btmmer, the room ; 
 
 3tt>tfcf)en, between. 
 
 Exercise 20. 
 
 StufgaBe 20. 
 
 1. Sftein 33ruber Ijat cin $ult, einen £tfcfy unb einen ©tu^t in 
 fetnem Sinter. 2. (£r flfct an fetnem $utte, nnb fetn SleijHft 
 Itegt cmf bent 3Ttfc^e* 3. JpaBen ©ie cin geuer in 3^em dimmer? 
 4. Stout, benn id^ $afce feinen Dfen in meinem Simmer. 5. £er 
 ©cfynieb ^at feinen jammer nnb fein Stfen. 6. £$ iffc ber greunb 
 fcines yia$Ux$, be3 ©attlers. 7. Unfer $reunb $at nnfern £unb. 
 8. 3ft ber ©ol)n unfres !fta<fy&ar$ in unfrcm ©arten ? 9. ©tetjen 
 ©te sor 3I)rem §aufe e$e ©te fmam ? 10. ©tel)t ber Sanrn jtol* 
 fdjen 3|rem ©arten unb unferm £aufe ? 11. $ton 23u$ Uegt un* 
 ter 3^rcm $ulte. 12. £a$ Bimmer bes ©iafera ift titer bent 3im* 
 mer be3 ©oIbfd)miebe3. 13. ©te^t ber Jpunb Winter 3t)rem $ulte? 
 U. £at ba$ $mt fein 33u$ unb feinen 33let(Hft? 15. 2c[en ©ie 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 41 
 
 In 3$rem ofccv in mcinem 23nd>e? 16. Xiefcr Sftann ijl arm, cr 
 
 5 at iretcr ©ofo nod) 33rot> 
 
 Exercise 21. 91 uf gate 21. 
 
 1. Is your friend sitting ac his table? 2. No, he is sitting 
 at my table. 3. Why have you a stove in your room ] 4. 
 I have no stove in my room. 5. Does your book lie under 
 your table 1 6. No, it lies on my desk. 7. Is your friend in 
 his garden ? 8. No, he is in our house. 9. Your hammer is 
 lying between the stove and the table. 10. The scholar's 
 room is over the room of his father. 11. Have you no 
 fire in your room 1 12. I have no fire in my room, for 1 have 
 no stove. 13. Is the friend of your teacher sitting behind 
 your desk 1 14. No, he is standing before his house ; he writes 
 before he reads. 15. Our friend, the miller, has our horse and 
 our dog in his garden. 16. The son of the peasant has your 
 anvil and your iron. 
 
 LESSON XIII. £jection XIII. 
 
 interrogative pronouns. 
 
 1. The interrogative pronouns are 
 
 2Ber, who ; metier, which, what ; 
 
 2Ba3, what; tt?a$ fiir, (§ 66.) what kind of. 
 
 In this connection, fur may ^recede any of the cases : 
 2£a3 fur em SSttatm tft er ? What kind of a man is he ? 
 
 Stttt roaS fitr Sinte fd>rei&ert ©ic? With what kind of ink do you write? 
 3n »a$ fur emern £aufe roofjnen <5ie? In what kind of a house do you live? 
 
 2. Between toa$ and fiir other words are sometimes intro- 
 duced : 
 
 8Ba3 fyat er berm fiir 3Bunber *or un* What (kind of) miracles, then, has 
 fern Slugert gen)an? — ©. he performed before our eyes ? 
 
 3. $3etdJer and IMS fiir are often employed in exclamations, 
 in which use foeldjer usually drops the last syllable : 
 
 2M3 ein £ett> ! What a hero ! 
 
42 LESSON XIII. 
 
 SBaS $at uujer £crj fur erne feltfame "What a singular astronomy has our 
 STftronomi'e gelernt! heart learned! 
 
 4. The form njeldj is, also, employed in questions, when the 
 succeeding word is under special emphasis : 
 
 2£eW) ©djicffal abtx tvtrb ba3 (Sure What fate though will yours be? 
 fcin? (he yours?) 
 
 5. When not followed by a noun or an adjective, eirt is rei? 
 dered a one, and declined like Mefcr (L. X. 4.) : 
 
 SK5a3 fur ein $ogel tfi ber Sfbler, unb "What kind of a bird is the eagle, 
 toa$ fur enter if! ber QaUfyt? and what kind of a one is the 
 
 hawk? 
 
 6. $3a3 is sometimes used in the sense of ttctrttm ♦ 
 
 3Ba3 $altft ©it mehten aufge^ofcenen Why (what) boldest thou my up- 
 §lrm? lifted arm? 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS $QtV AND 2B(X3» 
 
 N. tter? who? ttCtS? what? 
 
 G. foeffen? whose? n>ep? of what? 
 
 D. ft em ? to or for whom? (dative wanting.) 
 
 A. men? whom? tt>dS ? what? 
 
 1. The genitive of tt?a3 seldom occurs except in compounds: 
 
 2Be3tt>egen I;al er e§ geitjan? On account of what (why) has ha 
 
 done it ? 
 
 8. Instead of toad, construed with prepositions, the adverb 
 too (where) combined with them, is employed : 
 
 ©omit (not mtt tt>ctS) fdjretot er ? With what (wherewith) is he writ- 
 
 ing? 
 SBotton (not Don roa§) fprictjt er ? Of what (whereof) does he speak 
 
 SBorin (§ 103. 2.) f)Ctt er gefetytt? In what (wherein) has he failed? 
 
 S3 cifpiclc* Examples. 
 
 : 2Btffcn @ic toa3 fur ein STfyter beta Do you know what kind of an ani- 
 SftujsVfcrb ijt, unb in toa8 fiir einem mal the hippopotamus is, and in 
 Sanbe e3 lefrt? what kind of a country it live3.' 
 
 Sn roeffen §aufe roo^nen <Ste ? In whose house do you live ? 
 
 SBoDon fpridjt ber Sflaurer? What is the mason speaking of? 
 
declension of SBer and 2Ba3, 
 
 43 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Cad 53etfen, the basin; 
 
 2>er Eidbctr, the white bear: 
 
 %aul, idle, lazy, indolent; 
 3)er Coffer, the trunk; 
 £)er torb, the basket; 
 2)a« Jhofcbi'l, the crocodile; 
 2>a3 £anb, the country; 
 
 £e ben, to live; 
 
 Sic ben, toleve; 
 
 So ben, to praise; 
 
 COuKbcn, to make, do; 
 £)a3 Wttfikt, the knife ; 
 1>ex <Sd)iti), the shoe ; 
 2)ci <Sdmfymad)cv, the shoemaker; 
 2)cr ©'trauj?, the ostrich; 
 1)cr Stger, the tiger; 
 £)er ilntcrfd)icb, the difference; 
 Dcr Sogel, the bird, fowl ; 
 
 2Bof)nen, to reside, live; 
 ^ SSo»on, see 8. 
 
 Exercise 22. 
 
 ufgaBe 22. 
 
 1* 2£er IcBt ten ©diilcr, nnb toen loM bcr (Sdmtcr? 2. SBBefcn 
 23ttd) lefen <Ste ? 3, $3em fd)reiben <3ic etnett Srtef? 4. SBtjfen 
 ©te lucffen Sftejfer ber <Sd)ttt)mad)cr tjat? 5, SaS fitr ein SRejfer 
 $at cr ? 6. 2Ba3 fur cm SSJlann I)at ntcin SDtoffer ? T. SJZit weflat 
 Sletjtift fdjreifcen ©te ten SBrief? 8. fjftit »as fitr cittern 33leijHfte 
 nnb rtttf was fitr papier fdjteifit bcr Se^rer ? 9. 3n was fitr etnem 
 2 ante lefct bcr StSfcar ? *10. 3n ttas fitr etnem Icfct ber £i<jcr? 
 11. 3n wcld}cm Sanbe IcBt ber Sisfcar ? 12. SBtjJen @ie in tucldjcm 
 Santc bas ^rolobtl ieBt ? 13. 2Ba3 lefen @ie ? 14. 2Ba$ fitr ef* 
 nen ©djuty madt bcr ©djuljmadjcr ? 15. SBcm fdudt ber ©d;neitcr 
 bas 23eden? 16. 3n toejfen £aufc ivotjnen ©ie? 17. 2Ba3 fitr 
 ein SSogel ijt ber ©traujj ? 18. SBiffen ©ie ben Untcrfd)iet gnrifdjen 
 "Men" nnb "SBofyten?" 19. Siett tat mm ten 9Jiann ? 20. 
 SBeffen $orB $at ber ©d)ttt)mader? 21. SMjjcn ©ie was fiir 
 einen Coffer id) IjaBe ? 22. Son went fprecfye id), nnb ttoson fprcd)en 
 ©te? 23. 3$ fprecfye son betn Sftittfer; er ift fant. 
 
 Exercise 23. Slufgafte 23. 
 
 1. Whose horse has the tailor ? 2. With whose pencil are 
 you writing? 3. To whom does the saddler send the money? 
 4. To which merchant does this anchor belong ? 5. What kind 
 of an animal is the white bear ? 6. In what kind of a country 
 does he live 1 ? 1. In what kind of a house does the shoemaker 
 live ? 8. Do you know what kind of a bird the ostrich is ? 
 9. In what kind of a country does the tiger live? 10. What 
 are you doing with my knife? 11. Why is the child laughing? 
 
ii ADJECTIVES — LESSON XIV. 
 
 12. Wnom does the shoemaker praise? 13. Is he making a 
 shoe? 14. Who is making the captain a trunk ? 15. In what 
 kind of a country does the crocodile live ? 16. On whose table 
 is my hook lying ? It. Whom does the child love ? 18. To 
 whom is the child going ? 19. To whom does the peasant send 
 the basket? 20. Of whom are you speaking? 21. Of what 
 am I speaking ? 22. Whose basin has the cook ? 23. Is ou^ 
 neighbor not idle ? 
 
 LESSON XIV. Cation XIV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives when used predicatively* undergo no change 
 of form ; thus, 
 
 Masc. £)er ©tct^l ifl gut. The steel is good. 
 
 Neut. ©a$ ©ifen ift gut. The iron is good. 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 2. Adjectives, when used attributively* are subject to three 
 modes of inflection, called the old, the new and the mixed de- 
 clensions. 
 
 3. Adjectives, when not immediately preceded by btefer, eitt, 
 or some other word of that class (L. X. 4. and L. XII. 4.) are 
 inflected according to the 
 
 OLD DECLENSION. 
 
 Masculine. Neuter. Masc. Neut. 
 
 N. gut— er, gut-e3, good; (N. ttef-er, bief-e3.) 
 
 G. gut-e3 (en),gut-e3(en),of good; (G. Mef-eS fctef-eS.) 
 
 D. gut-em, gut-cm, to or for good; (D. bief-em, bicf-cm.) 
 
 A. gut-en, gut-e3, good. (A. bief-en, btef-e$.) 
 
 * The terms predicative and attributive, which in grammar have a 
 strictly conventional sense, should, by the pupil of German especially, 
 be fuliy understood. Thus in the sentence, £art-er <5tat)I ift gut, hard 
 steel is good ; hard is regarded as a known attribute of the steel, while 
 good is that which is predicated or affirmed of it. Hence hard is attrib- 
 utive, and good predicative. 
 
ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVE FORMS OF THE A.DJECTIVE. 45 
 
 4. The adjective, like the article, must agree with its noun. 
 
 5. The genitive of the old form is now seldom used ; that of 
 the new being preferred : 
 
 7)k %axlt guten (instead of gttte$) The color of good gold is yellow. 
 ©olbeS ifi gclfc. 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE AND PREDICATIVE FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Attributive. Predicative. 
 
 £art-cr ©ta$I ifi nufclidj. ITard steel is useful. 
 
 £art-e3 (Eifen ijl niifcltd). Hard iron is useful. 
 
 3?u$tid)-er <Sta$t ijl $art. Useful steel is hard. 
 
 9?uj?Iid)-e3 (Eifen ijl tyart. Useful iron is hard. 
 
 6. Adjectives preceded by ttloat, WCtS and nt^ty, and used 
 substantively, are of the old declension, and written with a 
 capital initial : 
 
 §aben ©ic eitoa$ 9?euet Have you any thing new? 
 
 Sic fprcd)cn son ttioaQ IMeaenu You speak of something new ? 
 
 (Er fagt nid)t$ ©d)Ied)te$. He says nothing bad. 
 
 T. An adjective, when referring to a noun understood, has 
 the same ending as when the noun is expressed : 
 
 (£r Jjat feineS £ud), id) f)ak gro^eS. He has fine cloth, I have coarse, 
 barter ©ta§l ifi gut, tt>eid)er ijl fd)led)t. Hard steel is good, soft is bad. 
 
 Give the gender of the nouns in the following examples, as 
 indicated by the adjective. State also which adjectives are 
 attributive, and which predicative. 
 
 33 e if): tele. Examples. 
 
 SBeidjet <St<u)T ijl nid)t gut. Soft steel is not good. 
 
 Q5ute3 SBIei ijl wetd). Good lead is soft. 
 
 $at fcer S3au?r guten SOBetjett mtb (jutcS Has the peasant good wheat ana 
 
 Oojl? good fruit? 
 
 SBer $at feineS Zu§ unb fetnen <Sammet? Who has fine cloth and fine veh et * 
 
 ©uter <5enf ifi gelfc, guteS ©alj ijl Good mustard is yellow, good salt 
 
 h>etfl. is white. 
 
 (Er fprld&t mit Mtterm $o$ne. He speaks with bitter scorn. 
 
 (Er ruft in Miirem £cmne. — tt» He cries (or calls) in bitter sorrow 
 
*6 FORM OF THE ADJECTIVE LESSON XFV. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Sfttgeneljnt, pleasant ; 
 35Ictu, blue ; 
 2)a3 SWet, the lead; 
 %an, fine; 
 ©elb, yellow; 
 ©rent, gray; 
 @rof>, coarse; 
 ®xun, green ; 
 3'ntmcr, always; 
 3e$t f now; 
 
 £>er Mantel, the cloak; 
 £)er 9£o<f, the coat; 
 
 9iou), red; 
 
 ©cfyroarj, black; 
 
 £rotfen, dry; 
 £)a3 £ud), the cloth; 
 ©er better, the cousin; 
 
 2Barm, warm; 
 
 3©ei$, white; 
 £)a$ 2Better, the weather. 
 
 Exercise 24. SI U f g a B e 24* 
 
 1 ♦ 3ft 3v r £ud) f^tt ober groB ? 2* 3d) ^jaBe groBeg Xu§, unb 
 ber @d)neti>er ^at femes £u$* 3. liefer !Rod ift son feinem 2:u^e, 
 iener ift »on groBem* 4, £er @ta$l ift Ijart, ba3 33lel ift rocid)* 
 5. garter @tat)l ift gut, tteid)e3 S3Iei ift gut* 6* ©uter @tal)* ift 
 l)axt t guteS 33Iei ift ipeid)* 1, ®ute3 ©oft ift getB, guter @tac,( ift 
 fteig* 8. £er ©otDfdjmicb $at meigert ©tatyl unb gelBcS ©oft* 9* 
 S)a3 SBetter ift }e£t warm* 10* SSarmeS SBetter ift angenefyn* 
 11* 2lngenel)me6 better ift ntd)t immer rearm* 12* $on was fur 
 £ud) mad}t ber ©dmeiber ben Mantel? 13* (Er mafyt ben Mantel 
 ijon Blauem unb ben 3tod son griinem Xufyt. 14* 28a3 fur Set* 
 ter ift angenet)m? 15* Mattes, trodenes ^Better ift angenetjm* 16* 
 £)a3 £eber beS ©attters ift gelB, bad £eber Deo (Sdjufyma&erS ift 
 fd)war3* 11* £er ©attler t)at gelBeS Seber, unD ber ©d)ul)mad)er 
 l)at fd}tt>ar$e<3» 18* £aBen @ie meijjes ober Blaue3 papier? 19* 
 3d) I)aBe BlaueS unb mein Setter $o.t weifjeS* 20* ipat ber ©cfynei* 
 ber graueS ober rotljes Zu§ ? 21* Sr f)at ioeber graues nod) rot^es. 
 er l)at grimes, MaueS, fd^tt>argc3 unb BrauneS* 
 
 Exercise 25. 5IufgaBe 25 ; 
 
 1. The weather is warm. 2. Warm weather is pleasant. 
 3. What kind of weather is always pleasant 1 4. Dry weather 
 is pleasant. 5. Is your cloth coarse 1 6.1 have coarse sloth, 
 and my cousin has fine cloth. 1. The cloth of the tailor is blue, 
 the leather of the saddler is yellow. 8. The tailor has blue 
 cloth, and the saddler has yellow leather. 9. Is the saddler's 
 coat of blue, of green, or of black cloth 1 10. Tlis coat is of 
 
NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES LESSON XV. 47 
 
 black cloth, and his cloak is of gray cloth. 11. Hard lead is 
 not good, good lead is not hard. 12. Is the cloth of the tailor 
 blue, brown, green, red, or black 1 13. The tailor has black, 
 blue, green, gray and red cloth. 14. This paper is white, and 
 that is blue. 15. My cousin has blue paper, and his friend has 
 white. 16. This tailor is making a coat from coarse gray cloth. 
 3 1. That smith has good steel and good iron. 18. The iron of 
 our friend, the smith, is very good. 19. With whose good 
 pencil are you writing your friend a letter 1 20. From whose 
 blue cloth is the tailor making his coat 1 
 
 LESSON XV. Cection XV. 
 
 NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives, when following biefer, or any word of that 
 class,* and referring to the same noun, are of the 
 
 NEW DECLENSION. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 N. fctef-er 
 
 gute^ 
 
 Mef-e3 gute ; this good. 
 
 G. Hef-ed 
 
 guten; 
 
 blef-e3 guten; of this good. 
 
 D. tief-em 
 
 guten; 
 
 fcief-ent guten; to or for the good. 
 
 A. fcief— ert 
 
 guten; 
 
 fcief-t$ gute ; this good. 
 
 2. FORM OF 
 
 THE NEW DECLENSION IN THE NOMINATIVE, 
 
 Attributive. 
 
 Predicative. 
 
 SfHer. Qut-e 
 
 ©tafl 
 
 ift f)axU All good steel is hard. 
 
 SlUeS gut-e 
 
 (Sifett 
 
 ift $art. All good iron is hard. 
 
 £er ^art-e 
 
 @ta$l 
 
 ift gut. The hard steel is good. 
 
 !DaS iart-e 
 
 etfen 
 
 i]t gut. The hard iron is good. 
 
 £)tefer fdjon-e 
 
 SSogel 
 
 ifl i»eig. This heautiful bird is white. 
 
 2>tefe$ fdjon-e 
 
 Xutf) 
 
 ift tteig. This beautiful cloth is white. 
 
 Ssber gut-e 
 
 2Karat 
 
 ifl e^rtidj. Every good man is honest. 
 
 * Namely : after, ber, emtger, etUdjer, jeber, jener, mcmc&er, foldtar and 
 ttctt&er, (L. X. 4. § 31. § 32). 
 
48 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 Attributive. 
 
 Predicative. 
 
 SebeS gut-e itinb ift e^rlicf). Every good child is honest 
 
 Setter etjrltdj-e SWatm ift gut. That honest man is good. 
 
 SeneS e^rlid)-e $htb ijl gut. That honest child is good. 
 
 SKcmdjer gut— e Sftann ijl arm. Many a good man is poor. 
 
 9Jknd)e3 gut-e $inb ijl arm. Many a good child is poor. 
 
 SBeldjer jfolje SSftann ijl gut? "What proud man is good ? 
 
 3BcId&e3 flolje ^inb ift gut? What proud child is good ? 
 
 3. The final syllable of member, folder and tteld)er, which 
 by its characteristic ending, denotes the gender of the noun, is 
 sometimes dropped ; in which case the adjective that follows 
 is inflected according to the old declension (L. XIV. 2.) : 
 
 SJtondj gut-er %)Um instead of 9ftatt$er gut-e SJtowu 
 'Bold) groB-e$ %u<$ instead of <Bold)t$ grofc-e Zud). 
 
 4. The adjective with the article is often, for the sake of 
 special emphasis, placed after the noun : 
 
 £)a§ SBunbmp, ba$ jjerberMtdje. The ruinous treaty (the treaty, the 
 
 ruinous). 
 
 5. Adjectives denoting the material of which a thing is made, 
 are formed from nouns by suffixing e, ett, ertu In such case 
 a, and u often take the Umlaut : 
 
 lebent, leathern from Seber, leather; 
 
 golbett; golden, gold (made of gold) from ©olb, gold ; 
 
 ^oljertt, wooden from £ot&/ wood ; 
 
 gld'fmt, glass (made of glass) from ©laS, glass. 
 
 £at ber Rod) ben l^erttett c ^ er ^ ett Has tne C00 ^ ttie wooden or the 
 
 jleinernen £tfdj ? stone table ? 
 
 2)er ©hitler $at ba3 ftlfcrne Sintett* The scholar has the silver inkstand, 
 fafs unb iclj ba$ gldfente. and I the glass one. 
 
 SB eifpiel e* 
 
 SflleS gute ©dforettyatfer tft glatt. 
 £>afcen <Ste ba3 rot^e ©tegetfa-tf? 
 ©effort btefeS alte $ferb btm alten 
 
 gtetfdjer? 
 3eber »irHt<§ gute unb nft&U<$e Sflenfcfy 
 
 tft jletjHg* 
 ©c^ett @tc ba£ glanjenbe ©is uttb ben 
 
 t»ei{?ett ©dmee auf jenem BohenSerge? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 All good writing-paper is smooth. 
 Have you the red sealing-wax ? 
 Does this old horse belong to the 
 
 old butcher ? 
 Every really good and useful man 
 
 (human being) is diligent. 
 Do you see the glittering ice and 
 
 the white snow on yonder high 
 
 mountain ? 
 
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 49 
 
 X)er junge Sttamt fc^reiftt bem alten The young man is writing the old 
 
 Server einen SBrtcf. teacher a letter. 
 
 SJerjttetjUjrtg ift ber etnjtge adjieSlifye* Despair is the only genuine athe- 
 
 iSmuS. — 9J. ism. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Slbcr, but; 
 
 Slit,- old; 
 
 Slrttg, polite, agreeable; 
 
 SSraun, brown; 
 
 2>umm, stupid; 
 
 Sleijug, diligent, industrious ; 
 
 ©eiuig, enough; 
 
 Sung, young; 
 
 Sang/ long ; 
 £)cr £e(;rling, the apprentice; 
 2)er 2)iaurer, the mason ; 
 
 Der Sictfjel, the chisel; 
 
 2)cr 9ftcn)\1), the man, human being; 
 
 Steu, new; 
 
 ©djarf, sharp: 
 
 <5tol$, proud; 
 T>tx £tfd)ler, the cabinet-maker; 
 
 Unjufvieben, discontented, dis- 
 satisfied ; 
 
 SHefleidjt, perhaps; 
 
 Bufrieben, contented. 
 
 Exercise 26. 
 
 SUfga&e 26* 
 
 1. 3$ $a£e fcao feinc £ud) unb ber ©djneibet X)at bas grofte £ud). 
 
 2. liefer tRod ift tton ^em feincn £ud)e, jener ift son bem grofcen. 
 
 3. £er |arte (SraM tfi gut, ba$ lvetdje 23(ei ift gut. 4. ©tefer junge 
 Sftaurcr lauft jeneS junge $ferb. 5. 3ntc3 junge $[crD gel)brt bie^ 
 fern jungen SRaurer. 6, ©djrei&en @te ben (angen 33rief mit bem 
 alten 33(etfHfte te3 cirmen Sellings? 1. ©e^ort ticfer fdjarfe SMs* 
 pel bem fleijjtgen £tfdjter? 8.3ft Jeter rcid)e SOtaun jufricten? 
 9. 3ft ntdjt jeber gufriebene Sftamt reid) genua, ? 10. Seller fleU 
 §igc Sftatm ift un^ufriebert? 11. ©djrei&t jetter arme (Sdutter mit 
 bem neuen SletjHfte? 12. 9ftandjer (lolje Sftenfdj ift bumm, akx 
 ijielleic^t nid)t jeber. (L. X. 3.) 13. 3ft atfes trucfeue SBetter an* 
 genefym? 14. SSeldjcS gute Sebet l)at ber alte ©attfer, bas getbe, 
 tat griine, bas Mane, ober bas fdjwarge? 15. SSerfcmft ber arttge 
 itaufmamt ba$ mi\)t papier, ober ba3 Heme? 16. 3ft after gute 
 6tat)l tyart, unb alley gute 25(ei metg ? It. 3^ toeldjem fatten 
 Saute lefet ber Stvbar ? 18. 3ft nid)t jeber faule ©djitfer ungufrie* 
 ten, ober nuffen ©ie nicfyt ? 
 
 Exercise 21. 
 
 2htfga&e 21. 
 
 1. Tliis warm -weather is very pleasant. %. Is that young 
 cabinet-maker the good friend of the old mason? 3. Is every 
 
50 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES LESSON XVI. 
 
 proud man stupid? 4. Is not every industrious man contented? 
 5. Is not that indolent apprentice very discontented ? 6. Is 
 the new chisel of the young cabinet-maker sharp? T. Who 
 lias the sharp chisel of the poor glazier ? 8. This polite scholar 
 is writing the old teacher the long letter. 9. Has every con- 
 tented man money enough ? 10. Has this friend, the old gla- 
 zier, the green, the blue, or the red glass? 11. Is the new 
 cloak of the old mason of the fine cloth, or of the coarse ? 12. 
 h the new cloth of the saddler gray, green, blacK, or blue? 
 13. The old saddler has the blue, the gray, the green and the 
 black cloth, and the tailor has the red, the white, and the yel- 
 low. 14. Do you understand what that poor old man says? 
 15. With what old pencil is he writing that long letter ? 16. 
 Does any body know in which new house the rich mi^er lives ? 
 It. Why does the poor peasant buy the fine cloth? 18. The 
 new cloak of the old baker is very good. 
 
 
 LESSON XVI. £ection XVI. 
 
 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives, when following mem, or a word of that class,* 
 and referring to the same noun, are of the 
 
 MIXED DECLENSION. 
 
 Masc. Neut. 
 
 N. mem gut-er, mem gut— ed, my good ; 
 G. meitteS gut-en, memeS gut-en, of my good; 
 D. meiuem gut-en, meiuem gut-en, to or for my good ; 
 A. mcinen gut-en, mem gut-e3, my good. 
 
 2. As mein, bem, etc., have the same form for each gender 
 {». e. in nom. masc. and neut.) the adjective following them 
 takes the characteristic ending (L. X. 4.), thus indicating the 
 gender of its noun : 
 
 ° Namely: bem, eut, fein, u)r, unfer, euer and feinj (L XII 4. § 32. 
 §33). 
 
M.IXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 51 
 
 Sin att-cr Stfaim, an old man. Sin att-eS $ferb, an old horse. 
 
 5J?ein nen-cr SHfdj, my new table. <Sein neu-e3 23ud), his new bcok. 
 3$r eigen-cr £ut, your own hat. itnfer etgen-ev &au$, our own house. 
 
 3. Gii] en, as denoting possession, often requires with " own," 
 in translation, both a preposition and a pronoun, and sometimes 
 only the latter : 
 
 fatten @ie cm eigeneS .Simmer? Have you a room of your own! 
 
 3$ 6a(>e fetn cigeneS ©elb. I have no money of my own. 
 
 &at cr ntd)t3 StgeneS ? Has he nothing of his own ? 
 
 3d) fcfyriefc eg mit eigcncr £anb. I wrote it with my own hand. 
 
 (Sr fd)viefc e3 mit eigener £anb. . He wrote it with his own hand. 
 
 ENDINGS OF THE MIXED DECLENSION NOMINATIVE. 
 
 A good man is honest. 
 A good child is honest. 
 His honest friend is good. 
 His honest child is good. 
 My beautiful bird is white. 
 My beautiful cloth is whit* 
 Your old tree is large. 
 Your old house is large. 
 Our large tree is old. 
 Our large house is old. 
 No good man is idle. 
 No good child is idle. 
 
 4. Sin is also a numeral answering to one, and is then pro- 
 nounced with a stronger emphasis, and often written with a 
 capital initial : 
 
 3d) r)cu>enur (SinSBud), unb er fyatbret. I have but one book, and he haa 
 
 three. 
 Cr Iernt mefr in Stnem Sage aU id) He learns more in one day than I 
 in jroei. (do L. 38. 7.) in two. 
 
 5. (Etrt and fetn, when not followed by an adjective or a noun, 
 are infleoted according to the old declension (L. XIV. 3.). In 
 thenom. andacc.neut. the e of the final syllable is often omitted : 
 
 ©ic tyaften jroet $ferbe, id) Ijak eineS You have two horses, I have one, 
 (or ein$),unter§at feme? (orfein§). and he has none. 
 
 
 Attributive 
 
 • 
 
 Predicative, 
 
 ©in 
 
 gut-er 
 
 Sttann 
 
 if* 
 
 e^rltdj. 
 
 (Sin 
 
 gut-e$ 
 
 ^tnb 
 
 ill 
 
 c^rltd). 
 
 ©cin 
 
 earlier)— er 
 
 greunb ifi 
 
 gut. 
 
 (Bern 
 
 e$rltd)-e3 
 
 £tnb 
 
 if! 
 
 gut. 
 
 2Mn 
 
 [d)cn-cr 
 
 23oget 
 
 if! 
 
 roeip* 
 
 Sflein 
 
 fdjim-ey 
 
 Zu$ 
 
 if! 
 
 tt>ei§. 
 
 3$r 
 
 alt-er 
 
 Saum 
 
 if! 
 
 grop. 
 
 S^r 
 
 alt-e3 
 
 £au3 
 
 if! 
 
 gro^. 
 
 Unfer 
 
 grop-er 
 
 SBvium 
 
 ill 
 
 alt. 
 
 Unfer 
 
 gro£-e3 
 
 £>au3 
 
 ill 
 
 alt. 
 
 $ein 
 
 gut-er 
 
 Warn 
 
 ill 
 
 trd'ge. 
 
 £etn 
 
 gut-e3 
 
 £inb 
 
 ill 
 
 trcige. 
 
52 LESSON XVI. 
 
 2% $abt jwet £tf<$e, etoer tji neu, ber I have two tables, one is new and 
 
 cmbere alt. the other is old. 
 
 (Enter Ue&t oft rMS em Smberer $ajjt. One often loves what another hates. 
 
 6. Sin is frequently preceded by the definite article and 
 then follows the new declension : 
 
 £>er ©toe ijliUgrog, ber Stobere ift in (The) one is too large, the other is 
 
 f[t\ft t too small. 
 
 Sdj $afce tteber ba3 ©toe nod) ba§ 2Irt* I have neither the one nor the 
 
 bere. other. 
 
 23eifpiele. Examples. 
 
 Sfleto neuer Seu^ter fletjt auf metoem My new candlestick is standing 
 
 neuen Stifle, on my new table. 
 
 Sd) tyabe eto pteS 33udt) unb einen gu* I have a good book and a good 
 
 ten SBIeifiift; pencil. 
 
 3$ tya&e ©toen, Uttb meitt SBrubcr Ijat I have one and my brother has 
 
 bret. three. 
 
 £>a$ cjan&e SGBeltotI ift ettt ufertofeS The whole universe is a shoreless 
 
 Stteer.— SB. sea. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Sfucf), also, too; 
 
 (Eljrltdj, honest ; 
 
 ■^iibfcr)/ pretty, handsome; 
 
 Se, ever; 
 •Dag J!ainee't, the camel; 
 2)er StcCpit&'n, the captain; 
 
 Jllein, small, little; 
 TJe** $lempner, the tinman ; 
 '£>er Soffel, the spoon; 
 
 Sifted), yet, still ; 
 
 SftiUplid), useful ; 
 
 SRetf, ripe; 
 2)a§ ©d&tff, the ship; 
 
 <Starf, strong; 
 SDaS £l)ter, the animal; 
 
 £obt, dead; 
 
 £reit, faithful; 
 
 SBacfyfant, watchful; 
 £)er SBctgcn, the carriage; 
 
 SSirfltd), really. 
 
 Exercise 28. SlufgaBc 28. 
 
 1. (Sic IjaBen 3^r feine^ £u&), unb ber @d)ttetfc>er l)at fern groBeS 
 £ud). 2. SRetrt alter gremtb I)at em pbfdjeg $fero unb einen aU 
 hn SBagen. 3. £>as ^ameel ift ein groges, ftarfe3 unb fefyr nit^ 
 licfyeS £l)ier. 4. SDer treue, njadjfame £unb unfereS guten greunbeS 
 ift tobt. 5. 3ft nnfer alter greunb nod) in unferm ncuen ©arten? 
 6. 3§r tite* Sreunb ift in feiuem fd)Bnen, alien ©arten. 7. £aBen 
 @ie einen fluten, reifen 2tyfet? 8. 3$ ^Be f einen re*ifen Styfel* 
 
MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 53 
 
 9. 2£em Dtrlauft bet itaufmann fein grofjeg ncue3 ©djijf? lO* 
 £r aerfauft c3 feinem attcn greimbe, bem ^apttan. II* £at metrt 
 junger Setter mem Halted, mcht gelfcg, otcr ntein toeifjeS papier? 
 
 12. Sr $at 3^ wetj)e3, nnfc fein guter greunb r)at 3^ MaueS. 13. 
 3ft fein falted ^Better angenefym? 14. ©djreifren @ie mtt mciitcm 
 alten 35IeijHftc oter mit 3l)rem nenen? 15. 2Baa fur ein £t)ier tjl 
 3fyr alter ^)unD? 16. 2Ba6 fiir ein tteueS ©dn'ff fauft £cr itapitau, 
 ein groge^ otcr ein Hemes ? It. 3f* ein nurllid) efyrtidjer, guter 
 SRann je faul? 18. 3ft ein fauler Sftann je lmrHid) gufriefcen? 
 19. Der ^lempner Ijat 3v r aires Sfteffer nnb aud) 3^*en alten ScffeL 
 
 Exercise 29. SI uf gate 29* 
 
 1. Our old friend is still in our new house. 2. Your young 
 friend has our old horse, and also our old carriage. 3. What 
 kind of black cloth has our old friend, the merchant*? 4. He 
 has no black cloth, but he has his good blue cloth. 5. Does 
 the camel live in a warm or in a cold country ? 6. Is the 
 camel a large, strong and useful animal ? t. Has your good 
 friend a faithful, watchful dog ? 8. Has our old friend, the cap- 
 tain, a new ship, or an old one? 9. Have you a large tree in 
 your new garden? 10. I am writing with your new pencil; 
 have you my old one? 11. Is a faithful, watchful dog a useful 
 animal ? 12. Is an indolent scholar faithful, honest and useful ? 
 
 13. Has the son of the old peasant a ripe apple? 14. The cap- 
 tain is selling the merchant his beautiful new ship. 15, Are 
 you buying a young horse, or an old one ? 16. I am buying 
 a young horse, and my old friend is selling an old one. It. 
 Has the scholar my white paper or your blue ? 18. He has 
 my blue paper and your new pencil. 19. Has the child a 
 small spoon ] 
 
54 LESSON XVII. 
 
 LESSON XVII. faction XVII. 
 
 1. CONNECTED VIEW OP THE OLD, NEW AND MIXED DECLENSIONS 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 OLD DECLENSION. NEW DECLENSION. MIXED DECLENSION. (L. XIY. 3.) 
 
 N. gut-er; ber gut— e ; mem gut-er; (btef-er.) 
 
 G. gut-e3 (en) ; be^ gut-en; metne$ gut-en; (bief-es.) 
 
 D. gut-em; bem gut-en; meinem gut-en; (bief-em.) 
 
 A. gut-en; ben gut-en; metnen gut-en; (bief-en.) 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 N. gut-e3; ba3 gut— c ; mein gut-c3; (btef-e3.) 
 
 G. gut-eS (en) ; bes gut-en; metneS gut-en; (sief-es.) 
 
 D. gut-em; b em gut-en; meinem gut-en; (btef-em.) 
 
 A. gut-e$; bat $ut-e; mein gut— eS ; (bief-e3.) 
 
 2. WORDS REQUIRING THE ADJECTIVE IN THE NEW DECLENSION. 
 Masc. Neut. Masc. Neut Masc. Neut. Masc. Neut. 
 
 after, atleS; einiger, einigcs ; Jener, jeneS; n>el$er, tr>elc^es* 
 ber f baS; etltcfyer, etltcfceSj manner, memoes; (L. 15.) 
 biefer, biefeS; jeber, jebeS; folder, foIcfyeS; 
 
 3. WORDS REQUIRING THE ADJECTIVE IN THE MIXED DECLENSION. 
 
 betn, ein, euer, itjr, fetn, mein, fetn, unfer. (L. 16.) 
 
 Seifpiele. - Examples. 
 
 £)er iungc Skater tfi ein gefc^idft'er The young painter is a skillful ar- 
 
 tfimfHer. tist, 
 
 ©tefer gefd) : .tfte MttfHer ift eitt guter This skillful artist is a good friend. 
 
 grettttb* 
 
 <£)er ctlte ©ctttler beef t ben Coffer mit The old saddler coders the trunk 
 
 Iteuem Sebcr. with ne-w leather. 
 
 (Er becft ben 3Hf$ mit einem grimen He covers the table with a green 
 
 £u<$e, cloth. 
 
VIEW OF THE OLD, NEW AND MIXED DECLENSIONS. 
 
 55 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SBijfCf cross, ill-natured; 
 
 Gtfcrn, iron (adjective) ; 
 !£)a3 ©efajj, the vessel; 
 
 ©tafcriif glass (adjective) ; 
 
 ©latt, smooth; 
 
 £>a|Jen, to hate; 
 
 &a$li§, ugly, ill-formed; 
 
 £bl$ern, wooden; 
 ©er tfcffel, the kettle; 
 £)er Jtnopf, the button, knob. 
 2)er $ned)t, the servant, slave; 
 
 ©er $rug, the pitcher; 
 
 $ttpfem# copper (adjective), 
 §S8e|Tiitgen» brass (adjective) ; 
 
 2)cr JWagel, the nail; 
 
 £>as> iPulser, the powder; 
 
 £)a$ ©d&log, the lock; 
 
 £)a3 @c!)veibpapier, the writing- 
 paper. 
 ©e^Ctt, to see (It fen, -L 7.) ; 
 
 Dcr S>erratt'.cr. the traitor. 
 
 Exercise 30. 
 
 Slitfga^c 30. 
 
 1. 3$ tyafee 35* frfneg £ud) unb ten grofjen $nopf beS jtcmf* 
 manned. 2. Teeft ber alte (Sattlcr ten alien £tjc() mit griincm ober 
 mit Mauem £u$e ? 3. (fr bedt ben £ifd) mit biefem grofcen griU 
 nen 2!ud)c. 4. Unfer lunger grcuno §at unfer JungeS §)ferb, 5. 
 £er jungc Sftann tterfauft ba5 Ijajjlidje f)ferb* G. §nt ber fcbfe 
 (Sd)micb eirten grojjen SRagel, oscr ben fupfernen $ejjel bc3 $auf* 
 manned? T. (Er tjat fcin gutes Sifcn, after er fiat guten @ta£l uiio 
 gute« .ftupfer. 8, 3cncr altc SD^ann ift mcin alter SfJadjBar. 9> 
 SSem gel)6rt biefeS nene ©djlof) ? 10. 3d) l)ak fetnneues @d)lo£, 
 11, ipakn @ie iucijjcs papier ober Maued? 12.3d) §a£e bas 
 tretge papier metnes 33ruber3, unb er i;at me in HaucS papier. 13, 
 2ltlc3 gute ©djretfyapier ift glatt, after mdt atteS glatte papier ift 
 gut. 14. $a$i nid)t jcter gute 9ftenfdj einen SSerrat^er ? 15. £a3 
 Sag ift ein ^erneS ©efafju 16. £er ^cjjel ift ein etfcrneS, fupfer- 
 ne$, ober mejjingeneS ®efajjj, IT, So ift ber glaferne tog ? 18, 
 £)er $ned)t l)at einen ^rug, after ntdjt einen gla'fernen. 19,3d) 
 ^afte gutew $ulser, after lein gates Slet. 
 
 Exercise 31. 
 
 2tufgafte 31, 
 
 1. Tlie ill-natured tailor has his fine cloth and the pretty but 
 ton of his good friend. 2. Is all smooth writing-paper good? 
 3. Is not all good writing-paper smooth % 4. To whom does 
 this coarse powder belong? 5. The hunter has fine powder, 
 but he has no coarse. 6. The iron kettle of the servant is large, 
 his copper kettle is small. 1. Do you know where my glass 
 
56 LESSON XVII.. 
 
 pitcher is 1 8. 1 see your glass pitcher on your new table 
 9. Does not every honest man hate a traitor'? 10. This agree- 
 able child has a wooden -horse and a large iron ring. 11. Have 
 you a brass nail or an iron one ] 12. A cask is a large wooden 
 vessel ; a kettle is an iron, a copper, or a brass one. 13. I 
 have my white paper and the white paper of the scholar. 14. 
 The young saddler is covering the old trunk with black leather. 
 15. Does the ugly man cover his table with the blue cloth, 
 or with the green'? 16. He covers his old table with a red 
 cloth. 17. Which new book have you 1 ? 18. I have no new 
 book. 19. I have white paper and he has yellow. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. Section XVIII. 
 
 INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 
 
 1. The words Jebmnamt, jemano, man, niemanb, nidjtS and 
 ettt)CtS or ftd3,are indefinite pronouns. 
 
 2. Sefccrmcum is declined like a noun of the old declension ; 
 Jemanfc and ntemanb may be declined in the same way, or like 
 an adjective of the old declension (§ 59). Wlan, ntdjtS and tt\va$ 
 are indeclinable : 
 
 ©tc fpredjen »on etwaS 9?euem. You speak of something new. 
 
 3d) fpred)e tton nidjts}* I do not speak of any thing. 
 
 3. 3^ermamt answers in signification to every body : 
 3ebermctrut §ctt fcine fdjroctdje ©ette. Every body has his weak side. 
 
 4. 3entcmb answers to any body, somebody, and etftCtS to any 
 thing, something : 
 
 ©efyen Sic Semcmb ? Do you see any body(or somebody) 1 
 
 3a, id) fe v c Semanb. Yes, I see somebody. 
 
 $ft en ©ie ntd)t (StiMS? Do you not hear something? 
 
 3a, id) lykt ct»a$, or roaS* Yes, I hear something. 
 
 5. 9?kmaut> answers to nobody, not any body ; and iiidjtS to 
 nothing, not any thing : 
 
 SWlentanb Iofct mid), unb id) lok Sftie* ISTobody praises me, and I do not 
 ntanben. praise any body. 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 57 
 
 ©i$ttfcn <3ie 3l)rem ©ruber ntcfytS ? L>o you not send your brother ai.j) 
 
 thing. 
 
 6. The negative particle, nid)t, is used with jemcmfc and ctttaa 
 only in interrogative sentences ; hence for the twofold forms 
 of expression in English, there is but one in German ■ 
 
 34 fefje Sficmcnbcn. 
 £r Jauft m$t3. 
 
 ( I do not see any body. 
 ( Literally : I see nobody, 
 j He does not buy any thing, 
 ( Literally : He buys nothing. 
 
 7. (Sitter, (one), and fewer, (no one. nobody), are also called 
 indefinite pronouns : 
 
 3u rein ifi ntdt)t ©tner im Stetdj, — £. Not one in the kingdom is toopur* 
 tfetner ttHtjjte ben -Manteii. No one knew the name. 
 
 SSeifptcIc. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 3$ §i>re Semanben, after idj fetye 9?ie<* I hear somebody, but I do not see 
 
 mcmben. 
 flaufen <5te nid)t etwad? 
 9?ein, id) faufe 5^tc^ta* 
 £afren Sie etn\i3 <Sd)5ne3 ? 
 Sdj f;a^e ct»a$ <Sdjone3. 
 Sebermann $ajjt unb seracfytet etnen 
 
 Serrd'ttyer. 
 
 any body. 
 Do you not buy something ? 
 JS'o, I do not buy any thiug. 
 Have you any thing beautiful ? 
 I have something beautiful. 
 Every body hates and despises a 
 
 traitor. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 ©efu'cfyen, to visit ; 
 £>er 23or)rer, the auger; 
 2)er §Bud)t)dnbler, the bookseller; 
 
 Sigeiura|?ig# selfish; 
 
 (£tn>a3, something, anything; 
 !£cr 5'uljrer, the guide, leader; 
 •Dcr £>oi>el, the plane; 
 
 3ebermann, everybody; 
 
 3emanb, anybody, somebody; 
 Der Rii]e, the cheese ; 
 
 T>aO> $tcib, the dress, garment; 
 
 T)a$ £ieb, the song; 
 
 £)er SJcaiS, the maize, Indian corn 
 9?id)ii3, nothing, not any thing, 
 9£iemanb, nobody, not anybody 
 Scaudjen, to smoke; 
 
 £)er ©djutymadjer, the shoemaker; 
 
 t)er Zal^a't, the tobacco; 
 
 £>er Seller, the plate ; 
 
 2)er Ucberfdju^, the overshoe. 
 
 Exercise 32. 
 
 ^ufgctfce 32. 
 
 1. SBarum Mt 3etermamt btefen ©duller? 2. Sebermann tfl 
 eigennii&ig. 3. £at S^mant meinen IMerfdmfy? 4. Der ©djutj* 
 matter macfct 3emantem etnen Uefcerfdju^. 5. Sftiemanfc hU ben 
 
08 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 $3ud$anbler, unb bei Sudjtj&nbler loH 9ttemanben. 6. S^mant 
 fcMdt bem tf nedjte einen neuen £oM nnb cinen neuen 23ot)rer. ?♦ 
 <Sd)tcfen ©ic tern ©c^neiber ben $nopf ? 8. 9Memanfc fcfyttft bem 
 (Sd^neibet ben $nopf nnb bag $feib. 9. Sefudjen ©ie 3cmanbcn ? 
 10, 3$ fcefudje Sentanben, after ntein grennb fcefud)t 9ttemanbcu. 
 lL tfawfen @ie ntcfyt etma^ ? 12. 3dj foufe nidjts, aber mein prater 
 fauft etmas. 13. $auft er etttas ©clones? 14. (Er lauft ctn?a8 
 9Ni|3ftdje3, after nidjts ©drones. 15. 9tancftt Semanb f)ter Saftaf ? 
 16. 9letn, 9ttemanb raudjt. It. 3emanb tjat ben Metier, ben $rug 
 wnb ben $afe nnferes ^itfjrerS. 18. 3emanb ftncjt, ftoren ©ie ba3 
 £teb ? 19. #affen ©ic 3cmanben? 20. Stein, id) fyaffe Pieman* 
 ben* 21. $auft 3ewaub ben £onig, ben 9flai$ nnb ben ^effel ? 
 
 Exercise 33. Stnfgafte 33. 
 
 1. Somebody is visiting our old guide. 2. Does any body 
 hate the bookseller % 3. No, and the bookseller does not hate 
 any body. 4. To whom does the peasant send the honey, the 
 maize and the cheese 1 5. He does not send any body the maize, 
 but he sells somebody the honey. 6. Why does every body 
 praise this child % 7. Is every body very selfish ? 8. Has not 
 somebody my plane % 9. No, nobody has your plane, but 
 somebody has the auger of the servant. 10. Is any body smok- 
 ing 1 ? 11. Is somebody singing a song? 12. Somebody has 
 my pitcher and my plate. 13. Do you not send somebody 
 the money % 14. No, I do not send any body (I send nobody ; 
 see 6) the money. 15. Does any body send the tailor the dress 
 and the button? 16. The tailor sends somebody the dress. 
 IT. Has the cook any body's kettle ? 18. Yes, he has one. (L.16. 5) 
 19. 1 have somebody's nail. 20. Have you any body's tobacco? 
 21. Is any body everybody's friend 1 
 
INDEFINITE PRONOUN SftcUt* 59 
 
 LESSON XIX. Section XIX. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUN 9ft a tt. 
 
 1. The pronoun man (like the French on) indicates persona 
 in a general and indefinite manner : 
 
 man barf m*t ju »td fWcn. i ? n « s 7 ll0 " ld * ct slee P to ° much ' or 
 
 ( People should not sleep too much. 
 
 SBa* trfatft man in ©riManb ? J W , hat *° *** *?* ia Greenland I 
 
 ( What does one drink in Greenland? 
 
 matt '0 felten }U Utsfe. J People seldom eat too little; or 
 
 { One seldom eats too little. 
 
 man m einen £*rannen. \ f / hat f • *"?* ; " 
 
 ( A tyrant is hated. 
 
 cm « .j- r t •*• rr ( People flatter her too much ; or 
 
 man fd>metd)elt tl;r jit fc$r. 1 «. • * u a ^ i 
 
 1 ' ( She is too much flattered. 
 
 2. 9ftatt is used only m the nominative ; the oblique cases 
 being supplied by other woi ds : 
 
 man ifjt urn fetn 2tUn ju er^altcn. One eats in order to preserve one's 
 
 (his) life. 
 (Er wilt einen nie r)6ren. lie will never listen to one. 
 
 man foil fetnen 9?dd)ften rote ficr; fetfcft One should love o»e's (his) neigh • 
 liefccn* bor as one's se{/" (himself). 
 
 3. ©ar (as also the more emphatic gemj imt> gar), before a 
 negative, answers to at all, after a negative : 
 
 (Er r)at gar nicfjtS. He has nothing at all. {at all nothing), 
 
 (E3 ijr gar nicr)t fait. It is not atf aZZ cold. (at all not cold). 
 
 3$ rceip ganj unb gar ntdjtS ba&on. I know nothing at all of it (thereof). 
 
 Setfptele. Examples. 
 
 28a3 man nidjt sjerfte^i', fieftj?:' man "What one does not understand, one 
 
 mdjt. — ©♦ does not possess. 
 
 <£$ i|l jumetten $o$e 2Bei3r)ett jtt »er* It is sometimes great wisdom to 
 
 geff'en tt>a$ man rceij}. — ©* forget what one knows. 
 
 SJBetj} man »er biefe Mut 1 ge %$at »er- Is it known who committed this 
 
 iiot'e? bloody deed? 
 
 mit ber 3eit unb mtt ber ©ebulb' lemt With (the) time and with (the) pa- 
 man 2ule3. tience one learns every thing. 
 
 Urn glutftid) jit fetn fcebarf man nur In order to be happy one needs onlv 
 
 3ufrieb'eri&eii. contentment. 
 
60 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 2ftan gtautJt e3 gar ntdjt weld) eintoni* 
 geS Sefen man iuirb, mm man fid) 
 immer in bcm Qixkl feincr Siebling^ 
 fcegriffe tyerumbrcfjt. — $. 
 
 One can not at all imagine what 
 monotonous being one become* 
 if one constantly remains (turb 
 one's self) in the circle of one' 
 favorite notions. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SBefttyen, to possess; 
 
 ganger to catch (§78); 
 
 ginben, to find; 
 
 $urd)ten, to fear, 
 
 ©emot/nlid), generally; 
 
 ©laubcn, to believe; 
 £>er .ftrieg, the war; 
 
 £eid)t, easily, readily; 
 £>er Sftarmor, the marble; 
 
 $flan, (see 1.) one; 
 
 9htr, only, but; 
 
 £>a3 Slufjtanb, (the) Russia; 
 £)er <5eefmnb, the seal; 
 
 <3cfyr, very, very much; 
 
 ©clten, seldom; 
 
 2Hel, much; 
 
 SBd^renb, while; 
 
 2Bafyrfd)einltd), probable; 
 £)er SBaEftfd), the whale; 
 
 Sffienig, little, few; 
 
 2Bitnfd)en, to wish; 
 
 .Sit&erlctjjtg, reliable. 
 
 Exercise 34. 
 
 Slnfgafce 34, 
 
 1. 2Co finbet man ben Sftdrmor? 2. 2Ba3 fagt ntdtt son bent 
 $riege in 3ftujjlairt>? 3. SJlan tyort ttiet son bem ^riege, after nld)t$ 
 3ui>crfa jjigeS. 4. 3ft an lofct gembljnUd) toa% man liefct. 5. Sttan 
 befilpt ntd)t was man nid)t »erjh$t» 6. 2ft an ift felten nn$mner>en 
 anifyrenb man arbeitet. 1. $kn finbet jejtf meljr (Mb al$ ©Ufrer. 
 8. £a3 Setter ift gar nic^t fait. 9. (Er |at gar fein (Mb, unb id) 
 fyafce nnr fcljr ftcntg. 10. S3o fangt man ben SBattftfd) nnb ben 
 (Seel)unb? 11. 3n was fiir einem Sanbe finbet manbenSBolf? 
 12. 2Ba3 cr 30rcm grctmbe fagt ift gar ntdjt it>aX)rfc^ein!id). 13, 
 SSJlan fllaubt Ici^t toa& man tt>iinfd)t ober fiird)tet. 14. 2htf tt>a$ 
 fiir papier fdjretiJen <3te ben 33ricf ? 15. 3$ $<tfce gar fein papier, 
 id) fd)rei6e feincn 23rtef. 
 
 Exercise 35. 2htf<jafce 35* 
 
 1. Is one not generally contented while one is working 1 2. 
 In what country is the black marble found 1 3. Is nothing re- 
 liable heard from the war in Russia 1 4. In what kind of watei 
 is the whale found % 5. Is the seal caught easily ? 6. My 
 friend has no money at all, and I have but very little. T. Wha 4 
 is said is not at all probable, but he believes it, for he wishei 
 
PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE. 61 
 
 it. 3. Does one believe easily what one fears % 9. What is 
 said of the war 1 10'. Much is said of the war, but it is not be- 
 lieved. 11. Our old neighbor is seen very seldom. 12. Whose 
 pencil has the child 1 13. It has no pencil at all, it has my 
 new knife. 14. What kind of a book is the scholar reading ? 
 1 5. He is reading no book at all, he is reading a letter. 
 
 «» ■ e ■» «^~g»- 
 
 LESSON XX. Uti\o\\ XX. 
 
 1. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE -DATIVE. 
 
 2lu3, out, out of; au£er, without, out of; cet, by > with; Un* 
 nen, within; eutgegeu, against, toward; gegenu&er, over against, 
 opposite; gcmajj, conformable; tuit, with ; itdd), to, toward; 
 nadjfl, next to ; nefcft, beside, including ; o£, over, on, on ac- 
 count of; fctmmt, together with; feit, since; ttott, of, from ; $u, 
 to, at, by, in; guunfcer, against, contrary to. These prepositions 
 all govern the dative only. 
 
 2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 £urcfy, through, by, by means of; fur, for, instead of; gegett, 
 toward, about; o^ne, without, beside; [outer, without; um, 
 around, near, at, for ; uuter, against, in opposition to. These 
 prepositions all govern the accusative only. 
 
 3. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 2Iu, at, in, on, by, to; auf, upon, in, at, up, toward; gutter, 
 behind, after, back; iu, in, into, to; nt^m, by, near, beside; 
 it&er, over, above, at, about; uuter, under, below, among; oor, 
 before, ago; guHfcfyen, between, among. These prepositions 
 govern the dative, when used with verbs of rest, or with those 
 indicating motion within specified limits ; and the accusative, 
 when motion or tendency toward any place or object is indi- 
 cated: 
 
 (£r lauft in b em ©artnu He is running in the garden. 
 
 v£r lauft in ben ®arten. He is running into the garden. 
 
62 
 
 PREPOSITIONS — LESSON XX. 
 
 (£r Ifiuft auf bem Sife. 
 (Srlauft auf baa ki$. 
 (£r ijt in bent £aufe» 
 <£r aelit in baa £aua. 
 
 He is running on the ice. 
 
 He is running on ("o7itoP') the x«* 
 
 He is ira the house. 
 
 He goes into the house. 
 
 4. Prepositions are frequently contracted with the definite 
 article into one word : 
 
 Stm 
 
 (for an 
 
 Sfna 
 
 (for an 
 
 8af* 
 
 (for auf 
 
 SBeim 
 
 (for M 
 
 ©urdja 
 
 (for burdj 
 
 gura 
 
 (for fiir 
 
 £interm (for gutter 
 
 Snt 
 
 (for in 
 
 Sua 
 
 (for in 
 
 Bom 
 
 (for jjott 
 
 Sum 
 
 (for ju 
 
 Sur 
 
 (for ju 
 
 bem). (Sr ft|t ant £if$e. 
 
 baa), ©r gcfyt ana $enfler. 
 
 baa). ®r Iegt ea aufa SBrett. 
 
 bem)* (Er if! fceim SBruber. 
 
 baa). @r getyt bur^a $elb.- 
 
 baa). (£a ifl fura $inb. 
 
 beth). (Er ftetjt r;interm Baune. 
 
 htm)* <Sr ifl im £aufe. 
 
 baa), (Er ge|t ina £ctua. 
 
 bent). (Sr fomrnt »om Sftarfte. 
 
 bem). (Er geljt $um $retmbe. 
 ber; feminine gender, L. 23.) 
 
 He sits at the table. 
 He goes to the window. 
 He lays it on the board. 
 He is with the brother. 
 He goes through the field. 
 It is for the child. 
 He stands behind the fence. 
 He is in the house. 
 He goes into the house. 
 He comes from the market. 
 He goes to the friend. 
 
 examples op an, son, auf, and and na 
 
 (Er benft art feinen $reunb. 
 (Er fyridjt son feinent $reunbe. 
 (Sr ifl jtolj auf feinen 9tetd)tr;um. 
 2Baa rourbe aua bem ©hitler? 
 QaQ SBafier fdjmedt nad) (Elfin, 
 (Er ifl ein (Englanber $on (SefcurU 
 SCKer <Segen fommt son DBen. 
 (Er ifl faft »erser)rt' » on ber £%♦ 
 (ErleBtsonSSrobunb Seiit. 
 (SriflgroMon^erfon'. (§107) 
 
 He thinks of (about) his friend. 
 He speaks of his friend. 
 lie is proud of his wealth. 
 What became of the scholar ? 
 The water tastes o/iron. 
 He is an Englishman by birth. 
 Every blessing comes from above. 
 He is almost consumed with the heat 
 He lives on bread and wine. 
 He is tall in stature. 
 
 C- 
 
 Sctfptele, 
 
 fitner fler)t an htra ffettfier, unb ber 
 
 Slnbere gefjt an baa ^enfter. 
 £>er alte SWann unb fein alter greunb 
 
 getyen in baa alte £aua. 
 glicgt ber 23ogel in baa Simmer ober 
 
 in bem Simmer ? 
 2Bct urn Iegt ber Mner baa 4?oIj «e5en 
 
 benDfen? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 One is standing at the window, and 
 
 the other is going to the window. 
 The old man and his old friend are 
 
 going into the old house. 
 Is the bird flying into the room or 
 
 in the room. 
 Why does the waiter lay the wood 
 
 beside the stove ? 
 
^REPOSITIONS. 63 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 2)a3 %>anb, the ribbon ; 
 
 2>a$ 23ett, the bed ; 
 
 2)er Settler, the beggar; 
 
 2>a3 3Mnbctt>ovt, the conjunction; 
 
 ibmd), through; 
 2)a$ Senftcr, the window; 
 
 %ut, for (preposition) ; 
 
 ©egcn, toward, to, about; 
 £er ©vaben, the ditch; 
 £er teller, the cellar; 
 
 £cgcn, to place, lay. 
 9?eben, beside; 
 Dft, often; 
 Dljlte, without; 
 Sfojlig, rusty; 
 (Spriugcn, to spring; 
 ttm, around, near; 
 XltU)ofiicb, impolite; 
 2)a3 Skr&itft'iujjrocrt, theprepositi( 
 SBtDer, against. 
 
 Exercise 36. Slufgafce 36. 
 
 1. £>er Wlann ftet)t an bem Snifter, imb bafe&into gcl)t cm bag 
 genjfer. 2. Gr ftfct auf tent (StuMc unb fefjt fein S3ud) auf bag Sett. 
 
 3. £a£ $mt> ift Muter tern Dfcn ; bet £unb cjeljt tnnter ten Dfcn. 
 
 4. $5a$ papier ttecjt nefcen tern 23ud)e; ber <Sd)itler legt ben 23feU 
 fttft neben fcaS 33ud\ 5. £a3 £au3 ftel)t iiber tern better; bal 
 $fert> fprtngt ixkx fcen ©raften. 6. £er jimge 9ft a nit ftefyt unter 
 tern 23aume; fein greunb cjeljt unter ben SBaitm. t. £>er $auf* 
 mann \ktt i^or l»em &aufe; t>cr alte ©attler fommt !oor bag ^an^. 
 8. £er 23aum (tefct gtotfe^en bem £aufe unb bem ©artcn ; ber Wann 
 ge^t gnrifdjen ba3 £au3 unb ben ©arten. 9. <Der Heine Sogel fitegt 
 in fca3 3i m ^ e ^; flicgt er cwd) in bem 3twimcr? 10. £er S^er 
 ge^t burd) ben 2Batt> unt> urn tao gclr> ; er fyat cm rotted 23anb urn 
 feinen £ut. 11. (Sr ift untyoflidj gegen nnfern 9Rad;fcar. 12. 2Ba3 
 fagt er wirer Sbxtn Setter? 13. (M)en ©te ofme 3^en (Btod? 
 
 14. 3$ $afce rtic^to fur ben ©filler, bemt er ift nid)t meitt grennb. 
 
 15. 2£a3 ift ber Hnterfd)ieb jroifdjen "bemt 1 ' unb " flit?" 16. £eim 
 ift ein 33tttbe»ort, fiir ein S5erX;aUntgn>ort. 
 
 Exercise 37. 2(ufcjaBe 3*7* 
 
 1. Who is standing at that window ? 2. Before which large 
 table is the scholar sitting % 3. Is the old beggar coming be- 
 fore our house % 4. The dog is going behind the house ; the 
 garden lies behind the house. 5. Your new pencil is lying be- 
 side my new book ; why does the scholar lay his paper beside 
 my new book % 6. The child is playing between the house and 
 the garden ; the horse is going between the tree and the house. 
 
64 LESSON XXI. 
 
 7. The man is in the house, and his brother is going into the 
 house. 8. The dog springs over the ditch ; the room of the 
 tailor is over the room of the shoemaker. 9. The horse is 
 standing under the tree; the dog is going under the tree ; the 
 child is going to the window. 10. Who says any thing against 
 the miller ? 11. Why does the bird fly around the field and 
 the forest? 12. What kind of paper do you buy for the scholar 1 
 13. I do not buy any paper at all, for I have no money. 14. 
 Do you know the difference between a conjunction and a prep- 
 osition 1 15. The saddler is going through the forest; does 
 he go without his cane 1 ? 16. Is the scholar impolite to our 
 friend ? 
 
 LESSON XXI. £ection XXI. 
 
 NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. All verbs, in the present and imperfect, in negative sen- 
 tences, are employed, like to have and to be, in English, with- 
 out an auxiliary : 
 
 (£r if} ntdjt f)ier. He is not here. 
 
 (Er recent ntdjt f)ter. He does not live here. (He lives not here.) 
 
 (Er fjat e§ ntdjt. He has it not. 
 
 (£r fauft eS ntdjt. He does not buy it. (He buys it not.) 
 
 position of 9Md)t. 
 
 2. In simple sentences ntdjt follows the object of the vei 6 
 to which it refers. When, however, that which is in one clause 
 denied, is in another affirmed of a different object, ni^t precedes 
 the object : 
 
 3d) fjak ben £ut ntd)t. I have not the hat (the hat not) 
 
 (Sr lofct feiitftt ©cfjn ntd)t. He does not praise his son. 
 
 3d) $ak ben auten S3leifttft, after ntdjt I have the good pencil, but not the 
 
 baa papier. paper. 
 
 3d) tjafce ntdjt ben SBtetfttft, fonbern ba$ I have not the pencil, but the paper. 
 
 3>aftier. 
 
NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. 65 
 
 8. In interrogative sentences, mct;t frequently precedes the 
 object of the verb : 
 #akn <Sie ntdjt ben SBteijHft ? Have you not the pencil? 
 
 4. (Soncettt occurs only after a negative, of which it intro- 
 duces the opposite; while 
 
 2tkr is less strongly adversative ; often merely marking 
 something additional, and may follow either an affirmation or 
 negation : 
 
 (£r ijt nidjt reidj fonbern arm. He is not rich but poor. 
 
 Sr Ifl ntd£)t reid) a'&er jtolj. He is not rich but proud. 
 
 Sr ijt freigeMg after md)t reid). He is generous»but not rich. 
 
 (£r ijt ntct)t nur reid) fonbern audj fret' He is not only rich but also gen- 
 
 gebig. erous. 
 
 £>a$ SKeffer ijt ntct)t frfjarf fonbern The knife is not sharp but dull. 
 
 jtumpf. 
 
 5. Sfttdjt ttdjr ? not true % (is it not true % like the French 
 rCest-ce pas?) answers to our various interrogative phrases 
 after an assertion : 
 
 ©ie f enncn i$tt, \ You know him, do you not ? 
 
 (£r ifl Sljr ©ruber, J He is your brother, is he not? 
 
 ©te roirb gefjen, / She will go, will she not? 
 
 (£r $at e$ gefya'bt, \ ntdt)t roafyr ? He has had it, has n't he ? 
 
 SStr fonnen fyorcn, V "We can hear, can we not? 
 
 ©ie jtnb reid), J They are rich, are they not? 
 
 ©ie ftnb ntdjt reidj, / They are not rich, are they ? 
 
 6. Stidjt toafyv sometimes precedes the assertion ; and, occa- 
 sionally, the latter word is not expressed : 
 
 9ctd)t watyr, er ifl fetyr reidj? He is very rich, is he not? 
 
 ©ie fennen ben Sflann, nidjt? You know the man, do you not? 
 
 (Er ijt nod) Ijter, nidjt ? He is still here, is he not ? 
 
 7. 9U$t, when used with nod) (yet), should follow it; as should 
 also, fetn, immer, and other words similarly employed : 
 
 Sr ifl nod) ntcr)t r)ier* He is not yet here. (He is yet nothere.) 
 
 Sr toax nod) nie franf. He was never yet sick. (He was yet never 
 
 sick.) 
 $at er nod) ffin 23udj ? Has he no book yet ? (Has he yet no book?) 
 
 8 5ludj nicfyt, aud) feirt, etc., after a negation, are often best 
 
(56 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 rendered by neither nor ; not either, or some similar word or 
 phrase, not strictly literal : 
 
 3dj ftttge mdjt, er fingt I da not sing; neither 
 
 and) md)t. Joes he sing. 
 
 (£r ijr nid)t reid); <w$ t|1 He is not rich, neither 
 
 er nid)t arm* (nor) is he poor. 
 
 <Sie tyafcen hit ©elb, id) You have no money, 
 
 ftitdj nid)L nor I either. 
 
 (£r ift nie jufrt'ebett, id) He is never contented ; 
 
 0.U&) nidjt* neither am I. 
 
 (I do not sing: he too 
 
 does not sing.) 
 (He is not rich, In; 13 
 
 also not poor.) 
 (You have no money, 
 
 I also not.) 
 (He is never contented j 
 
 I also (am) not.) 
 
 23eifptele. 
 
 SSkrum kfu'djen ©te rntS nidjt After? 
 SBiffen ©ie ntdjt roarum er roeint? 
 
 3d) ferine ben Scaler nidjt, rcein 23ru* 
 
 ber fcnnt ir)n and) nidjt* 
 QaUn 'Bit ntdjt metn papier unb met* 
 
 nen SBlctjttft? 
 Sdj l)a^e ben SBIeijttft/ afcer ntc^t ba§ 
 
 papier* 
 2)a3 SiBetter ift nidjt irccfen fonbern 
 
 feud)t. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Why do you not visit us oftener ? 
 
 Do you not know why he is weep- 
 ing? 
 
 I do not know the painter, neither 
 does my brother know him. 
 
 Have not you my paper and my 
 pencil? 
 
 I have the pencil, but not the 
 paper. 
 
 The weather is not dry, but moist 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 33raufcn, to roar ; 
 
 Slufmerffctm, attentive ; 
 2>a2 ©orf, the village; 
 
 (Engltfd), English ; 
 £>er %\\i§, the river; 
 
 S'ranjo'ftfd), French; 
 
 ^retgeMg, generous; 
 
 |>eute, to-day; 
 
 Sntereffcmt, interesting; 
 
 Ccmgroeilig, tedious; 
 
 Sefyrretd), instructive ; 
 
 Sftorgen, to-morrow; 
 
 9cad)Idffig, negligent; 
 
 5?tC/ never; 
 £)er Sftorruegcr, the Norwegian; 
 
 ©onbern, but; 
 
 ©tumpf, dull; 
 ©er £aud)er, the diver; 
 £)er $erbre'd)er, the criminal; 
 £>er SBinb, the wind; 
 
 Bittern, to tremble ; 
 
 3utt)et'len, sometimes 
 
 Exercise 38. 
 
 SlnfgaBe 38* 
 
 1, £oren Bit nicfyt rote ber SCinb firaitft? 2. 3^ fe^c wte tas 
 itinb jtttcrt 3. 3ft ntdjt jeDeS le^rret^e 23ttd) tntereffant ? 4. 3|1 
 nicfyt mandjeS Xe^rrcidje 33udj Tangtrcilig? 5. SCctdjen ttnterfd)ieb 
 ftnbcn (Bit gn>ifc^en "9M)t jebeS leljrreidje 23ntf) ift tntercffant/' nnfo 
 u 3tM lel)rreick 23nd) ift nicfyt tntercffant?" 6. Diefer Serke^er 
 
NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 61 
 
 fprtdjt frcmjcftfd), md)t wc&v ? %. £er gefdjicfte Saucer ktngt il)n 
 ait* tent gl'ujfe. 8. 2t6er, tuer fprtdjt fctn enaUftfc, unt fter fprtd)t fein 
 frangSfifdj ? 9. 9)Mn Sftejfet ift nid;t ncu, fontern alt. 10. $3 ift 
 neu, abcr nidjt fdjarf, 11. Su ift nidjt fdjarf, font era ftumpf. 12. 
 SBarum loben ©ie jenen ©djnler itidjt ? 13. 3$ Iot>e jenen, afrcr 
 nidjt ttcfen. 14. 3ft er nidjt guwcilen fe()r nadjlajftg ? 15. Sftctn, 
 er ift nie nad)taffig, fontern immer anfmerffam. 16. ®el)en (£te 
 nid)t tyeute nad) tern £orfe ? 17. 3a, id) 9 e v e M& unt mein 33ra^ 
 ter ge|t morgen. 18. SSarum fpredjen ©ie nidjt englifdj ? 
 
 Exercise 39. Slnfgafre 39. 
 
 1. Have not you my "book ? 2. No, I have not the book. 
 3. This child is not industrious, but idle. 4. Not this child, 
 but that one is attentive. 5. You speak French, do you not 1 
 6. I speak English, but not French. 7. "Why do you not write 
 to-day 1 8. I write French, but I do not write English. 9. 
 You do not find this book tedious, do you? 10. I do not find 
 it very interesting. 11. Is every instructive book tedious] 
 12. Do you never go to the village with your brother? 13. 
 My brother is going to-day, and I am going to-morrow. 14. 
 Is that scholar sometimes very idle and very negligent 1 ? 15. 
 This new knife and the new chisel are not sharp, but dull and 
 rusty. 16. Our old neighbor, the old Norwegian, is not only 
 a very rich, but also a very generous man. 17. Your new 
 book is not interesting, neither is it instructive. 18. My new 
 book is not only instructive, but also interesting. 
 
 LESSON XXL. Cation XXII 
 
 NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 
 
 1. Nouns of the new declension ending in unaccented at, t t 
 er, ef, form all their oblique cases by adding n (for fern, sing., 
 however, see L. XXIII. 4) : 
 
 N. ter Ungar, ter Sfteffe, ter 23ater, 
 
 G. fce3 Ungar-n, te3 9tcffe-n, te£ 23ater-n, 
 D. tent Ungar-n, tern 9ftcjfe--n, tent 23ater-n, 
 A. ben Ungar-n, ben Sfteffe-n, ten 23ater-n* 
 
68 LESSON XXII. 
 
 2. Nouns of this declension not ending in at, etc., as above, 
 form the oblique cases by adding en: 
 
 N. ber ®rctf, ber <Sofoat, ber £etb, 
 
 G. be3 ®raf-en, bes @olt>at-en, beg £eft>-en, 
 
 D. bem ©raf-en, bem ©olDat-en, bem £eft)-en, 
 
 A. ben ©raf-en, ben ©ofoat-en, ben §ef>-etu 
 
 3. When an adjective or a participle is used substantively, 
 it still follows the declension of its original word : 
 
 ©iefer £>eutfdje ifl eitt ©efanb'ter. This German is an embassador. 
 
 IDiefer ©cfanbt'e ifl ein ©eutfdjer. This embassador is a German. 
 
 4. To the new declension belong most names of males end- 
 ing in e, many names of nations, as also various foreign nouns 
 (§18): 
 
 £>er 2oroe, the lion ; 
 £>er £afe, the hare; 
 £>er SBftier, the Bavarian; 
 
 £>er Dd)§ (or,D<$fe), the ox; 
 £>er Sfbsoc'at/ the advocate; 
 £>er tfngar, the Hungarian. 
 
 5. To ascertain to which of the two declensions a noun be- 
 longs, the pupil has only to observe the endings of the genitive, 
 as giv^n in the vocabularies ; eS (or s) denoting the old declen- 
 sion, and n (or en) the new; thus, 
 
 2)er STjfe, -n, the ape; 
 £>cr SGBotf, -c$, the wolf; 
 2)er &elb, -en, the hero : 
 
 £)er Sfluf, -e3, the call; 
 £>er S3aiet/ -n, the Bavarian ; 
 
 2)er Raft, -3, the cheese; 
 
 £)er 33dr, -en, the bear; 
 
 £)er $einb, -e3, the enemy; 
 
 S)er ®raf, -en, the count ; 
 
 £>er Deftretctjer, -<3, the Austrian. 
 
 23eif))tele. Examples. 
 
 SSctrum if! ber ^ranjof'e ber Sreunb Why is the Frenchman the friend 
 
 beS ©ngloinberS wnb be$ £itrfen? of the Englishman and the Turk? 
 
 S}1 ber £)ef!reid)er ber ^einb beS 9tuf«» Is the Austrian the enemy of the 
 
 fen cber be£ Srcmjofen ? Russian or of the Frenchman ? 
 
 2Bct3 fur ein ScmbSmcmn if! ber tffintg "What countryman is the king of 
 
 son ®riedjenlctnb ? Greece? 
 
 T>er ©clcttte ltet>t feme (Sclasere'i nid)t. The slave docs not love his slavery. 
 
 £er ttngctr licit ben Dej!reid)er nid}t; The Hungarian does not love the 
 
 ber 9)ate and) nidjt. Austrian; neither does the Pole. 
 
 £>er Ungar licit ben £)cf!reU)er n ? d)t, The Hungarian does not love the 
 
 ben Sftuffen M&) nid)t. Austrian, nor the Russian either. 
 
NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. 
 
 69 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 $)er STmcrlfa'tter, -6, the American ; 
 
 9(nffrcrtg'cnb, toilsome; 
 ©er S3aier, -n, the Bavarian ; 
 
 Dcitrfcb, German (adj.); 
 2>er Sngldnber, -$, the Englishman ; 
 Der gemb# -e3, the enemy; 
 Der gtttnjo'fc* -tt» the Frenchman; 
 
 gfU^rCtt, to lead; 
 Da3 ©rted)enlartb, -=3, (the) Greece; 
 Der Stttltc'ner, -5, the Italian; 
 Dei Jhial'e, -tt, the boy; 
 5Jer $imig, -e$, the king; 
 
 Da3 Seteit, -3, the life 
 
 Der 2Katro'fe, -rt, the sailor; 
 
 Der 9?effe, -rt, the nephew; 
 
 Der Df-eiin, -3, the uncle; 
 
 Der Dcftretdier, -v, the Austrian; 
 
 Der 9)ole, -n, the Pole; 
 
 Der Oiuffc, -n, the Russian; 
 
 Der ©otbat* -en, the soldier; 
 
 Der Ziixk, -tt, the Turk; 
 
 Der linear, -it, the Hungarian; 
 
 ttnftdjer, insecure ; 
 
 Untcrbritcfert, to oppress. 
 
 Exercise 40. 
 
 Slufga'&e 40. 
 
 1. £er SJiatrofc fiitjrt eln impdjereS nnb cmftrengcnbeS Se&etu 
 2. £)ag SeBett emeS 9ftatrefen ift anftrengenb unto unftdjer. 3. £cr 
 SReffe tc3 alien <2oftatcn X;at eincn S5ricf sen fctnem D'fyeime. 4. 
 £er alte ©ofoflt fdjreifct fcinem 9tcffen, tern jimgen ©oftaten, einen 
 Srtef. 5. 3>r $nafre lofct nid)t ben ©otbatcn, fonbern ben 9ftatro* 
 fen. 6. 3(* ber ^ontg son ©rtedjenlanb etn Teittftfer? 1.3ft 
 ber Xcutfdje ber grennb bes 3taliencr5? 8. 3ft bcr Sranjofe ber 
 Sreunb beg £entfd)en? 9. SBarum fy*f$t ber Jitrfe ben Shtjfen? 
 10. £er Shtffe nnterbriidt ben £itrfen nnb ben §)olcn. 11. SBarunt 
 nnterbriidt ber Deftrcickr ben Stalicner, ^tn Uncjarn nnb ben $o^ 
 len? 12. SBen nnterbriidt ber Stmcrtfaner? 13. Sen nnterbriidt 
 ber Sngldnbcr? 14. SSer $afjt ben SngKinber nnb ben 5Imerilaner ? 
 15. £ajjt ber Sflujfe ben (Snglanter, ben gran^ofen, ben Ungarn, ben 
 5>oIcn nnb ben £Men ? 
 
 Exercise 41. 
 
 Siufgafce 41. 
 
 1. Why is the Pole the enemy of the Austrian 1 ? 2. Is the 
 Hungarian the friend of the Pole, or is he his enemy % 3. The 
 Pole is the friend of the Hungarian, and the enemy of the Aus 
 trian and of the Russian. 4. Is the king of Greece a Bavarian? 
 5. Is the soldier the nephew of the sailor 1 6. No, the sailor 
 is the nephew of the soldier. 1. Does the Englishman hate 
 the American ? 8. The Englishman does not hate the Ameri- 
 can. 9. Who oppresses the Italian, the Hungarian and the 
 
TO LESSON XXIII. 
 
 Pole 1 10. Is this old sailor a Russian, a Turk, an Italian, 
 or a Frenchman'? 11. That old soldier is the uncle of this 
 boy. 12. Who leads a toilsome and insecure life 1 ? 13. Is 
 this German a soldier, or a sailor 1 is this sailor a Geiman or 
 a Russian ] 14. The hoy is writing his uncle, the old soldier, 
 a letter. 15. The Hungarian is the neighbor of the Austrian, 
 of the Pole, of the Russian and of the Turk. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. Section XXHI. 
 
 FEMININE GENDER. 
 1. DECLENSION OF £) \ t , ( £)\t\t AND ^CtttC. 
 
 Feminine. 
 N Me, the; btef-e, this; mein-e, my; 
 
 G. tier, of the ; btef-er, of this ; meirt-er, of my ; 
 
 D. ber, to or for the; bief-er, to or fortius; meitt-er, to or for my; 
 A. bie, the; btef-e, this; mein-e, my. 
 
 The article, definite and indefinite, as also, the adjective pro- 
 nouns (which in the other genders have different endings, and 
 are differently declined), here all end in e, and are inflected 
 alike; namely, 
 
 bief-e, bie, aft-e, eintg-e, etttdj-e, jet>-e, man&)-t, fold)-e, tt>etd)-e; 
 as also, 
 
 mein-e, eln-e, bein-e, etter-e, i^r-e, fein-e, unfei-e, fetn-e, (com- 
 pare L. X. 4. and L. XII. 4). 
 
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES IN THE FEMININE GENDER. 
 
 2. Feminine adjectives, unless they follow bie, eine, or soma 
 word of the above list, and refer to the same noun, are of tho 
 
 OLD DECLENSION. 
 
 N gut-e, good; (btef— e, meirt-e, ein-e. ) 
 
 G. gut-er, of good; (fcief-er, mein-er, ein-er.) 
 
 t). gnt-er, to or for good ; (fctef-er, metn-er, ein-er.) 
 
 A. gut-e, good; (bief-e, metn-e, etn-e. ) 
 
DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. Tl 
 
 3. Feminine adjectives, when they follow btefe, Me, ntcm#e, 
 mctne, or any word of that list, and refer to the same noun, 
 are of the 
 
 NEW DECLENSION. 
 
 N. tie gute, the good; 
 
 G. ter guten, of the good; 
 
 D. ter guten, to, for the good ; 
 
 A. tie gute, the good ; 
 
 metne gute, my good; 
 meiner guten, of my good; 
 tneiner guten, to, for my good ; 
 meine gute, my good. 
 
 Obs. As bief-c, mein-e, etc. (feminine), equally denote the gender of 
 the noun, the mixed declension, in the feminine, is not required; hence 
 we have here hut two declensions of the adjective, the old and the new. 
 
 DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 4. Feminine nouns, except proper names, are, in the singular, 
 indeclinable : * 
 
 3d) x)afce bie $eber meiner ^flutter. I have the pen of my mother. 
 
 (£r ift ber ©ol)n btefer alien ©ante. He is the son of that old lady. 
 
 SJoflfommencw ©Iiicf ifl nid)t ber Perfect (prosperity) happiness is 
 
 SWenf^ext SooS.— 9B. not the lot of mankind. 
 
 ©#tod'rmerct ifl itranfr)eit ber ©eele. Fanaticism is sickness (disease) of 
 
 — SEB. the souk 
 
 5. Appellations of females are formed from those of males 
 by means of the suffix in (or inn) : 
 
 ber ©d)nciber, the tailor; bie ©dmeiberin, the tailoress; 
 
 ber Srexinb, the friend; bie $reunbin, the (female) friend; 
 
 ber SnglctJlber, the Englishman; bie (Sngld'nberin, the Englishwoman 
 
 ber ©driller, the scholar; bie ©djixtcrin, the female scholar; 
 
 ber ©enta'ljli the consort (husband) ; bie ©ema'fjtitt, the consort (wife); 
 
 btr Solve, the lion ; bie Soroxn, the lioness. 
 
 6. Appellations of women, formed from titles of men, may 
 
 * It may be observed, however, that in poetry and certain ph rases 
 the endings of the new declension (in which the feminine noun was 
 formerly declined) are still sometimes found in the genitive and dative: 
 (53 ifl feiner ^raxten ©djrcefler. It is his wife's sister. 
 
 (S3 ifl bcj]"er arm mil ©l)ren/ benn It is better (to he) poor with honor, 
 
 reld) mil ©djanben. than rich with disgrace. 
 
72 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 signify either the wife of an officer, or a female who holds an 
 office herself: 
 
 ber $Praj!b«U\ the president; Me 9>raftberttttt, the female presi- 
 
 dent, or the president's wife. 
 
 7. The vowels a, o, It, usually take the Umlaut; i. e. are 
 changed to a, c, it, before the suffix tn : 
 
 ber ©djwager, the brother-in-law; bte (Scfyroagertn, the sister-in-law ; 
 fax Rod), the cook; bte $8<$itt, the (female) cook. 
 
 SBeifptele. 
 
 3d) $ct£e bte note Sebcrntcincr abutter. 
 Du fte^jl ber Gutter Stag 1 in Sljra* 
 
 nen.-^-<S* 
 Stnbert <Ste btefe <Spradje fdjroer? 
 Die gveunbtn unferer (Sdjroefter ifi un* 
 
 fere fie^rerin. 
 3§re fleine Sou fine ifi eine aufmerf* 
 
 fame ©djuleruu 
 
 Examples. 
 
 I have the new pen of my mother. 
 Thou seest the mother's eye in 
 
 tears. 
 Do you find this language hard? 
 The friend of our 6ister is our 
 
 teacher. 
 Your little cousin is an attentive 
 
 scholar. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Die ty\>r\fo'fc, -/ the apricot (see 4.) ; 
 Die SSIume, -, the flower; 
 Die Sutter, -, the butter; 
 Die Some, -, the lady ; 
 Die (Ettgldnbertn, - ; the Englishwo- 
 man; 
 Die Seber, -, the pen; 
 Die Jteite, -, the chain; 
 Die JUrcfye, -, the church; 
 Die ^tvfdje, -, the cherry ; 
 
 Die Sftelo'ne, -, the melon; 
 Die 2JWdj, -, the milk; 
 Die Gutter, -, the mother; 
 Die 9Mfe, -, the pink; 
 Der (Sdjroager, -$, the brother-in- 
 law; 
 Die <Sd)i»efter, -, the sister; 
 Die State, -, the ink; 
 Die £od)ter, -, the daughter; 
 Die Ul)x, - t the watch. 
 
 Exercise 42. 
 
 Slufgafre 42. 
 
 1. £aBen (Sic f^roargc £inte, ober Matte? 2. 3$ ^afce Matte, 
 wnfc metne ©djwejler $at fdjftarje* 3. 2£er Bat mettte neuc $eDcr 
 wnt) meutc gttte pirate ? 4. 3$re iwttgc S r ettnhn Jjat 3$*e ww 
 Metier, after id) weifj nidjt, mo bie-£inte ifi. 5. SBejfcn it cue ^etcr 
 fyat btefe @d)iileritt? 6. Xic (Sdjulcrin I)at fcitte nette §eber, (bit* 
 bent erne alte. T. SBarum fdjrei&en (Sic mit Hatter £inte ? 8. 3$ 
 f&rei&e ntd)t mit Matter £ittte; idj fdjrelfce mit meiner fdjwarjen 
 
DECLENSION OF FEMININE NOUNS. 13 
 
 State. 9. S3cr fauft tic SDW<fc, tie Sutter, tie SDtefonc, tie ^irfde 
 unt tie 2Xprifofc ? 10. £ie $odjta lauft tie Sftitdj, tie Sutter nut) 
 tie ketone, uut tie alte £ame fanft tie ^prirsfe. 11. £ie ^Ro\t 
 ifl etne fdsone 23lume. 12. SBer fd)t<ft ter Softer icnrr alten Dame 
 eine 9ic[e? 13. 2Ba3 fiir cine SFlofc fdjidt tie ©djiiferta ter £ch'c? 
 rta, cine trei£e oter eine rotlje? 14. ©cm [ducft tie 2ei)rerta tie 
 tpeige Sflofe ? 15. 2Ba<3 fiir cine 33 tame i|l tie 9Rett>? 16. £er 
 <£cfc;n?aijer unt tie (Sdnraaertn ticfer (Sngtanfcerta ftnt in jener alten 
 $ird?e. IT. $Qt meine junge greuntin mcine Vfyx unt mcine ^cttc? 
 13. 3$« gmmtta Kit tie Ul)r, afrcr md>t tie Sidte. 19. Unfeve 
 Gutter Ijl unfere Se^rerin 
 
 Exercise 43. 2lufa.a6e 43. 
 
 1. Are you writing with my new pen ? 2. No, I am writing 
 with the new pen of my sister. 3. Has the sister-in-law of 
 your friend a new watch ? 4. Whose watch and chain has your 
 mother ? 5. My mother has my watch, and my sister has my 
 chain and my pen. 6. The sister of your teacher is" our teacher. 
 7. In which church is the daughter of our old friend ? 8. What 
 kind of a flower have you, a rose, or a pink ? 9. I have a beau- 
 tiful pink, and my sister has a rose. 10. This milk is good, 
 but the butter is not good. 11. Have you a ripe melon and a 
 ripe apricot"? 12. I have a ripe apricot and a ripe cherry, but 
 I have no ripe melon. 13. "What kind of ink has your sister, 
 black or blue ? 14. With what kind of a pen, and what kind 
 of ink is your mother writing ? 15. Has your friend a white 
 rose, or a red one? 16. Is the pink a beautiful flower 2 17. 
 Is not every flower beautiful? 18. You have my watch your 
 chain, the pen of our teacher and the ink of the scholar. 19. 
 Is your mother your teacher? 20. No, the daughter of that 
 old lady is our teacher. 
 
©ct§ Scrnrat, 
 
 the lamb ; 
 
 £)er <Sof>n, 
 
 the son ; 
 
 2>er glujj, 
 
 the river; 
 
 £)er £ugel, 
 
 the lull ; 
 
 ©ie SBlume, 
 
 the flower 
 
 74 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. Uttion XXIV. 
 
 FORMATION AND GENDER OF DIMINUTIVES. 
 
 1. The syllables d)ert and fetn,* suffixed to nouns, give rise 
 to a large class of words, called diminutives. These diminu- 
 tives are always of the neuter gender, and their radical vowel, 
 if capable of it, takes the Umlaut : 
 
 bad Sammcfyen, the lambkin (little lamb) 
 bad (SbfyndjeU; the (dear) little son ; 
 bad ^litjjjdjen, the rivulet (little river); 
 bad £ugeld)en, the hillock (little hill) ; 
 bad S3Htmd;ert, (or Slumlein) the floweret. 
 
 2. The diminutives are also used as terms of endearment, 
 or to indicate familiarity ; and are often employed where in 
 English no idea of diminutiveness would be expressed : 
 
 "£)enn SBritberd)en unb <5d)tt>ej"terd)ert For brother dear and sister dear 
 bie fommen oft ju mix," (they) often come to me. 
 
 Qad 2)ijgelrf)eit (or SSogtem) ffnat etrr The little bird sings a gladsome 
 fro$e$ £tebc§ett. (little) song. 
 
 3. The words ftjraulein and 9ftM)cn though regularly formed, 
 as diminutives, have lost their strictly diminutive signification. 
 Svauleilt signifies a young (unmarried) lady; and also serves 
 is a title of address : answering to Miss. -Sftctodjett is rendered 
 by girl, or maiden ; Sftagb, from which it is derived, being 
 now employed chiefly in the signification of servant : 
 
 grdirtetn 9£. tft eine greunbitt btefe£ Miss K is a friend of this girL 
 
 3JMb<$en3. 
 
 ■Bolcdb bad SJMbdjen 3l&fd)teb ncttym, As soon as the maiden took leave, 
 
 IU f. ». — @* etc. 
 
 ■SDiefeS 2ftab$en fpiclt mit fcinem SBrii* This girl is playing with her little 
 
 berdjen. brother. 
 
 Other forms, chiefly provincial or vulgar, and confined mostly to 
 conversation, which sometimes perplex the learner, are e I, It, eldjcn; aa 
 "M>et,"for3JMbd)en; "SBud)etd)etV' forS5M)Ietn; "^Dp/'for^fpein; etc. 
 
FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 75 
 
 FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 NOUNS WITH NOUNS. 
 
 4 In German two or more nouns are often united in one 
 word, where the English equivalents are joined by a hyihen, 
 or several separate words are used : 
 
 fhtjUHcr, draught-animal , 
 
 £ajtt§tev, beast of burden ; 
 
 rtftettbe, malicious pleasure; 
 §}re£frei$eitf freedom of the press; 
 Oiubntbeaterbc, ambition, thirst of fame: 
 Crbmmge-Itete, love of order ; 
 3dv;funacfcr, shoemaker; 
 £ar.brccrf, avocation; trade; 
 
 (3ug, draught; £I)ter, beast) 
 (2a|T, burden; Sfjier, beast.) 
 (Sdube, injury; ftveube, joy.) 
 (yrei^cit, freedom; $Preffe, press.) 
 (3fat§m, fame; 23t\jierbe, desire.) 
 (Crbmmg, order; Stebe, love.) 
 (Sdutf), shoe ; SMacfier, maker.) 
 ($anb f hand; SBetf# work.) 
 
 €>$K$nta$er$anbtt>eTfj shoemaker's trade or calling. 
 
 5. The first noun is sometimes put in the plural : 
 
 JHeil>erf$ranfj clothes-press; (5Uetber, clothes; ©<fcranf, case, press.) 
 
 53iiu>erfcrrattf, book-case; (5M'toVr, books.) 
 
 SSorterfrud?, dictionary; (SBorter, words; Sud), book.) 
 
 NOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS, PRONOUNS. VERBS, ETC. 
 
 6. Compound nouns are also formed by uniting several parts 
 of speech : 
 
 9ui3trca, egress; (aui, out of; SBeo., way.) 
 
 Siivrccrt, pronoun; (gitr, for ; SBfl it, word.) 
 
 fellow-scholar; (nut, with; 3iuiter, scholar.) 
 Sdn-cihv.vier, writing-paper; (fdueikrt, to write; 9)a^ier, paper ) 
 itaufaiamt, merchant; (faufert, to buy; Sflamt, man.) 
 
 ©torctlfrieb, agitator; (floren, to disturb; ^riebe, peace.) 
 
 E>pringui3fclb, romp; fly-about; (fpringen, spring; in, into; %db, field.) 
 good-for-nothing; (tauten, to be fit for; iridic, nothing.) 
 SergifptteW' the forget-me-not ; (serge [fen, to forget; ineitt (L. 28. 2.), 
 m$t f and nidjt, not.) 
 
 NOUNS WITH ADJECTIVES. 
 
 7. Nouns are sometimes formed by uniting adjectives (unde- 
 clined) with nouns : 
 
 ber ^aucrHcc, the sheep's sorrel ; (falter, sour; $Iee, clover.) 
 
 ber $nmratftab, the crosier; (frumm, crooked; (Stab, staff.) 
 
 bag SBrtpbrob, the white bread ; (»cip# white; ©rob, bread.) 
 
76 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. 
 
 8. Compound adjectives are formed by uniting two adjec- 
 tives, or a noun and an adjective : 
 
 ©unfelgriirt, dark green; (btmfet, dark; grim, green.) 
 
 0iabenfit)t»arj, black as a raven; (9ta&e, raven; fil)ft>ar,$, black.) 
 
 Ce&enSfatt, tired of life; (CeBert, life; fatr, satiated.) 
 
 SBctffenfafyig, capable of bearing arms; (2Baffert, arms; fcif;tg, capable.) 
 SBunberfrf)ort, extremely beautiful; (Sffiunber, miracle; fc()on, beautiful.) 
 
 9. Nouns, instead of being written as one word, are some- 
 times separated by a hyphen : 
 
 ©o flarf aU ©otteS <3unben*£a§ As strong as God's hatred of sin, is 
 
 3ft feine ©iinber=£iek. — £♦ his love for sinners. 
 
 10. The latter member of a compound may refer to words 
 preceding those with which it is united ; the first word being 
 followed by a hyphen : 
 
 £)er ©tiefel* unb ©d)ufjmad)er* The boot and shoemaker. 
 
 Srcft* unb plfSkburftig. Needing consolation and help. 
 
 GENDER OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 11. The first word of the compound takes the accent, while 
 the latter usually determines the gender : 
 
 (£ttt SBumteitgartert, A flower-garden. 
 
 (Sine ©CtrtenBlume, A garden-flower. 
 
 12. Proper names of places, formed by suffixing the mascu- 
 line noun 23erg, or the feminine 53urg, to other words, are, like 
 all proper names of places, neuter • 
 
 £>a$ ftarf fcefefttgte Sftagbdmrg. The strongly-fortified Magdeburg. 
 
 13. The word Sftutfj is masculine; the words £emut§, ©rojj^ 
 ttiuttj, £attgmuttj, @anftmut$, <Sd)ttermutt) are feminine. 3:1) eil 
 is masculine; ©egentfyeil, £tnter£betf and $ort>ertljetf are neuter. 
 (Scfyeu is feminine; 2t6fdjeu is masculine. 
 
 23eif))ielc» Examples. 
 
 jDiefe^ Heine SKabdjenljat etnen ftlfcer* This little girl has a silver thimble^ 
 nen Singrrtyut. 
 
FORMATION OF COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 77 
 
 SBer ijljteea graulein? 
 <£a ifl Rrraulein gj t 
 
 Die ©eftd)t3Htburtg ifl ber ©piegel ber 
 
 <Seele. 
 Der 23ud)Mnber war ntein SKtifdjttler. 
 
 ©tauti foffjl bu effcn betn Scfcenlcmg. 
 
 (Gen. iii. 14.) 
 Der 23ud$dnbter »erfouft gute3 
 
 <Sd)rei6- imb SSriefpapier. 
 Sftart nemtt biefc SBlume ba3 SJcrgig* 
 
 meinnid?t. 
 (Stoigftar unb fptegetrein imb efcen 
 gliejjt bae jep^rleidjte Sefcen.— ©♦ 
 
 "Who is that young lady ? 
 
 It is Miss N. 
 
 The expression of the countenance 
 is the mirror of the soul. 
 
 The bookbinder was my fellow- 
 scholar. 
 
 Dust shalt thou eat all the days of 
 thy life. 
 
 The book-dealer (seller) sells good 
 ■writing and letter-paper. 
 
 This flower is called the forget-me- 
 not. 
 
 Ever clear and pure as a mirroi 
 flows life light as zephyr (literally 
 zephyr-light life) 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 S3ei, by, with; 
 Der ©erg, -e3, the mountain; 
 Der 3Bud)binber, -3, the bookbinder; 
 DaSgclb, -e$, the field; 
 
 grmtleitt/ (see 3.) 
 Da3 5itm>orr, -e£, the pronoun; 
 Da$ Satyr, -e$, the year; 
 Die SftfyreSjeit, -, the season of the 
 
 year; 
 Der £ranid>, -eg, the crane; 
 Da3 Safit^ier, -eg, the beast of bur- 
 den; 
 Die £erd)e, -, the lark; 
 
 9ttdbd)en, (see 3.) 
 
 Die 9?ad)t, -, the night ; 
 
 Die ^adjttgaft, -, the nightingale; 
 
 Qa$ Dbfr, -eg, the fruit; 
 
 Der Dbfrgarten, -3, the orchard; 
 
 Der $aubt?pgel, -£, the bird of prey; 
 
 Die <Sd)tlbtt)ad)e, -, the sentinel; 
 
 Der ©ommer, -3, the summer; 
 
 Der ©umpf, -e3, the swamp; 
 
 Der <Sumpfsogel, -§, the wader, mo- 
 rass-bird; 
 
 Der Sag, -e£, the day; 
 
 Die Beit, -, the time; 
 
 Da3 Butter, -eg, the draught-ani- 
 maL 
 
 Exercise 44. 
 
 Slufgafce 44. 
 
 1. 2Ba3 fitr papier faufen ©te, ©cfyreityapier otcr 23riefpapiet ? 
 2, Jpakn ©ic etrten fefconen 23(umengarten ? 3. 3ft He Sftofe eine 
 ©artenfelume, o'cer eine ^etDblume ? 4. ipaften ©ie *ne( reifed Dbjr 
 in Sfyrem Dfcjigarten ? 5 . ipafcenSie einen 2lpfeI6aum, einen $irfdj* 
 taunt, ofcer eineu Slprifojenbaum? (#a'6en @ie etnen 2lpfek, einen 
 £irf$* f oter einen 2iprt?ofenfcaum ? see 10.) 6. 2£a3 fiir einen 
 SBatofcaum ^at fcer U$rmad)er in feinem ©arten? 7. £a£en <Sie 
 nid)t 3^it auf ben 23era, gu ge|en ? 8* SHefed £unbd)en tjt nur eh? 
 3at)r alt. 9. £er ©ontnter ifl eine fefjr angene^me !$abxttyt\t t 
 10. 2Ber ijl fciefes 2ftab$en ? 11. S3 ifl graulein ft., eine gute 
 
78 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 greunbin turner <Sd)ttefter. 12. Petite (5d)ttejfrt tft eine 2ftit* 
 fdjitlerin btefeS grauleinS. 13. £ie (5<Mbtt>ad)e ift ber fritter be3 
 23ud)Mnber£. 14. £a$ Earned ift ein £afttt)ier, unb ter £>cc;3 ijt 
 ein 3w9tl)ier. 15. 2£as ift ein gurtoort? 16. £er Sltlcr ift ein 
 Sftau6i)ogel, t>er (5d)toan ift ein @d}mimmttogel unb ber ^ranid) ift 
 ein ©umppoget. 17. £ie ^acfytigcul ift ein <3ing$ogel, tta3 fiir 
 ein SSogel ift bie Serene? 18. SBann ftngt bie Serene, unb ft>cmn 
 ftngt bie ^ac^tigalt? 19. £)iefe fmgt Bet Sftadjt, uriD jene Bet Sag. 
 (L. X. 2.) 
 
 Exercise 45. 2lufgalje 45 ♦ 
 
 1. What kind of a word is this 1 2. It is a pronoun. 3. Have 
 you an apple-tree, or a cherry-tree in your garden ? 4. Have 
 you no fruit-tree in your flower-garden ? 5. I have no fruit- 
 tree in my flower-garden, but I have a rose and a pink in my 
 orchard. 6. Has the bookbinder a large forest-tree in his new 
 garden % 7. He has no forest-tree, but he has a very beautiful 
 apple-tree. 8. Is the eagle a bird of prey % 9. What kind of 
 a bird is the crane, and where does he live % 10. Is the horse 
 a draught-animal, or a beast of burden 1 ? 11. Is the summer 
 a very pleasant season of the year? M2. Has that little girl 
 good letter-paper % 13. The girl has good writing-paper, but 
 no letter-paper. 14. Is Miss L. the sister of this little girl? 
 15. Do you know what kind of a bird the swan is ? 16. Why 
 do you not write your sister a letter % 17. I have not time to 
 write, I am going with the watchmaker to the village. 18. This 
 beautiful little apple-tree is only a year old, how old is that 
 one % 19. My fellow-scholar has a new watch-chain, a sharp 
 pen-knife, an old writing-desk, and a good writing-book- 
 
PLAN OF COMPOSING GERMAN. 79 
 
 LESSON XXV. faction XXV. 
 
 PLAN OF COMPOSING GERMAN. 
 
 Hitherto the attention of the learner has been mainly direct- 
 ed to such forms and rules of declension and construction as 
 were necessary to the translation of the several exercises. He 
 may now proceed to the more advanced work of composing 
 sentences in German. Having clearly before him the thought 
 which he proposes to express, let him endeavor, in accoidan^o 
 with the rules and examples previously studied, to give it a 
 proper German dress. In this process, under the constant, 
 guidance of his model sentences in German, he wn'll readily 
 acquire the habit of thinking in that language, and so avoid 
 the common and natural error of turning English modes of 
 thought and expression into merely literal German. 
 
 Moreover, when favored with peculiar opportunities for speak 
 ing the language, the pupil might here introduce into the pro- 
 posed sentences one or more of the additional tenses ; or, 
 change to some other tense any verb found in the regular Ex- 
 ercises (See Lessons XXXVI., XXXVIL, XXXVIII.). Thus, 
 for example, in Exercise 46., 1, for the present tense ; as in, 
 
 "Dtcfe GMbfdjmicbe Ijakn golbene, ftlfceme unb |rdt;Xcrne SRtngc," 
 the pupil may be required to substitute the imperfect ; as, 
 £>iefe ©olbfcfymkbe fatten golbene, ftlftcrne unb jtd^lcvne SMnge; 
 or, the perfect ; as, 
 
 SDieft ©olbfdjmtcbe I)al>en golbeue, ftlkvne unb ftafrlerne SUnge (je^aM, 
 or, the pluperfect ; as, 
 
 2)iefc ©olbfdjmtebe fatten golbene, ftlbevne unb [ia^Iernc Swinge g e $ a & t , 
 or, the first future ; as, 
 
 SDiefe ©oibfdjmtebe tr> er b en golbene, ftlkrne unb [iaf/lerne 9Ringe ^ a tu n 
 
 For an additional stock of words, with further statement and 
 exemplification of the plan, see page 449. 
 
 It has been deemed better to refer this class of learners, as 
 above, than to sacrifice the progressive plan of the work, by 
 introducing those Lessons at an earlier period. 
 
80 LESSON XXV. 
 
 ARTICLE AND ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS, PLURAL. 
 
 1. Iii the plural number the article and adjective pronouns, 
 as also mefyrere, end in e ; namely, 
 
 fcief-e, tie, all— e, etntg-e, etltd)-e, jen-e, man&)-c, me^rer-e, fofd)-c, 
 ttjel'c^-e (L. X. 4) ; as also, 
 
 mein-e, ein-e, tetn-e, %-e, fetn-e, unfer-eand !eitt-e (L. XII. 4) 
 and have all the same form of 
 
 DECLENSION IN ALL GENDERS OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 N. fctef-e, these; mein-e, my; 
 
 G. fctef-er, of these; metn-er, of my; 
 
 D. btef-en, to or for these ; metn- en, to or for my ; 
 
 A. bief-e, these; mein-e, my. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 2. Adjectives of all genders in the plural end in e, and have 
 but two forms of declension, the old and the new (L. XXX. 1). 
 
 3. Adjectives, unless they follow biefe, metne, or some word 
 of that class (see 1 ), and refer to the same noun, are of the 
 
 OLD DECLENSION. 
 PLURAL, ALL GENDERS. PLURAL, ALL GENDEES. 
 
 N. gut— e, good; (Mef-e.) 
 
 G. gut-er, of good; (bief-er.) 
 
 D. gut-en, to or for good; (btef-en.) 
 
 A. gut-e, good; (bief-e.) 
 
 Compare rule and declension L. XIV. 3, singular number. 
 
 PLURAL OF NOUNS OF THE OLD DECLENSION. 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 4. Neuter nouns ending in the nominative singular in e, el 
 en, er, d)en and letn, have the same form in the nominative 
 plural : 
 
 2)ct3 SOUttel, the means; bit Sftittet, the means; 
 
 £>ct3 ©ebdu'be, the building bie ©e&au'be, the buildings; 
 
 2)a$ 23auer, the cage; tie 2kuer, the cages. 
 
PLURAL OF NOUNS. 81 
 
 0. Neuter nouns not ending in the nominative singular in e, 
 el, en, er, cfyen and lein, form their nominative plural by adding e: 
 
 2>a3 3a$r, the year; tie 3<u)re, the years; 
 
 2)a3 ©ebc't, the commandment; bie ©efco'te, the commandments; 
 
 5Da* Spult, the desk; tic $Pulte, the desks. 
 
 Masculine. 
 G. Masculine nouns ending in the nominative singular in e 
 ft, en, er, have the same form in the nominative plural : 
 
 j£>er (Battler, the saddler; bie ©attler, the saddlers; 
 
 <Der $cffer, the trunk; bie Coffer, the trunks; 
 
 £)er 23runnen, the well; bie SBrunnen, the wells. 
 
 1. Masculine nouns not ending in the nominative singular in 
 t, el, en, er, form the nominative plural by adding e, and tak- 
 ing the Umlaut, if capable of it : 
 
 2)er ^amm, the comb; bie $dmme, the combs ; 
 
 £>cr ©trcm, the stream; bie ©trome, the streams; 
 
 ©er fmt, the hat; bie £iite, the hats; 
 
 2)er 23aum, the tree; bie SBd'ume, the trees. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 8. Feminine nouns ending in the nominative singular in funft 
 and mj}, as also those in list page 276, form the plural by add- 
 ing e and taking the Umlaut, if capable of it : 
 
 2)te SStlbntp, the wilderness; bie SBitbrnffe, the wildernesses; 
 
 ©ie §anb, the hand; bie £dnbe, the hands; 
 
 2)te %xndjt, the fruit; bie griicfyte, the fruits. 
 
 Note. — Most feminine nouns belong to the new declension (L. 
 XXX. 3). 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS IN THE PLURAL. 
 
 9. Nouns whose nominative plural ends in en, have all cases 
 .'n this number alike; those of other terminations have the 
 genitive and accusative like the nominative, and add n in the 
 dative : 
 
 N. tie £>egen; Me £oM; Me ©tii^le; Me £anbe; 
 
 G. fcer Degen; ber Jpofcel; ber ©tup; ter £anbe; 
 
 D. ben Degen; Den £ofcln; ben ©tufyfen; ben £dnben: 
 
 A. bie Degrn; Me $oM; bie @tii1jte; bie §anlt, 
 
 4* 
 
82 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 L0» fyabtn & e t n and the regular verb 2 o b e n in tdb 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tx>ir Ijafcen, we have ; 
 tyx 1)aU, you have; 
 ftc f)ctkn, they have; 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 tx>ir ftnb, we are 
 
 i$r fetb, you are 
 fte ftnb, they are 
 
 tt)ir lofc-en, we praise; 
 tfyr lofc--t, you praise; 
 fie lob-en, they praiser 
 
 Thus regular verbs form the first and third persons in tha 
 present plural, by adding to the root en, and to the second per- 
 son t (or tt See L. V. 1.) 
 
 SBeifpiele* 
 
 2)ie £tf$ler $afcen gute £oM. 
 
 £te S^effer bcr ^iJc^e ftnb ftyarf. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 The cabinet-makers have good 
 
 planes. 
 The knives of the cooks are sharp. 
 
 2Ber serfauft' bm $o$en bte ©anfe Who sells the cooks the geese and 
 
 unb bte SBiirfte? the sausages ? 
 
 2)te $enjter in ben Sintment ber ©djit- The windows in the rooms of the 
 
 Ier ftttb lU fletn* scholars are too small. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 ©ie Wxt, -t pi. Sferte, the ax; 
 
 ha§ 23etn, -eg, -g, pi. -e, the leg; 
 
 £)er SBefen, -g, pi. -, the broom; 
 
 ©er £>iefc, -eg, pi. -e, the thief; 
 
 'Der (£intt>ol)ner, -g, pi. -, the inhab- 
 itant ; 
 
 £)er ©fel, -g, pi. -, the ass, donkey; 
 
 £>er finger, -g, pi. -, the finger; 
 
 £)er gup, -eg, pi. ftiijje, the foot; 
 
 S)ic £cmb, -, pi. £anbe, the hand; 
 
 2)er |>ol^auer, -g, pi. -, the wood- 
 cutter ; 
 
 ©ex $atfer, -g, pi. -, the emperor; 
 
 Dcr Jfypf, -eg, pi. tftyfe, the head; 
 
 £)er ^ragen, -g, (§ 13. 4. 6.) the col- 
 lar; 
 £)ag 2Roulf$ter, -eg, -g, pi. -e, the 
 
 mule; 
 £)ag £%, -eg, -g, pi. -en, the ear; 
 £)er gtolafi', -eg, pi. 3)atajle, the pal 
 
 ace; 
 2)er (Sttel, -eg, pi. -e, the handle; 
 ttnterricfy'ten, to instruct ; 
 Uefcernefy'men, to undertake; 
 Skrfer'tigen, to make; 
 £)er Sofyxi, -eg, pi. 3d|ne, the tooth, 
 Bttet (see § 44), two. 
 
 Exercise 46. 
 
 $uf(jafce 46. 
 
 1. Dtefe ©oftjfe^miebe §aBen gotbene, ftlfcerne unb ftaf)lerne Stinge, 
 2. £)ie <5of)ne jencr @d)miebe ftnD Me $reunbe btefer Wilder. 3. 
 £>ie M)rer unten ld)ten Me ©djitfer, 4. £te SBBlfe tyafan grojje 
 3a v ne unb Heine $u§e. 5. Die gleifc^er laufen bte ©djaafe. 6. 
 
DECLENSION OF NOUNS IN THE PLURAL. 83 
 
 Xk Jpimnadjer »erferttgert nnb serfaufen Me £itte. 7* Xk £tefte 
 ^abcrt lange finger. 8. SBem fcfyrei&en Die ©chiller fo oiele SSricfe? 
 
 9. £icfc ©tittle unfc $ulte geforen unfent 2el)rern. 10. £te 
 $ncpfe imo $ragen an biefen Sftodfett ftnb ju grofj. 11, SSem ge* 
 fceren btefe Stfdje, ©tittle uno fultt ? 12* ©iefe gfjHje faoen ftctne 
 ^topfe. 13. Xie *Pa(afte ber ^onige mtb ber ftatfer ftnb fefyr fdjon. 
 14. £ie ©ttele btefer 33efcn ftnb gn fang* 15. £ie Sinfooljner bte* 
 fee Dorfeg jtno fefrr arm. 16. SBarum nfcernefmen 3$re Svemtre 
 fo oiel? IT. 2Ba3 fur State (tnb btefe? 18. SBte oide §ooel 
 tyafcen ricfe SifcMer ? 19. £er Waiter |al girct SBdgen, ^ier §>f«rbe 
 nnfc ad>t uno neungig ©djafe* 20. 2)ie ipol^auer §afceft fdjarfe 
 5(erte unb $arte £ante. 21. £er gfel unb bas 9)iaultl)ter faocn 
 grof^ D^rcrt uno Heine 33eine. 
 
 Exercise 47. 2htfga&e 4*7. 
 
 1 . Have you good axes 'I 2. I have good axes, good planes 
 and good chisels. 3. Do these tables, chairs and desks belong 
 to 1'ie scholars'? 4. The desks belong to the scholars, and the 
 cha'rs belong to the teachers. 5. The fingers of the thieves are 
 long. 6. Wolves have white t(5eth, and mules have long ears. 
 T. These brooms have long handles. 8. Emperors and kings 
 have beautiful palaces. 9. Have all camels large soft feet % 
 
 10. The inhabitants of this village are wood-cutters. 11. The 
 hands of the hatters are often black. 12. These fish have large 
 heads. 13. These scholars are buying coats, hats, rings and 
 canes. 14. The smiths make knives, axes and chisels. 15. Do 
 these teachers instruct all those scholars 1 16. Those tailors are- 
 making coats, these girls are making collars. IT. Which 
 horses and which carriages do the physicians buy ? 18. These 
 shoemakers and those tailors have small rooms, and the cabi- 
 net-makers have large ones. 19. The sons of those smiths are 
 industrious scholars. 20. These two scholars have three tables 
 and six chairs. 21. Those goldsmithr. have g->ld rings, and 
 these have silver ones. 
 
84 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. Cectiou XXVI. 
 
 IRREGULAR PLURAL OF KOUNS. 
 
 1. As exceptions to Rules 4 and 5, Lesson, XXV., are tne 
 neuter nouns, bctS glofj, the raft ; baS Softer, the convent ; and 
 fcftS d\ol)Vf the reed, all of which take, in the plural, the Um- 
 laut; as, bie %U$t, tie Softer, Me 3ti3t)re. £a$ S3oot, the boat, 
 has either the regular form tie 23oote, or 23ote. 
 
 2. There are also several neuter nouns which contain two 
 variations from Rule 5, Lesson XXV., in that they add in the 
 plural er, and take the Umlaut, if capable of it ; as, ba» £>orf, 
 the village, plural, Me 2)orf-er; ba3 £tet>, the song, plural, Me 
 Sieber, etc. ; see § 13. 5. Exceptions, b. 
 
 3. A few masculine nouns contain one exception to Rule 1, 
 Lesson XXV. ; namely, they add er, instead of e ; as, t>er £>om, 
 the thorn, plural, tie 'Eont-er, etc.; § 13. 6. Exceptions, a. 
 
 4. All nouns ending in tftum, whether neuter or masculine, 
 form their plural by adding er, and taking the Umlaut : 
 
 Sag 33Utljinn, the bishopric ;. plural, Me S8t?tr)umer* 
 £>er 3rrtt)vnrt, the error; plural, Me 3rrtr)ihner, etc 
 
 5. The plural of 9Jc arm in several compound words is Scute 
 instead of banner: 
 
 £>er SSergmarm, the miner; Me Sergleute, the miners; 
 
 2>er ilaufmanrt, the merchant; Me ^aufleute, the merchants; 
 
 £>er Stnunermann, the carpenter ; Me Simmerleute, the carpenters. 
 
 Give in this manner the plural of 2lmtmcmu, 2lrfcett3mamt, 
 grelmamt, Satttmatm, SanfcSmann, ©pietmamu 
 
 6. Scute and Soil are both rendered by people ; the latter 
 in the most extended, the former in a limited sense. The plu- 
 ral of SSoXI is usually equivalent to nations : 
 
 £>tefe Seute ftnb Demfdje. These people are Germans. 
 
 2>ic 2>evUfd)crt ftnb ein fletjHgeS 2>oIf. The Germans are an industriots 
 
 people. 
 £>ie Dtegte'rung ijiretcT), after ba£ 3$oli The government is ridi, but the 
 
 if arm. people are (is) poor. 
 
 £)te ijerfdjie'benert hotter (5uro£ct£. The various nations of Europe. 
 
IRREGULAR ILURAL OF NOUNS. 85 
 
 7. Several masculine nouns form an exception to Rule 6, 
 Lesson XXV., in that they take the Umlaut ; as plural, Slepfel, 
 instead of 2lpfcl; £ammel, instead of £ammel. For entire list 
 see§ 13. 4. Exceptions. 
 
 8. The feminine nouns Gutter and Sodjter form their plural 
 by taking the Umlaut : 
 
 ©ute fitter unterridjten u)re Softer. Good mothers instruct their daugh 
 
 ters. 
 
 9. The masculine nouns % at, 2trm, etc. § 13. 6. Exceptions, b. 
 omit the Umlaut ; thus forming an exception to Rule 7, Lesson 
 XXV. 
 
 10. In German the singular is employed to denote some ob- 
 jects, which require in English the plural form (§ 15) : 
 
 2)ie @d)eere ijl rojrig, bie 2id)tpufce if* The shears are rusty, the snuffers 
 
 blanf. are bright. 
 
 ©r faufte eine S3ruTe unb eine 3ange. He bought a pair of spectacles and 
 
 a pair of tongs. 
 
 3d) $a&e j»ci <Sd)eeren unb brei 3cm* Ihave two pairs of shears and three 
 
 gen. pairs of tongs, 
 
 ©eine Sunge ijl ffctrf unb gefunb. His lungs are strong and sound, 
 
 ©ie STfdje ijl nod) ^eiy* The ashes are still hot. 
 
 $>er $afer ift fdjon reif. The oats are already ripe. 
 
 (£r rou^te £>ir feinen 2)anf bafur* He gave you no thanks for it. 
 
 SBetfpteU. Examples. 
 
 SDicfe Sctnbteute fuvbrnetne£anb3Teute. These peasants (country-people) 
 
 are my countrymen. 
 
 SDtefe STefcfel finb nod) ntdjt reif. These apples are not yet ripe. 
 
 Sene 23ogel t/ctben frumme ©djna&el. Those birds have crooked beaks. 
 
 9ftetne S3 ruber faufen S^aget* My brothers are buyiLg nails. 
 
 2)te $inber jingcn fd)5ne Sieber. The children sing beautiful songs. 
 
 SDer $od) fauft £>itt)ner unb ©ter. The cook buys fowls and eggs. 
 
 £)te SMqttem fmb eine gefdfjr'Iidje The small-pox is a dangerous dis- 
 
 $ranN)cit. ease, 
 
 giipod rote ba3 (Sifen roar baS ^>erj Unfeeling as the iron was the heart 
 
 in i^rer 33rufl. — <S. in their breast. 
 
 5Da$ irbifdjc ©efdjtedjt' murrt ctyne The terrestrial race murmurs with- 
 
 ©runbj bie ©otter finb geredjt'. — out cause; the gods are just 
 
8G LESSON XXVI. 
 
 The n imbers 2, 3, etc. in the following vocabulary refer to the irreg- 
 ular plural of the nouns as above designated. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 2>er 3tknb, -eg» pl.-e, the evening; 
 
 33auen, to l uild; 
 Sag 23latt,-eg,pl.a3tdtrer,theleaf,2; 
 £)ag £)ad),-eg, pi. £>dd)er the roof, 2; 
 £)er ©old>, -eg, pi. -e, tie dagger 9; 
 2)er (Mfr, -eg, pi. -cr, the spirit, 3 ; 
 3)aS ©raft, -eg, pi. ©rafter, grave, 2; 
 
 ® raft en, to dig; 
 £)er £afen, -g, pi. £dfen, harbor, 7 ; 
 £)a£ £orn, -eg, pi. Corner, horn, 2 ; 
 
 itul)l, cool, cold; 
 £)er Ceift, -eg, pi. -cr, the body, 3 ; 
 2)a3 Sod), -eg, pi. Cocker, the hole, 2; 
 £>er 2Jfortttt, -eg, pi. -e, the month, 9 ; 
 
 £)a£ 9ce|7, -eg, pl.-er, the nest, 2 , 
 
 SRufyert, to rest ; 
 £)er ©djirm, -eg, pi. -e, the screen 
 £)er <5d)lo[fer, -g, pi.-, lock- smith; 
 
 <5d)on, already; 
 
 @d)roer, heavy; 
 £)ag <3d)roert, -eg, pi. -er, sword, 2; 
 Die ©tabt, -, pi. ©rdbte, the city; 
 
 ©teit, steep ; 
 
 ©terftlid), mortal; 
 
 £ief, deep; 
 
 UnfterftUd), immortal; 
 2)er SBdrier, -g, pi.-, the waiter; 
 £)er 3tntmermann, -eg, pi. -leute, the 
 carpenter, 5. 
 
 Exercise 48. Slufga&e 48, 
 
 l, Die Dfid)er btefer £finfer futb ftetl, 2. Die Sogel fcauen 
 defter in ben 2£filbern, 3. Diefe flatter finb nod) grim; jene finb 
 fd)on gelft, 4. 9Hd)t atle @a6et finb fefcarf, 5, 2£ae fcerfer* 
 tigen biefe @d)lbffer ? 6. 3ene 9K firmer tyakm lange ©d)i»crter nnb 
 fdimere DoId)e, T, Dtefe £>nnbe fmb ad)t donate aft, 8. SSarum 
 graftt man biefe 2od)er ? 9, "Unfere SSfiter rufyett fd)on in !ur)len 
 ©raBetn," 10, Die ©rfiben urn biefe ©tabt finb fet)r ticf. IK 
 Unfere Setter finb fterMid); nnfere ©eifter nnfterblid), 12, Die 
 ©firten unb gelber finb jefct fe|r fd)5n, 13, Die @d}iffe'liea,enm 
 ben £fifen, 14, Dtefe SIBenbe finb fet)r ancjener)m. 15, ©ingen 
 biefe ^inber fd)5ne Sieber ? 16, SBarnm fte^en <3ie urn bie Defen? 
 11, @pielen bie $inber in ben ®arten? 18, 3« treldje ©arten 
 ger)en biefe banner ? 
 
 Exercise 49. 5lnfgaBe 49, 
 
 1. The water in the harbors is deep. 2. Which men have 
 swords and daggers 1 3. These houses have very steep roofs. 
 4. Those men are digging holes and ditches. 5. The graves of 
 our fathers are already green. 6. The leaves of this tree are 
 white. 7. The nests of the birds are in the forests. 8. The 
 evenings are now very long. 9. The sheep are standing around 
 
DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 87 
 
 the house; where are the dogs] 10. Are not our spirits im- 
 mortal? 11. The locksmiths have hammers and anvils. 12. 
 Are those men building houses 1 13. These are building houses, 
 and those are building ships. 14. These anvils are not heavy 
 enough. 15. Our bodies are not immortal. 16. What men 
 have strong arms 1 17. Those merchants and these carpenters 
 are my countrymen. 18. Eagles are birds of prey, and 
 wolves are beasts of prey. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. Uttion XXVII. 
 
 1. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N. icb, I; in, thou; (<Bk, you;) 
 
 G. meincr, of me; tenter, of thee; (3^er, of you;) 
 
 D. mir, to, for me; fcir, to, for thee ; (3t)tten, to, for you ;) 
 
 A. mid), me; bid), thee; ((Bit, you.) 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. nrir, we; itjr, you; (Bit, you,) 
 
 G. unfcr, of us ; etter, of you; (3$rer, of you;) 
 
 D. im3, to or for us ; eu$, to or for you ; (3£)ncn, to, for you ;) 
 
 A. un3, us; cud), you; (Bit, you.) 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 
 
 N. er, he; fie, she; eg, it; 
 
 G. feincr, of him ; tt)rer, of her; fetner, of it; 
 
 D. ifjm, to, for him; ttjr, too?* for her; U)m, to or for it; 
 
 A. if)n, him; fie, her; e3, it. 
 
 PLURAL OP ALL GENDERS. 
 
 N. fie, they; 
 
 G. il)rer, of them ; 
 
 D. tf)nen, to or for them ; 
 
 A. fie, them. 
 
88 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 SECOND PERSON SINGULAR. 
 
 2. The pronoun of the second person singular is employed, 
 as in English, in addressing the Supreme Being ; in proverbial 
 phrases, and in serious and sublime styles of composition. It 
 is likewise used in addressing relatives, intimate friends and 
 children ; as, also, servants and other dependents : 
 
 £>ein 8fai<$ fomme. , Thy kingdom come. 
 
 Xraue feirtem greunbe, ttenn bu tfjtt Trust no friend if thou hast not 
 
 ni<$t gepruft' $aji.— $. tested him. 
 
 (Erfl rant bu faen, First thou must sow, 
 
 £>ann fannft bu ma^en. Then thou canst mow. 
 
 SBaS tjaft bu ge^ort' ? What have you heard ? 
 
 Solemn, bein fi^rcr UU bid) ntdjt. John » y° ur teacher does not praise 
 
 you. 
 
 SECOND PERSON PLURAL. 
 
 3. The second person plural * denotes, mainly, in this num- 
 ber, the same class as that to which bit is applied in the singu- 
 lar. It is employed in addressing religious assemblies : 
 
 SBcmn terrtet U)r euere Secttonen? When do you learn your lessons? 
 
 Winter, euer Sefyrer lo&t cud) nidjt. Children, your teacher does not 
 
 praise you. 
 
 Obs. — Formerly (as at present in French and English), the prevailing 
 form, as being the more polite and respectful, was that of the second, 
 instead of the third person plural, and in some portions of Germany, 
 among the peasantry, its use is still retained. Usually, however, when 
 addressed to a single individual, it implies his inferiority of position : 
 2)ct3 glaufct u)r ttml'Ud) ? fa$te ber Do you really believe that ? said 
 
 ^onig. the king. 
 
 THIRD PERSON SINGULAR. 
 
 4. The pronouns of the third person singular are sometimes 
 used as the second, and indicate the inferior position of the 
 person addressed : 
 
 <£r if! etn glucfltdjet Sftenfd). You are (he is) a happy man. 
 
 e This form is still retained in the syllable (Ew. (contraction of (£tt>er, 
 an obsolete orthography of euer), which is now used only with titles, 
 and is followed by a plural verb : 
 <E». (eure) 3Jtoiej!ttt jtnb »i*t toifctger Your majesty is (are) much more 
 
 aU id). witty than I. 
 
DECLENSION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 89 
 
 THIRD TERSON PLURAL. 
 
 5. In ordinary address, the form of the third person plural 
 oi the pronoun is applied, as well to one, as to more individuals ; 
 hence, when spoken, the person and number intended must be 
 inferred from the context, or the manner of the speaker. 
 
 In writing, however, (Bit and 3^, except at the beginning 
 of a sentence, are made to designate the second person by- 
 means of capital initials (§ 57). 
 
 Soben <Sie mid) ? 
 Sfatn, id) lobe <£ie nidjt* 
 £oben <5te 3b,re Srcimbe? 
 9Mn, id) lobe fie nidjt. 
 £aben@ie 3b,re 93ud)er? 
 £aben bte <3d)iiler tljre Sitdjer? 
 2)te Sd)itlerin b,at u)re SBitdjer. 
 £)ie £inber tyaben ib,ve 23iid)er. 
 
 Do you praise me? 
 No, I do not praise you. 
 Do you praise your friends? 
 No, I do not praise them. 
 Have you your books? 
 Have the scholars their books A 
 The scholar has her books. 
 The children have their books. 
 
 23eifptete. 
 
 ©ingji £u? (ftngen <Ste ? fingt u)r ?) 
 
 8e^en <Sie bicfe SBdume ? 
 
 3a, toir fe^en fie, 
 
 <£tt)tn @ie un.8 ? 
 
 3a, n>tr fe^en <Sie. 
 
 ©eb,en <3ie jene Snglanbertn ? 
 
 9?ein, »ir feben fie rtldjt, 
 
 @ie§t fie ©udj ? 
 
 9km, fte fte^t un3 mdjt. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Do you sing ? 
 
 Do you see these trees ? 
 
 Yes, we see them. 
 
 Do you see us? 
 
 Yes, we see you. 
 
 Do you see that Englishwoman! 
 
 No, we do not see her. 
 
 Does she see you? 
 
 No, she does not see ua. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>ie fbant, -, pi. SScinfe, the bench; 
 
 £>ein, thy, your; 
 
 (Euer, your ; 
 £er S'ticfyer, -3, pi. -, the fan; 
 
 5'erttg, ready, prepared ; 
 '£er gingerljut, -e$, pi. -fjitte, the 
 thimble ; 
 
 Sreunblid), kind, friendly; 
 2)ie ©an$, -, pi. ®dnfe, the goose; 
 2>er ©erber, -0, pi. -, the tanner ; 
 Der £anbfdmf), -e£,pL-e, the glove; 
 
 §0*, high; 
 
 Sfyr, her, their; 
 £>te $u$, -, pL -Sub,e, the cow; 
 
 Sadjelrt, to smile; 
 2)er £eud)ter, -3, pi. -, the candle« 
 stick ; 
 
 9?aft, wet; 
 £>a£ Regiment', -ev, dL -er, the reg- 
 iment; 
 
 ©d)Ied)t, bad; 
 !Der <5d)teier, -3, pi. -, the vail* 
 £>er 2Beg, -eg, pL -e, the way. 
 
90 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 Exercise 50. Slufgctfce 50* 
 
 1. ipaft bn beine £anbfdntl)e? 2. 9Mn, mein Srnber fjat jte. 
 3. S3o finb beine premise? 4. <Ste finb in tfyren 3intment» 5, 
 (Sinb %i)xt @tit()le in 3^^«t 3inimer ? 6. 3&, fte finb in meinem 
 3tmmer. 1* £cd>t tl>r enre gingerpte? 8. 9Mn, enre ^rennbe 
 tyakn fie. 9. CEttre ^rennbe Men enc^; 10. (Seib tfyrreid)? 11. 
 2Cer loBt ben (Sd)iilet ? 12. SBarnm ldd)elt feine Gutter nnb lad)en 
 i^re Winter? 13. SCer IcBt bie <Sd)iiIerin? 14. Die Secretin ift 
 frennbltd) gegen bag $tnb. 15. SBer loBt bie ^inber? 16. 3§vt 
 grennbe Men fie. It, Der Slr^t lofo @ie. 18. 2Ba$ ftyidt bie 
 Seljrerin i^rer SJhttter? 19. @te fd)tctt it)r einen @d)leier nnb einen 
 $ad)er. 20. S3a3 tterfpted)en @te mit ? 21. 3d) tterfprecfye 3^nen 
 mdjts. 22. 2Sa3 aerfpredjen <3te 3§xtn <Sd)nletn ? 23. 3d) tter* 
 fpredje itmen ntd)tS. 24. $3a3 fd)tden <2ie bem ©erkr ? 25.3d) 
 fd)icle if)m bag (Mb. 26. 2Ber fauft bie ®dnfe nnb bie $irt)e ? 
 21* Die ©erfier lanfen fie. 28. <Stnb "bie SQege troden nnb gnt ? 
 29. 9Wn, fie finb na$ nnb fd)led)t 30. @inb bie 53dn!e fd)on fer^ 
 tig? 31. 2Bem ge^oren biefe Sender? 32. ©ingen bie £od)tet 
 3fyrer Sftad^arin? 33. ,^ommt3^ grennb ans bem SRegtmente ? 
 
 Exercise 51. StnfgaBe 51* 
 
 1. Have you my gloves '{ 2. No, your friends have them. 
 3. Do you see your mother ? 4. No, I do not see her. 5. Do 
 your brothers know where the. candlesticks are? 6. Yes, they 
 know where they are. 1. Has the scholar her books and her 
 pencils? 8. Yes, she has them in her desk. 9. Are your 
 benches too high? 10. Yes, they are too high. 11. What do 
 you promise your scholars? 12. I do not promise them any 
 thing. 13. Do your brothers promise you any thing? 14. 
 Yes, they promise me something. 15. What does the scholar 
 send her teacher? 16. She sends her a vail. It. Are your 
 fans too small? 18. No, they are too large. 19. Do the tan- 
 ners buy the cows? 20. No, the butchers buy them. 21. Are 
 the scholars friendly toward the children ? 22. Yes, they are 
 playing with them. 23. Have you the knives ? 24. Yes, 1 
 have then. 25. Are they on your table? 26. No, they are 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 91 
 
 on my desk. 2T» Are your friends reading l 28. No, they 
 are writing. 29. What are they writing 1 30. They are writ- 
 ing letters. 31. Are you writing your father a letter 1 32. 
 Yes, I am writing him a letter. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. Ccctiou XXVI11. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The genitive of the personal pronouns does not (like tha* 
 of nouns, L. IX. 1) indicate possession, but simply answers 
 tc our objective with (and sometimes without) a preposition : 
 
 Gd (tub unfer ttier. There are four of us (of us four). 
 
 Senjt^' meincr nid)U Forget me not. 
 
 ©ao ift beiner nnwiirbig* That is unworthy of thee (of thee 
 
 unworthy). 
 
 2. The genitive of the first and second persons sing, of the 
 personal pronouns, is often contracted to the form of the nomi- 
 native masculine and neuter of the jiossessive. The genitives of 
 the other pronouns are sometimes similarly abbreviated : 
 
 3d) benfe betn (-er) ttenn ber (Sonne I think of thee when the glimmer 
 
 <3d)tmmer »om Sffteere jlrafylt. — ©, of the sun beams from the sea. 
 SSergijji' me in {for tneiner) md)t. Forget me not (see 1). 
 
 ©ebenf'e fein {for fctner). Remember (think of) him. 
 
 3. The dative with tton is employed in rendering our pos 
 sessive with of when used partitively : 
 
 (£r i|t ein $reunb tt o n mtr» He is a friend of mine (of me). 
 
 Bit finb Sertocmb'te » o n un§« They are relatives of ours (of us). 
 
 4. Pronouns referring to neuter appellations of persons, 
 generally follow the natural, rather than the grammatical, gen- 
 der (§ 6, 2) : 
 
 <Sein <So(mdjen ift frctitf, id) fiird)te er His little son is sick ; I fear he will 
 
 {or eS) nurb fterkn. die. 
 
 t>a3 Sttabdjen Ijat i$r (fein) SSudj* The girl has her book. 
 
 5. Pronouns representing inanimate objects must be of the 
 same gender as the nouns to which they refer ; hence our neuter 
 
92 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 pronoun must often be expressed in German by the masculine, 
 or feminine : 
 
 Der £ut tft fd)5n, after c r tfl flein. The hat is fine, but it is small. 
 Die 3ftu|e ifi fdjon, after ft e ifl flein* The cap is fine, but it is small. 
 3$ Ijafte ben £ut nicfyt, fie $at i fyn. I have not the hat, she has it. 
 Ste $ctt bie 2D?ul?e md)t, er fyat fie. She has not the cap, he has it. 
 
 6. In German a pronominal adverb (applied to things) an- 
 swer to a preposition and a pronoun, as commonly employed 
 in English : 
 
 Set) fyafte einen Dfen, after fern $euer I have a stove, but no fire in it 
 
 b a r i n (not in tfjm) ♦ (therein). 
 
 (Er fdmetbet feinen 5tpfel nnb giftt mix He cuts his apple and gives me a 
 
 ettt <&tM b a S> n {not son tfjm). part of it (thereof). 
 
 £r |at itjrc Seber unb fc^rei^t bam it. He has her pen and writes with it 
 
 (therewith). 
 
 1. The neuter pronoun, eS, employed as a grammatical sub- 
 ject, may represent nouns of all genders, and in both numbers. 
 The verb, however, must agree in number with the noun % while 
 in English it agrees with the pronoun : 
 
 SBerifteS? Who is it? 
 
 (E 3 i ft ein $r ember. It is a stranger. 
 
 (E$ finb unfere atten greunbe ^el^e It is (are) our old friends that wo 
 
 ttrir fef)en. see. 
 
 <S i n b e 6 "Sterne ! Is it stars ? (are they stars ?) 
 
 8. When the logical subject is itself a personal pronoun, ed 
 follows the verb ; this being exactly the reverse of the English 
 construction : 
 
 3 $ Bin e 3. It is 7. <£r if! e 3. It is he. 
 
 StnbSieeS? Isit you? Seib i$r e3? Is it youl 
 
 Stnb fie e 3 ? is it they? 2Bt r finb e 3. 7(5 is we. 
 
 9. (S 3 before a verb followed by its subject, frequently an 
 swers to there, but is often used for the sake of emphasis, where 
 in our language a like construction is not admissible : 
 
 (E$ if! niemanb tm (L. 20. 4^ $aufe. There is nobody in the house. 
 
 (E$ finb brei 93M)er ba. There are three books there. 
 
 (E 3 jtefyt ein flitter (Engef . There moves a quiet angel. 
 
 (E 3 pallet ber Conner fo laut (instead There resounds the thunder so loud 
 
 o/ber ©onner pallet fo laut). (The thunder resounds so loud). 
 
 £$ Ieud)tet bie Sonne iifter SBof 1 unb The sun shines upon (the) bad and 
 
 ©ute (bie Sonne leudjtet, k.).— ©♦ (the) good. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 93 
 
 10. (5 3 sometimes refers to a previously expressed noun, or 
 adjective, and may be rendered one or so; e$ is likewise some- 
 times so used as not to require translation : 
 
 Gr if! ©djmteb, abcr id) Mn e$ nidjt* He is (a) smith, but I am not one. 
 
 Slur finb ntd)t aKe cjleid> unb fonucit e3 "We are not all alike and can not 
 
 man fan. — ®. be so. 
 
 3d) tteip e S ba£ er ge$t. I know (it) that he is going. 
 
 11. When pronouns of several different persons are the sub- 
 jects of a plural verb, the first person is preferred to the second, 
 and the second to the third ; often, however, the plural of the 
 pronoun is employed after others which are in the singular : 
 
 ©u unb ber itnafce fa§eu e3. You and the boy saw it 
 
 3d) rDcijjj nidjt n>a3 bit unb id) fafjen. I do not know what you and I saw. 
 
 2)u unb id) roir fa&en e$. You and I (we) saw it. 
 
 12. For the sake of additional emphasis, a pronoun is some- 
 times repeated, or placed after its noun in apposition with it : 
 
 ©o ttieler ©d)roebcn eblcS Slut, e<3 The noble blood of so many Swedes 
 
 i|t um ©otb unb ©tlfier ntd)t ge* (it) has not flowed for gold and 
 
 floifen. — <5. silver. 
 
 Unb btc £ugenb fte t|l feirt Ieerer And virtue (it) is no empty sound, 
 
 [.— ©. 
 
 13. The genitive of the personal pronouns, when referring to 
 individuals, is often used before numerals (like the French en), 
 in which position it seldom requires translation : 
 
 (£r §at bret Sritbcr unb id) II a trois freres, et moi He has three brothers, 
 $abe U)rer nur Stncn. je n'en ai qu'un. and I have cnly one. 
 
 i 
 23etfptele* Examples. 
 
 (£3 tft ntd)t <uTe3 ©clb tta3 glainjt Not all is gold that glitters (see 10). 
 (£$ nriberfdtyrt' Sflandjem me^r ©tyre, There happens to many a one more 
 
 ctlS er scrbtent' honor than he deserves. 
 
 Sir fyaben betner geroar'tet (see 1). TVe have waited for thee. 
 3d) blteb meiner nid)t me$r mddjtig. I remained no longer master of 
 
 myself. 
 ©arunter tetbet fctne Sigenltefce. His self-love suffers bythis (thereby). 
 
 <£r ifl etn SSerttanbter »on unS. He is a relative of ours. 
 
 @3 finb unfer bret, unb t^rer fitnf. There are three of us, and five of 
 
 them. 
 
94 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 3dj fyxBe ben S3afl nid)t, (Sie fyaften t|n. I have not the ball, you have it. 
 
 (Er I)at metne fteber unb fcfyrei&t bamit, Hehasmypenandiswiitingwithit 
 
 (£g fdjeuet bag bijfe ®ett>iff'en £icf)t unb The guilty conscience shuns light 
 
 £ag. — ©, and day. 
 
 2Ber flop ft? 3$ Bin eg. Who is rapping? It is I. 
 
 <Sinb (Sie eg ? Set, nur ftnb eg. Is it you ? Yes, it is we. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Stte JBaumwofle, -, pi. -, the cotton ; 
 Die 23rMe, -, pi. -n, the bridge; 
 
 Damit, with it; 
 
 Darauf, on it; 
 
 Sarin, in it; 
 
 Sort, yonder; 
 Der Drefcfyer, -3, pi.-, the thrasher; 
 Der $drber, -g, pi. -, the dyer; 
 Der g'lad)'g, -eg, pi. -, the flax; 
 Der £anf, -eg, pi. -, the hemp; 
 
 Der $amm, -eg, pi. ^dmme, comb 
 Die Sflabtlt -, ph -n, the needle; 
 
 92d'^en, to sew; 
 Die Seibe, -, pi. -n, the silk; 
 Sag (Sett, -eg, pi. -e, the rope ; 
 Set ©eiler, -g, pi. -, the ropemaker ; 
 Die ©telle, -, pi. -n, place, situation , 
 Der SBeber, -g, pL -, the weaver ; 
 Die SBolle, -, pi. -, the wool ; 
 Der Soffnet/ -g, pi. -, toll-gatherer. 
 
 Exercise 52, SlufgaBe 52, 
 
 1, tfauft ber teller ben £anf ? 2, 3a, cr lauft itjn, 3. 3jl 
 biefer ^la^^ nidjt gut ? 4, 9Mn, er ift nt&}t gut, 5, $auft t>er 
 ©etter bte $Me? 6. ftetn, ber SBefcer lauft |ie. T. tfauft ber 
 SBefotr bie 33aumi»oHe? 8. 9lcirt, ber Drefdjer !auft fie, 9, SBer 
 lauft H$ ©etf? 10. ©er Sftarrofe lauft e3. 11, £at bag SD^ab^ 
 to bie ^abei ? 12. 3a, fie $at bie 9tabel unb tta^t bamit, 13, 
 $3o ift mem $amm ? 14, Sr ftegt auf Sfyxtm £ifd)e, 15, 3$ 
 IjaU einen guten Of en in metnem ftimmzt, aBer e3 ift lein geuer 
 barin, 16, $auft bag 9ftabd)en bie ©cibe? IT, 9Mn, fie lauft 
 ffe nid)t, 18, @e^en @ie ben ^hner tort auf ber 23riufe? 19, 
 Sftein, t$ fe'ije U)it ntd)t, ftet)t er barauf ? 20, ©er 2Be6er ift fleijng, 
 &5er fein 9tad)£ar, ber garfter, ift eg nid)t, 21. @pred)en ©ie mtt 
 1)C3I @d)utern ? 22. 3a, id) |>red)e mit tf)nen, 23. @d)reiBen @te 
 mit ben Steijtiften ? 24, 3a, iti) fcfyreik bamit, 25, £at 3^r 
 Sruber eine angenet)me ©telle? 
 
 Exercise 53. Slttfgafce 53, 
 
 1. Who sells the cotton? 2. The weaver buys it, but he 
 does not sell it. 3. Have the children their ball % 4. No, the 
 girls have it. 5. You often play with the children, and your 
 
REFLEXIVE USE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 95 
 
 brother often teaches them. 6. I am not playing with them 
 now, T am teaching them. 7. Are the scholars writing with 
 our pencils? 8. Yes, they are writing with them. 9. Who 
 buys the wool ? 10. The weaver buys it. 11. Does he buy 
 the hemp ? 12. No, the ropemaker buys it. 13. Does the 
 dyer buy the flax 1 ? 14. No, our friend, the merchant, buys it 
 for the weaver. 15. What is lying on the table yonder? 1G. 
 The needle and the silk are lying on it. 1*7. What have the 
 toll-gatherers in their trunks? 18. They have their money 
 and their clothes in them. 19. Are the girls sewing with the 
 needles? 20. Yes, they are sewing with them. 21. Whom do 
 you see on the bridge ? 22. I do not see any body on it. 23 
 Does the sailor buy the rope ? 24. No, the merchant buys it 
 25. Has the thrasher the cotton ? 
 
 LESSON XXIX. Uction XXIX. 
 
 REFLEXIVE USE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons are 
 often used reflexively ; answering to our compound personal 
 pronouns in the objective case : 
 
 3d) tofte mi dj. I praise myself. 
 
 £u Iol>|t b i dj. Thou praisest thyself. 
 
 3$r lobt end). You praise yourselves. 
 
 3dj gcben'fe m e i n e r. I think of myself. 
 
 £>;t gebenf'|t b e in c r. Thou thinkest of thyself. 
 
 3d; uerfpredj'e mir ntdjtS. I do not promise myself any thing. 
 
 ©a3 serfyredjt' U)r eud)? What do you promise yourselves? 
 
 2. There is in the third person a pronoun (f tdj) which is 
 ased only reflexively. It is indeclinable, and occurs only in 
 the dative and accusative ; answering to all our compound per- 
 sonal pronouns of the third person : 
 
 2>er 181am hit fid). The man praises himself 
 
 £)te grau loot f i d). The woman praises herself 
 
 DaS £inb Wbt f i d) . The child praises itself 
 
96 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 Q$ fonnen fid) nur SBentge re^te'ren, There can but few govern them- 
 
 beu Skrffanb' tterjlan'btg Qefcrau'" selves, (can) use the understanding 
 
 djeiu — ©. understandingly. 
 
 (5r tterfpridjf fid) etJDCtS. He promises himself something. 
 
 9ftan fdjmetdjelt ft c^ oft. One often flatters one's self. 
 
 ©ic $tnber serfpredj'en fid) etttaS* The children promise themselves 
 
 something. 
 
 3d) benfe betn, roenn fid) beS SO^onbe^ I think of thee when the moon's glit- 
 
 Slimmer in Quellen malt, — ©. ter paints itself in fountains. 
 
 3. When our compound personal pronouns are used merely 
 to give emphasis (and not reflexively) they should be rendered 
 by f e U ft , or f e I B er , after the word which it is intended to 
 emphasize : 
 
 (£r ftelo'fynte ben Sealing fell) ft He rewarded the apprentice him- 
 
 self 
 
 (£r fell) ft fcelo'ljnte ben Settling. He himself rewarded the appren- 
 
 tice. 
 
 ©te f e I & ft fcefudj'te bte $rctnfe* She herself visited the patient 
 
 <£te gtng ju ber ifrcmlen f e XI fl. She went to the patient herself. 
 
 4. (Setfcft often follows the reflexive pronouns, and may be 
 rendered own, or entirely omitted in translation ; 
 
 @te XdU ftdj fell) ft« She praises her (own) self. 
 
 2Bir loben un3 fel&fi. "We praise our (own) selves. 
 
 SBer fewtt ftd) fcttfl? — ©♦ "Who knows himself? (one's self.) 
 
 5. @ e IB ft before a noun answers to the adverb even : 
 
 (Sell) fl feme $etnbe <*d)ten i$n. Even his enemies esteem him. 
 
 <S e I & jt feine $reunbe fallen tljn fur Even his friends consider him (hold 
 fdjulbtg. him for) guilty. 
 
 6. The reflexive pronouns, of all persons, in the plural, are 
 frequently employed, where the signification is sufficiently ob- 
 vious, instead of the reciprocal pronoun etnctttber : 
 
 SBirloBen un3. (instead of) "We praise us (i. e. each other). 
 
 SBir loten e t n a n' b e r. ~We praise one another. 
 
 #or eurer Gutter Slug 1 jerjWrt' e u d)« Before your mother's eye destroy 
 
 — ©. each other. 
 
 Sir rcerben tt n 3 roieberfeljen. — ©, We shall see each other again. 
 
 £)ie £i)ran'nen retdjen ft d) bte £anbe. The tyrants extend to each other 
 
 — <E>» their hands (i. e. are forming a 
 
 league). 
 
REFLEXIVE VERBS. 97 
 
 7. © i fr , after a preposition, is often best rendered by a 
 personal pronoun : 
 
 ©rope ©eclcn fatten f i dj an ben &\m* Great souls hold firmly to Heaven, 
 
 mil feft unb laflcn bie Grbe mtter and let the earth roll on beneath 
 
 ftdvfprtrollen. — X). Ihem (selves). 
 
 <Ste fatte fein ©etb 6ct ft d\ She had no money with her. 
 
 £at cr feme lu)r bet ftdj? Has he his -watch with him i 
 
 8 In interrogative sentences, the personal pronoun, in the 
 dative or accusative, is often placed between the verb and its 
 subject (when the subject is a noun) : 
 
 £oben i § n fetne % r e u nb e ? instead of £e$en fetne ftreunbe tl)n ? 
 SSaS fagt tljm ber Scorer? " SBaS fagt ber Sctyrer U)m? 
 
 SSie c-eftn'bet fidj Sfjr grcunb ? " Ste kfm'bet 3$r greunb ftd) ? 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 9. The number of verbs that are used exclusively as reflex 
 ive, is much larger in German than in English : 
 
 <Ste frcge'kn ftdj in bte $Utd)t. They betake themselves to flight, 
 
 (Er k()ilft' ftdj nut Sitgeit. He resorts to falsehoods. 
 
 !Der Seinb fcentadj'rigte ftd) ber ©tabt. The enemy took possession (possess- 
 ed himself) of the city. 
 
 <£r fcefmnt' ftdj ju lange. He bethinks himself too long. 
 
 (Er freftrefct' ftd) e3 gtt tfjun. He tries (exerts himself) to doit. 
 
 SBarum' erct'fert l$t eudj? Why are you becoming angry? 
 
 £3 erct'gnet ftd) felten. It seldom happens. 
 
 Gr ertio'It ftdj tangfam. He recovers (himself; slowly. 
 
 (£r serfdl'tet ftdj fefyr Ietdjt. He takes cold very easily. 
 
 yiafi) roent erhtn'btgt er ftd)? After whom does he inquire? 
 
 (Er getraut' ftdj nidjt ut fpredjen. He does not dare (venture) to speak, 
 
 ©ie fdjamen ftd) tfjreS etgenen ©etra'= They are ashamed (shame theru- 
 
 gen3. selves) of their own conduct, 
 
 ©te feljnen ftd) nadj 9tu$e. They long for quiet. 
 
 SBarum' nnberfefc'enSte ftd) alien met* Why do you oppose (yourself to) 
 
 nen flatten ? all my plans ? 
 
 Unterfre^iV bu bid) nttr iai ju fagen? Do you venture (presume so far as) 
 
 to tell me that? 
 
 10. Many verbs are used reflexively whose equivalents in 
 English are employed intransitively or passively : 
 
 2Me Solb'ten fammelten ftdj urn u)rcn The soldiers assembled (themselves) 
 «uyrer. around their leader. 
 
98 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 ©ii3 ^Better tyefft fidi auf. The weather is clearing (itself) up. 
 
 SBir Mclten un3 in 23erlin' auf. We stopped (ourselves) in Berlin. 
 
 £)ie (Srbe brdjt ftdj an itjrcr STdjfe. The earth turns (itself) on its axis. 
 
 QDcr pummel kbecJt' fid) mit fd)roar$en The sky is being covered (covers 
 
 SSoIfen. itself) "with black clouds. 
 
 T)a$ 23oIf emport' ftfl) gegcn bie 5ie* The people rebel against the gov- 
 
 Qte'rung. ernment. 
 
 3d) frcuc mid) bafj er o,etjt. I rejoice (myself) that he is going, 
 
 ©te $aften fid) entfdjloff'en jn fommen. They have determined (themselves) 
 
 to come. 
 
 IBie ftefm'ben ©te fid) ? How do you do ? (find yourself?) 
 
 3d) kfm'be mirlj feftr roof)!. I am (find myself) very well. 
 
 (£$ ftnbet fid) oft cine ©cle'jjertljeit. An opportunity is often found. 
 
 £>a3 ta'pt ftd) fetdjt bcnfcn. That is (may be) easily imagined. 
 
 ^erti'n'bert fid) md)t 2llle£ inbcr SCBelt ? Does not every thingchange (itself) 
 
 — ®. in the world ? 
 
 Sin iippig tafterttoUeS £eoen fcujjt ftd^ A luxurious vicious life repents (it- 
 
 tn 2J?angel unb (Erme'brtguna, affcin\ self) alone in want and degrada- 
 
 — (5. tion. 
 
 £)er Sunglino, tjr au3 SBtftKifjr fonber* The youth is singular, by choice, 
 
 oar unb freut fid); ber Sfttann ift e^ and is delighted; the man is so 
 
 unaoftdjt'Iidj unb d'rgert fid). — Sift. unintentionally,and is mortified. 
 
 11. Some transitive verbs in taking the reflexive form, un- 
 dergo a change of signification (§ 86. 6) : 
 
 (Sr fdjidt fid) in bie itmftanbe. He adapts himself to circumsfrj* mb. 
 
 (£3 fd)tcct fid) nid)t fo ju fyanbetn. It is not proper to act thus. 
 
 (£r $crilet)t' fid) auf Sftufif . He is a judge of music. 
 
 3d) serlaf'fe mid) auf fie, I depend upon them. 
 
 (£$ !oer|M)t' fid) bap e3 roaT)r ifl. Of course (?'. <?. evidently) it, i ' ra* 
 
 <Da3 »er|le^t' ffdj von felofr. That is a matter of course. 
 
 SBetfptele. Examples. 
 
 *£)ie §anb amSdjroertCyfdjauen fie ftdj The hand on the sword, they gaze 
 
 brofjenb an." threateningly at each other. 
 
 ©o roiberfpred/en bie Dra'fel fid). — ©♦ So do the oracles contradict oafi 
 
 other. 
 
 "(S3 tter&ev'gen fid) nod) SStete in bie*» Many still conceal the tr.gaVreswith- 
 
 fen 5flauern>" in these walls. 
 
 3$ fieue mid), bafj (Sie nid)t gef)en. I am glad that you do not gc. 
 
 33erjM)'en <5ie fid) auf £ud) ? Are you a judge of cloth ? 
 
 (£r oradj in bie Mtterften ©orrourfe ge* He broke out in (into) the bitterest 
 
 gen ftdj fetter auS.— 9?— 3. reproaches agains-i Limoelf. 
 
REFLEXIVE VERBS. 
 
 99 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 T>ie 9r*fe, -, pi. -tt, the axis; 
 
 Slcfttcn, to esteem ; 
 
 33et, in, with; 
 
 SSefd&ei'&en, modest; 
 
 23etra'gen, to behave; 
 2)cr ©tener, -$, pi. -, the servant; 
 
 $)rctycn, to turn ; 
 
 Etltan'ber, each other; 
 'IV (irbc, -, pi. -n, the earth; 
 
 Grfdl'ten, to take cold ; 
 
 3Me %xau, -, pi. -en, the woman; 
 
 ©ut, (adv.) well; 
 
 (Sd)Iagen, to strike, to beat; 
 
 (5d)metd;elrt, to flatter; 
 
 ©ebjl, see 4. 5 ; 
 
 ©id), see 2; 
 
 Sabetn, to blame; 
 £>er SBunbarjt, -e3, pi -ftrjte, tho 
 surgeon. 
 
 Exercise 54. 
 
 Slufgace 54. 
 
 1 . SBantm Uf tot btd> ? 2. 3$ Io*e mid) nirtt. 3. 2£er loot 
 ftd) ? 4. 3ener $ebner toBt ft*. 5. SBarmn tabett itjr eucfc ? 
 6. 2Bir tabeln un$ ntrtt. T. 3ene grau foot fid). 8. £iefe ^m^ 
 ber fdtfagett ftdj. 9. SBarum fd)fagen fte fid) ? 10. 3ene @d)uter 
 ftaffen emanber. 11. ©arum fd)tneid)eln @ie ftd)? 12. 3d) 
 fd)meid)le mid) nid>t. 13. ®et)en ©ie^u bem SBunbarjte feloft, ober 
 ju [einem fritter? 14. ©el)en @te felofl gu bem SBmtbarjte, ober 
 fcbtcfen (Sic 3firen Xiener? 15. ©elc-ft bie $eint?e bfefeS Cannes 
 acoten unb looen tint. 16. Sin oefcBeibener 9ttann lofct ftd) felojt 
 nicfrt. 17. Sftart erfaitet ftco, leidst pet fotckm Setter. 18. £iefe 
 $tnber oetragen ftd) nic&t gut. 19. 2£ie oft bref>t ftd) bie @rbe urn 
 l$re3tdjfe? 20. SBie erlaltet ftcB 3^r Xtener? 21. Gr erfaltet fl$ 
 ntcot. 22. 23etragen ftd) bie <BMUx gut ? 23. Unfere <&MUx 
 ktragen ftd^ immer fefyr gut. 24. @ie ftnb md)t3^ ctgenergreunb, 
 benn @ic fdjmeicMn ftd). 25. (Sin loader f$reitnb fdmtetdjelt nie. 
 
 Exercise 55. 
 
 ufgaBe 55, 
 
 1. The idle scholar blames himself. 2. Do you praise your- 
 self? 3. Why does not the boy behave himself well ? 4. Do 
 you take cold easily? (do you easily take cold ?) 5. Do you 
 sec yourself? 6. Do you see the surgeon himself? 7. Do 
 you see the surgeon yourself? 8. Really good men flatter 
 themselves sometimes. 9. The earth turns on its axis. 10. 
 Even the enemies of a good man esteem him. 11. In what 
 kind of weather does one take cold easily? 12. Does this 
 
100 LESSON XXX. 
 
 woman blame herself? 13. She blames nerself, but her friends 
 do not blame her. 14. Those children strike each other. 15. 
 Do modest men praise themselves? 16. Dost thou blame 
 thyself? 17. I do not blame myself. 18. Does the servant 
 praise himself 19. No, he blames himself. 20. Do you flat- 
 ter yourselves 1 ? 21. We do not flatter ourselves. 22. Why 
 do you blame each other? 23. Do those men understand each 
 other ? 24. They do not hear each other. 25. We visit each 
 Other very often. 
 
 ^*».» ■»»» 
 
 LESSON XXX. Cation XXX. 
 
 NEW DECLENSION PLURAL. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Adjectives in the plural, when they follow biejc, feme, or 
 a word of that class (L. XXV. 1) end. in all their cases, in en, 
 and are of the 
 
 NEW DECLENSION. 
 
 N. btefe gut-en (farmer); feirte gut-en (banner); 
 
 G. btefer gut-en (banner); feiner gut-en (banner); 
 
 D. btefen gut-en ( s TCnnern) ; letnen gut-en (^Raiment) ; 
 
 A. btefe gut-en (banner): leine gut-en (banner*). 
 
 2. Nouns of the new declension have all cases of the plural 
 hko the oblique cases of the singular (L. XXII.), except £err, 
 which takes only n in the singular, and e n in the plural : 
 N. Me Ungar-n, bte 9teffe-n, tie ©olbat-en, 
 G. ber Ungar-n, ber ^ejfe-n, ber (Solcat-en, 
 D. ben Ungar-n, ben 9hjfe-n, ben ©olDat-en, 
 A. bie Ungar-n, bie *ftejfe-n, bie ©oltat-en. 
 
 * In what respect io the form banner, an exception to Rule 1 L. XX Y f 
 See L. XXVI. 3. 
 
DECLENSION OF PROPER, NAMES. L01 
 
 FEMININE NOUNS. 
 
 3. Feminine nouns, except those ending in fitnft and nig, 
 and those contained in the list page 276, form their plural ac- 
 cording to the new declension. Those ending in the suffix in 
 double the n in the plural ; as, ^reunttn, ^reunttnnen. 
 
 N. He 23fume-n, tie U()r-en. Me <3dwefter-n, tie 5ftatcl-n 
 
 G. jer 25Iume-n, ter UI)r-en, ter ©d}n>ejfrr-n, ter 9tatet-n 
 
 D. ten 23lume-n, ten Uljr-en, ten @d)mefter-n, ten 3tocl-tt 
 
 A. tie 251ume-n, tie Uljr-en, tie <Sd)»ejier-n, tie Sftatcl-n 
 
 DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 
 
 4. Proper names of persons usually take $ in the genitive, 
 except feminities ending in e, which add n3 : 
 
 Nom. ipetnrid), Henry, Gen. £einrid)-3, Henry's, 
 
 Norn. ©otl)e, Goethe, Gen. ®£t$e-3, Goethe's, 
 
 Nom. ©ertrut, Gertrude, Gen. ©ertrut-3, Gertrude's, 
 
 Nom. Charlotte, Charlotte, Gen. (S|artotte-n£, Charlotte's. 
 
 5. Masculine nouns ending in such a letter that euphony 
 will not admit of an additional 6, add in the genitive en 5: 
 
 Nom. Dpi£, Opitz, Gen. Dpt£-en3, Opitz's, 
 
 Nom. granj, Francis, Gen. $ran3-cn3, Francis'. 
 
 6. Masculine nouns whose endings would admit of g in the 
 genitive, sometimes (though rarely) add n3 or en3, and n or 
 en in the dative and accusative : 
 
 JTemtt tt)r Slbalkr't-en (instead of Do you know (are you acquainfc- 
 STbalfcert) ? ed with) Adalbert ? 
 
 FOREIGN PROPER NAMES. 
 
 7. Foreign proper names, if the final letter admit of it, 
 usually form the genitive by adding 3, frequently preceded by 
 the apostrophe ; those of other terminations generally indicate 
 the case by means of the article; the noun being unchanged: 
 
 (£r Iteft SijronS ©ebtdj'te. He is reading Byron's poems. 
 
 £>ie SReben beS 2)emo3'tt)ene3 ftnb The orations of Demosthenes are 
 
 weltberii'fymt. world-renowned, 
 
 ©ief) ba! ftel) ba,Zmo'tytu§, bie ^rct* See therel see there, Timotheu^ 
 
 mdje be« SfcyfuS.— <&. the cranes of Ibycus. 
 
102 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 8. Proper names of places and countries form their genitive 
 by adding g, if the .final letter admit of it, otherwise the case 
 is indicatid by the article : 
 
 £)te beutfdje $reu)ctt erfyo'fc ftdJ au$ The German freedom rose iroia 
 2ftagbefcurg 1 3 SIffte. — <5. Magdeburg's ashes. 
 
 2)ie (£tntt>o'fjner ber ©tctbt 9>ari<3'. (L. The inhabitants of the city ( >f; 
 LIX. 1.) Paris 
 
 33ei|>tele. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 S)ic <Sctdjfen flanben burdj etnen fcreitcn The Saxons stood separated by * 
 
 Srcifdjenrctum son ben ©djweben ge* 
 trennt\ — <S. 
 
 wide intervening space from thw 
 Swedes. 
 
 8tffe ©uten, aHe SSofen folgen i^rer All (the) good, all (the) bad follow 
 
 Sftofenfaur.— @. 
 Die £)dnen finb gefdjuf te SWctrro'fen. 
 ©ie Siirfen finb gute ©olba'ten* 
 
 her rosy path. 
 The Danes are skillful sailors. 
 The Turks are good soldiers. 
 
 £>ie Sftuffen unb 9)reugcn unterbvucE'en The Russians and Prussians op- 
 bie $Poten* press the Poles. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 3Me SBtene, -, pi. -% the bee ; 
 ©tc SBirne, -, pi. -% the pear; _ 
 SMe Ctouft'ne, -, pi. -n, the cousin; 
 £)er Dan 9 , -n, pi. -n, the Dane; 
 
 ©ufttg, fragrant ; 
 
 Sett, fat; 
 
 $riebltcfj, peaceful; 
 £)ie ©abet, -, pi. -n, the fork; 
 
 ®efrf)tc?t\ skillful; 
 S)er ^>effe, -n, pi. -n, the Hessian ; 
 £>te Jfanjel, -, pi. -n, the pulpit; 
 £)er D<H -en (or Dd)fe,-n), pL -en, 
 the ox; 
 
 spatrto'ttfdj, patriotic; 
 She §)flaume, -, pi. -n, the plum; 
 £)ct$ 3>o jetton', -3, pi. -e, the porce- 
 lain ; 
 £)er $>reu£e, -n, pi. -n, the Prussian ; 
 £>ie ikebe, -, pi. -n, the oration; 
 She 9?ofe, -, pi. -n, the rose; 
 
 ©d)ladjten, to slaughter; 
 S)cr <Sd)tt>ebe, -n, pi. -n, the Swede; 
 She Xctffe, -, pi. -n, the cup; 
 £)ct$ 2*olf,-e3, pi. Golfer, the people; 
 
 SOBeltkriu)mt, world-renowned. 
 
 Exercise 56. Slttfga&e 56* 
 
 1« Die spreufcen, £effen, 23aiern tmt @a#fett finb Deutfcfye, 2. 
 Die Detttfdjen finb ein fletfjiges, frtMt$?3 SSolf. 3. Die grange* 
 fen, $ofen, £urfen ttnb Ungarn finb geinbe ber Sfltiffcrt. 4. Die 
 (Sotbaten faufen unb fdjlacfoten Me fetten Dd)fen. 5. Diefe ffelnen 
 Jtna&en tjafcen 33trnen, $ftawmen, ^irfdjen unb 2fyrifofen. 6. Die 
 ©cfyiifertnnen geljen gu ben Sctjrerinnem 1« 3fcre ©djiilerimten 
 finb unfere Soufinen, 8* Die patrtottfdjen Dieben beg DemoftfjeneS 
 
DECLENSION OP PROPER NAMES. 103 
 
 fmb foelt&crutjmh 9. £te neuen Utjrett ants $eiien unferer grcun* 
 Httiicn ftnt) son ©oft. 10, -Diefe Sftofett unb 9Mfen fmfc fdjone 
 331umcn. 11. <Dte ^angeln in jcnen $trdjen fktfc ju ftod). 12. 
 £ie fleijngen 33ienen liefcen tie bufttgen 93htmefr« 13. Sfteine 
 
 Scfcweftew §afcen meine neuen Severn. 14, Xicfe £affen ftnt> son 
 9)or$eflcm, tie ©akin son ©ilfcer. 15. £ie (SdjtDcfcen unt> Sanen 
 [tut gefdn'tfte 9)?arrofen. 
 
 Exercise 57. 21 uf gate 57. 
 
 1. These Germans are Bavarians, Hessians, Prussians and 
 Saxons. 2. Those boys sell pears, plums and cherries. 3. 
 The cups are of porcelain. 4. The French are a patriotic people. 
 5. Who buys and slaughters the oxen of the soldiers'? 6. Are 
 these sailors Danes, Swedes or Russians 1 7. Are the Russians 
 and Turks skillful sailors 1 8. Who sells the soldiers the fat 
 oxen 1 ? 9. Are these roses and pinks fragrant and beautiful 
 flowers 1 10. Are not the pulpits in these new churches high 
 enough? 11. Do the industrious bees love all beautiful flowers? 
 12. Are the Danes an industrious, peaceful people ? 13. Have 
 our cousins our pens and our books'? 14. The boys in our 
 schools read the world-renowned orations of Demosthenes. 
 15. These cups and those forks belong to the nephews of those 
 old sailors. 
 
 Remark. — By means of the appended table the pupil will 
 be enabled to compare at one view the various terminations 
 which have been separately given him in the preceding Lessons. 
 This arrangement will both serve the purpose of a move general 
 review, and at the same time be well adapted to fix in the mem- 
 ory the peculiarities of the different declensions. The endings 
 of the adjective, especially, in its various modes of inflection, 
 as well as the words by which those endings are affected, should 
 receive a patient attention. 
 
104 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 9. CONNECTED VIEW OF THE ARTICLE, DEMONSTRATIVE 
 
 IN ALL 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 Masc. Few,. Neut. 
 N. ber, bie, bag, 
 G. beg, ber, beg, 
 D. bent, ber, Cent, 
 A. ben, bie, bag, 
 
 Masc. Fein. 
 
 btefer, btefe, 
 
 biefeg, btefer, 
 
 btefem, btefer, 
 
 biefen, btefe, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 biefeg, 
 
 biefeg, 
 
 biefem, 
 
 biefeg, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 mein, 
 
 nteineg, 
 metnem, 
 nteinen, 
 
 Fem. 
 
 nteine, 
 
 meiner, 
 
 meiner, 
 
 nteine. 
 
 Neut. 
 mein, 
 
 nteineg, 
 meinenu 
 muih 
 
 OLD DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE AND NOUN. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 N. guter, 
 
 G. guteg (en), 
 
 D. gutent, 
 
 A. guten, 
 
 Fein. Neut. 
 
 8«te, 
 guter, 
 guter, 
 gute, 
 
 pteg, 
 pteg (en), 
 ptent, 
 pteg, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 floffer, 
 tfofferg, 
 Coffer, 
 Coffer, 
 
 Masc. 
 
 £ut, 
 £>uteg, 
 £ute, 
 £ut, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 3ar)reg, 
 
 3ar)re, 
 
 Sa^r, 
 
 Neut 
 
 fitter, 
 TOtelg, 
 3Rtttel, 
 2>UtteL 
 
 NEW DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XV.) AND NOUN (l. XXII.). 
 
 Masc. Fern. (L. xxm. 3. obs.) Neut. Masc. Masc. 
 
 K ber pte, bie, or meine pte, bag pte, SBaier, ©raf, 
 
 G. bt^> pten, ber, or meiner guten, beg pten, SBaiern, ©rafen, 
 
 D. bent pten, ber, or meiner pten, bem pten, 23aiern, ©rafen,. 
 
 A. ben pten, bie, or meine pte, ba^ pte, S3aiern, ©rafen. 
 
 MIXED DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XVI. 1, 2). 
 
 Masc. Neut. Masc. Neut. 
 
 N. mein pter, mein pteg, fetn alter, fein alteg, 
 
 G. nteineg pten, nteineg guten, feineg alten, feineg alien, 
 
 D. mcinem guten, meinem guten, fetnem alten, feinem alten, 
 
 A. meinen guten, mein guteg, feinen alten, fetn alteg. 
 
 WORDS REQUIRING THE NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. . Masc. Fem. Neut. Fem. Fem. 
 
 jeber, j.ebe, . j.ebeg; beine; feine; 
 
 jener, jene, jeneg; eine; unfere; 
 
 manner, mandje, mandjeg; eure; feine; 
 
 folder, fold)e, fo!d)eg; i^re; (L. 23. 3. obs.) 
 
 roeldjer, roeldje, roetdjeg; meine* 
 
 WORDS REQUIRING THE MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 betn, ein, euer, i$r, mein, fein, unfer and fein. (L. XVI. 1. note ) 
 
 after, 
 
 atte, alleg; 
 
 ber, 
 
 bie, bag; 
 
 biefer, 
 
 biefe, biefeg; 
 
 einiger, 
 
 einige, einigeg; 
 
 ctlid)cr, 
 
 etlid)e, etlictjeg; 
 
CONNECTED VIEW OF THE ARTICLE, ETC. 105 
 
 AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, ADJECTIVE AND NOUNS, 
 DECLENSIONS. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 Ah Genders. 
 bie; Mefe; meine; 
 ber; biefer; meiner; 
 ben; biefen; meincn; 
 bie; btefe; meine. 
 
 OLD DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE AND NOUN. 
 
 All Gend. Masc. Masc. Neut. Neut. Fern. Fem. 
 
 gute; Coffer; £itte; Sat)re; SJUttel; S3d'nfe; SBilbniffe; 
 
 guter; Coffer; £iite; Satyre; 9tittelj SBd'nfe; SMbmffe,* 
 
 guten; $offern; £iiten; 3af)ren; SD^itteln; S3d'nfen; SBilbntffen; 
 
 gute; Coffer; £iite; 3a$re; Sftittel; SBanfe; SSilbntffe, 
 
 NEW DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE (l. XXX. 1.) AND NOUN. 
 
 All Genders. Masc. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 bie guten; meine guten; S3aiern; ©rafen; Sebevn; £erjen; 
 
 ber guten; metner guten; SBaiern; ©rafen; $ebern; £cr$en; 
 
 ben guten; meinen guten; S3atern; ©rafen; Sebern; $er$cn; 
 
 bie guten; meine guten; S3aiern; ©rafen; $eberu; #erjett. 
 
 MIXED DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 All Genders. 
 
 aUe gute;* 
 
 roeldje gute; 
 
 einige groge; 
 
 after guten; 
 
 tt>eld)er guten; 
 
 einiger grofjcn; 
 
 alien guten; 
 
 n>eld)en guten; 
 
 einigen grogen; 
 
 atte gute ; 
 
 weldje gute; 
 
 einige grofe. 
 
 WORDS REQUIRING 
 
 THE NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 aHe;° einige; 
 
 mand)e; roeId)e; 
 
 eure ; feine ; 
 
 bie; etlid)e; 
 
 metyrere; 
 
 i|re; ' unferc; 
 
 biefe; jerte; 
 
 fotd)e ; beine ; 
 
 meine; feine. 
 
 * Note, that after atfe, einige, etlidje, mantle, mefjrere or metjre, folcfteand 
 ft>elc$e, the adjective sometimes takes a mixed declension (L. XXXI. 9) 
 
 5* 
 
106 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 LESSON XXXI. Uction XXXI. 
 
 IRREGULAR DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 1. The following nouns are inflected according to the new 
 declension, (except that they add g to en of gen. sing.) : ber 
 23nd)ftaBe, the letter; ber gelg, the rock; ber griebe, the peace; 
 ber gunfe, the spark ; ber ©ebanf e, the thought ; ber ®(an6e, the 
 belief; ber ipanfe, the heap; ber Sftame, the name ; ber ©ante, 
 the seed; ber (Scfyabe, the damage; ber SBttte, the will. 
 
 N. ber gelgj ber griebe; ber $lamt; 
 
 G. beg getf-engj beg grtebe-ng; beg 9tame-ng; 
 
 D. bem ge(f-en; bent grtebe-n; bem 9tame-n; 
 
 A. ben gelf-en; ben grtebe-n; bett lament. 
 
 2. Some of the above words, however, sometimes take in 
 the nominative singular en, and are regularly inflected accord- 
 ing to the old declension; as, ber gelfen, beg gelfeng, etc. 
 
 3. gelg and griebe sometimes follow the old declension in the 
 singular; as, ber gelg, beg geljeg, bem gelje, ben gelg. 
 
 2)a fofffl bit ben $tU fdjlagett. Thou shalt smite the rock. — Exodua 
 
 xvii. 5. 
 
 4. 2)er ©(^merj forms the genitive by adding en3 ; bag iperj 
 adds enS in the genitive and en in the dative, and both form 
 their plural according to the new declension (L. XXX. 2). 
 
 5. The following nouns take the old declension in the singular, 
 and the new in the plural ; namely masculine, ber 5ll)n, the an- 
 cestor; ber Saner, the peasant; ber !Dorn, the thorn (§ 15. 3) ; 
 ber glitter, the spangle; ber gorft, the forest; ber ©an, the coun- 
 try; ber ©esat'ter, the god-father ; ber SorBeer, the laurel; ber 
 t!ftaft, the mast ; ber 9t a (fyBar, the neighbor; ber $fan, the pea- 
 cock; ber (See, the lake; ber ©pom, the spur; ber (Staat, the 
 state; ber @tad)el, the sting; ber (Strati, the beam ; ber ©traujj, 
 the ostrich (§ 15. 3); ber Untert^an, the subject; ber Setter, the 
 cousin ; ber fimat or 3Urat§, the ornament. Neuter, bag 2lna,e, 
 the eje; bag Sett, the bed; bag (Snbe, the end; bag £emb, the 
 shirt ; bag D§r, the ear. 
 
ntREGULAR DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 107 
 
 6. declension or 33 ct iter and 2tuge. 
 
 Singular (old). Plural (new). Singular (old). Plural (new). 
 
 N. ter Center, tic 23auer-n, &ag 5tuge, tie 2litge-n, 
 
 G. fce3 33auer-s, ter 23auer-n, te3 2iuge-s, fcer 2htge-n, 
 
 D. tem 23auer, ten 23auer-n, tern 2(uge, ten 2luge-n, 
 
 A. ten 23auer, tie 33aner-n, taS Sluge, tie 2Iuge-m 
 
 7. 23ett and .<pemt sometimes take the plural forms 23ctte and 
 £emter. 
 
 8. 2) er @ce signifies the lake; b i e (See, the ocean; their form 
 is the same in all cases except the genitive singular, ©pom 
 frequently has the plural ©poren, instead of (Sporne. 
 
 For further examples of nouns with a mixed declension see 
 §19. 
 
 MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 9. After atte, einige, etlid)e, manege, meljrere or mefyre, folct)e 
 and foelcfye the nominative and accusative of the adjective some- 
 times follow the old, and the other cases the new declension, 
 thus forming in the plural also a mixed declension : 
 
 (Er fyat etntge pte (or auten) Sreunbe. He has a few good friends. 
 jDurdj tie ©itte einiger gutcn Sreunbe. Through the kindness of a few good 
 
 friends. 
 
 Seifptefe* Examples. 
 
 £>er Vlamt tft cm ungettoljnndjer. The name is an uncommon one. 
 
 3d) feime 9?temanb biefeS SftamenS* I know nobody by (of) this name, 
 
 ©lite g-urjktt&ffom'men letdjt gutettn* Good princes easily obtain good 
 
 tertljanen, nid)t ft) leid)t btefe jene, subjects, the latter (do) not so 
 
 — SR. easily (obtain) the former. 
 
 Die 9)oIen unb Ungom [tub bit 9lady The Poles and Hungarians are the 
 
 Barn ber S8o$men» neighbors of the Bohemians. 
 
 D, eine eble £tmmel3gafce ift ba§ Cidjt O, a precious gift of Heaven is the 
 
 be$ 2[ug,e3. — @. light of the eye. 
 
 2Bir jinb etneS £erjen3, eme$ 33lut$. "We are of one heart, of one blood. 
 
 — e. 
 
 2Her Slugen fe$en Beffer al3 gt»ei. — Four eyes are better than two (two 
 
 heads are better than one). 
 (58 ijl feme 3fofe c$ne ©omen* There is no rose without thorns. 
 
108 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 <E)le 33ctrfe, -, pi. -It, the bark; 
 £>er 2)orn, -eg, pi. (§ 15. 3) the thorn; 
 
 £)rei (seep. 299.) three; 
 
 ©rcfdjen, to thrash; 
 £)er ©levant', -en, pi. -en, elephant; 
 
 @rft, first; 
 3)er $riebe, -n§, pi. -, the peace; 
 2>et $urft, -en, pi. -en, the prince; 
 2>ag©etrei'be, -g,.pl. -, the grain; 
 
 £ej5t, last; 
 2)er 9Kafl, -eg, pi. -en, the mast; 
 S)er Sfome, -ng, pi. -n, the name; 
 
 9fennen, to call; name; 
 
 2)er §)fau, -eg, pi. -en, the peacock; 
 
 Sftufen, to call (see nennen); 
 1?er (Scfymerj, -eg or -eng, pi. -ett, 
 
 the pain 
 £)er ©taat, -eg, pi. -en, the state; 
 2)er vStctdjel, -g, pi. -n, the sting; 
 Der ©torenfrteb, L. XXIV. 6; 
 £)er ©torer, -g, pi. -, the disturber; 
 
 Uekrfe|'en, to translate; 
 2)er Untert^an, -g, pi. -en, subject; 
 
 Serei'nigt, united; 
 
 ^erur'jacfyen, to cause; 
 £»ie SBegpe, -, pi. -n, the wasp. 
 
 Exercise 58. 
 
 SlufgaBc 58. 
 
 1. Sftan ftnbet in ben $eremigten(£taaten feme ^xirften nnb feme 
 Untertljanen. 2. Sine 23arfe tyat bret 9ftajfcn. 3. £te 23auern 
 fcrefdjen tX)r ©etreibe. 4. 3d) ^fie ^ SBagen metnes SftadjbarS 
 unb bte $ferbe 3^rer 9tad)6arn. 5. (Es finb feme Sftofen ofyte£or* 
 ncn. 6. Sftcine Settern ijaben brei fdone Spfauen. ?♦ £ie Dfyren 
 be3 (Sleptjanten finb grog r feme 2lugen finb Hein. 8. 3d) Itnixt ben 
 Statin, after id) metp fetnen tauten md)t. 9. Sterne ©tacfyeht »er* 
 nrfad)en oft grope ©cfymer^en. 10. 5ft an netmt einen (Storer be3 
 grtetcno einen ©torenfrteb. 11. ©eine 33ettern rnfen t^n, after er 
 tybrt fie nidjt. 12. SBiffen @ie ben Unterfd^ieb gwifdjen "Nennen" 
 nnb "9tufen" ? 13. S3ie iifterfe|t man "3ftufen" nnb toie Nennen"? 
 14. %u Setter tuft bie ^inber in fein fyaud nnb nennt fte aufmerf- 
 fame <Sd)uler. 15. £ie Secern beS ©tranfj e3 finb fet)r fd)5n* 
 
 Exercise 59. 
 
 SlufgaBe 59, 
 
 1. Do you know how many masts a bark has? 2. What is 
 a disturber of the peace called 1 3. Why does the teacher call 
 his scholars into the house 1 4. The elephant has small eyes 
 and large ears. 5. Ostriches and peacocks have beautiful 
 feathers, and large, ugly feet. 6. How are the words Sftufen 
 and Nennen translated 1 7. There are many Germans in the 
 United States. 8. Which pupils are idle? 9. All good princes 
 have good subjects, but not all good subjects have good princes. 
 10. Our old neighbors, the peasants, are thrashing their grain; 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 109 
 
 they hav3 wheat, oats, rye and barley. 11. Every rose has 
 its thorns. 12. The bees and wasps cause great pain with their 
 sharp stings. 13. Under what name is that old soldier known 
 here ? 3 4. Somebody is calling your cousins. 15. Their teacher 
 calls them good and attentive scholars. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. fcection XXXII. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 COMPARATIVE. 
 
 1. Adjectives, which in the positive end in e, form their com- 
 parative by adding r, those of other terminations by adding en 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Positive. Comparative. 
 
 iueife, wise; roeif-er, wiser; milt*, mild; mtfb-er, milder; 
 fettt, fine; fctn-er, finer; treu, true; treu-er, truer; 
 eitef, vain; eit-Ier, (L.XII.5.) fitjj, sweet; fitjj-er, sweeter; 
 jtolj, proud ; jtotj-er, prouder ; rerB, firm; berB-er, firmer. 
 
 SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 2. Adjectives ending in fc, i, g, jj, fdj, t, u or 3, usually form 
 the superlative by adding efi; those of other terminations 
 add ft : 
 
 Positive. Superlative. Positive. Superlative. 
 
 imtfc, mild; mift-eft, mildest; fret, free; fret-eft, freest; 
 fii§, sweet; fitfj-ejfr, sweetest; taut, loud; taut— eft, loudest; 
 ftol^, proud; ftolg-eft, proudest; SerB, firm; fcerB-ft, firmest; 
 Ia v m, lame ; laf)m-ft, lamest ; fteif, stiff; fteif-ft, stiffest. 
 
 3. When the positive is a monosyllable, the root vowels a, 
 0, it, generally assume the Umlaut in the other degiees (for 
 executions, however, see §. 36. 5.) : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 alt, old; att-er, older; alt-eft, oldest; 
 
 groB, coarse; grcB-er, coarser; groB— ft, coarsest; 
 
 Hug, prudent ; flug-er, more prudent ; f litg-jt, most prudent^ 
 
110 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 4. The following are of irregular comparison : 
 
 grojj, large; gr&fjer, larger; gregt, largest; 
 
 gut, go^d ; Beffer, better ; fcejt, best ; 
 
 tyo$, high; \ $5§er, higher; f)od)ft, highest; 
 
 naty near uci^er, nearer; nad)ft, nearest, next ; 
 
 fciel, much, many ; metjr, more; nteift (met)rft), most. 
 
 ipocfy, when used attributively drops its c, also in the positive ; 
 as, eiu Ijotjer (not I)o$er) 33erg, a high mountain. 
 
 5. Adjectives are subject to the same rules of declension in 
 the comparative and superlative, as in the positive (L. XIV. 3. 
 L. XV. 1. and L. XVI. 1): 
 
 (Sr if! retdjer ate id). He is richer than I. 
 
 (£r ifl tin retdjerer Sftarm aU id). He is a richer man than I. 
 
 (£r ifl ber reidjjle SJkrm. He is the richest man. 
 
 SJWn fcefter £ut ifl nic^t neu. My best hat is not new. 
 
 £)er fcefle $ut ifl nid)t fe^r gut. The best hat is not very good. 
 
 SEBeffcit £ut ift ber Befte ? Whose hat is the best? 
 
 2Beffen £ud) ifl ba$ kfle ? Whose book is the best? 
 
 6. When the superlative is used predicatively it usually 
 stands in the dative after a nt (an tent § 38.) : 
 
 9fteirt #ut ifl am kflert. My hat is the best (lit. at the best). 
 
 Sfteirt 33udj ifl am fceflert. My book is the best. 
 
 (£r tfl am attefiert son alien. He is the oldest of all. 
 
 <5te lefcn a m kfleru You read the best. 
 
 *l. The superlative is often suffixed to the genitive plural of 
 all: 
 
 JMtftt Jttt ifl ber *Wnjle, or ) Thig hat . g ^ finegt of aU> 
 
 ©tefer §ut ift a m allerfdjtmjleru ) 
 
 (Sin atterliefcfleS $tnb. A most charming child. 
 
 8. When two qualities of the same object are compared, the 
 adjective, without change of form, is qualified by some other 
 word : 
 
 (Er ifl me r)r tapfer ate flug. He is more valiant than prudent. 
 
 (£r ifl tt eni g e r tapfer ate Hug. He is less valiant than prudent. 
 
 <£r ifl efcen fo tapfer ate flug. He is just as valiant as prudent. 
 
 9. Participles are subject to the same rules of comparison 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Ill 
 
 and declension as the adjective, except that they do not take 
 the Umlaut ; and in the present }t , instead of eft, is added : 
 
 <£in ritfyrcnbercS (Sdjaufpict. A more touching spectacle. 
 
 £>a$ rityrertbfle <S$aitfpiel. The most touching spectacle. 
 
 10. 3e — btfto, or je — je (with the comparative) answers to 
 the — the in English : 
 
 Se alt:: beflo (or je) e^vtDurbtger* The older the more venerable. 
 
 Se efyer ber 23ore gef)t, urn befto fceffer The sooner the messenger goes th 
 
 fur un$. better for us. 
 
 Se langer je liekr. The longer the better. 
 
 11. After the latter of these words ( — fcefto, or — je) the verb 
 precedes its subject : 
 
 Se fleigiger irir fmb, beffo fd)nelfer The more industrious we are, the 
 Iernen nnr (instead ofmx lernen). faster we learn (learn we). 
 
 Se f)6r)er man i|t bcflo tiefer farm man The higher one is, the deeper one 
 fallen. can (can one) fall. 
 
 Se tdnger id) mitu)m kfanntMn, befro The longer I am acquainted with 
 licber nnrb er mir. him, the more dear he becomes 
 
 to me. 
 
 Seifpiete* Examples. 
 
 £$ ifi nid)t$ aU ein Moper 2Bat)rt. It is nothing (else) than a mere 
 
 — £. illusion. 
 
 (£r ift Sfttd)^ toe nig er aU ntetn He is nothing less than (he is) my 
 
 ^reunb. friend, 
 
 ^e mcfyr ©otteS* unb 9)?enfd)enliel>e, The more (one's) love of God and 
 
 befro roeniger <Sel6er^£ieBe. — $1. of man, the less (one's) self-love. 
 
 Jn jebem eblen £erj frrennt ein emiger In every noble heart burns an eter- 
 
 S)urfl nad) einem eblern. — St. nal thirst for (after) a nobler. 
 
 DaSfrotymiltnbifluberau'baSBeffere. The more joyous child is every 
 
 — fR. where the better (one). 
 
 H tft ntd)t$ erMrm'tid)er in ber SScIt There is nothing more pitiable m 
 
 aid einunentfd)loff'ner Sftenfd). — ©. the world than an undecided 
 
 man (human being), 
 
 Otr gropte £>a§ ifi rote bie gro§te Zn* The greatest hatred is like the great 
 
 genb unb bte fdjlimmfren &unbe, fltlf. est virtue and the worst dogs, 
 
 — 0L still. 
 
 U ijl nut bent SBiffen rote mit bem It is with (the) knowing as with 
 
 <5e$en, je meljr man ftef)t, bejio 5ef* (the) seeing, the more one seee, 
 
 fer unb angenetnner ifi e3« the better and the more agree- 
 able it is. 
 
112 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 2H, SBudje, -, pi. -Vi, the beech; 
 
 £>tif, thick; 
 
 (Ebel, noble; 
 £)te ©tdje, -, pi. -n, the oak; 
 
 ©ntfemt'j remote, distant; 
 2>er $elbl)err, -IT, pi. -en, the com- 
 mander-in-chief; 
 
 ©eleijri', learned; 
 
 ©IncHicr), fortunate; 
 
 ^Iltg, prudent; 
 SDit £uft, -, pi. fiitfte, the air; 
 
 £>er SSftonb, -eS, pi. -c and -en, the 
 
 moon ; 
 £)ie (Sonne, -, pi. -n, the sun; 
 2)er (Sperling, -3, pi. -e, the sparrow; 
 Tax (Stamm, -e3, pi. Stdmme, trunk ; 
 £)er ©tern, -$, pi. -e, the star; 
 
 £apfer, brave, valiant; 
 3Me £ctube, -, pi. -n, the pigeon; 
 
 Unrein, impure; 
 
 SBerbte'nen, to earn ; 
 
 SJerfdjenf en, to give away. 
 
 Exercise 60. 
 
 Slufgafce 60, 
 
 1. £)er Saner ift retdj, after ber $aufmatm ift reiser. 2. £ct 
 ^aufmanit ift em reicfyerer %Flann aU ber Saner. 3. 3ft nidjt ber 
 ^anfmann ber reicfyfte Sftann in btefer (gtabt ? 4. 3$ Bin reicfy, 
 mein Setter ift reid)er, nnb feitt $ater ift am reiefcften. 5. 3ft ber 
 rei&fte Sftann am mfrtebenften ? 6. 3ft ttic&t ber fleifjigfte 9flamt 
 immer ber gufrtet>enfte Sftann? T. 3n meldjcm Sanbe fmb ba3,fta^ 
 meet nnb ber (Elephant niifcHdjer aU bag $ferb ? 8. 2£etd}e £Ijicre 
 fmb am niitpli^ften? 9. $3eld)e$ ift bass nii^licfyere Xtytx, t>a£ ©djaf 
 ober bas spferb ♦ 10. £er ebetfte Sftenfcfy ift nid)t immer ber gliict* 
 Iid)fte, u:tb ber gclel)rtefte m&)t immer ber tteifefte. 11. £te Srbe 
 tft fleiner al3 tie (Sonne, nnb bie (Sterne fmb entfernter ate ber 9ftonb* 
 12. Der (Stamm be3 SIpfel&aumeS ift bid, ber (Stamm ber 23itd)e ift 
 bider, nnb ber (Stamm ber (£id)e ift am bidften. 13. £er Slpfel* 
 Banm X>at einen biden (Stamm, bie Sndje l)at einen bidern, nnb bie 
 Sid)e Ijat ^m bidften. 14. 3e me^r er tterbient, befto metyr tterfcknft 
 er. 15. (Sin gnter gelbljerr ift mefyr ling aU tapfer. 16. £ie Suft 
 in ben ©tabten ift imreiner aU bie Sanblnft. It. Sin (Sperling 
 in ber £anb ift Beffer aU eine ZauU anf lem 2>a$e. 
 
 Exercise 61. SlnfgaBe 61* 
 
 1. Are the merchants richer than the peasants'? 2. Are the 
 merchants richer men than the peasants ? 3. Who is the rich- 
 est man in this city % 4. Is your house better than the house 
 of your richer neighbor ? 5. Which is the more useful tree, 
 the oak or the beech 1 6. Is the oak a more useful tree than 
 
 
ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 113 
 
 the Leech 1 T. Why is the country air purer than the air in 
 large cities'? 8. What flower is more beautiful than the rose 1 
 
 9. In what countries do we find the most beautiful flowers'? 
 
 10. Is the most learned man always the wisest, and the richest 
 the most contented 1 11. Are not these boys more industrious 
 scholars than those '? 12. Is the earth larger than the moon? 
 13. The more industrious we are the more we know. 14. These 
 poople say they have better horses, better sheep, better oxen, 
 better carriages and better dogs than our neighbors. 15. 1 
 have the oldest table, the oldest pen, the oldest book, and the 
 oldest chairs in the city. 16. You have older iron, older steel 
 and older axes than the smith. 11. Where or when is a spar- 
 row better than a pigeon ? 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. Cection XXXni. 
 
 ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 
 
 1. Adjectives denoting persons are often used substantively, 
 where in English they are followed by a word referring to in- 
 dividuals or objects : 
 
 £)er ©ute bebcm'ert ben Sofen. The good (man) pities the bad (one). 
 
 £)er S5i>fc $a$t oft ben ©uten. The bad (man) often hates the good 
 
 ©in 9?eibif#er tfl nie gliic!li<§. An envious (person) is never happy. 
 
 Sfber Sfteibifd&e tfl UttjUfrte&CTU Every envious man is discontented. 
 
 Sene <3d)ime tfl feljr fiolj* That fair (one) is very proud. 
 
 Die ttnglucf'Ud)e ttetnt. The unfortunate (woman) weeps. 
 
 2Bct3 tt>itfjr bit, mein Kleiner? What do you wish, my little fellow ? 
 
 ;Der £rauernbe weint (L. xxxvn. 1). The mourner (mourning man) 
 
 weeps. 
 
 2. In the neuter, the adjective is often employed as an ab- 
 stiact noun, and may be preceded as well by the indefinite as 
 the definite article ; or it may be used without either : 
 
 £a$ 9Jitj?It$e iji icffer att baS ©c&one* The useful is better than the beau- 
 tiful. 
 
 £>er SBeife »ei& nid)t »$♦ The wise (man) does not know 
 
 every thing (all). 
 
114 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 <£$ tft t$m fin £ei$tc3. It is an easy thing for him. 
 
 SJcrgel'te ni)t 235fe3 mit 23cfent Repay not evil with (for) evil. 
 
 (£3 liebt tie SBelt ba«3 ©trafylenbe ju The world loves to blacken what 
 
 fd)ftd'r$en unb bag Srfja'kne in ben is bright (the glittering) and drag 
 
 <&tau1> ju jtefyen. — @« into the dust the elevated 
 
 3. The superlative 23 eft , in the sense (3f an abstract noun, 
 answers to a variety of terms in English which are generally 
 best suggested according to the sentence where it is employed. 
 Thus it may be rendered by good ; benefit ; or, by other parts 
 of speech : 
 
 (£3 ifl fur ba$ (uTgemeine 33 e ft e* It is for the general good. 
 
 <Sie fang jum 33 e ft c n ber Slrmett, She sang for the benefit of the poor. 
 
 (£r gab un3 etwaS jum S3 e ft e n* He favored us with something. 
 
 ©ekn ©ic un$ cin Sieb pm 33 e ft c n. Give us a song for our entertainment 
 
 "With \) a fc c n, and sometimes with f) a 1 1 c n, the same word is used to 
 denote the advantage which a person seeks to gain by means of facetious 
 irony, or playful ridicule : 
 
 ©ie Staferoetfe §ctt ©te jum S3 eft en. The pert (girl) is rallying you. 
 
 — £. 
 
 (£r §at tfm jum 33 eft en. He is ridiculing (or, "befooling") 
 
 him. 
 
 2)tefe fcetben grennbe $a ft en gem ein* These two friends are fond of ral- 
 
 anber jnm S3 e ft e n. lying each other. 
 
 S)cr Ciigner fydlt gem 5fnbere pim The liar is fond of duping others. 
 
 S3 eft en. 
 
 4. The comparative of 9ta1) e, is often used substantively in 
 the signification of particulars, nearer details : 
 
 2Btffen<Sie ntd)t ba$ Sftdfere « on ber Do you not know the particulars 
 
 <5ac()e ? of the affair ? 
 
 5ft afy e r e § fann er 3^nen fagen. (The) nearer details he can commu- 
 
 nicate you. 
 
 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES OF COUNTRIES 
 AND CITIES. 
 
 5. Adjectives are formed from names of countries and cities, 
 by means of the suffix i f d) j and those of the former frequently 
 take the Umlaut, if capable of it. In place of an adjective of 
 this ending, however, the name of the city with the suffix er 
 is often employed, and is undeclined : 
 
FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES. 115 
 
 Sictc ^Vmmerntratenin fd)toebtfd)en Many Pomeranians entered into 
 ©tertjr. — <S« Swedish service. 
 
 Die Urfadje btcfer Skrdn'berog tfl in The cause of this change is to be 
 cbcn biefem 2hig3burg tfd)en 33e= sought for in this very Augsburg 
 fennt'ntffe ju fud)en. — @. confession. 
 
 2)ic gried)i f d) e ©pradje iji bie gefctl'* The Greek language is the most 
 betfh ber 2Mt. — §♦ cultivated in (of) the world. 
 
 (£r fagte e3 auf bcutfd) (L. xxxiv. 4). He said it in German. 
 
 Gr fagte e3 im $ran?oftfd)ett. He said it in (the) French. 
 
 ©ieben Satyre vMj ber §)rag e r ©d)Tad)t Seven years after the battle o 
 roar afle SReligio'nSbutbung gegert Prague all religious toleration 
 bie 9)rotefknt'ertim $imigreid)e auf* toward the Protestants in the 
 Qer)o'ben. — <2>* kingdom was abolished. 
 
 Obs.- Note, that adjectives derived from the names of cities, are 
 written with capital initials ; as are also those denoting a language, if 
 preceded by the article and used without a noun. 
 
 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES FROM PROPER NAMES OF PERSONS. 
 
 6. Adjectives are formed from the names of persons by 
 means of the suffix ifd) , and are usually rendered by a noun : 
 
 ©aiu. Deutfdjtanb feufttc imter 5hte* All Germany sighed under the bur- 
 
 geStafh bod) $riebe roar 1 3 im SBaflen* den of war, but there was peace 
 
 freini f d)e n £ager. — ©. in Wallenstein's camp. 
 
 ©ie ©eM)arb i f d) e n Sruppen Iicferten The troops of Gebhard gave up to 
 
 bem ftetnbe einen 9)ta§ nad) bem an* the enemy one place after an 
 
 bern auS.— @. (the) other. 
 
 7. Adjectives denoting a sect, derived from proper names are 
 o'^en written with a small initial : 
 
 £*m neunid'^rtgen tfurfurjien gao man To the nine years old elector Cab 
 
 catoinifd)e £ef)rer.— <S. vinist teachers were given. 
 
 STOeS, roa3 bie Iutc)erifd)C $irdje er^telt' All that the Lutheran church ob- 
 
 roar Mbung. tained was toleration." 
 
 SSetfptele. Examples. 
 
 Dcr <Star!e ifi am mgd)ttgjien atfetn. The strong man is most powerful 
 
 — ©♦ alone. 
 
 $er ©e^enb e oegreift' ben Slinben, The seeing (man) comprehends the 
 
 aUx ntd)t biefer jenen.— dt. blind, but the latter does not the 
 
 former. 
 
116 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 Sfatr ba$ 9?eu e fdjetnt gcttofm'tidj Void)* Only the (that which is) new gen 
 
 tjg 4 — © < erally seems important. 
 
 9M)t atfea @ dj w e r e t|t be§ftegen etn Not every thing difficult is therefore 
 £at>9ritttt) ofjne Seitfaben.— $. a labyrinth without guide (guid- 
 
 ing thread). 
 jRebcn ©ie £U tnetnem Seften. Intercede (speak) in my behalf. 
 
 @te $aBcn biefert $remben jum SSeften. They are making (having) this 
 
 stranger a laughing-stock. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 33ebcm'ern, to pity; 
 
 SBenevben, to envy; 
 
 SBUnb, blind; 
 £)er £>om, -e3,pl. -e, the cathedral; 
 
 GEIertb, miserable, wretched ; 
 
 %olc(litf), consequently; 
 £>a3 '® e,Mube, -3, pi. -, thebuilding ; 
 
 ©efcfyttnnb', quick, rapid ; 
 S)ie &au3frau, -, pi. -en, housewife; 
 
 ImtftoS, helpless; 
 
 £a$m, lame; 
 
 £au fett, to run; 
 2ftac(beBurger, see 5; 
 Stfeibtftf), envious; 
 9)raftifcfy, practical; 
 <3cl)ne{f, fast; 
 £ctuf>, deaf; 
 Z'fyatiQ, active; 
 £>er Zi)ox, -en, pi. -en, the fool 
 %i)0xi&)t, foolish; 
 £raurig, sad, sorrowful; 
 SBeife, wise. 
 
 Exercise 62. 5lufgaBe 62, 
 
 1. £er el)rltd)c fleifige 2Irme tft otet nufcttctyer unb gIMidjer, al3 
 ber faille 3^etd)e* 2. 9Hd)t jeber 2Irme ift traurig, nid)t jeber Sfteicfye 
 tft gtiufltd). 3* Dcr £l)or Beneibet oft ben 9leid)en. 4. Sin 9teu 
 bifd)er ift rite gufrieben, ttnb folgtid) ntd)t gtitdtid). 5. 9Mcmcmb ift 
 elenber unb tl)i3rid)ter aU ber Sfteibtfcfye. 6, T>a$ (Sd)5ne unb 2ln^ 
 gene|me tft gut, aBer bag 9tujpltdje unb $rattif$e ift nod) Beffer. T. 
 3ft jeber £auBe ungliidlid) ? 8. Sfticfyt jeber ©eletyrte tft etn SBeifcr, 
 unb tttd)t jeber SBeife tft ein ©etetjrter. 9. <Der 23tinbe tft nod) un* 
 gliidlicfyer unb plffofer aU ber £auBe ober ber Safjme. 10. (Sin 
 (Meftrter ift nid)t immer ein tljattger, nii|3i*td)er Sftcmn. 11, (Sine 
 <33cler)rte ift ntdjt immer eine gute £cmsfraiu 12. 2$as fiir ein 
 23ud) lefen <8ie, ein beutfd)es, eitt fran3&ftfcBe3 ober ein englifd)e£ ? 
 13. 3d) lefe etn fran$oftfdjeg« 14* %tnz ©cBtiler lefen beutfd)e uno 
 engltfd)e 25iid)er. 15* £)er SittagbeBurger (see 5.) £>om ift ein fdjB* 
 nt« ©eBaube. 16. (Sr ift gefd)mtnb in SlUem. 
 
 Exercise 63. StufgaBe 63. 
 
 1. Who is more foolish and more miserable than the envious 
 man 1 ? 2. Nobody is more foolish than an envious man. 3. 
 
OMISSION OF INFLECTIONAL ENDINGS OF ADJECTIVES. Ill 
 
 TnL idle man is not useful, and consequently not happy. 4. 
 Is only the useful man contented 1 5. Is the idle man ever 
 really contented and happy ? 6. Is the industrious man never 
 sad? *l. Do you learn the practical, or only the agreeable? 
 8. Why is the idle man unhappy ] 9. Is the blind man more 
 helpless than the deaf or the lame one 1 10. Who leads a more 
 miserable life than the envious man $11. The good man pities 
 the poor, but he does not envy the rich. 12. Is the Magdeburg 
 cathedral the largest building in the city ? 13. The idle man 
 is not useful, and consequently not good, for only the useful 
 man is really good and wise. 14. These German books are 
 new, those French ones are old. 15. Who is more wretched 
 than the envious man ? 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. Section XXXIV. 
 
 OMISSION OF INFLECTIONAL ENDINGS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. The adjectives e i t e I and tauter, in the signification of 
 all nothing but, mere, sometimes stand without inflection be- 
 fore nouns : 
 
 S3 iji I a u t e r (Stgenjmn. It is mere obstinacy. 
 
 28 tr froljen 9ftenfdjenftnber ftrtb ettel We proud sons of men are nothing 
 
 arme ©iirtber. — SL but poor sinners. 
 
 Urtfer la liter guten ©trtgert if! Me Among things that are all good 
 
 5Sa$t fcfyroer. the choice is difficult. 
 
 2. When several adjectives qualify the same noun, the in- 
 flectional endings of all but the last are sometimes dropped, 
 and the omission indicated by a hyphen. In like manner the 
 last syllable of compound adjectives is sometimes omitted : 
 X)te fd}roars==ron>goIberte Saftne. The black red golden banner. 
 JHemcmb roar fo freuben* unb fdjtaflod Nobody was as joyless and sleeT>- 
 
 rMe er. — 3£, less (joy- and sleepless) as he. 
 
 3. In the nominative and accusative neuter, adjectives often 
 omit the inflectional endings : 
 
 5De$ Sftertfdjen Sefcen fdjeint etrt^errltdj The life of man seems a glorious 
 £oo§, — ©. allotment. 
 
118 LESSON XXXIY. 
 
 4. An adjective in denoting a language, when not preceded 
 by the article, as exemplified in the preceding lesson, is also 
 undeclined : 
 
 (£r fagte e3 auf enattfd). He said it in English. 
 
 5. When the latter of two adjectives is employed, conjointly 
 with its noun, to embrace as one idea that which theirs* qual- 
 ifies, it takes the form of the new declension : 
 
 £)enn geenb'iget nad) lang e m Herbert) '=* For, ended, after long ruinous strife, 
 
 lid) en ©treiti® roar bie faiferlofe, was the emperorless, the terri- 
 
 Mc fd)rec?lid)e Beit, unb etn 9ttd)ter ble period, and there was a ruler 
 
 roar roieber auf (Erben. — <S* (judge) again upon earth. 
 
 Obs. — The above rule, though extending to both the gen. and dat., 
 
 is rarely applied, except in the masc. and neut. of the latter. Note, 
 
 also, that where the adjectives may be joined by it n b , or so separated 
 
 as equally to refer to the same noun, the latter one also takes the old 
 
 form (compare 1, 2. § 34.) ; thus, (Sr Iofd)t feinen £)urft mit flar e m fait e n 
 
 (n, as euphonic) Staffer; or, mit flare m unb faltem SBaffer, as also mit 
 
 Harem, faltem SBaffer* 
 
 6. A clause or sentence is often used adjectively, sometimes 
 requiring to be translated by a relative clause : 
 
 Die in sprd'ipojttto'nen $e=* The nouns that have (The to prepositions 
 roorbenen'Suojrantt'tiett. become prepositions, become nouns). 
 
 "Die urfpriraaUd) auS all The conjunction aU (The originally from 
 unb fo jufam'mengefeijte (as) originally com- all and fo compound- 
 conjunction a I 3 Ijat pounded of all and fo ed conjunction aU has> 
 tmmer bie 93ebeu'tung always has the signi- always, etc.) 
 eine$ 9ftelftti'J}3»" fication of a relative. 
 
 ADJECTIVES USED ADVERBIALLY. 
 
 7. Adjectives in all degrees of comparison, in the form i» 
 which they occur as predicate, are employed adverbially : 
 
 (Er lieft fdjnell ; erfprid)t langfanu Hereadsfast; he speaks slowly. 
 
 Der einjelne SSftann entflie'ljt ami tidy The single man escapes the easiest 
 tejren.— ®* 
 
 3e mel)r ©d)rodd)e, je me^r £iige ; bie The more infirmity the more false- 
 Craft geljt gera'be: eine Stano'* hood; strength goes straight : a 
 nenfttgel, bie £ol)len ober ®ruben cannon-ball that has holes or cav- 
 eat, getyt frumm.— 91. ities goes crooked. 
 
 * SBerberolid) e n ©treit; i. e. contest: here embracing as a single 
 the conjoint signification of the "latter adjective" and "its noun."' 
 
 idea 
 
ADJECTIVES USED ADVERBIALLY. 110 
 
 (Er jfljrei&t g u t , fie fdjret&t fceffer, He writes well, she writes better, 
 
 imb ©te fd)rcit>en am ftc jr e n. and you write the best. 
 
 (E8 ijl $ i> dj ft wafyrfdjeinlid). It is (most) highly probable. 
 
 (Er »errid)t'ete bad ©efdjaft' aufS (§ 38* He transacted the business most 
 
 1.) gewiffenf)aft'e jre. conscientiously. 
 
 8. Adverbs are produced by adding to the simple form of 
 the superlative the termination e it £ : 
 
 SBti wofjnen meifienS ouf bemSanbe. We live mostly ia the country. 
 Eie ift §5d)ften3 bretjua, Saljre alt. She is at most thirty years old 
 
 9. Formerly adverbs were distinguished, in the positive de- 1 
 gree, from adjectives by a final e. This termination is still 
 often used, especially in poetry ; and in the adverb laruje is N 
 always retained : 
 
 Reiner mod)te ba fejr e ftetjen, mem id), No one coiild stand firmly (there), 
 
 too er ftel. — <S. I think, where he fell. 
 
 SfBie long e Wo^nte er tyier ? How long did he live here ? X 
 
 (Er if: long e nicr)t fo alt tt>ie id). He is not as old by far as I. S"\ 
 
 3d) $ofce u)n long e ntd)t gefe'^en. U have not seen him for a long time. V 
 
 10. The comparative of ijiel is often rendered by longer, 
 that of I a n g e by more ; the superlative 1 & n <j ft by a fon^ 
 ^77ze, forc^ a^o; the superlative of Jung by recently, lately : 
 
 (Er tjr ntdjt meljr ju ng. He is no longer young. 
 
 3d) roo$ne longer ol3 jetyn Sa^re in I (reside) have resided more than 
 
 btefein £>aufe. ten years in this house. 
 
 2)a$ toupt 1 id) I an g ft.— @. That I knew fon^ a#o. 
 
 2)or biefer 2inbe fog id) jungjr.— @. Recently I was sitting before that 
 
 lime-tree. 
 
 Seifpiele. Examples. 
 
 (Er fogtc eg ouf franjo'fifd). He said it in French. 
 
 SStr woHen beutfd) fpred)en. "We wish to speak German. 
 
 ©cfefce finb gtait (fanft) unb gefdjinei'* Laws are smooth and flexible, 
 big, ioanbelbar roie Caune nnb Sei^ changeable as humor and pa&* 
 benfd)aft; SRetigio'n Mnbet ftreng sion; religion binds firmly and 
 unb eroig.— S. eternally. 
 
 (Em immifc Ceoen ift ein fritter £cb. A useless life is an early death. 
 -©. 
 
 Se fdjneffer ftd) ein SBanbelftern urn Me The more rapidly a planet moves 
 (Sonne fceroegt', befto Iongfamer bre^t around the sun, the more slowly 
 eT fid) urn fid). — 8L it turns on its axis (a?'ound itself). 
 
1530 
 
 LESSON 
 
 XXXIV. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SBTetd), pale ; 
 !Deutltd), distinct; 
 $ec()ten, to fight, p. 
 Dca®ebad)t'nig,-c^ pL- 
 ©ered)t\ just ; 
 •§>ager, haggard; 
 i>anbeln, to act; 
 Jteljren, to sweep; 
 Sttavf, sick; 
 
 348; 
 
 -t, memory; 
 
 Ccmge (adverb), long; 
 
 £cmgfam, slow; 
 
 £aut, loud; 
 £>er 9iak, -n, pi. -n, the raven; 
 
 SReben, to speak; 
 2)er SRebner, -3, pi. -, the orator; 
 3Me ©djwalfce, -, pi. -n, swallow 
 
 Ungemein, uncommon ; 
 £>te Scwge, -, pi. -n, the tongs. 
 
 Exercise 64. 
 
 
 SlnfgaBe 64. 
 
 1. Semen ©ie fransoftfd)? 2. 9to, toir lemen bentfd). 3. 2Bte 
 fagt matt im&nglifdjen, "bie @d)ft>a(Be fltegt fd)netler aU tcr SftaBe ?" 
 4. SBeldjeS loon biefen ^inbern fteft am Beften, nnb weldjes am fcfyfed^ 
 teftett ? 5* 3Der Dietter t)at bie 3^0^ wer fyftt ben neueften SSefen ? 
 6. <Der 'gletgtge (ernt fd)nell, ber ganle langfam. T. 3ener Sftebner 
 |>rtd)t Beffer al$ er fdjrei&t. 8. Sarnm lernen @ie langfamer ati 
 3I)r fritter ? 9. (5r lernt inel leister ate id), er $at ein BeffcrcS 
 ©ebacfytmfj. 10. @ic fprecfyen laut, aBer ntdjt beutlid). 11. 2>er 
 ^ranfe ift tjeute nngemein Bleid) nnb t)ager. 12. ©ute ©ofoaten 
 fedjten tapfer in alien gered^tcn $riegen. 13. @r reset foeife aBer 
 er fyanbett tpricfyt. 14. @r ift reiser aU fein SftadjBar, benn er ar^ 
 Beitet fletpiger aU er. 15. 3$ tterfte{)e @ie Beffer aU fyn, benn ©te 
 fpred)en bentltdjer nnb langfamer. 16. "Sftene S3efen fetjren am 
 Beften;" rote fagen <3te bag im ©nglifcfyen ? (L. XXXIII. Obs.) 
 
 Exercise 65. 5Ulfg Be 65. 
 
 1. Does your cousin speak German ? 2. No, he speaks only 
 English. 3. Does he learn more slowly than his friend ? 4. 
 No, he learns faster, and speaks more distinctly. 5. Do all 
 soldiers fight bravely in all just wars 1 6. The old soldier is 
 uncommonly pale and haggard, he is sick, is he not 1 7. I do 
 not understand what the teacher says ; he speaks very rapidly, 
 and not very distinctly. 8. The idle man acts very foolishly, 
 but not every industrious man acts wisely. 9. That crator 
 speaks much louder than this one, but not so distinctly. 10. 
 "Which one of your scholars writes the best, and which writes 
 the worst? 11. Which flies the fastest, the eagle, the raven, 
 or the swallow % 12. Are all vour scholars learning German 1 
 
ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 121 
 
 13. No, they are learning French. 14. I do not learn rapidly, 
 for my memory is not good. 15. How do you say in German, 
 "He speaks very slowly ?" 16. How do you say in German, 
 " A new broom sweeps the cleanest V 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 Ccctiou XXXV. 
 
 ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. When the possessive pronouns relate, attributively, to a 
 noun understood, and are not followed by an adjective, they 
 are called absolute possessive pronouns. They are of two 
 forms; as, meirt-er, e, e3, inflected like an adjective of the old 
 declension; and t>er, bie, ba$ mei«--ige, or the shorter form, ber, 
 tic, baS mein-e, inflected like an adjective of the new declension : 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 N. mein-er; 
 
 G. meitt-e3; mem-ei 
 
 D. metrt-em; mctn-et 
 
 - A. mem-ett ; mein-e 
 
 OLD DECLENSION. 
 
 Feminine. 
 mem-e : 
 
 Neuter. 
 mein-eS ; 
 meitt-eS : 
 
 of mine : 
 
 meiit-em ; to, or for mine : 
 meirt-c3 : mine. 
 
 NEW DECLENSION. 
 
 N. ber meitt-ige; biemem-ige; ba3 meitt-ige; mine; 
 
 G. beS meitt-tgett; ber mein-igett; be* mcin— igen ; of mine, 
 
 D. tern mem-tgett; ber mem-igen ; bemmein-tgen; to, for mine; 
 
 A. t>ett mein-tgett; bie mein-tge; ba5 mein-ige; mine ; or, 
 
 N. ber mein-e; bie meirt-e; bag mem-e; 
 
 G. be£ meirt-eit; ber mem-en; be3 mem-ett: 
 
 D. bem meirt-ett; ber mem-en; bem mein-ett: 
 
 A. ben mein-ett; bie meitt-e; ba3 mein-e; 
 
 mine; 
 of mine; 
 to, for mine , 
 mine. 
 
 ALL GENDERS IN THE PLURAL. 
 OLD. NEW. NEW. 
 
 N. mein-e; bie metn-tgert or bie meirt-ett ; mine; 
 
 G. mem-er; ber mem-tgen or ber meirt-ett ; of mine; 
 
 I). meirt-ett; bert meitt-igett or ben mein-en; to. for mine; 
 
 A. mein-e; bie mem-igert or bie meirt-ett; mine. 
 
 6 
 
122 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE ABSOLUTE TOSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Form of old declension. Forms of new declension. 
 
 CD^ein |mt tfi fdjroarj unb SDlcin |>ut ijl fcijwan, unb My hat is black ;md his 
 fein-er tjl tx>etp. ber feme (or ber feinige) is white, 
 
 ijl »ei§. 
 ©etn £ut til fc^warj ttnb <Sein £ut ijl fidjroarj unb His hat is black and 
 .wein -er ijl roeip. ber mcin-e (or ber metn- mine is white, 
 
 tge) ijl roeij?* 
 §Uei» 23ud> ijl neu unb Sftein Sudj ijl neu unb bag My book is new and his 
 fetn-eg ijl alt. fein-e {or bag fein-ige) is old. 
 
 ijl alt. 
 ©*{» 23udj ijl neu unb ©etn 23ud) ijl neu unb bag His book is new and 
 mein-eg ijl alt. mein-e {or meut-ige) ijl mine is old. 
 
 alt. 
 fir geljt ju meinem gfretm- ©r gef)t ju meinem ^reunbe He is going to my friend 
 be unb nid)t m bein-cm. unb md)t $u bem bein-en and not to yours. 
 {or bem bein-tgen). 
 
 2. The absolute possessive pronouns are often used substan 
 tively in the neuter singular, to denote property or obligation : 
 
 Scl) jle^e roieber auf bem 2Jkinigen. — I am standing again upon my own 
 
 <S. ground. 
 
 Sarbina'l, id) 'fya'bt bag SDfcinigc ge* Cardinal, I have done my duty (I 
 
 t^a'n. £fmn ©te bag S^re. — ©♦ have done mine). Do yours. 
 
 3. In the plural the absolute possessive pronouns often de- 
 note one's family or relatives; they are likewise, where the 
 application is sufficiently obvious, made to refer to dependents ; 
 as servants, soldiers, etc. : 
 
 £ajl bu bag ©djrecHidjjle, ta^ £e|te Hast thou averted from thy own 
 
 Son ben 2)einen aftgewefjrt?— <3. themost dreadful, the final (fate)? 
 
 Seopclb. after Befool ben ©einen »on But Leopold ordered his (soldiers) 
 
 ben SftofTen JU fietgen.— 2ft. to dismount from their horses. 
 
 SfBag liegt btm guten Sftenfdjen nd^er What lies nearer (in interest) to the 
 
 alg bit ©einen?— @. good man than his own (family) t 
 
 4. The genitive singular of the possessive pronoun is often 
 compounded with gl et dj e tt, as is also that of the plural fc er. 
 The words thus formed are indeclinable, and refer to nouns of 
 each gender and in either number : 
 
 SBer in ber Scmmttte' ijl meineg gtei* Who in the committee is mr equal t 
 <ten?— <2>. 
 
ABSOLUTE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 123 
 
 3$ §afce beineagteidjen nte ge^apt'. — 
 
 ©. 
 SJcrorb'nct i% ba£ jeber Sfagefiagte 
 
 burdj ©efdjttor'ne sen feine£gleidjen 
 
 foil gertd/tet iverben. — o. 
 Sftan mup bergletdjen 2$atcn pnterljer 
 
 nidjt fo kfd)au'n. — @. 
 ©aufen, greffen uitbbergletdjen. — ©al. 
 
 V. 21. 
 
 I never hare hated such as yon 
 (jour peers). 
 
 It is prescribed that every ac- 
 cused (one) shall be judged by 
 jurors of his peers. 
 
 One should not afterward view 
 the like deeds so critically. 
 
 Drunkenness, revelings, and such 
 like. 
 
 5. ®(etd)Crt, however, often stands apart from the pronoun, 
 and is then written with a capital initial : 
 (S3 hnrft mil Sftadjt bcr cble SDiann The noble man works, with power, 
 
 Scttyrtyimberte auf feineS ©letd)en. — 
 ©. 
 ©a$ SBcflc bald ifl, bcr iter! $att ©ie 
 far fcincd ©leidjen. — 2. 
 
 for centuries upon those like 
 himself. 
 The best thing about it is, the fel- 
 low takes you for his peer. 
 
 Seifptele. 
 
 Sebermcmn lieot Me ©ctntgen unb 
 
 fd)it$t ba<5 ©eintge. 
 ©id) jiefit betn SJaterlanb, unb nteine3 
 
 fotlte mid) ntd)t fatten? — 2. 
 @cln 9iam 1 t|l S'rieblanb, audj ber 
 
 3»eittig€.— @. 
 Sr fdjitfte ed ntd)t Sfyrem 23ruber, [on* 
 
 bern metnem. 
 (£r Banbelt nut ^nopfen/ 9kbeln unb 
 
 bergteid)en. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Every one loves his own family, 
 
 and protects his own property. 
 Thy native country attracts thee, 
 
 and mine should not detain me? 
 His name is Friedland, (it is) also 
 
 mine. 
 He did not send it to your brother, 
 
 but to mine. 
 He deals in buttons, pins, and the 
 
 like. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SInfcer, other; 
 ©er SBaumetfter, -$, pi. -, architect; 
 ©te SMirfte, -, pi. -n, the brush; 
 ©te (Stgenfjeit, -, pi. -en, peculiarity; 
 ©er Scaler, -3, pi. -, the fault; 
 ©te %Utt, -, pi. -n, the flute ; 
 
 £>ter, here; 
 S)tt tfreibe, -, the chalk; 
 ©cr 3ftaler, -3>, pi. -, the painter; 
 ©er §)tnfel, -$, pi. -, the painter's 
 
 pencil or brush ; 
 ©er $Regenfd)trm, -e3, pl-e, the um- 
 brella ; 
 ©er <sd)Iuffet, -3, pL -, the key; 
 
 ©er Sdjwamm, -e3, pi. <Sd)tt>amme. 
 
 the sponge; 
 ©er, bag ©ofa, -g, pi. -a, the sofa; 
 ©er <5onnenfd)irm, -e3, pi. -e, the 
 
 parasol; 
 ©a£ £afdjentud), -eg, pi. -titdjer, the 
 
 handkerchief; 
 ©a3 Stntenfap, -ffe$, pi. -fd'ffer, the 
 
 inkstand; 
 33erlan'gen> to den- and, require; 
 ©ad 2Beltmeer, -3, pi- -e, the ocean; 
 ©aa 2Borterbud), -e<3, pi. -fciidjer, the 
 
 dictionary. 
 
124 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 Exercise 66. 2lufgaBe 66* 
 
 1. Jpat ber Scaler feitten $tnfet obcr ben meinigen ? 2. Sr tjat 
 ben feinigen nnb ben 3fyrtgen. 3. 3$ ^aBe meinen 9legenfcf)trm 
 unb ben S^igcn, mcine $lbte nnb bie SfyxiQt, mein £afd)entu&) unb 
 bae 3§rige, meine $3i3rterBud)er nnb bie 3§ri^u. 4. Der 33au^ 
 metier $at feut ^tintcnfag nnb ba$ meinige, meine ^reiDe um> tie 
 feinige. 5. Siegt ber (Sonnenfdu'rm auf meinem (Sofa ober auf bent 
 Sfyrigen? 6. ®r liegt auf bem metntgen. 1. 3ft 3v r ©cfyluffel 
 beffer aU ber meinige ? 8. SRein, ber nteimge ift Beffcr ati ber 
 3^rige. 9. £er $ater 3v^3 £ef)rer<3 unb ber 53ruber be3 unfrigen 
 ftnb franf. 10. Mt 9ttenfd)en IjaBen tljre $et)Ier unb Sigen^eiten; 
 id) $afce bie meinigen, @ie IjaBen bie SWgert, un b er ^ ^ e f^tti* 
 gen. 11. 3d) ^Be f)ier gtoei £affen, eine gefyort 3§rem ^teunbe, 
 un^ bie anbere ge^ort bent unfrigen. 12. 3ebermann lieBt Die @eU 
 nigen unb tterlangt ba3 ©einige. 13. £)as SMtmeer ift jnufdjen 
 mir un^ ben Meinigen. 14. Sftelne Gutter fcat meinen (Sdjrcamm 
 uriD ben ifyrigen, meine 23iirfte un^ bie tfcrige* 
 
 Exercise 6?. SlufgaBe 6?. 
 
 1. Have you my inkstand, or yours ? 2. I have mine, and 
 the scholar has his. 3. My keys are new, yours are old. 4. My 
 mother has my cup, and I have hers ; she has my handker- 
 chiefs, and I have hers. 5. You have my parasol, and 1 have 
 yours ; yours is new, and mine is old. 6. Your flute is lying 
 on my sofa, and mine is lying on yours. 7. Your chalk is bet- 
 ter than ours ; your sponge is smaller than ours. 8. Is your 
 umbrella larger than mine % 9. Mine is smaller than yours. 
 10. The painter has my paint-brush and his, my dictionary and 
 his, my flute and his, my pencils and his. 11. Your friend Las 
 his faults and unpleasant peculiarities ; but all other men have 
 theirs — you are not without yours. 12. Here is your brush; 
 do you know where mine is 2 13. The architect has yours, 
 and I have his, but 1 do not know where yours is. 14. You 
 are writing with your cousin's pencil, and he is writing with 
 yours, or with mine. 
 
CONJUGATION OF £afcett. 
 
 125 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. Union XXXVI. 
 
 1. conjugation of foafcen. 
 
 Present. 
 $a£en, to hm e. 
 
 Present. 
 fcafccnb, having. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 i&l tya&e, I have ; 
 bu I) aft, thou hast ; 
 er $at, he has ; 
 
 id) Ijatte, I had ; 
 
 fcu Ijatteft, thou hadst; 
 
 cr Jjottc, he had ; 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Perfect. 
 getjofct I)abcn, to have had. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Perfect 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 gel)cM, had. 
 Plural. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 n?ir fiabcn, we have; 
 U)r 1) a fret, you have ; 
 fie tya&cn, they have. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 nur fatten, we had ; 
 tljr Ijatttt, you had ; 
 fie fatten, they had. 
 
 id) tyciBe ge^att, I have had ; 
 tu l)aft getyafct, thou hast had; 
 tv Jjctt getyafcr, he has had ; 
 
 ttJtr fyaUn Qtfyabt, we have had ; 
 i()r $afct (jetyafcr, you have had; 
 fie \)aUn Qtljakt, they have had. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 id) Xjatte geljafct, I had had ; n?ir fatten geJjaftt, we had had ; 
 fcu tjatteft <je§afct, thou hadst had; if)r $attet geJjafrt, you had had ; 
 cr tjatte <je$aM, he had had ; fte fatten gel;aBt, they had had. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 td) fterbe fycrten, I shall have ; »ir tuerten l)a£en, we shall have ; 
 fcu ix>irft §aUn, thou wilt have ; vfyr toerbet ^afcen, you will have ; 
 er wirfc tyo&en, he will have ; fie irerten tyobeu, they will, h've. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 idsfterfcei . I shall \ •* nur ttjerbetn we shall , k -4 
 
 i$r foerbet >• %§ you will 
 
 fcu Wir 
 
 irft I 
 
 cr fctrb ; 
 
 thou 
 he will 
 
 ill \ rg" tt) 
 wilt [ | {$ 
 
 ill )| fit 
 
 mermen ) 
 
 all \ 
 
 ill I 
 
 they wLw ^ 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 ^Ctfce (tit), have (thou) ; $afot or fyabt (t§r), have (ye, or you). 
 
126 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 2. idioms with fyabtn* 
 
 £)u fytfl gut X!a$en. (See p. 446). You may well laugh. 
 
 (Er Ijat ud)t, |ic fyat unred)t. He is right, she is wrong. 
 
 $aben Ste hunger? id) fyafce Durfr. Are you hungry? I am thirty. 
 
 (£r f)at gem em warmed 3immer. He likes a warm room. 
 
 (£r $ctt feme Sreuttbe gem. He is fond of his friends. 
 
 ©ie fyxben itjn fe^)r Heb. They love him very much. 
 
 2Btr fyafcen grofe ©tie "We are in great haste. 
 
 3d) fyabe iljn in 23erbad)r\ I suspect him; or 
 
 3d) fya&e 23erbad)t' auf ifyn. I am suspicious of him. 
 
 SBh $afeen bag ©elb notljig. We are in want of the money. 
 
 3d) merbe 9I$t auf ifyn tyakiu I will attend to (take care of) him. 
 
 2Bag fyaben (Sie? What ails you? 
 
 3d) tyabc £angeh)eite. I feel ennui. 
 
 2Bag tyat>en <Sie bage'gen ? "What objection have you? 
 
 $rau 3t. tyat £rauer. Mrs. N. is in mourning. 
 
 Wan fyat iljn mm ©ejleit. They are bantering him. 
 
 (£g %<xl feme GUe. There is no hurry about it. 
 
 POSITION OF THE MAIN VERB IN COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 3. In compound tenses and independent propositions the in- 
 finitive or participle is placed at the end of the sentence. In 
 the second future the auxiliary fyabm (or fetn) follows the past 
 participle : 
 
 Sa« f>at er ge^aBt ? What has he had ? 
 
 (£r §at 9Hd)tg getjabt\ He has had nothing. (He has nothing had.) 
 fatten <Sie eg gefyabt' ? Had you had it ? (Had you it had?) 
 
 3d) werbe eg tyaBett. I shall have it. (I shall it have.) 
 
 <Sit rocrben eg gett)i£' ge= You will certainly have (You will it certainly 
 f)aW tyafcen. had it. had have.) 
 
 4. When a verb has two objects connected by a conjunction, 
 Jie last may either precede or follow the verb : 
 
 ^aften @tc mem SSudj getyafct' cber bag \ 
 
 . Z/ X —.* ° r . «o v- c c . <w . \ Have you had my book or yours? 
 $abtn @tc mem S3ud) ober bag 3tjnge ( 
 
 The infinitive with gu, when depending on another verb, is 
 placed last: 
 
 ffir $at nid)t Belt getyafct' eilteit SBricf He has not had time to write a 
 m fdjrei&ftt. letter. 
 
A.GIIEEMENT OF SUBJECT AND VERB. 
 
 127 
 
 j. Two or more nouns in the singular, as embracing but one 
 ictr*i, are sometimes made the subject of a singular verb : 
 SnMuy unb Slrgwo^n Uu fd)t in aU Treachery and suspicion lurk (s) 
 
 hi (Ecfen. — 3. in every corner. 
 
 Sluf Plufge ©d)lad)ten fc Igt ©cfana' Upon (the) bloody battles/oftow (s) 
 
 Unt> Xanj. — ( S. song and dance. 
 
 Ofutijt unb Bittern ifl mtr angefcm- Fearfulness and trembling ire (is) 
 
 IV A. — Ps. 55, 6. come upon me. 
 
 b With collective nouns, except those used as numc 'als, 
 the /erb is usually in the singular : 
 SBct? <agt ba3 SJoIf? — <S. "Why do (does) the people despair? 
 
 1 With words in the singular, used as titles of respect, the 
 srer\ is usually in the plural : 
 
 (Sure /imtgtidJK £or)eit » e r I a f ' f e n e< 
 ma>t tyeiterer. — <S. 
 
 33eifpiele. 
 
 Your royal Highness leaves (leave) 
 it not more joyful. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 SEkS fxUtc ber Sftte notfjtg ? 
 SEBcr $atte bie Srufrnabcl ? 
 £atte 3§r Svcimb fie gc^afct'? 
 SSer §at ba$ £ofd)pavncr gctyafct'? 
 
 What did the old man need? 
 Who had the breast-pin ? 
 Had your friend had it ? 
 "Who has had the blotting-paper ? 
 SSann roerben ©ie bie Dfcla'tcn unb When shall you have the wafers 
 
 ba$ 9>ctfdjaft fyafcen? and stamp? 
 
 3$ tyafre gern etncn grogen Dfcn. I like a large stove. 
 
 2>cr Q5lucEUd?e, bcr 33et)a'glid)e r)at gut The fortunate, the comfortable (per- 
 Sfteben. — ©. son) may well talk. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 2>te $Ingc(, -, pi. -n, the angle (fish- 
 ing-tackle) ; 
 SBatb, soon; 
 
 !Die ©tatter, -, pi. -n, the small-pox ; 
 
 £)ie 23of)ne, -, pi. -n, the bean; 
 
 2)ie Sruftimbet, --, pi. -n, breast-pin ; 
 
 £)ct3 £)ienfimabd>en, -£, pL -, the 
 servant-girl; • 
 
 £>ie Grbfc, -, pi', -n, the pea; 
 
 £)te ©evfte, -, the barley; 
 ®eftern, yesterday; 
 
 <Der £afer, -§, the oats, L. xxvi. 10 ; 
 
 SDer ton, -e£, pi. £af>ue, the boat; 
 
 T>aS Cofc^papicr, -e«, pi. -e,the blot- 
 ting-paper ; 
 
 T)ie Sftafern, -, pi. -, the measles; 
 
 | 2>te CMa'tc, -, pi. -n, the wafer; 
 
 1)ei Jftcggcn, -S, the rye; 
 
 2)er (Sac?, -c3, pi. <Sacfc, the bag; 
 
 2)a£ <5d>arla&fieber, -5, pi. -, the 
 scarlet-fever; 
 
 "Die <Sd)aufet, -, pi. -n, the shovel 
 
 £)a£ gJetfdwft, -e$, pi. -e, the seal; 
 UeOermorgen, day after to-mor- 
 row; 
 
 £>a§ SSaterlanb, -e<?, pL -e, -la'nber, 
 the native country; 
 
 £>cr or bie 23c-raanbtc, -n, pl.-n, the 
 relative, .elation; 
 
 2)fr or bie 2£at[e, -n, -, pi ~n, the 
 orphan. 
 
128 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 Exercise 68. $ufgaBt 68. 
 
 1. 28ct3 tjatte ber Salter in ten grojjcn (Bacfen ? 2. Sr fyrtte 
 23oBnett, ®erfie, #afcr tmD 3toggen barin. 3. Ser t)at ntetnen 
 .ftafyt unb meine 2lngel gc^abt ? 4. £>er alte gifdjer $atte fie geftern, 
 VLtto id) X)abe fie f)cute gefyaBt. 5, SBamt ^atte btefeS $ittb tie 
 Slattern? 6. (5$ I)at Die fDtafern getyaBt, aBer nid)t Me Slattern. 
 T. £aBen btcfc SQBaifen fetne ^enranbten gel)aBt? 8. <Ste I)aBeu 
 93crmnnttcn in t()rem Saterlantc gel)aBt, unb tterben Bait l)ier greunbe 
 Ijabm. 9. SBamt merben @ie Me DBlateu, bag $etfd)aft unb ba$ 
 2bfd)papter I)aBen? 10. 3$ tterbe fie morgen ober iiBermorgen $a* 
 Ben. 11. 3enc $ tuber IjaBeu beu 33efen unb bte @d)aufel beg ( £knp 
 ntdbd)eu£ gel)aBt. 12. 2Ste lauge fatten (Ste bte SBruftnabel getjabt ? 
 13. 3$ fyatte fie nid)t lauge get)aBt. 14. £aBen <Sie it'vad @d)ar* 
 Iad)fieBer gefyaBt ? 15. 3Retn, id) f)aBe es nie gefyaBt. 16. £aBe 
 id) red)t ober uured)t? It. <Ste t)aBen unrest, nub er $at red)t. 
 18. 3$ tyaBe geru ein ttnumes 3^ nmer * 
 
 Exercise 69. 2l[ufgaBe 69. 
 
 1. Had the miller the barley, the oats and the peas 1 2. The 
 miller had the wheat and the rye, and the peasant had the oats, 
 the peas and the beans. 3. Have the children had the servant- 
 girl's shovel and broom? 4. How soon shall you have the 
 wafers, the seal and the blotting- paper % 5.1 shall have them 
 to day or to-morrow. 6. These orphans have relatives in their 
 native country, but have had none in this. 1. Did you have 
 my boat and my angle yesterday ? 8. No, but I have had 
 them to-day, and shall have them the day after to-morrow. 
 9 How long will the boy have this hat 1 10. He will not have 
 it long. 11. What has the miller had in those large bags | 
 12. He has had wheat and flour in them. 13. My brother has 
 had the measles. 14. Have you had the scarlet-fever 1 15. 
 Has that man had the small-pox? 16. When will the child 
 have a new breast-pin? IT. Who likes a warm rciom 1 18. 
 Who has had my blotting-paper ? 
 
conjugation of SieBetu 
 
 129 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 
 Cation XXXVII. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF 2 t t ft C tt. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Perfect. 
 gelte&t fjakn, to have loved. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Perfect. 
 gelicBt, loved. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 fttr IteBen, we love; 
 t^r lieBet, you love ; 
 fie lieften, they love. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 ttrtr liefcten, we loved ; 
 
 tfyr licfctct, you loved ; 
 ffe liefcten, they loved. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 trf) $afce getieBt, I have loved ; nnr I)aBen gelieBt,wehave loved; 
 bu ^aft geltcBt, thou hast lov'd. tljr fjaBt gclteBt, you have l'v'd. 
 cr $at getteBr, he has loved ; fie fyaBcn gelieBt, they have l'v'd, 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSK. 
 
 i&l t)cttte gelteBt, I had loved; n?tr fatten gelieBt, we had loved; 
 fcn ^atteftgclieBt, thouhadstlv'd. % t)attet gelteBt, you had l'v'd. 
 er $atte gelteBt, he had loved; fie fatten gelieBt, they had l'v'd. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) ftcrfo UeBen, I shall love ; fair fterten IteBen, we shall love; 
 tu i»trfl IteBen, thou wilt love ; il)r toerbet IteBen, you will love ; 
 er Hurt IteBen, he will love ; fie Herbert IteBen, they will love. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Present. 
 I v.Bcn, to love. 
 
 Present. 
 liebcnb, loving. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 icf) lieBe, I love; 
 
 lu IteBft, thou lovest ; 
 
 er ItcBt, he loves ; 
 
 tcB IteBte, I loved ; 
 
 In ItcBteft, thou lovedst ; 
 
 er IteBte, he loved ; 
 
 tdj n?ertcj _ ^ I shall 
 in nnrft v || thou wilt 
 er roxVO ) ~* sr he will 
 
 lieBe (fctt), love (thou) ; 
 
 \ _ h)tr werfcen ) 
 (- 1 1 ttjr teertet f- §J> 
 
 fie n?ert>en ) 
 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 you will V > n v 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 IteBet or IteBt (tBr), lo\e (ye or you) 
 6* 
 
130 LESSON XXX va. 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 1 The present participle is formed by suffixing e it to the 
 root ; 
 
 ^Off-enb, hoping ; ^or-enb, hearing ; mctcfy-enb, making ; 
 IeB-enb, living; ft efc-enb, loving ; loB-enb, praising. 
 
 PERFECT PARTICIPLE. 
 
 2. The perfect participle is formed by suffixing t to the root, 
 and prefixing, to verbs that have the accent in the first syl- 
 lable, the augment <}e: 
 
 ge-^off-t, hoped; ge-tyor-t, heard; ge-mad)-t, made; 
 ge-leo-t, lived ; ge-lief)-t, loved ; ge-loB-t, praised ; 
 fhtbir-t, studied ; fcerfauf-t, sold ; Beftraf-t, punished. 
 
 3. Verbs compounded with the particles Be, empt, ent, etc., 
 (§ 94. and 95.) do not take the augment g e; hence those com- 
 pounded with the 'particle g e have the same form for the per- 
 fect participle as the simple verb ; thus, geprt is the participle 
 of pren and get)5ren; gelofct of (often and geloBen, etc. : 
 
 (£r tyat mid) <jetyort\ He has heard me. 
 
 (£$ Ijctt mir geprtV It has belonged to me. 
 
 INFLECTION OF THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 4. Participles are often used as adjectives, and are then sub- 
 ject to the same declension : 
 
 ©in gelte'ot-er <3o^n franft oft feme A loved son often grieves his lov- 
 
 lieoenb en ©Item* ing parents. 
 
 So ba$ (Mte'ot-e t»o$nt, ba tft unfer Where the loved (object) dwells, 
 
 $cr&» — ■£>♦ there is one's (our) heart. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 6, The first person singular adds e, the second ft, and the 
 third t to the root : 
 
 First Person. Second Person. Third Person. 
 
 id) loo-e, I praise; bu loo-ft, thou praisest; er tob-t, he praises; 
 id) jmbir-e, I study; bu jmbit-|r, thou studiest; er fiubir-t, he studies. 
 
conjugation of SteBcn. x81 
 
 Plural. 
 
 6. The first and third persons add e it, and the second adds 
 i to the root : 
 
 ttir IoB-en, we praise; tyx lofi-t, you praise; ftelofc-en, they praise; 
 toir jhtbir-ett, we study; tyr fhtbtr-t, you study; fte fhtbtr-en, they study. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Sing ular. 
 
 7. The first and third persons singular of the imperfect add 
 te, and the second teft to the root : 
 
 tdjIoB-te, I praised ; bit Tofc-tcft, thou praised st; erlolMe, hepraised; 
 id) ftubir-te, I studied; bit fhtbir-tcfb thoustudiedst; er jlubir-te, he studied. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 8. The first and third persons plural of the imperfect add 
 ten, and the second tct: 
 
 BnrloB-ten, we praised ; tfrloB-tcr, youpraised; fte Io Men, they,etc 
 toir fiubir-ten, we studied; tyx fhtbtr— tct, you studied; fie futbtr-ten, they,etc 
 
 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES. 
 
 9. The perfect and pluperfect tenses are formed by combin- 
 ing the perfect participle with the present and imperfect tenses 
 of fyrten (or fern L. XLVIII.) : 
 
 SBaS ptt&en ©te gelernt' ? "What have you learned ? 
 
 SBctt §at ber Sftann gelofct'? Whom has the man praised? 
 
 SBaritm' ^atte er gercetnt'? Y/hy had he wept? 
 
 FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 10. The first and second futures are formed by combining 
 the present and perfect infinitive with the present indicative of 
 the auxiliary toerben (L. XL VI.) : 
 
 2Ba3 roerbett @ie faufcit? What shall you buy? 
 
 2BaS rctrb fte faitfen ? What will she buy ? 
 
 SBaS rotrb er gejjort' fcafcen? What will he have heard ? 
 
132 lesson xxxvn. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHIC AND EUPHONIC CHANGES. 
 
 11. Where the roots end in t> or t, an e is inserted between it 
 and the inflectional endings, which begin with f or t. Thus, 
 also, e is sometimes inserted after other final root letters : 
 Present. Mft-eft, for feUVfi; ftart-et, for »art— t ; 
 Imperfect. Btfo-ete, for Bifb-te ; foart-ete, for i»art-te ; 
 Participle. geMlt-et, for geMfo-tj gefoart-et, for gewart-t* 
 fokft, tiki, lobete, geloftet, etc., see 2. 5. 6. etc. 
 
 12. Verbs whose roots end in el or er drop the e in the first 
 person singular of the present tense, as also the e of the term- 
 ination in the infinitive and present participle : 
 
 Bcttcl— n for Bettel-en; gttt-re for gitt— ere ; 
 Mtel-nt> for Bettel-enb;- gitter— nb for gitter— ertb* 
 
 13. The imperative adds, in the singular, e, and in the plural t : 
 
 (Sage mir, wa$ benfft bu son bent ©ib? Tell me, what thinkest thou of the 
 
 SeeL. IX. 3. oath? 
 
 SBrcutdjt euer Sfufefjn. — ©. Use your authority. 
 
 SBeifptete* Examples. 
 
 <Sd)onercS ijl nidjtg in ber SBeft, aU Nothing in the world is morebeau- 
 
 Sfteigung burd) Skrnunft' unb ®e* tiful than inclination guided by 
 
 U)if fen gelet'tet. — ©. reason and conscience. 
 
 ©efjcn <Ste nun, unb urtfjet'fcn <Ste Go now, and in future judge less 
 
 funfttgfjht roemger ttorfdnteft son ber rashly (precipitately) of justice 
 
 ©cred)'tigfeittn33cne'btg. — ®. in Venice. 
 
 ^routine £l;vfurd)t fd)affte mtr ntein My misfortune procured for me 
 
 ilnglucf, too id) ivcmbevnb flopfte. pious reverence wherever wan- 
 
 — <&. dering I rapped. 
 
 i5t)r r;a6t 1 3 geljort'. 5M)t unb ®e* You have heard it. Right and jus- 
 
 red/ttgfett crroctr'tet nidjt Pom iM= tice do not expect from the em- 
 
 fer. — <S. peror. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Die 9Tnfunft, -, the arrival ; 
 
 Der ? Map, -ffeS, pi. — ffe, the satin; 
 
 23cbcd'en, to cover; 
 
 SBevufymt', celebrated ; 
 DaS 5Mer, -e$, pi. -c, the beer; 
 Der SBrcwer, -3, pi. -, the brewer; 
 
 $arktt> to color; 
 •JDie ©ctge, -e, pi. -n, the violin; 
 
 Der fliinjiter, -3, pi. -, the artist; 
 Die Scmbfcfyafr, -, pi. -en, the land- 
 scape; 
 Die 3?ad)rid)t, -, pi. -en, the news; 
 Der ©djaufpiefer,-*?, pi. -, the actor 
 Die SBBotfe, pi. -n, the cloud; 
 
 3eid)ncn, to draw, delineate ; 
 
 3ie6cn, to draw, pull, p. 358. 
 
conjugation of Stefcen. 133 
 
 Exercise 10. $itfgafce 70. 
 
 1. Ser faufte Me $ferte nnt ten SSagen tea (SdjaufpMerS ? 2, 
 Niemann §at [ie gefauft, er §at \k nidt loerlauft 3. $k3 f)orten 
 <3ie geftern tit ter ©iafot? 4. 3$ %Brte ntdjtS 9^eue». 5. $3a3 
 Kit ter 23rauer gefauft? 6. (£r $at Me ©erfte gefauft, tint ta3 
 95ter »erfauft. 7. Sr wtrb tie 2Rad)rtcBt gefyort JaBen sor 3t)rer 
 2lnfunft. 8. Xer Scaler fjat mix erne fdjbne Scmfcfdjaft gegcidmet. 
 9. £er alte (Spieler $at auf ter ©etge gefptelr, after tie Winter l)a£cn 
 t$n ntdjt gcKu-t. 10. 2Bamt tterten <Sie tie 9^agel att3 ttefem 
 S3i*ette 3iel)en ? 11. £)ie $ferte gie^en ten SBagen, ter $imjHer 
 geid)nct tie $ferte. 12. £cr gletfdjet f)at tie Deafen gefd)ladtet. 
 13. £ie (Sonne |at jtdj mit Soften oetecft. 14. £er prfor fyatte 
 ten 2ltla$ griin gefartt. 15. Morten <Ste ttas id) fagte ? 16. Siner 
 von uttS prte e3, after tie antern fyortcn eg niefct. 17. 2Ber I;ct 
 btefeg Sifen unb tiefen ©raft,! getyammert? 18. SBarum l)at man 
 (L. XIX.) nno geto&H 19. 2Ben $at man getatett? 20. Turn 
 $at Sfctemanfcen getatelt. 
 
 Exercise 11. Slufgafte 11. 
 
 1. Your friend will have heard this news before my arrival. 
 2. Has the dyer colored the satin and the silk ? 3. He has 
 colored the satin, but not the silk. 4. The old player has bought 
 a new violin. 5. The brewer has sold his beer, what has he 
 bought ? 6. Whose oxen has the butcher slaughtered 1 7. How 
 has the actor played ? 8. From whom have you heard this 
 favorable news % 9. I have heard no favorable news, but I have 
 heard much unfavorable. 10. Has this artist drawn you a 
 landscape? 11. He is drawing a landscape, and the child is 
 drawing a little wagon. 12. Who has been "praised 1 13. No 
 body has been praised, but somebody has been blamed. 14. 
 The falling snow is white and soft. 15. What have you learned 
 to-day? 16. Have you heard what the scholars said? 17. 
 No, I have not heard it. 18. The peasants have sold their 
 horses and bought oxen. 19. To whom have the horses be- 
 longed? 20. I have heard the celebrated Italian singer, whom 
 have vou heard ? 
 
134 lesson xxxvm. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. Section XXXVIII. 
 
 ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 
 PRESENT. 
 
 1. The present tense is used : 
 
 a. To denote what is transpiring at the time : " speaking, 
 as also stating general truths : 
 
 <E* rcbenunb traumenbte S0lenf(^en »tel Men (mankind) speak and dream 
 »on Befferen fimfttgen Sagen. — ©♦ much of better future days. 
 
 SBenn euer ©ettriff'en rein tft, fo feib If your conscience is clear, (then) 
 u)r fret. — ©. you are free. 
 
 PRESENT RENDERED BY THE PERFECT. 
 
 b. To indicate a time that an unfinished action has continued, 
 in which use the verb is frequently accompanied by the adverb 
 fcfycm, generally not requiring translation; or by the preposition 
 feit, which may be rendered by for, or entirely omitted. In this 
 use the German present is rendered by the English perfect : 
 
 (Ex ijr fyerein' feit mef reren (Stunben. He has been here for (since) several 
 
 — <2u hours. 
 
 ©djott in ben fedjjteit Hftonb ttegt er im He has lain (he lies) nearly six 
 
 £fjttrm. — <S. months in the tower. 
 
 THE PRESENT FOR THE FUTURE. 
 
 c. To denote a Future action, or to indicate the willingness 
 or ability of the subject : 
 
 2Ber ttcig, roer ntorgen it&cr unS k" Who knows who will command us 
 
 jteljlt' ? — <S» to-morrow ? 
 
 Set) fedjte rttd^t gegen bid), ttenn ify& I will not fight against you, if T 
 
 scrmei'ben farm. — ©♦ can avoid it. 
 
 5Ber fcefdjretbt' bte ©djmerjett eineS Who can describe the sorrows of 
 
 fcerfann'ten, son alien ©eiten juriidE'=* a misapprehended, philanthropic 
 
 geflofjenen menfdjenfreunblidjen £er" heart, repelled (thrust back) on 
 
 &en3 ? — ©. every side ? 
 
 d. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE FOR THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 3$r fdjtoeigt MS man cu tj aufruft, — ©♦ Be silent till you are summoned. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 2. The imperfect coi responds mainly to the same tense in 
 
ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 13£ 
 
 English, § 138. Frequently, however, it refers to an action 
 performed at an indefinite past time, and is best rendered by 
 the English perfect : 
 
 Sapfer t|t ber SfficMejttunger, Brave is the conqueror of the world, 
 
 Sapfcrcr rer ftd) felfcfr bejivancj/ — f>. braver (he) who (has) conquered 
 
 himself. 
 SBer ncmu baS ©IiidE nod) falfd; ? mtr Who still calls fortune false? it has 
 tioax e£ treu. — <2>. been (was) true to me. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 3. The perfect is used as in English ; and also in reference 
 to a period of time fully passed, in which latter use it is ren- 
 dered by the English imperfect : 
 
 3d) tyctfce e§ gejlern ge* I heard it yosterday. (I have it yesterday 
 
 $ort\ heard.) 
 
 (£r tyat im# sergan'gene He visited us last week. (He has us last week 
 
 2Bod)e 6efu<$t'. visited.) 
 
 FUTURE TENSES. 
 
 4. The future tenses, besides answering to the corresponding 
 English ones, often indicate a probability. Thus used the first 
 future is rendered by the present, and the second by the im- 
 perfect or perfect with an appropriate adverb : 
 
 3d) fjore Semcmb fommer.; c3 roirb ber I hear somebody coming (come); it 
 SBirtfy fein. — £♦ is probably the host (landlord). 
 
 5Du rotr|t biefe 9?ad)rtd)t fc^cn gefciirt' You have doubtless already heard 
 fyaben. this news. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 5. ;Dlt and \fyc, as subject of the imperative are usually omit- 
 ted ; other pronouns are expressed : 
 
 SBringe mtr betrte Sikr>er. ) _ . , . _ _ 
 
 M . \ . a, .. « I Bring me your books. See Lesson 
 
 SBrtngt mtr eure §Bud)er. \ V £ VTT \ q , 
 
 Sringen ©ie mtr 3$re Sitter. > ^ A v 1L l ' 6 ' °- 
 
 6. Although sentences in which <& i e is the subject, have, 
 for both the interrogative and imperative, the same form, yet 
 they are as readily distinguished by the inflections of the voice 
 in speaking, as by the mark of interrogation in writing : 
 
 &er<jffpen <Bk jenen 9cameru Forget that name. 
 
136 
 
 lesson xxxvni. 
 
 SSergefl fit <5ie jenen 9?amen? 
 ©Iaukn <oie ttidji roag er fagt* 
 ©laukn ©ie nic^t wag cr fagt ? 
 
 Do you forget that name? 
 
 Do not believe what he says. 
 
 Do you not believe what he says 1 
 
 7. Where in English an auxiliary stands as the substitute 
 of a previously expressed verb, the Germans either repeat the 
 verb entire, or wholly omit it : 
 
 <&k fennen ir)n, id) nid)t ; or 
 <5te fennen i§tt, id) fewte itjn nid)t. 
 <£r Xjat bag SBud) gete'fen, id) nidjt; or 
 6r iat bag Sud) gete'fen, id) fyaU eg 
 
 nid)t gele'fen. 
 3d) felje iljn nidjt, ©te ? 
 3d) §ak U)it nidjt gefe'tjen, fjat er itjn 
 
 gefe'tjen? 
 (Er benft nid)t rote id). 
 
 You know him, I (do) not; or 
 You know him, I do notknow him. 
 He has read the book, I (have) not; or 
 He has read the book, I have not 
 
 read it. 
 I do not see him, (do) you ? 
 I have not seen him, has he (seen 
 
 him)? 
 He does not think as I (do). 
 
 Setfptele. 
 
 £)u fennjt itm crfl feit Ijeut. 3d) after 
 leoe fd)on jel;n Satjre unter feinen 
 STugen*— <3. 
 
 (Sett roann Mft bit fo sorftdjttg ? — £. 
 
 9UJer lange fdjon fommt er rtidjt mefjr 
 bie spalmen ju oefu'djen, bie unfreg 
 Slufgejlanbenen ®rat> mnfdjat'ten.— 
 
 SxxZ Sidjt ber (Sonne fdjaut er nientalg 
 roieber. — ©♦ 
 
 Examples. 
 
 You have known him only to-day. 
 But I have lived (already) ten 
 years under his eye (eyea) 
 
 How long have you been so provi 
 dent? 
 
 But for a long time he has not come 
 to visit the palm-trees, that over- 
 shadow the tomb of our risen 
 one. 
 
 The light of the sun he will never 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 5Td)t, eight ; 
 
 S(d)t$eljn, eighteen ; 
 ©er SSote, -n, pi. -it, the messenger; 
 
 T^reiptg, thirty; 
 QaQ £$be, -g, pi. -n, the end ; 
 2)er ^clbroebet, -g, pi. -, sergeant; 
 
 %tyltft, to feel; 
 
 §unfter)n, fifteen ; 
 Qad ©afttjaug, -eg, pi. -tyaufcr, hotel; 
 £)er £>auptmann, -eg, pi. -manner or 
 
 -leute, the captain ; 
 Die ^offnung, -, pi. -en, the hope; 
 
 £>unbert, hundred ; 
 
 fennen, to know, p. 350 ; 
 Sag Mben, -g, pi. -, anlictior ■ 
 
 9ftef)rere, several; 
 
 <5ett, since, for; 
 T)te <3prad)e, -, pi. -n, language; 
 £>te (Strait, -, pi, -n, the street; 
 2)er £rojrer, -g, pi. -, the comforter , 
 ©te £roftertn, -, pi. -nen, (see L. 
 XXIII. 5.); 
 
 Um, at; 
 
 Untrotyl, unweL. 
 
ON THE USE OF THE TENSES. 131 
 
 Exercise 72. 2Infgafte 72. 
 
 1. 2Cie lange troljnt ter £anptmann in ticfcm £anfe? 2. Sr 
 nufint [ebon longer aH adjt 34" fcarin. 3. SBie lange ift Dcr geto* 
 ivebel in ter (Start? 4. @r ift fcit fiinfs^n £flgen I)ier. 5. 3$ 
 [M(e mid) (L. 29. 9.) fcit metjreren £agen fcl)r sm»o$L 6, Urn 
 lrctd'e 3ett fetjen toix <3te morgen? 7. SOSir fommen morgen Slfcnfi 
 3u 3l«en, wo ftnben nnr @ie ? 8, @ie fmfcen un$ in tern ©afttyauS 
 am ilntc ricfer ©trajje* 9, S3ie lange fennen <5lefcenaUcn9ftawt? 
 
 10. 3d) ferine ifjn felt tern %al)xt adjt^ntjunfcert ein nnb fcreijjtg. 
 
 1 1. 2£en tyafcen <3ie geftern Befudt ? 12. 3$ fyafte geftern Pieman? 
 fcen oefnd)t. 13. £er 23ote tteijj lr-o @ie molten, id) nid)t. 14. 
 SJiefer ©djiiler §at 3 e ^ gel)abt feine 2lufgafce gxt lernen, ber an^ 
 terc ntd)t. 15. @pred)en ©ie lautcr, id) ^erfteX)e ©te nid)t. 16, 
 @pred)en @ie fciefe @prad)e oeffcr aU 3fyr Sruter? 17. 9leitt, er 
 fpridjt »iel fcejfer aU id). 18. &§e <3ie geljcn, fd)reikn ©ie 3^e 
 2lnfga6e. 19. D £offnnng, fiijjje Sroftertn im Seiten ! (L. XLII. 
 ha.) 
 
 Exercise 73. 2lnfgaBe 73* 
 
 1. How long have your friends been in this city 1 2. They 
 have been here for more than eight days. 3. My brothers 
 have visited our friends, I have not. 4. You know those people, 
 we do not. 5. Your brother knows them, does he not 1 ? (L. 
 XXI. 5.) 6. How long has this man been in this hotel 1 ? 7. 
 He has been several years in it. 8. This child has for several 
 days felt unwell, it is now very sick. 9. Where will we find 
 you to-morrow % 10. You will find me in the new house of 
 our neighbor. 11. At what time do you go to the city 1 12. 
 1 go to-morrow evening. 13.1 have lived since the year eighteen 
 hundred and thirty-eight in this house. 14. Who lives in the 
 large house at the end of the street ? 15. I do not know to 
 whom it belongs. 16. How long have you known these people? 
 ] 7. I have known them for more than fifteen years. 18. You 
 have known them longer than I have. 
 
138 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. £ection XXXIX. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The relative pronouns are metier, tt>et$e, weldjt^, ber, tic, 
 ba3, and the indeclinable (and nearly obsolete) f o : 
 
 ©in SWenfd), tteldjer fttefytt, tjl ein A man who steals is a thief 
 £)ieo. 
 
 £)er 2)?ann, b e n (or ttetd)en) <Ste lo* The man that (whom) you are prais- 
 fcen, ift mem Sreunb* ing is my friend. 
 
 £)teS ift bag SSort, bag ju Sfremfa (This is) the word that came to Jer- 
 gcfd)af)' an atte Suben,- fo in 5leg^!p^ emiah concerning all the Jews 
 tenlanb iDofjttten. — Jer. xliv, 1. that dwell in the land of Egypt. 
 
 Wlxn lernt $erfd)nue'gen§eit am metflen One learns discretion (the art of 
 unter $cenfd)en, b i e feine tyaoen.— keeping silence) the best among 
 £ft. those who have none. 
 
 2. DECLENSION OF THE RELATIVE £> t r. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. All Genders. 
 
 N. ber, tie, bctS, bte, who, which, that ; 
 
 G. b e f f t n, b e r e n, b e f f e n, b e r e n, whose, of which, that ; 
 
 D. bem, ber, bem, berten, to or for whom, which; 
 
 A. ben, bte, bets, bie, whom, which, that. 
 
 The relative it> el $ e r is declined like the interrogative tt) el* 
 (3) er (see list L. X. 4). 
 
 3. The genitive of it) e I $ e r is used when the relative is im- 
 mediately followed by the noun to which it refers ; otherwise 
 the genitive of b e r is preferred : 
 
 * ©differ, weld) eg grojjen ©djrift* Schiller, w/wcA great writer's works 
 
 jiettetrg Sffierfe bte SBelt oettun'bert, the world admires, was the fav« 
 
 tsar ber Sickling beg beutfd)en SSoI= orite of the German people, 
 feg." 
 
 ©er SKann, b e ff e n (wcrfroeldjeS) 23ud) The man whose book you have is a 
 
 ©tc fyakn, ijr ein ©eutfdjer. German. 
 
 Die $rau, b e r e n {not toeld)er) ©tint* The lady whose voice is so admired 
 
 me man fo fcettun'bert, iji eim ^ta* is an Italian. 
 Itd'nertn. 
 
CONSTRUCTION WI1H THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. 139 
 
 4. SMdjcr, ftelcfce, or ttefcfyee is sometimes used in the signi 
 fication of °ome, any, as-a substitute for a previously expressed 
 noun : 
 
 3d) labz tticbcr ©elb, braud)en @ic I have (some) money again, do you 
 neld)c3 ? need some (any) ? 
 
 &o??ze or awy, before nouns, is only rendered in German, when it sig- 
 nifies a few, a Utile, and in this sense it usually answers to ettttgcr# till" 
 d)er, or ctroaS : 
 
 £abcn <Sie etraaS 2Betn? Have you any {some) wine? 
 
 SBringe mtr etntge SXepfeL Bring me some (a few) apples. 
 
 (£r null entire Spferbe faufett. He wishes to buy some (afew) horses. 
 
 3d) yabe etntge ©tafylfcbcrn, braudjen I have some (afew) steel pens, do 
 
 <8>te n>eld)e ? you need some (any) ? 
 3d) ^abc and) totldjt, aber mcin Srettnb I have some too, but my friend has 
 
 b,at feinc. none. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES CONNECTED WITH THE RELATIVE 
 PRONOUN. 
 
 5. When the members of a sentence are connected by a rel- 
 ative pronoun, the verb is placed last; and the auxiliary, when 
 used, follows the main verb ; 
 
 3d) I o b e ben $flam, ben I praise the man whom 
 
 <Ste 1 o b c n. you praise. 
 
 3d) lobe ben Sttamt, ber I praise the man who I praise the man who 
 
 mid) lob t. praises me. me praises. 
 
 9?id)t Side ftnb utfrie'ben, Not all are contented Not all are contented 
 
 b i e reid) ftnb. who are rich. who rich are. 
 
 (£r tyat bae" 23ud), b a 3 id) He has the book that I He has the book that I 
 
 acljabt' fjabe. have had. had have. 
 
 ©ien>ob,nen in beer; Caufe They live in the house They live in the house 
 
 in weld) em tov toob* in which we shall in which we live 
 
 nenwerben. live. shall. 
 
 6. Besides the relative pronoun, there are many connecting 
 words which require the same construction (List L. 53.) : 
 
 (Er tji "fceute, too er gefiern to ax. 
 
 <£x toax geflern, "too er^euteifr. 
 
 <5ie ftnb unjufrteben, n> e i I fte arm finb. 
 <Sie ftnb unjufrieben, o o g I e i d) fte retd) ft n b. 
 
 <Ste bat me|r gefagt aU er gefcort' fjat. 
 
 <£r $at rcentger ge^orf, aU fte gefagt' $at 
 
 <Sie werben fommen, n> e n n fte 3cit b, a b e n. 
 
 jDer Scte wartete, 5 i 3 er e$ $ r t f. 
 
140 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 
 
 Principal Sentence. Subordinate Sentence. 
 
 9K#t SHIe ftnb jufrie'bert, roeld)e reid) ftnb. 
 
 ©teienigen ftnb nid)t roeife, weld)e nid)t3 lemen. 
 
 £)tc Seute ftnb $eute t}ier, bie gejlern §ter roaren. 
 
 Sebermann mad)t ftd) lad)erlid), bet ftd) fel&fl lofct. 
 
 7. A relative clause, as in English, may be placed between 
 the subject and predicate of the principal sentence, without 
 changing the construction of the latter : 
 
 Subject of the principal Rdatiw CXau ^ Predicate of the principal 
 Sentence. Sentence. 
 
 SRtdjt SHIe, bie reid) ftnb, ftnb jufrie'ben* 
 
 9M)t 5We, bie jufrie'ben ftnb, ftnb reid). 
 
 ©iejenigen, roeldje ntdjts lemen, ftnb nid)t weifc. 
 
 Scbermamtf ber ftd) felfcfr lofcr, madjt ftd) ld'd)erud). 
 
 Die £eute, bie gejlern ba roaren, ftnb tyeute §ier. 
 
 •Die Seute, bie tyeute §ier ftnb, roaren geftern ba. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE USE OF WORDS EMPLOYED AS INTERROGATIVE 
 AND RELATIVE. 
 
 Interrogative Sentences. Relative Sentences 
 
 SBer f)at bds SBudj gefjaot'? 3d) roeifj, roer ba§ S3udj geljafct' $at. 
 
 2Ba$ Ijakn ©ie ge^ort'? @ie roiffen, ir>a£ id) tjeprt' §a6e. 
 
 SBann roerben @ie getyen ? 3d) meip ntdjt, roann fte gefjen rocrben. 
 
 2Bo tt>or}nen bie ©filler ? ©ie rcofmennod), too fte gewolmt'ljakn. 
 
 2Barum' r)atte man ben ©olbat'en U» 2Bir prten nid)t, roarum man i$n fee* 
 
 flraft' ? flraft' ^atte« 
 2Bie $attc ber <Sd)itfer feine 2lufga£en SSftan fagte un3 ntdjt, rote er fte gelcrnt' 
 
 gelernt'? Ijatte, 
 
 33etfptete. Examples. 
 
 &$ geroa^rt' bie SieBegar eft einfcljab* Love very often grants an injurious 
 
 ltd) ©ut, roenn fte ben SSBiHen be3 possession, when it considers the 
 
 ^orbernben me|r a\$ fein ©Iitcf Be- wish rather than the happiness 
 
 benfY. — ©♦ oftheasker. 
 
 2Jiand)e3 ©ute fdjafcei un$, tteit tt>ir e$ Many a good thing injures us, be- 
 
 mtprau'd)cn. cause we misuse it. 
 
 J&eilig ifi ba3 ©efefc', fb bem $imjrler Holy is the law that enjoins beauty 
 
 <Sd)on§eit geMe'tet. — St, upon the artist, 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 141 
 
 SSa3 ifi unfdjulbtg, $cittg, menfdjltd), What is innocent, holy, humane, 
 
 •jut, n>emt e3 ber ^ampf ntc^t ift um3 good, if the contest for the father- 
 
 ©aterlanb? — ©. land is not so? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £ei Skbien'te, -n, pi. -n, servant; 
 SScjlel'ten, to order 
 (£ng;e, narrow 
 
 £>cr SReiftcr, -3, pi. -, the master : 
 ©icgen, to conquer; 
 
 (Srjafylcn, to tell, relate; £>er ©ttefel, -3, pi. -, >-xi, the boot; 
 
 §red), impudent, bold; 
 ©tc Gkfdud)'te, -e, pL-n, the story: 
 ©a$ ©efd)5pf, -eS, pi. -e, creature; 
 
 ©efiirtb, healthy; 
 ©te £in[td)t, pi. -en, the respect; 
 
 |)od)ft, extremely; 
 
 ioffen, to hope; 
 
 Die Uefatng, -, pi. -en, the exercise, 
 the practice ; 
 Un»a$rfd)etttltd), improbable ; 
 2>cr}tt>et'feln, to despair; 
 SSetl, because ; 
 Swctfclu, to doubt 
 
 Exercise 74. SlufgaBe 74. 
 
 1. ©laukn <Ste tie ®efd)id)te, He ter 5CReifler nn3 eqaljlt $at? 
 2. 3$ tuetg md)t son judder @ie fprecfyen, er §at una mel)rere er* 
 $dMt. 3. £te ©tiefel, bie cr gefanft l}at, [ml tym nt enge nnt ut 
 furj. 4. Seute, rt>e(d)e gfoeifcut, sjer^weifeln ; after tie ipojfcnten (lc* 
 gen. 5. 2Ba3 @ie in ter ©tatt gefcert l)akn, ift pdjfi unwafyrs 
 fd)cinlid). 6. fir nnrt He Sftad)rid)t gefyort tyafcen, el)e iiu'r tfjit fekn. 
 7. £ter ift ter SBagen, ten 3^ 23etiente Beftellt fyat. 8. -Der SRanit, 
 in bejfen §aitfe nur gcwotjnt l)akn, ift fefyr fred). 9. 3$ X^abe groci 
 2tepfel, nnt er (jot teren tret. 10. £ie 33teifHfte, nut tenen @ie 
 fcfrreikn, gefyoren tent ^nakn, teffen Stiver id) tyafce. 11. Sin 
 gefunter SJtafd), ter nte fletfjig arkitct, ift, in jeter JpinftcH, ein 
 elenteS ©efd)opf. 12. £ie S^n, teren <Bol)n 3t)ren £tfd) gemadt 
 $at, ift nnfere $ftad)£arin. 13. £ie ©dmler, tenen ttefe getern 
 ge^oren, lerncn ntd)t »iel, toeil fte tttdjt fieifjig iX)re Uefotngen lefen. 
 14. Stiffen @ie, n?er tie $ferfce je^t $at, tie td) geftern geljakt 
 fyak? 15. 3d) weljj ntdrt, fceldie ^Oferte <$ie geftern ge^afct $akiu 
 16. £>iefe ShtfgaBe ift tie fd)tt>erfte, tie id) gelernt t)aBe. 
 
 Exercise 75. 2lufgafce 75. 
 
 1. Where is the servant that has ordered these horses ? 2. 
 I do not know who has ordered them. 3. Are the shoes that 
 the. boy has made too narrow 1 ? 4. The boots that he has made 
 
142 LESSON XL. 
 
 are too short. 5. "Why, do you not believe the story that they 
 told us? 6.1 do not "believe it because he has told me other 
 stories that are not true. 1. Not every man who is industri- 
 ous is in every respect a good man. 8. Not all stories are 
 untrue which are improbable. 9. Not all despair who doubt ; 
 not all conquer who hope. 10. Is a wise man ever unhappy 
 because he is poor? 11. Is every healthy man discontented 
 who is not industrious? 12. Do you know where the man 
 lives whose house we have bought ? 13. I know where he has 
 lived, and I have a friend who knows where he now lives. 14. 
 Have you my pens ? 15. Yes, I have three of them. 16. The 
 lady whose books we have had is a sister of the scholars with 
 whose pens we are writing. 17. Do you find these exercises 
 more difficult than the others that you have learned ? 
 
 LESSON XL. flection XL. 
 
 2Ber and 2Ba3 as relative. 
 
 1. S3 e r is used with the force of an antecedent and relative, 
 or may be followed by the demonstrative pronoun b er, (L. 
 XLIV.j in a succeeding clause : 
 
 SB e r ftcj) nidjt feHJft kftef)lt\ fcleifct (He) who governs not himself re- 
 
 immer em $rted)t. — ©. mains always a slave. 
 
 SB e r ntdjt §5ren voiU, ber rrutjjj fufyten. He who will not hear must feel. 
 
 2. S3 e r sometimes occurs in the signification of 3emcmD : 
 
 £tep ctudjbie eto'ge $forte irert pritcf, Even if the eternal portal should 
 er fcfynnege. — SL SB. ©. let any one return, he would 
 
 keep silence. 
 
 3. 2S a 3, like what, is used with the signification of an ante- 
 cedent and relative ; it also stands as a simple relative after a 
 neuter antecedent which does not refer to a previously express- 
 ed noun : 
 
 ® owett gie&t, roer gtei$ gtefct He who gives immediately what one 
 
 SB a 3 man roimfd): imb Iie&t.— ® wishes and loves, gives twofold 
 
 SBaSbu §eute tr;tm farmft, bag mx* What thou canst do to-day defer 
 
 fdjte'fce ntd)t auf ntorgen. not until to-morrow. 
 
2£er and 2£a$ as relative. ] 43 
 
 9fllc3, tr>a$ id) $6re, ftrtb ©rimnten ber All that I hear are voices of joy 
 
 $reube unb be3 £;mf3. — ®ep. and thankfulness. 
 
 %m, » aS ijl unb gefd)te'f)t, gef)ort JU Every thing that exists and cccura 
 
 einem $lan, sjon bem mix nidjtS belongs to a plan of which we 
 
 »er|1ef)en. understand nothing. 
 
 4. For further illustration of the use of the pronominal ad- 
 verbs, compare with the following examples, § 103. I. 2 : 
 
 ?Mt bte <Sprad)e an unb fur ftd) ift Not (L. XLII. 1. a.) language in and 
 
 rtdnig, tiidjtig unb jterltd), fonbctn of itself is correct, forcible and 
 
 ber ©etfr ifi t$, ber fid) b a r i n ser* elegant, but it is the spirit that 
 
 fbr'pcrt. — ®. is embodied in it. 
 
 S o r i n' Ijat er Unredjt ? In what (wherein) is he wrong ? 
 
 5. When the antecedent is a pronoun of the first or second 
 person, the verb agrees with the relative in the third ; or the 
 personal pronoun is repeated after the relative : 
 
 2Ba3 fann id) t^un, b e r felkr plfloS What can I do, who myself am (is) 
 
 if! ? helpless ? 
 
 £>a3 iuljfen tttr, bte tt)tr bie ©em- That we know, who (we) hunt the 
 
 fen jagen. — ©♦ chamois. 
 
 6. The relative sometimes precedes the word to which it re- 
 fers, which latter is sometimes omitted : 
 
 £) t e e3 genof'fen f)cibtn f b en e n tji e3 Those who have enjoyed it, to them 
 
 tljeuer. — ©. it is dear. 
 
 3>te er gemcfjrt' fjat, mogen um U)n (They) whom he has aggrandized 
 
 weincn. — o. may weep for him. 
 
 7. The relative can not, as sometimes in English, be omitted, 
 but must always be expressed : 
 
 3d) fd)cime mid) ber Sffoffe, bte id) I shame me of the part (— ) I play- 
 
 fptelte ; ed.— Scott. 
 
 '© t)l ber 9T6enb be$ £efcen3, b er mtr 'T is the sunset of life (that) gives 
 
 cjc^cinmijftotfeS SBijfen gteBt. me mystical lore. 
 
 8. In subordinate sentences the copula (auxiliary verb) is 
 frequently omitted : 
 
 Den ©urji nad) fetner (£rfennt'nt£ ftiflt The thirst after a knowledge of him 
 
 4 gerctg\ b e r und nut biefem 2)urjr self, He will certainly satisfy who 
 
 erfd)af fen ($at) .— £. (has) created us with this thirst. 
 
 SBenn bu ba$ gro£e ©fciel ber 2BeTt When thou hast seen the great 
 g:fe'§en (f)afi), fo fe^rejr bu reid)er game of the world (life), thou re- 
 lit bid) felfcft juriiif .— @. turnest richer to thyself. 
 
141 LESSON XL. 
 
 23etfpUle. Examples. 
 
 ©in fri>t)lid)eg ©olf ffjut 9ltfeS, roag e£ A cheerful people does all that it 
 
 ju f§un |at, nut ^efferent SBitlcn, has to do, with (a) better -will 
 
 algetnbummeg cber fd)ttermutt)igeg. than a stupid or a melancholy 
 
 — 2B. one. 
 
 SBer gut tfl, fmbet ®ute$ im Seften unb He who is good finds good (things) 
 
 im £ob. — 3$. in life and in death. 
 
 SDie SKMbertDCtrtigfeiten fmb fitr tie (The) disappointments are to (for) 
 
 CBeele bag, m$ etri Uugettitter fur the soul what a thunder-storm 
 
 bie Cuft ift. is to (for) the air. 
 
 SBer nid)t jumei'Ien ju ioiet unb ju roeidj He who does not sometimes feel 
 
 empftn'bet, ber empftn'bet gerotjj' im* too much and too tenderly cer- 
 
 tt.tt ju wenig. — 9t. tainly always feels too little. 
 
 S'tyr, lv r fcl&ft f e ^ z%i ^ ^r euer eig* It is you, you yourselves who rob 
 
 neg Steterlanb kfite'fytt. — <S your own fatherland. 
 
 ©efe'gnet fei, ber bi$ erfcmnt' fyctt. — Blessed be he that did take know- 
 
 S^ut^, 11,19. ledge of thee. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 S3egra'Bm, buried; 
 
 SBe'fta'tigen, to confirm ; 
 tax 33unbcggenoJ3, -en, pi. -en, the 
 confederate, ally;, 
 
 ;Dctrtn, in, into it, therein, § 
 103. 2. ; 
 
 (Erttmr'ten, to expect; 
 
 ©eu)an\ done; 
 
 ©ennnn'en, to gain; p. 350. 
 2)te ©rube, -, pi. -n, the pit; 
 
 ^ranf'cn, to grieve ; 
 
 Sic 5ftad)t, -, pi. SKadjte, power; 
 £)ag ©pridjwort, -eg, pi. — roorter,the 
 adage ; 
 
 (Bud)cn, to seek, look for; 
 £)cr £cmb, -eg, the trash; 
 
 Unredjt, wrong; 
 
 SJorgeflew, day before yester- 
 day; 
 
 2Bagen, to venture; 
 
 SSalten, to act, rule; - 
 
 SBorin', in what, wherein. 
 
 Exercise 16. 2lufgdBe 16. 
 
 1. SBer gfoetfelt, ijergftjeifeltj tter f)offi, $at geftegt. — 91. 2. 
 Sin alteS ©pridjtvort fagt, "2Ber Unbent eitte ©rube graBt, fMt \i\* 
 fcer tarcin*" 3. Sifted, ttas man uns ^orcjeftcrn in ber ©tabt son 
 bem Jtriege er^lte, t)at fid) Bcftctttgt. 4. SBiffen @te, ttortn n>tr 
 unredjt §?Mn ? 5. £u, ber bu fo fleifstg Inft, nurft fc^nett lernen. 
 6. £u, bie bit fo fletgig Mft, toirft fciet lernen. 7* 3^ r , bie tyv fo 
 fleljng feib, faerbet fciel lernen. 8. (5te,bte fie fo fletfjtcj ftnt>, fterben 
 toiel lernen. 9. Siffen @te, ttaS fitr cin S3itd) unb ftctS fitr Ropier 
 id) gefauft tyabe ? 10. Sftan glanBt leid)t, mas man I)offt unb ttmnfcfrt. 
 11. @ie ftnb Begraben 5IIte, ntit benen id) gemaltet unb geliebt (fjabe 
 
DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 145 
 
 see 8).—©. 12. 2Ber nld)td n>agt, gewimtt ntd)td. 13. 9ttdjt 
 toad cr gefagt, fonbero toad er gctfiatt, tjat fie gefranft, 14. Seine 
 9ftad>t trar g,ro§er aid feine Sunbedgenoffen enr-artct, proper aid ft c 
 
 gcmunfdtf fatten. 15. 2$er nid)td aid ©el? fu&t, lieBt £anb. 
 
 Exercise 77. Slufgafee 77. 
 
 1. Do you know what the children have told me? 2. I have 
 iieard all that they have said to you. 3. What has been said 
 and done grieved the old man. 4. All that was told to our 
 friends has been confirmed. 5. We do not know wherein the 
 boys are wrong, do you? (L. XXXVIII. 7.) 6. They have 
 learned less than we had wished and expected. 7. Do you knoir 
 whom the scholars have been looking for ? 8. Who steals my 
 purse steals trash. 9. Not all gain who venture ; do all ven- 
 ture who gain ? 10. The power of the king was greater than 
 he had expected, greater than his allies had wished. 11. What 
 does the adage say of a man who digs others a pit? 12. Do 
 you understand what I have told you, and do you know why I 
 have told it to you ? 13. The people I have been visiting are 
 Americans. 14. Did you hear w T hat the boys are speaking of? 
 
 15. Do you know whose pen he will write the letter with'* 
 
 16. I have told you that I have heard. 
 
 LESSON XLI. Union XL1. 
 
 DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The determinative pronouns are berjettige, b i ej e* 
 ntge, bad i en ig e, (fcer, see 3.) betfeUe, btefelfce, bad* 
 f e 1 6 e and f o I dj e r, f o I d) e, f o I d) e d. @ o I d) e r, is declined 
 like b t e f e r (L. X. 4.) ; b e r, Die, b a 3 i e n t g e ; b e r, b i e ; 
 b a f f e U c, is declined like b c r, b i e, b a d meinige, L. XXXV. 
 
 2. ©evjenige refers to something specified in a succeed- 
 ing part of the sentence, and must be followed by a relative 
 clause ; berjentge may be rendered by he, the one, that, etc. 
 
 ©erierttgci welder nctdjlafftg iji, Icritt He (the one) who is negligent do^s 
 nidjt fdmelL not learn rapidly. 
 
146 LESSON XLI. 
 
 ;Die}entge, fteldje nadjtaffig xft, lernt She (the one) ^ho is negligent does 
 ntdjt fdmell. not learn rapidly. 
 
 2)a3jemge if! gut, tt>a£ nitijlid) iji. That is good which is useful. 
 
 28tr loft en biejentgen, bte ii>ir Itefcen. "We praise those whom we lore. 
 
 SHejentgen, bte tnir Itekn, Hekn unS. Those whom we love, love us. 
 
 SDie SBiidjer, tteldje (bte) id) fyak, ftnb The books which I have are be Iter 
 fceffer aU btejenigen, bte er tyat. than those which he has. 
 
 3. For berjetttge b e r is often substituted, in which significa- 
 tion, when used adjectively, it is inflected like the definite ar- 
 tfcle. When supplying the place of a noun, it has the declen- 
 sion of the relative b er , except that the genitive plural isberer 
 instead of bere n. 
 
 ©ie traurtg ifl ba$ £oo3 berer, be= How sad is the lot of those whose 
 
 x e n Sreuben uttb £offnungcn fid) auf joys and hopes are limited (limit 
 
 btefeS Ce&en befdjrdn'fen ! themselves) to this life ! 
 
 *©er Sfcu^mbeffen (beSjentgen), ber The glory of him (anyone) who 
 
 litgt, bauert nidjt lange." lies, does not endure long. 
 
 3d) bin nidjt »on ben en (benj.entgen), 1 am not (one) of those who are 
 
 bte mit SBorten tapfer ftnb.—©. valiant with words. 
 
 2)te(Meientgen),bie(t»eId)e)bie2Ba^ Those who do not love the truth 
 
 |eit nidjt Itefcen, ftnb nid)t gut. are not good. 
 
 3d) meine nidjt btefeS 23udj, fonbern I do not mean this book, but that 
 
 bag, tteldjeS ba3$inb $at. (the one) that the child has. 
 
 4. ©erfelbe answers in use and signification to the same : 
 
 3d) ^aBe benfelBen Sftann gefe'^en, ben I have seen the same man that he 
 
 er gefe't)en |at. has seen. 
 
 Sir kibe lefen biefel&ett SSudjer. We both read the same books. 
 
 SUBSTITUTION OF ;DerfelBe FOR THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 ©erfelfce is substituted for the personal pronouns : 
 
 a. After prepositions when the pronoun refers to animate, 
 or inanimate objects : 
 
 (Er $ctt metnen SSleifftft unb fdjreifttmtt He has my pencil and is writing 
 
 bemfelfcen (not mit itym). with it (with the same). 
 
 &r fdjnitt ben 9tpfel unb gaB mtr etnen He cut the apple and gave me a 
 
 £f)etl b e f f e I & e n. part of it (of the same). 
 
 b. To avoid ambiguity or the repetition of a pronoun : 
 
 ©tefe Seute ftnb unfere S?ad)£arn, fen* These people are our neighbors, 
 nen ©ie btefel&en? do you know i hem (the same) ? 
 
 <£r IoBt ben $nctfcen, roetl b e r f e l& e He praises the boy because he (the 
 feine Gutter e§rt. same), honors his mother. 
 
DETERMINATIVE PRONOUN'S. 14*1 
 
 (£r Hefct fetuen SBrubcr, abtx ntdjt bte He loves his brother, but not his 
 
 Jttrtbcr beffctfcen* (brother's) children . 
 
 Sr f)at bte Scaler etne3 gropen Sftan* He has the errors of a great man 
 
 ne3, ctnte bie SSerbien'fte beffel* without his merits (the meiits 
 
 ten. of one). 
 
 <Ste fcfyucftcn tfjrcn 5Unbern, biefet* They wrote to their children that 
 
 fcen mu^ten gleidj atueifcn. they must start immediately. 
 
 5. @ o I dj e r is frequently followed by a relative pronoun, 
 which in this position is rendered by as : 
 
 S$ lefe nur foldje 23ud)er, bie lefjr*- I read only such books as (which) 
 retd) ftnb. are instructive. 
 
 6. When f o 1 d) e V marks similarity, rather than identity, it 
 is followed by mi e : 
 
 #aBen <Ste fo!d)e Suite tt>ieidj) ge=* Have you bought such ink as I 
 
 fan ft' tyafce ? have? 
 
 3a, id) tyafce et>en foldje. Yes, I "have just such. 
 
 <S o 1 d) e ©djiffe, n> i e bte, son benen Such ships as (those that) you speak 
 
 ©te fpred)en, ftnb unftdjer* of are unsafe. 
 
 7. © o 1 d) e r is sometimes omitted (from a sentence) and a 
 personal pronoun introduced after the subject : 
 
 Sine £f)rane (foldje) rote bte Unfterfc* A tear such as (the) immortals weep, 
 Men fi e roetnen, trot in fcin gro* entered his large, dark eye. 
 £e$ bimftcS Singe.— tfr. 
 
 8. (Solder, when used with the indefinite article, follows 
 it; when, however, the final syllable is dropped (L. XV. 3.) 
 fold)- precedes the article : 
 
 Sin foldjer Sfuftrag fdjrecft mid) Such a mandate frightens me not 
 
 ntd)t.— ©. 
 
 <5old)-etn ^Better tft fetten $n fot* Such weather has seldom come to 
 
 d)er Srnte getont'men. — ©. such a harvest. 
 
 9. © o I d) e r is sometimes used as a substitute for a demon- 
 strative, or a personal pronoun : 
 
 Die SdmetftoMt nut ber <Sotd)e3 The rapidity with which this (such) 
 auSgcfitljrt roar, Itefj bem ^etnbe was executed, did not leave the 
 nid)t Sett, 1 8 ju ttertjin'bern.— <&* foe time to prevent it. 
 
 33etj>tele. Examples. 
 
 SMft bu nur beffen $reunb, ber glucfltd) Art thou the friend of him only 
 tft? 9Ud)tbe&, ben Slenb jrurjt?— who is happy? Not of him, 
 $. whom adversity overthrows ? 
 
148 
 
 LESSON XLI. 
 
 SBetfe 9totur\ rote feTlg if! ber, :tr nte* Wise Nature, how happy is he who 
 
 maU ben (Snb&roeif betner <5d)onr;ett never loses the design of thy 
 
 aerli'ert!— SB. beauty 1 
 
 Die Xfyat — bicfe 3unge beg ^erjen^ — Action — that tongue of the heart 
 
 if} jitgteidj ber gefun'befle S3*alfam — is at the same time its most 
 
 beffeloen, unb jeber gute 33orfa^ ift wholesome balm, and every good 
 
 ein £roft. — 0t. purpose is a comfort. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 "Jbtx SBottdjer, -, pi - t the cooper; 
 
 ©auern, to concinue, last; 
 ©te ©nte, -, pi. -n, the duck; 
 ©te (Sule, -, pi. -n, the owl ; 
 ©te $orefte, -, pi. -n, the trout; 
 
 ©efe't)en, seen; 
 ©ex $<tfeti$tj -eg, pi. -e, the hawk; 
 ©er |>afe, -n, pi. -n, the hare; 
 ©er &a$&, -g, pi. -e, the cage; 
 ©er Sacfyg, -eg, pi. -e, the salmon; 
 
 £ugert, to lie; 
 ©te SWanbelf -, pL -tt ; the almond ; 
 
 ©er 9ftefferfd)mteb, -eg, pi. -e, cutler, 
 
 Drbentlirf), orderly; 
 ©te 9>ftrfidf)e, -* pi. -en, the peach; 
 ©er 9?uMn', -g, pi. -e, the ruby; 
 ©er 9fttljm, -eg, the glory; 
 
 ©aufen, to tipple, p. 352; 
 ©er Smaragb', -g, -eg, pi. -en, the 
 
 emerald; 
 ©er Setter), -g, -eg, pi. -e, carpet; 
 ©te Xfjixx, -, pi. -en, the door; 
 
 £ugenbi)afr, virtuous; 
 ©te 2Bafyrf)ett, -, pi. -en, the truth. 
 
 Exercise 18. 
 
 SlufgaBe 18. 
 
 1. £iejenigen, bie un$ fdjmetdjeln, ftnb !eine xvofyxt $reunbc. 2. 
 Unfer Befter greunb ift berjenige, ber ung bie SBa^ett fagt. 3. 
 Qa$ ©Iticf beffen (begjemgen), ber fauft, bauert nid)t lange. 4. £>a^ 
 ienige, mag meber fdj&tt nod) nii£lid) ift, ift ntd)t gut. 5. 2Gir lefen 
 nut fold)e 23iid)er, weldje nii^lid) tmb leljrreid) ftnb. 6. £ie Scfyrer 
 toBen i§re @d)uler, iueil btefeiBen gut unb orbentltd) ftnb. 1. Sg 
 ftnb gttei 2lbler, ein £aBid)t, eine Sule, ein diaU unb eine £auBe in 
 ienen ^aftgen; I)aBen @ie btefeiBen gefefyen ? 8. 3ft bicfer £epptd) 
 berfetfce, ben @ie gefauft f)aBen? 9. ^ftein, id) l)a$e benjenigen ge^ 
 fauft, ben @ie tyeute Sftorgen gefe^en fjaBen. 10. 3d) fet)e bie £t)ur 
 ceg £aufeg, aBer ntdjt bie genfter beffelBen. 11. Sift cine Sreunfce 
 faufeu bie $firftd)en 3§rer 9lad)Barn, aBer nid)t bie Sftanfceln ber* 
 felBen. 12. 3d) fdu'cfe biefen (Smaragb unb biefen 3foBin bemfelBen 
 Sftanne, ber fte mix gefd)idt $at. 13. 9?ur biejenigen ftnb fteife, 
 tteld)e tugenbtyaft ftnb. 14. 5)er ^Hariri, ber Un 2lal, ben 2ad)g unb 
 bie $oretfe gefauft fyit, ift ein 23ottd)er; unb berjenige, ber tie ©ttfcf 
 unb ben £afen fauft, ift ein Sftefferfdjmieb. 
 
 
DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 149 
 
 Exercise 79. 2litfgct£e 79. 
 
 1. Have you bought these peaches, or those that belonged to 
 our neighbors? 2. Are these carpets better than those that the 
 cooper has bought % 3. He who does not speak the truth is 
 not a good man. 4. Those who love the truth are much more 
 happy than those w^o do not love it. 5. Is this the same ruby 
 that the cutler had yesterday % 6. No, the one that he had is 
 larger than this one, but I have the same emerald that he had. 
 7. Those who lie are foolish and miserable. 8. True friends sre 
 those who tell us the truth, and do not flatter us. 9. The al- 
 monds that you have bought are better than those that he has. 
 10. The shoes that the boy made are too small, and those that 
 the man made are too large, 11. He who is proud and vain is 
 foolish. 12. Those who do not make themselves useful are. 
 not contented, and those who are discontented are not happy 
 13. It is not always those who have much money that are con- 
 tented. 14. Those who are wise read only such books as are 
 instructive and useful. 
 
 -o^»-^-»^^». 
 
 LESSON XLII. flection XLII. 
 
 USE OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The definite article is used : 
 
 a. Before nouns, whether singular or plural, when taken m 
 a general and unlimited sense : 
 
 £)er SMctmant ifi etrt Sbelfreirt. The diamond is a precious stone. 
 
 © a 3 ©olb t|t ein ebeleS SWetatt'. (The) gold is a precious metal. 
 
 2) i e Jftmft ifi eine Softer ber %xti* (The) art is a daughter of (the) 
 jjett, — <g t freedom. 
 
 ® e r §a§ tjl partet'tfdv after b t e SteBe Hatred is partial, hut love is still 
 
 ifi e3 rtocr; metjr.— ©. more so. 
 
 £>a3 $$u§ b e 3 @d)i(ffal3 ifi »or un8 The book of fate is closed before 
 
 tterfdjtof fen. — 2B. (from) us. 
 
 b. Before nouns denoting an individual : 
 
 2)er £etlanb ifi bctS roa^re £idjt. The Saviour is the true light. 
 
 *£>er §immel $ctt e$ gerooflt'. Heaven has (so) willed it. 
 
 £)te (£rfce ifi fleiner aU bie <Stmne«. The earth is smaller than the sun 
 
150 LESSON XLII. 
 
 c. Before the namej of lakes, mountains, rivers and the 
 mascu.ine and feminine names of countries: 
 
 3D er SJeftttt' ijt tin 23ulfan'» Vesuvius is a volcano. 
 
 2) i e XuxkV if} mad)ttger aU man Turkey is more powerful than -was 
 glau&ie. supposed. 
 
 d. Before the names of days, months and seasons : 
 
 2) er ©amfiag ijt UIt3 angenetymer aU Saturday is more agreeable to m 
 
 berSftontag. than Monday. 
 
 2)er ^etruar' if} ber furjejte 5D?ottat«. February is the shortest month. 
 
 e. Before the names of ranks, bodies and systems of dee- 
 trine : 
 
 2) a 3 9)arlament' ttemr't^eitte $arl ben Parliament sentenced Charles the 
 
 Btoettert ju m £obe. Second to death. 
 
 £)aS Sfyrijlenttyum tft ber SBelt ein Christianity is a great blessing to 
 
 grower ©egen* the world. 
 
 /. Before the superlative of adjectives, before infinitives 
 used substantively, as also before the words ipof, $trd)e, Sftarft, 
 SUciiftfe, @d)ule and (Stabt : 
 ©te meijlen ©Item fdjiden ifjre $in* Most parents send their children to 
 
 ber in b i e ©d)ule unb in b i e JUrdje. school and to church. 
 (£r gefyt oft in b i e ©tabt, abtt er rocfynt He often goes to town, but he does 
 
 nid)t gem in b e r @tabt» not like to live in town. 
 
 g. Before the proper names of intimate friends, or servants, 
 and when the name of an author is put for his woiks : 
 
 SKknn ge^t b e r So^ann auf b e n Sftarft ? When does John go to market ? 
 SStr lefen ben $lopjtotf* . "We are reading Klopstock. 
 
 h. Before proper names preceded by adjectives or titles, 
 as also before those which do not by their ending indicate their 
 case: 
 
 £)tc fdjone Helena roar bte Wrfadje ber The beautiful Helen was the cause 
 
 Serfto'nmg SrojaS. of the destruction of Troy. 
 
 2Der arme SSUtyelm war untrij'flttctj Poor William was incoDsolable at 
 
 it6er ben 2$erlujt\ _ his loss. 
 
 Cier 3ar)rf)un'berte lang ftnben rotr During the period of four centuries 
 
 SBata'&ter in ben romifdjen |>eeren, we find Batavians in the Roman 
 
 after nad) ben Betten b e 3 £onortu3 armies, but subsequent to the 
 
 tterfd)tt)tn'bet aud) il)r $lami au$ ber time of Honorius, their very name 
 
 'te —©4 disappears from history. 
 
USE OF THE ARTICLE. 151 
 
 a 
 
 i. Before nouns specifying time or quantity , where in En- 
 glish the indefinite article is used : 
 
 3d) fefje ifyt jtoetntal b e $ SaljrcS. I see him twice a the) year. 
 
 6$ foftet eincn Scaler baS $Pfunb. It costs a thaler a pound. 
 
 j. In many expressions that mark a change in the condition 
 of a person or thing, and in English require the nominative or 
 accusative after a verb, the dative with 3 urn or 3 11 r (p. 62, I.) 
 is used : 
 ©te entfdjte'benfte SKc^r^cit erfla'rle The most decided majority declared 
 
 i$n j urn $at[er. — <S. him emperor. 
 
 (£3 ijr j u m ©prtd)tt>crt geroorben. It has become a proverb. 
 
 k. The definite article (unless its use would render the sen- 
 tence ambiguous) is often substituted for a possessive pronoun . 
 
 (£r serfefc'te mtr eincn (B'djlag auf b en He gave me a blow on the (or my) 
 
 Sinn. arm. 
 
 <£r $<tt ben £ut nod) auf b e m $opf. He still has his hat on his head. 
 
 2. When used with b e t fc> e, I) a lb, f 0, f 1 d) e r, i» i e and 3 u, 
 the article precedes them : 
 
 2)te Betben Wiener BlteBen eincn Bot t the (the two) servants re 
 
 § a 1 B e n Sag. mained half a (a half) day. 
 
 Sinen fo Id) en Sftarm fenne id) audj. I also know such a man. 
 
 Sin » i e alter Sftann ifl er ? How old a man is he ? 
 
 25a3 ijr em gu HcincS 3intmcr. This is too small a room. 
 
 (Sine fo grcpe $cber fann id) md)t ge* I can not use so large a pen. 
 
 Braudjen. 
 
 3. The indefinite article is used in a few phrases where i 
 is omitted in English : 
 
 ©in jegltdjer fur jtdj. Every one for himself. 
 
 £a£ etnem Seben ba$ ©cine. Allow to every one his own. 
 
 SSon btr erttar'tet man ein BeffereS From you (a) better conduct (ba 
 SBetra'gen. havior) is expected. 
 
 33eifpieU. Examples. 
 
 •Die grct^ctt ift be ^ Sftenfctyen r)5c^ Freedom n man's noblest posses- 
 flea Out.— 51. sion. 
 
 ©e^cim'mffe in ber SB, e ftnb gefcrtjr'lid) Secrets in wedlock are dangerous 
 
 unb nid)tig, ityre <5d)ctbe bedt immer and vain, their sheath always 
 einen ©old) ben bie 3eit enblidj 
 
 jtefct.— St. \j draw><\. 
 
152 
 
 LESSOR XLII. 
 
 Die Sctyor'ten be 3 (Sitti'Iig fcfjftoren The cohorts of Civilis swear alle« 
 
 am 0ifyetn b em SBeSpa'ftau in ©9* giance on the Rhine to Vespa« 
 
 rien. — <&* sian in Syria. 
 
 Der 5lbergIa«Be ift bag (5djablid)fte, Superstition is the most injurious 
 
 »a8 kibenSftenfcfycn einfefyren farm, (thing) that can visit men. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Die SIrmutf), -, the poverty; 
 
 SSefte'gen, to conquer; 
 
 Denfen, to think, p. 346 ; 
 Die (Eroiojeit, -, the eternity; 
 Die SauX^cit, -, the idleness; 
 Der $ran>, -en£, pi. -e, (the) Francis; 
 
 $ret, free; 
 Der ^rufjUng, -3, pi. -e, the spring; 
 
 gitnfte, fifth; 
 Der ®ef)ul'fe,-n, pi. -tt, assistant; 
 Der £immel, -3, pi. -, the heaven; 
 Der tfarl, -3, pi. -e, (the) Charles; 
 
 Soften, to cost; 
 Die £eibenja)afr,-, pi. -en, passion; 
 
 Der Sotyn, -eg, pi. £6f)ne, reward; 
 
 2)iM)tig, mighty, powerful; 
 Der SWaf, -e«, the May; 
 Der SSftd'rj, -e8, the March; 
 Der SJterft, -e$, pi. 2Rarfte, market; 
 Die 9)?uftf, -i the music; 
 DaS^attta, -3, (the) Pavia; 
 Dae" 9)funb, -eg, pi. -e, the pound; 
 
 ©ctymucf en, to adorn ; 
 Die ©ctmle, -, pi. -n, the school; 
 Der (September, -3, the September; 
 Die ©tunbe, -, pi. -n, the hour; 
 Die Siirfei, -, (the) Turkey; 
 Die Unfdjulb, -, the innocence. 
 
 Exercise 80. 
 
 2tufgaoe 80* 
 
 1* 'Lit 9Jhtftf ift bie @prad)e t»er Scttenf^aftcn* — 2G. 2. Die 
 Unfdjulb $at tm £immel einen greunb. — <&♦ 3. !Dic ipoffmmg i(l 
 ber treuefte Crofter bes 9ftenfd)en. 4. £ie 5lrmutlj ift oft ber oer* 
 biente 2o$n tier gauI1)ett. 5. £er grete liefct getti^nltd) ten fSrie^ 
 ben — after fitrd)tct nid)t ben $rteg. 6. £)er 23ote toartet fcfyon iioer 
 eine I)alBe (Stunbe. 7. £3 ftnb je|3t inele Snglanber unb grangofen 
 in ber Sitrfet. 8. £)er 5D^ai ift tin angenetjmerer Sftonat aU ber 
 Wart. 9. £>ie ^inber ftnb in ber @d)ule, ber $ater nnb bie Gutter 
 in ber ^ircfye nnb ber $ned)t auf bem Sftarfte (L. 42. 1./.). 10. 
 Sin folder SHlann ift ein gn fdjmadjer ©et)ulfe. 11. 2Bte tttel loftet 
 fciefer £l)ee bay $funb ? 12. SBarum l)at er ben £ut in ber £anb 
 wnb nid)t auf bem $opfe ? 13. £er ^atfer $arl ber gimfte hftegte 
 ben $omg granj ben ©rften Bet $a$ia. 14. £ie ntetften s D?enfd*en 
 avoeiten unb lefen genug, after fie benlen fcfel gu ir-enig. 15. 2Sei§l 
 bu m ber $arl ift? 16. 9Jkn mad)te ben tapfern geibtueftel ^urn 
 £auptmann. 17. 3iootfmal $at jefct fdjort ber giupng bein ®ra6 
 mtt Slumen gefdjmiidt ! 
 
OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 153 
 
 Exercise 81. SlufgaBe 81. 
 
 1. The English and French, who are now in Turkey, are the 
 enemies of the Eussians. 2. In what country is the city where 
 the Emjeror Charles the Fifth conquered King Francis the 
 First ? 3. Who calls music the language of the passions ] L 
 What sergeant was made a captain % 5. How much does this 
 sugar cost a pound? 6. Did the messenger wait more than 
 half an hour % 7. Why have they sent us so weak an assistant 1 
 8. Hope is often man's only comforter. 9. The friend of inno- 
 cence is more powerful than all its enemies. 10. Most men 
 think and write too little. 11. Poverty is not always the re- 
 sult of idleness. 12. Why is the rose called the queen of 
 flowers] 13. March is a cold, unpleasant month; is Maya 
 more agreeable month than September'? 14. The free love 
 peace, but they love liberty still more. 15. Life is short, death 
 is certain, eternity is long, Heaven is just. 16. Why has the 
 boy his hat in his hand 1 
 
 LESSON XLIII. Cection XLII1. 
 
 OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The article is omitted : 
 a. Before the names of the cardinal points, when direction 
 toward, or from them is indicated : 
 
 £)a3 elite ©djiff fegelte nadj Djtat, ba3 (The) one ship sailed toward the 
 attbere nad) ©itbett. east, the other toward the south. 
 
 6. Before nouns used in a general sense, as the predicate 
 effetn or n?erten, and before those standing in apposition 
 after a 1 3, with a previously or subsequently expressed word : 
 
 £)er ©djmetterlutg ifi <2tmtMIb ber The butterfly is (the or an) emblem 
 
 tfnfier&'Itdjfett. — It. of immortality. 
 
 (Sitter mc titer Srttber iji $aufmatm, One of my brothers is a merchant, 
 
 ber cmbere Sfrjt. the other a physician. 
 
 2113 $retntb farm id) e£ ntdjt ratten. As a friend I can not advise it. 
 Sag tjt tttdjt SDPcbe, tttdjt <StUe Bet Utt3. That is not the fashion, not the cit9 
 
 torn with us (in our country). 
 7* 
 
154 LESSON XLIII. 
 
 c. Ill legal reports and instruments, as also in many phrases 
 before er fterer, tester er, fo Ig enb er : 
 
 UeBcrtrin'gcr btefeS tfl ein ^reunb son The bearer of this is a friend of 
 
 mtr (L. XXVIII. 3). mine. 
 
 SBefiag'ter fcefyctup'tet baf, IU The accused maintains that, etc. 
 
 T-'iterjei^'neter ioerpfli^'tetftc^ ba§, «♦ The undersigned pledges himself 
 
 that, etc. 
 
 d. Before nouns preceded by git, indicating the purpose o" 
 manner of an action : 
 
 Sr reifl ju $ferbe. He travels on horseback. 
 
 SRetfcn <5ie % u 2-anb ober j u SKJaffer ? Do you travel by land or by water? 
 
 (£r fa§ no$ j« SLifc^* He was still sitting at table. 
 
 Die -fttnber getyen ju Sett, The children are going to bed. 
 
 e. When two or more nouns joined by un fc> denote a single 
 idea : 
 
 2Btr ftnb mtt ^erjunb ©eelebte feinigen. We are his with heart and soul. 
 
 2. The omission of the article, as in English, often gives the 
 noun an adverbial signification ; thus, er gcfyt no.6) ipctufc, signi- 
 fies, he is going home ; while, er gef)t rtad) km ipaufe, signifies, 
 he is going to the (specified) house. This difference is illus- 
 trated by the phrases ; to bed, to the bed ; at table, at the 
 table ; etc. : 
 
 Um tteldje Sett ftttben Wtr <5te } It $au* At what time shall we find you at 
 
 fe ? (L. XXXVIII. 1. c.) home ? 
 
 SScmn geljen <5te n a $ $aufe ? "When do you go fome / 
 
 3. When the dative of a noun, used in a general sense, is 
 preceded by a preposition, the article is often omitted ; fre- 
 quently, however, when the preposition and the article can be 
 contracted into one word, the article is retained : 
 
 (£r ifi ein 9ftctnn son Gtyrc* He is a man of honor, 
 
 ©d)icfe fte jur Stvfyt. Send her to rest. 
 
 Sr tx>ar aufjet ftdj $or (Sdjmerj. He was beside himself with pain. 
 
 (£r fagte e3 tm 3ome. He said it in anger. 
 
 4. Before the substantively used infinitive (L. XLIX. 4.), 
 under the government of a preposition, the article is often omit- 
 ted, as also before the cardinals, Ijunbert, taufenD, etc. : 
 
 Sttandjer 2Kenfd) fd>eint mtr an Sffen Many a man seems to think only 
 unb £rtnfen ju benfen. of eating and drinking. 
 
 ; 
 
OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 155 
 
 <&k fcefdjdftigen fid) nut ©djreifcen. They busy themselves with writing. 
 £unbert ©timmen riefen ifjm nad). A hundred voices called after him. 
 
 5. The omission of the article was formerly more common 
 than at present, and many phrases in which it occurs are still 
 used : 
 
 (£r rtdjtete bic STugen gen &immeL He directed his eyes toward heaven, 
 Diefer cntfcEjIoffene Son madjte ©in* This determined tone made (an) 
 brucf* — ©♦ impression. 
 
 6. With £U, before the dative without the article are formed 
 many idiomatic phrases ; as, ju ©ruitfe ridjtett (lit., to direct or 
 turn to the ground or bottom) to ruin; ju ©runt) e get) en, to 
 perish; etc. : 
 
 Der raffifdje ^elbjug rtdjtete bte The Russian campaign ruined the 
 
 ,: Grande Armee" (roie man fie ju "Grand Army" (as it used to bo 
 
 nennen pftegte) ju ©runbe* called). 
 
 33ei bent ruffifd)en $elbutge ging bic In the Russian campaign the Grand. 
 
 "Grande Armee" ju ©runbe. Army was destroyed. 
 
 23 e t f p i e t e . Examples. 
 
 StBir fegelten nad) Sfarben unb fte nad) "We sailed to the north, and they 
 
 Sffieften. to the west. 
 
 3n Deutfdjlanb ifl eg ©ttte ben £ut In Germany it is the custom to 
 
 abjunefymen, tnenn man^reunben fce* take off one's hat when one meet? 
 
 ge'gnet. friends. 
 
 5ttein ©ruber ijt jn $aufc, unb id) gche My brother is at home, and I am 
 
 nad) §aufe. going home, 
 
 tfunjl ill bie redjte £anb ber 3fattur\ Art is the right hand of Nature. 
 
 Dtefe $at nur ©efdjop'ft/ iene ^tn The latter has made only crea- 
 
 SKenfdjen gemadjt'. — <S. tures, the former (has made) man. 
 
 Xcufenb toarnenbe SBetfpiele fottten un^ A thousand warning examples 
 
 flu; gemadjt' tyaben. ought to have made us prudent. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Sfefjnlidj, similar ; 
 Dit 9tfd)e, -, ashes (L. XXYI. 10); 
 
 SMutig, bloody ; 
 Die S$rifteiu)eit, -, Christendom ; 
 
 Sfolgen, to follow; 
 
 ©an$, whole ; 
 Dei ©efang, -e§, pi. ©efange, song; 
 Die ©efunb'fjeii, -, pi. -en, health; 
 Der ©runb, -e3, pi. ®riinbe, ground; 
 Der 9iorben, -g, the North; 
 
 Dad spilfen, -§, (the) Pilsen; 
 Die Steife, -, pi. -n, the journey, 
 
 0Udj ten, see 6 ; 
 Die (Scblad)t, -, pi. -en, the battle; 
 Dcr ©iibeil, -3, the South; 
 Der Stanj, -eg, pi. £anje f the dance; 
 
 Sraitern, to n.ourn ; 
 
 Skrlaf'fen, to leave, p. 350; 
 
 2Bilb, wild; 
 
 8h§en, ' 3 migrate, go, p. 358 
 
156 - LESSON XLIV. 
 
 Exercise 82. 2l'ufg<ue 82. 
 
 1, 3n ttelder Sa^re^eit gte^en bie tuilten ©ctnfe nacfc Morten? 
 2. 2Bann gie^en fie nad) @toen? 3. Urn toeldje 3 e tt f^ @ie mo** 
 gen gu £aufe ? 4. 3$ Bin morgen ten gangen £ag $n £aufe. 5. 
 SBarum gefyt ber $naoe nid)t nad) £aufe ? 6. £r gel)t nid)t nad) 
 jpaufe, toett er fd)on jn ipaufe ift. ?. 3fteifen gu gujj finb oft ange* 
 it earner aH Sftetfen gn $fert>e ober gu Sagen. 8. SSir gie()en fredj 
 buvd) SeinbeS tmb greunfces Sanbe. — @. 9. Die Sfyrijhntyett trau* 
 ert in ©ad nnb 2Ifd)e. — ©. 10. Sin (Sprid)tt?ort fagt, "Uefomg 
 tnacfyt ben Sflieifter." 11. Sluf Huttge ©djladjten folgt ©efang nnb 
 Sang (L. 36. 5.). 12. SBir sertaffen $ilfen nod) oor 2lbenb — ©. 
 13. £er 5Raler $at oei biefen unb afjnlidjen SlrBeiten feine ©efunfc* 
 ^ett gu ©runbe gertdrtet. 
 
 Exercise 83. Slnfgaoe 83. 
 
 1. Is your friend still at home 1 2. No, but he will soon be 
 at home. 3. At what time do the scholars go home % 4. They 
 are already going home. 5. In what season of the year do the 
 swallows migrate to the north 1 6. These and similar labors 
 have destroyed the health of this man. T. Shall you leave the 
 city before evening ? 8. How do you say in German, " Prac- 
 tice makes perfect ?" 9. We shall soon have cold weather, 
 the wild geese are flying to the south. 10. The boys waited a 
 whole day. 11. Did you make the journey on foot, or by 
 water % 12. Have you not time to write your friends a letter? 
 13. At what time shall you be at home } 14. I am now at 
 home, and my brother is coming home. 15. This is one of 
 the hardest exercises we have had. 
 
 LESSON XLIV. Utiian XLIV. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE pronouns. 
 
 1. £)er, bi e, b a 3, often supply, as demonstrative pronouns, 
 the place of biefet and jener, and when used with nouns. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 157 
 
 aie distinguished from the article of like form, by a greater 
 emphasis : 
 
 3d) Iofce b c n $flam, md)t btefcn. I praise that man, not this one. 
 
 3d) Iofce b e n Sftann, nidjt jenen. I praise this man, not that one. 
 
 ■Dad 93ud) tjabe id) fdjott gele'fen. 27m book I have already read- 
 
 SB er Ifl b e r ?* Who is that (or tAu) ? 
 
 2. When the demonstrative b er is used with a noun, it has 
 the declension of the definite article ; used substantively, it fol- 
 
 cws the inflection of the relative & er (L. 39. 2.) : 
 
 % en SSKdmtern $afce id) bad ®elb fdjon To those men I have already sent 
 
 gefd)icft'. the money. 
 
 © e n e n $alt id) e3 fdjon gcfd)tcf t'. To those I have already sent it. 
 
 Sebermann tttrb eud) lofcen, bap tf)r Every body will praise you that 
 
 benctt (i.e. the rulers) »on Sfcitrtt* you have declared war (feud) 
 
 fccrg ge^)b 1 angefitnbtgt ^afct.— ©. against those of Nuremberg. 
 
 3. The demonstrative b e r may often be best rendered by a 
 personal pronoun; its genitive, like that of the relative ber, 
 always precedes the governing noun : 
 
 • £d'§t eud) b e r (that one) tterfol'gen ?" Does he cause you to be pursued ? 
 
 "£>er fdjabet ntd)t mcijr, id) fyab 1 i^rt He will do (L. 38. 1. c.) no more 
 
 erfdjta'gen." harm, I have slain him. 
 
 Sr Hefct fetnen SBruber, a£er nidjt b e f= He loves his brother, but not his 
 
 fen 5ltnber. (that's) children. 
 
 'SBeffen SSrob bu tffefi, beffcn Cicb Whose bread thou eatest, his song 
 
 bu ftngejt." thou singest. 
 
 4. T) e r is used before the genitive, as the substitute of a 
 i.oun previously expressed, in which position it is rendered that 
 before the objective with of; or, frequently, the English pos 
 sessive is used and its governing noun is not expressed : 
 
 3d) ^afce mcinen Sail unb ben bed I have my ball and that of tho 
 
 tfna&en. boy. 
 
 <£r Ijat feine $eber unb bte feiner He has his pen and that of his 
 
 Sdjwejter. sister.f 
 
 * When thus used, b e r is often made still more significant by a sign 
 or gesture: T) a 3 (that at which I point) t]t metrt 93udj, unb ba$ (that 
 other one) ift feined, that is my book, and that (yonder) is his. £) e r i|l 
 ed (L. 28.8.), tiefen £unbert ©timmen, ber rettete bie Jtbmgin, he is the one, 
 cried (a) hundred voices, he rescued the queen. 
 
 f Or, I have my ball and the boy's (ball) ; or, he has his pen and hia 
 sister's (pen). 
 
158 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 £ie flaBen Sflre SMiljer unb b te Sflrer You have your books and those of 
 
 SBriiber. your brothers. 
 
 £>aBen <5ie bte %d tx Sflrer ©ruber, Have you the pens of your broth- 
 
 *>ber b i e ber metntgen ? ers, or those of mine ? 
 
 5. The genitives t> e f f e n, t e r e n are often used (like the 
 French en), as a substitute for a noun previously expressed, 
 ind are sometimes rendered by some, any, and sometimes do 
 not require translation (L. 39. 4.) : 
 
 (Er Bat fein ®elb meflr, aBer id) flaBe He has no longer any money, but 
 b e f f e n nodi), I still have some (of it). 
 
 3<$ flaBe feine Silver, bu ^aft b ere n I have no books; you have (of 
 ju JneL them) too many. 
 
 6. The old form of the genitive t> e {j (for b e f f e n, as also 
 tt>e$, for it) e f f e n) is still retained in several compounds, in 
 the more elevated styles of composition, and in some proverb- 
 ial phrases : 
 
 (£r tft befttegen mem $einb* He is therefore my enemy. 
 
 "£)efii rift)me ber Blut 1 ge Xyxam' ftdj Let not the bloody tyrant boast 
 
 ttidjt." (himself) of this. 
 
 "SB eg ba$ £er& *>oE tft, beg W* *>« Of what the heart is full, o/ ^a* 
 
 2)?unb itBer." the mouth runs over. 
 
 1. The neuter forms of the demonstrative pronouns (fctcf e 6 
 being often contracted into "Die ^), as also ftelcfyeS in conjunc- 
 tion with the verb fein (like the French ce), may refer to nouns 
 of all genders, and in both numbers : 
 
 2) i e 3 finb unferc Sreunbe. These (this) are our friends. 
 
 SBeriftbctS? Who is that? 
 
 2B e I d) e 3 ftnb bte Idngflen Sftddjte ? Which are the longest nights ? 
 
 <Smb b a 3 ntdjt Ungarn? Are not those Hungarians ? 
 
 9?ein, e 3 ftnb Socmen. (L. 28. 7.) No, they are Bohemians. 
 
 8. With the demonstrative and determinative pronouns the 
 adverb e B e n is often used : 
 
 (£i ifl e B e n berfetBe. He is the very same. 
 
 (£ B en btefeS £au£» This very (this same) house. 
 
 (£Ben ber unb fein ftnberer flat mt$ Tkrf he (ho himself) and nobody 
 
 ju eudj (jefcflicJt'* else has s mt me to you. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 159 
 
 ©etfpfefe. 
 
 S)a3 f!nb bic golgen imgtuffferger 
 
 £§aten.— <S. 
 ©er (Sine ^at bie, ber Sfnbere anbere 
 
 ©akn — ®. 
 u 2)iefe3 SBud) tfl mtr liefc, tter e£ ftiefjtt, 
 
 ber t)l ein 2)iefc." 
 2Ber fold) 1 ein £er$ an feinen Sufen 
 
 briifft, ber fann fur $erb imb -£>of 
 
 stit greubcn fcdnen. — ©. ! 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Those are the results of unfortunate 
 
 deeds. 
 The one has these, the other (has) 
 
 other gifts. 
 This book is dear to me, who steals 
 
 it (he) is a thief. 
 Who presses to his bosom such a 
 
 heart, can joyfully (with joy) 
 
 fight for hearth and home 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>er 9Iennet, -3, pi. -, the sleeve ; 
 £>ie Strbeit, -, pi. -en, the work; 
 %<a Gurcpoiev, -g, pi. -, European; 
 ©aS Sranffltrt, -3, (the) Frankfort; 
 5Da3 ©emctlbe, -e$, pi. -, painting; 
 £>te Sade, -, pi. -n, the jacket; 
 £)er j?ut[d)er, -3; pi, -, coachman ; 
 £)cr Dfficte'r, -3, pi, -e, the officer; 
 
 $ari'fer, see L. 33. 5 ; 
 £)er JRidner, -3, pi. -, the judge; 
 
 ©ainmctn, to collect; 
 
 ©egcln, to sail; 
 
 Da3 Sicgel, -3, pi. -, the seal; 
 
 1)a3 ©iegetiacf, -e$, pi. -e, the seal- 
 ing-wax ; 
 ©pantfd), Spanish; 
 
 £)cr (Stall, -eg, pi. ©taTte, the stall, 
 stable ; 
 
 T)tx (Stempel, -3, pi. -, the stamp, 
 post-mark; 
 
 2)ie £ante, -, pi. -u, the aunt; 
 
 £)a3 Unfraut, -e£, pl.-frautcr, weed; 
 
 (Die SBiefe, -, pi. -n, the meadow; 
 
 £He Seining, -, pi. -en, news paper 
 
 Exercise 84. 2luf(jaBc 84. 
 
 !♦ £er tft ntein geinb, after btcfer ift metn greimt). 2. £>er £t[d) 
 beg Setters tft griper alg ber beS @d)tt{erg. 3. <Sd)rei£en ©ie mit 
 tneinem 33leijHfte, ober mtt tern meineg 23ruberg? 4.3$ ^abc 
 ben 3^n unb and) ben 3$«S Sruberg. 5. 3& fdjrpfte mtt 
 metner $eber, ttnb er fd)retftt ntit ber feinen $reunbeg. 6. SCo^nen 
 @ie in ben £aufern ber pattern, ober in benen ber ^anfleute ? 1. 
 £a£en @te bie 3 e ttnng 3§nx £cmte, ober bie ber ntetnigen? 8. 
 SSeffen $ferb ift bag in 3fyrem ©telle, Jag 3Wse, ober bag beg Slut? 
 fckrg? 9. (£g ift meter bag meinige nod) bag fetnige, fonbern bag 
 beg ©artnerg. 10. ©teg finb bie (Stiefel beg Dfficierg, unb bag ftnb 
 bie feinen £)ienerg. 11. £aft bn beine Dblaten, ober bie beitteg 33ru* 
 berg ? 12. 3$ We meiit ©tegeffad tutb bag beg ^anfmanng, (L. 
 9. 3.) mein ©iegel unb bag beg ©artnerg. 13. S) er 33rief tjat ben 
 ©tempel son ^ranffurt; unb ber ^at tm $arifer <5ttmptt 14. 
 £at ber ^tempner fein %a%, cbe bag beg 2lr6eiterg? 15. SJletne 
 
160 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 SlrBeit tjt fitter, bie meinea 3JMtf<prpr3 i(l lei^t. 16. Dag, tral 
 mart un$ ^eute son tern Jtriege er^tt tyat, ift nicfct foa^r. It. 
 9flcm ftnbet meljr UnMuter auf ben SCiefen tmb gefoern ber StmetU 
 fatter, als auf betten ber Deutfdjen. 18. 9ttan fagt bag bie ©c^iffe 
 ber Wmerifaner fdmetfer fegetn, ats bie ber (Sngtanber. 19. Das fmb 
 3§re -ftnopfe, unb btes fmb bie beS ©cfmeibers 20. Die Vermel 
 tiefer 3atfe fmb m lang, bie ber anberen fmb git furj. 21. Da3 fmb 
 metne 3iid)ter. 22. 3r fammelt ©emcitbe unb $at beren fcfyon ttiete 
 gefartft. 
 
 Exercise 35. $uf$al>e 85. 
 
 1. Have you the teacher's seal, oi the physician's 1 2. Have 
 you the seal of the teacher, or that of the physician 1 3. Does 
 one find more weeds (are more weeds found) in the fields and 
 meadows of the Americans than in those of the Germans 1 4. 
 Are those your wafers, or the officer's (those of the officer) ? 
 5. Those are my brother's, and these are the officer's. 6. The 
 servant has the coachman's boots, and the coachman has the 
 servant's. 7. My mother has my vail, and I have my aunt's. 
 8. The tinman has the laborer's barrel, and the laborer has that 
 of his friend, the cooper. 9. Your work is easier than that of 
 your teacher. 10. The scholar's work is always easier than the 
 teacher's. 11. 1 have been told that you speak Spanish. 12. 
 Are the sleeves of this jacket longer than those of the other? 
 13. Whose horses are those in your stable, the officer's or the 
 coachman's'? 14. They are neither the officer's nor the coach- 
 man's, but the merchant's 15. I have your ball and that of 
 your brother, your pen and that of my sister, my sealing-wax 
 and that of the scholar, your books and those of your cousin. 
 16. Are you writing with our pencils, or with those of ouj 1 
 scholars'? 17. Is your vail larger than your mother's % 18. It 
 is larger than my mother's, but much smaller than my aunt's 
 or my cousin's. 19. What kind of books are these % 20. Those 
 are Spanish books. 21. Has your news paper the post-mark 
 of Frankfort or of Paris'? 
 
THE AUXILIARIES. 161 
 
 LESSON XLV. Ccction XLV. 
 
 THE AUXILIARIES OF MODE 
 
 1. Are fc ttr f e it, ! b n n e n, m 5 g e n, m it f f e n, f o It e n, ft o I* 
 1 e n, la f f e n,* and with which the main verb is used without 
 the particle gu (except with fbnnett, as given below; see 6). 
 
 2. CONJUGATION OF THE MODE AUXILIARIES. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 t<£ tarf, famt, mag, mujj, foil, rcifl, Iaffe, 
 fcu tarfft, famtjt, magjt, mujjt, follft, ttnllft, taffeft, 
 er tarf, famt, mag, mu§, foil, Witt, lajjt. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 tcb, fcttrfte, fonntc, mocbte, mujjte, folfte, ttoure, Kejj, 
 ru turfteft, tomttefr, modteft, tmijjtejr, fotltejt, footttejl, Itejjeft, 
 er fcurfte, fonnte, mo&te, mufte, fotfre, mottte, Hejj. 
 
 (§ 83. 2.) (§ 83. 3.) (§ 83. 4.) (§ S3. 5.) (§ 83. 6.) (§ 83. 8.) 
 
 3. All the persons of the plural are formed as in regular 
 verbs. 
 
 4. D it r f e n indicates : 
 
 a. A possibility dependent on the will of another : 
 
 2>er SBauer barf ntdjt fifteen. The peasant can not (legally) fish. 
 
 SSer be£ #errn Sod) ntd?t tragi, barf He who wears not the Lord's yoke 
 
 ftcr) in it fcinem £reu$nid)t fdjmiicfen. must not adorn himself with hia 
 
 — ©. cross. 
 
 b. T) iir fen, in the subjunctive mode, often indicates a 
 logical possibility : 
 
 £3 bitrfte jejjt ju fpat fein. It might (may) now be too late. 
 
 Tie 9?a$roeIt biirfte SBeben'fen tra* Posterity might hesitate to sub- 
 gen bieS Urtr)eil $u unterfc^rei'fcn. scribe to (approve) this verdict 
 
 c. Tixx f e n (infinitive; see also fomten, L. 58. 1.) preceded 
 by 3 it often requires no translation in English : 
 
 Sr tvit urn (Erlau&'ttijj fie fcefudj'en ju He asked (for) permission to (be at 
 bur fen. liberty to) visit them. 
 
 * For complete conjugations of thes3 verbs, see § 83. 2, etc., (except 
 of laffen, which is not there because it is not of the mixed conjugation 
 § 81). See list of irregular verbs, § 78. 
 
162 LESSON XLV. 
 
 5. ^onneit indicates: 
 
 a. A possibility dependent on the capabilities of the subject 
 
 £)er SSogel 'ann fttegen. The bird can fly. 
 
 <Ste fonnen e3 letd)t t!)un. You can easily do it. 
 
 5 A logical possibility : 
 
 SSJktt \ a nn c3 fd)on gen) an §afcen. It may have been done already. 
 
 3d) ge$e nidjt, c3 f iJnttte regnen. I am not going, it might rain. 
 
 Sir f ann Unrest tyaften. He may be wrong. 
 
 Obs. — fonnen is often used transitively in the sense of to under- 
 stand, to know by heart : 
 
 Sr f ann stele pBfdje £tebeu He knows many pretty songs, 
 
 ©ie fctnn englifd). She understands English. 
 
 (£r i ann »on Slttem (£ttt)a3. He knows a little of every thing. 
 
 Um^ttt with fonnen. 
 
 6. U nt ^ i tt (literally around thither) is used only with ! o tt* 
 U e n ; and here, as an exception, the particle J U is employed 
 with the infinitive which follows : 
 
 Sdjfonnte nidjt um^in e3 tljm ju I could not avoid ("get round") tell 
 
 fagen* ing it to him. 
 
 3d)! ann nid)t um^tn $u ladjen. I can not help laughing. 
 
 ^onnen with t> a f it r has likewise an idiomatic use : 
 3Ba3 fannjl bu bennbafiir? How can you help it? (lit., what 
 
 canst thou therefor ?) 
 
 7. $R o g e n indicates : 
 
 a. A possibility dependent on the will of the jpeaker or the 
 subject, and is frequently used transitively : 
 
 ©u nt a g fi ben SSrief lefen. You may read the letter. 
 
 3d) ma g nidjt t)ier Metkn. I do not wish to remain here. 
 
 3d) mag ben SBetn nid)t. I do not like (wish for) the wine, 
 
 ©ic mi> g en un§ nid)t fe^en. They do not wish to see us. 
 
 b. yjloQtn indicates a logical possibility as a concession 
 on the part of the speaker : 
 
 (Er mag ein treuer $reunb fetn. He may be a true friend. 
 
 <&k m o g en e§ geu)an tjatien. They may have done it. 
 
 8. 9R ix ff e n is the equivalent of must : 
 
 2Bir misffr n SItfe flerfcen. We must all die. 
 
 (£r m u § t e e3 t|un He was obliged to do it. 
 
THE AUXILIARIES 
 
 103 
 
 9. © oil en indicates: 
 
 a. A necessity dependent on the will of another, or on 
 moral obligation : 
 
 £>iefe gurdjt fell enbtgenj ft)r £aupt This fear shall end; her head shall 
 
 foil fatten; Wj roiff griebe ^abtXU fall; I will have peace. 
 
 3d) | oil in tie ©tabt geben. I ani to go to the city. 
 
 Winter foil en lerner. Children should (shall) learn. 
 
 b. (£ o It e n indicates a logical necessity resting on repoi t, 
 and answers mainly to it is said, reported, iliey say, or to 
 phrases of similar import : 
 
 <5ie fo lie n feljr reidj fein. They are said to he very rieh. 
 
 $erjcg3o§ann foil irrcnim©eoir'ge. Duke John is reported to he wan- 
 — <2>. dering in the mountains. 
 
 c. Solicit, with another verb expressed or understood, 
 often answers in relative sentences to our infinitive preceded 
 by to: 
 
 Sr toeijj nicfrt roaS er tljun fo II. He does not know what to do. 
 
 .Beige ntir »te id) e$ madjen f o 1 1. Show me how to do it. 
 
 2Ba3 fo II id) $ter ? What am I to do here ? 
 
 10. 2B o 1 1 en indicates : 
 
 a. A necessity dependent on the will of the subject . 
 
 (S3 foil fo fein, id) ro ill e3 fo Ijaoen. It shall be so, I will have it so. 
 
 <Sie ro o 11 en nidjt gel)en. They will not (do not wish to) go. 
 
 3d) ro elite ti tl)m erfld'ren, aoer er I was going to explain it to him 
 roollte mid) nidjt fyoren. but he would not hear me. 
 
 b. A logical necessity dependent on the assertion of the 
 subject : 
 
 (Er ro ill e3 feloji gefe'fiert Ijaoen. He pretends to have seen it himself. 
 
 6te fallen in ber <3tabt fein; bie Sente They are said to be in the city; the 
 
 ro o 1 1 e n fie gefe'^en Ijabcn. people will have it that they have 
 
 seen them. 
 
 11. Sctffcn signifies to let, leave, permit, command; also, 
 to get, or order any thing done : 
 
 2 a % t ba» gcucr anSgeljcn. Let the fire go out. 
 
 (£r bat ka$ 33ud) f all e n I a f fen. He has dropped (let fall) the book 
 
 Oct Idjjt ba$ genjrer offen. He Z<?aves the window open. 
 
 SSarum' I a f f c n @ie urn ge|en ? "Why do you permit hirn to go ? 
 
164 LESSON XLV. 
 
 3d) Ittffe nur einen Slod macfyen. I am getting a coat made (for rno). 
 
 3d) ^abe itym (or fur itjn) etrten 9todf I have ordered a coat (to be made) 
 
 ntadjen laffen. (L. 49. 5.) for him. 
 
 (£r I i e § ba$ Regiment' anruof<m. He commanded the regiment to ad 
 
 vance. 
 
 12. These verbs all have a complete conjugation. Hence 
 where their English equivalents are found, in this respect, de- 
 fective, other words of like meaning must be supplied : 
 
 3d) m u % r)eute ger)en. I must go to-day. 
 
 <£r tt> ii n f d) i e tt)n geljen ju laffen. He wished to let him go. 
 
 3d) mit £ t e geftern gefen* I was obliged to go yesterday. 
 
 3d) r;akmd)r getr> o ttt% after td) fjaBe I have not wished to, but I have 
 
 g e nt U § t' ♦ been obliged to. 
 
 (£r nurb geljen f o nnen. He will 6e a£Z<? to go. 
 
 ©te itserben fpielen ro o II en* They will ww/t to. play. 
 
 (£3 ifl fceffer arteiten %vl roollen, aI3 It is better to be willing to work, 
 
 Ctrfreiten \U mil f fen. than to be obliged to work. 
 
 13. The perfect and pluperfect of the above auxiliaries 
 (namely, biirfen, lonnen, tnogen, miiffert, [often, foota and tctffm, 
 § 74), as also of Ijetfjen (in the sense of to command), f)elfen, 
 f)i3ren and fetyett, when used with other verbs, take the infinitive 
 form, instead of the participle : 
 
 3d) Ijctfce tfyn fonvmen I) e i § e n. I have commanded him to come. 
 
 3d) tyctfce itjm arkiten r) el fen. I have MpeeZ him work. 
 
 3d) §aBe ilm fpredjen Ij 5 r e n. I have heard him speak. 
 
 3d) faBe ttytt geljen f e fj e n. I have seen him go. 
 
 3$ B)aBe nidjt geljen f onnen. I have not been able to go . 
 
 @te I)ai e3 nidjt tl)un m 5 g en. She has not wished to do it. 
 
 14. When the infinitive form of the participle, as above, is 
 employed, it is always placed at the end of the sentence ; hence, 
 the inversion usual in relative sentences does not take place : 
 
 !5Der SWcmn, roeldjer Ijat ger)en miiffen The man who has been obliged to 
 
 (not getyen miiffen Ijat). go. 
 
 3d) reetp e<3 bafi er roirb fommen fiSnnen. I know that he will be able to come. 
 
 15. After these auxiliaries the main verb (where the mean 
 ing is sufficiently obvious) is often omitted : 
 
 3d) fan n nidjt mefjr, I can (do) no more. 
 
 ©ie miif fc n gleid) fort. You must (go) away immediately. 
 
 Cent Sungltng » o II t e jur ©tabt fin* A youth wished to go (or get) up to 
 auf* the city 
 
THE AUXILIARIES. 
 
 165 
 
 eifptele. 
 
 Exai 
 
 i 3 ©ertdjt' I dpi ben SkrBredj'er The court causes the criminal to be 
 
 JttlttUp'ten. beheaded. 
 
 (L 1 d § t feinen $reunb im ©iid)e. He Zeawshis friend in the lurch. 
 
 <E: ^offtc feinen ©otyn au3 ber ©efa'ljr He hoped to be able to wrest his 
 
 retpen ju fonnen. 
 G$ bitrfte »ieHetcf)t toaljr fein. 
 Sr b a r f nid)t in baa £an3. 
 SSaa farm id) bafitr? 
 3d) mag eg man t$un. . 
 3©a$ wilier bap id) tfmn foil ? 
 3d) to o 1 1 1 e gem bal;in gefyen. 
 (£r to ill bid) gefe'fyen tyafeen. 
 3d) mtid)te friiljjlucfen, £err SBtrt^. 
 3d) m 5 d) t e e$ Jejtoei'feln (§ 83. 11). 
 
 son from the danger. 
 It might perchance be true. 
 He ventures not into the house. 
 How can I help it ? 
 I do not like to do it. 
 What would he have me do ? 
 I would fain go thither. 
 He insists that he has seen you. 
 I would like to breakfast, landlord. 
 I might (am inclined to) doubt it. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>a£ 33etftnel, -e£, pi. -e, example ; 
 
 39leiben, to remain, continue; 
 
 SBrtngen, to bring (p. 346.); 
 
 £)aj3 {conj.), that; 
 
 2)ej$al6, therefore; 
 
 2>urfett, see 4; 
 
 (Sffen, to eat (p. 348.) ; 
 Die $reube, -, pi. -n, joy, pleasure; 
 Die ©ebulb,-, the patience; 
 
 ©enie'pen, to enjoy (p. 350.); 
 Da3©etoiir5, -eg, pi. -e, the spice; 
 Die Sarnie, -, pi. -n, the can; 
 
 ^onnen, see 6 ; 
 
 £ernen, to learn; 
 
 Exercise 86. 
 
 SKdfjtg, moderate, temperate; 
 
 SRogen, see 7 ; 
 
 SftuffHt, see 8; 
 
 Doglcid)', although; 
 Die 9iegel, -, pi. -u, the rule; 
 
 ©c^toiertg, difficult; 
 
 <Sd)lafen, to sleep (p. 354,) ; 
 
 ©otten, see 9 ; 
 Die <£peife, -, pi. -n, the food; 
 
 Sdglid), daily ; 
 
 £amcn, to dance; 
 
 Itmfytn, see 6 ; 
 
 Sffienn, if, when; 
 
 2Men, see 10. 
 
 Slufgatse 86. 
 
 1. £r mag gct)en. 2. ^iejenigen, roeld)e nidjts toiffen, (often tU 
 roas lernen. 3. 28er Iran! ift, barf ntd)t arkitert. 4. 2$er gefunb 
 MeiBen iuttt, mujj ma jng effen unb trinfen. 5. 2Ger gut fd)tafen roil!, 
 mu§ jletjjta, arknten. 6. SBer nid)t ffeijjtg unb aufmerffam fern miff, 
 famt nid)t fdjnell lernen. ?. SBer etnen 23rief fd)reiften roift, mu§ 
 papier, £inte unb $eber fc,aoen. 8. £ie greuben ber Srbe foil man 
 rote ©erour^e gemejjen unb nid)t rote ragtime (Speijen. 9. .ftennen 
 ©ie mix fagen too ber 5lrgt roof)nt? 10. 3d) roift mit 3t)nen au iljm 
 getyen. 11. SBerben @te morgen mit mix nad) ber ©tabt gel)er* 
 fonnen? 12. 3$ roerDe ge^en Jomten, after td) roerbe niefct ge^en 
 rooften, benn id) roerbe uoermorgen ge^en mitffen. 13. £)ie beutfd)c 
 
166 LESSON X^V. 
 
 ©pradje foil fetjt fd}ttuetig fein, bej^alB mnf? ber ©filter be SRegctn 
 lint) Me 23eifpiefe aufmerffam Icfcn. 14* $3er btefe @prad)e Icrncn 
 anil, barf ntdt faitl ober nad)laffig fein. 15. 3ft ein SSater Ijat mtd) 
 nte tangen laffen, er t)at nie tangen motlen, nnb feme Winter IjaBen 
 me tanjen bitrfen. 16. $3ir merben Bait) fpredjen fonnen, n>enn nur 
 nur fletgtg fetn toollen. 11. 2Ba3 ttollte ber ^aufmann Stynen ser* 
 fawfen ? 18. 3d) fonnte ntd)t3 bet \%m fatten, mas id) laufen tt>otfte» 
 19. Sin guter Setter ntufj ©ebulD l)aBen. 20. 2Me Winter ftolten 
 Wepfel unb ^irfdjen, aBer fte lonnen feirte fcmfen, benn fie IjaBen fein 
 ©elD. 21. ^annft in mir jene groge $anne Brtngen ? 22. 2£ir 
 fonncn nid)t umtjtn gu tad)en, oBgleic^ nur roiffen, bag e3 nnred)t tjh 
 23. 3d) fann nid)t3 bafiir, bag id) arm Bin. 24. lonnen (Siebeutfdj, 
 frangbfifd) unb fpantfd) ? 
 
 Exercise 87. StufgaBe 87. 
 
 1. 1 wished to go with my friend, but I could not, for I was 
 obliged to remain at home. 2. He who wishes to be rich or 
 learned must be industrious. 3. Those who will not read can 
 not learn. 4. I wished to buy good horses but could find none. 
 
 5. When shall you be able to write a letter to your friends \ 
 
 6. I shall be able to write one to-day, but I shall not wish to 
 write one. 7. Will your friends be obliged to stay in the house 
 this evening 1 8. They will not wish to go out of the house. 
 9. We have been able to go, but we have not wished to go. 10. 
 Have you been obliged to remain here 1 ? 11. We have been 
 at liberty to go, but we have wished to remain. 12. I can not 
 read, for I am unwell. 13. You must be industrious if you 
 wish to be healthy and happy. 14. These men are said to be 
 very rich. 15. What shall I do with this money % 16. You 
 may give it to your poor friends. 17. May I read your new 
 books'? 18. You may read them if you can. 19. You may 
 go to your friend if you wish. 20. 1 do not wis>,i to go to-day. 
 but I shall wish to go to-morrow. 21. Those boys say they 
 can not help laughing. 22. I shall probably be in the city to- 
 morrow, what shall I buy for you? 23. I can not buy any 
 thing, for I have no money. 24. It is said these children un 
 derstand German and French. 
 
CONJUGATION OF <2>ettt. 
 
 161 
 
 LESSON XLVI. flection XLVL 
 
 1. CONJUGATION OF ©eitt. 
 
 INFINHIVE. 
 
 Present 
 \t\n to be. 
 
 Present 
 fetenb, being. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) Bin, I am ; 
 bu Mfr f thou art; 
 cr ifl, be is; 
 
 idj war, I was ; 
 
 bu ttarjl, tbou wast; 
 
 er tear, he was ; 
 
 Perfect 
 gettcfen fein, to have been. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 gettefen, been. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 ttir finb, we are ; 
 ifyr feib, you are ; 
 fte jmb, they are. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 ttir ttaren, we were; 
 ityr ttarei, you were; 
 fte ttaren, they were. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 tdj Mn gettefen, I have been ; ttir fmb gettefen, we have been , 
 
 bu Mfi gewefen, thou hast been; tyx feib gewefen, you have been; 
 cr ifi gewefen, he has been; fte fmb gewefen, they have been. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 td) roar gewefen, I had been ; wir waren gewefen, we had been; 
 
 bu Warjr geroefen, thou hadst been; ityr waret gewefen, you had been; 
 er war gewefen, he had been; fie waren gewefen, they had been. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) werbe fein, 1 shall be ; wir werben fein, we shall be; 
 
 bu wir ft fein, thou wilt be; tfjr werbet fein, you will be; 
 
 er wirb fein, he will be; fte werben fein, they will be. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 u% weriie 
 bit wir ft 
 tr ttirb 
 
 
 I shall 
 
 thou wilt V > 
 
 he will 
 
 ... ttir tterben 
 | i^r tterbet 
 2 fte tterben 
 
 \ « we shall \ 
 ) « ^ thev will ) 
 
 ,4 rQ 
 
 fei (bu), be (thou). 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 feib (t$r), be (you). 
 
1*58 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 Obs. — As an auxiliary in forming the perfect, pluperfect and second 
 future tenses, fe in (§ 71. 3.) is often rendered by the auxiliary have : 
 
 6r i ft tjter geroefen. He has been here. 
 
 3d) ro ax bort geMte'oen. I had remained there. 
 
 <Sie tturb fdjon gegangen fein* She will already have gone. 
 
 2. idioms with fein. 
 
 &n roem ifi bie 9M^e gu lefcn? 
 
 &ie ift on mir. 
 
 Wtix ifi fefcr fatt; t$m ifi ju warm. 
 
 Mix ift ntdjt roofjf. 
 
 j©a^ ifi Mr? 
 
 3d) roeip ntdjt rote mir ift. 
 
 @et gute8 2Kutfje8. 
 
 Sflir ift md)t roo$l jn Sftutfc. 
 
 68 ift ifjm 6rnft bamit. 
 
 68 ifl <5djabe, bap er feinem ©egner 
 
 ttidjt geroadjfen ift. 
 ©a^ 3>ferb ift mir nidjt feil. 
 SBem ftnb btefe JHetber? 
 @te ifi U)m einen ®ulben fdjutbig. 
 SSijt bu im ©tanbe e8 ju t!mn? 
 3d) out c8 ntdjt tm ©tanbe. 
 SEBer ifi ©djulb baran, bag er nod) ntd)t 
 
 angefommen ift? 
 ©u fel&ft oifr (Bdjulb baran. 
 68 ift etn foldje8 ®efe£ oorfjanben. 
 (£8 ift tljm barum ju tfyun. 
 2Bo»ontfibte SRebe ? 
 ©a8 ift mir redjt. 
 68 ifl ifmen lieo. 
 3d) tin bir $erjlidj gut. 
 £affen <Sie e8 gut fein. 
 3d) roeifi rote bu Mft. 
 68 fei nun, bap, u. f. ro. 
 2Ba8 fein foil, fd)irft fid) roo^l. 
 68 ift mir fo, al8 oo id) e8 gef)i)rt' 
 
 ptte. 
 3d) will bc8 £obe8 fein, roenn e8 nid)t 
 
 roatyr ift. 
 6t ift rotEen8 fte ju oefudjen. 
 
 ©t ifl mein geroefener $reunb. 
 
 Whose turn is it to read ? 
 
 It is mine. 
 
 I am very cold ; he is too warm. 
 
 I do not feel well. 
 
 What ails you ? 
 
 I don't know v/hat ails me. 
 
 Be of good cheer. 
 
 I do not feel well (mentally). 
 
 He is in earnest about it. 
 
 It is a pity that he is not equal to 
 
 his antagonist. 
 My horse is not for sale. 
 Whose clothes are these ? 
 She owes him a florin. 
 Are you able to do it ? 
 I am not able to do it, 
 Whose fault is it, that he has not 
 
 yet arrived? 
 It is your own fault. 
 There is such a law in existence. 
 That is his object. 
 What is being spoken of? 
 I am satisfied with that. 
 They are glad of it. 
 I love you heartily. 
 That's enough of it, (leave off). 
 I know you (your ways). 
 Supposing now, that, etc. 
 Whatever is to be, is proper. 
 It seems to me as though I had 
 
 heard it. 
 I will (wish I may) die if it ie not 
 
 true. 
 He is inclined (has the will) to 
 
 visit them. 
 He is my former (has been my) 
 
 friend. 
 
conjugation of SGevben. 
 
 169 
 
 conjugation of SB C X fc £ n. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 rcerben, to become, 
 
 Present. 
 tcrrbenb, becoming. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ify tterbe, I become ; 
 bu rturir, thou becomest: 
 cr tt>irb, he becomes: 
 
 Perfect 
 
 gettorhn fetrt, to have becoiaft. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 gcroorben, become. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Itur roetben, we become; 
 ifjr ftterbet, you become; 
 fte tterben, they become. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 t$ tturbe or ttarb, I became; toit untrbcn, we became; 
 
 bu r»urbe|t or roctrbjr, thou becamest; ifyr rourbet, you became; 
 er tturbe or ttarb, he became ; fte truvben, they became. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) bin geworbett/ I have become ; 
 bu Mjt gewcrben, thou hast become: 
 tx tjr gettorbeu, he has become ; 
 
 rr>ir jmb gett>orben f we have become; 
 if)r fetb geroorben, you have become ; 
 fte jtnb geWDvben, they have become. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 1$ rear geroorben, I had become ; totr toarnt geworbeu, we had become ; 
 
 bu ir-arjt getoorben, thou hadst become; tt)r roctret gewcrben, you had become; 
 er roar getnorbett, he had become ; fte roarert geworben, they had become 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) ioerbe merben, I shall become; nur roerben ioerbett, we shall become; 
 bu roir)t roerbert, thou wilt become ; iftr roerbet rocrben, you will become; 
 tx firirb rcerben, he will become; fte rcerben roerben, they will become. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 tdj werbe \ * s£ I shall j 
 bu tttrjl f £ "J thou wilt 
 
 I 9 «j roir toerben \ 
 - % S t^r roerbet [ 
 
 * jj we shall ■) 
 ■ § &- you will 
 
 
 er roirb ' ^ J» he will J 
 
 ^ J fte roerben ) 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 « J* they will J 
 
 '""J 
 
 toerbe (bu), become (thou). 
 
 tr-erbet (i$r), 
 8 
 
 become (you). 
 
 
no 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 4. SB e r b e n, as an independent verb, answers mainly to he- 
 come. It may, likewise, be variously rendered by to (/row, 
 turn, be, obtain, or by words of similar import : 
 
 The snow is becoming deep. 
 
 2>cr ©djnee rotr b tief. 
 
 <£ie roerb en veicr). 
 
 ©ott fpradv eg toevbe Stdjt. 
 
 SBir roer b en atfe alt. 
 
 2)er SRa&e roirb fe$r alt. 
 
 Sag Staffer roirb eOen ju Sty. 
 
 &u3 Triads roirb 5?td)lg, 
 
 They are becoming ("getting*) rich. 
 God said, Let there be light. 
 We are all growing old. 
 The raven lives to a great age. 
 The water is just turning to ice. 
 Out of nothing nothing comes. 
 
 Obs. — The dative governed by ro e r b e n is often best rendered by our 
 nominative, and the subject in German by our objective; rocrben being 
 rendered by have or receive : 
 Sftcinen amen Untertfjanen mujj bag My poor subjects must have (receive) 
 
 Shrige tt> e r b c n. — @. their property (L. 35. 2.). 
 
 33 e if p tele. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Sic SB erf e ©otteg ftnb mannigfaltig. The works of God are manifold. 
 Sfriebrtdj ber ®rof?e roar ilcnig «on Frederick the Great was king of 
 
 spreufjen. 
 Gr roirb fein ®elb fqmeHer tog alS cr 
 
 eg ioerbtente. 
 <5obaib bie <5onne untergefyt roirb eg 
 
 ma&t 
 
 Prussia. 
 He gets rid of his money faster than 
 
 he earned it. 
 As soon as the sun goes down it i» 
 
 (becomes) night. 
 
 ©teShmbenroerbenjuSagembieSage The hours (become) grow to days, 
 
 ju 2Bod)en, bie 2Bod)en jn SDhmaten the days to weeks, the weeks to 
 
 unb bie donate ju 3af)ren. months, and the months to years. 
 
 jDte Sonne fan? in bag 5$?eer unb eg The sun sank into the sea, and it 
 
 roarb 3kd)t. was (became) night. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 9Hg, as, vriien; 
 
 ©o, there; 
 £)ag£>cutfd)lanb,-g, (the) Germany; 
 £>er ©rue!, -eg, pi. -e, the pressure ; 
 
 (£r)er, sooner; 
 ©ag i^ranfretd), -g, (the) France; 
 ©ag £eer, -eg, pi. -e, the army ; 
 
 #et£, hot; 
 £)er i?amerab',-en, pi. -en, comrade; 
 £>er itrteger, -g, pi. -, the warrior; 
 ©ag £ager, -g, pi. -, couch, camp ; 
 
 Cog, free, rid; 
 
 SSftiibe, weary, tired; 
 
 3Me Otet^e, -, pi. -n, the turn ; 
 Der better, -g, pi. -, the horseman 
 £>ie Sftepuotif , -, pi. -en, republio \ 
 
 @d)ulbig, indebted, L. 61. 5 , 
 
 ©eufjen, to sigh, groan- 
 
 ©o, so, thus; 
 
 ©ooalb, as soon ; 
 £)er ©peer, -eg, pi. -e, the spear; 
 £>er Sagloijner, -g, pi. • , day-laborer 
 
 Saufenb, thousand ; 
 
 UnMnbig, unmanageable; 
 £)ag Stel, -eg, pi. -e, limit, mark; 
 
 3u (adverb), too. 
 
the auxiliaries ©etn and SDerbcn. Ill 
 
 Exercise 88. 5lnfgaBe 88* 
 
 1« Diefer rcid>e Sftamt ift fcl)r arm gcrocfcn. 2. ©ine (Sic aitf 
 fcncm fcofycn (L. 32. 4.) 33erge gemefen? 3. @inb ©ie je in Sftugs: 
 lane ober <Deutfd}lant) geisefen ? 4. SBcr roar ber gefd)icftcftc Shelter 
 in tern Jpccrc teS fran3bftfd;cn $atfe?3? 5. SBann fint? ©t'e in 
 granfrei$ gemefen? 6. 3Bie fange fine ©te in biefem 2anbe ? 7. 
 (Sine (Sic nic unjufrteben nnb tranrig gej»efcn? 8. Statu? tferben 
 jrir rctcb fcin ? 9. SOBir roerben alt unb alter tmb fint efjcr am 
 3tele mtfercS 2cBcn3, ati unS angeneljm ift, 10. SBaS it>trb au$ 
 bir rocrben, toenn eu nidjt fletfjiger roirft? 11. 3$ fcwbe ftei^igcr 
 ttereen, [chile ati (L. 69. 3.) id) gefnne rocrbe. 12. 2>r ift nid)t 
 gut, ber m£)t fwdjt immcr Beffcr gu screen. 13. $ranf'rcid) rcmrbe 
 im 3atjre eintaufenb ad)tl)imecrt unb ad)t unb ttierjig cine SftcpuMif, 
 14, Go toirb ein fycijjer Sag rcerben, fagtc ein alter ^trtegcr roenige 
 (Stunben &or ber ©djtadjt gu feinem $ameraben. 15. Tas $[erb 
 rcurtc gang roile nne unBanbig. 16. 3>r ^ranlc feufjt auf feinem 
 Sagcr: "will c3 bemt nie Sag rcerben?" unb ber Sagll^ncr nnter 
 tern Xrucfe feiner 2IrBeit: "roirb e3 benn nicfyt Bate 9tad)t roerben?" 
 IT. " <5otm, ea t)aft bu meinen ©peer! mcinem 2trm roire er gu 
 fdjiuer." 18. £ie Sftettye ift an 31jnen, roarum lefen @ic nid)t? 
 19. £te Sfteilje gu reeen ift utdjt an 3$nen. 
 
 Exercise 89. SlufgaBe 89. 
 
 1. When were you in France % 2. Have those people evei 
 been at your house ? 3. Had they been in Germany before 
 they were in Russia % 4. He will be in Russia before you will 
 be in France. 5. The emperor of France was the "nephew 
 of his uncle." 6. How long have you been in this city? 7 
 They have been rich, but have become very poor. 8. What 
 has become of your friend 1 9. The weather is becoming very 
 cold. 10. You can become learned if you will be diligent. 
 11. The young sailor has become healthy again. 12. The weather 
 is becoming warm, and the days are becoming long. 13. The 
 scholars in this school have been very idle, but they are now 
 becoming more industrious. 14. I was obliged to wait so long 
 that I became very tired. 15. The son gets rid of his money 
 
172 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 faster thin his father earned it. 16. How much do I owe you 1 
 17. Whose turn is it to read? 18. It is your fault if you do 
 not know. 19. This man who is now so poor and wretched, 
 has been a very rich merchant. 
 
 LESSON XLVII. Cection XLVII. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS, OR VERBS OP THE OLD CONJUGATION. 
 
 1. Irregular verbs are such as do not form their imperfect 
 tense and past participle according to the rules in L. 31. 
 
 For complete alphabetical list of "irregular verbs" see § 78; also, 
 for further remarks on the same, § 77. 
 
 2. The infinitive of these, as of the regular verbs, ends in e tt. 
 The imperfect changes the root vowel ; and the past participle 
 frequently differs from the infinitive only by the augment ge : 
 
 Infinitive. Imperfect. Past Participle. 
 
 gekit/ to give; id) ga&, I gave; gegekn, given, 
 
 feljen, to see; id) feu), I saw; gefefyen, seen. 
 
 3. In some verbs the root vowel is found to be differert m 
 each of the three parts : 
 
 ftngen, to sing; id) fang, I sang; gefungen, sung, 
 fprtngert, to spring; id) fprang, I sprang; gefprungert, sprung. 
 
 4. In other vt rbs the root vowel of the imperfect tense and 
 the second participle is the same : 
 
 fltmmen, to climb; id) flomm, I climbed; geftontmen, climbed 
 
 5. Some verbs change the radical vowel, and also add the 
 terminations common to regular verbs : 
 
 Mttgen, to carry; id) £rad)te, I carried; geln-ad)t, carried. 
 benfen, to think; id) bad)te, I thought; gebad)t, thought. 
 
 6. The present tense forms the different persons like the 
 regular verbs, except in the second and third persons singula* 
 of about sixty verbs, where the root vowel is changed, or if 
 capable of it, assumes the Umlaut : (see List § 78. p. 346.) 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 J, 3 
 
 tdj geb?, I give; 
 
 bu gibjr or gicbfli thou givest; 
 
 er gtbt or giebr, he gives. 
 
 id) Icfe, read, 
 
 bit liefcjf, thou readest; 
 
 er Heft, he reads. 
 
 id) fatfc, I fall; 
 
 bu faffft, thou fallest; 
 
 er fdttt, he falls. 
 
 7. In the imperfect, the second and £/«>c? persons are regulaaly 
 firmed from the first : 
 
 id) fprcdjc, I speak; 
 
 bu fprid)fb thou speakest; 
 
 er fprid)t, he speaks. 
 
 id; gtng, I went; 
 
 bu gingfi, thou wentst; 
 
 er ging, he went; 
 
 id) gab, I gave ; 
 
 bu gabjr, thou gavest; 
 
 er gab, he gave; 
 
 9 e I) e n. 
 
 g eft en. 
 
 voir gingcn, we -went; 
 ir)r ginger, you -went; 
 fie gingcn, they went 
 
 ttnr gaben, we gave; 
 ir)r gaber, you gave; 
 fie gaben, they gave. 
 
 2Bet|pteIe. 
 
 £er fRofr frigt ba3 (Sifen. 
 
 £ie Sonne fd)eint unbeinejebe$no$pe 
 
 fdjnntir. 
 (Er tritt meine SRettgton' in ben Sraub, 
 
 unb firecft bie #anb and nadj meiner 
 
 itrone.— <3. 
 SDte <Seete cmpfangt' ©inbrucfe son 
 
 2Iu£en. 
 £r fdjcint feine ganje flraft erfdjopf en 
 
 ju rooften. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Rust eats (corrodes) iron. 
 
 The sun shines, and each bud is 
 
 swelling. 
 He tramples my religion in the 
 
 dust, and stretches out his hand 
 
 for (after) my crown. 
 The soul receives impressions from 
 
 without. 
 He seems desirous to exhaust his 
 
 entire strength. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SBacf en, to bake ; 
 S8efer)'len, to command ; 
 SBergen, to conceal ; 
 SBlafen, to blow ; 
 tempfan'gen, to receive ; 
 ©mpfer)'len, to recommend 
 $ar)ren, to go in a carriage 
 Sledjtcn, to twist, braid; 
 Sreffen, to eat, devour; 
 fatten, to hold; 
 £angcn, to hang; 
 Sfteffen, to measure; 
 Stefymen, to take; 
 
 (Saufcn, to drink (as a beast); 
 <5d)elten, to scold; 
 ©d)mcljen, to melt ; 
 ©tedjeir, to sting ; 
 ©teljlen, to steal ; 
 ©terben, to die; 
 £ragen, to bear, wear; 
 Sreffen, to hit; 
 $erber'ben, to perish, spoil; 
 2)ergef'fen/ to forget; 
 2Bad)fen, to grow; 
 SBerfen, to throw 
 
1 74 LESSON XL VII. 
 
 Exercise 90. 2lufgaoe 90, 
 
 1, ffier KicfttaS 53roU ? 2, ©er ©otfcat Mrgt ftcfy &or tent $einte, 
 3, (£r Haft r>a^ Sanborn, 4. ©er 23auer Bric^t fcen£anf unu trifcfct 
 ten SBeigen, 5* $3a3 empfdngt er? 6* ©as ®ute empftet}It fid; 
 fetbft* 7, ©er SKann fatyrt auf tent SGagen, 8. ^er (Sconce fftflt* 
 9. ©er $nabe fangt tie Sbget, 10, ©er ©olfcat ftd)t, 11. (Er 
 flid)t fid) einen £>ut, 12, ©er Dd)3 frijjt £eu unfc fduft Safer, 
 13, ©as $mt tjjt S3rot nnt trinft Met;, 14, (Er gifct mtr tag 
 ncue 23ud), 15, (Er grdBt fid) ein Sod), 16, (Er Ijdtt tao $fert, 
 IT, ©er £ut l)dngt an tern 9*ageL 18, (Er lauft unt lajjt tie an^ 
 tern anc^ (anfen, 19, @ie lieft tljr 2Sud), 20, @ie ntift (or mtffet) 
 ta$ £ucfy, 21, (Er nimmt mein 33ud), 22, SBarum fd)itt er ? 23, 
 ©er £unt fdjliift, ter Sinabt fd)lagt tag $fert, 24. ©as 23(ei 
 f^milst, 25, $3a$ ftel)ft tu ? ttaS fpric^t er ? 26, ©te 33iene ftid)t, 
 ter ©tefc ftiet)lt, ter ^ranle fttrfct, 27, (Er tragi fcfyone ^leiter; er 
 trifft immer bas 3iel, 28, SBarum ftcfyt er? 29, ©as 33ier ser* 
 tirBt, 30, fir sergijjt roas fie fpric^t, 31, ©er Sanm road)ft, 32, 
 @ie mi$ nid)t roas fie ftntL 33, (Sr ttnrft ten 25a(t, 34, 3d) tteip 
 foas er mir »erfprtd)t,. 
 
 Exercise 91. $ufgafce91, 
 
 1. I do not know who is throwing the balls. 2. Does he 
 speak German ? 3. He does not forget what he reads. 4. The 
 sun is melting the snow. 5. The thief steals the shoes that he 
 wears. 6. The bee stings and dies. 7. The soldier is beating 
 the dog. 8. The bird sleeps on the tree. 9. She scolds because 
 he takes her book. 10. The carpenter is measuring the room, 
 11. The boy runs and lets the dog run too. 12. Who is hold- 
 ing my horse ? 13. Where is the cloak hanging ? 14. The man 
 that is braiding hats gives us a book. 15. Who is digging this 
 hole ? 16. Why does the soldier fi< lit 1 17. What is this boy 
 eating 1 ? 18. What animal eats g ass? 19. What does the 
 horse drink ? 20. The tree is fallii g. 21. Who is catching the 
 birds'? 22. Does he receive any thing ? 23. Who thrashes 
 the wheat and breaks the hemp ? 24. Why dost thou conceal 
 thyself? 25. What does he command? 26. Who is riding 
 on your wagon f 27. My friend recommends me to you. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 175 
 
 Setfptele. Examples. 
 
 ©r }me3 feine SBctare unb rictl; unS fte He praised his goods and advised 
 
 ju faufen. us to buy them. 
 
 SDeine SBriiber frag ba<3 <Sd)tt5ert, too The sword devoured thy brothers 
 
 ba5 SSIut in ©tromen flop. where the blood flowed in 
 
 streams. 
 SDer ©trout \d}tooU, mil ber ©d)itee The stream swelled because ,1m 
 
 fdjmclj. snow melted. 
 
 Cafar fdjriel) nad) 9h>m : "id) tarn, Caesar wrote to Rome: * I ea:u.;, 
 
 fa§ unb fiectte." saw and conquered." 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 23ei§en, to bite; 
 83ctrii'a.cn, to deceive ; 
 Gvtrm'fut, to be drowned; 
 Grgrei'fcn, to seize; 
 $Iie|en, to flee ; 
 g-ttcpen, to flow; 
 ©ebie'teiir to command; 
 ©ene'fen, to recover; 
 ©tegen, to pour; 
 &eben, to raise; 
 t>ei§en, to bid; 
 £elfen, to help, assist; 
 $rted)en, to creep; 
 Cciben, to suffer; 
 
 Sfceitett, to ride on horseback; 
 <Sd)einen» to appear; 
 SMicucn, to shut, lock; 
 <S.f ictcn, to cry, shriek; 
 ©d)tt)cllctt, to swell ; 
 ©tnfen, to sink; 
 ©tcigen, to ascend; 
 ©tauten, to quarrel ; 
 %xtif>tn, to drive; 
 Sretctt; to tread, step 
 Skrlie'mt, to lose: 
 S5crfd)tXHn'bcn, to disappear; 
 SBafdjcu, to wash; 
 Bnnugen, to compel, force. 
 
 Exercise 92. SlttfgaBc 92. 
 
 1. £er ipunt &ijj ten Xiefc. % £er 53aum tract). 3, Sr em* 
 tfafyl mid) einem Ratine, fcer micl) fek freuntlic^ empfuig. 4, 3$ 
 Mieo ten ganjen Sag. 5, ©te crgriffen feine Jpiinte. 6. Sr ftel 
 in t>a§ fBaffer tint ertran!. 1. @tc ajjen tie Slcpfel, tie fie ftafjlen. 
 8. SBir ful)rcn turd) tie ©tatt. 9. ®te ftngen tie Scjcl, irclc&e 
 aits ten SRejlent fiogcn. 10. Xu ©oltaten fodjtcn nid)t tapfer, fon* 
 tern f(ol)en. 11. (Er gefrot un3 $u ge()en. 12. Sr gat mir ta3 
 ©clt nnt ging. 13. Sr genajj langfam. 14. 2Bir genoffen geftern 
 fet)r menig. 15. (Er getsann met)r aU id) tterlor. 16. (Er gofj ten 
 SSein in tao ®!a£. 17. @ie grul-en einen tiefen ©rafceu. 18. Sr 
 §06 feinen ©tod nnt l)te£ nad) mir. 19. (Er ^iejj fte fommen, after fte 
 famen ntdt. 20. @r tjalfwttS, oBgleid) er un3 nid)t fannte. 21. 
 Sir lafen ta» 53ud), fcas er una ga£. 22. £a3 ^int fro$, fcer 
 ftunt lief. 23. @ie lagen auf ifyren S3etten nnt litten. 24. (Bte 
 
]78 LESSOV XLVII. 
 
 ncrtjmen meinen SQagen nnb futjren in bie (Btabt. 25 » @r rief ben 
 armcu $iann. 26. (Er fag nnb f^rtcfc ten gaitsen £ag. 21. £a3 
 $int> ffcanb uub fcfyrie. 28. £er Settee f$mol3,ber (Strom fd)Wotf. 
 
 29. @ie tranfen nnb fangen; einer fdjwamm nnb ber anbere fan!. 
 
 30. Sie fdyhtgen U)tt, roafyrenb er fcfyttef. 31. £r rief mid) nnb fd)alr, 
 toetf id) anf feinem ^ferbe vitt. 32. @ie fd}ien traurtg. 33. ©r ^tng 
 $lwm$ unt fd)log He £()ure. 34. Srftteg anf ben 23erg. 35. @ie 
 ftanben bid fie jfrtr&cn. 36, Srfrrittmit il)nennnb trtefc fte auss bem 
 Sclte. 37. @ie tmten in bad £aud nnb serfdwanben. 38. (Er 
 fcergaj? wad er verfprad). 39. (Er traf bad 3^- 40. Sd ivnd)S 
 fctmea. 41. ©r nmfcfy ben £ifd). 42. (Sr mnpte, bajj id) ben ©peer 
 toarf. 43. (Er gog fein @d)mert nnb gttang fte ^n ge^en. 
 
 Exercise 93. 2InfgaBe 93. 
 
 1. The trees broke, and the boys fell. 2. The dogs bit tho 
 boys that stole the apples. 3. The man to whom you recom- 
 mended me cheated me. 4. We did not remain long, for they 
 did not receive us kindly. 5. The boy seized my hand. 6. We 
 called him. 7. Did you ride on the wagon 1 8. The soldiers 
 ate bread and drank wine, and their horses ate hay and drank 
 water. 9. Our soldiers fought gallantly, and those of our enemy 
 fled. 10. The birds flew out of the cage, but the boys caught 
 them again. 11. We did not remain long. 12. They com- 
 manded us to go to the city, but we did not go, for they gave 
 us no money. 13. Did your friends recover'? 14. We won 
 less than our friends lost. 15. They poured the wine into the 
 glasses. 16. They saw the horse, and raised their hands. 17- 
 Why were they digging that ditch 1 ? 18. He came to us while 
 we were reading the books which you gave us. 19. He struck 
 at them because they drank so much and sang so loud. 20. 
 We crept before we walked. 21 The boys shrieked, and the 
 dogs ran. 22. We took the books that lay on the table. 23. 
 Did you call him a thief? 24. We knew that they lied. 25. 
 We sat around the table and wrote, and they stood around the 
 stove. 26. He rode the horse and drove the oxen. 27. They 
 called them friends. 28. Why did they seem so sad? 29. He 
 scolded me because I slept so long. 30. They threw their spears' 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 177 
 
 and drew their swords. 31. Did you forget what he promised 
 you ? 32. Did they hit the mark with the arrow ? 33. Who 
 washed the gloves? 34. Did the trees grow rapidly? 35. 
 Did they lock the door? 36. Why did they quarrel with us? 
 
 23ctfpiele. Examples. 
 
 3»| fcft&e me ein fotd&eS ©cfur)l' cm* I have never experienced such a 
 
 pfun'frcn. feeling. 
 
 £- $atte cmcnilratn fiir fie gen?un'bcn. He had wound a -wreath for them. 
 £atre fetlt ^reurtb nid)r3 ^on ber <£acr)e Had his friend known nothing of 
 
 genmju'? the affair? 
 
 Cftan $at ben 35er6re*'er ergrif'fen. The criminal has been seized 
 SSer I)vU baS Sicb gefun'gen? Who has sung the song? 
 
 £aft bu ami) tootyl fcebad)t, tt>a3 bu mir But have you well considered what 
 
 Kttljji ? — 3. you advise me ? 
 
 ©arm htKm Sic cm 3 r)r en 23 ruber ge=* When have you written to your 
 
 fiinte'frcn? brother? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SftaMert, to grind ; 
 3Rciben» to avoid; 
 $Pfeifen, to whistle ; 
 SPreifetti to praise ; 
 I, to shear; 
 Sduepen, to shoot; 
 <3d?inben, to flay ; 
 <Sd)kifen, to sharpen, grind; 
 
 ©<§j»oren» to swear; 
 ©palten, to split: 
 Sptmicn, to spin; 
 £r)im, to do; 
 2>erbrte'Ben, to offend; 
 £>er^et'r)en, to pardon; 
 SBefeeit, to weave; 
 SSinbert, to wind. 
 
 Exercise 94. 9htfgafre 94. 
 
 1. Ttv £unt bat ten tub ge&iffett. 2. Sr ijat un<3 Ktrogen. 3. 
 ©at ev 3^nen etroa3 gegefcett ? 4. Sr Kittc an uns gebadjt. 5. 
 
 ©aft tu ben SBcijcn gebrofcKn? G. (Er I)at un3 freimtltd) empfan* 
 gen, after ntemanS Kit nn« iKn empfofykn. 7. SBaS $at er gefun- 
 Den? 8. Man bat ben XicB ergrtffen. 9. dr $at ben 2lpfel ge* 
 geijen; Kit er tm 2>ogeI gefangen ? 10. 3$ |aBe ftc gefunben; fte 
 KiKn gefecKen. 11. £er £nnt> r>at tag gfetfd) gefreffen. 12. (Er 
 Kit mir nidjtS gegeKn. 13. S3ae Kt er gefcKn? 14. SMrljaf 
 ben ntcrto genoffen. 15. 28a3 fyat er gencntmen ? 16. SBer $at 
 ben Sent in ba$ ©la? gegoffen? 17. 22er Jjat btefesSadj gegraKn? 
 18. Sr Kit ba3 $ferb geijattcn. 19. ©a? $at fie gefnngen? 20. 
 (Er §at itn^ gefannt. 21. @ie l)aKn mir ein §3udj gegefcen nnb tefc 
 $abt e*3 «]ckfen. 22. Tie $ebem tjakn auf bent Sttfdje gekgeiu 
 
 8* 
 
178 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 23. Sr Ijat ntd)t gelogen. 24. Ter duller f)at bao ©etreiDe gemefc 
 fen nnb gemafyicn. 25. (Sr tyat nng £iefte genannt, n>eit nrir feine 
 23iid)er genommen |akn. 26. SBarnm §at er gcpfiffen? 27. ©ic 
 ^akn ifyre $ferbe gepriefen* 28* (£r t)at fie gerufen. 29. SSarum 
 t)aft fot ung ge[d)olten ? 30. (Sr ^atte fcas (Sd)af gefdjoren. 31, 
 $r ^at ten SBolf gefd)offen nnb gefdumben. 32. @ie fatten *n 
 lange gefd)tafen. 33. £aft bn bie 9fleffer gefd)tiffen ? 34. 2Bir 
 §a£en bie £t)iiren gefcfyloffen. 35. £at er bag 33rob gefd)nitten? 
 36. 3d) f)atte gefcfyriefcen, nnb fie fatten gefd)rieen. 37. ©ie t)at eg 
 gefd)tt>oren. 38. 2Gir tyaBen tfyn gefetjen. 39. £at er bag £ieb fdjon 
 gefnngen ? 40. (5r t)at eine ©tnnbe gefeffen. 41. Sr l)at bag ipolj 
 gefpaiten. 42. ipa&en fte bie SSolIe gefponnen ? 43. 2Ba3 fie ge^ 
 fproc^en t)at, l)at tfyn geftocfyen. 44. 3>r 9Jkmt, ber ba geftanfcen 
 Ijatte, t)at mein $ferb geftofylen. 45. @ic ^afcen lange genng ge^ 
 ftritten, \va$ fyat er get^an? 46. Sr Ijat bag 3^ getroffen. 47. 
 ©aft bn nie 2Bein getrnnfen ? 48. 3d) $<tfce oergeffen. 49. 2$ag 
 Ijat er ijerloren? 50. &g t)at it)n serbroffen. 51. £at er nng yer^ 
 $ief)en? 52. Sr §at bag Snc^ gemoBen nnb gen>afd)en; §at er einen 
 Sail gettorfen ? 53. !Rie fyafce id) fie gemieben. 54. $&a$ tjat 
 er gennmben? 
 
 Exercise 95. 2tnfgal>e 95. 
 
 1. He has beaten the dog that has bitten him. 2. I have of- 
 ten thought of him. 3. Have you recommended this book to 
 us ? 4. Have you thrashed the wheat ? 5. They have always 
 received us kindly. 6. Who has ground your knife ? 7. The 
 boys have eaten the bread and drank the beer. 8. The dogs 
 have eaten the meat and drank the water. 9. They have caught 
 their horses. 10. What have you found? 11. Why have the 
 soldiers fought ? 12. I have shot a large bird. 13. Have you 
 seen the books that I have read? 14. Into which glass have 
 you poured the wine 1 ? 15. Why have they dug this hole? 
 16. Who has held my horse? 17. Who has seen us? 18. Have 
 my books lain on your table? 19. Has any body lied? 20. 
 Who has ground the wheat? 21. Have you measured the 
 cloth? 22. Why has he avoided his friends ? 23. Why have 
 they called him a thi^f? 24. Who has taken my pen ? 25, 
 
USE OF THE AUXILIARIES QctitXl AND (Sent* 179 
 
 He has called me, but he has not scolded me. 26. Who has 
 sharpened my knife? 27. Have you locked the doors? 28. 
 Who has cut the bread? 29. Had you written him a letter? 
 30. Have you ever sung this song ? 31. Have you sat longer 
 than they have stood ? 32. I have spun the wool and he has 
 split the wood. 33. The bees have stung the horse. 34. Has 
 any body stolen any thing ? 35. He had not spoken at all. 
 36. Why have they quarreled ? 37. Who has worn the hat ? 
 38 What have you lost ? 39. Who has thrown the apples? 
 40. Why have they drawn their swords ? 41. Have you washed 
 the cloth that he has woven ? 42. It vexes him that he has lost 
 his money. 43. Have you forgotten what you have promised 
 me? 44. Why have you slept so long? 45. Has any one 
 compelled you to go 1 46. Who has whistled ? 47. What 
 have they praised ? 48. Have you ever known such a man 1 
 49. He has written, and they have spoken. 
 
 LESSON XLVIII. Ccction XLVIII. 
 
 USE OF THE AUXILIARIES Jp <t B e tt AND <S t \ It. 
 
 1. £ ao e n is used as the auxiliary of all transitive, reflexive * 
 and impersonal & verbs ; as also of the verbs of mode c and of 
 all objective verbs that govern the genitive d and dative «, ex- 
 cept B e g e g n e it, f o 1 g e n and to e t d) e n (see 2. ) . 
 
 2. Intransitive verbs indicating direction from or toward a 
 place or an object, or a change from one condition to another, 
 as also B I e i B e n, to remain ; Begegnen, to meet ; f o 1 g e u, 
 to follow, and to t id) e tt, to yield, retreat, are conjugated with 
 the auxiliary f etn which is here rendered by have (§ 71. 5) : 
 
 Sinb ftc fdjott gegan'gen ? Have tliey already gone ? 
 
 2)cr arme jfrtafce tji gefaflen. The poor boy lias fallen. 
 
 3. The following verbs, when not expressing direction from 
 or toxcard a given place, require the auxiliary ty a 6 e n ; namely, 
 
 a. L. XXIX. 9; b. L. LVII; c. L. XLY; d. L. LXEI; e. L. LXTV 
 
180 
 
 LESSON XLVm. 
 
 e i I e n, to hasten ; f It e § e n, to flow ; j a g e n, to chase, hunt ; 
 llettem, to climb ; ! r i e d> e it, to creep, crawl ; I a n fc e n, to 
 land ; I a u f e n, to run ; q u e U c n, to spring ; r e i j c n, to travel ; 
 r e i t c n, to ride ; rcnnen, to run ; f 6> i f f e n, to navigate , 
 f d} n? i m m e n, to swim ; f e g e I rt, to sail ; f in t e n, to sink ; 
 fp ring en, to leap, spring; jiojjen, to join; treifcen, to 
 drive ; ir a n £ e r n, to wandei, travel : 
 
 SSaram' tuji bu fb geeilt' ? 
 £aff bu ntd)t fyeute gerit'ten ? 
 Sie §a&cn nid;t stcl gereift'. 
 
 "Wliy hare you hastened so f 
 Have you not ridden to-day ? 
 They have not traveled much. 
 
 Some neuter verbs, as I t e g e n, to lie ; fit g c rt, to sit ; ft c? 
 h e n / tc stand, are sometimes used with the auxiliary f e i n : 
 #i>§er irar feme 9fta$t nie geftan'ben. His power never had stood higher 
 
 Setfpiele. 
 
 Sfr er benn nod) nidjt gefom'men? 
 2)er S>cgel ift ireggcflogen. 
 Sie ftnb in bag Sclb gejo'gcn. 
 0.x tp nad) Slmc'rifa gcretft'. 
 (£r wirb [d)cn gegan'gen [cin. 
 (£r mar nadj ber (Stabt gcei'It. 
 SSarum' ftnb fie auf ba§ Sanb gerit * 
 ten? 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Has (is) he then not yet come ? 
 The bird has (is) flown away. 
 They have marched into the field. 
 He has (is) gone to America, 
 He will already have (be) gone. 
 He had hastened to the city. 
 Why have they ridden into the 
 countrv. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 HBege'gnen, to meet; 
 
 (Stlen, to hasten ; 
 
 Sntrin'ncn, to escnpe, p. 316; 
 
 (Entfdla'fen, to fall asleep; 
 <Dcr %tU, -enc, pi. -en, the rock; 
 2>cr iVhiF, -e$# pL B'luffcthe river: 
 
 ©elin'gen, to succeed, p. 348 ; 
 
 ©ejd)c'f)en, to happen, p. 358; 
 
 .ftlettern, to climb ; 
 
 5?cipiin'gcn, to fail, p. 352; 
 £)ci 3>Ian, -eS, pi. 9-Hane, the plan; 
 
 Exercise 96. 2lufgafce 96. 
 
 1. 3ft ? r entfcMafen ? 2. Sfteitt, cr ift mtS cntronncn. 3. fBf« 
 lange ift er geMte&en? 4. Sic |int) itadj ter etatt gefaBrcn. 5. 
 3ft tcr SJlann gefallen ? 6. Xcr Scgel ift geflogen. 7. 3ft t«3 
 
 Kctfen, to ripen: 
 
 2.1 leicfcn, to glide, s*-eal away 
 Das od>IoF,-ec,pL 3 cM offer, castle 
 Die ©djonljett, -, pi. -en, beauty; 
 Die Secte, -, pi. -n, the soul; 
 Der Stein, -ce, pi. -c, the stone; 
 Der Strom, -ee, pi. £trome, stream 
 Dei Zc:\, -ce, pi. £one, the tone; 
 Die iiigenb, -, pi. -en, the virtue; 
 Da6 llnferne&'nicn, -g, undertaking 
 
 Skrfdjaflen, to die away, p. 356 
 
USE OF THE AUXILIARIES £)afrett AND ©eitt. 181 
 
 Staffer itler U* gelD geflojfen? 8. £er $ian ift gehmgen. 9. £er 
 Stmh ift gcnefen. 10. $3a3 ift gc|del)cn? II* S3 ift aw3 ber 
 fee gefrodiett. 12. £er £unt> ift nad) rem SSSaXb< gelaufen. 13* 
 £a3 Unterne()mcn ift mijjhmgctt. 14- £a3 Safer ift aj|6 bem 
 getfen gefloffen. 15. £r ift nad) ber ©rafct gcritten. 16. (Er mar 
 in tas £aus gefd)lid)en. 17. &r mar iiber Den ©rafcen gefprnngen. 
 18. ©ie maren ans tern ©dtfoffe getretetu 19. £)er lefcte Son mar 
 serfdollen. 20. 3>r 33aum ift fel)r fdmctt gemad)fcn. 21. £a3 
 £au$ mirfc gefatfen fein. 22. Sie meiten gefommen fein. 23. Sr 
 mar attf Jem 9flaft gefTettert. 24. Xer SinaU ift iifcer ben gfatjjj gc* 
 fdjmommen. 25, Sitter mar nn3 gefolgt, unfc ber 2lttt>ere mar nn$ 
 feegegnet. 26. 3>r ©d)nee ift gefdjmoljen uttfc tie ©triune jmfc ge? 
 fc^mollen. 27. £a$ Dfrft ift fennel! gercift. 28. £ie Sitgertb ift 
 Me ©djotttyett fter (Bcele. 29. (5r mar nad) fcer ©tatt geeilt. 
 
 Exercise 97. SlufgaBe 97. 
 
 1. Have you remained long enough ? 2. Who has gone to 
 the city 1 3. Do you know what has happened 1 4. The boy 
 has sprung across the ditch. 5. Our plan has not succeeded. 
 6. The children had hastened into the houses. 7. Has the snow 
 melted 1 8. The hunters had climbed upon the trees. 9. Our 
 soldiers had fled, and the enemy had come into our country. 
 10. He has ridden (on horseback) to the forest, and she has 
 ridden (in a carriage) to the city. 11. The patient has recov- 
 ered. 12. Has he fallen asleep ? 13. How have they escaped 
 us ? 14. Our friend has fallen out of the wagon. 15. The 
 young birds have flown out of the nest. 16. The worms have 
 crawled out of the earth. 17. The horse has run out of the 
 stable. 18. The apples had ripened. 19. The water will have 
 flowed into the house. 20. Why have you followed us? 21. 
 Have you met your friends ? 22. He may already have gone 
 23. W here have they remained so long ? 24- The child haa 
 crept out of the house. 
 
182 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 LESSON XLIX. flection XLIX 
 
 INFINITIVE WITHOUT 3 U. 
 
 1. When the infinitive is preceded by an auxiliary, or by 
 one of the following verbs, the particle 3 u is omitted : 
 
 6 lei ft en, to remain; tye t § e it/ to command; I ernen, to learn; 
 
 fa l)r en, to ride; $ el fen, to help; m a d) e n, to make ; 
 
 fitty r en, to conduct; fy.o r e n, to hear ; n en n en, to call, name; 
 
 fttf) I en, to feel; 1) a b en, to have; fetyen, to see; 
 
 finben, to find; Ugen, to lay; ttjun, to do; 
 
 gefycn, togo; lefyren, to teach; retten, to ride. 
 
 The infinitive, when dependent on the above verbs, is frequently 
 best rendered by our present participle : 
 
 S3 1 i e b er ft £ e n, ft e^e tt ober I i e «• Did he remain sitting, standing, or 
 
 gen? lying? 
 
 jpeip mid) ntdjt re ben, Ijetjjj mid) Do not bid me speak, bid me be 
 
 fdjroetgen. silent. 
 
 £)ct6 n e nn e id) f d) I a f e n. That I call sleeping. 
 
 3d) fit § t e ben $ut<? f d) I a 9 e n. I/<?«?Z the pulse (beat) beating. 
 
 3d) f) a I f tfym a r fc e 1 1 e n. I Mj»<?c? him work. 
 
 3d) ty ft r e tijn l m m e n. I &ear him coming. 
 
 (Sr I e $ r t e mid) f i n g e n. He taught me to %. 
 
 3d) f a f) fte I a u f e n. I saw them running. 
 
 3d) I e r n e j e t d) n e n. I am learning to draw. 
 
 (£r f a n b mid) f d) I a f e it. He found me sleeping. 
 
 <Ste m a d) t mid) I a rf) e n. She ?'s making me Zaw#A. 
 
 Obs. — £et§en, when used intransitively, often answers to the passive 
 of to name, call, or to the noun name, with the verb to be : 
 (£r fj e t £ t dart. He is named (or his name is) Charles. 
 
 ffi3ie fj e t g t bag im 2)eutfd)en? What is that called in German ? 
 
 £>et§t bad arktten? Do you call that (is th&t called) 
 
 working? 
 
 © pag ire n with gatyren, git^ren, SfteitenAND ©et»en= 
 
 2. @ p a 3 1 r e n is used chiefly with fasten, fitfitm, reiten and 
 }djen, and implies exercise for the purpose of recreation or 
 pleasure ± 
 
 3d) ge|je fpa^tren, @ie fatjren I go walking, you Wcfe (in a carriage), 
 
 f p a } 1 r e n, unb er r e 1 1 e t fpajtren. and he rides on horseback. 
 3d) ge$e atfe £age fpajtren. I go walking every day. 
 
INFINITIVE WITHOUT 3*t. 183 
 
 2Bir marten etnen langenSpa^ir'gang. We took (made) a long walk. 
 <£r r e i t e t oft, afcer nie f p a j i r e n. He ricfes often, but never for pleas- 
 ure. 
 
 3. The infinitive (usually without gu) often stands as the 
 subject or object of a verb : 
 
 (£3 i|t Beffer llnredjt Ieib en G.U ttn* It is better to suffer wrong than to 
 
 redjt tfjun. do wrong, 
 
 ©einen Seutben tter&e i'6, en ift ebel. To forgive one's (his) enemies ia 
 
 noble. 
 
 i. The infinitive (commonly preceded by the article or a 
 pronoun) is used as a neuter noun, and answers to the partici- 
 pial noun in English : 
 
 2)a$£ugett fdjabet bcm Siigner am (The) lying injures the liar the 
 
 mcijlen. most. 
 
 ©a3 Sc fen oei ctnem fdjttadjen £id)te Reading by a feeble light is inju- 
 
 iji ben Qlugeii fd)dblid). rious to the eyes. 
 
 5. The infinitive with j u follows an ft at t, otjtte and urn, 
 U m, denoting mere purpose or design, may be rendered in or- 
 der, or often wholly omitted in translation : 
 
 (?r fptett a n jl a 1 1 j it tefen. He plays instead of reading. 
 
 (£r t|t franf o fyne e3 ju nuffen. He is sick without knowing it. 
 
 Sr liejt urn J it lernen He reads (in order) to learn. 
 
 (£r war $u fdjttadj urn bie STroeit jn He was too weak to finish the 
 jjotlen'ben. work. 
 
 6. The infinitive active is often used in a passive sense : 
 
 DiefeS §au3 t|t jit »ermtet$cn unb je* This house is to let, and that one 
 
 neS ju tterfan'fen* is to be sold (to sell). 
 
 (Er Iajjt bad S3rob tyolen* He has the bread brought. 
 
 (£r Ictjst tt)n ba$ Srob Ijolcn. He has him go for the bread. 
 
 *l. SStjfett often has the signification of to know how, to J -e 
 able, followed by an infinitive : 
 <£r tteijj ficr) &u §elfen. He knows how to help himself. 
 
 33eifpiele* Examples. 
 
 £)u ©djttert an meiner Cinfen, ttad Thou sword upon my left, what 
 
 foil betn fyettred SBlinfen? — ih\ means thy cheerful gleaming ? 
 
 €>te fc,atte eine SBanbuIjr int £aufe jic= She had a clock standing in ths 
 
 $en. house 
 
184 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 £$ tft fetnc Beit ju fcevlte'ren. There is no time to lose. 
 
 (£r ift nad) Deutfdjtanb gcrctj!'; um bie He has gone to Germany (in order) 
 
 ©prad)e in lernen. to learn the language. 
 
 3d) pre bid) an, o$ne bid) ju miter* I listen to you, without interrupt- 
 
 fcredj'en. ing you. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 2(1 km, silly; 
 
 Slnffatt, instead of; 
 
 SBe^atten, to keep, retain, p. 350; 
 ©as 23ilb, -c3, pi. Stlber, the pic- 
 ture, image; 
 
 Segcn, to sweep ; 
 £aS ©efangnip, -es, pi. -e, prison; 
 
 ©efyord/en, to obey; 
 
 ®leid), immediately ; 
 
 £oIen, to fetch, see p. 485. 
 
 Da3 £olj, -e3, pi. £oljer, the wood' 
 
 £efjrett, to teach; 
 Die Suft, -, pi. £wjre, inclination; 
 Da3 9ftdrd)en, -8, pi. -, tale, story; 
 
 ©pa^i'ren, see 2; 
 
 ©tubi'ren, to study; 
 
 Unfd)ulbig, innocent; 
 Die ttxfafyt, -, pi. -n, the cause; 
 
 $ermie'U)en, to let. 
 
 Exercise 98. ^ufgaBe 98* 
 
 1. £>ei£en @te it)n gel)en ober BleiBen? 2.(5tner (eljrt mid) fran* 
 3i}fifd) fpreden, unb ber anbere Icrnt e3 lefen. 3. Die 9tadjtigafl 
 nrirb ftd) Balb l)oren taffen. 4. £iefe 5Dtatrofen merben morgen ober 
 iiBermorgen ftfdjen gel)ett. 5. Tier alte SSaucr I)at ttiet guten alten 
 SBein im teller (iegen. 6. 23efet)len ift Ieid)t, get)ord)en fdjiuer. T. 
 3d) UeBe bas Sefcn, after id) l)a(fe bas @d)reiBen. 8. Sir fmb feines 
 nnfybflid)en SetragenS fyer^id) mu> _♦ 9. ©ie ift ganj unfd)ulDig, 
 mlfyt Urfad)e fyat fie Denn trauttg gu fein ? 10. %&} $abt tteber 
 3ett nod) Sufi fein ©ingen ju f)5ren. 11 ♦ 3^er gute @d)uter j»etjjj 
 warm bie Sfleit;c an ifym ift m lefen* 12. Sin fo alBerne^ Sftardjen 
 ift nid)t gu glauBen. 13. @ie laffen i|ren Sebtenten tt)r 3iro m ^ 
 fegen. 14. £)er IHicbter Uefj ben $erBred)er in$ @efangni§ tterfen. 
 15. 2eBe um ju teruen, unb lerne um m leBen. 16. fir rceip gu 
 leBen un'D fid) ba3 SeBen angene^m gu ntad)en. IT. Die ^inber finb 
 fpagiren gefal)ren, nnb bie ©djufer fmb fpajiren geritten. 18. fir i(l 
 ftfd)en gegangen, anftatt m ftnbiren. 19. £>olen @ie ben £t)ce ? 
 20. 3ltin, id) laffc ttjn tyoleru 21. fir Ktjjt mid) bas 23itb nod) Be^ 
 Balten. 
 
 Exercise 99. StufgaBe 99. 
 
 1. Who taught you to speak German? 2. I learned to speak 
 it in Germany. 3. This stupid boy remained sitting the whole 
 
PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 185 
 
 evening. 4. The man had a small table standing beside his 
 bed. 5. We shall not have time to see our friends this even- 
 ing. 6. My mother taught me to sing and my brother teaches 
 me to play. 7. When shall you go a fishing, to-morrow, or 
 day after to-morrow ? 8. Why have our friends been to the 
 city without visiting us 1 9. They went to their cousins instead 
 of coming to us. 10. I am tired of his singing. 11. They have 
 books enough but not time to read them. 12. These houses 
 are to be let. 13. This man has something to say to your 
 friend. 14. The captain is getting a new coat made. 15. The 
 general caused the innocent soldier to be thrown into prison. 
 16. This man's conduct is not to be praised. It. This silly story 
 is not to be believed. 18. Is it not your turn to read? 19. We 
 must go immediately, there is no time to lose. 20. Why does 
 he go for the wood ? 
 
 LESSON L. Section L. 
 
 PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1. Present participles attributively used have the same gov- 
 ernment as the verbs from which they are derived, and, when 
 the object is expressed, precede it ; when predicative, however, 
 their character is simply that of an adjective : 
 
 Sftein ©olb fudjenber $reunb. My gold-seeking friend. 
 
 T)rr il)n IoBenbe 2ef)rer. The teacher who praises him. 
 
 Die SfuSfidjt tr»ar rei^enb. The prospect was charming. 
 
 £)U $tjje Wax briicfenb. The heat was oppressive. 
 
 2 The perfect participle sometimes answers to our present 
 participle ; or, like many other words, it may often be varied 
 or omitted in translation, according to the different idioms .. 
 the two languages : 
 
 £eulenb fommt ber "Sturm geflo'gen. — Howling comes the storm flying 
 
 S. (flown). 
 
 Sr tarn bie Strage fjergejo'ijen. He came (moving) along the street 
 
 jD«§ ©clb tjl serlo'rcn gegon'gen. The money is (gone) lost. 
 
186 LESSON L. 
 
 3. The past participle may be used as the imperative : 
 
 Sflicfyt fo lavt gefprcdj'en. Do not speak so loud. 
 
 Sleipig gearkttet. Labor diligently. 
 
 4. There is a third or future participle formed only from 
 transitive verbs by adding I) to the infinitive preceded by 3 it; 
 it always has a passive signification, and implies necessity or 
 obligation : 
 
 X)te jit fiird)tcnbe ©efa$r\ The to-be-feared danger 
 
 <Da$ ju fcauenbe &au$* The house (which is) to be fcmlt 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 5. When the second person of the imperative is used, the 
 subject is generally omitted ; when, however, the third person 
 is used, the subject is expressed : 
 
 $ctrl, fcrhtge mir betn 93it$. Charles, bring me your book. 
 
 Winter, ge$t in baS £au6. Children, go into the house. 
 
 Staxl, Mttgen @te mtr 3fyr Sitdj. Charles, bring me your book. 
 
 ©cfytcEe e r bad $Pferb morgen. Send the horse to-morrow. 
 
 ©0 fet e §>, fctgte er. So be it (so let it be), said he. 
 
 Obs.— The present indicative of the auxiliary foil en is often best 
 omitted in translation, and the main verb rendered by our imperative 
 (see imperative L. 38.) : 
 
 ©it foil ft e£ t $ it it. Do it yourself (you shall do it). 
 
 2)er Solemn fott f m m e tu Ze2 John come (Aowe John come). 
 
 6. !D ab ur dj, t>a§ before a finite verb often answers to by 
 before a present participle : 
 
 Sftcttt fdjabet eitdj baburd), ba$ man You are injured fo/being praised to- 
 cud) jtt fefyr lofct. much. 
 
 Literally y you are thereby injured, that you are too much praiseu 
 
 S3 e i f p i e I e* Examples. 
 
 £at er nod) ntdjt tie entfdjte'bene Sfttt* Has he not yet received the final 
 .ttort erfyal'ten? (determinate) answer? 
 
 ©e|?e bid) jum toarmenben Setter. Seat thyself at the warming fire. 
 
 $etn £)ortt tterletje bte eilenben %v$t, May no thorn wound thy (the) hast- 
 unb feine fcbteid)enbe <Sd)lattgf bcine ening feet, and no secret serpent 
 Serfe. thy heel. 
 
PARTICIPLES AND IMPERATIVE. 
 
 181 
 
 JRofen auj ben Sea, gefrreut unb be$ Let roses on the path be strown, 
 
 £arm3 fcergeffen. — £>9. and sorrow be forgot. 
 
 T>a$ au^ugebenbe ®elb ift nod) nidjt The money to be spent has not yet 
 
 erfyal'ten. been received. 
 
 Gr fcfyabet ficfj babu r dj, ka$ er ju tttet He injures himself in sleer'^ng too 
 
 fd)(dft. much. 
 
 \OCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Dcr SMredjt,-3, (the) Albert; 
 SDie Slnflatt, -, pi. -en, preparation: 
 
 SSefyan'beln, to treat ; 
 
 S3 e |lra' fen, to punish; 
 
 SBlofen, to bleat; 
 
 S3rcnnen, to burn, p. 346. 
 
 S3rul(en, to low; 
 
 ©a'ourct), by this, thereby; 
 
 ©rmecfen, to awaken; 
 £>a3 (Suro'pa, -3, (the) Europe; 
 2)ie £a|t, -, the haste ; 
 £>er £>uf, -e3, pi. -e, the hoof; 
 
 jteudjen, to gasp ; 
 
 2)te JfrtoSpe, -, pi. -*t, the bud; 
 
 j?iii)n, bold; 
 £)er Canbmann, -e3, pi. -leute, the 
 
 peasant, husbandman ; 
 ©er Saut, -£$, pi. -e, sound, voice; 
 
 9?temal3, never; 
 
 Otegte'rcn, to govern ; 
 
 ©djaumen, to foam ; 
 £>er ©d)lag, -e$, pi. <3d)lage, blow; 
 
 (Sdnvanfcn, to stagger, reel; 
 2)a3 33ief), -e3, pi. -c, the cattle; 
 2)ie SBette, -, pi. -n, the wave; 
 
 3ertre'ten, to tread down, p. 356. 
 
 Exergise 100. 
 
 SlufgaBe 100, 
 
 1. £cr Braufenbe SBinfc treiBt bas fdjmanlcnbe @d)t[f turd) bie 
 fdjaumenfcert SCcdcn. 2. "£ort !ommt ein 9ft aim in toller £aft gc^ 
 laufen." 3. £er alte 9ftann fc^ricb mit gttternber £anb. 4. Sr 
 reitct stftycowfo, unb halt in tent 2lrm ba3 feufgen^e $inb. 5, @o 
 fei e3, |>rid)t 2U6rcd)t mit tonnernbem 2aut. 6. £iefcr 9ft ann ift 
 ein m Beftrafenber 23erBred}cr. 7. £er ladjelnfce $rul)lmg ewedt 
 tie fd)Uifenren 33mmen. 8. £ie Brennenbe (Sonne f^mei^t ben 
 glanjenben ©djnee. 9, %i)v 23ruber ift ein gu Benetbenber Sftcnfd). 
 10. I^er fiityne Saucer nurft fid) in tie Braujenbe gmt$. 11. fringe 
 mir meinen Mantel unb nteine £antfd)uB;e. 12.<Sd)iden ©ie3^"cn 
 SBebientcn m mtr. 13. (Sin fdjtafenber £>unb fangt feinen $a\m. 
 14. Unb feud)enb lag id), nue ein (SterBenber, gertretert unter U)rcr 
 £ufe <Sd)lag. 15. Xu ubernimmft tie fpanijckn SRegimenter, mad)fi 
 tmmer Stnjiatt unb Bift niemals fertig, unb tret&en fte bid) gegen and) 
 m gicljen, fo fagft tu ja, unb BleiBft gefeffeit fteljn (L. 38. d.). 
 
 Exercise 101. 
 
 SiufgaBe 101. 
 
 1. The falling snow covers the fallen tree. 2. The horse 
 
 comes running, the bird comes flying. 
 
 3. Give the ti enabling 
 
188 LESSON LI. 
 
 old man a coat. 4. My friend is a very learned man, 5. I 
 hear the singing birds and the bleating sheep. 6. The smiling 
 spring brings us beautiful flowers. 1. So be it, said the king 
 smiling. 8. He has the weeping child in his arm. 9. The 
 burning sun drives the lowing cattle into the forest. 10. The 
 foaming wave flies over the trembling ship. 11. The snow 
 melts before the burning sun. 12. A standing tree is more 
 beautiful than a fallen one. 13. The hoping husbandman sees 
 with joy the swelling buds. 14. Do not sing so loud. 15. 
 Who is the most learned man in Europe ? 16. These travelers 
 call themselves traveling artists. It. He governs them bv 
 treating them kindly. 
 
 -» .« ,+. ,. ». 
 
 LESSON LI. Section LI. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS SEPARABLE. 
 
 1. Any of the following particles may be compounded with 
 a verb ; and as they may stand apart from it, they are called 
 separable particles or prefixes (§ 89) ; namely, ah, from, off, 
 down; a n, to, at, in, on, toward ; a U f, on, up ; clu$, out, out 
 of, from ; B e i, by, near, with ; fc> a or bar, there, at ; e i it, in, 
 into; e m p o r', up, upward, on high ; fort, onward, away, for 
 ward ; g e g e n, toward, against ; h e i m, home, at home ; t) e r, 
 hither, here ; $ i n, thither, there, away ; i n, in, within ; m i t, 
 with; nctd), after; tttefc er, down, downward, under; oB, on, 
 over, on account of ; ttor, before, from ; tt»eg, away, off; 3 it, 
 to, toward; and gut ltd, back, backward (§ 89 — 91). 
 
 2. In compound tenses, formed from the infinitive and an 
 auxiliary, and in subordinate sentences, the particle is placed 
 before the verb : 
 
 (£r tturb Mb anfommen. He will soon arrive. 
 
 $Btr miiffen au^ge^en (§ 93). We must go out. 
 
 Obs. — In like manner are used with verbs several nouns (sometimes 
 written with a capital and sometimes with a small initial) and adjec- 
 tives; as, ba3 Concert rcirb <Statt ftnbert (or ftattfmbert), the concert will 
 take place; er roirb U)m Xxq§ Meten (or troJjMeten), he will bid him de- 
 fiance ; er tturb if tt tobtfdjfejjMt/ he will kill him. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS SEPARABLE. 189 
 
 3. 3 U °f tne infinitive, when used, and the augment q e of 
 the past participle, are placed between the particle and the 
 verb : 
 
 S3 x\t 3ett auSutgcljcn {not ju au£ger)en). It is time to go out. 
 
 S3 \\t llnrcdjt tt)n aufutfyalten {not jju auffyalten). It is wrong to detain him. 
 (£r fiat mid) aufger)atren {not ge=aufl)alten). He has detained me. 
 
 <&k fmb an^gegangen {not ge=*an3gangen). They have gone out, 
 
 Obs. - -Verbs derived from compound nouns or adjectives, follow the 
 conjugation of simple verbs, i. e. take the augment, and ju of the infin- 
 itive, before the entire word ; as, er |ttt gefritr)frucft, he has breakfasted; 
 cS ijl fd>»« ju fjanbljakn, it is difficult to manage; e3 v at geroetterleud)tet, 
 it has lightened. 
 
 4. In principal sentences and simple tenses the particle is 
 placed at the end of the sentence : 
 
 2)ie ©afie foinmen ekn a n. The guests are just arriving. 
 
 SBarum' gcfyen <Ste ait 3 ? Why are you going out ? 
 
 (£r Brad) bte Slume a t>. He broke off the flower. 
 
 -£>tett cr ben 33oten ait f? Did he detain the messenger ? 
 
 5. When one of these particles is prefixed to a verb not 
 accented on the first syllable, 3 u of the infinitive follows the 
 prefix, and the augment Q e is rejected : 
 
 (£r iff ju jtolj e3 an*$ u^erfennen. He is too proud to acknowledge it 
 
 (£r f;at e3 an^erfannt. He has acknowledged it. 
 
 6. These compounds generally take a signification different 
 from, but often kindred to that of the components used separ- 
 ately : 
 
 3d) fter)e mcincnt Sveurtbe f) e t. I assist (stand by) my friend. 
 
 3d) ftefje fc e t metnem grcunbe. I stand by (near) my friend. 
 
 (Er ftellte fid) mir J) r. He introduced himself to me. 
 
 (£r ftellte fid) » r mid). He placed himself before me. 
 
 23 1 i f p t e 1 e ♦ Examples. 
 
 tfautt er ben (Stein aitft)eoeit ? Can he lift up the stone ? 
 
 (£r §efct ben ©tein auf. He lifts the stone up. 
 
 (Bte foflten i v n ntd)t auftyalten. You should not detain him. 
 
 (Er mag nid)t etnfd)lafen. He does not wish to go to sleep, 
 
 <Sie ftnb e3, ber mid) aitfijalt. It is you who detain me. 
 
 (Er t|T fcofe, r»eit <Sie au§get)en. He is angry because you go out. 
 ©ie tfr traurtg, roeit er bte SBIume ab« She is sad because le broke off the 
 Brad). flower. 
 
190 
 
 LESSON LI. 
 
 $ic glMt<$ffttt©tunbenfcine8 2e$en0 The happiest hours of his life he 
 
 bringt er tmter ben SBlumen jit. — 9?. spends araong the flowers. 
 
 t)er 2Beife jiefyt baS ^ii£ltd)e bem 3tn* The wise man prefers the useful 
 
 geneljmen, unb ba$ ^ciljttenbtge bcm to the agreeable, and the neces- 
 
 9?u&Udfoen fcor. sary to the useful. 
 
 3m SBinter ruf)et bte (Srbe au$ unb In (the) winter the earth reposes 
 
 fammelt neue JTrafte* and collects new powers. 
 
 ©arum' ift er fdjon au^gegangen, unb Why has he already gone out mi 
 
 ttmrum njiinfc^en <3ie au^juge^en ? why do you wish to go out ? 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SIBmatten, to weary; 
 Sl&ftyretfeen, to copy, p. 354; 
 SCbfteigen, to descend, p. 358; 
 Sled):, genuine; 
 2(nfangett, to begin, p. 348 ; 
 Slnjiefyen, to put on, p. 358; 
 2tufgef)en, to rise, p. 348 ; 
 2Iuf jcfynetben, to cut open, p. 354; 
 9(uf'fpetd)ern, to store up; 
 S(ufftetgen/ to rise, p. 356 ; 
 2Iu6brefd)en, to thrash out, 346; 
 2fu3gef)en, to go out, p. 348 ; 
 2lu61;alten, to sustain, p. 350; 
 2lu$fpred)en, to pronounce, 356; 
 2)te 33elagerung, -, pi. -en, the siege ; 
 
 Exercise 102. 
 
 Sinfammeln, to gather; 
 
 Sitern, to fester; 
 
 ©rfM'ett, to fill, fulfill, do; 
 S)ic ?felbfrud)t, -, pi. -friidjte, the 
 
 produce of the field; 
 £)a$©ebirge, -$, pi -, the chain of 
 
 mountains; 
 £)a3 ®efd)tt>ur', -e$, pi. -,the ulcer; 
 2)a3 £eil, -e£, the welfare ; 
 
 ©anft, soft; 
 
 <Sd)affen; to create, produce ; 
 
 SBegfliegen, to fly away, p.348; 
 
 SSBeggefyen, to go away, p. 348; 
 
 2Beglaufen, to run away, 350 ; 
 
 SBegncfymen, to take away, 352. 
 
 2Iufga6e 102. 
 
 1, £a£en @ic S^re 33iic^er weggenommen ? 2. %a, id) nabm 
 fte n?eg aU id) cutting. 3. ®etyen %tyt Sreunbe |eute cuts ? 4. 
 9ietn, fte ftnb fdjon ausgegangen. 5. @d)rei£t tier ^rtabe ben 33rtef 
 ab? 6. SRetn, er f)at tt)n fd]on geftern abgefcfyrteben. T, Der fleis- 
 jjtge 23auer ^at feme geltfdidjte etngefammelt, auSgebrofdjen unb 
 attfgefpetd)ert. 8* Um twelve 3 e ^ S e ^ ^ic (Sonne auf? 9. @ie 
 ift fdjon. aufgegangen. 10. Der 9ftonD fteigt Winter bem ©eBirge 
 auf unb erfittlt bie ©rbe mit feinem fanften £id)te. 11, Die tabelnbe 
 S3a()r^eit beg ad)ten greunbes tft W SStteffer bes SSuubargtes, t.ad 
 etn etternbeS ©efd)iour auffdjneibetj e£ fd)affet (Sdjmer^en, aber 3um 
 ipeile bes Setbenben. 12. 2>r Sogel ift toeggeflogen unb bad $ferb 
 ift toeggelaufen. 13. 3d) tjabe ntetne £anbfdju§e angegogen, unb 
 jeipt giefye id) ntetne Ue&erfdju^e an. 14. Die ntitben better ftnb toon 
 ifyren abgematteten $ferben abgefttegen. 15. Sie fpred)en Die bent* 
 fd)en Sorter fetyr gut aus. 16. @ie fjalten bie 33elagerung nod) 
 aus. 
 
ADVERBS. 101 
 
 Exercise 103. 2luf<ja'6e 103. 
 
 1. Who has taken away my gloves and your umbrella ? 2. 
 Your brother took away your gloves yesterday. 3. At what 
 time do you go out this evening ? 4. I shall not go out this 
 evening, I went out this morning. 5. When will your friends 
 go away % 6. They have already gone away. 7. Can you 
 pronounce these words well ? 8. I can pronounce them, but 
 lot very well. 9. Have you already begun to read German? 
 J 0. No, but I shall begin to-morrow, my friend began yester- 
 day. 11. Does he pronounce well ? 12. Yes, he pronounces 
 very well. 13. Why don't you take away your table % 14. I 
 have not time to take it away. 15. 1 am copying letters for 
 my friend who went away yesterday. 16. He understands what 
 you say, but he can not pronounce the German words well. 
 
 LESSON LII. £ectiotl LII. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 1. The adverbs b a, there ; b o rt, yonder ; fy i e r, here, and 
 too, where, are used with verbs of rest, or with those indicat- 
 ing action within specified limits : 
 
 SBer ifr b a ? £ i e r jle$e id). Who is there ? Here I stand. 
 
 2)0 rt fpielen bie itirtber; W o ftnb ble Yonder the children are playing, 
 ©Item ? where are the parents ? 
 
 2. £et, hither, and X) in, thither, when compounded with 
 other words, as b a, etc. (§91) still retain their distinctive mean- 
 ings; fier indicating motion or tendency toward, and I) in, 
 from the speaker. As, however, these particles in compounds 
 have no precise equivalents in English, their force is often lost 
 in translating : 
 
 2Ber tjl b a, unb tt>er gefjt b at) in' ? Who is there, and who goes thither? 
 
 SBIeiBe $ i e r, crtoirb balb $ terser' Remain here, he will soon com© 
 
 fommett. here (hither). 
 
 SB c ift ber STmtmcmn, unb xo if) i n' Where is the magistrate, and where 
 
 ge$t CT? (whither) is he going? 
 
192 LESSON LII. 
 
 Direction toward the speaker. 
 
 (Sr [prang % e ran 3'. He sprang out (hither). 
 
 (Sr [tteg tj erauf. He ascended (hither). 
 
 (Sr fteigt §era£'. He descends (hither). 
 
 (Er fam § e r u n' t e r . He came down (hither). 
 
 (Er ruberte ju unS $ e r it' h e r. He rowed across (hither) to us. 
 
 Direction from the speaker. 
 
 (Er fpr<utg t) i n a it 3\ He sprang out (thither). 
 
 (Er ftieg 1} i t a u f . He ascended (thither). 
 
 (Et ftetgt $ t n a b\ He descends (thither). 
 
 (Ex ging fy i n n n't e r. He went down (thither). 
 
 (Er ruberte ju i^nen § in it '6 e r. He rowed across (thither) to them. 
 
 3. £ e r and $ i n are often separated from \v o, and placed 
 at the end of the sentence. They are also sometimes used with 
 verbs of rest ; t) in, in the signification of past, gone ; and % er, 
 denoting proximity : 
 
 SB o gel) en <5ie fy t n ? Whither are you going? 
 
 2B o fommt er f) e r ? TFAmce is he coming? 
 
 £)er ©ommer ifl [djon | in. The summer is already past. 
 
 <Sie jtanben urn ifyn fy e r. They stood round about him. 
 
 4. These compounds after the dative preceded by a prepo- 
 sition, or after the accusative, are usually rendered by a prep- 
 osition before the objective : 
 
 (Sr flog jum genjrer §tnau§\ He flew out of the window. 
 
 <Ste famen bte Sreppe fyerun'ter. They came down the stairs. 
 
 FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 5. Adverbs are formed by the union of nouns with nouns, 
 nouns with pronouns, nouns with adjectives, nouns with prep- 
 ositions, adverbs with prepositions and prepositions with prep- 
 ositions : 
 
 <S>d)aarenr»et[e, in hordes; (©djaar, horde; 2Bet[e, manner). 
 
 ©IMUdjerroetfe, or ) f orttmate i y . (glMUd), fortunate ; SBeife, man 
 
 ©liicHt^er S03ei[f, f ' ner). 
 
 CSMnerfeitS, for my part; (metn, my; ©eite, side). 
 
 <5tromau[, upstream; ((Strom, stream; au[, up). 
 
 SBoburd), whereby; (wo, where; burd), through) 
 
 UekrauS/ exceedingly; (itBer, above; au$, out of). 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 193 
 
 6. Adverbs are formed from various parts of speech by 
 means of the suffixes Hdj, Hrtgg, fodrt3, sS (§ 103-106) : 
 
 tdgltd), daily; blinbltngS, blindly; CUfiDCtrtS, upward; 
 
 flug3, suddenly; rcd)tv, to the right; linU, left (to the left); 
 
 morgeng, in the morning, ctBenb£, in the evening ; aubertf, otherwise. 
 
 53 e i fp i e 1 e. 
 
 Exai 
 
 T)Kt %cl^tix ft£t auf bem §)ferbe unb The general sits upon the horse and 
 
 reitet ruljtg IdngS ben SReit;en ber 
 ©olba'ten f)in unb |>er. 
 £>tefe ©inmanberer fommen au$ 23dr)* 
 men kr. 
 
 rides calmly along the ranks of 
 the soldiers to and fro. 
 These immigrants come here (hith- 
 er) from Bohemia. 
 
 £)a3 £eben be<3 5ftenfiyen fdrtuanft rote The life of man, like a skiff, wavers 
 
 ein 9kd)en, fytnit&er unb ^eru&er* 
 
 (vacillates) to and fro. 
 
 Unb tytnein' mit Bebdd)ttgem<5d;rtttetn And thither (therein) with eonsid- 
 CottJe rrttt. — ©. erate step a lion strides. 
 
 (£in £r)or fud)t MinbtingS 9?u^m int A fool blindly seeks renown In the 
 Safegrmtfy ber ©djanbe. — £-n. labyrinth of infamy. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £)ctr)tn, thither, there; 
 
 Seinblid), hostile ; 
 3Me ©efafyr', -, pi. -en, the danger; 
 £)ie ®ett>att', -, pi. -en, the power; 
 
 £er, hither ; 
 
 $eran', on, near; 
 
 ^erit'ber, over, across; 
 
 £enm'ter, down; 
 
 £ierf)er, hither, here ; 
 
 4>tn, thither, away; 
 
 fyinab', down; 
 
 £tncmf, up; 
 
 £>inau3', out; 
 
 •tunit'ber, over, across; 
 £)er Sauf, -eg, pi. Sdufe, the course, 
 1)a3 SKeer, -eC>, pi. -c, the sea; 
 £)er Sftorgen, -§, pi.-, the morning; 
 r £ie ^erle, -, pi. -n, the pearl; 
 
 9icifen, to travel; 
 £>er Sturm, -eg, pi. ©titrate, storm; 
 
 £audjen, to dive ; 
 
 ©p y l, well, probably. 
 
 Exercise 104. Slufgafce 104. 
 
 1. 2Bo ift Der 3tmmermann ? 2. (£r ift in ^eutfd)lant>, fern SrcunD 
 ift aud) bcu 3. Sfteifen @ie aud) t>at)tn? 4. (Sntfreber reife id) fete 
 fetn, obcr er lommt tjtertjei\ 5. $3o getjen itnfere greimbe |in? 6. 
 (Sie gel)en nad) bem £orfej (often tcir and) jDa^tn gcf)en? ?♦ $3tr 
 ttottett t)ente ^ter bleioen nnt> morgen baljin ge^en* 8. Swollen @te 
 ten 23erg ^tnauf geljen ? 9* So fommt t^r §er nnb too gel)t t§r 
 tin? 10. SBir lomrncn au^ (Scfyuapen nnt> get)en nad) $ren§en* 
 
 11. "£er Sflcmn mitfji (L. 45. 15.) $tn<ws in^ feinDli^e Sefceit." 
 
 12. 2Bir wtffcn fto!)l wo jene fleigtgen SlrBeiter l)tngegangen ftnb. 
 
 9 
 
194 LESSON LILT. 
 
 13* £er Sautijtx taudjt iu bad $ieer fyinao, urn ^erlen tyeraufeutyo* 
 len. 14, S3ei grogen ©titrmen fmb bte @d)ijfe oft in ®efatjr, bemt 
 lie SBeflert f^lagen mit ®etoalt tyeratt, bad @^iff fd)toanft tyiniioer 
 imb Ijeruoer. 15, £>e3 -Bftorgens fdjreibt er wttb bed 2lfcettb$ lieft er* 
 16* £mao, tyittcwf gel)t unfer £auf. 
 
 Exercise 105. Slufgafre 105. 
 
 i. Where are you going 1 ? 2. I am going to the village, will 
 you go there too ? 3. I shall go there the day after to-morrow, 
 but not to-day. 4. The boy sprang down in the water. 5. 
 Our friends are in Greece and we shall also go there. 6. Are 
 your cousins coming here ? y l. No, for they are already here* 
 8. Have you ever traveled from Germany to Russia ? 9. The 
 carpenter fell down from the roof. 10. The horse ran down 
 the mountain. 11. The boys went up the street. 12. We 
 must go to the forest, will you go there with us 1 13. No, we 
 must remain where we are. 14. I will go up if you will coma 
 down. 15. Have you ever been in Russia ? 
 
 « <} ■»»«» »■ 
 
 LESSON Lin. flection LIII. 
 
 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 
 WORDS REQUIRING THE VERBS AT THE END OP THE SENTENCE. 
 
 1. When the subordinate clause is introduced by either of 
 the following words, the verb (as with the relative pronoun L. 
 39. 5.) is placed at the end of the sentence ; namely : 
 
 51 ( d, when, than ; b e o o r, e % e, before ; Bid, till ; b a, since j 
 b a mit, in order that ; b a fj, that ; f all d, if, in case; ittb e m, 
 while, in that ; i ttf o f e r it, (with aid implied) in so far; j e (L. 
 82.11.) n ad) bent, after that, when ; 0, whether, if; feit, 
 fe it bent, since; fo, thus, if; otyngeadjtet or ungeadjtet, 
 notwithstanding ; to a tj r e n b, while ; to a tt tt, when ; to a r tt ttt, 
 why ; to e i I (bietoeil) because ; to e n tt, if ; to i e, as, when ; 
 to o, where, if. 
 
COLLOCATION OB WORDS. ltf§ 
 
 COMPOUNDS UNDER THE SAME RULE 
 
 Are oigleldj, oBfd)on, oBtroI)!, or oB gteid), cB fd)on, oB wofyf, 
 mnn and), »enn glctd), roenn fcfyon, although, even if ; bafern, too^ 
 fern, if, in case that ; <mf tag, so that; ati 06 and aU mnn, as if. 
 
 Obs. — 2Bcnn.au*, roenn gletdj and roenn fdjon, though often rendered 
 although, (like 06 roof)t, and the words preceding it) are more strongly 
 concessive than the former, and usually best rendered by even though. 
 
 WORDS FOLLOWED BY THE CORRELATIVE © 0. 
 
 2. £a, oBgleid), oBfdjon, oBttof)!, totil, ttemt and mie are usually 
 followed by the correlative fo at the head of a succeeding 
 clause : 
 
 £) a tdj etnmal fyter bin, f o roifl id) and) Since I am (once) here I will (also) 
 
 bletben. remain. 
 
 2B etl cr mein Sreunb tft, fo mup id) Because he is my friend I must as- 
 
 if)m beijletyen. sist (stand by) him. 
 
 SB enn e3 Sfjnen moaUdj tfr, fo font* If it is possible (for you, then) come. 
 
 men Sie. 
 
 THE CORRELATIVE © FOLLOWED BY £)0(fy OR 1) e tt It (fy. 
 
 3. When o B Q I e t d), or either of the concessive conjunctions, 
 stands at the head of thej^rs^ sentence, the correlative f o, of 
 the next, is usually followed by b o d) or b e nrt o d): 
 
 SB enn er and) ntdjt oeffer ifi, fo tft er Although he is not better, he is 
 
 bod) nid)t fdjledjter. nevertheless not worse. 
 
 Do man e£ ib,m gleidj Befall, fo Utt* Although it was commanded him, 
 
 terlie^ er e3 benno dj. he neglected it nevertheless. 
 
 Dbgtetd) er reid) tfr, tji er (or fo ifi Although he is rich, he is never- 
 
 er) bod) etn 5?naufer. theless a niggard. 
 
 SB enn er fd)on bofe auSjteljt, fo mcint Even though he seems ill-natured 
 
 er c£ b o d) ntdjt fo bofe. (bad) still he does not intend it 
 
 so badly. 
 
 Obs. — SScnn, however, is often omitted and the verb placed before its 
 subject: 
 3ft e£ S^nen mogltdj, fo !ommen ©te. If it is possible (for you, then) come. 
 
 4. 5lBer, aMtt, betm, enttteber, ober, niimlicB, fonbern and unb, 
 do not change the natural order of the sentence : 
 
 ®ie tji ntdjt fdjim, a$er fie tlUteoenS* She is not beautiful but she is 
 rourbig. amiable. 
 
19(5 lesson Lin. 
 
 5. When a sentence begins with any c ther word than its 
 subject, except as already specified, the main verb, or its aux- 
 iliary, usually precedes the subject. For the sake of special 
 emphasis, the verb, followed by an adversative clause, may be 
 placed at the head of the sentence : 
 
 Sffiarum fyat er nid)t gelefen? Why has he not read ? 
 
 ©elefen fyat er, after rtid)t laut. He has read, but not loud. 
 
 Dentt ifm $afce id) klei'bigt. For him have I offended. 
 
 X) ie fen SKann fame id), after ienen|aoe This man I know, but that one I 
 
 id) trie gefetyen. never have seen. 
 
 Sanger fann id) nict)t roarten. Longer I can not wait, 
 
 ©a liegt Sfrr 23ud). Here lies your book. 
 
 Obs. — As the same word may be an adverb or a conjunction, it may 
 require the construction of the relative sentence, or the inversion of 
 subject and verb: 
 
 2) a fommt 3ft,r Sretmb. There comes your friend, 
 
 ©a Sfyr $retmb fommt/ fo rciH id) As your friend is coming I will 
 
 marten, wait. 
 
 SDamit bin id) jufrteben. With that I am satisfied, 
 
 ©amit id) nid)t jit gefjen firaudje, ger)t In order that I may not need to 
 
 er felftfr. go he goes himself. 
 
 6. Sometimes a causal conjunction in a leading clause is best 
 omitted in translating : 
 
 (£r if! bej^alo unjufrieben, roeil fetrt He is ( — ) discontented because his 
 Sreunb nid)t $ier ift. friend is not here. 
 
 7. Adverbs (except gcmtg) precede the adjectives and ad- 
 verbs which they qualify : 
 
 (£3 tjr fdjon jiemlid) fait. It is already pretty cold, 
 
 ©er $ut tjr groji genug. The hat is large enough. 
 
 8. Adverbs follow the verbs that they qualify (in compound 
 tenses the first auxiliary); those of time preceding those of 
 place : 
 
 (£r roar gejtern fjter. He was here yesterday. 
 
 <Sie fommen oft ju imS. They often come to our house. 
 
 (£r roirb morgen fyier fein. He will be here to-morrow. 
 
 SBir ftefu'djen ifyn oft, after er oefu'djt We often visit him, but he never 
 
 un3 nie. visits us. 
 
 (£r roirb biefen Slftenb nad) ber ©tabt He will drive to th« city this after 
 
 fafcren. noon. 
 
COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 
 
 197 
 
 9. Adverbs of time precede the object (except wnen it is a 
 personal pronoun) ; while those of manner, referring exclu- 
 sively to the verb, commonly follow the object : 
 
 Sr mad)te gefrern fetne STr&eit feljr He did his work yesterday very 
 
 fd)tedjt. badly. . 
 
 (£r $at gejl*m fcine Slrfcett fe^r fd)tec6t He has done his work (yesterday) 
 
 gemadjt'. very badly. (See L. 38. 3.). 
 
 (£r i)at fte $eute Bcjfcr gemadjt'. He has done it better to-day. 
 
 Sr f>at mir gejlern biefe SWtti^etlung He made this communication to 
 
 fdjrtftlidj gemadjt'. me yesterday in writing. 
 
 S3 cifpietc. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 S3 tterbrtept' i$n; i>a$ man iljn nidjt He is vexed that he was not sent 
 
 tyolen Iiejj. for. 
 
 Sc mefyr man r)at, ie (or be fro) mefyr The more one has the more one 
 
 ttriH man Ijaben. wants (wishes to have). 
 
 9flan mu§ feljen, oh er e3 xljun ttrirb. One must see whether he will do it 
 
 Sn ber Sugenb aHetn' ftnbet ber SSetfe In (the) virtue alone the wise man. 
 
 3ufrte'benljeit. finds contentment. 
 
 9h:r mit bem £e&en mcrben unferc Set* Only with life will our sufferings 
 
 ben aufljoren. cease. 
 
 2)ajji biefe ©pradje fdjwiertger aU bte That this language is more difficult 
 
 englifdje ift# tyafcen ©ie motyl fdjon than the English, you have prob- 
 
 eingefefien. ably already seen. 
 
 9?ie $abz id) fie gemie'ben unb fdjtter* Never have I avoided them, and 
 
 ltd) mcrbe id) tfynen (L. 63. 3.) gcmj hardly shall I entirely escape 
 
 entgefyen. — ©♦ them. 
 
 2>em Srtcblidjen gerod^rt man gem ben To the peaceful man one willingly 
 
 Srieben. — @. accords peace. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 2fm*ommen, to arrive, p. 350 ; 
 
 93i$, till ; 
 £er SBurger, -3, pi. -, the citizen ; 
 Ba 1>ampf, -eS, pi. 3)ampfe, steam, 
 exhalation ; 
 
 'Bed), yet, however ; 
 Bti Shmjr, -e§, pL £>imfte, vapor ; 
 
 Snbltcfr, at last, finally ; 
 
 Sntfte |)en, to arise, originate ; 
 
 ©ott, -eS, God ; 
 
 Se-beflc, L. 32. 11 ; 
 
 Se nad)bem, according as ; 
 $ie Stxaft, -, pL Straftt the force ; 
 
 ©cr 9?ad)en, -$, pi. -, the boat; 
 2)er 9?ebel, -3, pi. -, the mist ; 
 
 Db, whether ; 
 25er 9?egen, -3, the rain ; 
 
 ©citbem, since ; 
 
 £rdge, idle ; 
 
 Xtnglucflid), unhappy; 
 
 Itnjdfylig, innumerable; 
 
 SkrMn'ben, to unit^, p. 346 ; 
 
 $ertfjei'btgen, to defend; 
 Die SBaffen, pi the arms, weapon* 
 
 3eigen, to show. 
 
198 LESSON LIII. 
 
 Exercise 106. SlufgaBe 106, 
 
 1* Snttid) geigten tic 23iirger il)re SBaffen, nnt ftngen an fid) $tt 
 fccrttjeiDigen. 2. 3d) ^atte $n gefefyen, etye feirte ^rennte angefom* 
 men maren. 3- SSarten @ie MS id) ten 33rie* gelefen fiaBe. 4< 
 2Bir ftnjfen, tag er tiBermorgen fommen tmrt. 5. 3e mel)r ©ott tit 
 gegeken t)at, tefto mefyr follft tu ten 2lrmen geften. 6. 3e nad;tem 
 man gef)antelt $at, nnrt man gludlid) oter nnglitdlid) fcttt* 1. 3^ 
 toeig nid)t, oft er ta ift. 8, (Seittem fein $ater t)ier tft, ift er ttiel 
 gnfrietener. 9, Sir nnffen, ftue er fca$ getfyan f)at nnt too er t)tn* 
 gegangen ift. 10. 21'nS 2)ampfen nnt 2)nnften entftel)en ^ebel nnt 
 #tegen. 11. @ie nnffen ntd)t, tuarutn id) fcaS gefagt l)a£e. 12. Me 
 feine Jlrafte oolite er fammetn nnt fie mit tern ^einte fcerBinten* 
 13. Unfer (Sd)tff nennt er einen 5Rad)en. 14. Dbgleid) er arm ijr, 
 fo ift cr tod) glitdHd). 15. 2BeU@iefranf fint, fo fbnnen 8ie nid)t 
 anSget)en. 16. @ie fint Iran! nnt fonnen tej^afo nid)t anSge^en* 
 It. Uefcer nns feljen nu'r nnr ten ipimmet nnt nnjafjltge <Steme. 
 
 Exercise 101. Slnfgafie 107. 
 
 1. He has written more books than he has bought. 2. They 
 saw me before I saw them. 3. We will wait here till you can 
 go with us. 4. You know that I have not seen him. 5. The 
 longer a man lives the shorter time has he yet to live. 6. Ac- 
 cording as one is idle or industrious will one be unhappy or 
 contented. 1. I do not know whether he will come or not. 8. 
 I have seen him since I have been here. 9. Do you know how 
 long he remained in the city 1 10, No, I know that he has 
 been there, but I do not know how long he remained. 11. We 
 know him, but we do not know where he lives. 12. This boy 
 is sad because his father is sick. 13. Because he has not much 
 money he is discontented. 14. I am tired and can, therefore, 
 write no longer. 15. They can not go out because they are 
 sick. 16. Because he is sick he can not go out. It. These 
 books I have never read. 
 
COMPOUND VERBS INSEPARABLE. 199 
 
 LESSON LIV. Uctwn LIV. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS INSEPARABLE. 
 
 1. The unaccented particles Be, cmp, ent, er, ge, mtj}, ser, \v\* 
 fcer and jer, when prefixed to verbs, reject the augment ( $ e) in 
 the past participle, and take before them 3 u of the infinitive : 
 
 <£r Ijat fctn £>aug serfauft. He has sold his house. 
 
 (£r (jat cut £aug ju ttcrfaufen. He has a house to sell. 
 
 2Bte fcat man eud) entfefangen? How were you received? 
 
 <Dag $at mtr nie gefjort'. That has never belonged to me, 
 
 £)u fyafi ben ©piegel jerfcro'dfoen. You have broken the mirror. 
 
 - For a more complete survey 01 the above particles than could here 
 be properly introduced, see § 95. and following. 
 
 2. £unfc, through ; Winter, behind ; iifccr, over; unt, around; 
 itntcr, under; soil, full; Briber, against; nrieter, again, back, 
 when accented, are separable, and when unaccented, insepar- 
 able : 
 
 (Er ttnebertyo'Ite roag er geljort $atte. He repeated what he had heard. 
 Sr tyotte bag 23udj toieber. He brought the book again. 
 
 Da^ Staffer iji burd)getaufen. The water has run through. 
 
 3. The particle mijj, in some words, takes the accent, and, 
 in the infinitive and past participle, is treated like other sepa- 
 rable particles : 
 
 ©g tyat mijj'getontj eg fdjeint mtput* It has sounded wrong ; it seems to 
 tonen. sound wrong (mis-sound). 
 
 4. In some verbs the augment is used before the prefix mifj 
 (but is oftener wholly rejected) : 
 
 ©tc fyt&en t§n gemi^'^anbeU (or mijj* They have maltreated (abused) 
 fym'belt. him. 
 
 S3 e I f p i e 1 c . Examples. 
 
 (£r Befall' t^nen (L. 62. 3.) i$re §&&* He commanded them to illuminate 
 
 fer ju kleudjten. their houses. 
 
 SId> idj §at)e euren Sammer nnr »cr* Alas! I have only increased your 
 
 gw'fjcrt. grief 
 
 (Er §ai ung iikrgefe|t. He has taken (ferried) us over, 
 
 ©r ^ot ein Sraucxfpiel au$ bent ©cut* He has translated a tragedy from 
 
 fdjcn tifcerfefet', the German. 
 
200 
 
 LESSON L1V. 
 
 Diefer Jfaufmann serforgt' unS mil 
 
 $affee, %\)ii, Sudcr, u. 
 ©iefe $PfI<m$en muff en afte Saljre ser* 
 
 fefet werben. 
 Die $erflid}feit ber SSBelt serfdwi'ubet, 
 ©o serge&t afle3 3vbifd)e. 
 <£v $at &K.ed serlernt' tt>a$ er tt>u£te, 
 
 This merchant supplies us with 
 
 coffee, tea, sugar, etc. 
 These plants must be transplanted 
 
 every year. 
 The glory of the world vanishes. 
 Thus perishes every thing earthly. 
 He has forgotten every thing that 
 
 he knew. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 23ege'*)en, to commit, p. 348; 
 
 Selolj'nen, to reward; 
 
 SBerau'fcen, to rob; 
 
 S3efd)rei'ben, to describe, p. 354; 
 
 Dasort, of it; 
 Die ©Item, pi. the parents; 
 
 Grfm'bert, to invent, p. 348 ; 
 
 Srfyal'ien, to receive; 
 
 (Srmor'bcn, to murder; 
 
 (£rfe'i?en, to replace; 
 Die ©itte, -, the goodness; 
 Die Sugenb, -, the youth; 
 
 Die tfunfl, -, pi. $imfte, the art; 
 Die Siete, the love ; 
 
 SSJitg'serftefjett, to misunder- 
 stand, p. 356; 
 Die SPflicfit, -t pi. -en, the duty; 
 
 spdi'ren, to polish ; 
 Der ©piegel, -3, pi. -, looking-glass ; 
 Der XUKi, -eg, pi. -e, the part; 
 Dct3 SJerfcred/en, -3, pi. -, crime; 
 
 $erfu'd)ert, to try ; 
 
 $ertrci'6en, to drive away, 356 ; 
 
 3erbred)'en, to break, p. 346. 
 
 Exercise 108. SlufgaBe 108. 
 
 1. 3dj §off e morgen einert SBrtef gu erBalten. 2. £>at fcer arme 
 Sftann fern ©efo ertjalten, ober nur einen Xtyxl bason ? 3. 3d) BaBe 
 fca3 SBort sergeffen unb fcaS papier serloren. 4. £ie £eutfd)en $a* 
 Ben ttiele nii£lid)e ^u'nfte erfunben. 5. 9fteine ©dmler fyaBen fid) 
 gut Betragen. 6. 9ft ait f)at mir biefes Sud) empfofylen. ?. 3$ 
 tyaBe einen 33rief son einem meiner greunbe er^alren, tr-orin er feine 
 SFteifc Befd)rteBen X)aL 8. Siner crmartet ©elb son feinem $ater, 
 unb ber Sincere serbient feirt (Mb. 9. $3ir mu§ten ten alien Wlann 
 in tag Sfteer BegraBen. 10. £>er Saner $at feinen SBeijen urfaufh 
 11. 3§r ©ruber $at mid) mij^erftanben, id) ^aBe tljm nid)t3 ser* 
 fprodjen. 12. fir i)at feinen (Spiegel gerBrod)en. 13. Unfcre greunbe 
 §aBen m\$ BefucBt, fie »erfud)ten beutfd) gu fpredjen, aBer wir fonnten 
 fie nid't oerftefyen. 14. Ta$ tapfere £eer l)at ben geinb sertrteBen, 
 
 15. fir lyat feine $pid)t erfnftt unb feine greunbe ^aBen i§n BetoBnL 
 
 16. SQBa^ fur ein $erBred)en i)aBen biefe Seute Begangen ? 17. (£te 
 tyaBen einen SKamt BerauBt unb ermorbet. 18. £er ^naBe l)at feine 
 Enopfc polirt, anftatt fein 23ud) gu ftubiren. 19. £ie r e$ Sudj $ai 
 er in feiner 3ugcnb gelefen* 
 
• + 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 201 
 
 Exercise 109. ^ufgafce 109. 
 
 1. Have you received your books, or only a part of them 1 
 
 2. I have not yet received them, but I expect them to-morrow. 
 
 3. Have you studied this book much 1 4. I have not had much 
 time to study it. 5. Have you understood all that you have 
 studied % 6. I have understood it, but I have forgotten a part 
 of it. 7. I earn the money that I receive. 8. Somebody has 
 broken my knife. 9. We tried to speak German, but they 
 could not understand us. 10. I can recommend this book to 
 you, I studied it in my youth. 11. The poor man was obliged 
 to sell his bed. 12. This man has committed no crime. 13. The 
 thief has buried the murdered man in the forest. 14. He has 
 robbed his friend. 15. Have you sold any thing to-day 1 16. 
 Yes, I have sold my horse. 17. What have you promised me? 
 18. I have not promised you any thing. 19. Either you have 
 forgotten or I have misunderstood you. 20. Do your duty and 
 I will reward you. 21. I have not yet received tftat which 
 you promised me, but I have not forgotten it. 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 
 Ceciion LV, 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 CONJUGATION 
 
 of (setrt, £a&en 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 and SBerbett 
 
 I may be. 
 
 I may have. 
 
 I may become. 
 
 id) fei, 
 
 id) babe, 
 
 id) werbe, 
 
 bu feiejr (or feift), 
 
 bu babejr, , 
 
 . bu roerbeir, 
 
 er fei, 
 
 er l)abe, 
 
 er roerbe, 
 
 rotr feien (or fein), 
 
 rotr baben, 
 
 rotr roerben, 
 
 ibr feiet, 
 
 ibr babet, 
 
 ibr tterbet, 
 
 fie feten (or fetn). 
 
 fte baben. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 fte tterben. 
 
 I might be. 
 
 I might have. 
 
 I might become* 
 
 idj rcoire, 
 
 id) bdtte, 
 
 id) aitrbe, 
 
 bu rodrejl (or rc&rjl), 
 
 bu bdtte)!, 
 
 bu tturbefr, 
 
 er ware, 
 
 er bdtte, 
 
 er rourbe, 
 
 rotr rodren, 
 
 rcir batten, 
 
 tntr rcurben, 
 
 ibr rodret (or mart)/ 
 
 ibr Batter, 
 
 it)r roitrbet, 
 
 jte wdren. 
 
 fte Batten. 
 
 f[e roiirben. 
 
202 
 
 LESSON LV. 
 
 I may haue been 
 
 id) fei 
 bu fete ft 
 cr fet 
 ttir feien 
 tt)r feiet 
 fie feten 
 
 - gercefen. 
 
 /might have been. 
 
 td) ware 
 bu wareft 
 er ttdre 
 ttir ttdren 
 il)r rod' ret 
 fie ttdren 
 
 - gettcfem 
 
 (If) I shall be, 
 
 id) tterbe 
 bu tterbefr 
 er tterbe 
 ttir tterben 
 ifyr roerbet 
 fie tterben 
 
 ■ fein. 
 
 (If) I shall have been. 
 
 id) tterbe 
 
 bu tterbejl: 
 er tterbe 
 ttir tterben 
 iljr roerbet 
 fie tterben 
 
 _ gettefen 
 fetrt* 
 
 • gef abt. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I miy have had. 
 
 id) babe 
 bu Ijabefr 
 er r)abe 
 tttr t)aben 
 it)r fyabet 
 fie fyaben 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I might have had. 
 id) ptte 
 
 bu t)dttejr 
 er fydtte 
 roir fatten 
 it)r tydttet 
 fie fatten 
 
 ge^abt* 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (If) I shall have. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 bu tterbefr 
 er tterbe 
 roir tterben 
 ijjr roerbet 
 fie roerben 
 
 fjabem 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (If) I shall have had. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 bu roerbeft 
 
 er roerbe get)abt 
 
 roir roerben [ fyaben. 
 
 U)r roerbet 
 
 fte roerben 
 
 I may have become. 
 id) fei 
 
 bu fetfr 
 er fei 
 roir feien 
 ij)r feiet 
 fie feien 
 
 ■ gettorbat. 
 
 / might have become. 
 
 id) rodre 
 bu ttdreft 
 er rodre 
 roir rodren 
 tt)r ttdret 
 fie rodren 
 
 geroorben 
 or roorben, 
 
 (If) I shall become. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 bu tterbefr 
 er roerbe 
 ttir roerben 
 iljr tterbet 
 fie roerben 
 
 ■ roerben. 
 
 (If) I shall have become. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 bu tterbeft 
 er roerbe 
 
 ttir roerben 
 iijr roerbet 
 fie roerben 
 
 geroorben 
 
 - orttorben 
 
 few. 
 
 1. The subjunctive is employed : 
 
 a. To indicate a wish or a result, in which use it answers 
 to our potential : 
 
 T>ctrum efcen teifjt er $einem, bamit er For this very reason he lends to 
 fiet3 ju geben ^abe* — £. no one (viz.), that he may always 
 
 have (something) to give. 
 fSon 3eit ju 3eit bebarf ber SBetfe, ba£ From time to time the wise man 
 man ib.ru bie ©titer, bie er befifct, im needs that the endowments he 
 red)ten £td)te jeige* — ©♦ possesses should be shown to him 
 
 in the correct light. 
 
 b. It is used in citing a report or opinion, as also m indi- 
 rect questions : 
 
♦ 
 
 SUEJUJ 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 203 
 
 3d) Ij5rte, bag er fein ©eft serloren I heard (as a report) that he had 
 f) a b e {subjunctive). lost his money. 
 
 Here the allusion is to the report merely, without implying on the 
 part of the speaker any opinion as to its truth. But if, on the contrary, 
 the indicative is used, the report is assumed to be true ; 
 3d) b^rte bag er fein ©elb serloren I heard (the fact) that he has lost 
 
 $at. his money. 
 
 2. In this mode our imperfect and pluperfect are often ren- 
 dered by the present and perfect : 
 
 dx fagre, bag er fern ®elb §afce (in- He said that he had (has) no mo- 
 
 stead o/*f)dtte). ney. 
 
 Sftan gtaubte, er §afce baS ©elb ge* It -was thought he had (has) stolen 
 
 fallen. the money. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 3d) f)6rte, bag er 
 
 feljr franf fet* 
 
 9ftan fagt, er $a* 
 be »tcl ©elb. 
 
 2flan glaubt, bag 
 er fommenroer* 
 be. 
 
 2Reinfrbu,bagid) 
 bcingetribfet? 
 
 I heard (a report) 
 that he is very 
 sick. 
 
 They say he has 
 much money. 
 
 It is thought that 
 he will come. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 3d) $orte, bag er 
 
 fefyr franf Ift. 
 
 3d) roetg, bag er 
 »iel ©elb Ijat. 
 
 Sftan wetfr bag er 
 fcmmen wtrb. 
 
 I heard (the fact) 
 that he is very 
 sick. 
 
 I know that he 
 has much mo- 
 ney. 
 
 It is known that 
 he will come. 
 
 Thinkest thou 
 that I am thy 
 enemy ? 
 
 Sftir fagt eine tranrtge SHuning, bag bu 
 
 bte Sriicfe fein roerbefh fiber roeldje 
 
 bte ©panter in bad Sanb fe£en rcer* 
 
 ben.—©. 
 ©ex abcr fagt, er fei e3 mitb\ unb 
 
 rootle roeiter ntdjtS me^r mit bir jit 
 
 fdjaffen f)aben. — <S. 
 SBcr fprid)t tb,m ab, bag er bte Sften* 
 
 fd)en fame, fie jn gebraudjen rctffe ? 
 
 — @. 
 
 SSetgt bu, tag id) Knowest thou 
 betn^einb bin? that I am thy 
 enemy ? 
 A sad presentiment tells me that 
 
 you will be the bridge over which 
 
 the Spaniards will come (get) 
 
 into the country. 
 But he says he is tired of it, and 
 
 will have nothing more (further* 
 
 to do with you. 
 "Who denies (of him) that he knows 
 
 men (understands human nature), 
 
 knows how to use them ? 
 
 3. The subjunctive is often used, especially in the third per 
 son, and sometimes in the first person plural, in the signifiea 
 tion of the imperative : 
 
'*£ 
 
 204 LESSON 
 
 i 
 £>er Sftenfdj serfudje bie ©fitter nidjt. Let not ma a tempt the goda. 
 (£3 fei iX5ie 3^r gettumfd)t ' Be it (let it be) as you wished 
 
 3e£t ge^e Seber feineg SBegeS. — ©'♦ Now let each go his way. 
 ■§>af>en totr ©ebulb' ! or Let us be patient ! literally, 
 
 Safjt un3 ®ebulb fallen ! Let us have patience ! 
 
 2ttan Mnfc if)n an bie £tnbe bcrt ! Let him be bound to the linden 
 
 yonder. 
 
 FOKMATION OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 4. The present subjunctive of all verbs is formed by suffix- 
 ing to the root, e for the first and third person singular, and 
 e ft for the second ; the first and third person plural add e n, 
 and the second e t : 
 
 tdj lo6-e, mir Ico-en j td) wott-e, mie foott-en ; 
 on lob-eft, i$r lofc-et; bn tooll-eft, il)i »ott-etj 
 er loo-e, fie loo-en, er tootf-e, fie wofl-en. 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 5. In regular verbs the imperfect of the subjunctive differs 
 from that of the indicative in taking e before the endings t e, 
 t e ft, ten and tet (L. 37. X. 8.): 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 id) loo-te, toir loo-ten ; id) loo-e-te, toir foB-e-ten ; 
 bn lo£-teft, i^r too-tet; bn loo-e-teft, tfyr lob-e-tetj 
 er loo-te, fie loo-tcn. er loo-e-te, fie loo-e-ten. 
 
 6. Irregular verbs add e to the form of the indicative, and 
 usually take the Umlaut, if capable of it : 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 td) gab, rotr gaBen; id) gaoe, totr gaocn; 
 
 bn gaoft, if>r gabt; t>u gabeft, itjr gaoet; 
 
 er gab, fie gaben. er gabe, fie gaben. 
 
 The other tenses are formed by means of auxiliaries. For complete 
 list of irregular verbs see p. 346; also, remarks § 77. 
 
 23eifpiele. Examples. 
 
 23er nid)t bie 2&elt in fetnen $reunben He who does not see the world in 
 ftetjt serbient nidjt ba§ bie SBelt son his friends does not deserve that 
 i$m erfa^'re. — ®. ! ^ )e world should heur of him. 
 
NCITIVE. 
 
 205 
 
 Qa$ nun cincn Sogel flm$$nam, bag That a bird can be caught (that) I 
 ttttjj id); abe; bap man i$m feinen know, but that his cage caa be 
 Jlafta. angenctymer att baS freie gelb made more pleasant to him than 
 madjen forme, ba$ »eijj id) nid)t. — the open field (that) I do not 
 £. know. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SSetjaut'ten, to affirm; 
 DaS Berlin, -5, (the) Berlin; 
 
 SBilben, to cultivate; 
 
 SSinben, to bind, tie, p. 346; 
 SDaSDreSfccn, -&, (the) Dresden; 
 
 % rag en, to ask; 
 Die £anblung, -, pi. en, the action; 
 Der §evr, - n, pi. -en, lord, master ; 
 Die £inbe, -, pi. -n, linden-tree ; 
 
 feinen, to think ; 
 Die SKcilUttlgi -, pi. -en, opinion; 
 Die 9iatur, -, pi. -en, the nature ; 
 Da3 9?ersenfieber, -S, pi.-, the nerv- 
 ous fever ; 
 
 Exercise 110. 
 
 Da3 3?om, -3, (the) Rome; 
 
 Der S^rann, -en, pi. -en, tyrant; 
 
 llmfcnft', in vain; 
 SDaS S5ene'big> -8, (the) Venice; 
 Die Skrftel'limoi, -, pi. -en, the dis- 
 simulation; 
 
 SHermali four times ; 
 Die 2Belt, -, pi. -en, the world; 
 
 23ieber, again; 
 Da323ien, -£,"(the) Vienna ; 
 
 3mar, indeed; 
 
 >3n>etmal, twice. 
 
 2Utfga£e 110. 
 
 1. 3$ ftorte, tajj tiefer S^ratm in Berlin gcjucfen, aBer id) nmfjte 
 nid)t, oB e3 ma^r feu 2. £>aBen @le and) geBort, id) jei »om $ferte 
 gefaflen? 3. Sftetn, id) l)brre, @ie feiert au3 tern SBagcn gcfallen* 
 
 4. £ie granjofen Befjanpten fie feien tie ©eBiltetften in ter Selt. 
 
 5. 3§re ©djroejier glauBte, @ie feien in ter (Statt geroefen; id) 
 meinte after, bajj Sie im ©aire gemefen feien. 6. £te Snglanter 
 (iliD fcer SJieinnng, fie feien tie £erren te3 SDZecreS. 7. liefer 9teU 
 fente ergaBlt, tag er ^wetmal in 9lom nnt siermat in 25enetig geioe^ 
 fen fei. 8. Sr I)offt, tajj er in adjt £agen in S3ien fein toerte. 9, 
 3d) glauBe, tap stele 9ftenfcfcen tyter auf Srten tfyr ©utes gefyaBt tya* 
 ten toerttn. 10. Sr fagte grcar, er fei franf, aBer oiele glaufcen, e$ 
 fei 25erfte£tung son i$m genjefen. 11. 3d) fyorte mit 23etauern, @ie 
 fatten in Xre^ten ta3 SfteroenfteBer ge^abt. 12. &r fragte mid), o& 
 id) etwaS son tiefer £antlung gel)crt tyarte. 13. (Er glauBt, er tterte 
 nie nueter gliidltd) fein. 14. Sr meint, id) modjte e3 lefen, aBer tdj 
 fbnnte nidjt. 15. Man Bint 1 il)n an tie Suite tort. 16. Sr fagte, 
 er mitffe gekn. 17. 3^ Srennt meint, feine <5don1jeit ter Plaint 
 fei nmfonft gefdjaffen, mfo toiv SKenfdjen feien fca, urn fie 3U ge* 
 ntejjen* 
 
20G 
 
 LESSON 
 
 Exercise 111. 
 
 afce 111. 
 
 1. I iope I shall sea them to-morrow. 2. He has promised 
 that he will go w«th us to-morrow to the city. 3. He made 
 me believe that he was my friend. 4. We heard that you were 
 unwell. 5. Why do you think that he is your enemy % 6. 
 Because my friends told me that he hates me. 7. I have heard 
 that my brother has lost his horse. 8. They say these people 
 are very poor. 9. He says we were in his garden. 10. Did 
 you hear that I had found my money % 11. I had not heard 
 that you had lost your money. 12. This man says that he has 
 been in Vienna. 13. It is said that the ship has arrived. 14. 
 These people think that we are very rich. 15. A good scholar 
 Btudies diligently that he may learn rapidly. 16. He thought 
 I could not write. V\. They said that they must have the mo- 
 ney, 18. My brother says that they have praised you. 
 
 LESSON LVI. 
 
 Uction LVL 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 CONDITIONAL OF <& t t It, £ (X B t tt AND 2B t X t> t tt« 
 
 / should he. 
 
 idj roiirbe 
 bu wurbeft 
 er roiirbe 
 roir roitrben 
 ityr roiirbet 
 fie roiirbcn 
 
 ■ fetn. 
 
 FIRST CONDITIONAL. 
 
 / should have. 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 bu roiirbefi 
 er roiirbe 
 roir roiirben 
 u)r roiirbet 
 fte roiirben 
 
 tjafctru 
 
 I should become. 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 bu roiirbefi 
 er roiirbe 
 roir roiirben 
 tljr roiirbet 
 fte roiirben 
 
 • roerben. 
 
 / shoidd hate teen. 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 bu roiirbefi 
 er roiirbe 
 toir roiirben 
 il?r roiirbet 
 fte roitrbert 
 
 geroefen 
 fein. 
 
 SECOND CONDITIONAL. 
 
 / should have had. I should have become. 
 
 idj roiirbe 
 bu roiirbeft 
 er roiirbe 
 roir rourben 
 ityr roiirbet 
 fte roib ben| 
 
 getjaot 
 fafcen. 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 bu rourbcft 
 er roiirbe 
 roir rourben 
 ijjr roiirbet 
 fte rourben 
 
 geroorben 
 
 - or roorbeit 
 
 fcin. 
 
0NAL. 201 
 
 le is employed where a condition is 
 supposed which is regarded as doubtful or impossible : 
 
 3d) Wiirbe fetbjt getyen, Wenn id) nidjt I would go myself if I were not 
 
 fo alt ware. so old. 
 
 8Sa3 tourben @ie gettyan fyaben, Wenn "What would you have done, if you 
 
 <&k e$ gefefyen fatten? had seen it ? 
 
 (5r wiirbe e£ tfyun, wenn er fomtte* He would do it, if he could. 
 
 (Sie wiirben eg getfyan fyaben, wenn fie They would have done it, if they 
 
 ba gewefen wdren. had been there. 
 
 2. For the above forms of the conditional, the imperfect and 
 pluperfect of the subjunctive are often substituted; ft e tin 
 being omitted, and the subject preceded by the verb : 
 
 SDaS Ware fd)5ner, Ware eg tlidjt fo That were more beautiful, were it 
 
 grofi ; instead of not so large; instead of 
 
 !I)ag wiirbe fdjoner fein, wenn eg nid)t That would be more beautiful, ii 
 
 fo gro^ Ware. it were not so large. 
 
 3d) $fitte eg nid)t geglaubt, T;dtte id) eg I had not believed it, had I not 
 
 iud)t gefeljcn; instead of seen it; instead of 
 
 3d) Wiirbe eg nid)t geglaubt b>ben, Werm I would not have believed it, if I 
 
 id) e^ niu)t gcfcljen fcatte. had not seen it. 
 
 SBujjte er, \vo id) bin, fo fame er ju Here our idiom does not admit of a 
 
 mir; instead of literal translation. 
 
 Sfienn er toujjte, wo id) bin, fo Wiirbe If he knew where I am, he would 
 
 er ju mil fommen. come to me. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE CONDITIONAL AND THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Conditional. Indicative. 
 
 Sr wiirbe fommen, He would come, (£r fonnte fommen, He could come, 
 
 wenn er biirfte. ifhewereatlib- aber er woUte but he would 
 
 erty to. nidjt. not. 
 
 Sie Wiirbe bletben, She would re- ©ie woffte nid)t She would not 
 
 wenn fie nidjt ge= main, if she bleiben, obgleid) remain, though 
 
 $en miipte. were not ob- fte nidjt getyen she was not ob 
 
 liged to go. nutate. liged to go. 
 
 (Ex wurbe eg geljori He would have (Er war ba gewe* He had been 
 
 b>bcn, Wenn er ba heard it, if he fen, aber er fjatte there, but he had 
 
 gewefen ware. had been there. eg nidjt gel;6ri. not heard it. 
 
 3. The conditional mode is employed : 
 
 a. Interrogatively to express surprise or dissent : 
 Du Wdrefi ©on SKanucl? — ©♦ You are Don Manuel? (Do you say?) 
 
 Zxaumt, 9>rinj? ©o Wd'ren eg nur Dreams, Prince? Were they then 
 Xrdume gewefen ?»— @. only (*. <?.they were -not) dreams ? 
 
208 LESSO 
 
 Wit ptte e3 etnfatten foffcn biefen (Wlio J 
 ©teat im ©tactic jit butben? — <S. me to tolerate this stace within 
 
 the state ? 
 
 b. Sometimes the condition, or that on which it depends, is 
 'iot expressed : 
 
 $rommer ©tab! D tjcttt 1 id) nimmer Peaceful staff! 0, had I never 
 
 nut bem ©djroerte bid) ttertaufcljt J changed thee for the sword 1 
 
 1)k$ elenbe SKkrfyeug fonnte mid) ret* This wretched vehicle (instrument) 
 
 ten, brad)te mid) fd)neft }U befreunbe* might save me — might soon con- 
 
 ten ©tdbten. — 8. vey me to friendly cities. 
 
 &en mod)t 1 id) rotffen, ber ber £reitjte I would like to know (the one) who 
 
 mix »on Men if?. — ©. is the most faithful of all to me. 
 
 c. To express an opinion with caution or diffidence : 
 (Sd)tt>erttd) modjte erbeS $einbe3 ^unb* He can (I think) scarcely escape 
 
 fdjaft ftinterg er)n. — ©. the search of the enemy. 
 
 9(ffe3 fonnte julefct nur falfdje3 <&p\d All might (may) finally be decep- 
 
 fein. — ©♦ tion (false play). 
 
 £)er Welti fyd'tte mid) fa ft gefhunigt. The rabble almost (was likely to 
 
 — © t have) stoned me. 
 
 d. After a negative the conditional is used to give empha- 
 sis or intensity to the sentence : 
 
 §lud) fonnett roir itber feine 9?eucrung Nor can we make complaint of any 
 $Iage fiifjren, roeldje in btefer 3eit innovation that has been made 
 irgenb roo gemad)ttt>orbenrodre.-©. any where during this time. 
 
 3d) bin in meinem SeBcn fo glMfid) I have not been so fortunate in my 
 nid)t geroefen, bag id) ba3 ©ergniigen life as often to have experienced 
 oft empfunben f)dtte.— £. the pleasure. 
 
 Obs. — To give additional prominence to what may be regarded aa 
 
 extraordinary, the imperfect of the indicative is sometimes substituted 
 
 for the conditional : 
 
 "£dtte er in biefem Slugenblicfe fid) Had it ignited at this moment, the 
 entiiin'bet, fo roar (for ware) ber best part of its effect would have 
 befie £f)eU feine c 2Birfung serloren.,, been (were) lost. 
 
 33eij>tete. Examples. 
 
 §dttefi bu »on$cenfd)en befTerftetS ge* Hadst thou always thought better 
 
 bctd)t, bu ptteji beffcr and) ge^an* of men (mankind) thou wouldst 
 
 ^elt* — ©. a l s0 have acted better. 
 
 ©ftbe e£ nidjtS UnerftdrttdjeS mel)r, fo If there were no longer any thing 
 
 rnodjte id) ntdjt meljr leben, roeber inexplicable, I should nr longer 
 
 ljux nod) bort. — $t* wish to live, neither here nor 
 
 hereafter. 
 
fdjnell, aU 
 fetn fctfc*..- 
 
 b. 209 
 
 U Your reconciliation was a little too 
 bauerljaft hasty to (allow that it might) be 
 permanent. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SCBrclfciti to depart; 
 £a3 9(menfa, -3, (the) America; 
 9Tnber3, differently, otherwise; 
 SluStranbern, to emigrate; 
 SBeglet'ten, to accompany; 
 Die (Efyre, -, pi. -it, the honor; 
 Dei 8*rembe, -n, pi. -n, foreigner, 
 
 stranger; 
 £>u ©efell'fchaft, -, pL -en, the com- 
 pany; 
 
 sure, certain: 
 
 Exercise 112. 
 
 ©iittg, kind; 
 DaS^en, -en3, pi. -en, the heart; 
 Da3£etpug, -$, (the) Leipsic; 
 
 Sfttpltcb, perilous, dubious ; 
 
 9?ed)t, very, right; 
 T>k <&a$t, -, pi. -n, the business, 
 affair, cause; 
 
 SSerfayren, to act, proceed ; 
 
 2)ernimf tig, reasonable; 
 
 $erfditr>en'bert[cl), wasteful; 
 £ct3 SSefen, -3, pi. -, the being. 
 
 Siufgaoe 112. 
 
 1. £a£ S3efte y wa^biefe gange ®efetlfd)aft ttnm fonnte, ware, gleid) 
 afyicreifen. 2. 2Ber l)atk geglaufrt, ba§ er ein fold)e3 iperg getgen 
 wiirbe ? 3. liefer grembe |atte e3 gewi§ nid)t getljan, wemt wir 
 ilm giittg oeljanbelt fatten. 4. $eht sernttnftiger Sftenfd) tr>m'x?e fo 
 geljantelt l)aoett. 5. £r fonnte red)t gut lefcen, wenn er uid)t fo t>er^ 
 fcfcwentertfd) ware. 6. 3$ fornix gleid) ju itym grtjen, wemt id) 
 nur wu§te, wo er ift. ?. @te ware gewtfj son ber Sriide Ijinafc ge^ 
 fallen, menu tfyre $reunbin fie md)t gel)alteu l)atte. 8. Sr wiirbe 
 elenD fetn, wenn er fo teben miifte wie id). 9. SBernt id) ba$ ge^ 
 wujjt i)'attt, fo ware id) gang anter3 tterfal)ren. 10. 3$ wiirSe mit 
 3ljncn gel)en, wemt id) nid)t fo fciel ju tt)mt f)&tte. 11. SBemt id) 
 ba3 23ud) gefe^en l)atte, fo wiirbe id) e$ gefauft I)a6en. 12. 2£ir 
 wihten fdwn fpred)en lonnen, wenn wtr fleifjig jtubirt fatten. 13. 
 S3enn fie 3eit fatten wiirben fie un£ gewif fcegfeiten. 14. SBemt 
 id) englifd) fonnte, fo wiirbe id) gleid) nad) 2lmerifa ait^warihrn* 
 15. 3&) glaute nid)t, t»a§ Du lange tort Metten wiirbeft, wemt bu 
 au3wantern folfteft. 16. 3^ xoixxU baS £0(3 lawfett, wemt e<3 gut 
 ware. !?♦ £a3 ware eine mi^(id)e ©ac^c, 18* D|ne (Sfyre wiirbe 
 ber 9ftenfd) ein elente* SBcfen fein. 
 
 Exercise 113. 
 
 SlufgaBe 113. 
 
 1. What would you do with this book if it were yours? 2. 
 I would study and try to learn the language that it teaches. 
 
210 LESS 
 
 3. What would you do if you wei 
 and study. 5. I should be satisfied if I could "speak as well as 
 you do. 6. If I had had a teacher I should have learned n uch 
 faster. 1. Would you sell this house if it were yours 1 8. No, 
 I would live in it. 9. I do not believe you could sell it. 10. 
 If the stranger had called, I should certainly have heard him. 
 11. You would have money enough if you were only industry 
 ous. 12. We could have bought the horses if we had had the 
 money. 13. I would write you a German letter if I could. 
 
 14. We should have seen the company if we had been at home. 
 
 15. They would come if they had not so much to do. 16. If 
 he were only here it would be quite a different affair. It. It 
 would not be the business of a month. 
 
 LESSON LVII. Union LVIL 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 1. Besides the verbs denoting natural phenomena (as, eS bon^ 
 ttert, e3 regnet, etc.) which in both languages are alike imper- 
 sonal (§ 88), there are many verbs in German impersonally 
 used, for which the neuter or passive form is required in Eng- 
 lish : 
 
 eg $at ftarf gerepet. It has rained hard. 
 
 eg iagelt unb fd)nett. It hails and snows. 
 
 eg nad)tet fd)on. It is already growing dark (night). 
 
 eg grauet mir »or tym, bettor* I have a horror of him, of it. 
 
 eg gelujlettf)mnacf) Wttem ttag er fte$t. He covets every thing that he sees 
 
 eg freut mid). I am glad, lit. it rejoices me. 
 
 eg fjungert unb burftet ung. We are hungry and thirsty. 
 
 eg tft mtr tnit btefer ©ctdje emfr. I am in earnest in this matter 
 
 eg gelctng or glMte tym eg ju t^im. He succeeded in doing it. 
 
 eg tljut ung Allien fefyr letb. We are all very sorry, 
 
 eg fd)tiunbelt tfmetu They feel dizzy, 
 
 eg tjat ttjm getttp getraumt. He has certainly been dreaming, 
 
 ttm toeldje 3eit taj t eg ? At what time does it dawn (gr<m 
 
 Ihrht) ? 
 
VERBS. 
 
 211 
 
 are sometimes preceded by the 
 object ; the pro! 
 
 2Ru& l&imgert. 2Kir fdjwinbelt. 
 
 3t)ncn l)at gctraumL Una burftet. 
 
 3. £)&ucbtett, titnfett impersonally used, take either the dative 
 or accusative : 
 
 Sfftidj biinft fte fatten red)t, Methinks they were right. 
 
 2)a3 biinft mir bod) ju gra^ltd). That really seems to me too hor« 
 
 rible. 
 
 4. ©efcen, impersonally used, indicates existence in a general 
 and indefinite manner, and is rendered by to be; the object of 
 geben standing as the subject of to be : 
 
 "S3 gtbt bofe ©eijler, bic in be3 2Ren* There are (exist) evil spirts that 
 
 fdjen 23ru|t fid) it)ren SSotynfit) net)* take (to themselves) their abode 
 
 men." in man's breast. 
 
 ©ibt e3 t)eute toad 9?eue3? Is there any thing new to-day? 
 
 SBa3 tfbt% roarum laufen @ic ? "What's the matter, why do you run? 
 
 5. §e$Ien, gebrec&ett and mcmgeln are often used impersonally, 
 generally followed by the dative of a person, with the dative 
 of a thing ; the latter being governed by a n : 
 
 (£3 fer)tte it)m nidjt an gutem SBillen. He was not lacking in good will. 
 "£>em ©liicflid)en fann c$ an 9?td)t$ The happy man can be in want of 
 
 gebredicn." nothing. 
 
 Sin SebenSmitteln mangett e$ i"t)nen. There is a lack (scarcity) of provi 
 
 sions with them. 
 
 6. Verbs, intransitive as well as transitive, are frequently 
 used impersonally and reflexively, to denote an action in pro- 
 gress, or what is customary : 
 
 (E$ fragt fid), ob er e$ roirb tfun fort* 
 
 nen. 
 "£ebt>aft traumt fidj'S unter biefem 
 
 SSaum." 
 (£3 fat)rt fid) gut auf biefem 23agen. 
 (£3 gebiibrt fid) nid)t ba$ ju tt)un. 
 (£3 get)6rt fid) unfcre ©Item yu. tieben 
 
 unb c^rcn. 
 
 It is questionable whether he will 
 
 be able to do it. 
 One dreams briskly (much) under 
 
 this tree. 
 This is a good wagon to ride in. 
 It is not proper to do that. 
 It is our duty (becomes us) to love 
 
 and honor our parents. 
 
 (£3 trdgt fid) nidjt felten ju, i>a$ unter It not unfrequei tly happens that 
 
 einem unfd)einbaren$leibe biefdjbn* 
 lien Salente serborgen finb. 
 
 under an unsightly garb the 
 most splendid talents are con- 
 cealed 
 
212 
 
 7. ©etyett, impersonally used 
 often be rendered by to be ; the dative freqwiii'iy Demg 
 dered by our nominative, or the objective after with : 
 
 It is often with books as with 
 men. 
 
 £)cn SBitdjern gef)t eg oft roie ben 2ften* 
 
 SBie gef)t eg (or rote ge^t eg Sfynen) ? 
 
 63 ge^t i^iten feljr fd)ted)t. 
 
 2Bie geljfg bir? 5p^tr bd'udjt roof}l ganj 
 
 How are you (how goes it) ? 
 They get along very badly. 
 How is't with you ? It seems to me 
 (you get along) quite well. 
 
 33etj>tele. 
 
 * (Eg gifct erne STrt sen 9ftenfd)en, bte 
 man t>iele Safjre lang beobadjten 
 fann, o^ne mit fid) etnig ju roerben, 
 oB man fie in bte Piaffe ber fdjroadjen 
 cber ber oofen Seute fe|en fott." 
 
 " ©g gift SBorter roetdje SHjaten ftnb," 
 
 £>te Srage, oo eg ©efpenfier gebe, fann 
 
 fein sjernimfttger Sttenfd) oeiar)en. 
 
 (£g foH an mix nidjt fe^lett. — @. 
 
 3Bte Sfiing unb $eite bir gefaHen roer* 
 ben, bie in £>amagfug id) bir augge* 
 fudjt, serlanget mid) ju fefyen. — £. 
 
 SSentge Ijakn eg serfudjt, nnb nod) 2Be* 
 nigern ifi eg gelungen. 
 
 6r lapt eg fid) an 9ttd)tg mangeln. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 There is a kind of men whom one 
 may (L. 45. 5. o) observe for many 
 years, without being able to come 
 to a conclusion as to whether to 
 place (locate) them in the class of 
 weak or of wicked people. 
 
 There are words which are deeds. 
 
 The question whether ghosts exist 
 no reasonable man can answer 
 affirmatively. 
 
 I shall not be lacking (absent). 
 
 How (the) ring and chain that I 
 selected for you in Damascus 
 will please you, I long to see. 
 
 Few have tried it, and still fewer 
 have succeeded in it. 
 
 He denies himself in nothing (lets 
 nothing lack to himself). 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SWfjattenb, constant; 
 
 SBUijen, to lighten; 
 
 ©urften, to thirst ; (see 1. <fe 2.) 
 
 ©nt^roet'en (fid)), to quarrel; 
 
 ©retg'nen (fid)), to happen ; 
 £)ie ©rate, -, pi. -n, the harvest; 
 
 $e1jlen, to fail, be deficient in ; 
 
 $rieren, to be cold, freeze, 1.2; 
 
 ® if tig, venomous; 
 
 ■SpetUgen, to hallow; 
 
 Imngerrt, to hunger; (s. 1. &2.) 
 £)te Snfel, -, pi. -n, the island; 
 2Mg3gIanb, -eg, (the) Iceland; 
 
 £etb t$un, to be sorry ; 
 ®te £eute, pi. the people ; 
 2)ag Sttatta, -g, (the) Malta; 
 £)er Sflutf), -eg, the courage ; 
 Der 9?eib, -eg, the envy; 
 £>er Drt, -eg, pi. -e, (Derter) place; 
 Sag ©arbt'nten, -g, (the) Sardinia; 
 £>te @d)Iange, -, pi. -n, the serpent; 
 
 ©djneicn, to snow; 
 £>er ©omttag, -eg, pi. -e, Sunday ; 
 
 Ueberjeu'gen, to convince* 
 
 Serftan'btg, sensible; 
 
 Butragen, to happen, (see 6.) 
 
213 
 
 8«fga*e 114. 
 
 L Sy ift ifym entlid) getungen, fetnen ^reitnD gu iiBe^engen. 2. 
 (Beitt tyUxn ift gelungen, unt tod) ift er ungufricten. 3. S3 fragt 
 fid), 06 ftnr morgen get)en fonnen? 4, £s geprt fid), ten ©ountag 
 gu f)ei(igen. 5- S3 fd)tcft fid, altcre Scute 311 ad)tcn. 6. S3 ereig^ 
 net fid) fclten, tag gute, serftanttge Seute fid) cnt3iv<eien. t. S3 tl)ut 
 tern ^naBen fefyr left, tag er fo nad)lajng gemefen ift. 8. ©3 toiirte 
 mid) fetjr freucn, il)n nnetequfetjen. 9. l^urftet (Sie ? 10. 9Mn, 
 afcer mid) f)ungert unt friert. 11. (Sd tterftel)t fid), tafj er l)eute nid)t 
 fommen wiri), tcnn tie 2Bege fint gu fd)led)t. 12. S3 tragi ftd) 
 gumeilcn 3U, tajj an^altenter Sftegen tie ganje Srnte i^ertirH. 13. 
 2Iuf ter %n\d Waita gifct e3 !eine @d)Iangcn; in (Sarttnten gitt 
 e3 leine SBblfe ; in £eutfd)lant gift e3 feme .ftrofotile ; auf 33lanb 
 gift c3 nidt3 ®tftige3, after in ter gangen SBelt ift lein Drt, too e£ 
 feinen Sftcto giet. 14. Sin 9ftann, fteld)em e3 an Wlufy fcfylt, ifl 
 !ein guter (Suit at. 
 
 Exercise 115. 2lufgaBe 115. 
 
 1. I would be very glad to accompany you home, but 1 am 
 afraid it will rain ; do you not see how it lightens, and hear 
 how it thunders? 2. I think it will snow to-morrow; it is 
 questionable whether our friends will be able to come as they 
 have promised. 3. The peasants have finally succeeded in sell- 
 ing their horses. 4. I am very sorry not to have seen them, 
 but it was so cold while they were in the city that I could not 
 go out. 5. It sometimes happens that lazy people are very 
 rich, but never that they are wise, learned, useful or happy. 
 6. This man is not hungry, but he is very cold. ?. Of course 
 you will visit us as soon as you can, will you not % 8. It is 
 questionable whether he can do that. 9. Is there any thing 
 more useful in the world than cold water 1 10. They say they 
 are very sorry that they did not succeed in convincing us that 
 we were wrong. 11. What is the matter, why are all those 
 people running into the house 1 
 
214 
 
 LESS 
 
 LESSON LVIII. 
 
 1. PARADIGM OF 
 
 © c li e B t werben, 
 
 l« 
 
 * (3 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 tcl) roerbe 1 
 
 I am 
 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 I may 
 
 
 bu roirft 
 
 _^ thou art 
 
 . 
 
 bu roerbeft 
 
 ^. thou mayst 
 
 ■■a 
 
 cr roirb 
 
 £ he is 
 
 
 er roerbe 
 
 ^ he may 
 
 
 mir roerben 
 
 »5 we are 
 
 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 ~ we may 
 
 ■ 
 
 r— t 
 
 tfjr tterbet 
 
 ^ you are 
 
 1—1 
 
 iljr roerbet 
 
 *** you may 
 
 4) 
 
 jtc Herbert 
 
 they are 
 
 
 fie tterben 
 
 they may 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 id)>rourbe 
 
 I was 
 
 
 id) rourbe " 
 
 I might 
 
 
 Du rourbefl 
 
 » thou wast 
 
 
 bu rourbefl 
 
 ^ thoumightst 
 
 ^ 
 
 er rourbe 
 
 ^ he was 
 
 0> 
 
 er rourbe 
 
 ^2 he might 
 
 > 
 
 roir rourben 
 
 y t* we were 
 
 
 
 roir rourben 
 
 *5 we might 
 
 - c 
 
 tf)r rourbet . 
 
 *" you were 
 
 ~* 
 
 iljr rourbet 
 
 ^ you might 
 
 ^3 
 
 fie rourben 
 
 they were . 
 
 
 fie roiirben 
 
 they might 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 id) Bin 
 
 I have 
 
 
 id) fet 
 
 g I may 
 
 
 bu Mjr 
 
 ^ .. thou hast 
 
 05 
 
 bu feiefr 
 
 ■H thou mayst 
 
 - 
 
 pj 
 
 er ift 
 roir finb 
 
 ^| he has 
 " *S S we have 
 
 O 
 
 er fei 
 ttnr feien 
 
 g he may 
 -w we may 
 
 - <U 
 
 it)r feib 
 
 ^S you have 
 
 
 ix)x feiet 
 
 .Si you may 
 
 <» 
 
 fe 
 
 fie finb 
 
 they have 
 
 pQ 
 
 fie feien 
 
 & they may 
 
 e3 
 
 -0 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 id) roar "1 I had 
 
 a; 
 
 id) roare 
 
 g I might 
 
 y 
 
 bu roarft ^ » thou had 
 
 bu rodref: 
 
 •f» thou mightst 
 
 q 
 
 er war [%£ ne nad 
 
 
 
 er roare 
 
 j> he might 
 
 0> 
 
 ■ a) 
 
 rcir roaren | *S S we had 
 
 a 
 
 roir rodren 
 
 ■w we might 
 
 rO 
 
 ifyr roaret | ^^ you had 
 
 
 U)r vodrei 
 
 .Si you might 
 
 l 
 
 \k ttarcn J they had . 
 
 rQ 
 
 fie rodren . 
 
 ^ they might 
 
 e3 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 id) roerbe 1 
 
 g I shall 
 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 g (if) I shall 
 
 
 bit roirft 
 
 ■fi thou wilt 
 
 
 bu toerbefi 
 
 ^ " thou wilt 
 
 ^ 
 
 er roirb 
 
 g he will 
 
 !> 
 
 er roerbe 
 
 g " he will 
 
 £ 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 ~ we shall 
 
 - 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 ** " we shall 
 
 - 
 
 il)r roerbet 
 
 .Si you will 
 
 
 i!)r roerbet 
 
 .Si " you will 
 
 3 
 
 fie roerben 
 
 & they will , 
 
 
 \it roerben . 
 
 g> " they will j 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 ^ I shall 
 
 T3 
 
 id) roerbe ^ .« (if) I sha'd 
 
 ^ 
 
 bu roirft 
 
 ^ -~ thou wilt 
 
 C 
 
 bu roerbejr 
 
 &- " thou wilt 
 
 d 
 
 er roirb 
 
 . iS^T he will 
 
 5 
 
 er roerbe 
 
 -f> • " he will 
 
 J 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 *ii jo we shall 
 
 rO 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 g "we shall 
 +♦ " you will 
 
 iljr roerbet 
 
 w 1 y° n "win 
 
 <D 
 
 iljr roerbet 
 
 1 
 
 fie roerben . 
 
 B they will . 
 
 c3 
 
 fie roerben , 
 
 % " they will . 
 
 5 
 
if) 
 
 TO BE LOVED. 
 
 tution LVm. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICI 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 n3 <d 
 
 12 -a 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 1$ toitrbe 
 bu roiirbefi 
 er roitrbe 
 roir rourbcrt 
 it)r ttiirbet 
 ffc tyiirbert 
 
 SECOND FUTURE, 
 
 tdj roiirbe 1 ^ £ 
 buwiirbej* L| |"i 
 er roiirbe I S'S" ^a o 
 ttur roiirben I 
 
 s 2 o 
 
 tyr roiirbet | ^ g j§ § 
 jtewitrben J s "^ 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 roerbe bit 
 tt>erbe er 
 roerben roir 
 roerbet it)r 
 roerbert fie 
 
 IMPERF. TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. PRESEN1 
 
 gelteBt roerbert, 
 to be loved. 
 
 IMPERF. TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 geliefct roorben feut/ 
 to have been 
 loved. 
 
 PLUPERF. TENSE. PLUPERF. TENSE. 
 
 IMPERFECT 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 roerbert geltefci 
 
 roerbert, 
 to be about 
 to be loved. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 geltefcr, 
 loved. 
 
 PLUPERF. 
 
 lst.FUTURB. 
 
 2d. FUTURS.. 
 
216 
 
 2. The passive voice is formed{B| connecting the auxiM^ 
 ft) e r b en, through all its modes ano^enaes/^gMKie^as^arti' 
 ciple of the main verb : 
 
 ©aS 3)ferb tt>trb £efd)Iagen. Tht horse is being (becoming) shod. 
 
 £>a3 $>ferb rcurbe £efd)Iagen. The horse was (became) shod. 
 
 ©aS §)ferb if! kfd)Iagen roorben. The horse has been (become) shod. 
 
 3. The form of the perfect, with omission of ft).e r t> e tt, is 
 used to indicate a present state or condition, as the result of a 
 previous action ; as, 
 
 £)a£ $Pferb ift fcefdjlagen, the horse is shod — is now in a state resulting 
 irom the act of shoeing (£. e. in a shod condition) ; bct$ $ferb ifi fcefd)lagen 
 tt> r b e n, on the contrary, merely indicates a like previous act, while 
 the result (namely, a present shod condition) may no longer exist. 
 
 4. Passive verbs are often used impersonally to denote an 
 action or event in progress : 
 
 &§ ttnrb gefungen. There is singing ("going on"). 
 
 <E$ ftutrbe M$ fpat in bie Sftadjt &z* The fighting continued (it was 
 
 fod/ten. fought) till late in the night. 
 
 $)ort ttmrbe a He £age getanjt' unb ge* There was dancing and playing 
 
 fiuelt'. there every day. 
 
 <£$ tturbe tfym tton alien ©etten JU From all sides it was run to hia 
 
 •£>iilfe geeilt'. assistance. — Milton. 
 
 £)te ©djontyett ttnrb nut Sunber ange* Beauty is looked at with admira- 
 
 fcltdt, bodj nur ©efdriigfeit enrjMt. tion, but only kindness enchants. 
 
 --SB. 
 
 33etfpiele. Examples. 
 
 ©a3 @IM ber ©cfetffc^aft ttnrb ektt The happiness of society is inter- 
 
 fo fetyr burd) 3:^or^eit aU burdj S5er=* rupted quite as much by folly aa 
 
 fcred/en unb Safter gejlort. — <S>* by crimes and vices. 
 
 ©en <Sd)laf, ben 0Mdjn)um unb bie Sleep, wealth and health (L. 42. 1. 
 
 ©efunb'fyeit gemefit' man nur, roenn a.) are enjoyed only when they 
 
 fte unterfcrodjen roorben (ft nb) . — fft, have been interrupted. 
 
 £)er ©eniuS ttnrb nur ttom ©entu$ ge=* Genius is comprehended only by 
 
 fajjit', bie eble 9?atur' nur tton ifre3 genius, a (the) noble nature only 
 
 ©leid)en (L. 35. 4. 5.)— JR. by its peer. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>er SIugenMtfl, -eg, pi. -e, moment; 
 SluSftnben, to find out, p. 348 ; 
 ©etriibt', afflicted ; 
 £>ereinj?', in the future; 
 
 £>te SrMt'terung, -, pi. -en, the ani- 
 mosity ; 
 GErflet'tern, to climb; 
 (£rnft, earnest, stern; 
 
mois- 
 35ftS ©ertdjt', -eg, pi. -t, tribunal ; 
 
 ©unjiig, favorable, propitious; 
 
 ^er'oet'fuln'en, to bring on; 
 £>er SfUptter, -i, (the) Jupiter; 
 
 5ReIben,.to announce; 
 
 9£ad)bem, after; 
 
 211 
 
 *Pn?me't$eu3, (the) Prometheus; 
 er ©d)metd}ler, -p, pi. -, flatterer; 
 
 ©$miebett, to chain; 
 
 pi. -it, the side; 
 2)er <Strctt, -e$» the combat; 
 
 laufefon, to deceive; 
 2)ag UnglM, -S, eo,the misfortune 
 
 SCTJarn'meilli to assemble; 
 
 SSoffen'ben, to finish ; 
 
 3erf}o'rctt# to destroy 
 
 Exercise 116. 
 
 ShtfgaBe 116. 
 
 1. Dcr gleijjige vo'vco getout, imfc ter Stage ftivt getatelt. 2. £tc 
 fieilftcn gelfen tterten oon ten ©emfeniagern erflettert. 3. £cr 
 giinjitge 2lugcnHicf mirt son tent ^htgen ergrijfen. 4. (S3 »urte 
 meljr gefpiett ats gearoettet. 5. £)er ©treit itmrte auf Beiben Seiten 
 mit grower (Srlnttenmg gefirtjrt. 6. £a3 53 ltd) tji entlid) souentet 
 irorten unb totrt oalD crfc^einen. 7. (Sntltd) iji c3 aitSgefimten toor* 
 ten, met ter £iefc ifh 8. (S3 ttnrt tereinft ein ernjieS ©eridt getjak 
 ten n>crten, nad)tcm afle Golfer tocrtcn fcerfammelt roortcn [ein. 
 9. Ter 9lacft6ar glanM, tag ter 25ater son feinem $tnte getaufd)t 
 trerte. 10. (Sr meltet, ta§ tie gan3e <Sratt jerjiert ir-orten fei. 11* 
 Sftan fagt, rag ter arme $iann forrgef&Ieppt roortcn fei-. 12. Dcr 
 oetriibte 2>ater glaufrt, fein <Sofyt irerte Den rem getnte erfdeffeit 
 ttortcn fein. 13, Tie ^reuntin kfrauptcte, tag fca3 Ungliicf turd) 
 tie @d)ult> te3 9iad6ar3 §erfceigefiit)ii tuorten iuare 14. $rome- 
 ftjeitc t»ar son Jupiter an einen gelfen gejaumeret isortcn. 15. 
 £a3 £au3 mxl son cinem fetjr gefdjuftcn 9Kanne geoaut, 16. £iefe 
 £eute gtauben, pe feien son un3 getditfri'-t irortcn. 17. SBtffffT 
 @ie son isem tiefe Stiver gef&rteren ftJorSen finb ? 
 
 Exercise lit. 2lufgaoe 117. 
 
 1, Do you know why you have been blamed by your friends 1 
 2 I was blamed by them because the letter that has been prom 
 ised by me had not been written before they arrived here. 3. 
 I hope the enemy will be defeated and driven out of the coun 
 try. 4. My letter will have been read before yours will have 
 been written. 5. We are not often hated by those who are 
 loved by us. 6. The bad will be punished and the good will 
 
 10 
 
21S 
 
 be rewarded. 7. Good m< 
 and praised after they are deaT 
 traveler has been found by one of h75iB*'m^«J ! ^Jji^p|W3 l eau- 
 tiful baskets are said (L. 45. 9. b.) to have TTeen made "by the 
 blind man to whom the flute was sent yesterday. 10. Those 
 indolent boys deserve to be punished. 11. There has been more 
 done to day than yesterday. 12. We are often deceived by 
 those who praise us, for we are often praised by flatterers. 13. 
 The hunter says he has been bitten by a bear that had been 
 shot by one of his friends. 14. Has it not yet been found out 
 by whom the money was stolen 1 
 
 LESSON LIX. £ectkm LIX. 
 
 PROPER AND COMMON NAMES. 
 
 1. The proper and common names of places and countries, 
 as also of months, are placed in apposition : 
 
 £>te £5tabt $iund)en ifl bie ^auptflabt The city (of; Munich is the capital 
 beS $ontgreic§§ Sktern. of the kingdom (of) Bavaria. 
 
 ©er 9#onat yjlaxij ifl fturmifdj unb im=> The month of March is stormy and 
 cmgcne^m. disagreeable. 
 
 2. The date of the month (without a preposition intervening) 
 precedes its name : 
 
 Tit ^ad)t stttfcfyen bent ijterten unb The night between the fourth and 
 fiinften STprtl Wax ju btefem flropen fifth of April wa3 designated for 
 Unternetymen fcefiimmt. — ©♦ the execution of this great un- 
 
 dertaking. 
 
 3. Nouns denoting weight, measure, quantity and kind 
 usually stand in the same case as those that they limit. When 
 followed by nouns in the plural, the feminine takes the plural 
 form, while those of the masculine and neuter retain that of 
 the singular : 
 
 <Sr faufte etne Sffc Sudjimb jwci Sffcn He bought an oil of cloth and two 
 <£eibe, cin $Pfunb flcf ee unb jtnei ells of silk, one pound of cotee 
 5>fuub 2nd er. and two po inds of sugar. 
 
N NAMES. 219 
 
 ve a new kind of paper, 
 has three head of cattle. 
 
 ter noun is qualified by some 
 otheiMvorcJTWWaW sfands in the genitive ; in a few phrases, 
 also, the genitive occurs when not thus qualified : 
 
 ©ringe mir etn ©Ia$ biefeS flaren Bring me a glass of that clear wa- 
 
 3£a|Ter3. ter. 
 
 Ginc unjdfjlige Sftenge SSotfS war $cr- A countless multitude of people had 
 
 (•ncefrromt. — 2>. flocked together. 
 
 5. 9ft an tt, when referring to organized bodies of men, re- 
 tains (like sail, horse, etc., in an analogous use) the singular 
 form, with the plural signification : 
 
 Gin fdjroebifd)er©eneral, ber nut etnem A Swedish general, who had re- 
 ad)! taufenb Sftcmrt ftarfen £ecre an mained on the Elbe with an ar- 
 bcr Gibe utrudgeblieben roar, fyielt my of eight thousand men strong, 
 bie ©tabt Sftagbefcurg aufS engfte held the city of Magdeburg close- 
 eingefd)loiTen. — <S. ly invested. 
 
 6. (Sin $ aar {literally a pair) often answers to a few, and 
 Is used, undeclined, before nouns in any case : 
 
 SSarien <Sie nod) etn §)aar Cshmben. "Wait a few hours yet. 
 
 33etfpie(e. Examples. 
 
 ttnb fammeltcn alle ©fccifcn ber jtefccn And he gathered up all the food ol 
 
 Satyre fo im £anbe Gg?ptcn fraren. the seven years which were in 
 
 — Gen. xlJ, 48. the land of Egypt. 
 
 2Me itnfdjutb fyat etnc 2ttenge Slnne^m* (The) innocence has a multitude of 
 
 lidjfeiten. — 2B. graces. 
 
 Gin neueS jroanjigtaufenb SJtamt ftorfee* A new army twenty thousand men 
 
 £eer entjtonb in $ur$cm unter fctnen strong soon came into existent 
 
 Bfatynen. — <3. under his banners. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 9Ibfaf»ren, to set out; 
 £er SfprtX'r -3, (the) April ; 
 £>ie Slrmee', -, pi. -n, the army; 
 £>ie Slrt, -, pi. -en, the kind; 
 S)a6S8atera, -v, (the) Bavaria; 
 2)a$ SBrcmen, -e", (the) Bremen; 
 £)te Glie, -, pi. -n, the ell; 
 2>er gebruat', -3, (the) February; 
 Die $rud)t, -, pi. $m§&, the fruit; 
 £>ie $aui>tftabt, -, pi. -fidbte, the cap- 
 ital, chief city ; 
 
 £)er Sanuar', -3, (the) January , 
 
 £)er Stmt, -3, (the) June; 
 
 £>a$ $ontgreid), -3, pi. -e, kingdom 
 
 SReulid), recently; 
 £)a3 $aar, -e3, pi. -e, the pair, 
 2>a3 3>rcupen, -3, (the) Prussia; 
 2>a3 @acf)fen, -$, (the) Saxony; 
 
 <Sed)3, six; 
 £)a§<Stucf, -e$, pi. -e, piece, head; 
 £>er Scaler, -3, pL -, the thaler ; 
 £>er SMe§§d'nbler, -3, pk -, drover 
 
220 
 
 Exercise 1 18. 
 
 1* 2Iir. erftert Sunt ttirb Die tenee 
 alte SSic^anrlcr t)at fyunDert ©tiid 33ie^ gefauft.^TTgr trinft jetett 
 SRorgert g»ci ©lag SBaffer. 4. SMen @te mir ettt @titfl 23roD 
 flrteit ? 5. 3^ Witt S^nen gmci <5titd gteifdj ge'&en. 6. Sir ml)* 
 ren am ffinf unD 3toangigften Sanuar son Der ©taDt ^etu^orf ab, 
 wrt famen am actofynten ^efrruar in Der (Btabt Bremen an. 7. 
 £cr Sftonat 9ft at ift »icl angene£;mer ate Der 9J?onat 2tpril. 8. £ie 
 ©taDt Berlin ift Die £>anptftaDt De3 ^onigret^g ^reujjen. 9. T>a* 
 ift cine 2trt $rud)t, tie id) nie gefetjen fyafce. 10. Sr tyat gftet faax 
 ipanDfcfynfye unD fed)3 (Ellen £ucfy gefauft. 11. "Eer £om in Der 
 ©tart DJkgDelwg ift fel)r fcfyon. 12. 2)a3 ^bntgretd) ©ad)fen ift 
 fel)r Hem. 13. Sr l)at nocfy ein n>enig @elD, Denn ein guter greunD 
 fyat ifym neultcfy ein $aar Scaler au3 Saiern gefcfyidt. 
 
 Exercise 119. 2lufga6e 119. 
 
 1. Here is a little piece of paper for you. 2. Our friends 
 live in the city of Vienna. 3. The shoemaker has sent you a 
 pair of shoes. 4. I have bought three barrels of flour and a 
 hundred pounds of coffee. 5. The kingdom of Prussia is larger 
 than the kingdoms of Saxony and Bavaria. 6. We were in 
 the city of Dresden in the month of June. 7. The city of Dres- 
 den is rich and very beautiful. 8. This man says he has a new 
 kind of paper. 9. Will you give me a glass of water 1 10. 
 Will you not take a glass of wine? 11. I have already drank 
 a glass of wine. 12. We remained only a few days, and did 
 not see much. 13. On the sixteenth of August we were in the 
 city of Cologne. 
 
 -+—**■ 
 
 LESSON LX. Cectiou LX. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1. The following prepositions are construed with the geni 
 tive : namel \ 
 
count (01); 
 SnnerfjaU, inside, within ; 
 3 e n f e i t ($), beyond, on the other 
 
 side; 
 $r aft, by virtue of; 
 8 a h t, according to ; 
 Dber^alb, above; 
 It m — w i 11 e n, for the sake of ; 
 
 221 
 
 a dj t e t , notwithstanding; 
 rf)ctt fc, below; 
 llnfern, untoeit, not far from, 
 
 near; 
 $8 e r m i 1 1 e I ft, m i 1 1 e I ft, by meana 
 
 of; 
 35 e r m o g e, by dint of; 
 2Bdl;renb, during; 
 2® eg en, on account of; 
 £ang3, along; 
 £ r o t?, in spite of ; 
 3 u f o I g e, according to. 
 
 In German grammars the list is sometimes found as follows 
 
 Hntoeit, mttteljl, fraft unb toatjrenb, 
 Saut, »ermoge, ungead)tet, 
 Doerfyatb unb unterfyatb, 
 Snncrfyalb unb aufierfyalb, 
 jDieSfett, jenfeit, fjalben, tnegen, 
 <5tatt, au$ Iang3, jufolge, tro§, 
 
 ©tetyen mit bem © e n i 1 1 », 
 Dber auf bie Srage, weffcn?- 
 £>od) ifl fyier md)t ju sergeffen, 
 Dajj bet biefen I e § t e n £> r c t, 
 2lud) ber £> a 1 1 » rtd)tig few 
 
 2. £ a n g 3 and t r o j? may be used also with the dative • 
 
 £d'ng3 bem ©eflabe (or be£ ©ejlabeS) Along the shore of the ocean. 
 bc3 Stteere*.— %. 
 
 Zxo% metner 2Utfftd)t, meinem fd)arfen In spite of my inspection, my close 
 ©ucben nod) $oftbarfetten, nod) ge»» scrutiny still valuables, still so- 
 tyeime ©djdfce. — <S. cret treasures (are concealed). 
 
 3ufolge preceding the noun, takes the genitive; following it the 
 dative : 
 
 Sufolge be3 SBefeljtS (bem S3efef)le ju= 
 folge) bletbe id) f)ter. 
 
 In conformity to the order I shall 
 (L. 38. 1. c.) remain here. 
 
 3. Stttlattg, before a noun, also requires the genitive; 
 after a noun, the accusative : 
 
 9kufd)e Slufi baa X$al entlang. — ©. Rustle river along the vale. 
 2£tr fatten ben ganjen Sag gejagt ent* We had hunted all day along tfm 
 lang be$ 2Balbgebirge3. — o. woody mountains. 
 
 4. Jpalb, t) at ben or JjatBer must follow the noun ; u n* 
 g c a d) t e t and to e g e n may precede or follow it : 
 
 Sftidjt bed 33etfptel3 tyalben, fonbern ber Not on account of the example, but 
 5>fltd)t wegen foil man in ber ©efetf* on account of duty should one 
 fd)aft tyoflidj feirt* be polite in society. 
 
222 
 
 3S0N LX. 
 
 5. The genitire is place( 
 Urn feineS ftreunbeS nnflen $at er if 
 gcU)an. 
 
 C. § ci i B e n, tu e g e n and ft) t U e it are u!iii compounded 
 with pronouns, t being substituted for the final r, or added after it: 
 
 Petite t roegen (instead of metne r ttegen), for my sake ; 
 (Seine t fyctlfcen (instead of feme r fjalfcen), for Lis sake; 
 Urn beffent nnflen (instead of urn, beffennnu'en), for the sake of whom 
 
 or which. 
 
 t. $ n jt a 1 1 may be divided ; (1 a 1 1 taking its original char- 
 acter as a noun : 
 (Er bient an fetneS $8attx$ ©tatt (or He serves in his father's stead (or 
 
 anjlatt feineS SJaterS). instead of his father). 
 
 8. 2B e g e tt, preceded by id o tt, was formerly employed as a 
 substantive ; hence certain expressions like the following still 
 occur : 
 
 S8 o tt OiedjtS to e g e n. On account of justice (right), 
 
 ©efct 9?ed)ertfcf>aft »on tt) e g e tt beS Give account of (in reference to) the 
 »ergoffnen 2Muie$.—<5* spilled blood. 
 
 33eij>lele. 
 
 2Ran mufj bie Sugenb urn u)rer felt ft 
 
 ttMflen Uekn, ober ftc ganj aufgekn. 
 
 — ©. 
 SnbienS roegen fjatte man bie fpanifcOen 
 
 Sdnber entsolfert. — @. 
 SRittelfi feineS SBcijlanbeS fefcte id) e$ 
 
 burd). 
 
 Examples. 
 
 One must love virtue for its own 
 sake, or give it up (renounce i t) 
 entirely. 
 
 For the sake of India the Spanish 
 territories had been depopulated. 
 
 By means of his assistance I accom- 
 plished it. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SlnTcmgen, to arrive ; 
 
 Slu^fufyren, to accomplish; 
 
 9lu|erfyal(>, outside of; 
 T)it 23efefyl', -e£, pi. -e, command ; 
 
 SBegrei'fen, to comprehend, 350; 
 
 2)ennod), notwithstanding; 
 
 2)teffeit3, on this side; 
 SDie ISDimfelfyeit, -, the darkness ; 
 5Die greunbfdjaft, -, pi. -en, friend- 
 ship; 
 
 #alben, fyatfier, on account of; 
 
 SnneJ f)ctlb, -w ithin ; 
 
 SenfeitS, on the other side^ 
 
 CanaS/ along; 
 
 Dberbalb, above; 
 £)ie ^cfli -i pi. -en, the pestilence 
 
 §h'ftd)tig, magnificent; 
 2)er $l)ein,-e3, the Rhine ; 
 
 £ro§, in spite of; 
 £)a3 lifer, -3, pi. -, the shore; 
 
 llm-rotllen, for the sake of* 
 
 Unfcrn, near, not far from 
 
 Ungectd)tct, notwithstanding* 
 
 Unterfyalb, below. 
 
GENITIVE. 
 
 223 
 
 Exercise 120. 
 
 swarming, -/ pi. -en, warning ; 
 S3ca.cn, on account of; 
 23ut&c«, to rage; 
 Bufolac, according to; 
 Surutffe&ren, to return. 
 
 Stufgafce 120. 
 
 ] Sfnftatt be3 £crnt fam ber Xiencr. 2. 3nitertyal& bet (£tabl 
 l»utt;cte Me $eft, unb aujjer^alb terfelbcn tier gcinb. 3. £Sa$ ties* 
 feitc te5 SH^eineS liegt gcljbrt gu j&entfdjlanb, was jenfettd Uegt, ju 
 granfrcidj. 4. ©eben @ie i()m ba3 ©eft), ber greunbf^aft obcr lev 
 Strmuti) fyalbcn? 5. Sir fegcCtert tang* be3 UferS, fet3 imr an bet 
 (Start anlangten. 6. Sr crMcit tie 23cIoftmmg fraft ettte'3 33efe$Itf 
 ter Sftegtcrung. 7. Dbcrftalb ter 23rucfe auf tern Serge ftebt ein 
 pradtiges ©djlojj. 8. £rotp alter 3Bamungett aor ten ©efafyrcn 
 wagte er e3 tennod). 9. Urn fctitcr (Efocrn toiUtn fetjrt er Bait ^u* 
 riicf. 10. Ungeadjtet ber £unfeI6eit tyafce id) tf;n eilanut. 11. Sr 
 ttotwte imterfyalb ter ©tabt, imtoett tco Sluffes, 12. Unfern be$ 
 3Kccre3 lag bao ©djlojj auf I)o^em gefje*. 13. Unwcit ter ©tabt 
 ijt tcr berufymte Skrmbnmnen. 14. Sr famt c3 sermiitetft fcines 
 ©eltes auefufyren. 15. £a$ fannft in »ermbge betneS SerftcmbeS 
 begreifen. 16. liefer 9Jiann ift ivafyrenb femes garden SebenS me 
 Iran! gewefert. 17. SSegen btefeS Ungludu ijt er fe|r betriibt. 18. 
 3ufolge tiefeS 33efefyte3 ift er gteid) abgcrcift. 
 
 Exercise 121. 
 
 Slufgabe 121. 
 
 1. The servant came instead of m} friend. 2. The pestilence 
 raged within the entire state. 3. That which lies on this side 
 of the river belongs to the rich merchants, and that which lies 
 on the other side, to poor fishermen and day laborers. 4. Do 
 you visit him on account of his money or his poverty 1 ? 5. Wr 
 walked along the shore of the river. 6. He received this re* 
 ward by virtue of a command of the king. 1. We saw the black 
 slouds above the city. 8. In spite of his promise he did it 
 nevertheless. 9. For the sake of his poor mother he still re- 
 mained in his native country. 10. Notwithstanding the deep 
 snow and the cold weather he went. 11. The building stands 
 below the city, near the stream. 12. The castle lay upon lofty 
 
224 
 
 rocks, not far from the set 
 in Germany is near the Gian£ 
 plish it by means of his friends. 
 his diligence. 16. He saw his friend'duPln^Ws journey. 17, 
 He is so sad on account of the death of his friend. 18. Accord- 
 ing to the officer's command he remained. 
 
 LESSON LXL 
 
 flection LXI. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1. The following adjectives are construed with, and usually 
 follow, the genitive : 
 
 33ebiirf'tig, in want, wanting; 
 SSertotfy'tgt, necessitated, needing; 
 SSenutjjt', conscious, aware ; 
 (Eingebertf, mindful; 
 $dl)tg, capable; 
 $rof), glad; (see 4.) 
 ©erodrt'tg, expecting; 
 ©ett>tJ3'", sure, certain ; 
 ■ftitnbtg, having knowledge; 
 Sebig, free, single, void; 
 SJMdjttg, powerful, master of; 
 JQuirt, clear, rid; 
 
 £r)eiU)aftig, participant, sharing; 
 Ueberbrii^ig, tired, disgusted; 
 23erbd'd)tig, suspected, suspicious; 
 SSerlujt'ig, deprived of, having lost; 
 SQBurbtg, worthy; 
 ®eroar)r', aware; 
 ®eroofyitl\ accustomed; 
 2o£, free, rid; 
 •iDUtbe, tired, weary; 
 ©art, satiated; 
 ©Olf, full ; 
 2Bertr), worthy. 
 
 Seute, bie eine grope 3Bo^Itt)at glet$, People who can at once, without 
 
 o\)m SBebenfert, anne^oien fimrten, 
 ftnb ber 2Bcf)lrt)at felten roiirbtg. — 
 
 ©o M|l bu beirteS (£ibe$ quirt. — Gen. 
 xxiv, 8. 
 
 hesitation accept a great kind- 
 ness are seldom worthy of the 
 kindness. 
 Thou shalt be clear from this thy 
 oath, 
 
 Die metftcn Skvlufie fmb etneS SrfaijeS Most losses are capable of a repa- 
 fa|ig. — ©« ration. 
 
 2. The last seven adjectives of the above list are more com- 
 monly used with the accusative : 
 
 £>en JfimfHer ttirb man nid)t geroa^r. The artist is not perceived. (One 
 
 — ©. does not become aware of, etc.) 
 
 £)er SBeutel ijl soott ®elb. The purse is full of money. 
 
GENITIVE. 225 
 
 present race ■will not get rid 
 'of this misfortune. 
 He, however, says he is tired of it. 
 
 ~^~^P^^^B~WFed. by many writers, often takes, with 
 the accusative, the ending e r : 
 <S"e rear geijhridv setter Stalertte.-®. She -was witty, full of talent(s). 
 
 4. %voi) is often followed byiiber with the accusative; 
 q e rr i £ , leer and soil by s^on, and . f d tj i g by $ it : 
 
 <Si: ftnb ju attem SSofen fa$ig. They are capable of every thing bad 
 
 5. © cfr u 1 J i 3 with the genitive signifies guilt?/ ; with the 
 accusative, indebted: 
 
 (£r iji genn§ feinc3 25ert>redi)en$ fcfyul* He is certainly not guilty of any 
 
 big. crime. 
 
 SSie 9tel i|l er un$ rDol# fdjulbig ? How much is he probably indebted 
 
 to (does he probably owe) us ? 
 
 6. 2S e r 1 1) with the genitive answers to worthy ; with the 
 accusative it denotes the value of a thing, and is rendered by 
 worth : 
 
 Sr ijr after Sfyrert toertr)* He is worthy of all honor. 
 
 (£3 ift feirtert ©rcfd)en rnertl). It is not worth a groat. 
 
 In referring to one's wealth, r e i ct), instead of ro ertt), is employed: 
 ©r iji tyimbert taufenb ©ulbcrt retcr). He is worth a hundred thousand 
 
 florins. 
 
 7. Formerly, in denoting the relation of magnitude, the gen- 
 itive was used ; and it is thus, in a few expressions, still re- 
 tained : 
 
 (52 t|t etne3 2)aume$ bicf . It is a thumb's thick(ness). 
 
 8. The genitive is often employed adverbially, in which case 
 feminine nouns sometime take 3 : 
 
 ©er)ert Ste be3 5fto rgertS ? Do you go in the morning? 
 
 3d) gebe 91 a dj 13 urn rote ein gequal* I go about at night as a tormented 
 ter ©eift. -o. spirit (goes). 
 
 9. The genitive, denoting possession, frequently precedes 
 the governing noun : 
 
 *£>er SHtert Sftcttfj, bcr Surtgert The advice of the old, the action 
 2 bat ma$t flrummeS grab." of the young makes crooked 
 
 straight. 
 10* 
 
126 
 
 3#Jn ifi b c 8 50? o rt b c d milbcre . 
 
 $eit inner ber ©terne Mi£enbel 
 
 @lan$; fc&Bniflbei Gutter Uth 
 
 lityt ^ofyeit jroifdjen ber ©otyrte feu*- motTI^ jorel v-u^^^^Eid the 
 
 riger $raft.— €>♦ fiery strength of her sons. 
 
 '211 Ier £ eute Sreurtb ijl a Her (To be) every body's friend is (to 
 
 Ceute ©eel," be) every body's fool. 
 
 10. The genitive of personal pronouns, when used part- 
 itively, precedes the governing word ; as does also, frequently, 
 that of nouns : 
 
 2)er 9lrfceiter in bent SBein&erge The laborers in the vineyard of 
 
 beSjenigert, ber ben lefcten £or)rt er* him who gives the last reward 
 
 ityeilr, fmb SBenige. are few. 
 
 ttnfer (Einer ntup »on alien ©orten One of us (our race) must live upon 
 
 2)?enfcr;en lefcen. — £♦ all sorts of people 
 
 Sill e r guten £)inge ftnb brei. ©prid)* All good things are three. Adage. 
 
 tooxt. (" Three is the charm.") 
 
 11. The genitive is often used partitively with omission of 
 the governing word : 
 
 ©orgfetm bracljte bie Gutter bed fla* The mother carefully brought (some 
 
 ren ^errltc^en SBeine 3. — & . of) the clear excellent wine. 
 
 (Er ircmf bed 33ad)ed. — 1 Kings He drank of the brook, 
 xvii 6. 
 
 12. Formerly the genitive was often used as the predicate 
 after the verb f e i tt, but now seldom occurs : 
 
 ©ie ©rbe tfi bed £erm. — 1 Cor. x. 26. The earth is the Lord's, 
 ©efit bem $atfer road bed $atfer$ ifi. Render to Caesar the things that 
 — Mark, xii. 17. are Caesar's. 
 
 23etj>ute. Examples. 
 
 liefer 2flenfd) if! eined £>iefcflcu)l3 fc^r This man is strongly suspected of 
 
 i>crba#'ttg* theft. 
 
 (£r ifi fcirted Ranged serln'fiig erlld'rt' His rank has been declared for- 
 
 ttorben. feited. 
 
 2>er Strme, ber einer ©adje kbitrftig The poor (man) who is destitute 
 
 ifi, ifi geroijfnt'ttd) and) einer cmbem of one thing is commonly also 
 
 frerto'ttytgt, (needy) in want of another. 
 
 £>cd 8<u)ren3 geroor)ttt', Mrt id) fcalb Accustomed to ride, I am soon tirod 
 
 bed ©everts miibe. of walking. 
 
 £te SGBelt ifi roller 2B iberfprud).— ©. The world is full of contradiction (3). 
 
k 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH 
 
 ric ■ 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 22T 
 
 SlmHrttTuien, to intrust 
 2)er SluferMjalt, -e$, the sojourn ; 
 
 53anbigen, to break, tame ; 
 
 Scburfttg, in need of; 
 
 Seno'tfJtgt, in want of; 
 £ic SBefttm'mung, -, pi. —en, destiny; 
 
 S3erDu£t', conscious; 
 Xtt Grfaf?', -c£, the restitution ; 
 
 £rroei'rf)cn, to soften ; 
 
 £n>tg, eternal; 
 
 gafyig, capable; 
 
 gref), glad; 
 
 Stner <£&d)t frol) roerben, to en- 
 joy a thing; 
 
 ©eroafyr', aware; 
 £aS ©tiicf, -e$, 3, the fortune ; 
 2)er £>aber, -S, the quarrel ; 
 
 £errfd)ett, to rule ; 
 2)ic £itife, -, pi. -n, the aid, help ; 
 
 TEE EXERCISES. 
 
 itraftr by virtue of ; 
 ^ie Orotic, -, pi. -n, the crown; 
 
 SKad&ltgi master of; 
 Der Stun, -e§, pi. -e* the mind ; 
 £>a3 Sptabtle&ett, -3, the city life ; 
 Xte Starfc, -, the strength: 
 Set Sell, -g, (the) Tell; 
 
 lleberbrufjtg, tired, weary, 
 SHe tteberet'lung* -, pi. -en, the pre- 
 cipitancy ; 
 
 ttneingeDcnf, unmindful ; • 
 
 Itngcroofynt, unaccustomed; 
 
 llntreu, faithless ; 
 
 SJerfcrht'getti to spend, p. 346; 
 
 $erbdd}'tig, suspected; 
 
 3$er§aften> to arrest; 
 3>er SBcrluiV, -eg, pi. -c, the loss; 
 2>cr 25crratb'/ -c3, the treason; 
 
 SSiirbig, worthy. 
 
 Exercise 122. 
 
 Slufaafce 122. 
 
 1. 2C>enn tvi5 3>fcrfe fcuier ©tarfe kiiutft ware, fonnte 9ttemanb 
 e3 fcanfctgeiu 2. 3$ Mn &iet ©eft fdntlrig, afrcr id) Bin feineS 33er^ 
 JredjeitS fdjulMg. 3. (Er mitrbe ttefe 2Ir6eit, tercn er ganj ungerootmt 
 ift, ni&t tfyun, ttemt er nid)t fce$ %lre3 fcenottjigt foare. 4. 3? ^Ml 
 SBrufcer tcincr §iilfe fceriirfttg, fo frage ntdtf, c6 cr rerfelfren »urfcst0 
 ift. 5. 9)iand)er 9Jienfd) tterfcringt fern 2e6en unemgerenf (drier 
 e»ig«t Seftimmung. 6. ©ot$e SScrtujle ftnc einc3 (Erfafcea fatjtg. 
 7. $ein ©eijtger fann fetneS ScBenS froX) merfcen. 8. (Er ift fetner 
 Uefcereilung gcwaljr ge moreen. 9. 3d) Hn tco Se&eitS unt> $m* 
 jttettf mute. 10. £er tapfere Sett ift fret unt) femes Slrmeo mad)* 
 tig. 11. (Er tyat memert £ut anftatt fred feinigen genommen. 12 
 IBaljrenfc meines Slufentfjafts in 2X wurbe id) bed ©tabtfttas ganj 
 u&cmujjig. 13. $raft fclneS 2tmteS «er$aftete er atfe, bte er be3 
 §Serrat$3 fcerbadjtigfcielt. 14. Urn fetnec Waters SKillen Meifct cr in 
 fciefer ©telle, ofrgleid) er einer fceffem iriirtig ift. 15. "£:er «5tonig 
 imt) tie $atferm beS tangen Raters miiDe, crnmd)ten tfyren fyarten 
 ©mn unt mad)ten entity griebe." 16. Xtefer Sag mar ti, urn 
 teffenttttCen er $rone unt) Sefcen tern untreuen ©lucre aimrtraute. 
 
Exercise 123. 
 
 1. We live on the other side 
 weather we remained at home. 3. He HHUil^^W^WH^nstead 
 of his cap. 4. Those people are destitute of money, and in want 
 of help. 5. They are not tired of walking, but they are weary 
 of the road. 6. This is a labor to which I am entirely unac- 
 customed, and I do it only because I am in want of m:>ney, 
 7. Men often become guilty of a crime because they owe much 
 money. 8. I am sure of his innocence, for I know that he is 
 not capable of such a crime. 9. Every industrious man who 
 is mindful of his destiny does not become tired o'f his life. 10. 
 Our friends live within the city. 11. During our sojourn in 
 Berlin my friend became master of the language. 12. For his 
 friend's sake he remains here, although he is tired of city life. 
 13. He is conscious of his strength, sure of his aim, and certain 
 of his cause. 14. This scholar is in want of money, and in need 
 of good books, 15. By virtue of his office he has at length 
 arrested the criminal. 16. He is not conscious of his strength. 
 1*1. This young stranger is worthy of a better situation. 
 
 LESSON LXII. flection LXII. 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 1. The following reflexive verbs require the genitive after 
 the accusative (or dative) which they govern ; namely, 
 
 (£ntH5'ben, to dare ; ©etro'jlen, to be assured; 
 
 (Sntbrecfy'en, to forbear; Sftufjmen, to boast of; 
 (£ntf)al'ten, to abstain ; ©cfyanun, to be ashamed* 
 Sntfcfytct'gen, togetridof; Ueberfjefcen, to boast; 
 Sntfm'nen, to remember; ttnterfangen, to attempt; 
 ©r&ctr'men, to pity; ttnternunben, to venture; 
 
 (Srfredj'en, to presume; SSermeffen, to vaunt; 
 (Srin'nern, to recollect ; 
 (£rfiif)'nen, to dare ; 
 ©rwefj'ren, to keep off; 
 
 Sfnmapcn, to usurp; 
 Slnnetjunen, to protect ; 
 S3ebie'nen, to avail; 
 SBeflet f §en or kflei'jiitgen, 
 
 to endeavor; 
 23ege'bcn, to yield up; 
 SBemdd/tigen, to seize; 
 SSemei'ftern, to master; 
 23cfd)ei'ben, to concede; 
 ©efm'nen, to consider; 
 
 (Entcut'pera, to abstain; $reuen, to rejoice ; 
 
 35er|e f)en, to expect; 
 SBefyren, to resist; 
 SBetgern, to decline; 
 SSunbern, to wonder at. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 229 
 
 o n 5 erfcarmen, freuen, fdjfimen 
 ffmrten and freuen by an f : 
 
 IDciner^^By* \i6)(]\, W^&cibxfydt, Thy holy signs, Truth, deception 
 
 Ijat ber 25etrug fid) angema^t. — ©♦ has usurped. 
 
 3d) benP be3 2lu3brud3 nod) rcd)t ttof)I I still very well remember the ex- 
 beg einfi bu felber bid) son ifjm be* predion that you once used in 
 bientefl. — £♦ reference to him. 
 
 <5ie ertnnert fid) ifjreS 3)erfpred)en3. She remembers her promise. 
 
 2)er fianbmann rityme ftd) be$ $[tug$. Let the peasant boast of the plow. 
 --©. 
 
 Obs. — S3 e fy a 1 1 e Xi, when referring to a thing learned, answers to re- 
 member : 
 3d) farm bie Seamen nid)t b e § a 1 1 e rt. I can not remember the names. 
 
 2. S y g e I ii ft e t (or e 3 I ii ft e t) , e 3 jantmert, e 3 r e u et, 
 e 3 1 t) tit fi (it, also take a genitive after the accusative : 
 
 £ofynt ftd) 1 3 ber 2ftittye ju r)ojfen unb ju Is it worth the trouble to hope and 
 
 fireben ? — ©♦ to strive ? 
 
 Unb ba er ba$ SSoIf fal) jammerte i$n But when he saw the multitudes, 
 
 beffelben. — Matt, ix, 36. he was moved with compassion 
 
 on them. 
 
 (E $ gelufiet is sometimes followed by na d) (L. 57. 2.) : 
 
 SBenn bid) fo nad) ^dmpfen Iitjtete. If you so longed for contests. 
 
 TRANSITIVE VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE. 
 
 3. The following transitive verbs govern the genitive of a 
 thing, and the accusative of a person : 
 
 SfnFlagen, to accuse; SSertrojVen, to put off, Sntlaf'fen, to dismiss; 
 23elef)'ren, to instruct; feed with hope; ©ntfejj'en, to displace, 
 
 SBercw'ben, to bereave; SBiirbigen, to deign; (£ntu>6t) nen, to disuse; 
 
 SBefdutlb'tgen, to accuse; Setytn, to accuse ; £o3fpredjett/ to acquit; 
 
 Situie'ben, to exempt (See 4 next page.) Ueberfiify'ren, to convict, 
 
 from; Sntbtn'ben, to release ; tteberjeu'gen, to con 
 
 «£nue'btgen, to set free (Sntbto'fjen, to uncover; vince; 
 
 ^abnen, to warn; (Sntflet'ben, to divest; ©erftdj'ern, to assure, 
 
 Iteberfje'ben, to exempt Sntlct Den, to discharge; ascertain. 
 
 2BeId) anberer <Simbe fUgt bad £er$ Of what other sin does your (the) 
 
 bid) an ? — <o. heart accuse you ? 
 
 Csitter gropen $urd)t ftnb rotr entlebtgt. Of a great fear we are relieved, 
 — @. 
 
lxh. 
 
 9Ud)t flleta».ut$0 sei^t Set (£ftf<5^He who knows Don Caward< 
 
 roer i^rt fennt.--©. 
 (£r ufcerjeugte fit fetner ttnfdjulb. 
 
 4. The last eleven of the above list are often followed Dy 
 »on: marten by a it, and aertrbjien by a tt f : 
 
 Sir ftnb »on fetner ttnfdjulb fifcerjeugt. We are convinced of his innocence 
 £>er £ob enttnn'bet »on erjttung 1 nen Death releases from compulsory 
 
 §>flid)tett. — <2>. (compelled) duties. 
 
 T)ied STOanifeft fpridjt lod bad £eer son This manifesto releases the army 
 
 bed ©etyor'famd 9)flid)ten. — ©. from the duties of obedience. 
 
 VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 5. The following verbs, though sometimes construed with 
 the genitive, oftener take, except the last two, the accusative : 
 
 SBebiir'fen, to need; (Srttal/nen, to mention; SSergef'fen, to forget; 
 
 SBegelj'ren, to desire; ©ente'pen, to enjoy; Sffiafyren, to preserve ; 
 33raud)en, to need ; ©eroat/ren, to perceive ; 2Baf)rnefymen, to per- 
 
 (Entbefy'ren, to lack; $PjTegen> to take care of; ceive; 
 
 (Sntratlj'en, to dispense ©djonen, to spare ; (Erman'geln, to lack, 
 
 with; SSerfelj'lett/ to miss; 
 
 (Er fecbarf bed ©elbed (or bad ©elb). He needs (is in need of) money. 
 
 ©rrodtynte er ber (or bte) <Sadje ? Did he mention the matter ? 
 
 ©djone ben (or bed) 2frmen* Spare the poor man. 
 
 (Er fann btefe (or biefer) ©ad)en leidjt He can easily do without (lack) 
 entbefyren. these things. 
 
 6. 21 dj t e n and tt) a r t e tt govern the genitive or accusative : 
 
 3d) adjte um (or feiner). I regard (esteem) him. 
 
 With a u f ; a dj t e n signifies to pay attention to, to observe ; and to at" 
 ten, with auf, to wait for : 
 
 3d) ad)te auf bad road er fagt. I attend to what he is saying, 
 
 ©te ttarten auf imd. They are waiting for us. 
 
 ?. barren governs the genitive, or is follewed by the ao 
 cusative with a it f : 
 
 SEBir barren beiner (or auf bid)). We wait for (depend on) thee. 
 
 8. © e b e tt f e tt (or b e tt ! e tt) governs the genitive, or is fol- 
 lowed bj the accusative with a tt : 
 
 ©ebenfe metner (or an mid)). Think of (remember) me. 
 
AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 231 
 
 ■ 
 
 Pn t e n govern the genitive, or 
 e with it b e_r : 
 
 Sd) fpcTTe P . I mock (deride) them. 
 
 (£$ ftnb tticp Slfle fret, bte i^rer tfetren They are not all free who deride 
 fpotten. — ©. their chains. 
 
 10. Many other verbs and adjectives were formerly followed 
 by the genitive, some of which are still retained : 
 
 (fcie flerben £>unger3. They are dying of hunger, 
 
 ©ie finb tea 3>rei|"c3 einig. They are agreed as to the price. 
 
 £ter i|t mcineS 23lci£>en3 fttdjt. Here is not my abiding-place. 
 
 Sftcm tyat ifjri bc3 SanbcS sernnefen. He has been banished from the 
 
 country. 
 Verbs governing the genitive, when used passively, take the imper- 
 lonal form : 
 2)einer nnrb nod) gebad)t. You are still remembered. 
 
 SetfpteU. 
 
 Sdjdme bid) nicr)t bcr ©parfamfeit. 
 3Rc$r aU it, $ebt ifm baS ©lucf, benft 
 fetner alten tyreunbe ber (S^rcmnann. 
 
 2)er ^reunbe tttrb ntdjt metyr gebadjt'. 
 
 — <S. 
 SStr fatten fetner ©efcfl'fdjaft entBe^ 
 
 ren fonnen. 
 D fdjonet mem! — 3. 
 ©enie'^e be£ Sebend, after mit 6$ren. 
 2Benn id) feineS Setra'gettS aud) ge=» 
 
 fdjroei'gen wottte, muj? id) feme Sfte* 
 
 ben tabeln. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Be not ashamed of frugality. 
 
 More than ever, does the man of 
 honor, if prosperity elevates him, 
 think of (remember) his friends. 
 
 The (your) friends are no longer 
 remembered. 
 
 "We could have dispensed with hia 
 company. 
 
 0, spare me. 
 
 Enjoy (the) life, but with honor. 
 
 Even if I would be silent concern- 
 ing his behavior, I must blame 
 his talk. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Serau'feen, to rob; 
 DtC Srljal'tung, -, the preservation ; 
 
 ©rin'nern. to remind: 
 
 Srrodfy'nen, to mention ; 
 
 ©eben'fen, to think of, p. 346 ; 
 
 $*rb, harsh, bitter; 
 £er flampf, -eg, pi. tfampfe, contest; 
 
 Maum, scarcely; 
 £er ftbrper, -3, pi. -, the body; 
 Der Summer, -3, the grief; 
 
 $Pflegen, to take care of, nurse; 
 
 <Sd)cnen, to spare ; 
 
 SDie 
 
 2>ie 
 
 £>ie 
 
 2>er 
 
 Die 
 
 £)ie 
 'Die 
 
 <3eete, -, pi. -n, the soul; 
 (Sorge, -, pi. -ft, the care; 
 ©orgfctltig, careful; 
 <3pijare, -, pi. -tt# the sphere; 
 ©potten, to deride; 
 2"cb, -e3, the death ; 
 Sereb'Urtg, -, pi. -en, the i ii 
 
 provement, ennoblement; 
 5>erfe()'len, to miss; 
 S?cdJfeI, -§, pi. -, vicissitude; 
 5Biege, -, pi. -n, the cradle; 
 3Bnrje, -, ph -n, the seasoning 
 
Exercise 124. 
 
 1. £3 (L. 28. 9.) fcfyont tier ^rie^ol 
 $mb(etn$ in t)cr 2Biege. 2. £>er ^ranle s^pp|irnei^C}mer$itt, 
 ber £ranernbe feineS ^ummer», bte SIrmntfy i^rer ©orgen. 3. 
 Sftancfyer Sftenfdj pflegt fo forgfalttg fetneS $orper3, bag er feiner 
 ©eete taunt gebenft. 4. 3fyr fiircfytet ber ©pfyare gu jjerfetoten, bte 
 eureS ®eifte3 miirDtg ift. 5. ©entejje be3 Sefiens, after gebenfe aucfj 
 t»es3 5tot?ed^ 6. T)te greuben ber ©rbe fcebiirfen ber SBiirge beg $er* 
 kn 2Bed)fel5 gn tfyrer (5rt)altimg nnb $ereblung. 7. 2Ber be3 Utiis 
 glMicfyen nid)t fdjont, fonbern beffelfcen fpotten fann, ber serbtent, 
 %a$ man au§ feiner im Ungliicf uergeffe* 8* 3fyrfg grennbes tt?ar^ 
 tet nod) ein fdjt»erer $ampf. 9* £>e3 ftontgS tr-nrbe Ijente gar ntdjt 
 ertvaljnt, 10. Sr ertmtert fid) ber ©iite blefes gremben. 
 
 Exercise 125. StufgalJe 125. 
 
 1. He often thinks of thee, but them he has forgotten. 2. 
 Among others, he mentioned his cousin. 3. Do not forget the 
 poor, while you are enjoying so many pleasures. 4. He who 
 ridicules the poor shows a bad heart. 5. Never forget the love 
 and kindness of those who instructed you in your youth. 6. 
 Your friend does not need your assistance. 1. We should for- 
 get our sorrows and remember our joys. 8. He spares the 
 guilty and punishes the innocent. 9. The matter was not men- 
 tioned. 10. He has taken care of his sick friend. 11. The 
 good man does not forget his friends. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 STnffagett, to accuse ; 
 9tnfd)ulbigen, to accuse ; 
 Slntoefenb, present; 
 SfugenMidltd), instantly; 
 SBeflet'pen, to be siudious of; 
 SBegc'ben, to renounce, p. 348; 
 SBefarten, to retain, remember ; 
 S3ercit3'» already; 
 33efd)itl'bigen, to accuse; 
 SSejitd/ttgen, to convict; 
 (Entblojjt', destitute; 
 (Sntfje'ben, to exempt from, 350 ; 
 Gntte'bigett, to release ; 
 (Sntfdjla'gen, to divest, p. 354; 
 
 (Ertmr'men, to pity; 
 
 (SrfTd'ren, to declare; 
 "Die Bteffeli -/ pi. -n, the chain; 
 2)te Sreiforcdjwtg, -, pi. -en, the ae> 
 
 quittal ; 
 £)er ®ebanfe, -n<3, pi. -xt, thought ; 
 
 ©efdjmei'gen, to pass over in 
 silence, p. 354; 
 
 ^ebod)', however; 
 £>er kexUr, -$, pi -, the prison; 
 £>ie Sanbjlrajje, -, pi. -n, highway; 
 S)a3 fWittet, -$, pi. -, the means ; 
 Der fftaty, -eg, the counsel, advice; 
 ©er dtaub, -eg, the robbery; 
 
NITIVE. 233 
 
 Uekrfitfy'ren, to convict; 
 2Hetmet)r, rather; 
 Sorig, last ; 
 
 2Me Xtyat, -jfl - *^W(Wed; SMrbigen, to vouchsafe. 
 
 ExEhoisE 126. SJttfflG&e 126. 
 
 1. @ie erinnern ftd) »o$t (§ 151.) nod) I>e3 jrutgen Cannes, 
 ter im ttorigen 3af)re be3 SftanBeS angeHagt n>ar. 2. Sr war Be* 
 fchtlrigt einen reid)en $ ieljt) angler auf ber Sanbftrafe femes ©elbeS 
 BerauBt gu f)aBen. 3. $ian fonnte lt)tt jebod} biefe3 SerBredjenS nid^t 
 iiBerfut)rcn.' 4. @r t)atte ft A Bereits after ipoffmmg einer gretfpre* 
 d)ung BegeBen unt) ftd) ted ©ebanfenS entfd)(agen, aU unfdmfttg er* 
 flart gu trerben. 5. £cr 3fttd)ter jeuod) entfyoB tt)it aller ©urge, 6. 
 9iacBtem er ben 2mgeffagten aufgeforbert ^atte, gutcS 9flut1)e3 $u 
 fein wnt ftd) atles Summers m entfd)lagen, erflarte er: 3d) Bin ber 
 soften SDZeimmg, t>ag man btefen jungen 9Jiann nid)t fees 3tauBe3 
 Bejudjtigen fann. 7. Qenn md)t 3eber, ber fid) teS 23etteln3 fdjamt 
 nnt> aller 9fltttel ent&lejjt ift, ttirb em SFlduBer. 8. 3d) ttitf feined 
 gnten 23etragen3 gefd)tteigen, benn er $at ftd) immer eirte^ orbentli* 
 d)en 2eBen3 Befliffcn. 9. 3d) erinnere end) aBer ber $()aten im lejj* 
 ten .ftriege, term er ftd) mit 3ted)t riit)men fann. 10. $mtet end) 
 feiner greifprcd)ung unb miuttget iBn enrer $rennbfd)aft. 11. @pot* 
 tet feiner nid)t, n?eil er im $erfer mar, fonbern evBavmet end) stetmeljr 
 feiner nnb gebenfet feiner Seiten. 12. 3^er, ber feiner Iad)t, fct)ame 
 ftd) femes eigenen 23etragen3. 13. 2lttc Slnttjcfcnben frenten ftd) fcife? 
 fer Sftebe, imb man enttettgte angenBIMid) ben 2mgefd)nlt>tgten feiner 
 ^effeln. 14. 3d) fann mtd) biefer Seute erinnern, aBer id) lann itjre 
 9tamen nid)t Be^alten. 15. Sr frente fid) be3 Hngen SRafyZ unb 
 ging fjinauc nnb BegaB fid) an bie SlrBeit. 
 
 Exercise 127. 2tnfgaBe 127. 
 
 1. The old soldier boasts of his valiant deeds. 2. Do you 
 remember the promise that you gave me? 3. 1 do not remem- 
 ber that I gave you a promise. 4. Can you remember all 
 the long words that you have found in this book % 5. Have 
 you accused any one of this crime % 6. Who has robbed the 
 traveler of his money % 7. He has been convinced of his er- 
 ror, but convicted of no crime. 8. The tyrant avails himself 
 
234 
 
 of his pov.ei 9. An honest mi 
 an action. 10. Do you remembef^H old man whonv^fTmet 
 in the city? 11. Do you remember tl^^BFgenWman with 
 whom we traveled from Berlin to Bremen 1 ? 12. Yes, 1 still 
 remember him. 13. It is difficult for those who have a bad 
 memory to renumber the rules of a language. 14. Are vou 
 of the opinion that he is guilty of this crime? 15. I rem em- 
 ber the man who accused your servant of robbery. 1G. We 
 lejoice to leave the country of the tyrant. It. Our enemies 
 have robbed us of our money, but they can not rob us of our 
 hoi or. 18. The happy parents greatly (fcljr) rejoiced to see 
 their lost child again. 19. He remembers still the happy days 
 when he went to school with these children. 
 
 LESSON LXIH. faction LXHI. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 1. The dative is governed by many adjectives, and is then 
 usually rendered by our objective preceded by to or for; some- 
 times by other prepositions. The dative generally precedes 
 the adjective by which it is governed : 
 
 (£3 ijl ben SKenfdjen Ietdjtcr ju fdjmet* It is easier for man to flatter than 
 
 djeht aU jit lo&en. — 9t. to praise. 
 
 SBefj 1 £)em, ber ju ber SBatyrfjeit gefyt "Woe to him who comes to the tmth 
 
 burd) <Sd)utb; ftc tturb u)m tummer* through guilt, it can never be a 
 
 ntetyr erfrcuttd) fein. — <S. source of pleasure to him. 
 
 (£3 ijl mir erinnerltdj. I can remember it. 
 
 (£3 ijl mir wwergejjjtid). I can not forget it. 
 
 •*2£ef) bem armcn Dpfer, tt>emt berfelBe Woe to (woe is) the poor victim, if 
 
 $iimb ber ba3 ®efei$ ga&, aud) ba3 the same mouth that gave the 
 
 ttrtfyeit fprtcfyt." law also pronounces the sentence. 
 
 2Bot)I ©em, ber frei son ©d)ulb imb Happy he (well to him) who, free 
 
 %d)lt fceftcttyrt bte ftnbltdj reine from guilt and error, prese/vea 
 
 ©eele. — <S. his soul pure as a child. 
 
 2. The dative is often substituted for a possessive pronoun, 
 or for the gen'tive of a noun : 
 
HE GENITIVE. 
 
 235 
 
 helmet and my shield aro rust- 
 ing in the hall. 
 
 £cr ©ptT^^^B^MtP^iBnin- utr The god of victory walks at her 
 ©cite. — £>. side. 
 
 3. The first and second persons of pronouns, in the dative, 
 ate often used to indicate, in an indefinite manner, some special 
 participation or sympathy on the part of the individuals which 
 they represent : 
 
 G? ftnb (5ud> gar trofcige Jlamcra'ben. They are right insolent fellows (for 
 
 — <5. you). 
 
 "IDamalo ttaren ttnr bir fe$r »er" At that time we were very joyous. 
 
 gniigt'." 
 
 4. The dative, with Bet, Son and 3 it, often denotes one's 
 place of residence or business, and is rendered by our possess- 
 ive preceded by at, from or to : 
 
 2)er Mantel ijr be im ©djnctber* The cloak is at the tailor's. 
 
 <£r gefyt j u feinem Db,etm. He is going to his uncle's. 
 
 €>te fommt son ir)rcr Xante. She is coming from her aunt's. 
 
 The dative of the personal pronouns is used in the same manner ; 
 usually rendered by the possessive case of our pronoun followed by a 
 noun: 
 
 <5te ttotynen bet imS. They live at our house. 
 
 2Bir gefyen t)eutc ju tfjm. "We are going to his house to-day. 
 
 Setfptele. 
 
 Unb errcgt tt)m ben ©rtmnt in ber 
 
 <Secle. — ©-§. 
 (£r t|t bet feinem gretmbe. 
 SSc^nen <&& bet ifynen? 
 ©ei bctnen $reunbcn erge'ben unb bei* 
 
 nen ^etnbcn gefdt'ltg. 
 Sebcr red)ftid)e Sftann tft bcm ©uten 
 
 genetgt' unb bent S3ofen abgenetgt. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 his 
 
 And excites rage (anger) in 
 soul. 
 
 lie is at his friend's. 
 
 Do you live at their house ? 
 
 Be devoted to thy friends and oblig- 
 ing to thy enemies. 
 
 Every upright man is inclined to 
 (the) good, and disinclined to 
 (the) evil. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>er G^araf'ter, -3, pi. -te're, the 
 character; 
 
 Banfbar, thankful, grateful; 
 Die ^alfd^ett, -, pi. -en, falsehood; 
 
 ©efafcr'ltd), dangerous; 
 
 'Bag ©egenttjett, -3, the contrary , 
 ©e|or'fam, obedient; 
 
 2)a3®emutb', -c3, pi. -er, mind 
 ®(etd), like, equal; 
 ©ndbtg, graciouH- 
 
236 l 
 
 £>ei ®runbfa£, -t$, pi. -fft&e, 
 
 principle; 
 t)ie |>eud)elet, -, pi. -en, hyrocrisy; 
 Die iiimigin, -, pi. -nen, the queen; 
 
 Safferfyaft, wicked, vicious; 
 
 Scjlig, burdensome, trouble- 
 some ; 
 
 £ebig, free; 
 
 £ieb, dear, pleasant ; 
 T)a$ Rob, -e3, the praise; 
 Die Sftetgmtg, , pi. -en, inclination; 
 Der Sftctng, -eg, pi. $dnge, the rank; 
 
 ©djmeicfyetljaft, flattering ; 
 
 Exercise 128. 
 
 Unertrdglia), intolerable; 
 lintertfyau (adj.), subject ; 
 ltm>erge£Ud), memorable; e3 ifi 
 
 mir — , I can never forget; 
 £8erel)'rert, to honor; 
 23 erf) apt', hateful; 
 DaS SBadjStfntm, -eg, vegetation • 
 2Bert|), worth, dear ; 
 SBibrig, repugnant; 
 
 SlufgaBe 128. 
 
 1. (Sin gnteg $tnb ift feinen ©Item gefyorfam unb banfBar. 2* 
 Tsa$ Slaucfyen ift t>encn fetjr unangene^m, bte eg ntdjt gemolmt ftnb. 
 3. 9JUr ift eg iieB, tag id) Mr tit biefer &a&)t nullify fete lann. 4. 
 2)a^ ^Better mar uug geftern fet)r giinftig, aBer X)eute ift eg ganj tag 
 ©egenttjetf. 5. ©ut ju merben ift bent Safterfyaften farmer, bemt er 
 BleiBt gemotm(td) feinen 9teigungen treu, 6. £em ^onigreid) @pa^ 
 men ift ^ranfreid) iiBerlegen. 1. 3Cag tf)n end) ttribrig madjt, mad)t 
 it) it mir ttertfy. 8. 3^ feib biefer tonight nicfyt wntertfyan. 9. 
 Sieleg, mag tmg nid)t gefa^rlid) ift, ift ung bod) fe^r lafttg. 10. 3nt 
 Stange ift er feinem 23ruber gleid), im (Efyarafter feinem Skter atjn^ 
 ltd). 11. 9tid)tg ift mir fo fetyr &er$ajjt a(g galfd$ett unb £eud)elei. 
 12. Du Btft beg SeiBeg tebig, ©ott fei ber @eele gnaDig. 13. 2Ba* 
 rum ift biefeg alk 23ud) unfern greunben fo IieB? 14. (Eg ift mir 
 unsergefjlid), mie fet)r id) bir tterBunben Bin. 15. Den ©oftaten 
 mar bag SoB tfyreg ttereljrten gelb^errn fefyr fd)meid)ell)aft. 16. Die* 
 fer 2Iufentf)alt ift it)m faft unertraglid) gemorben. 11. $abel wnb 
 £cB finb bem ©entitle beg Sftenfdjen, mag (Sturm unb <Sonnenfd)ein 
 bent $3ad)gtf)um ftnb. 18. 3$ motme Bei meinem Dnfel. 
 
 Exercise 129. SlufgaBe 129. 
 
 1. These things may be useful and agreeable to you, but 
 they are very unpleasant to me, and injurious to my friends. 
 2. Every good man is grateful to his benefactors. 3. This 
 weather is very unfavorable for us. 4. It is very unpleasant 
 to me that I am obliged to remain here so long. 5. Every 
 good citizen is obedient to the just laws of his country. 6* 
 
DATIVE. 231 
 
 be subject to a king ? ?. "What 
 is :T T '^WW^A4 to f ijjH^Bnan than hypocrisy 1 8. I am much 
 obliged to you t^^yM have been useful to my friends in this 
 matter. 9. The soldiers were with blind obedience devoted to 
 their leader. 10. This house is very similar to the one in which 
 you live. 11. No country in the world is superior to ours. 
 
 12. The few friends that this man has are very dear to him. 
 
 13. Many things are burdensome which are not dangerous to 
 as. 14. Those are to be called good, who remain true to their 
 principles. 15. The praise of a good man is very flattering to 
 us. 16. He is gracious to those who are obedient to him. It. 
 Is he at his brother's 1 
 
 LESSON LXIV. Cection LXIV. 
 
 VERBS WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 1. The dative is governed : 
 
 a. By transitive verbs, which in addition to the direct ob- 
 ject (in the accusative), require the object to be specified, for 
 or in relation to which an action is performed. In this use, 
 as also with gefibrert, fd)eincn and nmtften, the dative is rendered 
 by our objective with a preposition expressed or implied : 
 
 (£r naljm e$ u)nen tteg. He took it away from them. 
 
 ©tefer £itt gefyort mir. This hat belongs to me. 
 
 b. Many German verbs are called intransitive, and. govern 
 the dative, whose English equivalents are transitive, and gov- 
 ern the objective ; as, antttortert, Befe^ten, Begegrtett, bemfen, bte^ 
 lien, broken, fel)len, fhtcfyen, fofgen, frozen, frommen, geBiifyren 
 gefatlen, gdjorcfyen, gercic^en, gleid^en, ^elfen, IjulDtgen, lotjnen, man 
 geln, ndjen, mtijen, paffert, ratten, fdjaben, fdbmet^eln, trauen, tro^ 
 fcen, roe^ren, aiemett: 
 
 SBcr Mr ftfymetdjett, fdjabet Mr, icerm He who flatters you injures you, 
 bit u)m glctufcjL. if you believe him. 
 
 c. With the impersonally used verbs e$ at)ttet, e$ bautft, e3 
 
238 less 
 
 tiinft, t$ cleft, e3 gvcmt, es fd)iinnMtji 
 e3 ift, the dative is frequently rendel 
 
 $pret, tt>a$ mtr getraumt tyat. — Gen. Hear what Iliave dreamed (bear, 
 xxxvii. 6. I pray you, this dream which I 
 
 have dreamed). 
 
 d. Intransitive verbs, governing the dative, take, when used 
 passively, the impersonal form; the logical subject being put 
 in the dative, in which position (like the impersonal verbs, 
 see c.) it is rendered by the nominative: 
 
 (£3 tourbe if)m (or ifjm tturbe) gefdjabeU He was injured. 
 
 S)eimod) ttuvbe bem Slbet md)r gefdmtei" Still, to the nobility, there was ac- 
 
 djelt, aU nnrflitf)er ©utfluj? gegeben* corded more of flattery than of 
 
 — ©♦ actual influence. 
 
 2. Some verbs govern the dative or the accusative, accord 
 ing to their signification : 
 
 2Bir riefen tfynen, after fie Morten un3 We called them (to them) but they 
 
 ntcfyt. did not hear us. 
 
 S©tr riefen fie in bctS £ctu$* "We called them into the house. 
 
 3. $ oft en is generally used with a dative and accusative; 
 sometimes, however, with two accusatives : 
 
 "(5$ nnirbe ^rettjett mtr unb Sefien It would cost me freedom and life. 
 
 fcften." 
 
 S3 eifpiele. Examples. 
 
 (Snbtidj gelang' e3 ifym feinem $reunbe Finally he succeeded in opening 
 
 bie Stugen p offnen. his friend's eyes. 
 
 £raue ntd)t jebem SSflenfdjen, unb am Trust not every one, and least of 
 
 attertoemjjjlen benjentgen, bie bir all those who flatter thee. 
 
 fdjmeidjeltt. 
 
 Die ©*ma$'nung eineS $reunbe3 gilt The admonition of a friend is of 
 
 mtr uiet, unb tclj fblge u)r gem. much value to me, and I follow 
 
 it gladly. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 SHJictgen, to renounce ; 
 Slnfyangen, to adhere to; 
 Slngefyoren, to belong; 
 Slntmorten; to answer; 
 SBetfommen, to get at; 
 S3eijre§en, to assis* '•. 
 SBeijHmmcn, to assent to; 
 
 Sefta'gen (ficfy), to complain; 
 SSetroofynen, to be present at, t* 
 
 take part in ; 
 ©ctnfen, to thank; 
 (£belmun)tg, noble; 
 (Stgenftnmg, obstinate; 
 ISDfc IJetnbfeUgfett,* pi -en, hostility 
 
©ad ^BtcreiT'ti -$# pi. -n, interest; 
 Lex £5roe, -n, pi. -n, the lion: 
 
 SWac^tig, powerful, mighty; 
 Dev SWinifler, -5, pi. -, minister; 
 
 Deffnen, to open; 
 
 HE DATIVE. 239 
 
 25a3Def!erretcfj(, -3i (the) Austria; 
 
 Saltern to fit; 
 
 ©d)aben, to injure; 
 
 33erpflui)'mi, to bind (by oath), 
 £)a3 2}crt)aben, -3, the design; 
 
 2Bef) t|un, to hurt; 
 
 2Biberfprcd/cn, to contradict; 
 
 3ugef)5ren, to belong to. 
 
 Exercise 130. SlufgoBe 130. 
 
 1. 3$ banfe 3fynen, Dap ©ic mir get)olfen ijaben. 2. Sr nu'irbe 
 mir geroij$ fdjaben, trenn cr mir Beifommen fbnnte. 3. liefer £ut 
 paft mir fteffer old jencr. 4. 2Do3 fetylt 3§nen, toarum miterjpre^ 
 cfyen ©ie 3fyrcm Sreuntc ? 5, §3 fefylt mir md)t3j oo itjm etix>a3 
 fefjlen mag, roeijj id) nid)L 6. £er $naBe §ot ftcfy in ben Singer 
 gefdmitten. 7. ©an3 Dejterreid) lag tent ebelmutfyigen Ungarn jit 
 gitjjen. 8. £iefem eigenftnnigen 9ftcnfd)en ift gar ntd)t $u tyetfen. 
 9* £3 t^ut mir fefjr leit, bag er jtdj ml) getf)an $ot. 10. £em M* 
 nig, welder fid) itber biefe ge'inbfe(tgfeit freflagte, nmrbe geanttuortet, 
 "ber Golfer f)aBe ter ©olfcaten jn »iel; er tniiffe feinen guten $reun^ 
 ben boratt fyelfen." ll.Snbtid) getang e5 Dent 9ttinifter, tern $bnig 
 iiter fcin roaljres 3nteref[e tie 2lugen jn bffnen. 12. SGenn in alten 
 3eiten ein 9ftad)tiger bem antern feint war, jo fagte cr bemfelfc'en ofc. 
 13. 2lu« alien Drten, He itjm angefybrten, fommelte bicfer macfctige 
 ©err bie Conner, tie i()m an()ingen. 14. Sftadjtent fie feincm 33or^ 
 fyakn oeigcftimmt Batten, oerpflid)teten fie fid) il)m Beijufte^en unb 
 bem ^riege fcei$uroo$nen. 15. ©old) ein macbtiger ©err toar £ein* 
 rid) ber Zhvt, ©er^og oon 33aiern, toelcfyem gro£e Sanber gugefybrten 
 unb Soufente son ^Iriegem getyordjtcn. 
 
 Exercise 131. Slufgaoe 131. 
 
 1. Why do you not answer him? 2. I have answered him, 
 hut he has not answered me. 3. Do they wish to injure their 
 friends % 4. They have assisted us, and we will assist them. 
 5. "Will you not help this boy % he has hurt himself. 6. Tho 
 soldiers that adhered to him, bound themselves to take part 
 in th.3 war. T. He calls them obstinate, because they will not 
 assent to his design. 8. Do you know what ails those people ? 
 9. This hat fits me better than the other one. 10. He does 
 
240 
 
 LESSOl 
 
 not contradict them, though he thn™ **n~ ]&yf-^WXr*n%* 
 11. How was the king answered when nejp»<1^^RHertain 
 hostilities ? 12. Is it my duty to obey such* men, and to help 
 them? 13. Have you succeeded in finding them 1 ? 14. Do 
 you succeed in learning Spanish ? 
 
 SB ei f pi * I.-e* 
 
 ^in Heiner $Ram, ein groped spferb; 
 ein furjer 2lrm, ein tanged <3'd)tt>ert, 
 mug cinS bem anbern fyelfen. — it. 
 
 (Sine $rau, ber bie (Srfitttung u)rer 
 9)flid)ten am £>erjen liegt, jctgt tyre 
 Stebe sum <Sc^onen nid)t in etnem 
 fc|tbaren $fttjuge, fonbern in ber git* 8 
 ten (Etnrtd)tung i^red £au3tt>efen#. 
 — SB. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 A small man, a large horse, a shoit 
 arm, a long sword must help each 
 other (i. e. ought to go together). 
 
 A woman who has at heart the 
 fulfillment of her duties, shows 
 her love of the beautiful, not in 
 costly apparel, but in the appro- 
 priate arrangement of her house- 
 hold. 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 £>er SBefefyl, -e$, pi. -e, the com- 
 mand, order; 
 £)ie 2Id)t, -, pi. -en, the outlawry ; 
 
 ©rofjen, to threaten ; 
 2)a§ (£ienb, -e$, -3, the misery ; 
 
 ©rlie'gen, to succumb, p. 350 ; 
 
 (£rtt>ei'fen, to show, render, 358 ; 
 ©ie ^amt'lte, -, pi. -tt, the family; 
 
 gludjen, to curse ; 
 
 giigen (fid)), to submit; 
 
 ©ebiib/ren, to be due; 
 
 ©efal'lcitf to please, p. 348; 
 
 ®leid)ert; to resemble, be like ; 
 
 ®enu'gen, to suffice, satisfy; 
 'Der ^erjog^ur, -t$, pi. -§itte, the 
 ducal hat: 
 
 2)er $rteg3$ug, -e3, pi. -Jttge, cam- 
 paign ; 
 
 SftitUingen, to fail, miscarry; 
 
 (Sd)n>eben, to wave; 
 £)er ©tolj, — e^r the pride; 
 
 £rauen, to confide in; 
 
 £rolpcn, to defy; 
 
 Uebel tt>olIen, to bear a grudge; 
 
 Ueber^ie'tyen, to invade, p. 358; 
 £>ct3 SJerlcm'gen, -$, the demand; 
 £)te SJernunft', -, the reason; 
 
 SBiberfre'fyen, to resist, p. 356; 
 
 SSBtberjlre'ben, to oppose, to 
 struggle against; 
 
 Biirnen, to be angry ; 
 
 Qwaox'tommtn, to anticipate. 
 
 Exercise 132. 
 
 SIufgaBe 132. 
 
 L £od) bie tone eineS $atfers fdjwe&te ttym immer fcor 2Iugen. 
 2> £)et ^eqog^ut geniigte itjm nicfyt 3. @r traute fciner etgnen 
 $raft nnb trojtfe tern $atfer. 4. £er $aifer forberie tt)n aitf jt<$ 
 fcinen 33efetylen gu ftigen, nnb brof)te i1)m mit t>er 2Id)t 5. £o$ 
 bem £>ergoge, ber etnem Somen gltd), gait meber SSemunft nod) aitter 
 0kti). 6. 3^»t geftel nnr feine eigne SReimmg, nnb er anuerftreUe 
 bem ^erlangen, bem $atfer eine (Sljre ju ertueifen, bie bemfeltcn 
 
# I >Mflk E ' NUMERALS. 241 
 
 gec-ifrrt"^* u Dtr^atfer, ber bem ^peqcgc f^on fcit langer 3cit 
 iifrcl n? elite* irflt.^i it jfec^cn fcincc Stores Jiirntc, fain i|mgu»ot unb 
 fiBcrgog ihn nut ^ricg. 8. 3>r ftriegdgttg mtjjlang bem tfatfec 
 m'&t. 9. Xcv -^crjeg Eorntte ber feinblidjen Wtafyt ntd)i tmbcrjte^en 
 unb tticLQ tern ftaifer in ber ©cMadrt. 10. Sr mufjte nac^ Sngfanb 
 flte^cn tut? nur feitte gamtlte unb eiittge greunbe folgten ihn. 11. 
 £ier tntfagte er jebet $ojfnim<j wtb fludjrc bem Stol^e, ate ber itr* 
 fadje fcineS G&IenbS. 
 
 Exercise 133. SfafgaBe 133. 
 
 1. Threaten them as you will, they will never succumb to 
 you. 2. Will no one render them this service? 3. These men 
 will not submit to his commands. 4. What does not please 
 them is of no value to them. 5. All that he lias heard and 
 seen does not satisfy him. 6. They will net be able to resist so 
 powerful an enemy. 7. The laws of nature are opposed in 
 vain, there no resistance avails. 8. Why do you defy him 1 
 9. He is angry at his friends. 10. Those people will injure 
 you if you confide in them. 11. He anticipated us in every 
 thing. 12. So great an honor is due to no man. 13. These 
 children resemble their parents. 14. He struggled against the 
 demand, but could not resist his enemy. 15. Your advice is 
 of no value to him, for he can not renounce his evil company. 
 
 LESSON LXV. Union LXV. 
 
 INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 
 
 1. 21 n b e r, with words denoting time, signifies next,folloioing 
 and never refers, like other, to indefinite past time : 
 
 <Et geljt itkrmorgen unb rotr ben an* He goes the day after to-morrow 
 
 bern Sag. ■ and we the next day. 
 
 T>er 9ftamt, ber »or einigen £agen fjier The man that was here the othei 
 
 BKtti ift franf. day (a few days ago) is sick. 
 
 a. Instead of ctttber, as the equivalent of other, in denot- 
 ing something additional, the adverb nod) is employed : 
 
 Stfimm n o dj einen SWarUel/ einer t|l Take another cloak (in addition to 
 nid)t genug. this), one is not enough. 
 
 11 
 
242 LESSON 
 
 SRimm eineit anbern Sftantef, btefer tfl Take another cioak (in sl^i if this), 
 $u burnt, this is too Gi^ - # 
 
 b. The adverb embers, otherwise, differently, else, sometimes 
 
 occurs in the signification of namely, that is : 
 
 ?S?er cinett Sroetf toiU, ntu§ au&) bte He who wishes a result must also 
 SWittel rooften, tt>emt er anberS »er* wish for the means, that is, if 
 fidnbto, ift« — ®el. (provided) he is judicious. 
 
 2. 23 e t fc e, unlike both, may refer to objects taken separately ; 
 *\ ith mcl)t or feirt, ft e i £ e often answers to neither, lot either : 
 
 'iorge fur bte ®efunbr)ett beine3 Set* Take care of the health of (thy) 
 
 beS unb betner <Seele, aber serjartle body and soul, but do not parxx- 
 
 betbe nid)t. — 3?e. per either. 
 
 2"Betd)e3 son ben beiben SPferben tt)irb Which one of the two (both) hors.38 
 
 er faufen ? will he buy ? 
 
 ©r tturb fcineS son beiben faufen. He will buy neither of them. 
 
 3. In referring to two things, different in kind, the neuter 
 form singular, b e i b e 3, is often employed : 
 
 (£r tjatte ben OUna, nnb bte $eber, aber He had the ring and the pen, but 
 er t)at betbeS serloren. he has lost both. 
 
 <Ste irren fid), benn beibeS Itegt auf You mistake (yourself), for both are 
 feinem £ifd)e« (each is) lying on his table. 
 
 4. S t ft) a 3 is sometimes used before nouns in the singular, 
 and before adjectives, in the signification of a little, somewhat: 
 
 ©ie bradjten t$tn ettt>a3 Sjftild). They brought him a little milk, 
 
 ©te £age tt)crben etttaS longer* The days are getting somewhat 
 
 longer. 
 
 5. @ (5tfad3 signifies such a thing, something of the kind: 
 
 3d) fyttte fdjott fo (Ettt>a3 0e|)ort, e$e er I had (already) heard something of 
 onfant. the kind before he arrived. 
 
 6. 3 V g e it b denotes great indefiniteness ; it is often fol 
 
 lowed by the indefinite article, and generally rendered any, 
 
 some, whatever : 
 
 (Er ^cttte immer trgenb etne unangenef)* He always had some disagreeable 
 me SBa^rbett auf ber £h)pe* — J?be. truth on his lips (lip). 
 
 7. 33iel and ftuntg, in referring to a quantity, or to a 
 number taken collectively, are not usually inflected, except when 
 preceded by the definite article, or an adjective pronoun : 
 
 £>er Siingltng f)at fern $iele3 ©elb unb The youth has lost his large sum 
 fetne stelen Sreunbe serloren. of money and his many frienda. 
 
 2Bie »tel U^r if* e3 ? What o'clock is it ? 
 
 In the last example the phrase, in German as u Englisl*, is abbre- 
 
•fflfcFlNITE NUMERALS. 243 
 
 viated ; the full form being, ttie ttiet auf ber ttr)r if! e3 ? how much of 
 the clock (o'clock) is it \ The time may be reckoned either from a pre- 
 ceding or a following hour : 
 
 23 ij! cm 2.Herfe( nad) bm; or It is a quarter past three; or 
 
 (££ ij! cin Snertel a u f xucr. It is a quarter on (or toward) four. 
 
 (£3 fcMt cin SSiertel anfordU) ad)L It lacks a quarter to eight ; or 
 
 (£3 ift bret 23iertel auf adjt. It is | toward 8 (£ e., it lacks \ of 8). 
 
 After r)alfc, auf is omitted; as, e3 ij! I) all) ad)t, it is half (toward) 
 eight; i. e., half past seven. 
 
 8. 33 t e I and xo e n i $ are declined, when they refer to a 
 
 Lumber taken as individuals ; or substantively to persons; and. 
 
 often, when preceded in the singular by prepositions : 
 
 Side 5)icnfd)en trinfert feinen SBein. Many men drink no wine. 
 SBenige 2ftenfd)cn fiub ganj jufrieben. Few men are perfectly contented. 
 
 9. When declined in the singular, except as above speci- 
 fied, v> i e t and to e nig signify many or few kinds: 
 
 (Sr trinft fcicl 23ein, afcer nidjr sjictcn He drinks much wine, but not ma- 
 &3etn. ny kinds of wine. 
 
 10. The superlative of tot e 1 (me ift) is often preceded by 
 
 the definite article, or a possessive pronoun : 
 
 Unfere ntctjren Seiben ftnb bie $olge Most of our sufferings are the con- 
 unfercr eigncn Scaler. sequence of our own errors. 
 
 11. 21 lie, all, in some phrases, is equivalent to all gone, 
 spent, wasted; with 6 e i t» e it does not require translation : 
 <Sein ©elb ij! a lie. His money is all gone. 
 
 SI 1 1 e 33 c t b e voaren franf. Both (of them) were sick. 
 
 12. The plural of all, applied to divisions of time, answers 
 
 to every. The English all, in such phrases as all day, all th& 
 
 week, etc., is rendered by g an$ : 
 
 (Sr gc()t a lie Sage. He goes every day (all days). 
 
 6r roar ben ga nj e it Sag §ier. He was here all (the whole) day 
 
 SBeifpicle. Examples. 
 
 2)te $5ar)rr)eit unb bie SRofe ftnb fet)r (The) truth and the rose are verv 
 
 fd)im, aber fcetbe r)afcen X)ornen. beautiful, but both ha\e thorns. 
 
 3d) ^abe tr)n nie nut trgenb etnent I have never offended him by a 
 
 23orte fcelei'btgt. single word. 
 
 Sutoeilen effen bie 3ftenntl;tere nidjtS Sometimes the reindeer ea. noth- 
 
 anb er e3 aU 9)?oc3. ing but (else than) moss, 
 
 ^rtn'nere bid) ter »ielen SCoP^aten Remember the many good deeda 
 
 bie id) bir ernueS. (favors) that I showed you. 
 
 Sluf f o I d) e 5lrt will id) nid)t reidj I do not wish to become rich in 
 
 icerben. such a manner. 
 
 Unfer 51 II e $ if! auf bent Spiel. Our all is at stake 
 
244 LESSON LXV\ 
 
 VOCABULARY TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 Sffferfeefl, verj best; 
 
 5lu3gebc:i, to spend, p. 348; 
 
 aSetbc, both; 
 ©er ©efttim'tfe; -n, pi. -U, the ac- 
 quaintance; 
 
 ©trtlger, some (§ 52. 3) ; 
 
 (Etnfteflen, to appear; 
 2)cr Smpo'rer, -$, pi. -, the rebel; 
 
 (Srben, to inherit; 
 £>te Stoftye, - f pi. -n, flask, bottle; 
 
 £)ie $otqe, -, pi. -n> consequence,' 
 S)er ©et$&al$, -fee, pi. -fcdlfe, tha 
 
 miser; 
 2)a6 9J?atru, (the) Mayence; 
 •Da3 Sttcmntyeim, -3, (the) Manheiai , 
 
 <Sd)Itmm, bad, sad ; 
 £)cr Ueberrocf, -t%, pi. -rocfe, fch« 
 
 overcoat; 
 £)ct3 2}ergnu'gert, -3, the pleasure; 
 
 Sorfetjen, to place before. 
 
 Exercise 134. 2lufga£e 134. 
 
 1. Sr tyeijjt atled a $einbe unb (SmpBrer, tt»a3 mdt mit it)m ijh 
 2. ^erftefyft bu atfeS, voa3 id) btr fage ? 3. SBir alle a rcotten mit 
 Mr get)en. 4* <Der Saner fej^te un$ ben atlerbeflen d 2£ein 5oor* 
 5. 2r mitt nod) Slepfel unb eine anbere Slafdje 2Betn. 6. $3ot(en 
 @ie 23itd)er laufen? 1. 3$ |afce fd)on meld)e & gefauft, aBer id) will 
 nod) einige faufen. 8* 33eibe3 ereignete fid) unb bie fcMtmmen %oU 
 gen son 23eibem fieftten fid) ein. 9. £a3 SCetter ift fd)on etwas 
 (or ein wenig) falter gercorben. 10. $3er t)atte fo etroa3 gegfauBt ? 
 11. ^ennft bu irgcnb 3e«tanben, ber fo ettuaS tt)un ttmrfre? 12, (Ein 
 3eber c &on feinen $reunben $at if)n oerlaffen. 13. (Er tjat toie* 
 SBein getrunlen unb Mel ®elb bafiir auSgegefren. 14. ;Da3 Mete 
 ©clD, bag er erftte, ^at er auggegeBen fur ben Melen SBein, ben et 
 getrunlen fiat. 15. Seme nidt auf einmal Steles, fonbern Mel. 
 16, 3^ben £ag, ben @ie gu un3 lommen rootlet!, rootten rotr Sttte mit 
 31)nen fpajteven get)en. IT. liefer Uekrrocf ift gu ftein, net)men 
 @ie il)n roeg unb bringen @te mir einen anbern (see 1. a.). 
 
 Exercise 135. 2tufgaoe 135. 
 
 1. The weather is so cold that I must have two overcoats, 
 bring me another one (see 1. a.). 2. As soon as my money was 
 all gone I had no longer any friends, 3. Which of these car- 
 riages shall you buy % 4. I shall not buy either of them, for 
 neither of them pleases me. 5. If you wait another day we 
 will all go with you, 6. Do you wish to buy any thing more? 
 
 o. § 53. 3; b. L. 39. 4; c. L. 43. 3; d. L. 32. 7. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 246 
 
 7. I have a little money and he has a great deal. 8. Many of 
 my acquaintances reside in this city. 9. The few friends that 
 he has are more powerful than his many enemies. 10. Who 
 has more enemies and fewer friends, more trouble and less 
 pleasure than the miser? 11. I understand all that you say 
 and can read all the letters that you have written. 12. I would 
 like to buy a few pears and a few more apples. 13. To-mor- 
 row I shall go to Manheim, and the next day to Mayence. 14. 
 Every book that I have is in this room. 15. Do you wish to 
 buy some more horses? 16. The weather is becoming some- 
 what warmer. 
 
 LESSON LXV1. Cection LXVL 
 
 PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE DATIVE. 
 1. 2tttfl, § 112. 
 
 91 u 3 ben Slugen, au $ bzm ©time. Out of sight, out of mind. 
 
 (Er ifr au$ S3erlin. He is from Berlin. 
 
 3$ tljat cS ait 3 ©efjorfam gegen <3te. I did it through obedience to you. 
 
 31 u 3 Modern Serbadjt foil man nid)t On mere suspicion one should not 
 
 fo bcmbeln. act thus. 
 
 ©a5 ftc()t man au a bem Sriefe. One sees that by the letter. 
 
 21 it 3 biefem ©runbe bleibt er. For this reason he remains. 
 
 (Er lief a \x$ alien ^rd'ften. He ran with all his might. 
 
 2Ba3 t|t au3 tfym geroorben? What has become o/him? 
 
 $Iu3 ^reunben roerben oft Setnbe, Friends often become enemies, ene- 
 
 feltener $reunbe a u § $etnben. mies less frequently friends. 
 
 (Er tr)at e3 a u 3 freien ©titcfen. He did it of his own accord. 
 
 @te rot (Ten roeber au$ nod) etn. They are entirely at a loss. 
 
 (Er |at fid) and bem <5taube gentad)t. He has run away ("cut sticks"). 
 (E3 tjr ait $ mtt i v m. It is all over with him. 
 
 (Er fd)rieb feinem 93ruber Don Winn* He wrote to his brother from Mu 
 
 djen au$. nich. 
 
 2. Pilfer, § 112. 2. 
 
 SficrttS ifr fo fetjr unfer eigem aid unfere Nothing is so much (so completely) 
 
 @cbanfen; aHe$ Slnbere ijl aufjer our own as our thoughts; all 
 
 unS. — 2B. else is without (exterior to) us. 
 
 SBer nidjtg Ueben mUTal3 fetn (Eben* He who will love nothing but his 
 
 bilb, I)at aufjer jtd) ntd)t$ JU He* own image, has except (beside) 
 
 ben. — 9t. himself, nothing to love. 
 
 (Er mar au § e r fid) »or 2But$. He was beside himself with rage. 
 
 fvd) bin gan* au § er Student. I am entirely out of breath. 
 
 SSon btefer ©eroobn^ett gel)t er ntdjt ab From this custom he varies not, ex- 
 
 a u {j e x mm %i mtbe bei tfjm ftnb. cept when strangers are with him 
 
246 
 
 LESSON LXVI. 
 
 3. Set, § 112. 3. 
 
 3d) tyabe f cut ©do bei mtr. 
 
 ©ie flanben t e i mir. 
 
 3$ lc|c ntd)t gem t> e i ber Sampe. 
 
 53 et biefer Slrbcit gen>innt man nidjt 
 
 (E$ 1)1 nidjt ©itte bei una. 
 
 (£r iff ntd)t b e t ©trtnen. 
 
 SB e i after fetner $lug$ett lajjjt er ftd) 
 
 jur £f)ort)eit aerletten. 
 SB e i bent fiarfen SBirtbe griff ba^ $euer 
 
 fdjnell urn fid). 
 (£r uerbot e§ bei £eben§ftrafe. 
 SSBir fprad)en bet it)m eht. 
 3d) Iicp raid) bei i|nt anmelben. 
 SBcmt Seraanb befd)eiben bletbt, nid)t 
 
 beira £obe, fonbern betm Xabtl, 
 
 i\t er e$.— 9t 
 
 I have no money with (about) me. 
 They stood near (by) me. 
 I do not like to read by the lamp. 
 One earns (gains) but little at this 
 
 work. 
 It is not the custom among (with) us. 
 He is not in his senses. 
 With all his prudence he allows 
 
 himself to be seduced into folly. 
 In consequence of the high wind the 
 
 fire spread rapidly. 
 He forbade it on pain of death. 
 We called on him. 
 I had myself announced to him. 
 If one remains modest, not under 
 
 praise, but under censure, then 
 
 he (really) is so. 
 
 4. (Sntgegen, § 112. 5. 
 
 (£$ ifl flug unb fitljn bent unt>ermeibli= 
 d)en Uebel entgegen $ugel)en.-©. 
 
 £)em alien SWanne, ber in jroanjig 
 <3d)lad)ten bent Sob fur @tc e n t g e* 
 gen ging, fattt e£ bod) tyart fid) fo 
 entfernt jn fefyen. — @. 
 
 It is prudent and bold to go toward 
 (to meet) unavoidable evil. 
 
 But, to the old man who in twenty 
 battles encountered (went to meet) 
 0. th for you, it seems hard to 
 fi. himself thus removed. 
 
 5. ®egeniifccr, § 12. 6. 
 
 ©ic-^ird)» jM)t bent aItett<3d)lo ffe ge* The church stands opposite to (ovei 
 g e n it b e r. against) the old castle. 
 
 Sometimes g e g e n precedes, and it b e r follows the dative : 
 
 (£3 |tef)t gegen bent ©djloffe itber. It stands opposite the castle. 
 
 6. mit, 112. 1. 
 
 6r fptett nttt ben $inbern. 
 @te fd)reibt nt 1 t ber $eber. 
 (£r nafym e3 rait ©eroalt. 
 
 9ttit ©ott rooften roir Sfyaten ttyun. 
 
 Ps. lx. 12. 
 SJHt SageSanbrud) retfjte er a^>. 
 2)tefe3 SMlb fyat grope ~" 
 
 bent gremben. 
 <£r arbeitete rait mir. 
 (£r blieb bei mir. 
 <5r roadjte rait rair bei bent ^ran 
 
 fen. 
 3d) Iernte nt i t tr)m. 
 
 He plays with the children. 
 
 She writes with the pen. 
 
 He took it by force. 
 
 Through God we shall do valiantly. 
 
 At the break of the day he set out. 
 2let;nltd)fett nttt This picture has (bears) a great re- 
 semblance to the stranger. 
 
 He worked (in company) with me. 
 
 He remained with (by or near) me. 
 
 He watched with me (helped me 
 watch) with the sick man. 
 
 I learned with him (when he did) 
 
 1. After m i t compounded with verbs, a pronoun is often re 
 quired to be supplied in translation : 
 
 SSringe ibn nt 1 1 roenn bu fomraji. 
 ©enn ©ie get)en, ge^e ; d) mit. 
 
 Bring him with you, if you come, 
 If you go, I will go with you. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 
 
 247 
 
 2Benn er gc^t, ge^e idj mi t. 
 Swollen 8ie und nid)t m i t netytnctt ? 
 S)a3 gctjt nid)t ju rnit red)ten Dingen. 
 3-i) toifl ed mtt ifym aufne^men. 
 (£r fid mtt tyletjjj nieber. 
 Sttit md)tett. 
 
 ©tc mad)t allc 5Koben mtt. 
 «£tle mtt ©die." 
 
 If he goes I shall go with him. 
 
 Will you not take us along? 
 
 There is some witchcraft in it. 
 
 I do not fear him. 
 
 He fell down intentionally. 
 
 By no means. 
 
 She follows all the fashions. 
 
 "Slow and sure 1 ' (hasten slowly). 
 
 ft art, § 112. 8. 
 
 He is the first after you. 
 
 They sent /or {after) the physician. 
 
 She thirsts for tame. 
 
 He enquired after {for, about) them. 
 
 As the duties of his office soon af- 
 terward called him to France, he 
 sent me to Rheims. 
 
 They shot at him. 
 
 How he looks (peers) at my hands! 
 
 According to the description it 
 must be very beautiful. 
 
 8. 
 
 6r \\1 ber <5r|te nad) 3ljnen. 
 ©ie fdjttften na d) bent Slrjte. 
 ©ie burftct n a d) 9iuf»m. 
 (£r erhmbigtc fid) n ad) iljnen. 
 Slid ifm bed tinted >3)flid)ten balb bar- 
 
 auf n a d) granfretd) rtcfen, fanbte 
 
 cr midj n a d) 9tycim$. — 3. 
 ©ie fdjofTen nad) ifjm. 
 2Bte fdjtelt er nad) ben £anben!— S. 
 9? a d) ber Sefdjreibung mug ed fel;r 
 
 fd)c;t fcin. 
 Sr f>anbclt nad) fewer Ueberjcugung. He acts in accordance with his con- 
 viction, 
 ©ie fpielt nid)t nad) 9?oten. She does not play by note(s). 
 
 ©te jcidjnct na d) ber 9?atur. She draws from nature. 
 
 ©ad ^teifd) fdjmecft nad) Bnnebeln. The meat tastes of onions. 
 
 9. $1 a &} frequently follows the word that it governs : 
 
 ©einer Sfteimmg it a d) Ijaben roir ganj According to his opinion we are 
 
 redjt. perfectly right. 
 
 3d) fenne fie nur bent 9fomcn nad). I only know them by name. 
 
 10. Db is generally construed with the dative; sometimes 
 with the genitive: 
 
 (Ed tjl mein ©etjl ber ungefe^en o b 
 
 bcinem ©djeitcl fdjrocbt. — §). 
 ©ie eljrten i§n o b fetned SWut^eS. 
 
 It is my spirit that, tinseen, hovers 
 over (the crown of) thy head. 
 
 They honored him on account of 
 his courage. 
 
 11. <5cit. 
 
 ©eit bem Sage, ba id) bie $inber Since the time that I brought up the 
 
 3drad au^ 9ieg?fcten fuljrte. children of Israel out of Egypt. 
 
 (£r ill f e 1 1 einem 3ab,re franf. He has been sick for (since) a year. 
 
 3d) i)&bt it)n f eit jefyn 3af;ren ntdjt I have not seen him for (these) ten 
 
 ge^en. 
 
 year 
 12. SSotu 
 
 (£r nafjm bad SBudj sen bem Sifdje. 
 2J o m £>errn fommt, road bie Bunge 
 reben foil. — Ps. xvi. h 
 
 He took the book from the table. 
 The answer of the tongue is frctti 
 the Lord. 
 
 2ftan fommt son einem Drte roorauf One comes from a place in (at 
 (roo man), nnb au^ einem Dvte which, and out of a place in 
 rcortn trm fid) beftnbet. which one is. 
 
248 
 
 LESSOM LXYI. 
 
 Sr fommt yon bcm SJfarfte. 
 
 3<§ fomme a it 5 ber Oper. 
 
 3Bag fagt man sen U)m ? 
 
 ©te fmgen von Seng uub Sick, — 11. 
 
 'Dicfer £ifd) ift Don (£['cn!)olg. 
 
 Unb liepen (id) taufen » o n ifim. 
 
 (£r ijl cin ©cfyroebe »on ®eburt« 
 
 25 o n tt'«m ift biefeS ©emalbe ? 
 
 ©r war » o n Sonne tvunfen. 
 
 (£r ift fXcin son $erfeu. 
 
 2) u foil ft ©ott, betnen £errn, lieoen 
 
 »on gcmgem $erjen, 
 Si lebt son femcn (Etntunften. 
 Gs ciing gut y o n ©fatten' 
 ©r tt)at eo » o n freicn ©tMen. 
 £3iau yon Slugen, ioet$ yon ©time* 
 t)er (Sin 1 in golbnen Socfen, ber Stnbre 
 
 grau Don £aar. — U» 
 
 He comes /rom. the market. 
 
 I come /ro>n (o?tf of) the opera 
 
 What is said of him? 
 
 They sing of spring-time and love. 
 
 This table is (made) of ebony. 
 
 And were baptized of (by) him. 
 
 He is a Swede by birth. 
 
 By whom is this painting? 
 
 He was intoxicated with delight. 
 
 He is small in stature. 
 
 Thou shaltlove the Lord thy Gel 
 
 with all thy heart. 
 He lives on his income. 
 It went off (succeeded) well. 
 He did it of his own accord. 
 Blue-eyed (blue of), white-browed. 
 The one in golden locks, the other 
 
 gray-haired. 
 
 13. 3u, 
 
 (£r geljt g u Sttarfte, j u Sifck, 
 
 ©ie betteln yon $au$ gu £au3. 
 
 (£3 gereidjt it)m g u r £t)re. 
 
 ©ie steben tljn &ur 3>erantraortung. 
 
 3d) gct)e g u meinem ©ruber* 
 
 Sr fatj nod) g u £ifd). 
 
 ©te lagen il)m gu ft-u£en. 
 
 ©ie ftanb it)m g u r ©eite. 
 
 (Sr fat) etti Xrejfcn jur ©ee. 
 
 2Bir t'amen g u r rcd)ten 3eit. 
 
 (£r bicnt gu £ofe. 
 
 ©te ijl nod) gu £aufe. L. 43. 2. 
 
 (£v fauft £ud) gu etnem 3?otf. 
 
 2)a3 fann gum Scroeife bienen. 
 
 CEg ift bir gum 33ciren gefcheben* 
 
 2)u ^afi il)n gum letpten 2JtaI gefefjen, 
 
 ©te ftarben gu Saufenben. 
 
 Sftan fangt fte gu &aufen. 
 
 (£r reifl gu SBaffcr, id) g it Sanbe. 
 
 ©te reifen g u 3>ferbc, id) g u Sup. 
 
 He is going to market, to table. 
 
 They beg from house to house. 
 
 It redounds to his honor. 
 
 They call him to account. 
 
 I am going to my brother's. 
 
 He was still sitting at table. 
 
 They lay at his feet. 
 
 She stood at his side. 
 
 He saw an engagement at sea. 
 
 We came at the right time. 
 
 He serves at court. 
 
 She is still at home. 
 
 He buys cloth for a coat. 
 
 That may serve for (as) a proof. 
 
 It was done for your good. 
 
 You have seen him for the last time. 
 
 They died by thousands. 
 
 They are caught by (in) multitudes. 
 
 He travels by water, I by land. 
 
 They travel on horseback, I on foot. 
 
 14. 3 U often occurs after a noun preceded by a U f or n a d)» 
 
 <£r gtng a u f ben gremben g u. He went up to the stranger. 
 
 15. The dative ivith 3 it in connectkn with ft> erbett, is often 
 rendered by our nominative ; after m a d) e tt, by our objective: 
 
 2>on 9?atur ocftkn loir f'cinen Seller, By nature we possess no fault that 
 
 ber md)t g ur Sugenb, feme Sugenb, might not become a virtue, (and) 
 
 bie md)t gum §et)ler irerben fonnte* no virtue that might not become 
 
 — ®. a fault. 
 
 SHerjig Satyre bauevte ein ihieg, ber Forty years a war continued, which 
 
 ben ©eftj?er be3 golbreid)en $eru made the possess or of gold yield- 
 
 gum armen 2Karaie mad)le. — ©♦ ing Peru a poor man. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 249 
 
 16. Idioms with 
 
 fffort bat c3 enbttdj ju ©tanbe geftradjt. 
 
 (£r mad)te fid) ten Umftanb ju 9?uj?e* 
 
 ©tcfe Seute Ijalten bag Sljrige jit Kaffj. 
 
 6r will jiir Slber laffen. 
 
 5dj vvibc tfm \u ©efidjte Befontmen. 
 
 v£r fotutte nid)t ju SBorre fommen. 
 
 (£3 fam iftm fctjr ju Statten. 
 
 2>ie #aare fianben i§m ju 23ergc. 
 
 (£r foimtc fcor £ad)en faum pi s #ti;em 
 
 foramen. 
 ffiir tft ntdrt mo^t ju OJhttlje. 
 S)ag tft roirflid) kinase jum toll wer* 
 
 ben. 
 S)j^®'rembctt logirten im SBirttjgljaug 
 
 \\\\\\ Slbler. 
 "Die £f)iir ift ju, bag genjter auf. 
 (£r t;at ju soiel ut tfyun. 
 5?ur hunter ju ! 
 ©dv.ijevnmtf) unb £raurigfett madjen bie 
 
 (Seele nad) unb nad) fd)laff unb roetd)* 
 
 mut^tg.— SOB. 
 
 IVL and nad). 
 
 It has finally been accomplished. 
 
 He profited by the circumstance. 
 
 These people take care of their own. 
 
 He wishes to be bled. 
 
 I have got a sight at (of) him. 
 
 He could not make himself heard. 
 
 It was very favorable to him. 
 
 His hair stood on end. 
 
 He could scarcely get his breath 
 for laughing. 
 
 I feel ill-at-ease. 
 
 That is really almost enough to 
 make one mad. 
 
 The strangers lodged at the Eagle 
 Hotel. 
 
 The door is shut, the window open. 
 
 He has too much to do. 
 
 Keep on ! go on I 
 
 Melancholy and sadness gradually 
 (by degrees) make the soul re- 
 miss and effeminate. 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 Section LXVII. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. 2)ur 
 
 (ir gtng burdj ben SBalb. 
 SBtr ftnb nod) nid)t b it r d). 
 Slrm an ®enufj unb nod) firmer b u r d) 
 
 ben ®enu0, noaS fyaben roir anberg 
 
 alu £offmmgen? — St* 
 6r meint, er fonne eg bu r d) ©elb aug* 
 
 rutten. 
 £ u r d) nid)tg Bejeicfcnen bie 9)Jenfdjen 
 
 mefyr ifjrcn Sfyaratter alg b u r d) bag, 
 
 tta3 fte Iad)erlid) finben. — ®. 
 
 He went through the woods. 
 
 We are not yet through. 
 
 Poor in enjoyment, and still poorei 
 
 through enjoyment, what have 
 
 we but hope(s) ? 
 He thinks he can accomplish it 
 
 by (means of) money. 
 In nothing do men more (perfectly) 
 
 indicate their character, than in 
 
 that which thev call ridiculous. 
 
 2. giir. 
 
 23a nur fur ft dj unb nid)t aud) fur 
 2(nbere teot, Ift nie gliicflid). 
 
 3d) fiifde roeber £iek nod) £afj fiir 
 tint. 
 
 3* felje i^n Sag f it r Sag. 
 
 ©r hat efet Simmer fiir ftd). 
 
 3d) fcatte e3 fiir metne §)f(idjt. 
 
 £>u W|i unfere Suflucot fur unb fiir* 
 — Ps. xc. 1. 
 
 He who lives only for himself, and 
 not/or others also is never happy. 
 
 I feel neither love nor hate for 
 (toward) him. 
 
 I see him day after (by) day. 
 
 He has a room by (to) himself. 
 
 I consider it (regard it as) my duty 
 
 Thou hast been (art) our dwelling 
 place in all generations. 
 
 11* 
 
25; 
 
 LESSON LXVII. 
 
 Gr Faufte fur einen ©utben ^affee 
 Si) fya&e e<3 fitr meinSeben gem* 
 3d) btnnid)t bafiir. 
 
 He bought a florin's worth of coffee 
 I am extravagantly fond of it. 
 I am not in favor of it. 
 
 3. ©e^en. 
 
 £r if: tjbflidj gegen fte. 
 £r loerltep unS gegen Slbenb. 
 Sie ftnt wbunben gegen midj. 
 JBeig man fctn SWittel g e g en ben SBijj 
 
 eine*S totten £unbe3 ? 
 (Er »erfauft e3 nur g e g e n ©etb* 
 DaS Seben gleidjt gegen bie Snug* 
 
 feit, bem (Snellen £aud) ber bem 
 
 ©terbenben entflietyt.— $. 
 KBenn id) mid) gegen fie serpflidjten 
 
 foil, fo miiffen fte 1 3 and) gegen 
 
 mid). — <S. 
 
 He is polite fo (toward) them. 
 
 He left us toward evening. 
 
 They are united against me. 
 
 Is no remedy known for (against) 
 the bite of a mad dog? 
 
 He sells it only for money. 
 
 Life compared with eternity reserr. 
 bles the fleeting breath' that es- 
 capes the dying man. 
 
 If I am to pledge myself to them, 
 they must also do it to me. 
 
 4. SD^nt 
 
 iftidjtS SBertfyjotfeG tft otyne Arbeit Nothing valuable is to be obtained 
 
 ju erlangen. without labor. 
 
 £)|ne ifm Ware id) glMIidj. But for him 1 should be happy. 
 
 Dr)ne is sometimes substituted for al$: 
 
 (£3 tji fein (Erbe r; n e^ (al8) bu unb There is none to redeem it but thee, 
 
 id) nad) btr. — Ruth. iv. 4. and I after thee. 
 
 5. Urn. 
 
 £)e3 ganjen @aue$ Sauern jtetyenum The peasants of the whole province 
 
 ben £>rt gefd)aart. — U. stand gathered round the place. 
 
 2BeiJ3 er u m bie (Ba^t ? Does he know about (of) the affair ' 
 
 ©er (Engel be£ £>errn lagert jtd) u m The angel of the Lord encampetl 
 
 bie r)er^ bie ib,n furd)ten. round about them that fear him 
 
 (Er fommt ura fiinf ll|r. He is coming at five o'clock. 
 
 Urn roiesicl Ufyr (roeldje Beit) gefjt bie At what time (what o'clock) doe. 
 
 (Sonne ctuf? the sun rise? 
 
 ©erbtcne id) ba3 um bid)? Do I deserve that from you? 
 
 3Bie fteljt e3 um if)n? How stands (is) it with him? 
 
 (Er iff u m jefm Safyre alter. He is older by ten years. 
 
 £rauer roar nod) in Bamorra um ben There still was mourning in Zamo- 
 
 £ob be3 gro^en $bnig$. — £>. ra for the great king's death. 
 
 (Er ftel fctnem greunbe u m ben £>al$. He fell upon his friend's neck. 
 
 Um fo (um befto) beffer fiir wi$. 
 S)lc Beit ilium. 
 
 (Er fommt einen Sag u m ben anbern. 
 ©ie fommen einer um ben anbern. 
 (£r t)at ft 
 
 So much the better for us. 
 
 The time is up (past). 
 
 He comes every other day. 
 
 They come on alternate days, 
 um ba$ SBaterlanb serbient He has earned the gratitude of hi 
 country. 
 
 He speaks as he thinks (feels). 
 
 It is not a trifle that is under con- 
 sideration. 
 
 They are running for a (the) wager. 
 
 (Er fprid)t roie e3 ifmt um 1 3 $er$ ijr. 
 <£$ banbelt fid) nid)t u m ^leinigfeiten. 
 
 ©ie laufenum bie Sfiktte. 
 
 Um bie 
 might. 
 
 e tt e is often equivalent to e i f r ig zealously, with all one's 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 251 
 
 6. Urn in compounds frequently marks loss or privation : 
 
 Sr fam urn fcin ©elb. 
 Sftann bractjte iC>rt urn. 
 Die ganjc 3JJanit[(^aft fam um. 
 
 1. The accusative with u m is sometimes ^est rendered by 
 our nominative : 
 
 He lost his money. 
 He was destroyed. 
 The whole crew perished. 
 
 (£3 ifl ein fojiItdjeS 2>ing um bie ®e= 
 funfcfcett. 
 
 The health is a precious thing (as 
 to the health it is, etc.). 
 
 LESSON LXVIIL 
 
 Section LXVIII. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. Hit. 
 
 (£r ftc^t am gcnfter, an ber £pr. 
 
 (£r fagt er fet franf a m £erjcn (L. 20.4). 
 
 (£r lefjntc fid) an bie 3Banb. 
 
 2)er £ifd) ftanb an bcr SSanb. 
 
 3d) erfannte i§n an bcr ©ttmme. 
 
 <£r nal)tn fie a n ber £anb. 
 
 (£r leibet an ^opfroelj. 
 
 Sim £oge ftefyt man ifon nie. 
 
 (£r tfl rcid) an $offnung. 
 
 3d) tljue e3 an feiner Statt. 
 
 (£r flarb an finer SBunbe. 
 
 21 n ifyn bad)te id) nid)t. 
 
 2)te <£tabt liegt an bem fylitffe. 
 
 ©er £ut l;angt an bem 9?agel. 
 
 (£r get)t a n bie Satire. 
 
 ©djreiben ©ie an ifyn? 
 
 @al>en @ie e^ an u)n ab ? 
 
 (Sr ill a n jefm 3al)re alt. 
 
 2. Idioms 
 (Er iji nod) a m £eBen. 
 (Er tyat e3 fo an ber 2lrt. 
 9Jftr liegt nid)t3 an ber ©adje. 
 91 n fctr <3ad)e iji nid)t3. 
 £r $at Gfel a n SMem. 
 Dei £unb liegt an ber Ifette. 
 £ue 0teil)e fommt morgen an mid), 
 !£ii SReifye iji an 3l)nen; nein, fie iji 
 
 a >; mir. 
 jDa* iji nid)t a n bem. 
 £$ iji an bem, ba£ id) geljen muj?. 
 Gr ging it)nen a n bie £anb. 
 (Er fyat e£ a n ben 9)tann get>rad)t. 
 SSon jefct an roerbe id) fleipig fein. 
 (£r fie§t cfcn an. 
 €ie roo^nen nebeii an. 
 
 He stands a£ the window, at the door. 
 
 He says he is sick at (the) heart 
 
 He leaned against the wall. 
 
 The table stood against the wall. 
 
 I recognized him by his voice. 
 
 He took her by the hand. 
 
 He suffers from headache. 
 
 During the day one never sees him. 
 
 He is rich in hope. 
 
 I do it in his stead. 
 
 He died of a wound. 
 
 I did not think of him. 
 
 The city lies on the river. 
 
 The hat hangs on the nail. 
 
 He is going to the door. 
 
 Are you writing to him? 
 
 Did you deliver it to him? 
 
 He is about ten years old. 
 
 with an. 
 
 He is still alive. 
 
 It is his way (custom). 
 
 I care nothing about the maU - 
 
 The affair is of no consequence. 
 
 He is disgusted with every thing, 
 
 The dog is chained. 
 
 It will come my turn to-morrow. 
 
 It is your turn ; no, it is mine, I* 
 
 46. 2. 
 That is not true (is nothing in it), 
 It is time for me to go. 
 He assisted them. 
 He has found a customer. 
 From now on I will be diligent. 
 He stands at the head. 
 They live next door. 
 
252 
 
 LESSON LX7III. 
 
 3. 3Uf. 
 
 <£r beflef;t bar auf. 
 
 ©te fpielt auf bem $Iuget. 
 
 3d serlaffe mid) auf ©ie. 
 
 (Er gef)t a u f ben (ftet)t auf bem) £ugel. 
 
 (Er iff au f ber 4?od)jeit* 
 
 21$a3 fanben©ie auf ber 3>ofl ? 
 
 &3ar er au f bem 23al(? 
 
 (Er iji fci»f? auf uni. 
 
 3d) l)6re auf bay roa6 er fagt* 
 
 ©ie geljen auf ber SSMefe. 
 
 (Er root)nt auf bem ©d)toJ3. 
 
 Stub \it auf bem Canbe ? 
 
 Sluf biefe SBeife gefyt e£ ntd)t. 
 
 (Er fleibet fid) auf englifdje Strt. 
 
 (Er roartete auf mid). 
 
 £eU;en ©ie e<3 mir auf eintge £age. 
 
 ©er,t er auf benSJtarft? 
 
 (Er treibt ba6 £Heb) auf bie SEBeibe. 
 
 (Er iff jiolj auf fe'in ®eib, unb eifer* 
 
 fiidjtig auf feine 9?ad)barn. 
 (Er Jjdli »iel (grope ©tiicfe) auf fie* 
 (S$ t'oftet auf sierjig ©ulben. 
 (S3 Hegt auf bem (er legt e3 auf ben) 
 
 He insists wpow it. 
 She plays on the piano. 
 I depend upon you. 
 He goes on (stands on) the hill. 
 He is at the wedding. 
 What did you find at the post-office ? 
 Was he at the ball? 
 He is angry at us. 
 I listen to what he says. 
 They are walking in the meadow 
 He lives in the castle. 
 Are they in the country. 
 In this way it will not succeed. 
 He dresses in the English fashior.. 
 He waited for me. 
 Lend it to me for a few days. 
 Is he going to market? 
 He drives the cattle to the pasture. 
 He is proud of his money, and jeal- 
 ous of his neighbors. 
 He thinks a great deal of them. 
 It costs about forty florins. 
 It lies (he lies it) on the table. 
 
 (Er iji in bem ©arten. 
 
 $Qa$ fiat er je|t i m ©inne? 
 
 (Er ge()t i n ben ©arten. 
 
 ©te ftnJb in bem (Eonjert. 
 
 ©etn 2>crmogen befter)t i n ©runbftucfen. 
 
 (Er tl;at e£ in biefer 9Ibfid)t. 
 
 ©ie gefyen in bae (Eonjert. 
 
 (Er j.agte fie in bie glud)t. 
 
 (Er fprartg in bie £i>t)e. 
 
 (Er t'iatfdjte in bie £anbe« 
 
 2)ao fattt in bie 2Iugen. 
 
 3d) f)abe ifjn in 2>eroad)t. 
 
 (Er lebt in ben Sag fjtnein. 
 
 (Er fd)lug bie Strmc in einanber. 
 
 ©ie brangen in ir)n fid) ju erfldren. 
 
 &a§ fann id) in ben Zob ntd)t leiben* 
 
 *)ie lamen tn 1 3 ©ebriinge, aber er 
 
 legte fid) fur fie i n 1 3 SJttttel. 
 =-r fajjte fie tn 1 3 9luge. 
 t?r liegt i n ben lefpten 3iigen. 
 ©te liegen fid) in ben £aaren. 
 ©te rebete in einem fort. 
 (Er reifte in alter griUjc ab. 
 (Er iji nod) nid)t i m SReinen baritber. 
 
 ©r fagt, fte f;aSe fid) in ifm serltebt. 
 
 3«- 
 
 He is w the garden. 
 
 "What has he in mind (on foot) now ? 
 
 He is going into the garden. 
 
 They are at the concert. 
 
 His property consists of real estate. 
 
 He did it with this intenticn. 
 
 They go to the concert. 
 
 He put them to flight. 
 
 He sprang up. 
 
 He clapped his hands. 
 
 That attracts attention. 
 
 1 suspect him. 
 
 He lives extravagantly. 
 
 He folded his arms. 
 
 They pressed him to declare himself! 
 
 To that I have a mortal aversion. 
 
 They were in a dilemma, but he 
 
 interposed in their behalf. 
 He looked sharply at them. 
 He lies at the point of death. 
 They are together by the ears. 
 She spoke without cessation. 
 He started very early. 
 He has not yet decided (is not clear' 
 
 in reference to it. 
 He says she has fallen in love with 
 
 him. 
 
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 253 
 
 ©i( a « ben in ben crflcn Hagen afc* They will depart in a very few 
 
 reifen. days. 
 
 Gr ift in ber let-ten 3cit feb,r traurig For some time past he has Doen 
 
 gemefeit. very sad. 
 
 ©ed)3 SBortlein nefymen mtd) in 2In* Six words claim my attention everj 
 
 fprudj jeben Jag. — 9ct. day. 
 
 ©ie baben ttm in ©d)u£ genommen. They have taken him under theii 
 
 protection. 
 
 5. Ueber. 
 
 £>ie £ampe ^a'ngt ii b e r bem 2ifd)e, 
 Gr fajj itber mir am £ifd)e. 
 ©it gebt it b e r bie SBriicfe. 
 5Da$ ift it 6 c c 5ftenfd)en -Hermogen. 
 Sr bet'ommt Brief ii b e r Brief. 
 Cajfet fie Sonne uber euren 3orn 
 
 niibt untergetjen. — Eph. iv. 26. 
 $ier uber r)at er nid)t nadjgebadu. 
 Unt» roofletti bap mein SJolf meinei Sia* 
 
 men$ Pergefle it b e r ifjren Xrd'umen, 
 
 gleidjrcie ir)re SSater metned 9£amen$ 
 
 uergajjen it b e r Den Baal.-Jer. 23. 
 XL c b c r btefe langroetttge S^ebe fd)lief 
 
 cv cut. 
 lie ber ba$ ©aumnijj Ijabcn end) bie 
 
 ©panter ba3 9hfe it b e r bie Dfyren 
 
 gejogen. — ©. 
 SRofed aber flcb, uber btefe 9cebe. 
 ©ie t|l bofe itber mein Cad&en. 
 ©o tvtr tyeute roerben geridjtet itber 
 
 biefer 2Bo$u$at, 
 2Kan £>at if)n it b e r ber Xfyat ertappt* 
 Gr t^atte fid) getrojret it b c r Slnmon. — 
 
 2. Sam. xiii. 39. 
 £ettte it b er acbt £agc fommt er. 
 SRetfen ©ie itber Bremen? 
 U e b e r ben ©ommer ir-ofynt et cuf 
 
 bem Sanbe. 
 U e b e r furj ober lang fommt er an 
 
 ben ®algen. 
 23ei ibm get>t bie Oteblidjfett itber 
 
 Silled. 
 Sr fennte ed nid)t uber ba£ £er$ 
 
 brtngen. 
 ©it ftnb uber ^etb gegangen. 
 U e b e r ben faulcn $erl ! 
 D, it b e r bie BItnbcn, bie utdjt fer)crt 
 
 rooKen!— 8. 
 
 The lamp hangs over the table. 
 He sat above me at the table. 
 She is going across the bridge. 
 That is beyond (above) human power 
 He receives letter after (over) letter. 
 Let not the sun go down upon 
 
 your wrath. 
 On this he has not reflected. 
 Which think to cause my people 
 
 to forget my name by their 
 
 dreams, as their fathers have for- 
 gotten my name for Baal. 
 Under (during) this tedious speech 
 
 he fell asleep. 
 During the delay the Spaniards 
 
 have drawn the net over your 
 
 ears. 
 Then fled Moses at this saying. 
 She is angry at my laughing. 
 If we this day be examined of this 
 
 good deed. — Acts, iv. 9. 
 He has been caught in the act. 
 He was comforted concerning Am- 
 
 non. 
 A week/?*o?w to-day he is coming. 
 Do you go by way of Bremen ? 
 During (through) the summer he 
 
 lives in the country. 
 Sooner or later he will come to 
 
 the gallows. 
 With him honesty is prized above 
 
 every thing else. 
 He could not find it in his heart 
 
 (make up his mind to it). 
 They have walked into the country. 
 O, the lazy fellow ! 
 (0,) shame on the blind that will 
 not see ! 
 
 6. ttrtter. 
 
 SBtr f^fjen unter bem Baum. 
 Kr fap unter mir am £ifd)e. 
 2)a3 \\L unter feiner Sitrbe. 
 Unter biefer Bebinjurg fBue id) e3. 
 
 We sat under the tree. 
 He sat below me at the table. 
 That is beneath his dignity. 
 On this condition I will do it. 
 
254 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 Hitter fetncn "Sotjnen tyctBe tdj tnir ti* 
 
 ncn Jfbnig crroctfylt. 
 (Sr beftieg u titer bent ©c^aHe ber 
 
 2)rommeten ba3 SRorl* 
 <So lange t« @rbe em $inb iff, fo tft 
 
 unter ifm unb ehtem $ned)te fetn 
 
 llnterfd)ieb. — Gal. iv. 1 
 Sflctn fennt tfn nur unter Oiefem 9ia* 
 
 men* 
 ^ornme tnirnie roieber unter bie,2ftt* 
 
 gen, 
 ©r ijt unter ber SIrbeit eingefd)tafen. 
 SWaBucfy ijt unter ber sprefle. 
 (£3 tfl unmogltd) atfe $ityfe unter ei? 
 
 nen £ut &u bringen* 
 ©r Bat um etne Unterrebung unter 
 
 »ier 3iugen. 
 (£r gtng unter bie ©olbaten. 
 <£$ liegt 2UIe$ unter etttanber, 
 <£r ftecft unter einer£>ecfe mit ifyten. 
 
 @te fletjt » o r ber £pr. 
 @ie weinten u o r greube. 
 (£r fiarb »or hunger* 
 (£r roar aufier fid) » o r Born. 
 Sefct ftnb roir ftcfyer j> o r i$m. 
 Sanb er <Sd)utj S) or tf)m ? 
 ©as @d)iff liegt » o r Sinfer. 
 3d) fafy ifm » o r einer ©tunbe. 
 25a$ ifl » o r ber £anb fytnreidjenb, 
 2>ie £tnrid)tung ttirb Mb »or ftd) 
 gefyen. 
 
 I have provided me a king among 
 
 his sons. — 1 Sam. xvi. 1. 
 Amid the clangor of trumpets he 
 
 mounted the steed. 
 As long as the heir is a child there 
 
 is no difference between him and 
 
 a servant (Literal). 
 He is known only by (under) this 
 
 name. 
 Never come before my eyes again. 
 
 He has fallen asleep at his work. 
 
 The book is in press. 
 
 It is impossible to make all men of 
 one opinion. 
 
 He sought a private (secret) inter- 
 view. 
 
 He became a soldier. 
 
 Every thing lies in confusion. 
 
 He is in collusion (under one cover) 
 with them. 
 
 7. 35 or. 
 
 She is standing before the door. 
 
 They wept for (with) joy. 
 
 He died of hunger. 
 
 He was beside himself with anger. 
 
 Now we are safe from him. 
 
 Did he find protection against him? 
 
 The ship lies at anchor. 
 
 I saw him an hour ago. 
 
 That, for the present, is sufficient. 
 
 The execution will soon take place 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 Cection LXIX. 
 
 ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 1. 2lfcer. 
 
 &$ ifl gut, a Ber ntdjt fdjim. 
 (£r, a ber, tooffte ntdjt ger)ert. 
 <£te fann ed tfjun; totff fie after? 
 Unb a ber erflang bte SJrommetc. 
 <£r ft f)5<f)|? a$er-(f e. uber)gIauBig. 
 
 It is good, but not beautiful. 
 He, however, would not go. 
 She can do it; will she though? 
 And again the trumpet resounded. 
 He is exceedingly superstitious. 
 
 2. gnietm 
 
 <5ie ftnb jttar reid), all e in fie mtfcen They are, it is true, wealthy, but 
 
 ttjren OteidUlntm nid)t. they do not use their wealth. 
 
 (£r ifi ntdjt a rein reidj, fonbmt audj He is not only (alone) rich, bat also 
 
 toofyltljdtig, beneficent. 
 
ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 255 
 
 3. rr& 
 
 2)er SJtojr bleibt ung alg ©etpel.-©. Max remains (to us) as (a) hostage. 
 
 (£r |ic!)t aut, a I g ob er franf rectre. He looks as though lie were sick, 
 
 ©iiper ift md)tg, aU £iebe; £onig Sweeter than love is nothing; ho- 
 
 i|"i ©atie ju tl)r. — £>. ney is gall (compared) to it. 
 
 6r fyat nid)tg a I g bag CeBeit. lie has naught but (else than) life. 
 
 Dfiemanb a I g er fann eg tl)un. None 6i*£ him can do it. 
 
 3d) fpredje fo »iel( — )id) fann. I speak as much as I can. 
 
 Note. — After fo, as in the above example, alg is often omitted. 
 
 4. Klftf. 
 
 3d) mupte alfo fyanbeln. I was obliged to act thus (so). 
 
 (£r fyat eg serfprodjen, alfo mufj er He has promised it, consequently 
 
 Cg tl)Un. {hence) he must do it. 
 
 ©te fennen iljn a I f o ? You know him *A<m/ 
 
 5. 21 ltd). 
 
 £>er ©djiiler ift and) Ijier geroefen. The scholar also has been here. 
 
 ©ie fennen iljn, id) fenne ttyn and). You know him, 1 know him too. 
 
 ©ie fennen it)nmd)t, id) fenne ilm aud) You do not know him, neither (L. 
 
 ntd)t. 21. 8.) do I (L. 38. 7.). 
 
 ©d)recflid) immcr, and) in gered)ter Dreadful always, even in a just 
 
 Qad)i ift ©eroalt. — <£>. cause, is violence. 
 
 £e ift bras unb lobltd) etnen SBbfett)id)t, It is noble and praiseworthy fear- 
 
 roo er and) fretje, furd)tlog anju* lessly to attack a villain, wher- 
 
 greifen. — ©. ever he may stand. 
 
 2>a£ ;li$a()re, ©nte unb ©ortreffltdje ifl The true, good and excellent is 
 
 etnfad) unb fid) immer gleid), roie eg simple and always alike, how- 
 
 aud) crfcbeine. — ©. ever it may appear. 
 
 6. Baffc 
 
 6r rotrb balb anfommen. He will soon arrive. 
 
 (£r roirb b alb bofe. He is easily provoked. 
 
 (Er rodre b alb gefallen. He almost fell (was likely to fall). 
 
 ©3 iff balb bier llt)r. It is rc<?an?/ four o'clock. 
 
 $& a I b fjort man eg fjter, balb bort Now it is heard here, now there. 
 
 7. Sis. 
 
 SBarte b i g id) jurudfomme. Wait till I return. 
 
 (£r g'mg big an bte SSriicfe. He went as far as (to) the bridge. 
 
 ©te ajngen big an ben £alg in bag They went in to the water up to 
 
 Staffer. their necks. 
 
 (Sr iff big i u m ©terben franf. He is sick even unto death (dying). 
 
 3d) tjtbe ifm big auf ben le|ten I have paid him to the last far- 
 pfennig bejab.lt. thing. 
 
 <£*> f)atte bag @elb big auf etntge He had received the money within 
 
 Q)rofd)cn err)alfert. (except) a few groats. 
 
 5llte big auf ©ie ftnb jufrieben. All but (except) you are satisfied. 
 
 Sljer nid)t erfolgt beg $ampfeg (£nbf, The end of the contest did not come 
 
 alg bi 2 ber lefcte SSftanu gefallen iff. until the last man fell (had fall- 
 
 -©. len) 
 
256 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 £) a er nid)t gel)t, fo gel)e id). 
 
 ©a nod) Silled tag in wetter $erne. 
 
 © a t)atteft £m (£ntfd)tup unb 3Jtoty 
 
 unb je£t, 
 ... 2) a ber ©rfotg 'oerftdjert ift 
 
 fang)! ©u an ju jagen.— @. 
 5Du ftanbeft t)ter f id) franb b a. 
 © a bin id) fd)on roieber. 
 ©tlig jmb, bte ba Seib tragen. 
 
 9. 
 
 fD<U 
 
 ^.s (since) he does not go, I go. 
 . . ./Is (when or while) all yet lay in the 
 — distance, (iAera) you had resolu- 
 tion and courage, and now that 
 ba the result is secured (hod) you 
 begin to despair. 
 You stood here, I stood there. 
 Here I am again already. 
 Blessed are they that mourn. 
 
 (Sagte er, bap er l)euic get)e? 
 SBte lattge ift ed, bap er t)ier war? 
 SBarte bid bap er formnt. 
 2) a § id) it>n nur fetjcn fomtte ! 
 © a fj bn ntd)t son ber ©telle getjft. 
 2)a§ id) ed nid)t roiipte! 
 5luf b a j* ex ed balb »erge|fe. 
 
 10. 
 
 SBBarum gel)t er b e n n nid)t mil und ? 
 3d) mug tt)t» adjten, benn cr ift ein 
 
 aufrid)tiger SJhnn. 
 (Bit effen nid)td benn 93rob. 
 
 Did he say that he goes to-day? 
 
 How long is it since he was here ? 
 
 Wait till (that) he comes. 
 
 That I might only see him! 
 
 Do not move from the spot. 
 
 As though I did not know it! 
 
 In order that he may soon forget it. 
 
 £)tnn. 
 
 "Why does he not go with us then? 
 I must respect him, for he is an 
 
 upright man. 
 They eat nothing but bread. 
 
 (£r ftel)t t)ot)er aid Jlrieger, benn aid He stands higher as a warrior than 
 ©taatdmann. as a statesman. 
 
 2)er Sftenfct) lanrt nid)t roat)rr)aft gliicf* Man can not be truly happy (i. e. 
 ltd) fein, ed fei benn, bap er tit* unconditionally), he it then '(as the 
 genbljaft fei. condition), that he be virtuous ; or, 
 
 Man can not be truly happy unless he is virtuous. 
 
 11. Dod). 
 
 ^<xi tft bod) fonberbar. 
 
 3d) modjte bod) rrnffen, roantm er ba* 
 
 l)in get)t. 
 ©et)en @ic bod) mit ntir. 
 3a, bod)! 9Rem, bod)! 
 
 - ; ^|bod)(orobod).) 
 
 <£r t)at fein 23ud% 
 
 That is really singular. 
 
 Why, I should like to know, why ht 
 
 goes there. 
 Do (pray do) go with us. 
 Yes, indeed! No, indeed! 
 You do not know them. yes I do. 
 He has no book. Yes he has. 
 
 12. 
 
 <Sie ift eben fo alt roie er. 
 2Btr geljen e b en (or fo eben) aud. 
 ©ad badjte idj e b e n nicljt. 
 ©ben barum Witt id) n'd)t ntel)r fdjrei* 
 ben. 
 
 13. 
 
 3d) falj i|n, e l) e er mtd) fat). 
 3d) mod)te el)er (tieber) fterben, 
 leben. 
 
 She is just as old as he. 
 We are just going out. 
 That is not exactly what I thought 
 Eor that very reason I will not 
 write any longer. 
 
 1 saw him before he saw me. 
 aid fo I would rather dio than to live 
 
 thus. 
 
 <£r ging nicljt el) e r , aid bid er fte affe He did not go till {before) he had 
 gefel)en l)atte. seen them all. 
 
ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 251 
 
 14. (S r ft. 
 
 ©r(l octe, bann arbeite. 
 <5ie tjl e r ft $et)n 3af)re alt. 
 Sr fyat e r ft angefangen. 
 553tr roerber c r fi morgen gefjen. 
 
 JVr«< pray, then work. 
 
 She is cm^ ten years old. 
 
 He has only just begun. 
 
 TVe shall not go £#/ to-morrow. 
 
 15. St ii? a. 
 
 Gr ifl e ttna fitnfjig 3af)re alt. 
 §>aoe id) <Sie etwa beleibigt? 
 
 He is aoow* fifty years old. 
 Have I (perhaps) offended you 
 
 16. Oar. 
 
 £3 ifl nidjt fo gar lartge t)cr. 
 3d) toeijj e$ mir gar ju wot)!. 
 (£3 ift g a r ju fd)on. 
 (£3 ift fdjdblidj, roenn nidjt gar 
 
 faj>rlidj. 
 ©3 birrjiete fie gar fefyr. 
 Si, roarunt nidjt gar? 
 3d) fef)e e^ gar ntd)t. (L. 19. 3.) 
 
 It is not so very long since. 
 I know it but (altogether) too well. 
 It is very (too) beautiful. 
 gc* It is injurious, if not even dangerous. 
 
 They were exceedingly thirsty. 
 Hey, why not then (indeed) ? 
 I do not see it all. 
 
 17. ©em, fain, gladly, comparative liefccr 
 ■like, be fond of , etc. 
 
 £)ie $inber, fie tjoren e3 gem e. — ©. 
 
 3d) trinfe gern $ane. 
 
 SWodjten Sie gern £)eutfdj Iernen? 
 
 (£v fyat jte fct)r gern. 
 
 ©iefe 3)fIanjC fyat gem eirtert fanbigen 
 
 Sober*. 
 (£3 mod)te gem reguen. 
 2)te3 9>fcrb fd)lcigt gem. 
 ©title Gaffer ftnb gem fief. 
 
 rather, often answers to 
 
 The children (L. 28.) like to hear it. 
 
 I am. fond of coffee. 
 
 Would you like to learn German ? 
 
 He likes them very much. 
 
 This plant likes (flourishes best in) 
 
 a sandy soil. 
 It "is trying" to (looks like) rain. 
 This horse is inclined to kick. 
 Still waters are (apt to be) deep. 
 
 18. © I e t d) is often equivalent to o o g I e i d) (L. 53). 
 
 3ft e3 g I e i d) nidjt fdjb'n, fo ift e3 bod) Although it is not beautiful, it i*i 
 
 gut. (nevertheless) good. 
 
 3ftgtetd) ber Strnamroalb auf£)un* Though Birnam wood be come to 
 
 ftrtavt fjerangeritdt — ©♦ Dunsinane. — Shak. 
 
 19. 3ttt^cr. 
 
 So fei eS i m m e r. 
 
 Sii ftnb nod) i m m e r r)ier. 
 
 &$ ift immer ein geroagte3 ttnter* 
 
 net) men. 
 So fd)Iiinm e3 immer (or aud)) iji. 
 ©ie mbgen immer roiffen, bajj id) 
 
 nid)to me$r Ijabe. — S.^ 
 
 (£r fann e6 immer glauBeru 
 (£r fage, roa$ er immer rooKe. 
 <5ie roerben immer ]M$er. 
 
 Thus be it ever (or always). 
 
 They are still ( — ) here. 
 
 It is a hazardous undertaking, at 
 any rate. 
 
 However bad (bad as) it is. 
 
 It is a matter of indifference to ma 
 that they should know I no long- 
 er have any thing. 
 
 He may (for aught I care) believe it. 
 
 Let him say what he pleases. 
 
 T'aey grow prouder and prouder. 
 
258 
 
 LESSON LXIX. 
 
 20. 3 a. 
 
 SBIcibut B.t jo. ju £aufe 
 Ztyun <Ete c3 j a nid)t, 
 3d) fann ja ntd;t lefen, 
 
 unb fdjrei&cn.— S3. 
 SBenn id) ja langer au36leioenfotfte, fo 
 
 ttarte ntdn auf mid). 
 
 Kemain, by all means, at home. 
 Do not, by any means, do it. 
 H"d) redjnen Why, I can not read, nor cipher 
 
 nor write. 
 But if I should remain longer do 
 
 not wait for me. 
 
 21. 
 
 ©u ift j e unb j e traurtg. 
 
 3ft er je tyier geroefen? 
 
 S)a8 Kit son i e f)er tie ©rfa^rung oe* 
 
 iDtefen. 
 <3te gingen j c jroet unb j»ci. 
 (£3 nedt je ctnev ben anbern. 
 3 e nad)bem ev geljanbelt fjat, rotrb fetn 
 
 £oo3 fetn. 
 3 e langer $ter, j e (befto) fpater bort. 
 
 She is always (ever and ever) sad. 
 Has he ever been here? 
 Experience has always (from the 
 
 first) proved that. 
 They went two by two. 
 Each teases the other. 
 According as he has acted will his 
 
 lot be. 
 The longer here the later there. 
 
 22. tfettt. 
 
 (£3 ift fetn <Sd)nec— © 
 Unb nirgenbS fetn 2)anf.— ©♦ 
 £8ie elenb ware ntdjt ber 2)?enfd) ofjne 
 £>offmmg. 
 
 It is not (is no) snow. 
 And nowhere any (no) gratitude. 
 How miserable would (not) man 
 be without (but for) hope. 
 
 Note. — Where two negatives occur, as above, only one should be 
 translated. 
 
 23. ft o c6. 
 
 (£r roolmt nod) Ijter. 
 (£3 ift n>?ber fd)6n nod) niifcli<$| 
 3d) fyctbe tf)tt nod) ntd)t gefetjen. 
 (Singen @te c3 nod) etnmal. 
 9M)men <£ie nod) etnen Styfel. 
 SBccnbige etne (Sadjc, roenn fte and; 
 
 n o d) fo fletn fd)eint, e|e bu etne an* 
 
 bere anfangfh 
 
 He still lives here. 
 
 It is neither beautiful nor useful. 
 
 I have not yet seen him (L. 21. 7). 
 
 Sing it again (yet once). 
 
 Take another apple (L. 65. 1. a,). 
 
 Finish one thing, even if it seems 
 
 ever (never) so small, before you 
 
 begin another. 
 
 24. ft U It. 
 
 tjl nun ju tfjun? What is to be done 72020/ 
 
 Stun, Voa$ iji iu tfyun? Well, what is to be done? 
 
 2Beld)en (Sntfd)tufs nun fte fapten, er Whatever resolution they adopted 
 
 fyUte feinen $>\x>t& errctd)t. he had gained his end. 
 
 Unb nun bte$ SBlatt un3 fur bte And since (now that) this sheet 
 
 Sruppen fcitrgt. — ©♦ secures to us the troops. 
 
 25. 9lur. 
 
 ©aS wei§ er nur w gut. 
 
 (Er fyat nur etnen $veunb. 
 
 *2Be$m tdj nur fctye." 
 
 £ag tfjn nur frnunen. 
 
 SBie id) tQ nur immer fcerlangeti mag. 
 
 That he knows but too well. 
 He has only (but) one friend. 
 Wherever I look. 
 Just let him come. 
 However I may demand it 
 
ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 25& 
 
 26. <B d) o n. 
 
 ©ie fcmmcn fdjon. 
 Sie werben fd)on fomtnen. 
 £)a3 til i&m fdjon red)t. 
 §abe id) f d) o n roenig (obfdjon id) we* 
 irig ^abc) fo ^abe id) bod) genug. 
 
 They are already coming. 
 They will come at the right time. 
 He is perfectly satisfied wit that. 
 Although I have but little, still I 
 have enough, 
 
 21. <5 o. 
 
 (Er if! eoen f o alt rote idj. 
 © o cin 33ud) fteljt man fetten. 
 SBte fann cr fo etwa3 glauben? 
 ©o tf)r blei^en wcrbetanmeiner S^cbc, 
 
 f o feib ifyr meine redjten Sunger. 
 3d) bin eud)ein1)orn inbenSIugen, fo 
 
 t'lein id) bin.— 03. 
 Vlidn fo balb war eincr fort, al3 em 
 
 anberer fam. 
 © o geben ©ie fdjon? 
 © o gro§ i^re gurdjt oor bcm $einbe 
 
 war, fo angenefym roar tr)re lUbcr* 
 
 rafdjung iiber feme SKajjigung. 
 
 He is just as old as I am. 
 
 Such a book one seldom sees. 
 
 How can he believe such a thing if 
 
 If ye (will) continue in rn} T word, 
 then are ye my disciples indeed. 
 
 I am a thorn in your eyes, small as 
 (however small) I am. 
 
 No sooner was one gone than an- 
 other came. 
 
 Ah (indeed), are you already going? 
 
 Great as was their fear of the ene- 
 my, so agreeable was their sur- 
 prise at his moderation. 
 
 28. ©on ft. 
 
 S^ue e$ nidjt, fo nfi wirft bu Befiraft 
 
 roerben. 
 ©ie muffen c$ ifmn, fonfl geljt er 
 
 »cg. 
 (Er fut fie fo nfl wo gefe^en. 
 © o n ft bad)te unb fyanbelte er ganj an* 
 
 berS. 
 ©ie fbnnten c$ ffyun, wenn fie e3 fonfl 
 
 wollten. 
 
 Do not do it, otherwise you will be 
 punished. 
 
 You must do it, or else he will go 
 away. 
 
 He has seen them somewhere else. 
 
 Formerly he thought and acted en- 
 tirely otherwise. 
 
 You could do it, that is, if you 
 would (if you only would). 
 
 29. ttttt). 
 
 !£)er Sttenfdj tjr frci gefdjafren, ifr fret, Man is created free, is free even 
 Unb wiirb er initetten geboren.-©. (and) were he born in chains. 
 
 30. S3 1 e H e t <H 
 
 ©ie fennen i§n »telteicf>t. 
 itennen ©ie ir>n»ielXeidt)t' 
 ^bnnen ©ie mir oielleic 
 wc er wof>nt? 
 
 Perhaps you know him. 
 Do you know him [perhaps) ? 
 t fagen, Can you (perhaps) tell me whei a 
 he lives ? 
 
 31. SB t e. 
 
 SBilJen ©ie, roie er jitrgt? 
 
 (Er fpridjt, w i e er benft. 
 
 ©ie woljnen nod) fyter, w i e icr) Ijore. 
 
 (£r f>eult ro ie ein 23olf. 
 
 £)er "JWenf^en £t)atcn unb ©ebanfen, 
 
 wi§t, ftnb nid)t rote 2fteere3 wilb 
 
 fcewegte 2Betten. — ©. 
 
 Do you know how he sings ? 
 
 He speaks as he thinks 
 
 They still leave here as I hear. 
 
 He howls like a wolf. 
 
 Men's thoughts and deeds, know 
 (ye), are not like (not as are) 
 ocean's wildly agitated waves 
 
260 LESSOM LXX. 
 
 32. 2t I 3 ID t e sometimes occurs in the signification of ro i f : 
 
 £>er Set liegt ruljtg bet, uU lute ein The lake lies quiet ther» (so as) 
 ebener Spiegel. — S. like a smooth mirror. 
 
 33. SB i e (or aU to it) sometimes follows an adjective in the compar- 
 ative, and answers to than: 
 
 SBeniger rctd> to it fie fd)eint tjr un* Less rich than it seems is our lan- 
 fere Spraet;e. — $. g ua ge- 
 34. S3 o ^ I 
 
 (£r beftnbet ficc) roo bl. He is (finds himself L. 28. 9.) weil 
 
 3d) bin nid)t fo red)t roo|L I am not so very (right) well. 
 
 Mix i|t n.id)t to ox) I. I do not feel well (L. 57. 2.). 
 
 6$ tf)ut (Strtem ro o I; I. It is pleasant (grateful) to one. 
 35. 23 o r) I often denotes a doubt, a supposition, or a probability. 
 
 Sie fyat imS tto^I nod) nid)t gefe^en. She has probably not seen us yet. 
 
 2)er Werner roetgt 1 fetn £eben bran; bod) The peasant risked his life at it, 
 fyat er 1 <3 to ox)l urn ©olbeS Mlana, ? but did he do it probably for the 
 —S3. clink of gold ? 
 
 (£6 ftnb too 1^1 -fmnbert 3ab,re r)er. It is perhaps a hundred years since. 
 
 2J3te fctnn ber Sftenfdj jtcr) fermen lerncrt ? How can man become acquainted 
 Surd) 33etrad)ten niemalS, roo^l with himself? by reflection never, 
 aber burd) $anbeut. — @. but he can by acting. 
 
 2£ b, 1 ifl fie fd)5n, bie SBelt.— ©. The world is indeed beautiful. 
 
 LESSON LXX. Cection LXX. 
 
 1. § e r r, 5 * <* u an( l $ r & u te i n, placed before proper 
 names, answer to Mr., Mrs. and Miss. In address, when the 
 name is omitted, $Jl e i n £>err answers to Sir, and 9JZein §rau^ 
 lein, to Miss ; Sfteine £erren, to Gentlemen, and metne grautetn, 
 to Ladies. SSlalam' (singular), and metne Damen (plural), 
 are addressed to married ladies. 
 
 2. Jperr, S^u aR d 3raulein are used before words denoting 
 relationship (except in reference to one's own relatives) ; and 
 the first two before titles : 
 
 3d) f)abe f)eute £errn 91., $retu 9t. I have to-day seen Mr. K, Mrs. 
 
 unb Sraulein 9£. gefeljen. N. and Miss. JS". 
 
 ©Men SJcorgcn, metn $err, rote beftn* Good morning Sir, how is your 
 
 bet fid) 3|r £err Skater ? father ? 
 
 ©men 2tbenb, metn ^raulein, rote be" Good evening Miss, how are yxur 
 
 ftnben fid) 3r)re %xau Gutter unb mother and your sisters I 
 
 3()re grctuletn Sd)roeftern? 
 
 JTbnnen Sie mir fetgen, too ber $txx Can you tell me where Mr. Secret* 
 
 Secretetr £. roor)nt? ary L. resides ? 
 
 3d) r)abe 3f)re £erren 23riiber unb 3r)re I have seen your brothers and your 
 
 $retulein Sd)roeftern gefeben. sisters, 
 
 ©uten 2(benb metne £e:ren, roie beftn* Good evening Gentlemen, how do 
 
 ben Sie fid) ? you do ? 
 
 3ft ber #err SProfeffor \\x $ewfe ? Is the Professor at home ? 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 261 
 
 Abreviatioxs. StHiirgungetu 
 
 0. a. D am angefufjrten Drte, at the pla^e mentioned, 
 
 2lbfd>n Slbfcfrtitt, section. 
 
 Slum, or Shinier f Slnmerhmg, observation. 
 
 Slntro Stnttwort answer. 
 
 a. St. alten <Sh)l3, old style. 
 
 B. X 3Hte3 Sejtament, Old Testament 
 
 Slufl Sluflage edition. 
 
 CDXiq, auSgeiiommen, except. 
 
 S3 33ucr), 23anb, book ; volume. 
 
 &., Sap. or JTap Sapttel or $apitel, chapter. 
 
 Sentn., St. or Sir Sentner, hundred weight. 
 
 & , £)t. or Dcct Sector, Doctor. 
 
 ©cm. or S)cmoif. 2)cmoifcttc, maiden, lady, miss. 
 
 b. % bag fjeipt, that means. 
 
 b. i bag ift, i. e. , viz. 
 
 b. 3 biefeS Satyr, this year. 
 
 b. 2Jc biefeS Sftonatg, of this month. 
 
 b. 3? ber SJerfajfcf, the author. 
 
 Sv S»ana,cltum, Gospel. 
 
 Sn> Suer, Sure your. 
 
 f- or folg folgenb, {sing.) \ . 
 
 ff. fMgcnbc,(^r.)....r- thefollowm ^ 
 
 %x B'rau, lady, wife. 
 
 %x\)x ^reityerr, baronet, baron. 
 
 geb acboren, . born. 
 
 8 eft geftorben, died. 
 
 £r. , £rrt £>err, $crrn, Mr., Sir, Sirs, Messrs. 
 
 % @ §etUge ©djrtft, Holy Scriptures. 
 
 S. S 3ef«8 Sr)ri|lu3, Jesus Christ 
 
 $aif. or faifcrt faiferlid), imperial. 
 
 $ctt. or fonigl flhugtid), royal. 
 
 I IteS, read. 
 
 SRatl $cabam, Madam 
 
 SRaj SWaiejiat, Majesty. 
 
 Sfttfe SDtabemotfeffe, Mad unoiselle, Mias, 
 
 9ft fcr. or Sftfcrpt Sftanufcript, manuscript. 
 
 9?. 01 $1.91 9kme or Harnett, name or names. 
 
 9? S^orben, north. 
 
 *ft. @ 5?ad)fd)rift postscript 
 
 5c. <3't neucn ©tsjla, new style. 
 
 9*. 2 9ceue3 Seframent, . . "New Testament 
 
2 *>2 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 D Often, East. 
 
 cb ober, or. 
 
 3>f. or 3>fb $Pfunb, pound. 
 
 $rof. '. Sprofeffor, professor. 
 
 SRec OTecenfent/ reviewer, critic, 
 
 IfCt^lr 9Wd)3tf)ater, Rixdollar. 
 
 © (Seite ; (Sitben, page ; South. 
 
 <S. or f. fief)e, see, vide. 
 
 fel feligf late, deceased. 
 
 (St. or Set Sanct, Saint. 
 
 (Sib (Stunbe, hour. 
 
 £f) Sljeit, volume, part. 
 
 £l;Ir Scaler, dollar. 
 
 it unb, and. 
 
 u. a. m unb anbere mer)r <fcc, farther. 
 
 u. bgl. m unb bergteidjen mef)r, and similar instai ce» 
 
 it. f. f. unb fo fort, or ferner, n 
 
 u. f. m unb fo tnet)r, (. . . etc. 
 
 u. f. w. or tc unb fo roeiter ) 
 
 tt. tt. 91 unb sielc Stnbere, and many othera 
 
 S8 33er3, verse. 
 
 » yon of, from. 
 
 SSerf. or SBf. SJerfaffer, author. 
 
 ijcrgX. or »gl 'oergtetdje, compare. 
 
 D. c son often, from above. 
 
 23orr SSorrebe, preface. 
 
 '». u son unten, from belo-w. 
 
 SB 23ejlen, West. 
 
 3 Setle, line. 
 
 j. SB. or 4. ®. . . . sum S3etfptel, jum®xem»eI>for example . 
 
S 1. ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Etymology regards words as individuals ; discloses theil 
 origin and formation ; classifies them according to significa- 
 tion; and shows the various modifications, which they 
 undergo in the course of declension and conjugation. * 
 
 § 2. Derivation and composition. 
 
 (1) In respect to derivation, all German words are divi- 
 sible into three classes : Primitives, Derivatives and Compounds. 
 
 (2) The Primitives, which are also called roots or radicals. 
 are all verbs ; forming the basis of what are now generally called 
 the irregular verbs, and of about fifty, or sixty others, which 
 were once irregular in conjugation, but are so no longer. They 
 ire also all monosyllables ; and are seen in the crude form, (so 
 to speak,) by merely dropping the suffix (e n) of the Infinitive 
 mood : thus, fcinb(en,) to bind ; fd)liejj(en,) to close ; fangfen, ) 
 to catch. 
 
 (3) From the primitives, sometimes with, sometimes with- 
 out, any change in, or addition to the crude form, comes a 
 numerous train of derivatives : chiefly nouns and adjectives. 
 
 Thus, from £inb(en,) to bind, we get ber 33 a nb, the volume, 
 and ber 53 u n^, the league, where the derivatives are pro- 
 duced by a mere vowel change. The derivative is, also, often 
 distinguished by a mere euphonic, or orthographic termination : 
 changing the form indeed, but in no wise affecting th«* sense. 
 The terminations employed, in this way, are e r, e I, c it, e, b e, 
 t e and c t ) thus, from fprecft(ett,) to speak, comes bie ©!pr a dj c. 
 jeech; language. In some cases, moreover, in forming de- 
 rivatives, the syllable ge (without meaning) is prefixec? ; as, 
 
 mf, sure; certain; ber ©efcmg, the song. 
 
 The inflection of all parts of speech, except the Verb, is, in Grammar, 
 led declension : the regular arrangement of the moods, tenses, numbers, 
 
 Eersons, and participles of a verb, is called Conjugation : in a ger.eral way, 
 owever, all words capable of inflection are said to be declinable. The f>- 
 lechnable parts of speech are often called Particles. 
 
 263 
 
264 ETYMOLOGY. § 2. 
 
 (4) But there is another and a most extensive class of de» 
 rivatives, sometimes called secondary derivatives formed by 
 the union of radical * words with suffixes, that are significant : 
 thus, from t)etlig, (Aoty, sacred ;) vve get by adding e tt, the 
 verb ^eilicjcn, to make holy ; to consecrate. The suffixes of 
 this class (the significant ones) are, however, most of them, 
 used in forming nouns and adjectives. They will be found ex- 
 plained under those heads respectively. Several of them are 
 the same inform exactly as the terminations mentioned above, 
 as being often added to primary derivatives. From these, 
 that is, from the merely orthographic endings, the significant 
 suffixes are to be carefully distinguished. 
 
 (5) Among the secondary derivatives must, also, be in- 
 cluded those formed by means of prefixes as well as suffixes. 
 These are mainly verbs, and are treated somewhat at large 
 under the head of Compound Verbs. 
 
 (6) In respect to compounds, properly so called, that is, 
 words formed by the union, not of prefixes and suffixes with 
 radicals, but of radicals, or other independent words, one with 
 another, the German is peculiarly rich. Not only is it rich in 
 the abundance of such compounds already in use ; but it 
 possesses a rare facility of forming them, as occasions arise, 
 out of its own resources. 
 
 (1) In forming these compounds, the two components are 
 often merely joined together as one word ; as Ufytmadjer, (from 
 tU;t, a clock or watch, and 2ftacfyer, a maker.) But in numerous 
 cases, the union is marked by the insertion of certain letters, 
 which may be called letters of union : thus, 
 
 £)ie £ob c 8 nofl), (from $ob, death and Sfotr), need, agony;) the 
 
 death-agony ; 
 $>a3 .gimmet 3 Iidjt, (from ^Mantel, heaven and Sidelight;) the 
 
 light of heaven ; 
 £)ie «§erj e n § cji'tte, (from ^erj, heart, and ®iite, goodness ;) the 
 
 goodness of heart; 
 
 * The word radical, however, in this place, is designed to indicate any 
 word capable of assuming a suffix. In this looser sense, the word is often 
 employed for the sake of convenience. 
 
PARTS OF SPEECH. § 3. 265 
 
 $er $ferb e av$, (from $ferb, horse, and Qtrgt, doctor;) the 
 
 horse-doctor ; 
 £>a§ <§'vct e n keen, (from <|Mri, shepherd, and £euen, life ;) the 
 
 pastoral-life ; 
 3>er G?t e r fucfyen, (from (Si, egg, and Jtud)en, cake;, the 
 
 omelet. 
 
 (8) Some of these letters of union are nothing more than 
 the signs of the genitive case of the first component : others 
 are mere euphonic additions. 
 
 (9) In some instances, the union of the parts of a com- 
 pound is characterized by the omission of some letters ; as, 
 ber @onntag, (<Sonn e, the Sun, and Sag, day;) Sunday ; UnU 
 tourbig, (benf c n, to think, and toutbig, worthy ;) worthy of 
 thought. 
 
 (10) In all compounds, finally, the main accent falls upon 
 the first component which, also, always qualifies or defines the 
 second, as containing the fundamental idea. 
 
 § 3. Parts of speech. 
 
 ( 1 ) The parts of speech in German are usually reckoned ten : 
 Articles, Verbs, 
 
 Nouns, or Substantives, Adverbs, 
 
 Adjectives, Prepositions, 
 
 Numerals, Conjunctions, 
 
 Pronouns, Interjections. 
 
 (2) Of these, six, namely, Articles, Nouns, Adjectives. 
 Numerals, Pronouns and Verbs, are capable of inflection ; that 
 is, admit of various changes of termination by which various 
 modifications of meaning are expressed: the other four, namely, 
 Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions and Interjections, are in 
 form invariable. 
 
 (3) All parts of speech capable of inflection have two 
 numbers : the singular, which denotes but one, and the plu- 
 ral, which denotes more than one. 
 
 (4) All parts of speech capable of inflectior., except the 
 *erb, have four cases; namely the nominative, genitive, 
 
 12 
 
266 THE ARTICLE. § 4. 
 
 dative and accusative: also, three genders; namely, the ma* 
 culine, the feminine and the neuter. 
 
 (5) Cases are variations made in the form of a word, to in- 
 dicate its several relations to other words : the nominative being 
 that form which denotes the subject of a verb; the genitive that 
 which is chiefly used in signifying source or possession ; the 
 dative that which indicates the person or thing for or to whom 
 or which any thing is directed ; and the accusative that which 
 points to the immediate or direct object of an action. 
 
 The cases in German correspond well to those in the Latin 
 language. The Vocative, however, is never counted, because 
 it is the same exactly in form with the nominative ; while the 
 Ablative (as in Greek,) is wholly wanting: its place being ge- 
 nerally supplied by the Dative (with a suitable preposition). 
 
 § 4. The article. 
 
 (1) There are two articles in German : the Definite, bet, 
 the; and the Indefinite, em, a, or an. They are inflected 
 thus . 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. For all genders. 
 
 Norn. £)er, bie, ba$, the ; Norn. £)ie, the ; 
 
 Gen. <De$, ber, be3, of the ; Gen. * 3)er, of the ; 
 
 Dat. 5Dem, ber, bent, to, or for the; Dat. £) en, to, or for the; 
 Ace JDen, bie, baS, the. Ace. £)ie, the. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 Norn. (8m, etne, em, an, or a ; N. ") 
 
 Gen. (StneS, einer, eincS, of an, or a ; G.I Wantmo> 
 
 Dat. (Sinem, enter, etnem, to, or for an, or a; D. f °* 
 
 Ace. (Stnen, eine, em, an, or a. A. J 
 
 (2) In familiar style, certain prepositions are frequently 
 contracted with the dative and accusative of the definite article 
 into one word. 
 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 D. am, 
 
 for an bent, 
 
 as, am fetter, at the fire ; 
 
 A an3, 
 
 for an bag, 
 
 as, an§ £itf)t, to the fight ; 
 
D. 
 
 tat, 
 
 for in bent, 
 
 A. 
 
 inS, 
 
 for in ba3, 
 
 D. 
 
 bom, 
 
 for ben bcm, 
 
 A. 
 
 bora, 
 
 for bor ba3, 
 
 D. 
 
 borm, 
 
 for i>or bent, 
 
 D. 
 
 uberiu, 
 
 for liber bent, 
 
 A. 
 
 fiber 3, 
 
 for ii 6 er bciS, 
 
 nouns. § 5. 267 
 
 D. aufht, for anf bent, as, cutfm 5T)urm, on the tower; 
 A. suf$ f for cuif ba3, as, aitfS 4?au3, upon the house ; 
 D. betm, for bet bent, as, beint filter, with the father j 
 A. burd;3, for burd; bct3, as, butdjS Staffer, through the 
 
 water ; 
 A. furS, for fur ba3, as, faro ©elb, for the money ; 
 D. Ijinterm for t; inter bent, as, f;interm £aufe, behind the 
 
 house ; 
 
 as, tnt «£>tmmel, in (the) heaven; 
 
 as, tn3 <£>ciu£, into the h^use ; 
 
 as, bom lleoel, from (the) evil ; 
 
 as, borS frenftcr, before the 
 window ; 
 
 as, bornt £(;ore, before the door ; 
 
 as, itberm Metier, upon the fire; 
 
 as, iiberS ?anb. over (the) land ; 
 D. unterm, for unter bent, as, unternt SBaffer, under (the) 
 
 water ; 
 D. junt, for gu bent, as, gum Sluffe, to the river ; 
 D. jur, for ju ber, as, jur (S(;re, to the honor. 
 
 § 5. Nouns. 
 
 (1) In German, as in English, the nouns, that is, the names 
 of persons and things, are divided into two great classes • 
 viz : Common nouns, which designate sorts, kinds, or classes 
 of objects ; and Proper nouns, which are peculiar to indi- 
 viduals. 
 
 (2) Under the head of common nouns * are commonly 
 
 * I. In German all Nouns, as also all parts of speech when used as 
 nouns begin with a capital letter- Ex. : 1. Ter ©Phit, the son ; tie Xocfcfer, 
 the daughter. I. Dec ©ute, the good (man) ; Me @ufe, the good (woman). 
 3. 5>a§ "Singeu, the singing. 
 
 11. The Indefinite Pronouns. Ex.: Semaift, (any body, somebody). 
 Sktermann, (every body). (£tiv«§, (anything, something), and 9itct;tS, 
 (nothing). 
 
 Note, that when (StWd § and 91 t cb H are connected with a noun, or 
 with an adjective used as a noun they do not begin with a capital. Ex. : 
 (S'r hat etroai 33n>b # he has some bread; it b,iU utd)tS ®ute$, he has 
 nothing good. 
 
 III. The absolute Possessive Pronouns (when used substantively. L 
 35. 2.) h^x. : Tie JDteinwen, (my family ; bae dtteiiiige, (my property). 
 
 IV. The Indefinite Numerals, when used without a substantive. Ex.; 
 $lUe8, 51Ue, (all. ; (Stnige, (some) ; 'Siauriw, (many a); ^iele, (many). 
 
268 GENDER. § 6. 
 
 included se^ eral subdivisions ; as Collective nouns, wliicli are 
 the names oi" a plurality of individuals considered as unity ; and 
 abstract nouns, which are the names of certain qualities, or 
 attributes regarded as separate from any given substance. 
 
 (3) The nouns, both common and proper, as before said, 
 are regularly inflected : exhibiting thus by means of termina- 
 tions the several modifications of gender, number, and case. 
 The numbers and cases will be made sufficiently clear under 
 the head of declension of nouns. We here introduce the sub- 
 ject of 
 
 § 6. Gender. 
 
 (1) Strictly speaking, the masculine gender belongs ex- 
 clusively to words denoting males ; the feminine to those de- 
 noting females ; and the neuter to such only as, are neither male, 
 nor female. And in English, accordingly, with very little ex- 
 ception, this is found to be actually the case. 
 
 (2) Not so, however, in German; for there the names of 
 many things without life, from their real, or supposed posses- 
 sion of qualities pertaining to things with life, are considered 
 and treated as masculine, or feminine. Often, moreover, words 
 indicating things without life, are deemed masculine or feminine 
 merely from some resemblance in form to those designating 
 things properly male or female. Hence arises, in Grammar, 
 the distinction between the natural and the grammatical gender 
 of words. 
 
 (3) Were the natural gender alone regarded, it would be 
 necessary only to know the meaning of a word, to know its 
 gender ; but since this is not the case, we are often obliged to 
 determine gender chiefly by the form. We give below, 
 therefore, the principal Rules for determining the gender in 
 
 V. The Personal Pronouns, S5tt, 3()V, (thou, you), &c., when we would 
 distinguish thereby the person addressed. 
 
 VI. (Sin, when an adjective, and likewise, when pronoun as distinguished 
 Vorn tto> article Ex.: 3d) luibe ttur (Sineit meunb, 1 have only owe friend. 
 £ui§ (Sine -4>fevb ift bltub, bag anbeve i]t labjn, the one horse is blind, the 
 vxther i9 lame. 
 
 VII. Adjectives derived from names of persons. Ex : 5; a 8 Sdnfierfcbe 
 £)<ni6. Observe that adjectives derived from the names of countries do not 
 begin with a capital. Ex.: 3>r beutfdie -Bm\b, the German caifederacy. 2)i? 
 fvaujofifd/e £$>vad)e, the French language. 
 
GENDER. 
 
 §?• 
 
 269 
 
 cither way: suggesting only, us the best mode of learninor 
 the exce} ilons (which are numerous and here purposely omit- 
 ted,) the custom of constantly and carefully noting them in 
 reading and speaking. 
 
 § 7. Rules for determining gender 
 
 by the meaning ; 
 
 (1) To the masculine be- 
 long names of 
 
 male beings ; * as, ber Wlann ) 
 
 ber £on>e ; &c. 
 days; as, ber 2ftontag; ber 
 
 $>tenftag ; &c. 
 months ; as, ber 3anuar ; ber 
 
 fttbrnat; &c. 
 seasons ; as, bci ftrttf;ltng j ber 
 
 (somnter ; &c. 
 winds ; as, ber Oiorbnnnb j ber 
 
 (Subtmnb ;■ &c. 
 points of the compass ; as, ber 
 
 Ocerb ; ber ©iib ; &c. 
 mountains ; as, ber <£>ar§, ber 
 
 stones ; as, ber 2)tamani j ber 
 
 dlubin ; &c. 
 fruit-trees ; as, ber QStrntJaum ; 
 
 ber 9Ipfet6aum; &c. 
 
 (2) To the feminine be- 
 long the names of 
 
 female beings ; * as, bie ftrau; 
 
 bie Sodjter ; &c. 
 rivers ; as, bte SBefer ; bie 
 
 Stjemfe; &c. 
 fruits ; as, bte SBirrte ; bte 9lu$ ; 
 
 &c. 
 trees ; f as, bte 93irfe, bte (Srle ; 
 
 en 
 
 lonjr 
 
 by the form. 
 To the masculine be- 
 
 et. Those primary derivatives 
 (See § 2. 3.) ending in e r, 
 el, e it ; (luithout meaning ;) 
 and those also that are with- 
 out affixes of any kind. 
 
 b. Those secondary deri- 
 vatives formed by means ot 
 the (significant) suffixes, ft, 
 el, en, in g, and ling. 
 
 (2) To the feminine be- 
 long 
 
 a. Those primary derivatives 
 ending in e, be, t e, or f t : 
 
 b. Those se ondary deri- 
 vatives formed by means of 
 the suffixes e, e i, i n, t) e i t 
 felt, fdjaft, nng. 
 
 * Under the name of male brings must be included that of the Almighty 
 as also those of angels and other superior powers ; those of mythological deiuea 
 and of human beings ; those of beasts, birds, reptiles, and fishes. The term 
 female beings must nave a like latitude of signification 
 
 t This includes also plants and flowers. 
 
270 
 
 DERIVATION OF NOUNS. § 9. 
 
 (3) To the neuter belong 
 the names of 
 
 places; as, ^Berlin; &c. 
 
 metals ; as, bag <B'dba ; &c. 
 
 materials ; as, bag <$ol% ; &c. 
 
 letters ; as, bag 51 j bag 58 ; &c. 
 
 infinitives used as nouns ; as, 
 bag i'efcen ; bag ^ietten j &c. 
 
 many individuals taken to- 
 gether ; (i. e. collective 
 nouns;) as, bag <§eer; &c. 
 
 adjectives used as nouns; (4n 
 an abstract, and indefinite 
 way ;) as, bag ©ute, bag 
 <Sd;oite; &c. 
 
 (3) To the neuter belong 
 
 a. Tli os e secondary deriva- 
 tives formed by means of the 
 suffixes, d) e n i e t n fat, f e I. 
 nip, tt; u m. 
 
 5. Those nouns having the 
 augment g c. 
 
 § 8. Gender of compounds and foreign -words 
 
 (1) Compounds in general adopt the gender of their last 
 component : as, 
 
 **|«*fe j ^rdS;^-/^ i court church; 
 bet Mixd)l)of f the church yard ; 
 
 ber (Sid;fcaum, (from bie (Sirfje, the oak, and ber 33aum, 
 
 tree;) the oak-tree ; 
 bie SBinbmiifyle, (from ber SBinb, the wind, and bie 9Jiu^Ie j 
 
 mill ;) the windmill ; 
 bag 9iatt$attg, (from ber Slaty, council, and bag Ǥaug ; 
 
 house ;) the council-house. 
 
 (2) Foreign words, for the most part, when taken into the 
 German language, retain their original gender. Those, how- 
 ever, that have become fairly Germanized, often take a dif- 
 ferent gender as they take a different form : thus, Corpus, 
 (the body,) which, in Latin, is neuter, becomes, in German, 
 ber Jtorper, which is masculine. 
 
 § 9. Derivation of nouns. 
 (1) To what has been already said (§ 2. (3 ) ) concerning 
 the derivation of nouns, we add here, before entering upon 
 the subject of Declension, a brief view of those (the secondary 
 
CanlXES DSED IS FORMING NOUNS. § 10. § 11 27l 
 
 (fa ^waives ) i\ht are made by significant suffixes. And that 
 the matter msy have the most practical shape, we subjoin a 
 list of the lcadipg suffixes of this class : putting in brackets 
 the eyzivrient English terminations, explaining- severally their 
 forte and use, and illustrating the whole by suitable example*. 
 
 § 10. So* FIXES USED IN FORMING NOUNS. 
 
 Suffixes. English equivalents. 
 
 er [er, ier, or, yer, zen ;] designates {male) persons , 
 
 also, agents, or instruments ; 
 
 iilg, ox\i\\§\ling, astet ,] denotes (often contemptu- 
 
 ously} persons, animals and 
 things ; 
 
 in or inn [ess, ix ;] designates (female) persons ; 
 
 Ct [y, ry, ary, ery, ory ;] indicates the act, practice, 
 
 q>y place of business ; 
 
 ung [ing, ure, km ;] signifies the act, or the 
 
 continuing to act ; 
 
 e 
 
 &eit 
 fett 
 faaft 
 tfjunt 
 
 fid 
 
 fel 
 nip 
 
 lein 
 
 [ness, ity, xfi : 
 [ness, ity, th ; 
 [ness, ity, th ; 
 [ship, hood, ity ; ) 
 [dom, hood, ity ; j 
 
 II 
 
 [ude, cy ; 
 
 [ude, cy 
 
 [ness, cy 
 
 [kin, ule, et, let ; ) 
 
 [kin, ule, et, let ; ] 
 
 § 11. 
 
 " ©anger, 
 
 SSftrger, 
 
 (Sager, 
 er •{ ©chneiber, 
 
 (Romer, * 
 
 ?ei^tger,t 
 ^SSiener, 
 
 denote qualities, or attribu tes; 
 
 express rank, grade, office ; 
 also, ^number of things taken 
 collectively; often, merely the 
 quality; 
 
 denote the state, or condi- 
 tion ; also, the quality ; 
 sometimes the result ; 
 
 indicate diminutiveness. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 a singer ; 
 
 a citizen ; 
 
 a sawyer 
 
 a tailor ; 
 
 a Roman; 
 
 a resident of Leipzig ; 
 
 a Viennese ; 
 
 * Appellatives derived from the names of people often have the termina- 
 tion e : as. ber Sj()U, the Hessian ; frer XmU, the Turk ; &c. 
 
 t Nouns derived from the name of a city or town, are often used indecli- 
 nably as adjectives. Ex. : 2>a§ Setpjtgtc $ier, the Leipzic b<er. Gen. £ef 
 £eiy$i<}er 33ierS. 
 
272 
 
 EXAMPLES. J 11. 
 
 ling 
 
 m or tnn 
 
 UXIQ 
 
 t 
 
 f}6t 
 
 fett 
 
 fd&afi 
 
 fat 
 
 fd 
 
 mjj 
 
 lein 
 cfyen 
 
 ^an^tltng, 
 
 g'ludjtling, 
 
 9)iieti)(tng, 
 
 2>id)terting, 
 
 £anfiing, 
 l<£d)5£ling, 
 r@raftn, 
 I 4?elbin, 
 <( Jtomgin, 
 I $rofcfoun, 
 l^orotn, 
 
 3)ie6erei, 
 
 4?eud)e[et, 
 
 g-ifdjerei, 
 
 93taxterei, 
 r ^etefyturtg, 
 
 (S'rbammg, 
 
 Jtronung, 
 
 Si§ung, 
 
 | ©tarfe, 
 I Jfranftyeit, 
 | 3)ummT;eit, 
 | 4?ciltgfeit, 
 [_ $eud)tigf ett, 
 Sfrexmbfdjaft, 
 ^rieftcrfdjaft, 
 
 -{ Sereitfd)aft, 
 4?eibent^um, 
 6;r;rtftexttX;um / 
 (Stgentljum, 
 
 SWtyfal, 
 
 «£ Eiffel, 
 
 2?cbiirfmf} 
 ©leidnxtjj, 
 
 f 93ud)Iem, 
 
 itnaBIein, 
 ©tufylcfym, 
 .(Sicken, 
 
 a cap! am ; 
 
 a fugitive ; 
 
 a hireling ; 
 
 a poetaster ; 
 
 a linnet ; 
 
 a shoot, or sprig 
 
 a countess ; 
 
 a heroine ; 
 
 a queen ; 
 
 a professor's wife ; 
 
 a lioness ; 
 
 thievery ; 
 
 hypocrisy ; 
 
 fishery ; 
 
 brewery ; 
 
 teaching, i.e. the act of teaching; 
 
 the building, or erecting; 
 
 the crowning, or coronation ; 
 
 the sitting, or session ; 
 
 goodness ; 
 
 strength ; 
 
 sickness ; 
 
 stupidity ; 
 
 holiness ; 
 
 humidity ; 
 
 friendship ; 
 
 priesthood, that is, the body of the 
 
 priests ; 
 readiness ; 
 
 heathendom ; heathenism ; 
 Christendom ; Christianity ; 
 property ; 
 
 the state of being in trouble; dis- 
 tress ; 
 that which has resulted from hacking 
 and cutting ; i. e cuttings ; 
 the state of being in want ; necessity; 
 quality, or state of being like ; like* 
 
 ness ; 
 a little book* 
 a little boy ; 
 a little stool ; 
 a little egg. 
 
DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. § 12. 273 
 
 (1) It should be observed, in forming derivatives of the 
 order illustrated above, that when a, o, or u, is contained in 
 the l adical part, it is modified into a, 0, or it, upon receiving 
 any one of the suffixes c r, ling, in, d)cn, I c i n, e, n i jj 
 and f e I; as, in the case of danger, (from £ang,) 23urger, (from 
 "Burg,) and others of the Vke kind, 
 
 (2) Often, moreovei, in forming secondary derivatives 
 certain euphonic letters are inserted between the suffix and the 
 *vnd to which it is added ; as, t g in fycud)ttgfeit, humidity. 
 Otiier letters employed in this way, are c n, n and t. These 
 euphonic parts are easily distinguished from those having rn 
 influence on the meaning, by merely resolving the derivative 
 into its elements. 
 
 (3) Here, too, may be noted the particle g e, which being 
 prefixed to certain primary words, forms a class of nouns 
 denoting either frequency of action, or a collection of things. 
 These words, also, most commonly suffix the letter c ; ©erebe, 
 constant talk; ©djeul, frequent crying; ©efctrge, a range of 
 hills, are examples. 
 
 § 12. Declension of common nouns. 
 
 {!) In German there are two declensions, distinguished as 
 the Old and the New. The characteristic of each is the termi- 
 nation of the genitive singular. In the former, the genitive is 
 formed from the nominative by adding e 6 or • when other- 
 wise formed, the noun is of the new declension. 
 
 (2) To the old declension belong almost all masculine and 
 
 neuter nouns ; that is, by far the greater part of all the nouns 
 
 in the lano-uao-e. 
 o e> 
 
 (3) In both declensions, the nominative., genitive and accu- 
 sative plural are, in form, alike ; while the dative terminates 
 always in the letter n. Unless, therefore, the word under de- 
 clension already ends in that letter, it is, in the dative, uni- 
 formly assumed. 
 
 (4) AW feminine nouns are invariable in the singular; in 
 tlie plural, thej are, for the most part, inflected according to 
 the new declension. 
 
 12* 
 
274 THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. 
 
 (5) In compounds, the last word only is subjected to the 
 variations of declension. 
 
 § 13. OLD DECLENSION. 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 NOMINATIVE 1 (5; —4). 
 
 genitive eg or g, (see 3). e. 
 
 dative e or like nom. en (9). 
 
 accusative e. 
 
 SINGULRR NUMBER. 
 
 (1) Feminine nouns in the singular number are not in- 
 flected ; those of the other genders ending in e, et, en, er, cfyen 
 and lein, add g in the genitive ; the dative and accusative being 
 {ike the nominative : 
 
 N. ber ©paten, the spade ; fcctS 23ud)fein, the book ; 
 
 G. be^ ©paten-g, of the spade ; beg 23ud)lem-g, of the book ; 
 
 D. bem ©paten, to the spade; bem 33ucfy(etn, to the book; 
 
 A. ben ©paten, the spade ; bag 33ud)leut, (L. XXIV. 1) 
 
 (2) Nouns of the old declension which do not end in e, et, 
 en, er, $en and lein, add eg (see 3) in the genitive, and e (see 
 3) in the dative ; the accusative remaining like the nominative : 
 
 N. bag 3afjr, the year ; ber 23aum, the tree ; 
 
 G. beg 3a^r-eg, of the year; beg 23aum-eg, of the tree ; 
 D. bem3at)r-e, to, for the year; bem 23aum-e, to, for the tree; 
 A.. 1)Cl$ 3a^r, the year ; ben 23aum, the tree. 
 
 N. bag $ult, the desk ; ber ©tat)I, the steel ; 
 
 G. beg $ult-eg, of "he desk ; beg ©tat)(-eg, of the steel; 
 D. bem $utt-e, to, for the desk; bem ©taljt-e, to, for the steel; 
 A. bag $u(t, tha desk; ben ©tatyl, the steel. 
 
 (3) The e of the genitive and dative is often omitted in 
 words not ending in el, en, er, c^en, lein. Its omission or re- 
 tention is to be determined by euphony al ^e. In nouns of 
 
THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. 275 
 
 two or more syllables, unless the last one be under the full 
 accent, e is commonly omitted in the genitive, and sometimes 
 also in the dative ; as, te3 ^ontgS, tern $ontij, instead of te3 
 itimtgea, tern jtimige. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 (4) Nouns ending in e, el, en, er, djen and lent, have the 
 same form in the plural as in the singular : 
 
 Singular. Plurul. Singular. Plural, 
 
 fcer <2paten, tie Spaten; ba3 SBiidjIein, tie SBiidjtetn; 
 
 ter ©djfojjer, tie ©drtojfer; ta* SRUtel, tie SQiitteL 
 
 Exceptions, a. The following take the umlaut (L. 2. II.) : 
 
 Stpfel, §ammel, §anbet, Storage!, 2RantcI, SRakl, 9toget, ©attel, ©dfonafcet, 
 
 SScgel, gaben, ©artcn, ©raben, £afert, Djen, ©djabcrt, Stcfer, 33rubcr, £am* 
 
 mer, (©djroager, Stater, Slojicr; as, bcr Sfpfcl, the apple; bte Sfepfel, the 
 
 apples etc. 
 6. itragen, 2ftagen and 23agcn, also, sometimes take the umlaut in the 
 
 plural. 
 
 (5) Neuter nouns not ending in e, el, en, er, d)en, tein, form 
 their plural by adding c : 
 
 ca3 3afy\ tte34r-e; toad ©tiicf, tie <£titcf-e; 
 
 tao $ult, tte^ult-e; ta3 <5$ai, tie (Sdjaf-e. 
 
 Exceptions, a. ^Tof; and Sftoftr take the umlaut ; Scot has the 
 regular form SSoote, or SBote. 
 
 b. The following neuter nouns add er in the plural, and those 
 capable of it take the umlaut : 
 
 3fo3, Sfott, Sab, Sift, Slatt, Su$, ®a#, ©orf, (Si, ga$, $*a§, gelb, 
 ©eft, ©emitff), @eftf>lec&t, ©efpenft, ®la$, ^ r teb, ©ra£, ©raS, ©ut, §aupt, 
 £aus, §ofpitat, §u$n, $atfc, tfamifol, Stvao, rttib, -ffortt, tfraut, Somm, Ailet»»- 
 £o<$, 5Kaul, Sfceji, $arlament, $fanb, Sfcab, Regiment, 9M3, $tnb, <£t$tc&, 
 ed/»ert, Spiral, %tyd, ©olf, 2Betf; as, baa Stmt, the office ; tie Sfemkr, 
 the offices, etc. 
 
 r All nouns, also, ending in rr)um, masculine as well as neuter, add 
 er and take the umlaut ; as, ber 9M<$rt)um, bte 3Jetdjrr)um e r xz. 
 
 (6) Masculine nouns not ending in e, el, en, er, form theif 
 plural by adding e, and taking the umlaut, if capable of it : 
 
276 THE OLD DECLENSION. § 13. 
 
 ber 23aum, Me33aume; feer ©tu^I, Me ©hiljtej 
 
 ber^ocfy, bte^e; toer Sail, Me Settle. 
 
 Exceptions, a. The following add er : 
 
 3Bofe»i#t, ©orrt, ®eiir, ©ott, £ei6, Sftann, Drt, tab SJonmmb, SBalb, 
 SSSurm; as, ber £)orn, the thorn; bie Corner, the thorns etc. 
 
 h. The following reject the umlaut : 
 
 Slal, Star, Slbenb, STmbog, Slnroalt, Slrm, 2)ed)t, £>ot<$, 2)crfdj, (Sibarrt, ©e- 
 niatyl, ®rab, £aMd)t, £alm, £audj, ^erjog, £uf, £unb, $apaun, $oBoIb, ^orf, 
 £ratud), Saur, Ceid)nam, £-u<$3, 9M$, Sflortat, 9ftonb, $brb, 9>fab, $ropf, 
 9)ul«, $Punft, ©aim, @<$aft, ©$ul> ©taar, ©toff, Sag, Srunfen&olb, Untjolb, 
 23ielfraj3, SBiebeljopf, 3ott (inch); as, ber Slal, the eel; bie Stale, the 
 eels ; etc. 
 
 (1) Feminine nouns ending in futtft and ttt§, as also 
 those of the following list, form their plural by adding e, and 
 taking the umlaut, if capable of it : 
 
 SIngft, Sfoafludjt, 2Irt, 23anf, 23rant, Sruft, gaujl, gruc^t, ©anS, 
 ©ruft, ©eja>u(ft, £anb, £aut, $(nft, tfraft, $ui tfunft, 2an3, 
 Suft, Suft, SRadjt, SRagb, 9Raud, Sftacfet, 5^a^t ; Wofy, «Ru|j, (Ban, 
 ©cfynur, ©tatt, SBanb, SBelt, SBurft, 3«nft 3ufammenfunft* 
 
 (8) The two nouns Gutter and £od)ter form their plural by 
 taking the umlaut. 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS IN THE PLURAL. 
 
 (9) Nouns whose plural ends in en, have all cases in this 
 number alike ; those of other terminations have the genitive 
 
 , and accusative like the nominative, and add it in the dative : 
 
 N. bie ©paten, the spades; Me 23iicMein, the books, L. 24 ; 
 
 G. ber ©paten, of the spades; ber 23iid)lein, of the books; 
 
 T). ten ©paten, to the spades ; ben 33iict)leirt, to the books ; 
 
 A. bie ©paten, the spades; bie 23ud)lein, the books. 
 
 N. bie Saume, the trees ; tie $ulte, the desks , 
 
 G. ber 93aume, of the trees; ber $utte, of the desks; 
 
 D. ben25dnme-n, to the trees; ben $ttlte-n, to the desks ; 
 
 A. bie 33aume, the trees ; bie $nlte, the desks. 
 
NEW BEGLENSIO: 
 
 14. 
 
 277 
 
 J 14. The new declension. 
 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 ETom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 •en or n. * 
 ■en or n. 
 ■en or tt. 
 
 Plural. 
 — en or n. 
 — en or n. 
 — en or n. 
 — en or n. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. D?r ©raf, the count ; 
 G-. ieS ©rafen, of the count; 
 D. bent ©rafen, to the count; 
 A. ben ©rafen, the count. 
 
 N. ber ftalte, the falcon ; 
 
 G. beg u^alfm, of the falcon ; 
 
 D. bent Qfalfen, to the falcon; 
 
 A. ben Sfalfett, the falcon. 
 
 (1 ) Feminine nouns which are indeclinable in the singular, 
 are, for the most part, of this declension, f Those ending in 
 the suffix t n, in the singular, double the n in the plural. These 
 last are, also, often written with the double n in the singular : 
 as, 4?elbiim, a heroine. 
 
 Plural 
 bie ©rafen, the counts, 
 ber ©rafen, of the counts ; 
 ben ©rafen, to or for the coimts; 
 bie ©rafen, the counts. 
 
 bie fallen, the falcons ; 
 ber Sfalfen, of the falcons; 
 ben Sfalfen, to the falcons ; 
 bie ft'cilfen, the falcons. 
 
 Singular. 
 N. bie Scf)utb, J the debt; 
 G. ber (sdjulb, of the debt; 
 D. ber Scfyirfb, to the debt ; 
 A. bie ©djulb, the debt. 
 
 Plural. 
 bie Schulben, the debts; 
 ber Schulben, of the debts ; 
 ben (Srf)itlben, to the debts ; 
 Me Schulben, the debts. 
 
 * When the singular ends in e, el, a r or c r, the plural takes n only. 
 
 t 9Ji u 1 1 e r, mother, and X o cf> t e r, daughter, are the only feminine nouns 
 that have the terminations of the Norn., Gen. and Ace. plural like the singu- 
 lar. They add n to the dative. 
 
 i Feminine nouns, it will be remembered, have no variations of declension 
 in the singular- As exceptions to this rule, however, some examples remain 
 (vestiges of the ancient mode of declension), in which the Gen and Dat. ap- 
 pear under the government of a preposition and varied by terminations. Thus: 
 nut or in (S'bvcu, with or in respect or honor: (Sbveit, from (£bve • auf (Srfcert, 
 on earth: "(Srfem, from (§vi>e ; uitt gmtbeu, with joy: ?5venben, from Sreutie ', 
 vcn or a. if Seitett. on the part of: Settett, from &ette, 
 
 The ending of the Genitive is sometimes, also, retained, when the word ia 
 andcr the government of a noun succeeding. Thus, £>ie8 ift inei iter 5rauen 
 &4>ti)eiler, this is my wife's sister. 
 
278 OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION, <fcC. § 15. 
 
 JN". bie ^trtin, the shepherdess ; bte <£trttnnen, the sheperdesses ; 
 
 G. ber «$irtilt, of the shepher- ber ^irtmnen, of the shepher- 
 dess; desses; 
 
 D. ber 4?irtin, to the shepher- ben Ǥtrttrmen f to the shepher- 
 
 dess ; desses ; 
 
 A. bte-JMtim, the shepherdess, bte $trtmnen, the shepherdesses. 
 
 §15. Observations on the declension of common nouns 
 (1) Some have no singular : as, 
 
 9lettern ((Sftern), parents. 
 5lfynen, ancestors. 
 9lfyen, alps. 
 ytnnakn, first fruits. 
 93einHetber, small- clothes. 
 SStattern, small-pox. 
 23tieffd)aften, letters, papers. 
 (Smtunfte, revenue, 
 ^aften, Lent, fasts, 
 ftetien, Holidays. 
 $u$ ftalpfen, footsteps. 
 ©eBtiiber, brothers. 
 ©efaOe, rents. 
 
 ® efchttufter, brothers and sisters. 
 ©Itebmcif en, the limbs. 
 <£>cinbei, quarrels, 
 igefen, dregs, yeast. 
 Ǥofen, trowsers. 
 Snftgnten, marks, badges. 
 Jtatbaunen, entrails. 
 
 jtoften and ttnfoften, costs. 
 JtttegSlaufte, events of war. 
 £euie, * people, folks. 
 SWafern and Utotfyln, measles. 
 tyfloitm, whey. 
 Oftem, Easter. 
 $ftngften, Whitsuntide. 
 CWnfe, tricks. 
 3?e!preff alien, reprisals, 
 ©chtcmfen, bounds. 
 Styefen, expenses. 
 (B^oxUln, fees, 
 ©gotten, spoils, 
 ©tubten, studies, 
 drifter or $refcer, husks, lee«. 
 drummer, ruins. 
 £nn;£en, troops. 
 2Beif)nad)ten, Christmas. 
 Beitlaufte, events of the times. 
 Sinfcn, interest of money. 
 
 * £eute merely expresses plurality of persons. In this it differs from 9ft eu= 
 fcben, (human beings) which has regard to the kind or species, as also from 
 Sftanner (men) which denotes particularly the sex. Those compounds, how- 
 ever, of which, in the singular, Sftamt forms the last part, take generally, ic 
 the plural, Scute instead of iDiauiter; thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 9lrtiett8maun, workman ; 2lrbeif*Ieute workpeople. 
 
 ©belnuuiu, nobleman; (Sbelleute, noblemen, 
 
 ^atifnittitu, merchant ; .fhntfleuto, merchants. 
 
 Saubmaun countryman ; Satibleute, country-people. 
 
 The distinctive difference between Scute and SftntiiU'V may be forcibly shown 
 by reference to the words(§i)eleute and @l)emauucr: ©t)deute means married 
 people; (Stjcinauuei: signifies married men, i. e. husbands. 
 
OBSERVATIONS ON THE DECLENSION, <feC. § 15. 270 
 
 (2) Some Lave no plural. 
 These are, 
 
 a. Generic names of material substances; as, ba3 ©olb, gold; 
 Siffcer, silver ; (§ifen, iron ; &e. 
 
 b. General terms and those expressive of abstract ideas ; as, 
 Wauti, pillage: {ftufim, glory ; baS 93iet), cattle; 33 enmn ft, rea- 
 son ; <StoI$, pride ; Stliitt, cold ; &c. 
 
 c. Some names of plants ; as, ber Jtet)l, the cabbage ; Jqq* 
 fefeit, hops ; Jtteffe, cresses ; &c. 
 
 d . All infinitives employed as nouns, as also all neuter ad- 
 jectives so employed; as, ?efcen, life; 93erlangen, wish; ba3 
 SBeijj, white ; &c. 
 
 e. Nouns, for the most part, denoting quantity, number, 
 weight or measure ; * as, 35unb, bundle ; 3)u§enb, dozen ; ©rab 
 degree ; $funb, pound ; QoU, an inch ; &c. 
 
 (3) Some, in the plural, have two forms; conveying, 
 however, in general, different, though kindred significations ; as, 
 
 Singular. Plurals. 
 
 fcer SSanb, 33cmbe, bonds, fetters ; 33anber, f ribbons. 
 
 tie --Canf, 23anfe, benches; 35anfen, banks (of com- 
 
 merce), 
 bcr 33egen, 93ogert, sheets of paper; SSogett, arches, bows. 
 6a§ 2>ing, SMnge, things in general ; £>mger, little creatures, 
 ber £ern, 3>cntert, kinds of thorn ; £>orner, thorns (more 
 
 than one), 
 ber $u% ftujjf, feet ; ftufje, feet (as meas- 
 
 ures). 
 pa3 ©eftdjt, ©eftdjte, visions, sights ; ©effdjter, faces. 
 Da3 £em, <§onte, sorts of horn ; «£ enter, horns (more 
 
 than one). 
 ba3 $el& ^olje, sorts of wood ; ^oljer, pieces of wood. 
 
 * It should be noted that words expressing quantity, number, weight on 
 measure, even if qualified by numerals signifying more than one, are rarely 
 found in the plural. Thus, in German, we say, neuit .ftlaffer. nine fathoms ; 
 |>unbert ®r<it>, a hundred degrees; &c, where, though the numeral expresses 
 ,-nore than one, the noun of measure is still in the singular number. 
 
 Note, however, that feminines ending in e and words denoting periods of 
 time, as also the names of coins, are, in general, excepted from the rule given 
 in the note preceding. 
 
 t The singular of this is bag {neuter) SBnnb. Prom ber 23anb, we have an- 
 other form : --8>uit>e volumes. 
 
280 FOREIGN NOUNS OF THE OLE DECLENSION. § 16. § 17. 
 
 bcr £aben, £abcn, shutters ; 
 
 ba§ I? a nb ; £anbe, regions ; 
 
 ba3 9Jk(;{. 9J£ar;le, marks, seasons; 
 
 bcr 3Ratm, Scanner, men; 
 
 ber SWonb, Qftonben, months ; 
 
 ber £)rt, £)rte, places (any) j 
 
 bie ©cm, ©cmen, wild boars j 
 
 bcr ©d)ifb, ©djilbe, shields; 
 
 btc ©djnur, ©cfynure, tapes ; 
 
 ber ©traufj, ©traufje, nosegays ; 
 
 baS SBort, SBorter, words (more than 
 
 one) ; 
 
 ber 3©tt ; Sofle, inches ; 
 
 Saben, shops. 
 £anber, states. 
 SMfyler, meals. 
 Sftanncn, vassals. 
 SDfcoubc, planets. 
 Oertcr, places (parti 
 cular) 
 ©Sue, swine, 
 ©djilbcr, * sign-boards 
 ©cfymtren, daughters 
 in-law 
 ©trauj? en, ostriches. 
 SBorte, words (in con 
 struction) 
 3 5 tie, tolls. 
 
 § 16. Foreign nouns. 
 
 (1) Some nouns introduced into the German from foreign 
 languages, retain their original terminations unaltered : as, ber 
 9Rebicu£, a physician ; plur. 3)?ebtci, physicians ; factum, deed; 
 Sfacta, deeds. 
 
 (2) Some masculines and neuters from the French and the 
 English, merely affix 8 to the genitive singular, which is re- 
 tained in all the cases of the plural ; as, bcr £orb, gen. be§ £orb3; 
 plur. btc £orb0 j bcr (£t)ef ; gen. be3 (S(;ef§ ; plur. bie (£§ef$. 
 
 (3) But foreign nouns, for the most part, drop the termi- 
 nations peculiar to the language whence they come, and sub- 
 stitute those characteristic of the German. Some, accordingly, 
 are found to be declined after the old declension, some after 
 the new, and others, again, partly after the one and partly af- 
 ter the other. 
 
 § 17. Foreign nouns of the old declension. 
 
 (1) Foreign nouns of the neuter gender, as also most of the 
 
 masculines, are of the old declension. 
 
 tc the singular, ba« <Sd)tU>. 
 
FOREIGN NOUNS OF THE NEW DECLENSION. §18. 281 
 
 (2) Among the masculines must be noted those appella 
 tions of persons ending in 
 
 at; as, jtarbtnal, cardinal, 
 ar; as, 9?otav, notary. 
 an; as, jtaftetl an, castellan. 
 aner; as, 5Domhufcmev dominican. 
 iner; as, ^Bcnebtftiner, benedictine. 
 To which add Qlfct, $ro!pft, $avft 23ifd)of, Wltyox, <S$ion, pa- 
 tron, Officer. 
 
 (3) Some have, in the plural, the form er (e + r); as, ^o3» 
 pttal, (Suited, Jtamifbl, Regiment, ^arlament; plur. ^o&pttalcr, 
 Spitaler, &c. 
 
 (4) Some, in the plural, soften the radical vowels; as, Qlfct, 
 2Utar, 23tfd)cf, ei;or, Choral, ^oe^ttal, ®$ltal, itemed, (Saltan, 
 tfarbinat, Softer, 9)?arfd), 3)?craft, $ataft, CJ3a^ft, ^vo^ft; plur 
 3leote, QUtare, 2Sifd)ofe, &c. 
 
 § 18. Foreign nouns of the new declension. 
 
 (1) To the new declension belong all foreign nouns of the 
 feminine gender, and nearly all masculines which are the ap- 
 pellations of persons. These latter are chiefly those ending in 
 
 at', as, Qibfocat, advocate, 
 ant; as, Qlbjutant, adjutant, 
 ent; as, ©tubent, student, 
 if; as, jtat^oitf, Catholic. 
 aft ; as, $l)cmtajt, humorist, 
 ifi; as, 3urijt, lawyer, 
 oft; as, ©taroji, Polish magistrate, 
 ct; as, $oer, poet, 
 it; as, Sefutt, Jesuit. 
 Ot; as, Sbtot, idiot. 
 e; as, (glebe, pupil, 
 leg; as, $§eolog, theologian. 
 fb!pl?; as, $l)iiofe:p{), philosopher, 
 nom; as, ^ifttonom, astronomer. 
 
 (2 ) To these are to be added some othsr foreign mascu- 
 lines ; as, ber (Elegant, the elephant; ber Qutat, the ducat; bet 
 
282 DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. § 19. §. 20. 
 
 hornet, the comet ; ber planet, the planet ; bet Jtonfonant, the 
 consonant; ber $rirt$, the prince ; ber $i)tamt, the tyrant. 
 
 § 19. Foreign .nouns partly of the old and partly ov 
 the new declension. 
 
 (1) These are, first, neuters ending in ftfc; as, ba§ ^affit), 
 gen. $afftu3; plur. ^affttten; — secondly, titles of males in or; 
 as, doctor; gen. 3)octor3; plur. £)octorert; — thirdly, neuters 
 ending in at, it and u m, which, also, often have t before the 
 en of the plural; as, Jta!pitat, plur. Jta^itatten; Soffit, plur. 
 ftofftften; ©titbium, plur. ©tubten; — fourthly, the following 
 masculines, QlfteriSt 5 , Sttcimcmt, Safan, Jtapaim, Smlport, Jtonful, 
 SWuSfel, $antoffel, $rafeft, $falm, Rubin, ®taat, $$or, Xxattat, 
 3in8 ; to which add Snfett, attorn, $ronom, <&tntut and 93er& 
 which are neuters. 
 
 § 20. Declension of proper nouns, 
 in the singular number. 
 
 (1) Names of males and females, except when the latter 
 terminate in e, take to form the genitive, which is their only 
 variation ; * as, 
 
 N. Ǥeinridfj, (Stifabeft), 
 
 G. «£einrid)3, (Stifafcen)3, 
 
 D. <£emrid), (Sttfaoeffy 
 
 A. 45einrid). (SUfafcetf;. 
 
 (2) Names of females ending in e, as also of males ending 
 bl, fj, f d), X, or i, form the genitive in e ft 8 ; f as, 
 
 N. £uife, Scifotlfc, SSof , 
 
 G. SuifenS, £eifcni|en$, ©offcnS , J 
 
 D. guife, Seiomfe, 9Sof, 
 
 A. £uife, geionifc, SSof. 
 
 * It is customary with some writers to affix e it to the dative and accusative 
 Df proper names ; but a better usage distinguishes these cases by prefixing the 
 article; as, VM'ftrtfl; gen. S-effhiflS; dat. btm Scfftug (instead of Eefftugni) ; 
 bcc l>?n Sefftttfl (instead of Sefftitflen). 
 
 t The genitive, dative and accusative of names ending in a, are sometimes 
 r ~rmed by adding respectively e it § and e it, after dropping the a ; as, 2)iaii(t ; 
 
 2, 'BtrtiienS ; dat. ( t)tatieu ; ace SDknm. 
 „Phe termination t\\8 sometimes suffers contraction ; as, 93ojT$, Sei&ttijj'S. 
 
PROPER NAMES OF COUNTRIES, CITIES, <feC. § 21. § 22. 283 
 
 (3) Names whether of males or females, when preceded 
 by an article, are indeclinable ; as, 
 
 N. ber emitter, bie £uife ; 
 
 G. beg <&d)itttx, bcr tfiiife ; 
 
 D. bem Sdjiiler, bcr?mfej 
 
 A. ben ©filler, bie £uife. 
 
 (4) Foreign names, also, having the unaccented termina- 
 tions a 3, e 3, i 3, U 3, admit no variations of form, either in the 
 singular or the plural. When, therefore, their case and num- 
 ber are not otherwise sufficiently indicated, an article or a pre- 
 position is used to point them out. 
 
 § 21. Proper nouns in the plural. 
 
 (1) Proper nouns, when employed in the plural, conform, 
 for the most part, to the rules for the declension of common 
 nouns : the masculines beino- varied according to the old de- 
 clension, and the feminines according to the new. * 
 
 (2) Their inflection is in no wise affected by the presence 
 of the article, nor do the radical vowels a, o, it, an, ever as- 
 sume the Umlaut. 
 
 Examines, 
 
 N. bie £etDni|e, Sdjleget, £uifen, Qtmten; 
 
 G. ber £ei{mt£e, ©djlcgel, Suifen, Qlnncn; 
 
 D. ben JPeitnufcen, <2d)legdn, £uifcn, 9lnnen; 
 
 A. bie £etl3mfte, 6d)legcl, Puifen, oilmen. 
 
 § 22. Proper names of countries, cities, <tc. 
 
 (1) Proper names of places admit no changes of form for 
 the purposes of declension, beyond the mere addition of to 
 the genitive singular ; as, 33erlm ; gen. 33erUn3. 
 
 (2) If, however, the word end in a sound not easily ad- 
 mitting an g after it, the case is distinguished by placing be- 
 
 * Sometimes the plural is made by the addition of § to the singular ; as. 
 bteScbiller*. tie .£evberg; the Schillers, the Herders. Those ending in t> add 
 or thfj plural ue or n e it; as, (iaio; nom. plur. (Satoue or (Satonen, &*\ 
 
284 ADJECTIVES. § 23. § 24. 
 
 fore it a noun preceded by the article ; or it is expressed by the 
 prep. Hn. Example : bte Otafct 2D?airt$, the city Mayence* 
 £>er Jtontg sort $reu£eru 3Me Sinrcofyner son $art$* 
 
 § 23. Observations. 
 
 (1) When several proper names belonging to the same per. 
 son, and they not preceded by the article, come together, the 
 last one only is declined; as, 3>ot)ann (Sf)rtjto!pl) $lbelung3 ©pradj* 
 fel)re ; John Christopher Adelung's grammar : — if, however, 
 the article precede, none of them undergo change; as, bte SBerfe 
 DeS 3ol;ann ©cttlofc Berber ; the works of John Gottlob Herder- 
 s (2) When a common and a proper name of the same per- 
 son, preceded by the article, concur, the common noun alone is 
 inflected ; as, ber Sob be§ jt n i g § £ubrDtg j the death of king 
 Louis : — if no article precede, the proper noun is declined ; * 
 as, jtonig £ u b to i g 3 £ob ; king Louis' death. 
 
 (3) When a Christian name is separated from a family name 
 by a preposition (specially Jj o it), the Christian name only ad- 
 mits of declension; as, bte ©ebtcfyte $Ttebrtct)§ bon ©cfytfler; the 
 poems of Frederick of Schiller : — if, however, the genitive 
 precede the governing noun, the family name only takes the 
 sign of declension ; as, ^riebrtcfy fccrt <Sd)i[(er3 5Berfe ; Frederick 
 of Schiller's works. 
 
 § 24. Adjectives. 
 
 (1) Adjectives are, in German, generally so varied in ter- 
 mination, as to indicate thereby the gender, number and case 
 of the words with which they are joined. Before treating of 
 their inflection, however, we shall present and explain those 
 significant suffixes, which are most commonly employed in for- 
 ming adjectives from other words. 
 
 (2) Plere, as was done in the case of derivative nouns 
 (§ 10. §11.), each suffix is given with its corresponding English 
 equivalent ; its meaning explained ; and its use farther illus- 
 trated by a series of examples. 
 
 * When the word Ǥ e r r is used with a proper noun, it is declined ; 
 .£>ernt ©djtegeltS ©eincfjte, not «§err ©djlegell ©ebtefc-te. 
 
examples. § 25. § 26. 285 
 
 § 25. Suffixes used in forming adjectives, 
 suffixes English equivalents. 
 
 bat 
 
 [aWe, i&fe, z7e 
 
 ;] implies ability; sometimes, dis- 
 position. 
 
 en 
 
 [en;] 
 
 points to something made of that 
 expressed by the radical. 
 
 Daft 
 
 [ive, ish ;] 
 
 denotes tendency, or inclination ; 
 also resemblance. 
 
 ig 
 
 b./^;] 
 
 represents a thing as being full 
 of that denoted by the radical. 
 
 id; t 
 
 [y, ous, ish;] 
 
 marks similarity of nature, or 
 character. 
 
 lid) 
 
 [ly, ish, able , 
 
 ] implies likeness or sameness either 
 of manner or degree ; also, ability. 
 
 lfd> 
 
 [ish, some, al 
 
 ;] represents something as pertain- 
 ing, or belonging to. 
 
 fam 
 
 [some, able ;] 
 
 expresses inclination; sometimes 
 ability. 
 
 
 § 
 
 26. Examples. 
 
 la* 
 
 J SDtenjibar; 
 ( <5id)tUx j 
 
 serviceable ; tributary. 
 
 that can l)e seen ; visible. 
 
 
 j ©often : 
 (S3Iei(et)nj* 
 
 made of gold. 
 
 t Xi 
 
 leaden. 
 
 »afi 
 
 ( 5^ngenbl;aft; 
 
 inclined to virtue ; virtuous. 
 
 ( Wldfitxf)aft; 
 
 resembling a master ; masterly. 
 
 
 , SSinmig ; 
 
 full of flowers ; abounding in flowers 
 
 *9 
 
 \ Stumidjtj 
 
 flowery, that is, like flowers. 
 
 td^x 
 
 1 SBafbtg ; 
 
 woody, i. e. abounding in woods. 
 
 ^@aljid)tj 
 
 saltish ; somewhat like salt. 
 
 
 , 93titberUc^ j 
 
 brotherly, or like a brother. 
 
 Ud& 
 
 \ Jtranflid) ; 
 
 sickly. 
 
 leiifltd); 
 
 sweetish ; somewhat sweet. 
 
 
 *■ SSeroegltcf) j 
 
 movable. 
 
 * The letters e r in this word are simply euphonic; while the t of e tt if 
 dropped, also, for euphony (§ 2. (8).; 
 
286 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. § 27. 
 
 l 3?bifdj ; earthly ; belonging to earth, 
 
 tfdf) ■] ^oettfd); poetical. 
 
 ( 35nfifd) ; * quarrelsome. 
 I ( 5trbcitfam ; inclined to work ; diligent. 
 
 ( S'otgfam ; inclined to follow (orders), L e. obe- 
 
 dient. 
 
 § 27. Declension of adjectives. 
 
 (1) Whether an adjective is to be inflected at all or not, 
 depends wholly upon the way in which it is used ; for, when 
 employed as a predicate, it is never declined ; f when as an at- 
 tributive, almost always. Be the noun, therefore, masculine, 
 feminine or neuter ; be it singular or plural ; if the adjective, 
 to which it is applied, be used as & predicate (L. 14. Note.), its 
 form remains unchanged : thus, 
 
 2>er SJfann iji gut; the man is good. 
 
 SDie Sfrau ift gut • the woman is good. 
 
 £>a3 Jtinb ift gut; the child is good. 
 
 SDie Scanner ftnb gut; the men are good. 
 
 £>ie Sfrauen [tub gut; the women are good. 
 
 3>d) nemte ba6 Jttnb f d) o n ; I call the child beautiful. 
 
 3d) nenne bie Jlinber f dj 5 n ; I call the children beautiful. 
 
 £)et Slnaht, futg uub arrtg ; J the boy prudent and polite. 
 
 (2) The following adjectives (and a few others) are never used 
 otherwise than as predicates, and are, of course, indeclinable : 
 atJtjotb, averse. feirb, hostile. 
 
 augft, anxious. geWt, hating, hated, 
 
 anr/eifcr/tg, bound by promise. gar, done ; cooked enough. 
 
 betctt, ready. gang uub gefie, current ; usual 
 
 &tad), fallow. eingebmr", mindful. 
 
 * This is the ending commonly added to nnmes of places pointing to 
 things belonging to them ; as, enqltfcb, .fctnvebtfri) (§ 5. Note VII ), &c. If 
 however, a name be a compound, the suffix e r is used in place of i f d) ; as, 
 fcas iDJei'fcburijev &iev ; the Merseburg beer. 
 
 t For the form of the adjective substantively employed after ntcfjtg or tf'xaS, 
 see Lesson 14. 6. 
 
 \ In this last example, the predicative use of the adjectives may be mado 
 more obvious, by completing the structure, thus, ber Jtnabe, toelcber th\c\ tmfe 
 IXttQ ift; the boy who is prudent and polite ; s< also, (Safar, flug tm& A apfer, 
 
rule § 28. § 29. 287 
 
 getrofi, cneerfui. nctf), needful. 
 
 gehnirttg, aware. nu§e, useful, 
 
 gram, grudge-bearing, qucr, crosswise, 
 fya&haft, possessing, or possessed of. quitt, rid of. 
 
 fyattbgcmem, skirmishing. tt)etlr;aft, sharing, 
 
 irre, wrong ; erring. un^af , ill ; sick. 
 
 funt>, known. berlufUg, forfeiting. 
 lit), distressing ; sorry. 
 
 § 28. Declinable adjectives 
 
 (1) There are two declensions of adjectives, as there are 
 two declensions of nouns : the Old and the New. In either of 
 these, according to circumstances, are attributive adjectives 
 declined. The following are the terminations of 
 
 
 THE OLD 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 er. * e. 
 
 e3.f 
 
 Nom. e. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 e3 (en J), er. 
 
 eS (en J). 
 
 Gen. er. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 em. er. 
 
 cm. 
 
 Dat. en. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 en. e. 
 
 eS.f 
 
 Ace. e. 
 
 § 29. Rule. 
 
 When the adjective stands either entirely alone before its 
 substantive, or preceded and restricted by a word that is nn- 
 
 * Adjectives ending in el, en, e i\ commonly drop the e upon receiving a 
 •suffix; as, 
 
 ebct, noUe ; eblcr (not ebefcr) 9ft aim ; 
 
 eben, even; ebnev (not cbener) &Bea.; 
 
 lautcr, pure ; lanrieS (not lanfereS) @olb. 
 
 Upon adding en, the e of the termination (en) is dropped, while that of the 
 root is retained ; as, ben ijeitevn (instead of bettmi) 9ft org en ; the serene 
 morning. 
 
 t In these two places {nom. and ace neut.) the termination e 8 is often 
 omitted, when the adjective is under no special emphasis; as, fait (for faU 
 US) SBaffer ; cold water. 
 
 X Note that here (gen. sing. masc. and neut) it is now the common custom 
 to adopt the new, instead of the old form; en, for the sake of euphony, beina 
 substituted for ee ; as, eiu (Stiuf frifrf) eu (not es) sBrobeS; a piece of fivsfi 
 bread, hi a few adverbial phrases, however, the old foi m is still generall| 
 r^ed ; as, guteS aftut&S; of good courage. 
 
288 
 
 Rule. § 30. § 31. 
 
 declinable (see L. XIV. 3) it follows the Old form of dsclensioa • 
 thus, 
 
 Masc. Sing. Fern. Sing. NeuL Sing. 
 
 guter 93ater, gute Gutter, rjute0 ©elb, 
 
 guteS (en) SBaterS guter Gutter guteS (en) ©clbe8, 
 
 gutem better, guter Sautter, |tttem ©etbe, 
 
 guten 2>ater. gute abutter. guteS ©elb. 
 
 K 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D 
 A. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 gute QMter, 
 guter QSater, 
 guten latent, 
 gute 33ater. 
 
 Plural. 
 gute Sautter, 
 guter flitter, 
 guten 9ft Cittern, 
 gute SOiiitter. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 gute ©elbcr, 
 guter ©etber, 
 guten ©elbem. 
 gute ©elber. 
 
 (1) The following are examples, in which the adjective in 
 each instance is preceded by a word, either undeclined or in- 
 definable (§33): 
 
 G&ftctg guter SSetn, 
 
 some good wine. 
 
 JBtel ftifae Wild), 
 
 much fresh milk, 
 
 SBenig falteS SSaffer 
 
 a little cold water. 
 
 @el;r gute SWenfdjen, 
 
 very good men. 
 
 ©enug rotter SOBetn, 
 
 enough red wine. 
 
 Sffinf lange Safyre, 
 
 five long years. 
 
 SWcrlei fu|e ffrudfc 
 
 all kinds of sweet fruit 
 
 § 30. The new declension. 
 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 /Sm^wZar. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 JWasc. Fern. 
 
 Neut. For all genders 
 
 Nom. e. e. 
 
 e. en. 
 
 Gen. en. en. 
 
 en. en. 
 
 Dat. en. en. 
 
 en. en. 
 
 Ace en. e. 
 
 e. eit 
 
 § 31. Kule. 
 
 (1) When immediately preceded and restricted by the de- 
 finite article, by a relative or demonstrative pronoun, or by an 
 
RULE. § 31. 
 
 289 
 
 indefinite numeral {declined after the antient form *), the ad- 
 jective follows the new form of declension : thus, 
 
 Masc. Sing. 
 N. ber gate Sftann, 
 G. be3 guten DJZanneS, 
 D. bem guten Oftanne, 
 A. ben guten d)lann. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. bie guten Scanner, 
 G. ber guten banner, 
 D. ben guten 2)cannem, 
 A. bie guten banner. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Fern. Sing. 
 bie gute frrau, 
 ber guten Srrau, 
 ber guten o~rau, 
 bie gute ftxau. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bie guten frrauen, 
 ber guten frrauen, 
 ben guten Stouten, 
 bie guten ftrauen. 
 
 Neut. Sing. 
 ba§ gute Jtinb, 
 be§ guten «ftutbe3, 
 bent guten JlhtDe, 
 ba§ gute Jtiub. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bie guten Jvinbcr, 
 ber guten Jttnbcr, 
 ben guten Jtinbecn, 
 bie guten Jtinber. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 Masculine. 
 
 biefer fcfyone ©arten, biefe fdjonen ©arten. 
 
 biefeS fd)6nen @arten3, biefer fdjonen ©artett 
 
 biefem fcfyonen ©arten, biefen fdjonen ©arten. 
 
 biefen fdjonen ©arten, biefe fdjonen ©arten. 
 
 Feminine. 
 toefefce fdjone Stoic, toefdfye fd)onen f QSTumeit 
 
 freldjer fcfyonen 23 him e, toeldjer fd)0neu 23hunen. 
 
 tr-ekher fcr/onen 33Iume, tr-elchen fd)Oiten 23htmen. 
 
 toelcfce fchone 25hinte, n?etd)e fcrjOne'n f 33htmen. 
 
 * 5) a 8, however, the neuter of the definite article, differs from the old form, 
 in having the ending a 8, instead of e 8 ; so also in compounds ; as, baefelbe, 
 the same ; basjentge, that. The other words referred to in the rule, are 
 
 biefer, this. oiler, every; all. 
 
 jenev, that. etnicjev, some; several. 
 
 Jvelrfeer, who ; which. etlicber, some ; several. 
 
 folcfcer, such. manner, many a. 
 
 jefcer, jet}licf;er, each. 
 Thiae of these, it may further be noticed, viz. ftelcf)cr, roehte, ttxldkS, which; 
 ^Ivije:, folcfce, folciH'8, such; and inaiictjer, nmitcbe, maitrbeS, many a ; some- 
 wnes appear without the terminations of declension : m which case the ad- 
 Active assumes the suffixes denoting gender, &c Thus, matici) fcyi3ue8 -Siiti, 
 many a beautiful picture. 
 
 t With many authors it is the custom to reject the final n of the nom. ana 
 ace. plural of adjectives preceded by entire, etlicbe. mebtere, maud)e, mele, 
 alie welctn folc^e and icetuoe: as, etttto,e beutf ctye J?at|"er; some German 
 empeuors. 
 
 13 
 
290 MIXED DECLENSION. § 52. 
 
 Singular. Plur d. 
 
 Neuter. 
 N. mcmdbcS fcfione fttVo, mandje fdjonen $e!b;r. 
 
 G. mcmdjcS fdjonen SelbeS, ntandjer fdjonen $&a, 
 
 D, m and) em fdjonen Befbe, mandjen fdjown ftelbcvi 
 
 A. mandjcS fdjone ftclb, mandie fd) cn.cn ^elbcr. 
 
 §32. Mixed declension. 
 
 (1) We have seen that an adjective, when standing tU&m 
 before its noun, is varied according to the ancimt declension ; 
 and this, because the gender, number and case of the noun 
 being very imperfectly indicated by the forn of the noun it- 
 self, the terminations of the old declension, which, in this re- 
 spect, are more complete, seem necessary in order the more 
 fully to point out these particulars : thus, gut e r 93?cmn, good 
 man; gut e Stout, good woman ; guteS^cfo, good field. 
 
 (2) When, however, as often happens, it is itself preceded 
 by some restrictive word (such as b e r, b i e, b a 8, the ; b i e* 
 fcr, biefe, biefe 3, this, &c), declined after the ancient 
 form, and, therefore, by its endings, sufficiently showing the 
 gender, number and case of the noun, the adjective passes into 
 the less distinctive form, called the ne^'" declension : thus, bte* 
 fer gute Sftann, this good man ; biefe glib ftvau, this good wo- 
 man ; biefeS gtttc ftelb, this good field. 
 
 (3) But there are some restrictive words which, though, 
 in the main, inflected according to the more complete form of 
 the ancient declension, are, in three leading places (nom. sing, 
 masc. and nom. and ace. sing, neuter), entirely destitute of 
 significant terminations , These words are, 
 
 cut, a. feirt, hirj ; its. 
 
 fein, no: none. it;r, her; your; their, 
 
 mem, my. unfer, our. 
 
 betit, thy. cuer, your. 
 
 (4) Hence it happens, that, while in every other case, the 
 words just cited, follow the old form, and consequently require 
 the subsequent adjective to adopt the new one, the adjective 
 is itself made to supply the d^uency, in <he three places 
 
 
rule. 8 33. 291 
 
 named above, by assuming therein the terminations proper to 
 the ancient form. In this way, is produced a sort of mixed 
 declension, which, in books generally, is set down as the Third 
 Declension. Thus, then, will stand the 
 
 Terminations of the Mixed Declension. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut, Plural, 
 
 X. er (old form). c. e$ (old form). N. en.* 
 
 G. en. en. en. G. en. 
 
 1). en. en. en. D. en. 
 
 A. en. e. e6 (old form). A. en* 
 
 (5) It must be added, also, that the personal pronouns, 
 id), I ; bu, thou ; er, he ; fie, she ; e3, it ; hnr, we ; ir)r, ye or 
 you ; fte, they ; cause the adjective before which they stand, 
 to take this mixed form of declension. Hence the 
 
 § 33. Rule. 
 
 (1) When the adjective is immediatly preceded and re- 
 stricted by the indefinite article, by a personal or possessive pro- 
 noun, or by the word f e i n, it assumes the endings charac- 
 teristic of the mixed declension : thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural, 
 
 Masculine. 
 N. nit guter 33ruber, 
 G. eine§ guten 33ruber8, 
 D. einem guten SBruber, 
 A. einen guten 33ruber. 
 
 Feminine- 
 N. nieine gute (sd)h?eftet, metne guten ©djtoejlent 
 
 G. nteiner guten ©cfytDeftet, meiner guten Sdjtoejtent. 
 
 D, nteiner guten ©djtoejier, metnett guten ©cfytoejient 
 
 A meine gute <2d)ft>efler, metne guten ©djtocjlern. 
 
 Neuter. 
 N. unfer guteg <$au$, unfre /juten £aufer. 
 
 G. unferS guten 4?aufe3, unfrer guten «£>aufet. 
 
 D. unfernt guten £aufe, unfent guter? <£aufertt 
 
 A. unfer guteS £au3, unfre guten «£aufer. 
 
 * See note page 105, also 2d note, page 289. 
 
292 FURTHER OBSERVATIONS ON ADJECTIVES. $ 34. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 iS T . 
 
 bit gute Gutter, 
 
 tyx gutcn SKuttet. 
 
 G. 
 
 betner (ber*) guten Gutter, 
 
 eucr guten Gutter. 
 
 0. 
 
 bir guten Gutter, 
 
 end) guten SKftttcrn. 
 
 L 
 
 bicft gute abutter, 
 
 tud) guten Gutter. 
 
 
 § 34. Further observations on adjectives. 
 
 (1 ) When several consecutive adjectives come before and 
 qualify the same noun, each has the same form, which accord- 
 ing to the preceding rules, it would have, if standing alone ; as, 
 guter, rotter, lautrer SSein, good, red, pure wine ; bie retfe, 
 fdjone, gute orucfyt, the ripe, beautiful, good fruit. 
 
 (2) But when of two adjectives which relate to the same 
 noun, the second forms with the noun an expression for a single 
 idea, which the first qualifies as a whole, the second adjective 
 takes (except in the nom. sing, and in nom. and ace. plural) 
 the new form of declension ; as, nut trocfn e m irctf e n Sanb, 
 with dry white sand ; where white sand, that is, sand which is 
 white, is said also to be dry. 
 
 (o) When two or more adjectives terminating alike, precede 
 4.nd qualify the same noun, the ending of the former is occa- 
 sionally omitted ; such omission being marked by a hyphen ; 
 as, ein rot v = (for rotf;e§) unb fteifeS ©efidjt, a red and white 
 face; bie fdjtoat^rotr^gctbene Sfafyne, the black red golden 
 banner. 
 
 (4) Participles are declined after the manner of adjectives : 
 thus, ber gelicBte SSruber, the beloved brother j gen. beS gcliefc<* 
 tm 33 tuber 3, &c. 
 
 (5) Adjectives, in German, as in other languages, are, by 
 ellipsis, often made to serve in place of nouns. They then be- 
 gin with a capital letter, and, excepting that they retain the 
 forms of declension peculiar to adjectives, are in all respects 
 treated as nouns. Their gender is made apparent either by 
 their terminations or by the presence of an article or other defini- 
 tive : as, etn £>eutfcr/er, a German; bicfer £)eutfd)c, this Ger- 
 
 * Note that after the personal pronouns, in the genitive case, the article 
 must be used ; as, behter, bee guten Gutter ; of thee, the good mother. 
 
EUPHONIC CHANGES. § 35. § 36. 293 
 
 man ; Me $cittfc(}e, the German woman ; baS ©djone, the beauti- 
 ful ; baS ©ute, the good ; that is, that which is beautiful ; that 
 which is good. So, also, baS SBeifi, the while; ba3 ©run, the 
 green ; ba$ dloil), the red ; &c. 
 
 (3) When of two adjectives preceding a noun, the first is 
 employed as an adverb to qualify the second, the former is 
 not declined : thus, em g a n 5 ntuc$ <$a\i&, a house entirely 
 new : not ein g a n 3 c 3 neueS <$aud, which would mean, an en- 
 tire, new house. 
 
 § 35. Comparison op adjectives. 
 
 (1) In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison 
 are commonly expressed by means of the suffixes e X and t ft ! 
 thus, 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative, 
 
 to i I b, wild ; to i I b e r, wilder ; to i 1 b e ft, wildest, 
 
 f e ft, firm ; f e ft c r, firmer ; f e ft e ft, firmest, 
 
 oretft. bold; breifter, bolder; bretftcft, boldest. 
 
 log, loose; Iofer, looser; I of eft, loosest. 
 
 n a ft wet ; naffer, wetter ; n a f f e ft, wettest. 
 
 r a f d), quick ; r a f d) e r, quicker ; r a f d) e ft, quickest, 
 
 ft 1 5, proud ; ft 1 J e t, prouder ; ft 1 5 e ft, proudest. 
 
 § 36. Euphonic changes. 
 
 (1) When the positive does not end in b, t, ft, 8, ft, fdj, 
 or §, the e of the superlative suffix (e ft) is omitted ; as, 
 
 B I a n f, bright ; fc t a n f e r, brighter ; fc I a n ! ft, brightest, 
 
 f I a r, clear ; fl a r e r, clearer ; 1 1 a r ft, clearest, 
 
 rein, pure; reiner, purer; re in ft, purest, 
 
 f d) n, fine ; f d) 5 n e r, finer ; f d) 5 n ft, finest. 
 
 (2) When the positive ends in e, the e of the comparative 
 suffix (e r) is dropped ; as, 
 
 toetfe, wise; toetfer, wiser; toe if eft, wisest, 
 
 m u b e, weary ; m u b e r, more weary ; mub e ft, most weary, 
 
294 DECLENSION OB COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. $ 37. 
 
 (3) When the positive ends in el, en or er, the e of 
 these terminations is commonly omitted, upon adding the com- 
 parative or superlative suffix ( e r or ft) ; as, 
 
 C b e I, noble ; eblcr (not ebelcr), nobler j e b : I ft, noblest, 
 trocfen, dry; tro ff iter (not trocfener), drier; trocf en ft, driest. 
 iapfer,brave; t a p fr er (not tap fcrer), braver; tap ferfr, bravest. 
 
 (4) When the positive is a monosyllable, the vowel (if it 
 be capable of it) commonly takes the Umlaut, in the compara- 
 tive and superlative ; as, 
 
 o 1 1, old ; alter, older ; a 1 1 e ft, oldest. 
 
 q x o 13, coarse ; g r o fc e r, coarser ; g r o B ft, coarsest, 
 fl u g, wise ; 1 1 u g e r, wiser ; 1 1 u g ft, wisest. 
 
 (C) Exceptions. From this last rule, however, must be 
 excepted nearly all those adjectives containing the diphthong 
 a u : as, laut (loud), lauter, lauteft; rau!) (rough), r a at) er, 
 r a u I) e ft. So, also, the following : 
 
 fcunt, variegated. fnapp, tight. fatt, satisfied, 
 
 fabe, insipid. Iaf;m, lame. ftyfoff, loose. 
 
 fat;I, fallow. lag, weary. fcfylanf, slender. 
 
 fa!6, fallow. Io3, loose. fcfyrojf, rugged, 
 
 ffad), flat. matt, tired. ftarr, stiff, 
 
 fvof), glad. ttacrt, naked. ftolj, proud, 
 
 gerabe, straight. platt, flat. flraff, stiff; tight, 
 
 glatt, smooth. plump, clumsy. fhtnim, dumb. 
 
 ^of;r, hollow. vol), raw. fluiulpf; bkmt. 
 
 t)o!b, amiable. rimb, round. toll, mad. 
 
 ta% bald. fadjt, slow. UoU, full, 
 
 farg, stingy. fanft, gentle. Safym, tame. 
 
 § 37. Declension of comparatives and superlatives. 
 
 (1) Comparatives and superlatives are subject to the same 
 laws of declension, that regulate adjectives in the positive. 
 Thus, after adding to fd)6n, fair, the suffix (er), we get the 
 comparative form f d) Otter, fairer; which is inflected in the threa 
 ways : thus, 
 
DXCLENSION OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. § 37. 295 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 OLD FORM. 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 'nr/ulai 
 
 *. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Misc. 
 
 Fem. Neut. 
 
 F >r all genders 
 
 X 
 
 fdjonercr, 
 
 e, 
 
 e3, 
 
 fvl)onerc. 
 
 G 
 
 fdjoner e § (en), 
 
 er, 
 
 eS (en), 
 
 fdjoner er. 
 
 D. 
 
 fit; oner e m, 
 
 er, 
 
 em, 
 
 fd} 6 iter en, 
 
 A. 
 
 fdjoner c n, 
 
 6. 
 
 NEW FORM. 
 
 fd;oner e. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Afewf. 
 
 For all genders 
 
 N. 
 
 ber fdjoner e, 
 
 (bie) 
 
 -e, (boS) -e, 
 
 bie fd) oner en. 
 
 G. 
 
 be3 fdjoner en, 
 
 (ber) 
 
 -en, v (be3) -en, 
 
 ber fd) oner en. 
 
 D. 
 
 bem fd) oner en, 
 
 (ber) 
 
 -en, (bem) -en, 
 
 ben fd) oner en. 
 
 A. 
 
 ben fd;oncr en, 
 
 (bie) 
 c. 
 
 -e, (ba3) -e, 
 
 MIXED FORM. 
 
 bie fd) oner en. 
 
 
 Masc. Sing. 
 
 
 Fem. Sing. 
 
 Neut. Sing. 
 
 N. 
 
 unfer * fdjoner e r, 
 
 (nnfere) -e, 
 
 (unfer) -e 3. 
 
 G. 
 
 unfereS fdjoner e n, 
 
 ( unfer er) -e n, 
 
 (unfereS) -e tt 
 
 D. 
 
 unferem fd)6ner e n, 
 
 (imfcret) -e n, 
 
 (unferem) --en. 
 
 A. 
 
 unferen fdjoner e n, 
 
 (uufere) -e, 
 
 (unfer) -c 0. 
 
 ( 
 
 old 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Plural for all genders. 
 N. unfer e fdjoner e n. 
 G. unfer e r fdjoner c it 
 D. unferen fdjoner e tt 
 A. unfer e fdjoner e tt 
 2) So likewise the superlative. In the superlative of the 
 form, however, the vocative case only is used. Thus we 
 e in the 
 
 a. OLD FORM. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Iteftfr e r SBater ! f tfjeuerf! e ©djtoejter 
 
 J °P 
 fdjonjteS Jttnb 1 
 
 * Sometimes the e in the endings of pronoun? and comparatives, is omitted, 
 or transposed : thus instead of unfer cS Metier en, we may say uuferS f a? 13 - 
 iter it, or unfreS, fdjonciii. 
 
 t Heretofore the vocative has not been set down in the paradigms, because 
 * iS; in form, always like the nominative. 
 
296 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. § 38. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 ^ s 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 5* 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 tji 
 
 V. ftefcft e Q3atcr . 
 
 tl;eucrjt ? <2d)rc>efiem ! 
 
 b. NEW FORM, 
 
 fcfyonfW Jtmber! 
 
 i 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. Neut. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 N. ber fd)5njt e, 
 
 (bic) -e, (baS) -e, 
 
 bie fdjonjt e n. 
 
 G. beS fdjonft e n, 
 
 (ber) -en, (beS) -e n, 
 
 ber fcfyonfi e n. 
 
 D. bem fd;onfl e n, 
 
 (ber) -e n, (bem) -e n, 
 
 >en fcfyonften. 
 
 A. ben fd;onfl c n, 
 
 (bic) -e, (ba§) -e, 
 
 C. MIXED FORM. 
 
 bie fdjonjt e n. 
 
 Masc. Sing. 
 
 jPem. Sing. 
 
 iVewJ. (St77^. 
 
 N. unfcr fdjonfi e t 
 
 , (unferc) -e, 
 
 (unfer) -e 3. 
 
 G. unfereS fdjonft 
 
 ? n, (unferer) -c n, 
 
 (unfereS) -e n. 
 
 D. unfcrcm fd^orrft 
 
 c n, (unferer) -e n, 
 
 (unferem) -e n. 
 
 A. unfcr en fcfyonfl 
 
 e n, (unfere) -e, 
 Plural for all genders. 
 N. unfere fcfyonjt e n. 
 G. unferer fcfyonjt c n. 
 D. unfercn fcfyonft e n. 
 
 (unfcr) -e 0. 
 
 
 A. unfere fdjonjten 
 
 
 
 §38, Observations. 
 
 (1) In place of the regular form of the superlative, prece- 
 ded by the article and agreeing with the noun in gender, num- 
 ber and case, we often find a circumlocution employed ; which 
 consists in the dative case singular of the new form preceded 
 by the particle a m : thus, bie $age fmb im SBinter vim furge* 
 {ten, the days are shortest in the winter. The explanation is 
 easy : a ttt, compounded of an (at), and bem, the dative of 
 ber (the), signifies at the. Translated literally, therefore, the 
 sentence above will be : The days in winter are at the shortest ; 
 that is, at the shortest (limit) : where, in the German, turje* 
 
IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE FORMS. § 39. 
 
 29' 
 
 fieri agrees with some noun in the dative understood, which ts 
 governed by a n. But the phrase is used and treated just as 
 any regular superlative form would be under the same circum- 
 stances. In like manner, auf (upon) and ju (to) combined 
 respectively with the article (auf b a 3 and ju be m), and 
 producing the forms cutf3 and jum, are employed with adjec- 
 tives in the superlative : thus, cmf3 fdjonfte eirtgerid)tet, arranged 
 upon the finest (plan) ; jum fdjonftert, to, or according to the 
 finest (manner). These latter forms, however, are chiefly em- 
 ployed to denote eminence, rather than to express comparison. 
 Freely rendered, therefore, aufS fcfyonfte and jum fdjonjten will 
 be : very finely, most beautifully or the like. 
 
 (2) Sometimes aflet (of all) is found prefixed to superla- 
 tives to give intensity of meaning ; as, ber aHetfcefb, the best 
 of all, i. e. the very best j bic aflerfd)Onfte, the handsomest of 
 ill, i. e. the very handsomest. 
 
 (3) When mere eminence, and not comparison, is to be ex- 
 pressed, the words aujjjerft (extremely) and r)ocf)ft (highest) are 
 employed : as, bieS ift eine ciuperjt fdjone 93lume, this is a veiy 
 beautiful flower. 
 
 § 39. Irregular and defective forms. 
 
 Positive. 
 gut, good; 
 r/ecr,, high; 
 rtaf)e, near; 
 iner, much ; 
 ir-enig, little ; 
 grej?, great; 
 fcalb, early ; 
 u anting. 
 
 Comparative. 
 fceffer, better ; 
 f)6t)er, higher; 
 naffer, nearer; 
 mefyr, more ; 
 minber, less ; 
 grower, greater ; 
 er)er, earlier ; 
 ivantmg. 
 auf ere, outer ; 
 inner, inner ; 
 bctbet, fore ; 
 renter, hinder ; 
 tv&er, upper ; 
 unter, under ; 
 13* 
 
 Superlative. 
 Eejt or am Beften, best. 
 r)od)jt or am f; 6 d)ften, highest, 
 nadjfl or am nadjfieit, nearest, 
 meijt or am meiffrn, most, 
 minbefr. or am minbeften, least, 
 groft or Tim groften, greatest 
 erjt or am erften, earliest. 
 Iefct or am Ic|ten, late&t. 
 aufjerft, uttermost, 
 innerft, innermost, 
 betberft, foremost, 
 ^interft, hindermost. 
 o.&erft, uppermost, 
 untetjl, undennost. 
 
298 adjectives compared by means of adverbs. § 40. § 41 
 
 § 40. Observations. 
 
 (1) Note that t)cd) (high), in the comparative, drops, while 
 naf) (near), in the superlative, assumes the letter c : thus, 
 f)od), comp. fyofyer; rial), comp. nafyer, sup. n ad) ft 
 
 (2) That mel;r (more), the comparative of inel, has two 
 forms in the plural, metjr e or mefyr ere; and that the latter 
 (metyrere) is the more common one. It has the use and mean- 
 ing of the English word several : as, 3d) fat? mcfyrere ©olbaien, 
 I saw several soldiers. 
 
 (3) That the superlative of grofi (great) is contracted into 
 flrojjt. 
 
 (4) That erft, the superlative of efyer (earlier), is a con- 
 traction for et;eft 
 
 (5) That from bet erfte (the earliest or first) and bcr Tegte 
 (the latest or last), are formed the correlative terms erfterer, 
 the former, and le^tercr, the latter. 
 
 (6) That the last six words in the list (§39) are formed 
 from adverbs, and are comparatives in form rather than in 
 fact. 
 
 § 41. Adjectives compared by means of adverbs. 
 
 (1) When the degrees of comparison are not expressed by 
 suffixes, the adverbs meljr (more) and am meiften (most) are 
 employed for that purpose : thus, 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 angft, anxious ; nte^r angft ; am meiften angft 
 
 fcerett, ready ; metyr fcereit ; am meijlen Berett 
 
 emgebenf 1 , mindful ; me^r eingebenf ; am meiften einge* 
 
 bent 
 feinb, hostile ; me^r feinb ; am meiften feinb. 
 
 gang unb gefce, current; me^r gang unb gefce; am meiften gang 
 
 imb geBe. 
 gar, done ; cooked ; met)r gar ; am metjten gar. 
 
 gram, averse ; mefyr gram j am meiften gram 
 
 irre, astray ; mel)r irre j am meiften irre. 
 
 funb, public ; me(;r funb ; am meiften fun* 
 
THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. § 42. § 43. § 44. 299 
 
 .ctb, sorry ; metjr Icto ; am mcifren leib. 
 
 nu§, useful ; mef;r mt§ ; am mcifren nu|. 
 
 rccnt, W^ ; mer>r red)t ; am meifictt rcd)t. 
 
 d)eilr/aft, partaking ; mcfyr it)cill)aft ; am meiftcu it}eii> 
 
 X)a\L 
 § 42. Observations. 
 
 The above method of comparison, which is commonly called 
 the compound form, is chiefly used in cases : 
 
 (1) Where a comparison is instituted between two different 
 qualities of the same person or thing : as, cr ift mef;r lufttcj aU 
 traurig, he is more merry than sad ; cr rear mcl)r glftcflicfy ati 
 ta^fcr, he was more fortunate than brave. 
 
 (2) Where the adjectives, like those in the list above, are 
 never used otherwise than as predicates. 
 
 (3) Where the addition of the suffixes of comparison would 
 offend against eupliony, as in the superlative of adjectives end- 
 ing in ifdjj thus, fcaruatifd). 
 
 § 43. THE NUMERALS. 
 
 In German, as in other languages, the numerals are classi- 
 fied according to their signification. Anions the classes thus 
 produced, the first, in order, is 
 
 § 44. The cardinal numbers. 
 
 The cardinal numbers, whence all the others are derived 
 are tib ose answering definitely to the question : " How many ? ' 
 They are 
 
 <fut§ (ein, cine, cm) 
 
 1. 
 
 gcr)n 10. 
 
 gtoei 
 
 2. 
 
 elf 11. 
 
 bvci 
 
 3. 
 
 Srootf 12. 
 
 incr 
 
 4. 
 
 brct$etyn 13. 
 
 ffmf 
 
 5. 
 
 incite fm 14. 
 
 fcd;3 
 
 6. 
 
 fi'mfjefm 15. 
 
 fietjen 
 
 7. 
 
 fflfccfn 1G. 
 
 ad)t 
 
 8. 
 
 fte6en$eim or fleBje^n 17. 
 
 ttcun 
 
 9. 
 
 adjt$d)n 18. 
 
SCO 
 
 THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. § 44. 
 
 neunje^n 
 
 19. 
 
 t)imbett 
 
 100, 
 
 gtoftngig 
 
 20. 
 
 fyunbert unb ein8 
 
 101. 
 
 tin unb Jfranjtg 
 
 21. 
 
 fyunbert unb jhjci 
 
 102. 
 
 jirei unb jnjanjig K. 
 
 22. 
 
 tyunbert unb brei : 
 
 u. 103, 
 
 breijjig 
 
 30. 
 
 gVrei fnmbert 
 
 200. 
 
 ein unb breijjig 
 
 31. 
 
 brei l;unbert 
 
 300. 
 
 jttci unb breijjig ic. 
 
 32. 
 
 taufenb 
 
 1000. 
 
 fcier&ig 
 
 40. 
 
 tfvd taufenb 
 
 2000. 
 
 fTuxfjig 
 
 50. 
 
 brei taufenb 
 
 3000. 
 
 fcd)§ig (not fed) W 
 
 60. 
 
 gef;n taufenb 
 
 10,000. 
 
 ftefcenjig or fiefyig 
 
 70. 
 
 ^unbert taufenb 
 
 100,000. 
 
 adjtjig 
 
 80. 
 
 eine SDMion 1,000,000. 
 
 neungig 
 
 90. 
 
 pvd mUiown 2,000,000. 
 
 (1) Observe that the cardinals are, for the most part, 
 indeclinable. 
 
 (2) (Bin, (one) however, is declined throughout like the 
 indefinite article. It is, in fact, the same word with a different 
 use ; and is distinguished from it, in speaking and writing, only 
 by a stronger emphasis and by being usually written with a 
 capital initial. This is the form which it has, when immediately 
 before a noun, or before an adjective qualifying a noon. Thus : 
 
 N. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 (Bin Sftann, (Sine ftrau, 
 
 (B'n, guter SJiann, Sine gute Srau, 
 
 G j (EineS 9)catme§, (Shier ftrau, 
 
 ' ( (SineS guten SKamteS, (Siner guten 3rau, 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 (Bin Jtinb. 
 (Sin gutes Jttnb. 
 (StneS tfinbeS. 
 (SineS gutenJttn* 
 bcS ; (fee. 
 
 (3) In other situations, ettt follows the ordinary rules of 
 declension: thus in the 
 
 
 
 a. Old Form. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 enter, 
 
 eine, etneS, 
 
 one. 
 
 G. 
 
 einc3, 
 
 einer, eincS, 
 b. New Form. 
 
 of one, &c. 
 
 N. 
 
 ber eine, 
 
 bie eine, bag eine, 
 
 the one. 
 
 G. 
 
 beS einen, 
 
 ber einen, beS einen, 
 
 of the one, (fee. 
 
ORDINAL NUMBERS. § *5. 301 
 
 c. Mixed Form. 
 N tnctn cuter, meine cine, mem eincS, my one. * 
 G. mcineS cinen, meinet einen, mcineS eincn, of my one, &o 
 
 (4) 3fr*ci (two) and bret (three), when the cases are not 
 sufficiently pointed out by other words in the context, are 
 declined : thus, 
 
 N. 3wel, f tw0 > brei, three. 
 
 G. Btteier, of two, breier, of three. 
 
 D. 3tteien, to or for two, breien, to or for three. 
 A. Qmi, two, brei, three. 
 
 (5) All the rest of the cardinals, when employed substan- 
 tively, take en in the dative : except such as already end in these 
 letters; as, tcf) tyaDe e3 Brimfen gefagt, I have told it to five 
 (persons). 
 
 (6) <£>unbett and $aufenb are often employed as col- 
 lective (neuter) nouns, and regularly inflected ; as, norn. ba3 
 ^unbert, gen. beg 4?imbett3, plural (nom.) bie ^unberte. SSI iU 
 Hon is, in like manner, made a noun (feminine,) and is, in the 
 singular always preceded by thp article ; as, (Sine 9)Zittion, a 
 million. 
 
 (7) In speaking of the cardinals, merely as figures or cha- 
 racters, they are all regarded as being in the feminine gender : 
 as, bie (Sin3, the one, bie 3rcei, the two, bie £)rei, the three ; 
 where, in each case, the word, Qafy, (number) is supposed to 
 be understood : thus bie (3af}t) brei, the (number) three. 
 
 § 45. Ordinal Numbers. 
 
 (1) The ordinal numbers are those, which answer to the 
 question : u Which one of the series ? " They are given below, 
 
 * In relation to the numeral e t ti note, farther, these three things : 
 
 1. That in merely counting, it has the termination of the neuter, with v 8 
 however, omitted ; as e 1 11 #, 3 w e t, b v e i. one, two, three, &c. 
 
 2 That e t tt may be used in the plural, when the design is to distinguish 
 classes of individuals ; as, tie (Sinen, the ones, ber (S'tneh, of the ones, fyc just 
 a^, in English, we say, the ones, the others. 
 
 3. That e i 11, unlike the English one, cannot be employed in a rippletory 
 way, to till the place of a noun: thus, we cannot say, m German, a new one, 
 a good one, Sfc. In such cases, me adjective stands alone. 
 
 t In place of 3 w ? t- tmbe (both) which is declined like an adjective in the 
 plural, is often employed ; as betbe Slugen, both eyes; bie beiben *8ritber, botb 
 the brothers The neuter b e t b e § never refers to persons. 
 
302 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. § 45. 
 
 for the purposes of comparison, side by side with the cardinals, 
 and in the form required, by the definite article preceding ■ 
 for the ordinal numbers are regularly inflected according to 
 the rules already given for the declension of adjectives. 
 
 CARDINALS. 
 
 
 ORDINALS. 
 
 (StnS (em, dm, cut) 
 
 1. 
 
 ber erfte (not ber etnte), the first. 
 
 p>n 
 
 2. 
 
 „ jteeite (also ber anbere), the 
 
 ' 
 
 
 second. 
 
 bret 
 
 3. 
 
 „ britte (not btette), the third. 
 
 irier 
 
 4. 
 
 „ fcterte, the fourth. 
 
 fiinf 
 
 5. 
 
 „ ffmfte, the fifth. 
 
 fed>3 
 
 6. 
 
 „ fcdjSte, the sixth. 
 
 jte&ett 
 
 7. 
 
 „ ftefccnte, the seventh. 
 
 a<$)t 
 
 8. 
 
 „ acfyte (not adjtte), the eighth 
 
 neun 
 
 9. 
 
 „ neimte, the ninth. 
 
 jefyt 
 
 10. 
 
 „ jefynte, the tenth. 
 
 elf 
 
 11. 
 
 „ elfte, the eleventh. 
 
 gtrotf 
 
 12, 
 
 „ gtuolfte, the twelfth. 
 
 breijefyn 
 
 13. 
 
 „ bretjet;nte, the thirteenth. 
 
 inergefyn 
 
 14. 
 
 „ iuetgefynte, the fourteenth. 
 
 funfjeljn 
 
 15. 
 
 „ fiinfgetynte, the fifteenth. 
 
 fedj^ef;n 
 
 16. 
 
 „ fe(f)gel;nte, the sixteenth ; <fcc 
 
 fleB enge^n or fleBjcfm 
 
 17. 
 
 „ ftefcengefynte or ftefcjetynte. 
 
 acf)tjer)tt 
 
 18. 
 
 „ adjtgetynte. 
 
 neunjef;n 
 
 19. 
 
 „ neungeljnte. 
 
 jtoangtg 
 
 20. 
 
 „ gtoangtglfc. 
 
 em unb gfrcmjtg 
 
 21. 
 
 „ ein unb gtuangtgjte. 
 
 gtoet unb Jtoangtg jc 
 
 22. 
 
 „ tfrni unb jnwnjigfie Jt 
 
 breiftg 
 
 30. 
 
 „ breifigfle. 
 
 ein unb breijjtg 
 
 31. 
 
 „ em unb breifngjie. 
 
 groei imb breifig *c. 
 
 32. 
 
 „ $t»et unb breifngfte *c 
 
 bietgig 
 
 40. 
 
 „ fclerglgfle. 
 
 funfttg 
 
 50. 
 
 „ ffinfitgjte. 
 
 fecfytg (not fedjSgtg^ 
 
 60. 
 
 » fcd&gigfle. 
 
 ftefcengtg or fiefyig 
 
 70. 
 
 „ fteBenjtgfle or fieBjigjlt. 
 
 adjtgtg 
 
 80. 
 
 „ adbtjigfie. 
 
 neunjig 
 
 90. 
 
 „ neunjigjie. 
 

 NUMERALS. § 46. 
 
 tyunbert 
 
 100. 
 
 bertnmbertjte. 
 
 ^unbert unb einS 
 
 101. 
 
 „ fnmbert unb erjte. 
 
 fiuntoert unb jioct 
 
 102. 
 
 „ Intnbert unb jtr-eite. 
 
 l;unbert uni) brei 
 
 It. 103. 
 
 „ fyunbert unb briite. 
 
 pvti !)unbert 
 
 200. 
 
 „ §tv>et(nmbertfte. 
 
 brei r)unbert 
 
 300. 
 
 „ bret(;unbertfie. 
 
 taufenb 
 
 1000. 
 
 „ taufenb fte. 
 
 grret taufenb 
 
 2000. 
 
 „ jhjcitaufcnbfte. 
 
 brct taufenb 
 
 3000. 
 
 „ brettaufenbfte 
 
 get)n taufenb 
 
 10,000. 
 
 „ gefyntaufenbfte. 
 
 Ijunbert taufenb 
 
 100,000. 
 
 „ t;itubcrttaufenbfle jc. 
 
 803 
 
 (2) Observe that, in the formation of the ordinals from 
 the cardinals, a certain law is observed : viz. from jtret {two) 
 to Tteunjetnt (nineteen) the corresponding ordinal, in each case 
 (b r \ i t e and ad) it excepted), is made by adding the letters 
 t e ; as, §trei, two ; gn>et t e, second ; fcter, four ; sner t e, fourth, 
 <fcc. Beyond that number (nineteen), the same effect is pro- 
 duced by adding ft e ; as, gtvanjtg, twenty ; gruanjtg ft c, twen- 
 tieth ; &c. (Srfte is from et)er (before). 
 
 (3j Note, also, that ber anbere (the other') is often used in 
 place of ber jfrette ; but only in cases where two objects only 
 are referred to. 
 
 (4) In compound numbers, it must be observed that the 
 last one only, as in English, bears the suflix (te or jte) ; but in 
 this case, the units usually precede the tens : thus, ber bier 
 unb gtrangtg ft e, the four and twenties. 
 
 (5) We have, also, a sort of interrogative ordinal, formed 
 from tone (how) and inet (much), which is used when we wish 
 to put the question : Wliich of the number ? as, ber nnesielfie 
 ift ucute ? what day of the month is to-day ? 5Da§ ftriesnetfte ifl 
 e§ ? how manv does that make ? 
 
 § 46. Distributive Numerals. 
 
 The distributives, which answer to the question : "Hew 
 many at a time ? " are formed, as in English, by coupling car- 
 dinals by the conjunction unb; or by using before them t\x6 
 particle je (e"er ; at a time); tius, 
 
304 
 
 NUMERALS. § 47. § 48. § 49. 
 
 gtoet unb Jtoei, two and two, or je §toet, £wo a£ a time; 
 
 bret unb bret, f/iree and three, or je brei, three at a time, &\ 
 
 § 47. Multiplicative Numerals. 
 
 The multiplicatives, which answer to the question : " How 
 many fold ? " are formed from the cardinals by adding the 
 suffix fad) {fold) or falttg {having folds) ; thus, 
 
 einfadj or emfalttg, * onefold or single ; 
 
 Jtoeifxd) or jnmfafttg, twofold or having two folds ; 
 
 bieifacfy or bmfaltig, threefold or treble ; 
 
 luerfacfy or inctfaliig, fourfold or having four folds, &c. 
 
 § 48. Variative Numerals. 
 
 Variatives, which answer to the question ; " Of how many 
 kinds ? " are formed from the cardinals by affixing I e i {a sort 
 or Jeind\ the syllable c r being inserted for the sake of eupho- 
 ny ; thus, 
 
 emerlet, of one kind ; iriererlet, of four kinds ; 
 
 §tt?eierlet, of two kinds ; fimferiet, of five kinds ; 
 
 breterlet, of three kinds ; mcmcfyerlet, of many kinds ; &c. 
 
 § 49. Dimidiative Numerals. 
 
 The dimidiatives, which answer to the question : " Which 
 (\. e. which of the numbers) is but a half? " are formed from 
 the ordinals by annexing the word tyatfc {half) ; thus, 
 
 gtoeUet)al6, f the second a half, that is, one whole and a 
 
 half; If 
 btittet)aIB, third a half, i. e. two wholes and a half ; 2- 1 . 
 bierid)atr3, the fourth a half i. e. three wholes and a half; 
 
 3£; &c. 
 
 * (Stnfalftg is applied to what is simple, artless or silly. 
 
 t Instead of ^uettchalb, the word in common use is anbertbalb: the par 
 a ii p c r t being from b e v a u b er e, the second. The word would be am 
 Dcr e l)a\b ; but the final c is exchanged for a t, probably, for ihe sake of as 
 eimilating it, in form, to the rest of the words of this class 
 
NUMERALS. § 50. §51. 305 
 
 §50. Iterative Numerals. 
 
 The iteratives, which answer to the question : " Hew often 
 or how many times ? " are formed from cardinals and from in- 
 defini/-e numerals, by the addition of the word mat * {time) ; 
 thus, 
 
 e i n m a I, one time ; once ; b t e r m a I, four times ; 
 
 f u n f m a t five times ; g to e t m a t, two times j twice ; 
 
 bretmal, three times; fed) 3 mat, six times; 
 
 1 e b e 6 m a I, each time ; b i e t m a I, many times ; &c. 
 
 § 51. Distinctives. 
 
 (1) The name, distinctives, has been applied to a class of 
 ordinal adverbs, which answer to the question : " In what place 
 in the series ? " and which are formed by affixing e it 3 to the 
 ordinal numbers : thus, 
 
 c r ft e n 3, first or in the first f u n f t e it 3, fifthly ; 
 
 place ; 
 
 a xv e i t e n 3, secondly ; f e d) 3 t e n 3, sixthly ; 
 
 b r i 1 1 c n 8, thirdly ; f i e r) t e it 3, seventhly ; 
 
 b i e r t e n 3, fourthly ; a d) t e it 8, eighthly ; &c. 
 
 (2) Under the name, distinctives, may, also, be set down a 
 class of numeral nouns, formed from the cardinals by the addi- 
 tion of the suffixes c r, i it and ling, which are used to desig- 
 nate one arrived at, belonging to, or valued at a certain num- 
 ber : thus, 
 
 5 e d) 1 1 g c x, sixtier, i. e a man sixty years of age, or one 
 
 of a company of sixty ; 
 Ureter, one valued at three, i. e. a coin of 3 pfennigs 
 
 Prussian ; 
 (B, 1 f e t, eleven-er, i. e. wine of the year 1811 ; 
 3 to 1 1 U n g, two-ling, i. e. a twin, &c. 
 
 * 3ft a I is sometin.es separated from the numerals, and is then regularly ' 
 declined as a neuter r Dun. 
 
306 NUMERALS. § 52. $ 53. 
 
 §52. Partitives or Fractionals. 
 
 Under this name (partitives) are embraced a class of neutei 
 nouns, answering to the question : " What part ? " wliicr. are 
 formed by affixing to the ordinals the suffix t e t f (jiart) : 
 thus, 
 
 3) r 1 1 1 e T, a third ; ©tefcentet, a seventh , 
 
 S3 i c r t e I, a fourth ; 91 d) t e 1, an eight ; 
 
 $ iL n f t e I, a fifth ; 0ieunttl, a ninth ; 
 
 @ c d) 6 1 e I, a sixth ; Sctyntel, a tenth ; &e. 
 
 § 53. Indefinite Numerals. 
 
 (\) The indefinite numerals, which are, for the most part, 
 used and inflected as adjectives, are commonly divided into 
 such as serve to indicate number, such as merely denote quan- 
 tity, and such, finally, as are employed to express both. 
 Those denoting number only, are 
 
 jeber, jebe, jebe3, each, every ; 
 
 jegltdjer, — e, — e8, „ „ ) old and unusual forms of 
 jebweber, — e, — e3, „ „ J icber. 
 
 mandjer, mandfje, manfyB, many a ; many (in the plural). 
 mer/rere, several ; plural of me^r, more. 
 
 (2) Those denoting quantity only, are 
 
 e t to a 3, some ; which is indeclinable. 
 
 g a n g, £Ae whole, as opposed to a jsarJ ; declined generally 
 like an adjective ; ^declinable, however, when placed be- 
 fore neuter names of places and not preceded by an ar- 
 ticle or pronoun ; as, gcm§ £)eutfd)tanb, all Germany ; (with 
 the article or pronoun preceding) ba0 gcmje 2)cutfd}tanb, 
 the whole of Germany ; fein ganger JReidjttyum, his whole 
 riches. 
 
 b a ( B, half, follows the same law, in declension, as the word 
 Qa\v 6 above. 
 
 t X e I is simply a contracted form of the word X I) e 1 1, a part. From 20 
 upwards, note that ft e I (instead of t c I) is added ; as, jwaujigfiel/ the twea- 
 toenih, &c. 
 
INDEFINITE NUMERALS. §53. 307 
 
 (3) Those denoting number and quantity both, are 
 
 a 1 1 e r, a 1 1 e, a II e $, all ; applied to quantity, in the singu- 
 lar only • as, aller 9Md)ttntm, all riches ; alle 9)?adjt, all 
 power ; atfeS ©olb, all gold ; biefe3 a\lt$ (not alie) hrifl 
 id; gcuett, all this will I give ; tteldjeS afleS, all which. Pla- 
 ced &<?/b?-e a pronoun, which latter is followed by a noun, 
 the terminations of declension are often omitted ; as, all 
 (for atleS) btefeS ©eft), all this money ; all (for aller) biefer 
 2£ein, all this wine. In the neuter of the singular, it 
 often denotes an indefinite number or amount ; as, alleS, 
 lra3 reifen f aim, rcifet, all that can travel, do travel ; er 
 fdjctnt alleS $u Jvifjen, he seems to know everything. In 
 the plural, the word denotes number ; as, alle SHenffljcn, 
 all men ; an alien Orten, in all places : — it is never used 
 in the sense of whole, which is expressed by gattj j as, bet 
 gan;e $ag, the whole day ; nor is it followed, as in Eng- 
 lish, by the definite article ; as, alle3 ©elb (not alleS ba3 
 ©elb), all the money; — finally, the phrases "all of us," 
 "all of you," &c, are in German: reir alle, we all, &c. 
 The plural is used like our word every ; as, id) gcf;e alle 
 £age, I go every day. 
 
 t i n i g e r, e i it i g e, e i n i g e 8, some ; few ; applied to num- 
 ber in the plural only. 
 
 « 1 1 i cr) e r, — e, — cS, some ; synonymous with ciniger. 
 
 * e i n, t e i it e, i e i n, no ; none ; declined like ein, etne, em ; 
 as, feiit 53ater, feme Gutter, feiti JTittb j when employed as 
 a noun, it takes the old form of declension ; as, fritter Dcr 
 alten 33ercl;rer, none of the ancient worshippers. 
 
 fammtlidjer, — e, — eS, entire ; ) regularly declined like 
 
 8 e f a m m t e r, — e, — e§, „ ) adjectives. 
 
 1 1 e I, much ; (in the plural) many ; when it expresses quan- 
 tity or number, taken collectively, and is not preceded by 
 an article or a pronoun, it is not declined : as tuel ©elb, 
 much gold ; but, baS tucle ©elb, the quantity of gold ; — . 
 when applied to a number as individuals, it is regularly 
 declined: as, sieler, fciele, incleS, &c. ; thus, Dtele banner 
 
303 TABLE OF THE PRONOUNS. § 54. § 55. 
 
 fhtb irage, many men are indolent ; et ffat fct)r toiclt 
 ftreunbe unb id) fyafee and) » i c 1 e, lie has a great many 
 friends and I have also a great many. 
 
 ft e n i g, little ; (in the plural) few ; follows the same rules 
 of inflection as fciel above. 
 
 tn e \j x, more ; ) are indeclinable ; for the plural of mtf)X, 
 
 tv e n i g e x, less ; j however, see above. 
 
 g e n u g, enough ; sufficient ; never declined ; ©etb gemtg, mo- 
 ney enough. 
 
 I a u t e r. merely; only; never declined ; Iautet Jtu!pfer, copper 
 only or nothing but copper. 
 
 n i d) t 0, nothing. 
 
 § 54. PRONOUNS. 
 
 In German, as in other languages, will be found a number 
 of those words, which, for the sake of convenience, are em- 
 ployed as the direct representatives of nouns. These are the 
 pronouns. They are divided, according to the particular offices 
 which they perform, into six different classes : viz. : Personal, 
 Possessive, Demonstrative, Determinative, Relative and Inter- 
 rogative. 
 
 § 55. Table op the Pronouns. 
 
 Personal Pronouns. Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 Singular. Plural. Singular. Plural 
 
 3cr), I. SBhr, We. 2Mn, My. Unfer, Our. 
 
 Sto, Thou, tyt, Ye. <E>ein, Thy. (£ucr, Your. 
 
 (St, He. ©ie, They. ©em, His. 3$r, Their, 
 
 ©ie, She. ©ie, They. tyx, Her. 
 
 @3, It. ©ie, They. ©em, Its. 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns. Reflexive and Reciprocal 
 9ttcm, one ; a certain one. Pronouns. 
 
 Semcmb, some one ; somebody. ©id), Himself, Herself, 
 Sftiemanb, no one ; nobody. Itself, Themselves 
 
 Sebermann, every one ; everybody. (Smanber, one another. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 56. 30& 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. Determinative Pronouns. 
 
 SMefer This. £>er, That, That one, He. 
 
 Sener That. £)erientge, That, That person 
 
 5Der, This or That. SDerfefte, The same. 
 
 ©el6tger, The same. 
 
 <5old;er, Such. 
 
 Relative Pronouns. Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 ©cld&er, Wlio, Which. 2Ber, Who ? toct0 ? What ° 
 
 3>er, That. 2Betd;er, Who? Which? 
 
 2£er, Who, He or she, who 9Sa3 fur, What sort of? 
 or that. 
 
 § 56. Personal pronouns. 
 
 There are five personal pronouns; namely, id), (I) which 
 represents the speaker and is, therefore, of the first person m 
 bu, (thou) which represents the hearer or person addressed, 
 and is therefore, of the second person ; and cr, (he) fie, (she) 
 and e3, (it) representing the person or thing merely spoken of % 
 and, therefore, of the third person. They are declined thu3 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 First person. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 id), I. 
 
 toit, we. 
 
 G. 
 
 meiner, mein, of me. 
 
 unfer, of us. 
 
 D. 
 
 mir, to me. 
 
 un3, to us. 
 
 A. 
 
 mid), me. 
 
 uttS, us. 
 
 
 Second person. 
 
 
 % 
 
 bit, thou. 
 
 t$r, ye or you. 
 
 G. 
 
 beiner, bein of thee. 
 
 eiter, of you. 
 
 D. 
 
 bit, to thee. 
 
 end), to you. 
 
 A. 
 
 bid), thee. 
 
 eud), you. 
 
 
 Third person, Masc. 
 
 N. 
 
 er, he. 
 
 fie, they. 
 
 G. 
 
 feiner, fein, of him. 
 
 ir)rer, of them. 
 
 b. 
 
 i1)m, to him. 
 
 U)nen, to them 
 
 A. 
 
 ttjn, him 
 
 fie. them. 
 
310 REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 57. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Third person. Fern. 
 N. fie, she. fie, they. 
 
 G. U)rcr, of her. tf;rer, of them. 
 
 D. tyr, to her. tfynen, to them. 
 
 A. fie, her. fie, them. 
 
 Third person, Neut. 
 N. e§, it. fte, they. 
 
 G-. feincr, of it. ifjrer, of them. 
 
 D. U)m, to it. it;nen, to them. 
 
 A. c8, it. fte, them. 
 
 § 57. Remarks on the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 (1) The genitives, mem, bein, fein, are the earlier forms. 
 The others (meiner, beiner, feincr) are the ones now commonly 
 used. 
 
 (2) "When construed with the prepositions JjalGen, toegen, 
 and utti-luttten, (signifying for the sake of, on account of) these 
 genitives are united with the preposition by the euphonic letters, 
 et, or (in case of unfer and euer) simply t. Thus : memettoegen, 
 on account ofme; unt tmferthnllen, on account of us, &c. 
 
 (3) The personal pronouns of the third person, when they 
 represent things without life, are seldom, if ever, used in the 
 dative, and never in the genitive. In such instances, the corres- 
 ponding case of the demonstrative bet, bie, ba8, is employed : 
 thus, beffen, (of this,) instead of feiner; and beren, (of these,) 
 instead of tfyter. 
 
 (4) The word fefljfi or felBer (self, selves) may, also, for the 
 greater clearness or emphasis, be added not only to the pro- 
 nouns, but even to nouns. Thus ; 3d) fef&jt, I myself ; bie %tutt 
 fettjft, the people themselves. 
 
 (5) Here, too, observe, that the personal pronouns have, 
 also in the plural, a reciprocal force. Thus : fie IteBen fid), they 
 love one another. But as fie liefcen fid), for example, might 
 
REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 57. 311 
 
 signify, they love themselves, the Germans, also, use the word 
 einanbcr, (one another) about which there can be no mistake : 
 as, fie ItdJen ein.anber (§ 60.) 
 
 (G) In polite conversation, the Germans use the third per- 
 son plural, where we use the second. Thus: 3d) f)oGe <Sie ge» 
 fcr/en, I have seen you. To prevent misconception, the pronouns 
 thus used are written with a capital letter; as, id) banfe 3(;nen, 
 I thank (them) you. A similar sacrifice of Grammar to (sup- 
 posed) courtesy, may be found in our own language. For 
 we constantly use the plural for the singular ; thus : " How are 
 you'V instead of "How art thou?" The Germans proceed 
 just one step beyond this, and besides taking the plural for 
 the singular, take the third person for the second. With them, 
 our familiar salutation "How do you do ?" would be, " How 
 do they do ?" 
 
 (7) It must be observed, however, that the second person 
 singular, £>u, is always as in English, used in addressing the 
 Supreme Being. It is, also, the proper mode of address among 
 warm friends and near relatives. But it is, also, used in angry 
 disputes, where little regard is paid to points of politeness. 
 The second person plural is employed by superiors to their 
 inferiors. The third person singular er, fie, is used in the lika 
 manner, that is, by masters to servants, &c. 
 
 (8) The neuter pronoun (e3) of the third person singular, 
 like the words it and there in English, is often employed, as a 
 nominative, both before and after verbs, singular- and plural, 
 as a mere expletive ; that is, more for the purpose of aiding the 
 sound than the sense of the sentence. In this use, moreover, 
 it is construed with words of all genders. Thus : (S3 ifi bee 
 Warm, it is the man ; (S3 ifi bie %xau, it is the woman ; (S3 ftnb 
 Wanner, they are men ; (S3 bonnert ; it thunders ; (S3 folgten 
 fciele, there followed many, &c. &c. 
 
 When (S3 is thus used with a personal pronoun, the arrange- 
 ment of the words is precisely the reverse of the English. 
 Ex. : 3d) bin e3. It is I. £u Eijt e3, It is thou. Sic ftnb e3, 
 It is they, &c. 
 
 
312 possessive pronouns. § 58. 
 
 § 58. Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 (l) The possessive pronouns are derived, each respectively, 
 from the genitive case of the personal pronouns ; thus, 
 
 l st pers. mem, my : from meiner, gen. sing, of Sdfy. 
 
 2^ 
 
 it 
 
 be in, thy : 
 
 it 
 
 beiner, 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 £>u. 
 
 3d 
 
 it 
 
 fein, Ms: 
 
 it 
 
 feiner, 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 ti 
 
 <&. 
 
 3d 
 
 ll 
 
 tf)r, * her : 
 
 it 
 
 il)rer, 
 
 a 
 
 it 
 
 ti 
 
 @te. 
 
 3d 
 
 t: 
 
 fein, its: 
 
 n 
 
 feiner, 
 
 <t 
 
 a 
 
 it 
 
 (S3. 
 
 1st 
 
 ir 
 
 tmfer, f our : 
 
 it 
 
 unfer, 
 
 a 
 
 plur. 
 
 it 
 
 3d) 
 
 2d 
 
 ii 
 
 euer, f y° ur ' 
 
 it 
 
 euer, 
 
 a 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 £)u. 
 
 3d 
 
 it 
 
 \§X, their : 
 
 it 
 
 tfyrer, 
 
 a 
 
 it 
 
 it 
 
 (Sr, ©ie or (g$. 
 
 (2) By their forms, therefore, these pronouns indicate the 
 person and number of the nouns which they represent ; that 
 is, the person and number of the possessors. As, moreover, 
 they may be declined like adjectives, they, also, make known 
 by their terminations, the gender, number and case of the 
 nouns with which they stand connected : for, in respect to 
 inflection, a possessive pronoun agrees in gender, number and 
 case, not with the possessor, but with the name of the thing 
 possessed. 
 
 (3) The possessive pronouns, when conjunctive, that is, 
 when joined with a noun, are inflected after the old form of 
 declension ; except in three places (nom. sing. masc. and nom. 
 and ace. neuter), in which the terminations are wholly omitted ; 
 Uius, — 
 
 * Formerly, in ceremonious addresses, the words 2)evo (old gen. plural of 
 )cv, that person) and Sbvo (old gen. plural of er, he), were used instead of 
 i§\xn {your) and 3ff>r (her) ; as, Sfyvo SJiajeffcat, her majesty, &c. 
 
 (Sucv was formerly written eroev, and the syllable (Stt). as an abbreviation 
 is used in address to persons of high rank, with the verb in the plural 
 Ex. (§iu. SJJajeftdt foaben befobjen, your majesty has ordered. 
 
 t Note that in declining unfev and euer, the e, before r, is often struck 
 ouf thus, 
 
 unfm (for nnfevev), wnfve (for uitfeve), unfreS (for unfeveS), &c 
 
 euver (for eucier), eure (for euer?), eureS (for euere.8), &c. 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. J 58. 
 
 313 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 For all genders 
 
 N. 
 
 mem, 
 
 meine, 
 
 mem ; 
 
 meine. 
 
 G. 
 
 meineS, 
 
 meiner, 
 
 mcmcS ; 
 
 meincr. 
 
 D. 
 
 meinem, 
 
 meiner, 
 
 meinem ; 
 
 mcinett 
 
 ^. 
 
 meinen, 
 
 metne, 
 
 mein j 
 
 meine. 
 
 (4) When, however, these pronouns are absolute, that is, 
 when they stand alone, agreeing with a noun understood and 
 demanding a special emphasis, the terminations proper to the 
 three places noted above, are of course affixed : thus, biefcr 
 ȣ>nt ifi mein e r, ntcfyt bein e r, this hat is mine, not thine ; bie*- 
 feS 33 uc^ tji mein e 3, this book is mm«. 
 
 (5) But when a possessive pronoun absolute is preceded by 
 the definite article, it then follows the New form of declen- 
 sion : thus, 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plurav. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 N. 
 
 ber meine, 
 
 bte meine, 
 
 ba§ metne ; 
 
 bie meinen. 
 
 G. 
 
 be^ meinen, 
 
 ber meinen, 
 
 be§ meinen ; 
 
 ber meinen. 
 
 D. 
 
 bem memen. 
 
 bet meinen, 
 
 bem meinen j 
 
 ben meinen. 
 
 A. 
 
 ben meinen, 
 
 bte metne, 
 
 ba3 metne j 
 
 bie meinen. 
 
 (6) Often, too, in this case, the syllable t g is inserted, but 
 without any change of meaning : thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 N. ber meinige, bie meinige, ba3 meinige; bie meinigen. 
 
 G. be8 meinigen, ber meintgen, be8 meinigen j ber meintgen. 
 
 D. bem meinigen, ber meinigen, bem meinigen; ben meintgen. 
 
 A. ben meinigen, bie meinige, ba3 meinige ; bie meintgen. 
 
 (7) When, finally, a possessive pronoun is employed as a 
 predicate, and merely denotes possession, without special em- 
 phasis, it is not inflected at all ; thus, ber ©arten ifi mein, the 
 garden is mine ; bie ©tuBe ijl bein, the room is thine ; ba3 
 »#au3 ifi fettt, the house is his. 
 
814 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. $ 59. 
 
 (8) It should be added that tue Germans, when no ol n> 
 rity is likely to grow out of it, often omit the possessive pro- 
 noun, where in English it would be used : the definite article 
 seeming sufficiently tc supply its place ; as, 3rf> t;a6c e0 in ben 
 43anben, I have it in the hands ; that is, I have it in my hands 
 (5r natjm e3 auf bte <2d)ultent, he took it upon the (his) shoul 
 ders ; (Sr X;at ben 5lrnt gefcrocfyen, he has broken (the) an arm 
 or his arm 
 
 § 59. Indefinite Pronouns. 
 
 (1) Pronouns employed to represent persons and things in 
 a general way, without reference to particular individuals, are 
 called indefinite pronouns. Such are these, 
 
 3)2 an, one ; a certain one. 
 Semanb, some one ; somebody. 
 Ottemcmb, no one ; nobody. 
 Scbermanit, * every one ; everybody. 
 
 (2) The German man (like the French on) is used to in- 
 dicate persons in the most general manner : thus, man fagt, 
 one says ; that is, they say, people say, it is said, &c. It is in- 
 declinable, and is found only in the nc inative ; when, there- 
 fore, any other case would be called for, the corresponding 
 oblique case of e i n is employed : thus, er roitt e i n e n me 
 i)0xm r he will never listen to one, i. e. to any one. 
 
 (3) 3emanb and -Dliemanb are declined in the following 
 manner : 
 
 Singular. 
 N. Semanb, somebody. ^iemanb, nobody. 
 
 G. Semanbg or 3emanbe3. 9?iemanb8 or DliemanbeS, 
 
 D. Semanb or Semanbem. Sftiemanb or Oftemanbem. 
 
 A. Semanb or Semanben. 9ttemanb or Oliemanben. 
 
 * The following, which also belong to this list of indefinites, have already 
 5>een heated of under the head of indefinite numerals : viz. 
 
 QrtroaS, something. 3eftl<dKi\ each; everyone. 
 
 SRictt?, nothing. (vint^e, somewhat; some. 
 
 Reiner, no one ; none. C*t!id)e, some; many. 
 
 (Stncr, one ; some one. 91 Her, every one ; all. 
 
 Seber, each; every one. 2ftaucf)er, many a; nany; several. 
 
 Sebaeber each ; every one 
 
REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. J 60. 315 
 
 "Seberutann is declined thus : 
 
 N. Scbermamt, everybody. 
 
 G. 3cbermann3, of everybody. 
 
 D. Sebermamt, to everybody. 
 
 A. 3ebermamt, everybody. 
 
 ^4) Note that the second form of the dative (^emairbetn, 
 Stfiemanbem) is seldom employed except when the other fcrm 
 would leave the meaning ambiguous. Thus, e3 ifl -9?tentanbem 
 nufcltd), it is useful to nobody ; where, were w 9]temanb" used, 
 the sense might be, nobody is useful. This remark applies, 
 also, to the accusative : as, fie liefrt 9iiemanben, she loves no- 
 body : in which instance, were the other form (9ttemanb) sub- 
 stituted, it might mean, nobody loves her. 
 
 § 60. Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns. 
 
 (1) When the subject and the object of a verb are iden- 
 tical, the latter being a personal pronoun, the pronoun is said 
 to be reflexive ; because the action is thereby represented as 
 reverting upon the actor : thus, cr ru1)mt fid), he praises him- 
 self. 
 
 (2) When, however, in such case, the design is to represent 
 the individuals constituting a plural subject as acting one upon 
 another, the pronoun is said to be reciprocal : thus, fie fcefd)tm* 
 }>fen fid), they disgrace one another. 
 
 (3) But, as (for example) fie fccfdjtmpfen ftd) may equally 
 mean, they disgrace themselves, the reciprocal word etncmbet 
 (one another) is added to or substituted for fid), wherever 
 there is danger of mistake ; as, fie berftefyen fid) emanber ; or fte 
 fcerfkfyen einanber, they understand one another. 
 
 (4) In the dative and accusative (singular and plural) the 
 German affords a special form for the reflexives ; viz. fid), him- 
 self herself, itself, themselves. The personal pronouns, there- 
 fore, in all tha oblique * cases, are used in a reflexive sense ; 
 except in the dative and accusative {third person), where, in- 
 stead of i()m, tf;n, tJjr. k., the word fid) is employed. Re- 
 
 * All cases, except the nominative, are called oblique cases. 
 
816 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. § 61. 
 
 garded as reflexives, the personal pronouns are declined 
 thus : 
 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 First person. 
 N. None. None. 
 
 G. meiner, of. myself unfer, of ourselves. 
 
 D. mir, to myself. imS, to ourselves 
 
 A. mid), myself. un$, ourselves. 
 
 Second person. 
 N. None. None. 
 
 G. beinet, of thyself. euet, of yourselves. 
 
 D. bir, to thyself. eud), to yourselves. 
 
 A bid), thyself. tudj, yourselves. 
 
 Third person masc. 
 K- None. None. 
 
 G. feiner, of himself. tf)rcr, of themselves. 
 
 D. f i d), to himself. f i d), to themselves. 
 
 A. fid), himself. f i d), themselves. 
 
 Third person f em. 
 N. None. None. 
 
 G. tt)ter, of herself. i^rer, of themselves. 
 
 .0. fid), to herself. fi^ to themselves. 
 
 A. fid), herself. f i d), themselves 
 
 Third person neuter. 
 N. None. None. 
 
 G. feiner, of itself. tf;rer, of themselves. 
 
 D. fid), to itself. fid)/ to themselves. 
 
 A. f i d), itself. f i d), themselves. 
 
 § 61. Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 (1) The peculiar office of a demonstrative pronoun is to 
 point out the relative position of the object to which it refers 
 Of these there are three : 
 
 biefer, this (pointing to something near at hand) ; 
 
 jener, that (indicating something remote') ; 
 
 ber, this or that (referring to things in either position): 
 
OBSERVATIONS ON THE DEMONSTRATIVES. § 62. 317 
 
 (2) JDicfcr and jencr are declined after the Old form of ad- 
 
 jectives : thus, 
 Masc. 
 
 N. biefer, 
 
 G. biefeS, 
 
 D. biefem, 
 
 A. biefen, 
 
 Singular. 
 Fern. Neut. 
 
 bicfe, 
 bicfcr, 
 bicfcr, 
 bicfe, 
 
 bicfcS (bicS), this ; 
 biefc3, of this ; 
 biefem, to this ; 
 biefe3 (bieS), this ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders, 
 bicfe, these, 
 bicfer, of these, 
 bicfen, to these, 
 bicfe, these. 
 
 (3) 5Der, when used in connection with a noun, is inflected 
 (like the definite article) thus : 
 
 Singular. 
 Neut. 
 ba3, this or that ; 
 
 Masc 
 N. bcr, 
 G. bcS, 
 D. bcm, 
 A. ben, 
 
 Fern. 
 
 bie, 
 bcr, 
 bcr, 
 bie, 
 
 bcS, of this or that ; 
 bcm, to this or that ; 
 ba3, this or that ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 For all genders. 
 bie, these or those, 
 bcr, of these or those 
 ben, to these or those, 
 bie, these or those. 
 
 (4) When used absolutely, that is, to represent a substan- 
 tive, it stands thus : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 For all genders. 
 
 N. bcr, 
 
 bie, 
 
 baS; 
 
 bie. 
 
 G. beffen (befj), 
 
 bercn (bcr), 
 
 beffen (bef ) j 
 
 bcrcn. 
 
 D. bent, 
 
 bcr, 
 
 b ym ; 
 
 benett 
 
 A. ben, 
 
 bie, 
 
 baS; 
 
 bie. 
 
 § 62. Observations on the demonstratives. 
 
 (1) The neuters biefeS (contract form bteS), jcnc3 and baS, 
 are, like e3 (§134. 1.) employed with verbs, without distinc- 
 tion of gender or number : thus, bte§ ift etn 9J?cum, this is a 
 man ; bteS ffnb SDfanfdjen, these are men ; jcncS tft cine ftxau, 
 that is a woman ; &c. 
 
 (2) £iefer, when denoting immediate proximity, signifies 
 "this ;" as, in biefer 2Be(t ift alle3 ijergangltcr), in this world all 
 is transitory. More generally, however, it answers in use to 
 u that." 3ener always denotes greater remoteness than biffti^ 
 
318 DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. § 63. 
 
 and signifies "that" "yon" '■'■yonder ;" as, jcncr Stem ifl faum 
 t\d)thax, that (or yonder) star is hardly visible. 
 
 Sener and biefcr, when employed to express contrast or com- 
 parison, cften find their equivalents in the English expressions 
 "the former" — "the latter ;" "that, that one" — "this, this one." 
 
 (S) The demonstrative ber, bte, ba§, is distinguishable from 
 the article, with which it is identical in form, by being uttered 
 with greater emphasis, as in the following example : b e r 9ftann 
 fyat e$ gefagt, ntdjt Jencr, this man has said it, not that one. 
 
 (4) The form be£ is chiefly found in compounds ; as, be§ * 
 toegen, on this account. 
 
 (5) Sometimes ber is, for the sake of greater clearness, 
 employed in place of a possessive : as, er malte feinen better 
 imb beffcn <£>of;n, he painted his cousin and his son ; literally, 
 and the son of this one, i. e. the cousin's son. 
 
 (6) The pronouns, both demonstrative and determinative, 
 are frequently made more intensive by the particle eft en, even ; 
 very : etjen biefe 33Iume, this very flower ; efcm baS Jttnb, that 
 same child ; eften berfelfce, the very same. 
 
 § 63. Determinative Pronouns. 
 
 (1) The pronouns of this class are commonly set down 
 among the demonstratives. Their distinctive feature, however, 
 is that of being used where an antecedent is to be limited by 
 a relative clause succeeding, and so rendered more or less pro- 
 minent or emphatic : thus, ber, toelcf)er flug ^anbelt, berbient £c;&, 
 he {that man) who acts wisely, deserves praise. From this 
 use they derive the name determinative. They are 
 
 ber, that ; that one ; he ; 
 
 fcerientge, that ; that person (strongly determinative) ; 
 
 berfelbe, * the same (denoting identity) ; 
 
 feI6tger, the same (seldom used) ; 
 
 fotd)er, such (marking similarity of kind or nature). 
 
 (2) SDer, when used in connection with a noun, is declined 
 like the demonstrative ber ; that is, like the definite article : 
 
 * Where two words precede, dther of which might be taken for the ante* 
 
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. § 64. 
 
 319 
 
 when used absolutely, it differs from the demonstrative ber on- 
 ly in the genitive plural : taking b e r c r instead of b e r e n. 
 
 (3) 3)erjentge and berfe!6e are compounded of bcr and the 
 parts jeriige and felfce respectively. In declining, both parts of 
 each must be inflected • ber, like the article, and jettige and felOe 
 after the New form of adjectives : thus, 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 New. 
 
 For all genders, 
 
 N. 
 
 berjenige, 
 
 bieienige, 
 
 baSientgc ; 
 
 bieiemgeri. 
 
 G 
 
 be§jemgen, 
 
 berienigen, 
 
 beSjemgen; 
 
 berienigen 
 
 D. 
 
 bemienigcn, 
 
 bcrjentgeit, 
 
 bcmjentgcn ; 
 
 benienigen. 
 
 A. 
 
 benienigen, 
 
 bieienige, 
 
 b ageing e ; 
 
 biejenigen. 
 
 (4) ©cl6igcr, <2el6tge, Setbtgey and ©oldfjcv, 6otd)e, ©£>Tdj&$, 
 are dechned after the Old form cf adjectives ; the latter, 
 however, when the indefinite article (em, einc, cut) precedes, 
 takes the Mixed form : * thus, 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 cm foldjcr, f 
 
 cine foldje, 
 
 cm foId)e3, 
 
 such a. 
 
 G. 
 
 ernes' fold) en, 
 
 enter foldjcit, 
 
 ctncS fotdjcn, 
 
 of such a. 
 
 D. 
 
 cinent fold) en, 
 
 ciner fold) en, 
 
 eincni (old) en, 
 
 to such a. 
 
 A. 
 
 einen fold) en, 
 
 eine fofd)e, 
 
 cm fold)e3, 
 
 such a. 
 
 § 64. Relative Pronouns. 
 
 (1) The proper office of a relative pronoun is to represent 
 an antecedent word or phrase ; but, while so doing, it serves 
 also to connect the different clauses of a sentence. The Rela- 
 tives in German are these : 
 
 cedent of a personal pronoun of the third person, berfetbc is used to prevent 
 doubt: thus, tec £kter fdjrtcb feinem Sobue, bevfelbe muffe uctci) bonbon retfen, 
 the father wrote the son, that he (bevfdbe, the last one named, i. e. the son) 
 must set out for London. 
 
 * When cut comes after 
 cm attaint, suah a man. 
 
 )er, the latter is not inflected at all ; as, fcldj> 
 
 t Nearly synonymous with Soldier are the words, lieSgletdjett, ?>eva,fefrr)ett, 
 fftueSitleiitcii, tbyegajeidjert. all which are indeclinable; as/tcf) babe feineu Um= 
 gang mtt beraletdjcii Seufeit, I have no mtercourse with such people. 2B« 
 Hitter eu4) tfl fetnesgtetc^en V Who among you is his equal 1 
 
320 OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVES. § 05, 
 
 SBeTdjer, who, which. 
 
 $>cr, that. 
 
 2Bcr, who, he who, or that, or she who. 
 
 (Bo,* which, (nearly obsolete, and indeclinable.) 
 
 (2) SOBcIdjer is declined after the Old form ; thus, 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern.. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 N. toeldjer, toclcfye, toeldjeS j tr-elcfye, who, which. 
 
 G. tocld)c3, toetdier, freldjeS j toelcfyer, of whom, whose. 
 
 D. toeldjem, fteldjer, toeldjcm j toeldjen, to whom, to which 
 
 A. n?eld;en, toeldje, u?elcr)e3 j teethe, whom, which. 
 
 (3) £et is declined, thus: 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 N. bet, bie, ba3 ; bie, that, who, which. 
 
 G. beffen, beten, beffen; beren, of whom, or which, whose, 
 
 D. bent, bcr, bemj benen, to whom, or which. 
 
 A. ben, bie, ba3j bie, that, who, which. 
 
 (4) SBer stands thus : 
 
 Singular. Plural 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 G. freffen (or toefj,) rueffen (or toef ,) toefi; G. I a 
 
 D. n?ent, item, wanting % D. j g-. 
 
 A. torn, torn, toaS; A.J <l 
 
 § 65. Observations on the Relatives. 
 
 (1) Of the pronouns declined above, h? etcher, toetdje, 
 to e 1 d) c 0, is the only one that can be used in conjunction with 
 a noun, after the manner of an adjective : thus, n?eld)er SERamt, 
 
 * © o is really an adverb used as a relative. 
 
 t 9Ber has no plural, but like " e$, " is sometimes used before plural verbs 
 Example : 2Bcr fitiD btefe ^eute 'i Who are this people'? 
 
 t This dative is supplied by an adverbial compound ; as, roojtt, IWO-r- JU) 
 whereto, or to which. SBomtt, where-with, with what, t»o»on, whereof, o/ 
 what, &c. 
 
OBSERVATIONS ON THE RELATIVES. § 65. 321 
 
 which man; (not n?er SKann;) and, except when so joined with 
 a noun, the genitive (both Sing, and Plural) of ireldjer is never 
 used, but. in place of it, the corresponding parts of ber; that 
 is, bejfen, beren, beffen, for the Singular, and bcren, for the plural; 
 as. ber 2)Zaim, bcffen (not h?eld)e3) Sfteunb id) bin, the man, 
 whose friend I am ; bte 3Baume, beren (not m ;lrf)er) £Blutt}en afc* 
 gefaQen ftnb, the trees whose blossoms have fallen off. 
 
 (2) 5£)er, bte, ba3, as a relative, like the English word that, 
 is used as a sort of substitute for the regular relative. Thus 
 (See obs. next above) its genitive is employed in place of that 
 of n? el d) e r, because the genitive of the latter, (roelc^eS, rcctdjer, 
 trcldjeS,) being the same in form as the nominative masc. and 
 neuter, might occasion mistake. So alter the pronouns of the 
 first and second person, (and of the third, when used for the 
 second,) rcetcfrer is never employed, but ber, thus: 
 
 tr)rt fat;, I, who saw him. 
 
 unS fegneft, thou, who blessest us. 
 
 t)ter ticrfammclt finb, we, who are here as- 
 sembled, 
 euer 33atcrlanb liefct, ye, who love your 
 
 country, 
 mir Sctjtimmten, ye, who agreed with 
 
 me. 
 2)er, bte, ba§, after folcfter, is equivalent to the English "as" : 
 thus, felc&e, bie an SBaumen roacr>ft, such as grows on trees. 
 
 (3) $8 er, ro a 3, is an indefinite relative employed where- 
 ever any uncertainty exists about the antecedent : thus, fonnen 
 <2te mir fagen, roer btefe§ getljatt r)at? Can you tell me, who has 
 done this ? 3d) tretfj ntcht, roa3 er fagte, I do not know, what 
 he said. 
 
 (4) Often frer, n?a», has at once the force of both a rela- 
 tive and an antecedent ; as, toer auf bem 3Bege ber £ugenb lean* 
 
 * In each case, it will be noted, the personal pronoun is repeated after the 
 relative. In translating, of course the pronoun repeated, is to be omitted ; ot 
 the order of the words being reversed ad) ber, instead of ber idj) the rendering 
 may be : 1,1 who saw, &c. It must be added, that, when the pronoun is not 
 repeated, the verb will be in the third per=on and in agreement with the re 
 lative : as, tu warfi e§, ber e» mir fagte, thou wast the one, that (old tw» sc 
 
 3d), 
 £>u, 
 23ir, 
 
 ber 
 ber 
 bte 
 
 id)* 
 bu* 
 
 irir * 
 
 5fr 
 
 bie 
 
 ir)r* 
 
 <Sie, 
 
 bie 
 
 <3te* 
 
322 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. § 60. 
 
 belt, ift glutflid), he that walks in the path of virtue, is happy } 
 toa3 geredjt ifi, berbicnt £ofc, wAa£, or */*«£ w/«cA is right, de- 
 serves praise. 
 
 (5) SB c r alwayu begins a clause or sentence and never 
 comes after th ) word which it represents ; fr> a § may, or may 
 not begin a clause, and may or may not come after its proper 
 antecedent : thus, toet md)t Ijoren toW, bet muf fufyfett, he who 
 will not hear, must feel ; id) [age, tva$ id) tretf, I say what I 
 know ; atleS, toa$ id) gefef)en fyafce, all that I have seen ; ftaS 
 gered)t ifr, Derbient £olJ, what is right, deserves praise. 
 
 The form it) c f occurs in the compounds toef tt>egen, i»efjl)at&, 
 on which or what account. 
 
 (6) SBefdjer, -e, -e6, is often employed as an indefinite 
 adjective pronoun. See Lesson 39. 4. 
 
 § 66. Interrogative Pronouns. 
 
 (1) The interrogative pronouns, that is, those used in ask- 
 ing questions, are 
 
 toer, toaS? who? what? 
 h? eldjer ? who ? which ? 
 toct3 fur ein ? what sort of a ? 
 
 (2) They are the same in form, as the relatives ; or rather 
 the relatives themselves employed in a different way. 28 er, 
 Xoa8, and it>eld)et, toelcfye, freldjeS, are declined just as when they 
 are relatives, except that toetdjer, -e, — e8, when interrogative 
 never adopts the genitive of ber. 
 
 (3) 2Ber and n?a3 (ivho ? what ?) can never be joined with 
 a noun. They are used when the question is put in a manner 
 general and indefinite. SBeldjet, toeld)e, h?etd)e§, on the other 
 hand, has a more definite reference, and may be employed ad- 
 jeotively : thus, fteldjet Sftarnt? .which man? &c. 
 
 (4) 2Ba3 fur ein (literally, what for a?) is a form used in 
 inquiring as to the hind, quality or species of a thing : as, tt>a3 
 fur ein 2D?ann ? what sort of a man ? toa8 fur erne $rau ? what 
 sort of a woman ? tva& fur ein Jtinb ? what kind of a child ? 
 
 (o) The only part of n?a0 fur ein, capable of inflection, is 
 ein ; which, when the thing referred to in the question, is ex- 
 
verbs. § 67. § 68. 
 
 323 
 
 pressed, takes tlie form of the indefinite article : "when it is left 
 understood, ein is inflected like an adjective of the Old form. 
 The plural, in both cases, omits the article, and stands simply 
 thus, teaS fur. 
 
 (C) 3BaS fiir cin, with a substantive. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. 
 
 H. 
 
 teaS fur ein, eine, cin • teaS fiir, 
 
 what sort of ? 
 
 G. 
 
 teaS fiir emeS, cuter, ciitcS j teaS fiir, 
 
 of what sort of ? 
 
 D. 
 
 teaS fiir einetn, etner, einem ; teaS fiir, 
 
 to what sort of ? 
 
 A. 
 
 ( 
 
 teaS fiir emeu, cine, eiit ; teaS fur, 
 7) 2SaS fur cin without a substantive. 
 
 , what sort of ? 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 For all genders 
 
 N. 
 
 teaS fur ewer, cine, cincS ; 
 
 teaS fiir 
 
 G. 
 
 teaS fiir emeS, etner, ctncS ; 
 
 teaS fiir. 
 
 D. 
 
 teaS fiir einem, etner, emeus j 
 
 teaS fiir. 
 
 A. 
 
 teaS fiir etnett, eine, cineS • 
 
 tea3 fiir. 
 
 § 67. Observations. 
 
 (1) Observe further that ein, in teaS fur em, is sometimes 
 omitted in the singular, especially before words denoting ma- 
 terials as, teaS fiir 5<>ug, what sort of stuff ? teaS fiir 2B ein, 
 what kind of wine ? 
 
 (2) That teaS fiir ein, and also teeld) (that is, teeldjcr, with- 
 out the terminations of declension) are occasionally employed 
 in expressions of surprise or wonder ; as, teaS fiir cin 2)totttt, 
 or, tectd) cin 2D? aim ! what a man ! 
 
 (3) That teaS is sometimes used for tearunt: thus, teaS 
 fdjlagft bu mtcf) ? why strikest thou me ? 
 
 § 68. TERES. 
 
 (1) A verb is that part of speech which dsfines the condi- 
 dition of a subject ; that is, shows whether it acts, is acted 
 upon or merely exists. 
 
324 PARTICIPLES. § 69. 
 
 (2) In respect to form, verbs are either icgular or irregu- 
 lar ; simple or compound ; all which will be more fully explained 
 nereal'ter. 
 
 (3) In respect to meaning, verbs are active transitive, active 
 intransitive, passive, neuter, reflexive, or impersonal. These 
 terms have in German the same general signification which they 
 have in English. Their application will, however, more large- 
 ly appear in subsequent sections. 
 
 (4) The German, like the English verb, has its moods, ten- 
 ses, numbers, persons and participles. 
 
 (5) There are jive moods: viz: the Indicative, the Sub- 
 junctive, the Conditional *, the Imperative and the Infinitive. 
 
 (6) There are six tenses : viz : the Present, the Imperfect, 
 the Perfect, the Pluperfect, the first Future and the second 
 Future. 
 
 (V) These names (the names both of the moods and tenses) 
 designate in German, just the same things as do the correspon- 
 ding ones in English. For their general signification, see the 
 paradigms on the pages following ; for more particular expla- 
 nation of their uses, see the Syntax. 
 
 § 69. Participles. 
 
 ( 1 ) There are three Participles : viz : the Present, which 
 terminates in enb and answers in signification to the English 
 participle in ing; as, tofcenb, praism^. 
 
 (2) The Perfect, which, besides prefixing in most cases the 
 augment ge ends in verbs of the Old Form, in en or n, and 
 in those of the New Form, in et or t ; and has a meaning cor- 
 respondent to our participle in ed ; as, getragcn (ge-f-trag-f-en) 
 corned; gelobet (ge -h loB ■+- ct) praised. 
 
 * This (the Conditional) is made up of the Imperfect Subjunctive of the 
 auxiliary verb w e v t> e it. (which see; and the Present and Perfect Infinitive 
 of another verb. It is used to denote what is, also often denoted by the Sub- 
 junctive, (Imperfect and Pluperfect I namely, a supjiosed condition of thingst 
 i. e. possibility without actuality By some it is treated as a distinct mood: 
 by others, it is made to consist of two tenses : its use (which see more at larga 
 in the Syntax) is the same in both views. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. § 70 325 
 
 (3) T1.3 Future, which is produced by prefixing the par- 
 ticle ju (tc) to the l^rm of the Present Participle, (leftenb) 
 thus, ju lobeub, which means to-be-praised, that is 'praiseworthy, 
 ' (4) The Particle ® c mentioned above, as being generally 
 prefixed to the perfect participle, was originally designed, it 
 would seem, to indicate completed action. It is commonly 
 accounted merely euphonic, or at most intensive. The instan- 
 ces in which it is altogether omitted, are these : 
 
 First : in the case of all verbs compounded with inseparable 
 prefixes; (See § 94.) as, Belcljrt, (not geBeIeC;rt) informed: 
 
 Second : in the case of verbs from foreign languages, which 
 make t 7 e infinitive in iren or ieren: as, fiubirt, (from fut* 
 biren), studied ; instead of gefiubirt : 
 
 Third: in the case of the verb toetbeit, when joined as 
 an auxiliary to another verb: as, id; Bin geloBt tocrben, (not 
 getoorben) I have been praised. 
 
 § 70. Auxiliary Verbs. 
 
 (1) In German the auxiliary verbs are usually divided into 
 two classes. 
 
 (2) The first class consists of three verbs, without which 
 no complete conjugation can be formed. They are l)ahtn, to 
 have, fein, to be, and toerben, to become. These verbs, though 
 chiefly employed as auxiliaries, are often themselves in the con- 
 dition of principal verbs. In that case, they aid one another 
 in the formation of the compound tenses. A glance at the 
 paradigms will show, how this is dene. 
 
 (3) As auxiliaries, these three verbs enter into the composi- 
 tion of the compound tenses, active and passive, of all classes 
 of verbs. 
 
 (4) <§ a B e n is used in forming the perfect, pluperfect and 
 second future tenses in the active voice: thus, from £oBen, to 
 praise, we have 
 
 Perf. d) \) a B c geloBt, I have praised. 
 
 Plup. id) fy a tt c geloBt, I had praised. 
 
 2. Fut. id) toerbe geloBt I; aB e n, I shall have praised 
 
326 REMARKS ON THE USE OF $0&ett AND feltt. § 71. 
 
 (5 ) <& c i tt is used in forming the perfect, pluperfect and 
 Beiond future tenses, both in the active and passive; thus, from 
 lofcm, to praise and toad) fen, to grow. 
 
 Active. Passive. 
 
 Perf. id) B i n getoadjfen, id) B i n getoBt rootben, 
 
 I have * grown. I have * been praised. 
 
 Plup. id) h? at gctoacfyfen, id) roar getoBt itjorben, 
 I had grown. I had been praised. 
 
 2. Fut. id) fretbe gett>ctd;fen fc in, id) rcetbe getoBt icovben f ein, 
 I shall have grown. I shall have been praised. 
 
 (6) 2B erb e tt is used in forming the future tenses ind the 
 conditionals f : thus, from loBen, to praise, we have 
 
 Futures. Conditionals. 
 
 1. id) it> cr be toBen, id) iuiirbe loBen, 
 
 I shall praise. I would praise. 
 
 2. id) to e r b c geloBt fyabm, id) TO ur be geloBt tyctBen; 
 
 I s/ia^ have praised. I should have praised. 
 
 § 71. Remarks on the use of tyaBett and feirt. 
 
 (1) As the Perfect and Pluperfect tenses of verbs must be 
 conjugated, sometimes with I) a B e n and sometimes with feirt, 
 it becomes important to know when to use the one and when 
 the other. The determination of this question depends chiefly 
 upon the signification of the main verb. The general rules 
 are these : 
 
 (2) 4?aBett is to De use( i m conjugating all active transitive 
 verbs, all reflective verbs, all impersonal verbs , all the auxiliaries 
 
 * It will be noticed here, that wherever, in the formation of these tenses, 
 any pan of f e i n occurs, it is Englished by the corresponding part of the verb 
 Ij a b e II : thus, id) b i n gewacfyfen, I have grown, &c. This grows out of the 
 necessity of suiting the translation to our language, which in these places re- 
 quires the verb have. 
 
 t It is, also, employed with the perfect participle of a principal verb, to form 
 the Passive voice ; (See §84). IS ote, also, above that iuert>e and roitvbe 
 are rendered by their equivalents {shall and should) in the conjugation o< 
 the English verb. 
 
REMARKS ON THE USE OF ^oBetl AND feltt. § 71 
 
 327 
 
 of the second class (viz. bftrfen, {fatten, niogen, trollcn, fotlcn, 
 muffcn and lajfen), and many intransitives. 
 
 (3) (2em is to be used in conjugating all intransitives, sig- 
 nifying a change of the condition of the subject ; as, gebctc/en, 
 to prosper j genefcn, to recover ; rcifen, to ripen ; fdjnu'nben, 
 to dwindle ; fterben, to die; all those indicating motion towards 
 or from a place ; eilen, to hasten • get)en, to go ; rotten, to ride ; 
 ftnfen, to sink ; and, also, all verbs in the passive voice. 
 
 (4) Some verbs take, in the formation of these tenser, 
 either fyafcen or fein, according as they are employed in one 
 sense or in another. This, however, will be best understood 
 by practice in reading and speaking. The following are ex- 
 amples : 
 
 (§r ift in feinem neuen 3Bagen 
 
 fortgefafyren. 
 Wcin 25ruber t;at fortgefafyren 
 
 beutfd) ivl tefen. 
 2)a3 Staffer if* gefroren. 
 ©en otmen Wlann tjat e3 in 
 
 bem fatten Sunnier gefroren. 
 JDie 5'^ranen finb iiBer bie 2Ban* 
 
 gen geronnen. 
 £>a3 ©efajj Ijat geronnen. 
 S)a3 @d)tff tjt auf einen fte!* 
 
 fen gefroren. 
 ©a0 33oIf tjat ben Jtontg bom 
 
 5'firone geftojjen. 
 $a§ ©djiff ift an$ Ufer ge* 
 
 trie o en. 
 £)er 33aum tjat nene Stoeige 
 
 getrtcucn 
 
 He has driven off in his new 
 
 carriage. 
 My brother has proceeded to 
 
 read German. 
 The water is (has) frozen. 
 It has chilled the poor man 
 
 in the cold room. 
 The tears have flowed over 
 
 the cheeks. 
 The vessel has leaked. 
 The ship has struck upon a 
 
 rock. 
 The people have thrust the 
 
 king from the throne. 
 The ship has been driven up- 
 on the shoie. 
 The tree has shot forth new 
 
 branches. 
 
328 
 
 PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES 
 
 § 72. PAKADIGMS OF TEE AUX 
 
 (1) S&ahen, 
 
 lh 
 
 j. 1 
 
 a 
 
 ; 
 
 X 
 
 (3 
 
 as 
 
 M 
 
 P 
 
 ' 
 
 fcj 
 
 la 
 
 rh 
 
 | ' 
 
 fe 
 
 ,; 
 
 
 
 'Jj 
 
 1 ;i 
 
 pi 
 
 i\ 
 
 P 
 
 > ■> 
 
 E 
 
 (3 
 
 d; 
 
 ( 1 
 
 g 
 
 '2 
 
 w 
 
 '3 
 
 sis 
 
 \' 
 
 p 
 
 ) •> 
 
 J 
 
 i ' 
 
 Ph 
 
 t'6 
 
 
 \ l 
 
 w 
 
 fa 
 
 pi 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 i ' ; 
 
 Kj 
 
 (3 
 
 
 ( ! 
 
 
 \°- 
 
 w 
 
 h 
 
 g 
 
 * 
 
 = 
 
 la 
 
 
 r 1 
 
 « 
 
 \' J 
 
 ■ 
 
 [a 
 
 ?! 
 
 !' 
 
 £ 
 
 U 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 ict habe, 
 bit baft, 
 er bat, 
 uur ijaben 
 tin* babet, 
 ft" I; a ben, 
 
 PRESENT ^ENSE 
 
 I hav<-. 
 
 thou hast, 
 he has. 
 we have, 
 you have, 
 they have. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) balte, I had. 
 
 bu batteft, thou hadst. 
 
 ft batte, 5ie had. 
 
 mix batten, we had. 
 
 ibr pallet, you had. 
 
 fie batten, they had. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) babe 
 Mt baft 
 ev l)at 
 mix babeu 
 ibr babet 
 fte babeu 
 
 \% 
 
 I have had. 
 thou hast had. 
 he has had. 
 we have had. 
 you have had. 
 tiiey have had. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte 1 
 Mt batteft | _- 
 er batte I •§ 
 mix batten f -g- 
 tbr battet | « 
 fte fatten J 
 
 I had had. 
 thou hadst had. 
 he had had. 
 we had had. 
 you had had. 
 they had had. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe 1 
 on nuvft | j 
 er tutrb \ j§ 
 tv>ir luevben fj* 
 tbr wevbet | 
 fte werben J 
 
 I shall have, 
 thou wilt have, 
 he will have, 
 we shall have, 
 you will have, 
 they will have. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) rcerbe 1 e 
 mi roivfi I £ 
 er nnrb I •£> 
 ruir nn-rben f £ 
 tbr roerbet | jg. 
 fte tverben J « 
 
 I shall 1 . 
 thou wilt I 12 
 he will I £ 
 we will 
 you will 
 they will. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) ^<xhz, 
 bu babefi, 
 er babe, 
 mix baben, 
 tbr babet, 
 fte fjaben, 
 
 I may have, 
 thou mayst have, 
 he may have, 
 we may have, 
 you may have, 
 they may have. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte, 
 bu batteft, 
 er batte, 
 mix fatten, 
 ibr battet, 
 fte fatten, 
 
 I might have, 
 thou mightst have, 
 he might have, 
 we might have, 
 you might have, 
 they might have. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) babe 
 x>u babeft 
 er babe 
 rotr baben 
 ibr babet 
 fte baben 
 
 I may have had, 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte 
 bu b-ittefl 
 er batte 
 mix batten 
 ibr battet 
 fte fatten 
 
 I might .-Ave had, 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (if) I shall have, 
 &c. 
 
 id) roevbe 1 
 
 bu tuevbeft j - 
 er iverbe 1 J> 
 uur nn-vben f"e 
 ibr nnrbet I w 
 fte nm-beu J 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 bu tuerbeft 
 er tuerbe 
 mix roerben 
 ibr roerbet 
 fte iverben 
 
 = (f) I shall nav» 
 -§ bad &c. 
 
OF THE FIRST CLASS. § 72. 
 
 329 
 
 LLIAEJES OF TIIE FIEST CLASS. 
 to have. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE 
 
 1 2°4 
 
 FIEST FUTURE. 
 
 tdt> ftiirbe 1 
 
 bu n?iirbffi 
 
 er n-iirbc 
 
 ttur uuivbett 
 
 tfcr luiirbet j *** 2 
 
 ik urftben J 2 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 tc& nmrbe 1 g > 
 
 bu roiirbefl | *§> j2 < 
 
 er j»arbe { M- -c* 
 
 i»tv roiivben is 3-, 
 tbr nnirbet 
 fie twin-ben 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 1. wanting. 
 
 2. bvibe bit, 
 have thou. 
 
 3. babe cr, 
 
 let him have. 
 
 1. bctben wiv, 
 let us have. 
 
 2. babet tt>r. 
 have ye or you. 
 
 3. bnben fie, 
 
 let them have. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 fyafcen, to have. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 gcbabt baben, 
 to have had 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 babenb, havinj 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 baben tuerben, 
 to be about to 
 have. 
 
 PERFECT, 
 
330 
 
 PARADIGMS OP THE AUXILIARIES § 72. 
 
 (2) (SetiT, 
 
 li 
 
 
 In (3 
 
 Si 
 
 INDICATJVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) bin, I am. 
 
 id) fet, I may be. 
 
 m: bitf, thou art. 
 
 bu fetefl, thou mayst be. 
 er fet, he may be. 
 
 ev ift, he is. 
 
 roiv ftub, we are. 
 
 roiv feiett, we may be. 
 
 if)v fetb, you are. 
 
 if)r feiet, you may be. 
 
 fie ftub/ they are. 
 
 ftc feien, they may be. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 tct> ruar, I was. 
 
 id) roarc, I might be. 
 
 mi roavft, thou wast. 
 
 bu roareft, thou mightst be. 
 
 er roar, he was. 
 
 er roiive, he might be. 
 
 bir roaren, we were. 
 
 roir roareu, we might be. 
 
 il)V roarer, you were. 
 
 it)r roarer, you might be. 
 
 fte roareu, they were. 
 
 ftc roiiven, they might be. 
 
 PERFECl TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) bin "| 1 have been. 
 
 id) fet 
 
 I may have been, 
 
 bu btji - thou hast been. 
 
 bu fetfi 
 
 « &c 
 
 er tft ) «~ he has been. 
 
 er fet 
 
 «~- 
 
 roiv ftub f 3 we have been. 
 
 roir fctcn 
 
 g 
 
 ibv feib { « you have been. 
 
 ibv feiet 
 
 « 
 
 fte ftub J they have been. 
 
 ftc feien j 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) roav 
 
 I had been. 
 
 id) roarc 
 
 I might have been 
 
 bu roavft 
 
 a thou hadst been. 
 
 bu roiiveft 
 
 g &c. 
 
 er roav 
 
 ^ he had been. 
 * 2 we had been. 
 
 ev roare 
 
 ^f 
 
 roir roaren 
 
 roir rociren 
 
 ibv roaret 
 
 « you had been. 
 
 i()v ronret 
 
 W 
 
 fte roaren 
 
 they had been. 
 
 ftc roaren \ 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TElfSE. 
 
 id) roerbe 1 I shall be. 
 bu rotvft thou wilt be. 
 
 id) roe vb c ") (if) I shall be, &c 
 bu roevbefl | 
 
 ev rotvb (.« he will be. 
 roir roerben f «E. we shall be. 
 
 er roevbc Is 
 roiv roevbeu [ 3- 
 
 tbr roevbet you will be. 
 fte roevbeu J they will be. 
 
 tbv roevbet | 
 
 ftc roevbeu J 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roevbe " 
 
 « I shall 1 . 
 
 id) roevbe 1 ~ (if) I should have 
 
 bu roivft 
 
 <£. thou wilt | § 
 
 bu roerbefi | '£. been, &c. 
 
 ev roivb 
 
 > e he will I.S 
 ~ we shall f <u 
 
 ev roevbe 1 « 
 roir roerben , <H. 
 
 roiv roerben 
 
 ibv roevbet 
 
 g you will | § 
 
 tbr roevbet | » 
 
 ftc roetben 
 
 Ss they will J ^ 
 
 fie roerben . 
 
 13, 
 
OF THE FIRST CLASS. $ 72. 
 
 331 
 
 to be. 
 
 CCXNTITIOXAL. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 tcp rvurtc 
 bu wiirbeji 
 cr nntrfre 
 nnr umrbeil 
 thr roitrbet 
 fie nnivbcn , 
 
 2* © -° 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 id) roiivbe 'l ~ £ 
 bu nnivbcfl j JL |S 
 tr idiItm I - 2 . 
 h?ir wurben f i* | g 
 il)r ttiirbet | s x^ 
 fie iwurbcn J ^ J 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 1. wanting. 
 
 2. Fes bu, 
 
 be thou. 
 
 3. Ui er, 
 
 let him be. 
 
 1. fcien ivir, 
 let us be. 
 
 2. feib ibr, 
 be ye. 
 
 3. fcifll fte, 
 
 let them be. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 feiu, to be. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 (jeroefett feiu, 
 to have been. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 feiu rcerben, 
 to be about to be 
 
 PARTICIPLE, 
 
 PE ESENT. 
 fcienb, being. 
 
 PERFECT, 
 
 fleiuefen. 
 
332 
 
 PARADIGMS OF THE AUXILIARIES § 72. 
 
 (3) 2$cr&cit, 
 
 " (3 
 
 £?3 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 icb tnerbe, 
 tut nmft, 
 er rotrb, 
 lu tv roerben, 
 tl)v roeibct, 
 fte tverben, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 I become, 
 thou becomest 
 he becomes, 
 we become, 
 you become, 
 they become. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 tcb nntrbe,* 
 Mt nmrbejt, 
 er vuurbe, 
 rotv wurben, 
 ityv ituubet, 
 fte tuurbeu, 
 
 I became, 
 thou becamest 
 he became, 
 we became, 
 you became, 
 they became 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 . 
 
 - 1 
 
 rh 
 
 i . 
 
 fc 
 
 ; a 
 
 
 
 v. 
 
 /a 
 
 pi 
 
 ; i 
 
 P 
 
 ' V 
 
 £ 
 
 (-3 
 
 ■ 
 
 ' 1 
 
 CD 
 
 K - 
 
 >J 
 
 
 
 <a 
 
 '3 
 
 P5 
 
 1 
 
 t> - 
 
 . V 
 
 Si 
 
 '3 
 
 
 1 
 
 p ' 
 
 
 & < 
 
 
 «° 
 
 3 
 
 ** 
 
 5 
 
 p < 
 
 V 
 
 ti I 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 VI 
 
 3 
 
 i! 
 
 1 
 9 
 
 si 
 
 '3 
 
 id) bin 
 bu btft 
 ev ift 
 tm'r ftnb 
 tbv feib 
 fte ftnb 
 
 I have become, 
 thou hast become, 
 he has become, 
 we have become, 
 you have become, 
 they have become. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) war 
 i>u rwtrft 
 er ttntr 
 nnr tvaren 
 ibr nntret 
 
 fte raaren 
 
 I had 1 
 thou hadst | 
 he had ! g 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) toerbe ^ 
 su nnrfl | g! 
 er nnrb 1 % 
 nave roerben \ « 
 ibr iverbet | 2 
 fte werben J 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) nmbe 1 g 
 bit tuirjr | £ 
 it nnrb i g 
 mir tuerben 
 ibr tvevbet 
 fte roetben 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) rnerbe, 
 bu n>erbeft, 
 er roerbe, 
 tt)tr roerben, 
 ibr roerber, 
 fte roerben, 
 
 I may become, 
 thou moyst become, 
 he may become, 
 we may bf come, 
 you may become, 
 they may become. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) nntrbe, 
 bu nnirbeft, 
 er roiivbe, 
 im'rnnirben, 
 ibr luiirbet, 
 fte roiirben, 
 
 I might become, 
 thou mightst become 
 he might become, 
 we might become, 
 you might become, 
 they might become. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) fet 
 bu feiff 
 er fei 
 roir fete* 
 ibr fetet 
 fte feten 
 
 S 
 
 I may have be- 
 come, &c. 
 
 1^1 might have be- 
 I 5 come, &.c. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) ware 
 bu rocirefi 
 er ware 
 roir tviiren \ g 
 ibr roaret 
 fte roaren 
 
 (if) I shall become, 
 &c. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) rnerbe 
 bu tuerbefl 
 er n>erbe 
 tuir tnerbeu f '"£■ 
 ibr roerbet | 2 
 fte roerben J 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roevbe ^) rf (if) I shal- hs?e 
 
 bu ruerbefl | £L 
 er vnerbe I g 
 tmr tuerben J -S 
 br n>erbet | f> 
 fte tverben j §, 
 
 becone, &c. 
 
 Ortearb, L.46 3. 
 
OF THE FIBST CLASS. § ^ 2 - 
 
 333 
 
 to become* 
 
 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 icb ttnirbe > 
 &u nnirbefi | ~ 
 er tntrbe ' % 
 mix touvben f «? 
 'bv Toiirbct | 2 
 fie toiirben . 
 
 S- 
 
 O B 
 
 S P 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 bu n>i'trbeft 
 er tufirbe 
 tow tofirfteh 
 
 tljr roiirbet 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 1. wanting. 
 
 2. xotxtt bit, 
 become thou. 
 
 3. toerbe er, kt 
 him become. 
 
 1. rocrbea row, 
 let us become. 
 
 2. roerbet tbr, 
 become ye. 
 
 3. toerbctt ftc, let 
 them become. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 roerben, to be- 
 cnae, 
 
 fie roiirben J 
 
 B-ll 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 gcroorbett fettt, 
 to have become. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 twerbeit roerben, 
 to be about to 
 become. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 rocrbenb, becom- 
 ing. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 geroorben, become 
 
334 
 
 SYNOPTICAL VIEW, (fee. $ 73. 
 
 § 73. SYNOPTICAL VIEW 
 
 OF 
 
 THE THREE TENSE AUXILIARIES 
 
 © e n, to be. 
 
 § a b e n, to have. 
 
 roerben.. to Lecome. 
 
 1 am, 
 
 id) bin 
 bu btfl 
 er til 
 ivtr ftnb 
 il)r fci'b 
 fie fit*. 
 
 / was, 
 
 id) roar 
 
 bu roarefl (or roarfl) 
 
 er roar 
 
 tvh roaren 
 
 t-br roaret (or roart) 
 
 fie roaren. 
 
 / have been, 
 id) bin ^ 
 bit btfl | 
 
 er tft 
 rotr ftitb ' 
 
 tbr fcib 
 fte ftnb 
 
 tb 
 
 b J 
 
 gerocfen. 
 
 1 had been, 
 
 id) roar 
 
 bit roareft 
 
 er roar ; fleaefcn 
 
 rotr roaren « 
 
 tbr ward 
 
 fte roaren . 
 
 [ shall be, 
 
 id) roerbe 
 bu wtrfl 
 er rotrt> 
 rotr roerben 
 tbr roerben 
 lie roerben 
 
 fete 
 
 INDICATIVE MCOD. 
 Peesent Tense. 
 
 I have, I become, 
 
 id) i)abt id) roerbe 
 
 bu bafl bu rotrfl 
 
 er bat er rotrb 
 
 rotr baben rotr roerben 
 
 tbr babet or f)alt tbr roerbet 
 
 fte l;aben. fte roerben. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 Tense. 
 
 gcljabt. 
 
 I had, 
 
 tci) batte 
 bu battefl 
 er t>atte 
 rotr batten 
 tbr battet 
 fte batten. 
 
 Perfect 
 
 / have had, 
 
 id) f>abe 
 t>n bafl 
 er baf 
 rotr baben 
 tbr babet 
 fte tyxben 
 
 Pltc^rfect Tense. 
 
 I had had, 
 
 id) batte ^ 
 bu battefl 
 
 tbr battel j 
 fte fyatttn J 
 
 First Future Tense, 
 
 / shall have, 
 tcfe werbe 
 bu rotrfl 
 er joiib 
 
 rotr roerben [ 
 tyx roerbet 
 fte roerben J 
 
 fcafcen. 
 
 / became. 
 
 id) rourbe 
 bu rourbefl 
 er rourbe 
 roir roitrben 
 tbr rourbet 
 fte rourben. 
 
 I have become. 
 
 id) bin 
 bu bijl 
 er ift 
 roir ftnb 
 tbr fetb 
 fte ftnb. 
 
 » getoorben <i 
 worben. 
 
 / had become. 
 
 id) roar 
 bu roareft 
 er roar 
 roir roaren 
 tbr roaret 
 fte waren 
 
 gcroorten oi 
 worsen. 
 
 I shall become. 
 
 ttb roerbe 
 bu rotrfl 
 er wtrb 
 roir roerben 
 tt)r roerbet 
 fU roerben. 
 
 we^t«« 
 
SYNOPTICAL VIEW, &C. § 73. 
 
 335 
 
 
 
 Second Future H ense. 
 
 
 
 
 / shall have bten, 
 
 1 shall have had. 
 
 I shall have become. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 ■ 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 
 tu omit 
 er rotrb 
 
 g ewe fen 
 
 bu roir ft 
 er rotrb 
 
 , SebaM 
 baben 
 
 bu roirjt 
 ex roirD 
 
 atworben 
 
 or r*'0Sben 
 
 fein. 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 fein. 
 
 roir roerben 
 
 wit roerben 
 
 ibv roertet 
 
 
 tbr roerbet 
 
 
 ibr roerbet 
 
 fie roerben 
 
 
 fie roerben 
 
 
 fie roerben 
 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE JVIOoa 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 
 i Tnay 6e, 
 
 / may have, 
 
 Imay become. 
 
 id) fet 
 
 id) l)abe 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 bit fetefi (or feift) 
 
 bu babefl 
 
 bit roerbeft 
 
 er fet 
 
 er babe 
 
 cr roerbe 
 
 roir fcieu (or fein) 
 
 roir baben 
 
 voir roerben 
 
 ibr fetet 
 
 ibr bit bet 
 
 tbr rucrbet 
 
 fie feictt (or fein.) 
 
 fie baben. 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 fie roerben. 
 
 I might he, 
 
 / might have, 
 
 I might become* 
 
 id) rodre 
 
 id? bdrte 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 
 bu roareft (o# warfi* 
 
 bu batrefi 
 
 bu roiirbeft 
 
 er ware 
 
 er bcitte 
 
 er roiirbe 
 
 roir todren 
 
 wit batten 
 
 roir roiivoen 
 
 ibr au'irer (or roari; 
 fie waxen. 
 
 ibr battet 
 
 ibr rourbet 
 
 fie fatten. 
 
 fte roiirben. 
 
 
 Perfect Tenso. 
 
 
 I may have been, 
 
 I may have had, 
 
 [may have become. 
 
 id) fei 
 
 
 id) babe 
 
 
 id) fet 
 
 
 bu feift 
 
 
 bu babefl 
 
 
 bu feift 
 
 
 er fet 
 toit feictt 
 
 (jeroefcn. 
 
 ev babe 
 rotr baben 
 
 gebabr. 
 
 er fei 
 roir fcien ' 
 
 geroorben, 
 
 tbr feiet 
 
 
 ibr babec 
 
 
 it>r feiet 
 
 or roorbcn* 
 
 fie feien 
 
 
 fie baben 
 
 
 fie feien 
 
 
 
 Pluperfect Tense. 
 
 
 7 mj^f Aa«e 6een, 
 
 1 might have had, 
 
 I might have become. 
 
 id) teare 
 
 
 id) bdfte 
 
 
 id) roare 
 
 
 bu root-eft 
 
 
 bu bdttefl 
 
 
 bu roareft 
 
 
 er ware 
 rutv roaren 
 
 fleroefen. 
 
 er tyatte 
 rotr batten i 
 
 gebabt 
 
 er ware 
 roir roaren 
 
 , geroorben, 
 ' (roorbtn.' 
 
 tbr roaret 
 
 ibr battet 
 
 ibr roaret 
 
 
 fte waxen J 
 
 fie fatten J 
 
 fie roaren 
 
 
 
 First Future Tense. 
 
 
 (Jfi I shall be, 
 
 (If) I shall have, 
 
 {If) I shall become. 
 
 id) roerte 
 
 
 icb roerbe 
 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 
 bu roevbeft 
 
 
 on roerbcft 
 
 
 bu roerbeft 
 
 
 er roerbe 
 wit roerben 
 
 • fein. 
 
 er roerbe 
 rotr roerben 
 
 . baben. 
 
 tr roerbe 
 roir roerben 
 
 werbea 
 
 tb* roeroet 
 
 
 tbr roerbet 
 
 
 il)t roerbet 
 
 
 fie roetben 
 
 » 
 
 fte teerben 
 
 
 
 fte roerben. 
 
 i 
 
 
336 
 
 SYNOPTICAL VIEW, &C. § Y3. 
 
 Second Future Tense. 
 
 (//) / shall have been, 
 
 id) werbe 1 
 
 bu werbeft I 
 
 tx werbe I gewefen 
 
 totv werben f fein. 
 
 ibr weri>et I 
 
 fte werben J 
 
 (If) I shall have had, 
 
 id) werfre 1 
 
 bu ruevbefl | 
 
 ev werbe gebabt 
 
 tvtr werben > baben. 
 
 il)v werbet 
 
 fte werben J 
 
 (If) I shall nave oa 
 
 id) werbe \ 
 
 bu werbejl | 
 
 er werbe | geworb, 
 
 ttJtv werben ^(tworfcett 
 
 the wert>et | lev*. 
 
 fte werben J 
 
 / should be, 
 
 id) wiirbe 
 bu witrbefi 
 tx wiube 
 wir wiirben 
 ibr wiirbet 
 fte wiirben 
 
 fein. 
 
 J should have been, 
 
 id) wiirbe ") 
 
 bu wiivbefl 
 
 er wiirbe I *,«,.r- M 
 
 wir wiirben f fi e M en 
 
 tbr wiirbet '""• 
 
 fte wiirben J 
 
 f)ab en. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 First Conditional 
 I should have, 
 id) wiirbe 
 bu wiivbeft 
 er wiirbe 
 wir wiirben 
 tbr wiirbet 
 fte wiirben 
 
 Second Conditional. 
 / should have had, 
 id) roiirbc ") 
 
 bu wiirbeft f 
 er wiirbe i 
 wir wtirben f 
 tbr wiirbet J 
 fte wiirben J 
 
 / should become. 
 id) wiirbe 
 bu wiirbeft 
 er wiirbe 
 wir wiirben 
 ibr wiirbet 
 fte wiirben . 
 
 wertt*. 
 
 gefjabt f)a= 
 ben. 
 
 / should have become* 
 
 id) wiirbe 
 
 bu wiirbeft 
 
 er wurbe I aeworbtt 
 
 wir wtirben [ (worbe* 
 
 ibr wiirbet feitt. 
 
 fte wiirben 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 
 Be thou, 
 
 Have thou, 
 
 Become thou. 
 
 wanting, 
 
 wanting, 
 
 wanting. 
 
 fet bu 
 
 fei, er, fte or e8 
 feien wir 
 fetb il)v 
 feien jle. 
 
 fjabe bu 
 
 tiabe er, fte or e5 
 baben wir 
 babet ibr 
 fcaben fte. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD 
 Present Tense. 
 
 werbe bu 
 
 werbe er, fte or e* 
 werben wir 
 werbet ibr 
 Werben fte 
 
 to be, 
 
 to have, 
 
 to become. 
 
 feitt. 
 
 tyaben. 
 
 Perfect Tense. 
 
 werben. 
 
 to have been, 
 
 to have had, 
 
 to have become. 
 
 flewefen fein. 
 
 gebabt \)aUn. 
 
 Future Tense. 
 
 (jeworben fein. 
 
 10 be about to be, 
 
 to be about to have, 
 
 to be about to beewsu 
 
 fein werben. 
 
 baben werben. 
 
 werben werbett. 
 
AUXILIARIES OF THE SECOND CLASS. § 74. 33t 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 having, 
 
 jjabeub. 
 
 becoming, 
 trterbenb. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 had, 
 
 become, 
 
 ge&a&t. 
 
 gmorben. 
 
 feuub. 
 
 been, 
 
 gerocfett. 
 
 § 74. Auxiliaries of the second class. 
 
 (1) The second Class of auxiliaries embraces the following : 
 
 3d) mag, I am allowed ; {may ;) 3d) barf, I am permitted ; I dara. 
 
 3* will, I will ; (purpose ;) 3d) nutfj, I am obliged ; (must.) 
 
 3d) fell, I am obliged ; {shall ;) 3d) laffe, I let. 
 3d) toxin, I am able ; {can ;) 
 
 (2) These verbs are, for the most part, very irregular in conjuga- 
 tion, and serve simply the purpose of modifying with the ideas of 
 liberty, possibility, or necessity, other verbs ; which latter are in thai 
 case required to be in the infinitive mood ; thus er mag ladien, he 
 may (has permission to) laugh ; id) fann fdiretben, I can (am able to) 
 write ; where ladien and fdmnben are both in the infinitive, governed 
 respectively by m a g and faun. 
 
 (3) In the perfect and pluperfect tenses, however, the past par 
 ticiple of these verbs is used only, when the principal verb is not ex 
 oressed. Its place is supplied, in such cases, by the infinitive, the 
 translation of course being the same in either case, as : 
 
 3d) l;abe if>n fcfjen fonnen (instead of gelonnt) ; 
 
 I have been able to see him. 
 (£x I;at tpavteu muftVn (instead of gemuf t) ; 
 
 he was obliged to wait. 
 Sftan fjatte uber Hjn tadicn mogeu (instead of gemod)t) ; 
 
 one might have laughed at him. 
 ©r f)o,t bent 93cfe'l)te nidit gefycrdmt frcllen (instead of getoollt) ; 
 
 he has not been willing to obey the command. 
 3d) fyabe fein (Seljeimnijj tmjfen biirfen (instead of gebutft) ; 
 
 I have been allowed to know his secret. 
 @ie fyattt e$ tfyun foEett (instead of gejottt) ; 
 
 she ought to have done it. 
 
838 CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. $ 75. 
 
 <&k fyuben tyn getjcn Ictfien (instead of gctaffen) ; 
 they have suffered him to go- 
 
 For a full display of the forms of these verbs* aiid for fir the* 
 remarks on their uses, see the Section on the Mixed Conjugation 
 S83. 
 
 § 75. Conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 (1) There are two conjugations of verbs : the Old and the New, 
 The difference between them lies mainly in the mode of forming the 
 Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Participle. 
 
 (2) The verbs of the Old form are commonly denominated "Ir- 
 regular* Verbs." But, as nearly all the primitive verbs in the lan- 
 guage are conjugated in this way, and few, except the derivative 
 verbs (now the larger class), ever assume the other form, it is the 
 custom of the best German grammarians to adopt the classification 
 which we have given. This will occasion no confusion or incon- 
 venience to those who prefer the common classification : since it is 
 only necessary to remember that the things are the same, though the 
 names have been changed. 
 
 (3) In order to afford the ready means of comparing the tcrmu 
 national differences between the Old and the New forms of conjuga- 
 tion, we subjoin the following tabular view of the simple lenses ard 
 participles, in which alone differences of this kind can exist. 
 
 (4) In the compound tenses, the auxiliary alone being subjected 
 to terminational variation, the mode of inflecting these tenses be- 
 comes of course perfectly uniform in all classes of verbs. Hence to 
 secure a complete acquaintance with the forms of the compound 
 tenses, little more is necessary than a bare inspection of the para, 
 digms. 
 
 * Except Iflffcn {to let) which is not there, because it does not belong to the 
 Mixed conjugation. This verb is used either in permitting or commanding : 
 as, id) tyabe il)ti gefyen laffert, I have allowed him to go; id) babe thit font men 
 laffni, I have ordered him to come, which two meanings are near akin. IVhen 
 used with a reciprocal pronoun, it has its equivalent in such phrases as, is to, 
 ought to, may ; as, bag lajjt ftcfo nid)t tbuti that is not to be done; literally, doe$ 
 not allow itself to be done. The i lfinitive active ifter laffeu, must often bd 
 translated passively. 
 
TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE TENSES. $ 76. 
 
 339 
 
 $ 76. TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 Old Conjugation. New Conjugation. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUC J UN C. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 oS C 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 H Z " 
 
 z 2 
 
 
 Z 2 
 
 z 2 
 
 £ 2 S 
 
 o n 
 
 tt 
 
 O C 
 
 o a 
 
 <a ? h 
 
 ? M 
 
 4 
 
 ? & 
 
 ? & 
 
 • .• H 
 
 U 
 
 
 Ed 
 
 Ed 
 
 « r" m on 
 
 H 00 OL 
 
 a 
 
 H oo oo 
 
 H en oo 
 
 3 O Z OS 
 
 O Z OS 
 
 £ 
 
 O Z « 
 
 O Z BJ 
 
 a O H a 
 
 O W M 
 
 a 
 
 OH U 
 
 o Ed w 
 
 
 <c - t- - 
 
 as h c 
 
 z 
 
 oi H - 
 
 « H & 
 
 - 
 
 fjCl - e 
 
 2)2 ~ £ e ?'? 
 
 — t 
 
 (1 
 
 — e 
 
 — e 
 
 ~ fc, «ft 
 
 )? 
 
 - t - eft, ft 
 
 - £ e|! 
 
 s 
 
 ■ ( 3 — s (J,t 
 
 — .if c 
 
 (3 
 
 — .£; et, t 
 
 — ? e 
 
 *■ 
 
 i I 
 
 
 8 
 
 £ 
 
 B 
 
 =5(1 — § en, n — § en 
 
 (1 
 
 — § en, n 
 
 — § « 
 
 U 
 
 - < 2 *- s et, t \ — s et 
 
 5 a 
 
 - * et, t 
 
 - 8 ct 
 
 - 
 
 £ ( 3 — en, n 
 
 — en 
 
 (3 
 
 — en,n 
 
 — en 
 
 * r - < i — 
 
 — e 
 
 (1 
 
 — t or et -f e 
 
 — t or et 4- e 
 
 a 
 
 B 
 
 m - & *« 
 
 x ( 3 — .s — 
 
 -it 
 
 ) 2 
 
 — t or et 4- e f* 
 
 — t or et 4- eft 
 
 (3 
 
 — t or et + « 
 
 — t or et + e 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «2(1— 1 en 
 
 B 
 
 — § cn 
 
 (1 
 
 — t or et -)- en 
 
 — t or et 4- en 
 
 — t or et -j- ct 
 
 
 a) 2 _ § et 
 
 - 8 et 
 
 ] 2 
 
 — t or et 4- et 
 
 . t ( 3 — en 
 
 — en 
 
 (3 
 
 — t or et -J- en 
 
 — t or en 4- ea 
 
 
 IMPERATITE. 
 
 IN FIN IT. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 oo c 
 
 
 go 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 P4 
 
 -; z 
 
 
 Ed z _ 
 
 
 a 
 
 z S 
 
 
 3 O Q 
 
 
 a. 
 
 o o 
 
 
 .3 ? K 
 
 B 
 
 4 
 
 ? 2 
 
 o 
 
 n t- k en 
 
 h 2 
 
 a 
 
 Ed 
 H co go 
 
 H S 
 
 S o z s: 
 
 O Q 
 
 a 
 
 O Z pj 
 
 c a 
 
 a c a 
 
 C Z 
 
 a 
 
 O td H 
 
 o z 
 
 
 z es H s. 
 
 « Ed 
 
 z 
 
 a! H £ 
 
 t6 H 
 
 . 
 
 ' - ( t — — 
 
 
 (1 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 ) n 
 
 
 il 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 5)2 -- ^ e 
 
 
 $ e 
 
 
 B 
 
 * (3 — s e 
 
 
 — .« e 
 
 
 "H 
 
 . . „ « 
 
 — en 
 
 
 8 
 
 — « 
 
 V 
 
 - v 1 — g en 
 
 3 < 2 — s et, t 
 ** ( 3 — en 
 
 
 (1 
 
 — S en 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 Si 
 
 - s et, t 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 (3 
 
 — en 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present, i Perfect. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 — enfc 
 
 ee— en 
 
 
 — enb 
 
 fie— ct or t 
 
 Rwwivk. The flign + in the table abore is used as in Arithmetic, L e. to indicate 
 lat the parts et ',- t are to be united ; as, tte. 
 
340 verbs of the old conjugation. $ *l*l. 
 
 Observations on the preceling table. 
 
 (1) Observe, in the table above, that the terminations in all pla. 
 ces, except the Imperfect of the New form, are to be added directly 
 to the root. In the place excepted {Imperfect of the New form), there 
 comes between the root and the personal ending, a sort of tense-sign 
 (et 01 t), which is not necessary to verbs of the Old form : because 
 in them the Imperfect is made by means of a change in the radical 
 vowel. 
 
 (2) It may,- also, be noticed that a characteristic difference in 
 form, between the Indicative and the Subjunctive (3d person sing ) 
 is that the former ends in et or t, the latter always in c ; and that 
 the personal ending in the first and third person sing, of the Imper- 
 fect of the Old form, is wholly omitted. 
 
 (3) It may further be observed, that the e in the terminations 
 eft and et, of the Indicative, is retained or omitted just according to 
 what is demanded by euphony. In the Subjunctive, for the most 
 part, the full termination is preserved. 
 
 (4) For the same reason, also, that is, for the sake of euphony, 
 when the root of a verb ends in el or er, the vowel e of any termi- 
 mation beginning with that letter, is commonly omitted ; as, r/am* 
 merit (not Ijdmmer e n), to hammer ; fcimmeln (not fammel e n), to col- 
 lect. Sometimes, however, the e of the root is rejected : as, id) 
 fammte (not (amm e le), I collect. 
 
 § 77. Verbs op the Old Conjugation 
 
 {commonly called irregular verbs). 
 
 (1) In the Old Conjugation, the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect 
 Participle are distinguished from the Present, chiefly by a change of 
 the radical vowels. Thus, in some verbs, a different radical vowel 
 is found in each of these three parts : 
 
 Present. Imperfect. Perfect Participle. 
 
 23ttten, beg. S3at, * begged. ©ekten, begged. 
 
 ■Oetfen, help. £alf, helped. ©eijjolfert, helped, 
 
 ©tmten, reflect. @ann, reflected. ©efounen, reflected. 
 
 £rinfen, drink. %x&\\i, drank. ©etrunfen, drunk. 
 
 * When in the course of the changes noted in the text above, a long vowel 
 or diphthong becomes short, the final consonant of the root is doubled, as : 
 SRetten, to ride. diitt, rode. ©euttett, ridden. 
 
 Cetben, to suffer. Sttt, suffered. ©elitten, suffered. 
 
 In the case of Sctben, note also, that t> is changed into it* cognate t. 
 
TKRBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. § 77 
 
 341 
 
 (2) In soma the vowel or diphthong in the Imperfect and the 
 Participle, is the same, but is different from that in the present : as, 
 
 Present. 
 
 ©timmcn, glimmer. 
 &e&en, lift. 
 ■ftlimmen, climb, 
 jluren (fufn'cn), choose. 
 fceiben, suffer, 
 ©augen, suck. 
 @d)teben, shove. 
 SdUeuten, sneak, 
 ©dmauben, snort, 
 ©cnrciben, write. 
 ©tiebeit, scatter. 
 Xreiben, drive. 
 Xxuapu, betray. 
 2Beben, weave. 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 ©(omm, glimmered. 
 £eb, lifted. 
 Jtlomm, climbed. 
 Rox, chose. 
 gitt,* suffered, 
 ©og, sucked. 
 ©dieb, shoved. 
 ©dilid), sneaked. 
 ©d)ncb, snorted. 
 <&foxkh, wrote. 
 ©tob, scattered. 
 Xtieb, drove. 
 £rog, betrayed. 
 2Bob, wove. 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 ©eglcmmen, glimmered. 
 ©djoben, lifted, 
 ©cflommen, climbed, 
 ©efcren, chosen, 
 ©etitten, suffered, 
 ©efogen, sucked. 
 @efd)cben, shoved. 
 ©efdilidien, sneaked, 
 ©efdni^ben, snorted. 
 ©efdn'ieo.n, written, 
 ©ejteben, scattered, 
 ©etvteben, driven. 
 ©etregen, betrayed. 
 ©ewoben, woven. 
 
 (3) In others, the vowel or diphthong of the Present is changed 
 in the Imperfect, but resumed in the participle : as, 
 
 Present. 
 
 ©lafett, blow, (sound) 
 gotten, fall. 
 Sangen, catch, 
 ©ebcn, give. 
 £>angen, hang, 
 tfommen, come. 
 8aufen, run. 
 ©(baffen, create, 
 ©djlogea, beat. 
 ©efyen, see. 
 Steven, pusn. 
 JEreten, tread. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ©He*, blew, 
 giet, fell. 
 Sing, caught. 
 ©ab, gave. 
 £ing, hung, 
 jtenn, came. 
 2icf, run. 
 ©dmf, created. 
 ©d)lug, beat. 
 ©a(), saw. 
 ©tiejj, pushed. 
 %xai, trod. 
 
 Perfect Participle. 
 
 ©ebtcifeit, blown, 
 ©efattcn, fallen, 
 ©efangen, caught, 
 ©egeben, given, 
 ©efangen, hung, 
 ©efommen, come, 
 ©elaufen, run. 
 ©efdiaffen, created. 
 ®efd)lagen, beaten. 
 ©efefyen, seen, 
 ©efkpen, pushed, 
 ©etreten, trodden. 
 
 When, on the other hand, a short vowel is ihua made long, the second ol 
 two radical consonants is ommitted : as, 
 ©itteu, to beg ; 33at, begged ; 
 
 ftommen, to come ; itam, came : 
 
 ©ebetett, begged. 
 ©efommen, come 
 
 * See th ; Note above 
 
342 VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION. $ 77. 
 
 (4) Besides the vowel changes indicated above, verbs of the an. 
 eient (conjugation have the following characteristics: 
 
 a. The Perfei t part eiple ends in e n or n, and is thereby dis« 
 tinguished from that of the New Form, which terminates in e t, oi 
 t, thus : 
 
 Old Form. New Form. 
 
 ©efyotf en, helped; from £elfett. ©debet (gelobt), praised; from 
 
 Scben. 
 ©efali e n, fallen ; from fatten, ©elieb e t (geliebt), loved ; from 
 
 Siebcn. 
 ©etrag e n, borne ; from Xragen. ©elab e t (gelabt), quickened ; from 
 
 %aben. 
 ©cboten, bid^n; from 23ieten. ©ctaufd) e t (getaufd)f), exchanged; 
 
 from £aufd)cu. 
 
 b. Those having a in the first person singular of the Present In- 
 dicative, assume the Umlaut in the second and third persons ; thus, 
 
 Indicative. Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 id) fcutge, I catch, id) fd)lctge, I strike, 
 
 bu f d n g fi, thou catchest, bu f d) I a g ft, thou strikest. 
 
 cr fdngt, he catches, er fditdgt, he strikes, 
 
 hur femgen, we catch, ir»ir fdrtagcit, we strike. 
 
 \i)t fcutgt, you catch, tf;t fdilagt, you strike, 
 
 fie fattgen, they catch, jie fd)lagen, they strike. 
 
 c. Those having e (long) in theirs/ person singular of the Pre- 
 sent Indicative, take, in the second and third persons, ie ; those, in like 
 manner, having e (short,) take in the same places, the vowel i ; and 
 in both instances, the Imperative {second person singular) adopts 
 the vowel-form of the second person of the Indicative, thus : 
 
 Indicative. Imperative. 
 
 Present. 
 id) tefe, I read, wanting, 
 
 bu ti e f e ft, thou readst, It e $ bu (for tiefe).* 
 
 er tie fit, he reads, tefe ev, let him read. * 
 
 * The verbs that thus adopt the vowel-form of the 2. pers. of the Indie, losa 
 also the characteristic e final: giving, as above, liefi, for liefe ; btlf for f)tlfe» Sus, 
 It should be noted, further, that the unaccented e final, is, in other instances, 
 also sometimes omitted. 
 

 verbs of the old conjugation. § 77. 
 
 Indicative. Imperative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 343 
 
 toirlcfeit, we read, 
 ll;r lefct, you read, 
 (ie lefen, they read. 
 
 Icb fjclfe, I help, 
 bu \) i I f ft, thou helpest, 
 cr I; \ i f t, he helps, 
 frit Ijelfen, we help, 
 ifjr fyclfct, you help, 
 fie Ijelfen, they help. 
 
 Icfen iviv, let us read. 
 Icfet i()V, read ye or you. 
 Ic fen jic, let them read. 
 
 wanting, 
 X) 1 1 f bu (for IjtlfO,* help tnou. 
 fyelfe er, let him help, 
 fyclfmt hrir, let us help. 
 Ijelfet il)r, help ye or you. 
 I;cifen fie, let them help. 
 
 d. The final e, of the first and third persons singular of the Ira- 
 perfect Indicative, is always omitted, and in this tense the radical 
 vowel, if it be capable of it assumes the Umlaut in the Subjunctive 
 thus : 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 fcri fpradv (for fpradie,) I spoke, id) fptddie, I might speak 
 
 bu fptad)ji, thou didst speak, 
 
 cr fpvadi, (for fpvadu\) he spoke, 
 
 rrir fpracfoen, we spoke, 
 
 U)v fprachct, you spoke, 
 
 fxc fpvadum, they spoke, 
 
 tu fprddieft, thou mightst speak, 
 cv fprddie, he might speak. 
 nnr fprad)cn, we might speak. 
 if)v fpvdd)et, you might speak, 
 fte fprdd)cn, they might speak. 
 
 id) fd^lug, I struck, 
 
 bu fdihujfr, thou didst strike, 
 
 cr fcbluo,, he struck, 
 
 feur fcblugen, we struck, 
 
 if)t fdtfuget, you struck, 
 
 fie fd)Iugen, they struck, 
 
 id) fduiuje, I might strike, 
 bu fdifttgeji, thou mightst strike, 
 cv fdjlugc, he might strike, 
 nnr fduugeit, we might strike 
 ifjr fdhtu^et, you might strike. 
 fie fd)liiijen, they might strike. 
 
 * See Note page 342. 
 
344 
 
 PARADIGM OF A VERB § 78. 
 
 § 78. PAEADIGM OF A 
 
 £ * 
 
 ill 
 
 iji 
 
 M ( 3 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 tcfc fit fa 3 e, 
 pu fctoliigft 
 ec fc^lagt, 
 
 rote i.'Uhigeu, 
 tt)v fdrtaget, 
 fte fdjlagen, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 I strike, 
 thou strikest. 
 lie strikes, 
 we strike, 
 you strike, 
 they strike. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 tit frtlng. 
 in fcfctugft, 
 
 it fit in si. 
 
 roir fitlugctt, 
 il)c frbluget, 
 
 fte fd; luge u, 
 
 I struck. 
 
 thou didst strike, 
 he struck. 
 we struck, 
 you struck, 
 they struck. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) fjabe "} 
 
 pu feafi 
 
 ec l)at 
 
 rote baben | >g 
 
 the habit 
 
 fie babon J 
 
 ire 
 
 I have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 they have 
 
 r 5 
 
 id) batte 
 Mt f)atteft 
 ec tjiitte 
 rote batten 
 On* battet 
 fie fatten 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 1 
 
 >f 
 
 I had 1 
 thou hadst | . 
 he had '. "o 
 we had f S 
 you had m 
 they had J 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 I! 
 
 tit roeebe ") 
 u rotcjt 
 cr virfc 
 
 rote roerben f ~ 
 il.)r roerbet | £- 
 fte roeebett J 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 ici> roeebe 1 £ 
 bit rotrfi I *? 
 ee roirb I £, 
 roit roeebett \ ,«< 
 the roevbet | e_ 
 fte roeebett J g. 
 
 I shall ^| ^ 
 thou wilt | 1| 
 he will [ £ 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 d) fdjfage, 
 bu fd)iage|t, 
 ee fit I age, 
 roic fitlagett, 
 the fit lager, 
 fte fcfclagen, 
 
 I may strike, 
 thou mayst strike 
 he may strike, 
 we may strike, 
 you may strike, 
 they may strike. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 itf) fd)(itge, 
 bu fd)lngeft, 
 ce fitliige, 
 rote fcbliigett, 
 tl)c fcbliiget, 
 fte fd; I it gen, 
 
 I might strike, 
 thou mightst strike, 
 he might strike. 
 we might strike, 
 you might strike, 
 they might strike. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 td) fmN: 
 bu (jabeft 
 ee t)abe 
 rote baben 
 the f)aber 
 fte baben 
 
 *) . I may have struck, 
 
 m 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I might have 
 struck, dec. 
 
 i^ fcatte 1 „ 
 bu l)atteft I g 
 ec tjattt I g» 
 rote fatten | ^ 
 ibc feattet ^r 
 fte fatten J ** 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roeebe 1 
 bu roeibefl | s 
 ec roeebe l « 
 rote roerben ; -^ 
 it)e rorebet j 5. 
 He roeebett J 
 
 (if) I shad strike, 
 &c. 
 
 11 
 
 (if) I shall have 
 struck, &c. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 td) roeebe 
 pu rocebeft 
 ee roeebe 
 rote roeebett (^J> 
 ibe tuevbet J re 
 fte roeeben J £> 
 
Of THE OLD FORM. § 78. 
 
 VERB OF THE OLD FOKM. 
 Co strike. 
 
 345 
 
 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 id) nntrbe "* 
 tu wiirbeft 
 er nnirbe 
 rmr nniiben 
 ii>x ruiirt-ef 
 fie roiirben „ 
 
 Us 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 id) tuiivbe ]a g ,, 
 
 be roiirbefl 
 
 er roiirbe 
 
 nm roiivben f ~ 
 
 ft)r roiirbft I | ,| 
 
 % roiirben 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 1. wanting. 
 
 2. fdjhige bu, 
 strike thou. 
 
 3. fcfehige cr, 
 
 let him strike. 
 
 1. fcblageu voir, 
 let us strike. 
 
 2. fcblagct iljr, 
 strike ye. 
 
 3. fd)lngeu fie, 
 let them strike, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE, 
 
 fdjlagen, to strike 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 gefdjfagen r)aben, 
 to have struck. 
 
 fc&Iageub, 
 striking. 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 gefcrjhtgen 
 struck. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 fdjlagen roerben, 
 to be about to 
 strike. 
 
 15* 
 
346 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS $ 78. 
 
 (1) ALPHABETICAL LIST OF 
 
 (commonly called 
 Note that in the following list many compound forms are not set down. 
 
 INIINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 IMP. INDIC. 
 
 53 a dfen a), .obake, 
 
 tcb bade, bu bfitf jl, er bacft, 
 
 id) but 
 
 93ebtng?n 6), to bargain, 
 
 icb bebinge, jc. 
 
 id) bebnng 
 
 83ebuifen, to need, 
 
 tcb bebarf, bu bebarffl, er bebarf ; 
 roir bebiirfeu, jc. 
 
 id) bebuiftf 
 
 Sefehlen, to command, 
 
 id) befeble, bu beftefjlft, er beftebjt. 
 
 id) befafjl 
 
 ©ejkijjen (ftd)) c), to apply 
 
 icb beflcijje, jc. 
 
 id] beflijj 
 
 one's self. 
 
 
 
 33egmneu </), to begin, 
 
 icb beginne, jc. 
 
 id) begann 
 
 23'tjjnt, to bite, 
 
 tcb beige, bu bcijjeft, er betfit, 
 
 id) btp 
 
 ©eflcmmett e), to pinch, press 
 
 id; beflcmme, «. 
 
 id) beflemmre 
 
 'by anxiety), 
 
 
 
 33ergen. to conceal, 
 
 icb berge, bu btrgfter birgt 
 icb berjte, jc. 
 
 icb barg 
 
 S3fvfteu, to burst, 
 
 icb bovft or barfl 
 
 SBeftiuien (ftd)), to think of, 
 
 id) bcftune, jc. 
 
 id) befatm 
 
 SBeft^en, to possess, 
 
 id) beftfce, jc. 
 
 id> befaf? 
 
 SBetrugell, to deceive, 
 
 icb betriige, jc. 
 
 icb betrog 
 
 33eU)egeu J), to induce, move, 
 
 tcb benxge, jc. 
 
 id) beroog 
 
 ^Biegeu, to bend, 
 
 id) btege, jc. 
 
 id; bog 
 
 SBteten g), to offer, to bid, 
 
 tcb biefe, jc. 
 
 id) hot 
 
 SBtltbeit, to bind, 
 
 tcb binbc, jc. 
 
 icb banb 
 
 93itteil, to entreat, to beg, 
 
 id) bitte, jc. 
 
 id) bat 
 
 S5lafeu, to blow, 
 
 id) blafe, bu blafeft, cr blaft 
 
 id) bf ted 
 
 SBUiben, to remain, 
 
 id) bleibe, jc. 
 
 id> blieb 
 
 $8letd)en A), to fade, 
 
 id) bleube, jc. 
 
 jd) blid) 
 tcb bviet 
 
 $8 r a ten, to roast, 
 
 id) brate, bu bratefi or bratft, er 
 
 
 bratet or brat 
 
 
 33rcd)en, to break, 
 
 icb bvecbe, bu brtcbfi, er bricbt 
 
 icb brad) 
 
 ©rnitmi i), to burn, 
 
 icb brenne, jc. 
 
 id) brannte 
 
 83l"iinjen, to bring, 
 
 id) bringe, jc. 
 
 id; bvad)te 
 
 ffcenf ctt, to think, 
 
 tcb benfe, jc. 
 
 id) bacbte 
 
 2) in gen k), to bargain 
 
 id) binge, jc. 
 
 id) bung 
 tcb brafcb os 
 
 JiDrefcbeu, to thresh, 
 
 id; brefcbe, bu briftyefi, er brtfcbt 
 
 
 
 brofcb 
 
 S)riiigen /), to press, to urge, 
 
 id) bvinge, jc. 
 
 id> bvaitg 
 
 'Ditvfeit, to be able, 
 
 icb barf, t>vi barffl, erbarf; tr-iv 
 bitrfeu, jc. 
 
 id) buvfte 
 
 (Vmpfangen, to receive, 
 
 id) empfaiige, bu empfdngft, er 
 
 empfangt 
 icb empfeble, bu empfteijlfr, cr 
 
 empfieblt 
 id) empftube, jc. 
 
 id; empftng 
 
 <Smpfer)len/ to re commend, 
 
 id) emvfabl 
 
 Cfnuiftnben, to feel, 
 
 tcb empfatA 
 
 (Sntrinnen, to escape, 
 
 id) entrinne, jc. 
 
 id) enrraim 
 
 (Sntfdilafett, to fell asleep, 
 
 id; entfcbjafe, it 
 
 icb entfcblief 
 
OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 847 
 
 VERBS OF TIIE OLD FOKM 
 
 irregular verbs). 
 
 In such case, me student has only to look for the verb 31 its simple form. 
 
 IMP. SUB J. 
 
 IMPERATIVE.. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 id) (mfe 
 
 bafit 
 
 gcbaifen. 
 
 a) Regular when active ; as. CC 
 hadt( 5l3vo&; bag 58rob bitf. 
 
 id) bcbiii'ije 
 
 bebtnge 
 
 bebuugeu. 
 
 b) Regular when it means, to 
 
 id) bebiufte 
 
 
 bebinft. 
 
 ailil a condition, to modify. 
 5i3cbttli)t, conditional, is re- 
 
 t$ bcfoble 
 
 bcfiebl 
 
 Befoblcn. 
 
 gular. 
 
 id) befliffe 
 
 beflct0 
 
 btfhffett. 
 
 c) ^eflettjujen (neb), to apply 
 one's self, is regular. 
 
 tcb begaune 
 
 begtmie 
 
 beg on 11 en. 
 
 d) In the Imperf. subj. bcgOUUC 
 
 tefc bt)|e 
 
 betjl or beifie 
 
 gebiffett. 
 
 is also used. 
 
 tcb beflcmmcte 
 
 beflemme 
 
 bcfloinmcn or 
 
 e) SBefkmmt is not frequently 
 
 
 
 beflemmt. 
 
 used, and is employed, only 
 
 tcb barge 
 
 birg 
 
 gebergcit. 
 gebinjtett. 
 
 in the sense of compressed 
 
 id) bavfte 
 
 bei|teorbtrfi 
 
 
 icft befonne 
 
 beftnne 
 
 be fen 11 en. 
 
 
 tct) befafce 
 
 beftfce 
 
 befeffctt. 
 
 
 tcb bctroge 
 
 betriige 
 
 betvegen. 
 
 
 tcb berooge 
 
 beroege 
 
 betvogeit. 
 
 /) Irregular when it means, to 
 
 i4> boge 
 
 biege 
 
 gebegen. 
 
 induce; regular when it means, 
 to move a body or all'ect the 
 
 sensibilities. 
 
 tcb bote 
 
 biete 
 
 geboten. 
 
 g) SBeutfi and belli, in the 
 
 id) banbe 
 
 btnbe 
 
 gcbimben. 
 
 present, are poetical. 
 
 tcb bote 
 
 bitte 
 
 gebctcn. 
 
 
 tcb bliefe 
 
 blafe 
 
 geblafcu. 
 
 
 tcb bliebe 
 
 bletbe or bfeifc 
 
 gcbliebeit. 
 
 
 tcb bliebe 
 
 bletc^e 
 
 gebltcbeu. 
 
 h) -Slet'cbeit, to bleach in the 
 
 tcb bviete 
 
 brate 
 
 gebraten. 
 
 sun, active, is regular. 
 
 id> brcirbc 
 
 bvt.t 
 
 gebrocben. 
 
 
 tcb breimtte 
 
 bmme 
 
 gebraitnt. 
 
 t) Often reaular when acti\-e: 
 
 icb breiebje 
 
 bruige 
 
 gcbradjt. 
 
 3d) b re tin' e ^olj, well e3 
 beffer b reunite al8 Xotf. 
 
 tcb bacbte 
 
 ben re 
 
 gebad)t. 
 
 *■ 
 
 tcb ciiuflc 
 
 btuge 
 
 gebuugeu. 
 
 k) Single is sometimes used in 
 
 tcb M-afcbe or 
 
 btifa) 
 
 gibrofcben. 
 
 the imperfect, in the sense of 
 
 brBfcbe 
 
 
 
 hire. 
 
 tcb brange 
 
 fcrtnge 
 
 gebrungen. 
 
 1) For bremg, bruttg wao for 
 
 »cb fciirfte 
 
 — 
 
 gebmft. 
 
 nierly in use. 
 
 id) cntyftnge 
 
 empfattge 
 
 emvfaugen. 
 
 
 id) emv f i>t)le 
 
 em^fiebj 
 
 entyfoftleu. 
 
 
 id) emvfanbe 
 
 em^ftrtbe 
 
 emyfuttben. 
 
 \ 
 
 id) entramie 
 
 cittvtrme 
 
 eiitipmien. 
 
 
 to emfcfcliefe 
 
 entfd)lafeorent= 
 fd?laf 
 
 eutfebjafen 
 
 
348 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § 73. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 IMP. INDIC. 
 
 (SiitiVrecfmi, to answer, 
 @t'bleid)en Ml), to turn pale, 
 (jrfriereil, to freeze, 
 Qfrgreifert, to seize, to catch, 
 Gjrftefen «), to select, 
 
 (Sifiibven o), to choose, 
 
 (Srtofctenp), to extinguish, 
 (Srfaufeu, to be drowned, 
 ISrfffortUeil, to resound, 
 ©ifd)etlten, to appear, 
 (§i jet) l C (fen q), to be frightened, 
 
 (Svtvirtfeu, to be drowned, 
 (SrnMgCU r), to consider, 
 (Sffen, to eat, 
 
 ^aJ;cn *), ^obsolete,) to catch, 
 
 ^abren t), to drive a carriage, 
 
 gotten, to fan, 
 galteu «), to fold 
 
 Btongen v), to catch, 
 gecbten, to fight, 
 ffinben, to find, 
 ^lecfyten, to twist, 
 Sliegeu w), to fly, 
 
 Jlieljen x), to flee, 
 
 ^fiefjen y), to flow, 
 Sragert, to ask, 
 e$reffeit, to devour, 
 ^I'terCIt, to freeze, 
 
 ©abrcn x), to ferment, 
 ©ebiireu, to bring forth, 
 
 ©ibill a), to g-"---e, 
 
 ©ebiefen 6), to command. 
 ®f bethel] c), to prosper, 
 ©efalleu, to please, 
 
 ©e'oen d), to go, 
 ©elttigett, to succeed, 
 ©elteil e), to be worth, valid, 
 @)entfcu, to recover, 
 
 id) entJVredje, jc. id) entfpracb 
 
 id) erbleicfee, :c. id) erb!icb 
 
 id) erfriere, jc. id) etfrot 
 
 id) ergreife, tc. id) er griff 
 
 id) erfiefe, 2c. icb etfitfte 
 
 Id) erfiibre (erfiire), ic. id) crfoljs: 
 
 (crtor) 
 
 id) erfaufe. bu erfciufefi, er erfauft id) erfoff 
 id) erfebade, k. icb crfcboll 
 
 id) erfebeiue, jc. id) erfebicit 
 
 id) erfdprede, bu erfebrieffr, er er= id) erfebraf 
 
 febrieft 
 d) ertrinfe, ic. id) ertratif 
 
 ;d) encage, k. id) envog 
 
 icb effe, bu ifiejl, er iffet or i$t icb ' 
 
 id) fatje, bu fafjefr, er fa^et 
 
 id) fabre, bu fcibrft, er fciljrt icb futjr 
 
 irb falle, bit fciUft, erfciUt icb fiel 
 
 id) falte, ic. icb faltete 
 
 id) fange, bu fangfl, er fcingt |icb firm 
 id) feeble, bit ficbtfi, er fidj't id) fod)t 
 
 id) ftttbe, k. ' id) faitb 
 id) flecbte, bit fftcfctft, er fficbt icb flocbt 
 d) fltege, bu flteg)t, er fliegt 
 
 icb flielje, :c. id) fto^ 
 
 id) fftefje, ic. id) ffofjl 
 
 id) frage, bu frag ft, er fragt id> fntg 
 
 icb freffe, bu friffeft or fvtpt id) frafj 
 
 icb fricre, :c. id) fror 
 
 icb gcibre, jc. id) goljr 
 
 ia) gebare, bu gebcirft (gebicrft) id) gebar 
 er gebcirt (getter?) 
 
 icb gebe, bu gtbit, er gibt id) gab 
 
 icb gebiere, ic. id) gefcof 
 
 id) gebeibe, :c. ltd) gebielj 
 
 icb gefalle, bit gefallfl, er gefS'It id) gefiel 
 
 icb gebe, k. 
 
 e« geltugt 
 
 id) gdte, ^vi giltfi, er gilt 
 
 icb genefe, jc 
 
 id) gtng 
 |eS gelattg 
 it* gait 
 Itcb genaS 
 
OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 
 
 349 
 
 IMF. feUUJ. IMPERATIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 id) entfpradje 
 id) eioltc^e 
 icb evfvovc 
 »cb ergviffe 
 id) evfiefete 
 
 id) erfiibre 
 (eifiire) 
 
 id) erfoffe 
 id) evffbollc 
 id) rrfcfeiene 
 id) evfd)iafe 
 
 id) evtranfe 
 id) evrooge 
 id) ti^e 
 
 id) fitbre 
 id) ftele 
 
 id; faitete 
 
 id) ftnge 
 id) focbte 
 id) fa 11 be 
 id) fl5d)te 
 id; flo^c 
 
 'cfc flobe 
 
 id) floffc 
 id) friige 
 id) fvajje 
 id) frove 
 
 id) grtyre 
 
 id) gebare (gc=» 
 
 bore) 
 id) gdbe 
 
 id) gebSte 
 
 id) gebtebe 
 id) geficle 
 
 !rt> flinge 
 es flange 
 id) galte 
 id; geaaft 
 
 en t fin- id) 
 rbleiebe 
 erfriere 
 
 mjveifeorergreif 
 erfiefe 
 
 erfii^re (evfiire) 
 
 ev fa life 
 ericfcalie 
 evfeheine 
 evfehtief 
 
 crtrinf 
 
 eiunige 
 
 fa&« 
 
 faf)ve 
 falte 
 
 range 
 
 ftctot 
 
 fiube 
 
 fUcbt 
 
 flicge 
 
 fltebe or fUeb, 
 
 fliefje 
 fvage 
 fvi§ 
 fvicve 
 
 gabje 
 
 gebare (gebier) 
 
 gib 
 
 gebiete 
 gebetb 
 gefalie 
 
 gebe or gel) 
 gelinge 
 
 genefe 
 
 entfprocten. 
 
 .:blid)Cit. 
 
 evfioven. 
 
 ergiiffen. 
 
 evwfett. 
 
 evfofjren 
 (etfoven) 
 
 erfoffen. 
 erfcbollctl. 
 erfd)ienen. 
 erfdjiod'en. 
 
 evtrunfen. 
 einjogen. 
 
 gegeffeii. 
 
 gefa^ett. 
 
 gefabrett. 
 gefalleu. 
 
 gefalten. 
 
 gefangen. 
 gefocbten. 
 gefunben. 
 geflorbTen 
 geflogen. 
 
 geflofjeu. 
 
 geffoffen. 
 gefvagt. 
 
 gefreffeit. 
 gefromt. 
 
 gegoljven 
 geborcn. 
 
 gegeben. 
 
 geboten. 
 gebteben. 
 gefalleu. 
 
 gegangen. 
 geiungen, 
 gegoltetu 
 genefett. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 m) Derived from bleid)ett, to 
 whiten, as in the sun, which 
 is regular. 
 
 n) It is used in sublime style and 
 in poetry. 
 
 o) This verb is very seldom 
 used. 
 
 p) Like feerlofcbeii and au$= 
 lijfdjeil, irregular only when 
 intransitive. Sofdjeil is al- 
 ways transitive and regular. 
 
 q) Irregular always as an intran- 
 sitive verb, but regular when 
 transitive. 
 
 r) More often used as a regular 
 verb. 
 
 s) This poetical word is rarely 
 
 used, and in the imperfect not 
 
 at all. 
 t) All the compounds of faljl'f tt 
 
 are irregular except tUtU- 
 
 faljven. 
 
 u) Irregular only in the partici 
 
 pie now, for which gefaltet is 
 
 often used. 
 V) The forms fteng and ftenge 
 
 are obso'ete. So also empfteitg 
 
 and emyfienge. 
 
 ip) Sleitgft and fleugt in the 
 present, and fleug in the im 
 perative are forms used only 
 in poetry. 
 
 x) Slcucbfl, ffeud)t and fleud;, 
 
 poetical. 
 
 y) gleujjefl, fleupt and fleufi, 
 poetical. 
 
 z) Sometimes regular, gd'^rte. 
 
 a) Some writers prefer gtebft, 
 giebt, gteb, to gibft, gibt, gib. 
 
 b) 6>5ebeiitfl, geinuf, poeticaL 
 
 c) Oebiegeit is but a strength- 
 ened adjective form of :h.o 
 past participle. 
 
 d) ®ieng for ging is antiquated, 
 
 e) Formerly golt, golte, wer* 
 used in the imperf. indie, and 
 subj. 
 
350 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS $ 78. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 IMP. INDIC. 
 
 JhtnkVW J), to enjoy, 
 
 id) gemefje, jc. 
 
 id) genof} 
 
 ©eratbeu, to hit upon, 
 
 id) geratbe, bu geratfyft, ergeratb. 
 
 id) geiietb 
 
 ©efd;el)eu, to happen, 
 
 e8 gefebiebt 
 
 e$ geicbab, 
 gefdjabe 
 
 @en)imteu, to £ain, to win, 
 
 id) geroiuue, jc. 
 
 id; geroatm 
 
 ©teften g), to pour, 
 
 id; giepe, jc. 
 
 id; got! 
 
 ©leicfyen A), to resemble, 
 
 id) gleid;e, jc. 
 
 id) glid) 
 
 ©lettett i), to glide, 
 
 id) glette, jc 
 
 icb gift* 
 
 © limmen k), to shine 
 
 id) gltmme, jc. 
 
 id) glcmm 
 
 ©liibeu. to dig, 
 
 id) grab*; bit grcibft, cr grabt 
 
 id) grub 
 
 ©vet feu, to seize, 
 
 id) giafe, jc. 
 
 icb griff 
 
 Robert I), to have, 
 
 icb &a6e, bit b«ft, cr bnt 
 
 id) batte 
 
 ^altea, to hold, 
 
 id) balte, bit bairfr, er bait 
 
 icb bielt 
 
 4?aiii}cu m), to hang, 
 
 id; fyauge, fcu baugft, er biingt 
 
 icb biug 
 
 £auen n), to hew, 
 
 id) bane, jc. 
 
 id) bitb 
 
 «!jpebeil, to heave, 
 
 id) (>ebe, jc. 
 
 id) bob or bub 
 
 ^ei^eu, to be named, 
 
 id) (jetfje, bit bfifjefr, er ^et^t 
 
 id) btefj 
 
 ^elfeit, to help, 
 
 id) l;etfe, bu tj 1 1 f ft, er bjlft 
 
 ict) fcalf 
 
 ^eifen o), to chide, 
 
 id) feife, jc. 
 
 irbftff 
 
 .fteilllCH, to know, 
 
 id) fame, jc. 
 
 icb fannte 
 
 jtltebett, to cleave, 
 
 id) fliebe, jc. 
 
 id) flob 
 
 jtlimiiien p), io climb 
 
 id) fi imnte, jc. 
 
 id) flomin 
 
 iUiltgett, to sound, 
 
 id) Hinge, jc. 
 
 id) flattjj 
 
 .Jtnetfeu, or 
 
 id) Eueife, or fneipe, jc. 
 
 id; fiuff or 5uip» 
 
 jtitetyen q), to pinch, 
 
 
 
 iftommeu, to come, 
 
 id; fomme, bu fommfl, er fommr, 
 or bu fommfl, er fommt 
 
 id) fam 
 
 jtoituen, to be able, 
 
 id) faint, bu fanufl, er faint 
 
 id) fonnte 
 
 jtried;eu r), to creep 
 
 id) friedje, jc. 
 
 id; fvocb 
 
 jtiifyren *), to choose 
 
 id) tu\)vt, jc 
 
 id; fab* 
 
 Sabeu, to load, 
 
 id) fabe, bu Iabefl or Iabfl, er la= 
 bet or lafrt 
 
 id; Iub 
 
 Saffeit t). to let, 
 
 id) laffe, bu fciffeft, er taffet (\a$tj 
 
 icb Ttef 
 
 ?flufen, to run, 
 
 id) laufe, bu lauffl, er laufr 
 
 id) lief 
 
 £ett>eu u), to suffer, 
 
 id) leibe, jc. 
 
 id) litt 
 
 £etl)eu, to lend, 
 
 irb leibe, jc. 
 
 id) liel) 
 
 Sefen, to ir&d, 
 
 id) lefe, bu liefeft, er liefet (Iie«t) 
 
 id) las 
 
 fiiegen, to lie down, 
 
 id) liege, jc. 
 
 id) lag 
 if) log 
 
 £ugt£. to ie, 
 
 id; luge, jc. 
 
* .. 
 
 OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 
 
 351 
 
 id) genfiffe 
 
 id) iKnctbe 
 16 gefdjabe 
 
 id) gcroanne Cqc= 
 
 ivouue) 
 id; (joffe 
 
 id) glic^e 
 
 id) fllitte 
 
 id) glommr 
 id) grfibe 
 
 id? flriffe 
 
 icb bath 
 icb bitlte 
 icb binge 
 
 id) biebe 
 tcb bo be 
 id; biefie 
 id) i;itlfc or f)alfe 
 
 id) ftffe 
 
 id) feniiete 
 icb flobe 
 id) Homme 
 icb ficinge 
 id) fit iffe or 
 
 fuivpe 
 id) fame 
 
 id) foitnte 
 icb fi'fidpe 
 
 id; fof)re 
 
 id; tiifce 
 
 id) ttefje 
 id) liefe 
 icb line 
 icb liebe 
 icb lafe 
 id; lige 
 id; loge 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 geniefje 
 
 genoffen. 
 
 /) ©encufjeft, geiteugt, and 
 
 gerarbe 
 
 geratbcii. 
 
 imperative gilieup, poetical , 
 
 ge|"cbebe 
 
 ge'fotfee*. 
 
 seldom used. 
 
 geiuiiine 
 
 gevoonneu. 
 
 
 gtefie 
 
 gegoffett. 
 
 g) ©eujjeft, geujf, and impe- 
 rative gcujj. See gemetjen. 
 
 gleid)e 
 
 gegltdjcn. 
 
 h) Regular as an active verb, 
 to make similar, to compare. 
 SBergleidjett, although active 
 is irregular. 
 
 gleite 
 
 gcglitteu. 
 
 i) ©eleiten and begfeitett are 
 not derived from glettt'lt, hut 
 from lettetl, and therefore re- 
 gular 
 
 k) Now more frequently regular 
 
 gltmme 
 
 gcglommen. 
 
 grabe 
 
 gegraben. 
 
 
 gretfe 
 
 gegrijfett. 
 
 
 babe 
 
 gebabt. 
 
 /) .gjattbfjaben is regular. 
 
 balte 
 
 gebalten. 
 
 
 bange 
 
 gchangeti. 
 
 m) £ieng, bieitge are old forms 
 This verb must not be mis 
 taken for biiilgCU, to suspend, 
 which is active and regular. 
 
 bane or Ijau 
 
 gefjaiten. 
 
 n) Rattle (regular) is used when 
 
 be be 
 
 flebobeit. 
 
 cutting wood, carving stone,&.C, 
 
 be tfie or Ijeijj 
 
 gefmtjeu. 
 
 are meant. 
 
 bilf 
 
 geb^olfeit. 
 
 
 fetfe or feif 
 
 geftffeit. 
 
 0) This verb is sometimes used 
 
 fetttte 
 
 gefanut. 
 
 as a regular verb. 
 
 fliebe 
 
 gefloben. 
 
 
 fltntme 
 
 geflontmert. 
 
 p) Sometimes regular, flimiltte. 
 
 fltnge 
 
 geflnugen. 
 
 # 
 
 ftteife or fneipe 
 
 gefniffen or ge= 
 
 q) JTnet'ptc, gefnetpt is more 
 
 
 futppeit. 
 
 frequently used. 
 
 fomm 
 
 gefontmeu. 
 
 
 fvied)e or fried) 
 
 geBonnt 
 
 gefvocben. 
 
 r) .ftreudjft, freudjt, freuch, ob- 
 solete. Only poetically used. 
 
 fiifjre 
 
 gefoijren. 
 
 5) Jlubren is entirely antiqua- 
 ted, tthibjeit having taken its 
 place. 
 
 labe 
 
 gela&en. 
 
 
 I^ffe or lag 
 
 gelaffen. 
 
 t) S3eranlaftetl is regular. 
 
 laufe or lauf 
 
 gelaufcn. 
 
 
 lett>e 
 
 geltttert. 
 
 u) 93evleibett, to disgust, is n 
 
 leibe 
 
 geliebeu. 
 
 gular 
 
 lies 
 
 gelefen. 
 
 
 liege 
 
 gelegcn. 
 
 
 liige 
 
 gelogett. 
 
 
352 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS J 78. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sflfl{)icr v), to grind, 
 
 fDJetben, to avoid, 
 2)1 elfeti u>), to milk, 
 
 2J?effen, to measure, 
 
 JWifjfaUen, to displease, 
 
 2)?i0lingen, to go amiss, 
 SJiOgeil, to be able, 
 
 2Jiiiffen, to be obliged, 
 
 0tcl)men, to take, 
 Sieiiuen, to name, 
 
 fPfcifen, to whistle, 
 ^flegen *), to cherish, 
 ^vet|'cit, to praise, 
 
 fitteUeu y), to gush, 
 
 S^odjeu Z ), to avenge, 
 
 3Raff)ett, to advise, 
 Sieiben, to rub, 
 SRctjiciI, to tear, 
 9ieiteu a), to ride, 
 
 JRennen 6), to run, 
 
 9ftied)en, to smell, 
 SHhtgeit, to wrestle, 
 Stinnett, to run (of fluids;, 
 
 Sfaifcn c), to can, 
 ©alsen d), to salt, 
 ©aufen, to drink, to tipple, 
 <5au gen c), to suck, 
 
 <S$affert/\ to create, 
 
 ©djeiben e), to separate, 
 Sdjeinen to appear, 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 IMP. INDIC. 
 
 id) mal;le, feu mafjlejl (miiljlfr), 
 
 id) mafylte 
 
 er maf)lt (maljlt) 
 
 (mubl) 
 
 tct) mcfbc, jc. 
 
 id) micb 
 
 id) me Ife, bu rnelfjl or milFft, er id) molf 
 
 me I ft or mtlft 
 
 
 id) meffe, bu miffefl, er mtffet or 
 
 id) mafj 
 
 mifct 
 
 
 id; mtjjfalle, bumtjjfdUft, ermi9= 
 
 faUt 
 e§ mtfjlingt 
 
 id) mifjfiel 
 
 c3 mtfHang 
 
 id) mag, bu magfl, er mag, tt>ir 
 
 id) modpte 
 
 mogeit, jc. 
 
 
 id) mu9, bu mugr, er mufj, tvir 
 
 id; mufjtc 
 
 miiffen, il)v miiffet or mit§t, jc. 
 
 
 id) netjme, bu m'mmft, er uimmt 
 
 id) nafym 
 
 id) neuue, jc 
 
 id; itamrie 
 
 id; pfeife, jc. 
 
 i* *>f»ff 
 
 icb pflege, jc. 
 id) preife, jc. 
 
 id) pflog 
 
 id; *,/«$ 
 
 id) quelle, bu quillfl, er quint 
 
 t<^ quoll 
 
 id; vactye, jc. 
 
 id) rdd;te (rcc$ 
 
 id) ratljc, bu ratfyft, er rati) 
 
 id) rieilj 
 
 id) veibe, jc. 
 
 id) rieb 
 
 id; rcifce, jc 
 
 icfcrif} 
 
 id; tcite, JC 
 
 i* xitt 
 
 id) reime, :c. 
 
 id? ricdje, jc. 
 id) ringe, jc 
 id) vtttne, jc. 
 id) rufe, jc. 
 
 id) falje, jc. 
 
 ic^ faufe, bu faufji, er ffiuft 
 
 id) fauge, je. 
 
 id) fd)affc, jc. 
 
 id) fdjeibe, jc. 
 id; fa)etne, it. 
 
 id) tannic 01 
 
 renntc 
 id) rod) 
 id) rang 
 id) rann 
 id; rief 
 
 id) folgte 
 
 id)foff 
 
 id)f*0 
 
 id) f*uf 
 
 t<* fate* 
 id; fdpieit 
 

 OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 
 
 353 
 
 IMP. KUBJ. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 id) niabfete 
 
 mabje 
 
 gemabjen. 
 
 V) Except the past participle ge* 
 
 (mil hie) 
 
 
 
 111 at) leu, no irregular form is 
 
 id) nitebe 
 
 meibc 
 
 qemteten. 
 
 in use. 
 
 id) nuUfe 
 
 nielle 
 
 gemolfen. 
 
 W) Sometimes regular. SJlilffl 
 &c, rarely used. 
 
 id? majje 
 
 mtj? 
 
 gemeffen. 
 
 
 id) ntif5fte[e 
 
 mtpfalle 
 
 mifjfatfen. 
 
 
 e§ niifilartge 
 
 mtpltiige 
 
 mtfHungen. 
 
 
 id) mbdpte 
 
 — 
 
 gemocbt. 
 
 
 id) miifjte 
 
 — 
 
 gemufjt. 
 
 
 id) na'bme 
 
 mmitt 
 
 genommen. 
 
 
 tc^ nemiete 
 
 tiennc 
 
 genauut. 
 
 
 id) Vftffe 
 
 pfctfe or vfeif 
 
 gepftffert. 
 
 
 id) pfloqe 
 
 Pflege 
 
 gepftogen. 
 
 x) When it signifies, to wait 
 
 icb, piiefe 
 
 pretfe 
 
 gepttefen. 
 
 upon, or to be accustomed, it ia 
 
 id) quelle 
 
 quelle 
 
 gequoHen. 
 
 regular. 
 y) Duelien, to swell, is regular 
 
 tc^> rcic^te (roc^e) 
 
 rad)e 
 
 gerad)t (gero= 
 
 z) The irregular form is no long- 
 
 
 
 d)en). 
 
 er used. Where it occurs in 
 
 id) vietlje 
 
 ratbe 
 
 geratt)en. 
 
 former writers it must not he 
 
 id) vtebe 
 
 reibe 
 
 gerieben. 
 
 confounded with the same 
 
 id) viffe 
 
 retge 
 
 geriffen. 
 
 forms from xkd)ttl. 
 
 id) ritte 
 
 reite 
 
 geiitten. 
 
 a) SBerettetl, to ride to, like all 
 the compounds of vettett, is 
 irregular; but bcreiteil, to 
 make ready, from beteit, rea- 
 dy, is regular, like all deriva- 
 tives. 
 
 id) renneie 
 
 vennt 
 
 gerarmt or ge* 
 
 b) SKennte and ijerennt, not 
 
 
 
 remit. 
 
 often used. 
 
 id) xbd)t 
 
 viedje or tied) 
 
 gerodjeit. 
 
 
 id) rattle 
 
 rtttge 
 
 gevungett. 
 
 
 id) ramie (rbmte; 
 
 rtune 
 
 gevotinen. 
 
 
 id) vtife 
 
 rufe 
 
 geiufeti. 
 
 c) Regular in sorre writers, but 
 improperly so. 
 
 id) faljtte 
 
 f«Ue 
 
 gefaljert. 
 
 d) Irregular only fn the parti- 
 ciple, and in that when user7 
 
 id) foffe 
 
 faufe 
 
 gefoffen. 
 
 adjectively ; as, gefnljctie %U 
 febe ; er t)at fte gefal^t. 
 
 id) foge 
 
 faugj 
 
 gefogen. 
 
 e) ©aitgft and faitgt are not 
 supported by good usage, but 
 faiigetl, to suckle, is regular. 
 
 id) fd^iife 
 
 fd;affe 
 
 gefd;affett. 
 
 f) In the signification of to pro- 
 cure, to get, it is regular, as 
 also (lltfd)affen, to purchase, 
 to buy ; abfd)Clffeil to part 
 with, to dismiss. 
 
 id) fc^tebc 
 
 fdjetbe 
 
 gefd)tebert. 
 
 g) The active verb fdjetbett, to 
 
 id) \d)imt 
 
 fdjeine 
 
 gefd;ieitert. 
 
 part, to disjoin, to divide, is 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 regular. 
 
854 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS J 78. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 <&d)elten, to scold 
 
 Scberett, to shear 
 (Sdnebett, to siiovi, 
 ®d)iei?eil, to shoot, 
 <£d)illt>etl, to flay, 
 
 ©d)Iafcu, to sleep, 
 (Edjlafli'U h), to beat, 
 (&d)lad;?lt, to sneak, 
 
 ©djleifetl i\ to sharpen, to 
 
 whet, 
 <fcd)lei&en, to slit, 
 (Ecbliefen, to slip, 
 ©djUef^H, to shut, 
 
 <Sd)ltiiflen, to sling, 
 ©cfometjjen, to fling, 
 (5d)mel$ett k), to melt, 
 
 <Sdjiiciu&en, to snort, 
 @d)iteiben, to cut, 
 <&d;raubeu Z), to screw, 
 
 <Sd)veiben, to write, 
 (Set) re ten, to cry, 
 (fccbvctteit, to stride, 
 <&d)X0t(U t to bruise, to gnaw, 
 
 (fccbroarcn m), to suppurate, 
 (gcfywetjjctt, to be silent, 
 (SdjrceUett n), to swell, 
 
 (Sdmummen, to swim, 
 
 ©dnuitttCtt, to vanish, 
 
 Scinutttgeii o), to swing, 
 
 (5d)tt)ih'en, to swear, 
 
 Senen, to see, 
 (geill, to be, 
 (Seilbett, to send, 
 
 (Sicbenp), to boil, 
 (gillfleit, to sing, 
 (Siufett, to sink, 
 (fcitlltett, to think, to ;iuse, 
 
 Si^eit, to sit, 
 Solicit, to be obliged 
 (fepalteit q), tospiit, 
 ©yeiet, tosp'.t, 
 ©pitmen, o spin, 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 id) fdjelrc, bit fcbjltft, er fcfitlt 
 
 id) fdcre, jc. 
 irb fcfotebe, jc. 
 id) fd;tef$e, jc. 
 id) fd)inbe, jc. 
 
 id) fdjfofe, bit fcfelafft, cr frtlaft 
 id) fd)laa.e, bit fcbjaflft, cr fcbjagt 
 id) fd)lctd)e ; k. 
 
 id; fd)leife, jc. 
 
 id) fdjfetfie, ic. 
 id) fcfjl.ie.fe, jc. 
 id; fcbliepe, jc. 
 
 id) fcblinge, jc. 
 id) fctonmise, jc. 
 id) fdmelje, bit fd)me($eft (fdmtfc 
 
 &cfl). cr fdjmeht (fcbmtljt) 
 id) fdniebeor fdjnaube 
 id; fd)ttcibc, jc. 
 id) fd)i-aube, jc. 
 
 id) fd)rcibe, jc. 
 id) fdneie, jc. 
 id) fctoreite, jc. 
 id) fcbvote, jc. 
 
 id) fcfetware, jc. 
 id) fdnueige, jc. 
 id; fctoroeHe, bit fc&tmttit, cr 
 
 fd) unlit 
 id) fcbnnntme, jc 
 id) fdmnnbc, jc. 
 id) frt)iviiia,c, jc. 
 
 id; fdjtvore, jc. 
 
 id) febe, bit ftef)fr, cr fteljt 
 id) bin jc. 
 id; feube, jc. 
 
 id) ftcbe, jc. 
 id) ftiifle, -c. 
 id) futfe, jc. 
 id) finite, jc. 
 
 id) ftfee, jc. 
 
 id) foil, bit foUft, er foU 
 
 id) fpalte, jc. 
 
 id) fpeie, jc. 
 
 id) ftnnnc, jc. 
 
 IMP. INDIC. 
 
 id) fd)a\t (fc&clt* 
 
 id) fd)or 
 id) fd)ob 
 id) fd)0|5 
 id) fctjitnb 
 
 id; fcfoltef 
 
 id) fd;litfl 
 id) fd) I id) 
 
 id) fdjliff 
 
 id) fcolig 
 id) fcbfcff 
 id) fdjlop 
 
 id> fddang 
 id) fd)nti§ 
 id) fd)inclj 
 
 id) fdmob 
 id) fdmitt 
 id) fcbranbtr 
 
 (fdirob) 
 id) frbrieb 
 id) fdnte 
 id) fdnitt 
 id) fcbvotcte 
 
 id) fdwor 
 id) fdnvtea 
 id) frt)a)oU 
 
 id> fdwamm 
 id) fdnvattb 
 id) fcbwflttj} or 
 
 ftbuntua, 
 id) fdnuor or 
 
 fdrauv 
 id) fab 
 id) war, jc. 
 id) fattbte and 
 
 fenbete 
 id) fott 
 id fang 
 | id; fanf 
 id; faun 
 
 id) fat) 
 id) follte 
 id; fualtcte 
 id) fpie 
 id; fpatta 
 
OF THE OLD FORM. § 78. 
 
 855 
 
 IMP. SUBJ. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 id; fcb'ilte 
 
 fd)tlt 
 
 gefc&olteit. 
 
 
 (fctooitc) 
 
 
 
 
 icb jdjbre 
 
 fiteve or fd)ier 
 
 gefcfcoven. 
 
 
 id) fctobbe 
 
 jfbtebe 
 
 gen-bo ben. 
 
 
 id) id)offc 
 
 f d)tfOe 
 
 gefdjejfen. 
 
 
 id) fd? uu&e 
 
 |.i)inoe 
 
 gefdpuui'ett. 
 
 
 id) fd)iicfe 
 
 fiWe 
 
 gefdjfafen. 
 
 
 »cb fd)liige 
 
 [4U<m 
 
 gcfctolagen. 
 
 h) 9tfatftfd)Iagen and 6er<stb* 
 
 td) fd)lid;e 
 
 1$IniJ« 
 
 gefcfclicben. 
 
 fd)liigeit, to consult, are re 
 gular. 
 i) Regular in all other significa 
 
 td) fcfcliffe 
 
 fcfcleifc t< ycpietf 
 
 gefcbtiffen. 
 
 
 
 
 tions, as, to demolisti, or to 
 
 id) fitiiffe 
 
 fcblctfi 
 
 gcfcbliifen. 
 
 drag 
 
 id) frt) li> tie 
 
 fd)ticfr 
 
 gefcbloften. 
 
 
 id) id)loffe 
 
 fd)licpv 
 
 gefdjloffcu. 
 
 
 id) fdnSnge 
 
 fd)(ingt 
 
 gefd)lungen. 
 
 
 ict> fcfoiuiffe 
 
 fcbnietfk 
 
 gcfdnmfjen. 
 
 
 tit fdjmoljc 
 
 fctomtlj tr 
 
 gefchnujljeu. 
 
 k) As an active verb it is regu 
 
 
 fd) in el a 
 
 
 lar. 
 
 id) fdutobe 
 
 fd)iuiiibe 
 
 gcfdnt often. 
 
 
 td) fdntitte 
 
 fituetbe 
 
 gefd)nittcn. 
 
 
 id) ntvaubetc 
 
 fcbraube 
 
 gefd)riinbt 
 
 1) Commonly regular, fd)r<utfttf 
 
 (frbrobe) 
 
 
 (gcfcbroben). 
 
 gefdpiaubt. 
 
 id) fdntcbe 
 
 fdmibe 
 
 gefdmebcn. 
 
 
 id) fdutee 
 
 fdueie 
 
 gefdnieen. 
 
 
 id) fduitre 
 
 fdneite 
 
 gefitrittert. 
 
 
 id) fcbiotete 
 
 fdjrote 
 
 gefd)iotcn. 
 
 Regular now except in the parti 
 ci|>le. and this is frequently 
 gei'rbrotet. 
 
 ids fcbtvore 
 
 fdware 
 
 gefrbtooren. 
 
 m> t&cbnnerji it in the present 
 
 id) fcbuueae 
 
 idnveige 
 
 gefchiuiegen. 
 
 is provincial. 
 
 icb fcbiuolie 
 
 fctowtU or 
 
 fdweiie 
 
 gefdjrooUen. 
 
 n) Regular, when active. 
 
 id) fdjiuamme 
 
 fdniMiume 
 
 gefd) worn men. 
 
 
 id> fcfcroanbc 
 
 fdwtute 
 
 gefdnpun&en. 
 
 
 id) fcbivaihjC 
 
 fd) nnnge 
 
 gefd)auu;gcn. 
 
 o) €d)irtmg is less in usage 
 than fdjtvatlg. 
 
 id) fcbroove or 
 
 fd)w5re 
 
 gefdjrooren. 
 
 
 fcbwiive 
 
 
 
 
 id) fa be 
 
 ftet)C 
 
 gefcben. 
 
 
 td) nWirc 
 
 fci 
 
 geioefen. 
 
 
 id) fenbete 
 
 fenbc 
 
 gefanbt ana 
 gcfenbet. 
 
 
 td) fotte 
 
 ftcbe 
 
 gefotren. 
 
 p) When active it is mostly re- 
 
 id) fauge 
 
 n ii ge 
 
 gefnngen. 
 
 gular. 
 
 id? fa it re 
 
 ft ufe 
 
 gefunrejt. 
 
 
 'd) fanne 
 
 ftmie 
 
 gefonuen. 
 
 
 (fpttne) 
 
 
 
 
 td) fit 0C 
 
 1% 
 
 gcfeffett. 
 
 
 id) feilte 
 
 
 gefottt 
 
 
 td) fvaltet* 
 
 fixtltc 
 
 jgcfvaUen. 
 
 q) Irregular only in the parti- 
 
 id) fpiee 
 
 fyeie 
 
 gcfvteen. 
 
 ciple, and tliis is sometimes 
 
 id) fpamte 
 
 fpturte 
 
 gefponnen. 
 
 gefpaltet when the verb u 
 
 ifpotme) 
 
 
 
 active. 
 
356 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS § ?8. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 IMP. INDIC. 
 
 Spletfku, to split, 
 
 (Spvecbcit, to speak, 
 (Syviejjen r), to sprout, 
 (Springett, to spring, 
 (Stecbett, to sting, to prick, 
 (fctecfm s), to stick, to be fast- 
 ened. 
 Stet)eu, to stand, 
 
 gtebjen, to steal, 
 
 ©'tetfleit, to ascend, 
 
 (Stevben, to die, 
 
 (Stieben t), to fly (as dust), 
 (gttnfen, to stink, 
 (Stolen, to push, 
 Stmcfyeit, to stroke, 
 Stveiteit, to contend, 
 
 2Ef)un, to do, 
 Xrctgen, to bear, 
 Svcffeu, to hit, 
 Svdben, to drive, 
 
 Sveten, to tread, 
 Xrtefett, to drop, to trickle, 
 Srtnfe n, to drink, 
 Xviigen, to deceive, 
 
 SScrbcrgcn, to conceal, 
 
 93erbteten, to forbid, 
 ^erbleibcn, to remain, 
 SLWvbleicfoen, to grow pale, 
 SSerbeiben u), to perish, 
 
 SBerbriefkn, to offend, 
 SSevgeffcn, to forget, 
 
 SScvfje^len. to conceal, 
 
 33erlteren, to loose, 
 Q3evl5fd)eil, to extinguish, 
 
 £serfd)allen ic), to die away . 
 
 sound. 
 SSevfcfynnrtbeit, to disappear, 
 
 Cernnrren, to perplex, 
 $8eriJtb>tL to pardon, 
 
 id) fplei&e, jc. 
 
 td> fprecbe, bu fjmcbjr, er fcric^t 
 
 id) fpriefje, jc. 
 
 id) fpriiigc, 2C. 
 
 id) fted)e, bu fttcbft, er fiidjt 
 
 id; [tetfe, jc. 
 
 id) fteb>, jc. 
 
 id) jlc^Ie, bu ftiebjft, et flie&lt 
 
 d) fteige, jc 
 id) fteibe, bu jtirbjl, er flirbr 
 
 d) fiiebe, jc. 
 d) ft in ft, jc. 
 
 d> ftoBc. bu ftogefr, er flo^t 
 id) ftreid)e, jc. 
 d) fireite, jc. 
 
 id) tf)ue, bu tbufr, er tf)ut 
 id) trage, bu tvagfl, er tremt 
 id) tveffe, bu trijfft, er trip, 
 id) treibe, jc. 
 
 id) trefe, bu trtttji, er ttitt 
 
 id) tviefe, jc. 
 
 id) trinfe, jc. 
 
 id; huge, bu rriigft, er friigt 
 
 id) »erberge, bu berbirgfl, cr »er= 
 
 birgt 
 id) cerbtete, jc. 
 id) oerbleibe, jc. 
 id) vertleicbe, jc. 
 id) »erberbe, bu verbtrbfl, cr oer 
 
 birbt 
 e8 oetbviefjt 
 id) sergefje, bu oergiffeft, er m= 
 
 id) »eri)eljle, jc. 
 
 id) berTt'ere, jc. 
 
 id) »erlofd;e, bu »erl6fct)ejtori>er= 
 lifchefi, er »erl5fd)t or i>er! fc&r 
 id) uerfdjalie, jc. 
 
 d) uevfdjrmnbc, jc. 
 
 icb uertvirre, jc. 
 
 id) wrjetlje, %t 
 
 id) fpltefj or 
 fVlif 
 
 ifb iprad) 
 
 id) fpi-oj} 
 
 id) fprang 
 
 id) ftart) 
 
 icb fted'te or fia!. 
 
 id) ftani IfhtitH 
 
 id; fla^l fto&l) 
 
 id) flieg 
 icb ftarb 
 
 id) ftob 
 id) ftanf 
 id) ftie§ 
 id) ftrid) 
 id) flritt 
 
 icb tf)at 
 id) trug 
 cMraf 
 id) trieb 
 
 id) irat 
 d) treff 
 id) txant 
 id) trog 
 
 id) oerbarg 
 
 td> oerbot 
 id) »evblicb 
 id) oerbltd) 
 id) »erbarb 
 
 e8 t>erbrofj 
 
 id) Derfjeljlte 
 
 id) oerlor 
 id) sedofeb 
 
 id) yevfd)oU 
 
 id) berfcbtocm* 
 
 id) »ertt)irrte 
 
 id) oerjieb, 
 
OF THE OLD FORM. 
 
 78. 
 
 35V 
 
 IMP. SUBJ. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 icb uniffe 
 
 fytctjje 
 
 gefrltffcn. 
 
 
 id) nuadc 
 
 fprtcb 
 
 gefprpcbcit. 
 
 
 tit fproffe 
 
 fpriepe 
 
 gefbroffen. 
 
 r) This must not be confounded 
 
 itt furojige 
 
 fpringe 
 
 geiVvuugen. 
 
 (in the imperfect) with the re- 
 
 trf) ft ci d? e 
 
 ftid) 
 
 geftocbeu. 
 
 gular verb fpicffflt. 
 
 id' fttcfic or 
 
 jitcfe 
 
 gcjiecft. 
 
 «) This verb is commonly regu 
 
 jhifc 
 
 
 
 lar; when active it is always 
 
 id) ftauc-e 
 
 fie&e 
 
 gcftanben. 
 
 60. 
 
 (ftuur-e) 
 
 
 
 
 icb fable 
 
 jliebj 
 
 gefror)Ien. 
 
 
 (ftoblc) 
 
 
 
 
 id) fiicgc 
 
 Beige 
 
 jiirb 
 
 geftiegen. 
 
 
 id) rtarbe 
 
 geftorbcn. 
 
 
 (jhirbe) 
 
 
 
 
 id) ftobe 
 
 fltebe 
 
 gejtoben. 
 
 So3erftieben, to be scattered 
 
 id) ft a n Fc 
 
 ftiufc 
 
 geftunfen. 
 
 as dust 
 
 icb fttcpe 
 
 itojje 
 
 geftofen. 
 
 
 id) ftriebe 
 
 ftreicbe 
 
 geftucben. 
 
 
 id; ftritte 
 
 flreite 
 
 geftvirtett. 
 
 
 i6i tbcite 
 
 tbue 
 
 gctban. 
 
 
 id) tnige 
 
 txaat 
 
 getragett. 
 
 
 icb trafe 
 
 ntjf 
 
 getroffen. 
 
 
 id) inebc 
 
 treibe 
 
 gttrieben. 
 
 
 id) tratc 
 
 rrttt 
 
 getvefen. 
 
 
 icb treffe 
 
 trief or tricfe 
 
 gcfroffen. 
 
 
 icb tranle 
 
 tvttife 
 
 gctnuifen. 
 
 
 icb, tioge 
 
 truge 
 
 gctrogen. 
 
 
 icb, bevbarge 
 
 berbirg 
 
 berborgen. 
 
 
 icb bevbote 
 
 t>erbtctc 
 
 oerboten. 
 
 
 id) im-lliebe 
 
 bevbleibe 
 
 verblieberu 
 
 
 icb uevblicbe 
 
 Ofibleid)c 
 
 berbltcfoen. 
 
 
 id) vevtarbe 
 
 terbivb 
 
 »crbovben. 
 
 u) 23erberben, to destroy (act- 
 
 (oerburbe) 
 
 
 
 ive), is regular. 
 
 e3 verbroffe 
 
 uerbrtefje 
 
 uerbroffen. 
 
 v) USeibreupt, it, nearly obac* 
 
 icb uevgafie 
 
 bevgijj 
 
 oergcffcu. 
 
 lete. 
 
 id) »erl)eljlete 
 
 vevfjerjle 
 
 Ucrr)cr)It or 
 »erf)or)len. 
 
 
 td) berlore 
 
 oerltere 
 
 vcrlorctt. 
 
 
 id) bevlofdje 
 
 oerlbfcbe or 
 beviifd) 
 
 oenofdjen. 
 
 
 id) »crfd)5Ue 
 
 cevfcbaUe 
 
 uevf(d)oUett. 
 
 10) But little used, exoept in tbe 
 imperfect and participle 
 
 id) berfd)r»anbe 
 
 berfcbroinbe 
 
 serfcbrmmben. 
 
 
 id) bernnrrte 
 
 betruirre 
 
 berrrnvrt or 
 berroorven. 
 
 
 Id) ber$ie$e 
 
 betjetye 
 
 berjietjett. 
 
 
358 
 
 ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS $ 78. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
 
 IMP. IN IIIC. 
 
 2Sacr)fcu, to grow, 
 
 id) road)fe, \>u roadjfeft. er h>cid)fr 
 
 id) wud)< 
 
 3Baa.cn or SUBteyen x), to weigh, 
 
 id) wane or ttiege, bit tt»dgjl: or 
 wi(Q% er roaa,t or roiea,t 
 
 id) tt>og 
 
 SBafdjen y), to wash, 
 
 tcb h)afd;e, jc 
 
 id) ruufrt) 
 
 SBeben z\ to weave, 
 
 id; tt>ebe,jc. 
 
 icO tnob 
 
 ©eicfyen a), to yield, 
 
 id) UKtd)e, jc 
 
 i# rotct) 
 
 SDSeifen, to show, 
 
 id) wcife, jc 
 
 id) roie$ 
 
 SZBeuben b), to turn, 
 3Be rbeit, to sue for, 
 
 td) roeiibe, jc. 
 
 id) werbe, bit roirbji, cr roirbt 
 
 id) n>citbete or 
 
 roantte 
 id) tuarb 
 
 2Berbett, to become, 
 2Berfcu, to throw, 
 
 id) werbe, bu roirft, cr totrb 
 id) werfe, bu tmrffi, crwtrft 
 
 id) roarb or 
 twurbe, bit 
 ttMirfeefj, er 
 roavborroutce, 
 n)irn)urben,JC 
 
 id) roarf 
 
 SBinbeu, to wind, 
 
 id) tvinbe, tc. 
 
 id) roanb 
 
 SBiffeu, to know, 
 
 id) weii, bit wetpt ct wefjj 
 
 id) wujite 
 
 SGolIeit, to will, 
 
 id; will, bu roiUfr, cc toill 
 
 id) xooUtt 
 
 3<ir)cn, to accuse of, 
 
 id) jeifje, jc 
 
 id) jtcfj 
 
 3tc!jcn c), to draw, 
 
 id) sielje, jc 
 
 id)m 
 
 SaJt'ttflert, to force, 
 
 id) Jtt3>>^e, jc. 
 
 id) jwattfl 
 
 § 79. Verbs of the New Conjugation 
 
 (commonly called "regular verbs"). 
 
 (1) In verbs of the New, or simpler form, the Imperfect Tense 
 «nd fie Perfect Participle are not produced, as in the Old conjuga- 
 tion, by a change of the radical vowels ; but by means of the suffix 
 e t or t which serves as a tense characteristic : thus, taking the rad- 
 
• f 
 
 OP THE OLD FORM. § 78. 
 
 359 
 
 IMP. SUBJ. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 id> toiicfcfe 
 
 rcacfcfe 
 
 getwadjfen. 
 
 
 id) t»ogc 
 t$ roiifd)e 
 
 roage or miege 
 wafdje 
 
 geroogen. 
 getvafdjen. 
 
 x) 2B(igctt is active, and has 
 ttjiige in the imperf. subj. • 
 tvicgen is neuter, and has 
 nnege. SStegeu, to rock; is 
 regular. 
 
 y) 2Bafd)efi and tt)(ifd;t are also 
 used. 
 
 z) Regular except with the poctSg 
 or when used figuratively. 
 
 a) 3Betd)ett, to soften, to moli 
 fy, is regular. 
 
 id) roidje 
 tc^> roiefe 
 
 roeBe 
 
 nxidje 
 
 rocife 
 
 gerooben. 
 genndjen. 
 geroiefen. 
 
 id? roenbcte 
 
 roenbe 
 roirB 
 
 geroenbet or 
 genmubt. 
 geivorbett. 
 
 6) Regular when active 
 
 id) roiirbe 
 
 roerbe 
 
 gercorben ; (and 
 as an auxiliary) 
 
 roorben. 
 
 
 id; roarfe 
 
 (nnirfe) 
 
 id) tu.inbe 
 
 mtrf 
 
 rmube 
 
 gcttjorfen. 
 genmnbett. 
 
 
 id) rDiifitc 
 
 roiffe 
 
 geroufit. 
 
 
 id; ivollte 
 
 - 
 
 geroollt. 
 
 
 id) jtefje 
 
 jetfje 
 
 gejie^cn. 
 
 
 id; gcge 
 
 i% joange 
 
 $icf>c 
 jraingc 
 
 gcjogen. 
 gqroungen. 
 
 c) 3f«$f* «. antiquated, and 
 only in poetical usage 
 
 .cal part (teB) of IcBen, to praise, and affixing thereto et or t, wo 
 get hh e t or lob t ; to which add the personal endings and ue have 
 lobete or IcBie (lob + et + e), I praised ; toBetejt or loBteft, thou didst 
 praise, &c. 
 
 (2) The verbs of the New form differ again from those of the 
 Old, in that the former have in the Perfect Participle the termination 
 et or t, instead of en : as, geioB e t or gelob t, praised. See the 
 table of terminations § 76. 
 
360 
 
 
 PARADIGM OF A TERB 
 
 § 80. PAKADIGM OF A 
 Sob en, 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 <* 1 
 
 id) lobe, I praise. 
 
 id) lobe, I may 
 
 
 %h 
 
 bit lobe ft, thou praisest 
 
 bu lobefl, thou mayst 
 
 
 » ('I 
 
 ev lobt, he praises. 
 
 ev lobe, he may 
 
 jj 
 
 « ' 
 
 jo it lobeti, we praise. 
 
 to ir loben, we may 
 
 
 5 ■ 
 
 tf)v lobtt, you praise. 
 
 tbv lobet, you may 
 
 
 S (3 
 
 fie loben, they praise. 
 
 }k loben, they may . 
 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 6 P 
 
 id? lobte, I praised. 
 
 id) tobete, I might 
 
 
 1 la 
 
 bit lobtefl, thou didst praise. 
 
 bu lobeteft, thou mightst 
 
 o5 
 
 w (3 
 
 er lobte, he did praise. 
 
 ev lobete, he might 
 
 ■1 
 
 £<3 
 
 luiv lobten, we did praise. 
 
 roiv lobeten, we might 
 
 1 
 
 tbv robtef, you did praise. 
 
 ibr lobetet, you might 
 fie lobeteit, they might . 
 
 -i 
 
 jte lobten, they did praise. 
 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 6 (1 
 
 s a 
 
 id) babe "J I have ^ 
 
 id) b<ibe 1 1 may have 
 
 
 mi baft | thou hast | ^j 
 
 bit babefl | ^ praised, &c. 
 
 
 w (3 
 
 er bctt [^ he has I % 
 miv baben f-r we have ,' '3 
 
 er b«be I •» 
 
 
 P4 I 1 
 
 roir betben ( ~ 
 
 
 8 a 
 
 tbv babet ^ you have | o. 
 fie baben J they have J 
 
 ibr babet c0 
 
 
 * ( 3 
 
 fie bnben J 
 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 5 (3 
 
 id) batte 1 I had 1 
 
 id) WU ' 
 bu battefi 
 
 I might have 
 
 Mi baftefi | „_- thou hadst | ^ 
 
 praised, &c 
 
 
 ev batte \ *§ he had '. & 
 roir battsn ["z we had f *3 
 
 er rjatre 
 
 •1 
 
 
 p* i. 1 
 
 totr hcitkn 
 
 
 
 ibr battet ^ you had e. 
 fie batten j they had J 
 
 ibv fcattet 
 
 «3 
 
 
 S (3 
 
 fie batten ; 
 
 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 «* P 
 
 id) roerbe 1 I shall 
 
 
 id) roevbe 
 
 (if) I shall praise. 
 
 1 2 
 
 mi toivfi: | - thou wilt 
 
 
 bu roevbefr 
 
 &c. 
 
 
 « (3 
 
 er roirb ^ 5 he will 
 
 L.jj 
 
 er loerbe 
 
 ► 1 
 
 
 pa r 1 
 
 roil* roerben ( J» we shall 
 
 
 roir roevben 
 
 
 pa 
 
 tbv toerbet j ~* you will 
 
 ti. 
 
 tbv rocrbct 
 
 
 
 S (3 
 
 fie roerben j they will J 
 
 fie roevben 
 
 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 r* ( 1 
 
 id) roevbe 1 *-T I shall "| -6 
 
 id) roevbe "] = (if) I shall ha"* 
 
 § h 
 
 bu roivft -=> ^ou wilt | .m 
 
 &u toerbefr [ >§ praised, &c. 
 
 
 w (3 
 
 ev roivb I >» he will ( g 
 toil roerben j ~ we shall [ Gl 
 
 er toevbe I >S 
 roiv roerben [ ~ 
 
 
 fi<3 
 
 
 tbv roevbet | jo you will 
 fie roerben J « they will j 
 
 £ 
 J 
 
 tbv toevbet 
 fit roevben j 
 
 1 
 
 % 
 
 
^^ ^ 
 
 OF THE NEW FORM. § 80. 
 
 VERB OF THE KEW FORM. 
 to praise, 
 
 3«1 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 FIRST FUT7RE. 
 
 \<h nmrbe 
 tu iviiibcfl 
 cr triivbe 
 nnr roiubett 
 iljr tviirbet 
 fte murben J 
 
 9* 
 
 II 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 {(6 nnivbe 
 bu nnivbeji 
 er tuiirbe 
 
 
 nnr witrben f ~ g | 
 tbr njurbet jo j'g 
 f!c ftitrbeit J 3, ^ o. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 1. wanting. 
 
 2. 10l)C bll, 
 
 praise thou. 
 
 3. lobe cr, 
 
 let him praise. 
 
 1. lobeu ivir, 
 let us praise. 
 
 2. lobet it)v. 
 praise ye. 
 
 3. lobeu fte, 
 
 let them praise. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 lobeu, to praise. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 lobenb, 
 praising. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 gelobt baben, 
 to have praised. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 lobeu ttjerbeu, 
 to be ajout to 
 praise. 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 gelobL 
 praised. 
 
 16 
 
362 list of verbs of the mixed conjugation. § 81. § 82. 
 
 § 81. The Mixed Conjugation 
 
 (embracing the irregular verbs properly so called). 
 
 There are a few 7 verbs (sixteen in all), which have a sort of mix^d 
 conjugation: partaking of the Old Form, in that they change their 
 radical vowels to form the Imperfect Tense and the Perfect Pani- 
 ciple ; and at the same time, partaking of the New Form, in that 
 they assume, in the same parts, the tense-sign te and the participial 
 ending t. These are they which, strictly speaking, are the irregular 
 verbs of the language, and accordingly, they are here so classed. 
 They will be found, also, in the general List of (so called) "irregular" 
 verbs (page 346), which, for the sake of convenience, we have 
 there inserted. 
 
 % 82. 
 
 LIST OF VERBS OF THE MIXED CONJUGATION, 
 
 
 PRESENT 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PAST 
 
 > 
 
 INFINITIVE, 
 
 of Vie indicative. 
 
 ^_ 
 
 PARTI- 
 CIPLE. 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 Indicat. 
 
 Subjunct. 
 
 fti 
 
 Srrnntn, to burn, 
 
 _ 
 
 id) brannrc 
 
 id) brennte 
 
 gebrannt. 
 
 brennf 
 
 SPiingen, to bring, 
 
 — — 
 
 id) brad)te 
 
 id) brffcfytf 
 
 gebradjt. 
 
 — 
 
 deafen, to think, 
 
 — . - 
 
 id) badjre 
 
 id) ba'd>r« 
 
 gefadjt. 
 
 — 
 
 Siirfen, to be permitted, 
 
 id) barf, bu fcnrffr, « t>«f 
 
 id) burfie 
 
 id) biirfie 
 
 geNirft. 
 
 
 £aben, to have, 
 
 id; babe, cu baft, er bar 
 
 id) Imtre 
 
 id) ba'rre 
 
 gebabt. 
 
 kabt. 
 
 ftennen, to know, 
 
 — — 
 
 id) fannte 
 
 id) fennre 
 
 ijetannt. 
 
 — 
 
 ftonnm, to be able, can, 
 
 irl) fann, bu fonnft, er fanned) fennre 
 
 id) fonnte 
 
 gefennt. 
 
 
 Wogen, to be allowed, 
 
 id; mag, bu magfl, et mag id) module 
 
 id; mod)ie 
 
 gemod)t. 
 
 
 2Kiiji«i, to be obliged, 
 
 id) mu§, bu mufcr, cr mup 
 
 id) mufcre 
 
 id) miifite 
 
 gemufct. 
 
 
 must, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iftennen, to name, 
 
 — — 
 
 id) nannte 
 
 id) nennte 
 
 genannt. 
 
 — 
 
 JXennen, to run, 
 
 — — 
 
 id) rannte 
 
 id) rennte 
 
 gerannt. 
 
 — 
 
 Genceu, to send, 
 
 — — 
 
 id) fanbte 
 
 id) fencere 
 
 gefatibt. 
 
 — 
 
 €eHen, to be obliged, 
 
 shall, 
 USencen, to turn, 
 
 id) foil, tu foHfi, « foil 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 id) rttanbtc 
 
 id) rttenbetf 
 
 gentanbt, 
 
 — 
 
 JlMften, to know, 
 
 id) roeiji, bu rvtifr, tx roeifi id) roufcre 
 
 id) loiifste 
 
 geroufct. 
 
 tviffc 
 
 afcoikn, to be willing) 
 
 id) ipiB, bu voi&% it wiS. 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
PAI^DIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERBS. § 83. 363 
 
 § 83. Paradigms of irregular verbs. 
 
 (1) In order to a better display of the irregularities of some of 
 these -verbs, we append the following paradigms. They will be found 
 exceedingly convenient for ready reference. Some of these verbs, 
 also, have certain peculiar uses, which require special attention. 
 For this reason we have, immediately after the paradigms, added a 
 series of explanatory remarks, with copious examples illustrating the 
 several wars in wldeh they are employed. 
 

 
 364 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULAR VERB£. ^83. 
 
 (2) Surfeit, to be permitted, 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 trf) barf, 
 mi t a r f ft, 
 er bavf, 
 aur biirfen, 
 if)i bitrfd, 
 fie biufen, 
 
 I am 
 thou art 
 he is 
 we are 
 you are 
 they are 
 
 . ( i lef) tm-m, 
 I { '2 btl burftefl, 
 er bnrffe, 
 ivirburften, 
 
 ibr Muftct, 
 ]k bur [ten, 
 
 H 
 
 \i 
 
 I) 
 
 
 s: 
 
 l 
 3 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I was 
 thou wast 
 he was 
 we were 
 you were 
 they were 
 
 ri 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 tit f)abe 
 
 Mi iiaft 
 er bat 
 mix bat en 
 ibv fyabet 
 fk babeu 
 
 I ~- 
 
 I have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 they have 
 
 i a 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte 
 bu batteft 
 er i>atte 
 n>iv batten 
 ibr battel j 
 fie bitten J 
 
 I had 1 ^ 
 
 thou hadst | 5 
 he had ! aJ-a 
 we had f & £ 
 you had | g 
 they had j j£ 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 trb roerbe ") 
 Ml nurft | ^. 
 er unit* J Jj_ 
 aur roevben f : ~ 
 ibr lvevbet j ^ 
 fte ivevben J 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) biivfe, 
 bu bitrfeft, 
 er biivfe, 
 rotr biirfen, 
 ibr biirfet, 
 fte biivfen, 
 
 I may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 1-d 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 irf) roerbe "] = 
 Mi tvivfi | -g 
 ev jvirb 1 -^ 
 aur roevben '•£- 
 ibr roerbet 
 fte tuetbeu 
 
 1 shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 I 
 
 id) biirfte, 
 bu burftefl, 
 er biirfte, 
 roivbiivften, 
 ibr biirfrer, 
 fie burften, 
 
 \ mi s ht . ) 't 
 
 thou mightst | tj 
 he might I "3 
 
 we might 
 
 you misjht j 
 they might J Jg 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 ict) babe 
 Mi babeft 
 ev i)(\bt 
 roir baben 
 ibv bflbet 
 fte fyabtn 
 
 1 i may have Deen 
 
 I j; permitted, &c 
 
 ii-fe bcitfe 1 
 
 c>u pttefl 
 
 er bcitie 
 
 roir fatten 
 
 ibr battel 
 
 \k fatten „ 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I might have !>een 
 ;*£ permitted, &c. 
 
 (if) I shall he per- 
 mitted, &c. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE 
 
 irf) roerbe 
 bu ruerbeft 
 er tverbe '. ,s_ 
 roir voerbeu \ .g 
 ibv roerbet | ^ 
 fte werbeu j 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE 
 
 id) roerbe 1 = (if) I shall havs 
 Mi roerbeft | »» been permitted, 
 ev iverbe I -§• &c. 
 rotr roerben j «£- 
 ibr roevbet jg 
 fte roerben J «> 
 
to dare. #(See Ren^rk 9/ 
 
 GULAR VERBS. § 83. 
 
 365 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Wantini 
 
 PRESENT TENSE, 
 
 bur fen, to be per- 
 mitted. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 biivfeub, 
 being permitted 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 geburft Ijaben, 
 to have been 
 permitted. 
 
 FERFECT. 
 
 fleburft, 
 permitted. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 id) tviirbe 
 
 bu roiivbefl 
 cr roiirbe 
 roil njiirbeti 
 iht roiirbet 
 fte roiirben , 
 
 H 
 
 
 tag 
 
 SECOND FUTURR. 
 
 {$ roth-be "] s g-d 
 be roiifbefl I •§ J3 g 
 ct roiivbe I ^ -^ j- 
 rotr roiirben fC-'Sa 
 
 At toiirber I 1 1 1 
 fte rourben j & M J 
 
366 
 
 PARADIGMS OP IRREG 
 
 JP» 
 
 <3) ^otmcit 
 
 ill 
 
 « (3 
 
 si- 
 
 S2 ? 3 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) fann. I am 
 
 \ 
 
 id) Fonne, I may 
 
 
 bit fannjt, thou art 
 
 
 bu foniiefl, thou mayst 
 
 2 
 
 er fann, lie is 
 
 14 
 
 er foime, he may 
 
 iS 
 
 wiv Eonitcn, we are 
 
 1 -^ 
 
 ivir fonneit, we may 
 
 
 if)r finmet, you are 
 
 
 ibr fbnnet, you may 
 
 \k Eonnen, tliey are , 
 
 
 fte fonnen, they may 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) Fonnte, I was 
 Mi fouiiteft, thou wast 
 
 • 
 
 icb fonnte, I might 1 
 
 
 bu fotiiiteft, thou mightst | ji 
 
 ft- fonnte, he was 
 
 ^ 
 
 er fonnte, he might I -^ 
 ivir fonnten, we might ; v 
 
 ivir fonnteit, we were 
 
 •§ 
 
 tin* fonnte t, you were 
 
 
 ibr fonutef, you might 1 - 
 
 fie tomiUll, they were , 
 
 
 fte fouuteu, they might J 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) ftabe 1 I have 
 bu baft | „j thou hast 
 
 
 id- babe 
 
 I may have been 
 
 -2 
 
 bu babeft 
 
 *£ able, &c. 
 
 er bat / 5 he has 
 nnr baben f £ we have 
 
 1"* 
 
 er babe 
 
 J 
 
 G 
 
 ivir baben 
 
 ibr ^o bet a you have 
 fie baben J they have \ 
 
 0) 
 
 ibr babet 
 
 <3 
 
 
 fte baben j 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte ) I had 
 
 bit bartcfi J *? thou hadst 
 
 .' 
 
 id) batte ; 
 
 I might have been 
 
 J 
 
 bu battefl 
 
 ~ able, &c 
 
 er batte { = he had 
 roir batten f £ we had 
 
 ! rt 
 
 er batte 
 
 •J 
 
 * fl 
 
 ivir batten 
 
 ibr battct 1 » you had 
 
 0) 
 
 ibr battel 
 
 a 
 
 lie batten J they had 
 
 -Q 
 
 fte hiitten , 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) tt*erbe 1 I shall 
 
 
 id) tvevbe ~) Cif) I shall be 
 
 bit un'vft | _« thou wilt 
 
 _4> 
 
 ti\ tverbejl | ^ able, &c. 
 
 er tvirb 1 5 he will 
 ivir iverben ; .§ we shall 
 
 3 
 
 er tverbe '. 2 
 ivir nxrbeu { .§ 
 
 ibr tuerbet | *-♦ you will 
 
 ja 
 
 ibr tverbct | ~* 
 
 fte mxizn J they will 
 
 
 fte tverben j 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) werbe } g I shall 
 
 c 
 
 icb tverbe 15 (if) I shall have 
 
 bu ivir ft | % thou wilt 
 
 8 
 
 bu tverbejt | % been able, &c. 
 
 er ivirb i "fT he will 
 ivir ivet'ben [ ~ we shall 
 
 ^.i 
 *->"« 
 
 er tverbe I ^ 
 ivir ivcrben j ~ 
 
 ibr tvevbet ,© you will 
 
 
 ibr iverbct i» 
 
 ftc tuetfceti J £, they will , 
 
 J3 
 
 fte werben J 
 
 <o 
 
 
iULAR \tfRBS. §83. 
 
 367 
 
 to be #■ 
 
 Pec^pbark 10. 
 
 ) 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. [PARTICIPLE. 
 
 
 Wanting. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 i 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 to be able. 
 
 fonnettb, 
 being able 
 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 
 
 jjefonnt l)aben, 
 to have been 
 able. 
 
 gefonnt, 
 been able. 
 
 f IRST FUTURE. 
 
 
 
 
 id) nmrbe } _g 
 in murteft | _- e| 
 
 cr wuctt IS— * 
 iutr ronvbeii { = o_w 
 if)r roiirtet 1 2 -jjj3 
 fie jviirbfit J _ 
 
 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 
 
 
 ict; roitvbe ) ~ £ d 
 bu roarbefi I -| J 1 
 er roiirre 1 -=• -c-Ji 
 teir roiirben f = a a 
 tfjr tmhbet j 5 J g 
 fie wiirben J & Zj& 
 
 
 
 
368 
 
 PARADIGMS OF IRRE 
 
 allowed. 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 6 
 
 V) 
 
 11 
 
 trt) mag, I am 
 Ml magfi, thou art 
 ev mag, he is 
 iv ii mogen, we are 
 ibv moget, you are 
 Tie mbgen, they are 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 r 
 
 id) moge, I may . ^ 
 Mi moo, eft, thou mayst | « 
 ev mogc, he may 
 mix mbgen, we may , ^ 
 ibv moget, you may „, 
 ]ii mogen, they may & 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I 
 
 1! 
 II 
 
 id) modjfc, I was 
 Mi ntod)tefr, thou wast 
 ev mod)te, he was 
 anr mod) ten, we were 
 ibv mod) let, you were 
 }k mod)ten, they were 
 
 Ii 
 
 i<0) modjte, I might 
 bu inocbteft, thou mightst 
 ev modjte, he might 
 auv mbebten, we might 
 ibv morbtet, you might 
 fte molten, they might d 
 
 ■ _2 
 « 
 u 
 -a 
 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 t 
 A 
 
 il 
 
 id) babe 
 Mt baft 
 er bat 
 auv baben 
 ibr babet 
 \ii baben 
 
 I have 
 g thou hast 
 ( 5 he has 
 ' 5 we have 
 <=> you have 
 
 they have , 
 
 ,1 
 
 f a 
 
 i^ babe 
 bit babeft 
 ev babe 
 wiv b^ben 
 ibv babet 
 fie baben 
 
 I may have been 
 ~ allowed, &c. 
 l ° 
 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 s 
 
 il 
 
 id) batfe 1 I had 
 Ml battefl | ^ thou hadst 
 ev bafte 1 » he had 
 auv batten j S we had 
 ihr battet 1 <*> you had 
 m batten J they had 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 u 
 
 id) bafte ~\ I might have been 
 bu battefl 1 ■£ allowed, &c. 
 cv Jjatte I "g 
 roiv batten \ 2 
 ibv battet « 
 fte fatten J 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 i 
 « 
 
 p 
 
 i! 
 
 id) roevbe 1 I shall 
 mi auvft | _: thou wilt 
 er rohb f £, he will 
 auv roevben f : » we shall 
 tbv roertet 1 - you will 
 fte roevben J they will 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENS! 
 
 I' 
 
 il 
 
 id) wevbe 1 (if) I shall be al 
 bit wevbeft | j_r lowed, &c. 
 ev roetbe i ~, 
 auv auvben f g 
 tf>c roevbet - 
 fie roevben J 
 
 SECOND FUTURE IENSE. 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 ii 
 
 id; wevbe ' 
 du teirft 
 ev uuvb 
 am' tuerben 
 ibv roevbet 
 fte werben 
 
 g I shall 1 
 *§ thou wilt 
 . e he will 
 r ■& we shall 
 g you will 
 S, they will . 
 
 > 
 
 id) roevbe 
 bu wevbefi 
 ev wevbe 
 roiv roevben 
 ibv werbet 
 fte roevben J 
 
 5 (ii) I shall have 
 *§ been allowed, 
 
 i 
 
(o hare 
 
 AR VERBS. $ 83. 869 
 
 emark 11.) 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 
 TPartJinff. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 moften, 
 to be allowed. 
 
 mogenb, 
 being allowed. 
 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PERFECX. 
 
 
 
 gempct)r r)abett, 
 to have been al- 
 lowed., 
 
 gemodjr, 
 allowed 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 
 
 
 id? tviirbe *) Jg 6 
 bu jviirbcfi 1 _? <** 
 rv au'irbe 1 ~, :3_^ 
 t,ut anhben [ «*» o | 
 il)r an'ivbet ~ "« o 
 fte anuben j _-£ 
 
 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 
 
 
 tdi anii-be ] S > «3 
 bu anirbefl j % £^ 
 \x an'ivbe 1 ^~ -a <y 
 nnr anivben | [ •& g «s 
 tljr antvbet 1 ? xg 
 fte nnirben J « M J 
 
 
 
 
370 
 
 PARADIGMS OF IRR: 
 
 bliged ; 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 S/3 
 
 idj mttfi, 
 bu mupt, 
 er mup, 
 mix mi'tffen, 
 t^v miiffet, 
 ft? miiffeu/ 
 
 I am 
 
 thou art 
 he is 
 we are 
 you are 
 they are 
 
 Us 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Si 
 
 id) mttfite, 
 bu mupteft, 
 er mupte, 
 roir mufiteii, 
 ibr mufctet, 
 fte mufjten, 
 
 I was 
 thou wast 
 he was 
 we were 
 you were 
 they were 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) fiafce 
 Mi baft 
 er fcat 
 roir baben 
 ibr babet 
 fte baben 
 
 I have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 they have J ^ 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) botte 
 bu battcfr 
 er bfltte 
 nnr batten 
 ibr Ijattet 
 fte batten 
 
 n 
 
 I had 
 thou hadst 
 he had 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 ,•(1 
 « (S 
 
 id) roerbe 1 
 bu nnrft | ^ 
 er nnrb i £. 
 roir roerben f ==* 
 tverber 5 
 fte roerben J 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe 
 bu roirft 
 er roirb 
 roiu roerben 
 tbv roerbet 
 3[fte roerben . 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) miiffe, 
 bu muffefr, 
 er miiffe, 
 roir niiiffen, 
 ibr miiffet, 
 fte niiiffen, 
 
 I may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE 
 
 id) miifste, 
 bu ntiipteft, 
 er mitfite, 
 roir in up ten, 
 ibv miifjtet, 
 fte mufjten, 
 
 I might ) . 
 
 thou mightst | <u 
 he might ^Ja 
 we might 
 you might 
 they might 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) f)abe 
 bu babefl 
 er babe 
 roir baben 
 ibr babct 
 fte b>beu 
 
 I may have been 
 obliged, &c. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 batte 
 bu battefl 
 er batte 
 roir batten 
 ibr battet 
 fte fatten 
 
 I might have been 
 -^ obliged, &c. 
 
 n 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe ^) (if) I shall be 
 
 bu roerbefi 
 er roerbe 
 n)ir roerben 
 ibr roerbet 
 fte roerben 
 
 obliged, &c. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE 
 
 .id) roerbe 'l g 
 g^bu roerbefi |* 
 ^ gjer roerbe i ^ 
 -"Irotr roerben j «&• 
 
 (if) I shall have 
 been obl'ged 
 &c. 
 
 go ibr roerbet g 
 ■* [fte roerben J & 
 
most, 
 
 LAR VERBS. $ 83. 
 
 371 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Wantirg. 
 
 rRESEKT TENSE 
 
 ntiiffen, 
 to be obliged. 
 
 FKESENT. 
 
 miiffenb, 
 being obliged. 
 
 rERFECT TENSE. 
 
 to hare been 
 obliged 
 
 rER7XCT, 
 
 flemufjt, 
 obliged. 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 id) ttiirbe 
 bu roiirt-efi 
 
 cr nnirbe 
 
 nnv rouvben 
 
 tf)i roiirbet 
 
 fte nntb.'it J ^"o 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 tcb roiirbe 1 £ 
 bu nu'irbefl | -§ 
 cr tuiirbe I ^ 
 
 5 4 
 
 nur reurben f ^ s 
 tfcc roihbet 
 fte ttutbcn 
 
 tfcr TOiirbet | H -g g 
 
372 
 
 PARADIGMS OF IRK 
 
 t, to be 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 il 
 
 Si 
 
 id) foil, 
 Ml foil ft, 
 er foil, 
 mtr follen, 
 tbr follet, 
 fte follen, 
 
 I am 
 
 thou art 
 he is 
 we are 
 you are 
 they are 
 
 > QJJ 
 
 tcf> follte, 
 bu foil left, 
 er. follte, 
 voir foil ten, 
 if)r folitct, 
 fte follten, 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I was 
 
 thou wast 
 he was 
 we were 
 you were 
 
 I 8 
 
 they were J 
 
 I ° 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) babe 
 bit baft 
 ev bat 
 mtr baben 
 tbr bnbet 
 fte baben 
 
 
 1-d 
 
 I g b0 
 
 1 have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have f ° 
 you have | § 
 they have J jg 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) bafte 
 bit battcft 
 er batte 
 voir batten 
 tbr battet 
 fte batten 
 
 ^ 
 
 I had 
 thou hadst 
 he had 
 we had 
 you had 
 
 they had J 
 
 I S 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 d) voerbe ") 
 mi tin r ft 
 er_ tiuvb [ 
 tytr wcrbeti f ! 
 
 br roerbet 
 fte roerben J 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 J* 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 1 Si I shall 1 
 
 id) reei-be 
 bit urn- ft 
 er roirb 
 wir roerben 
 tbr roerbet 
 fie voeiben 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) folle, 
 bu follejt, 
 er folle, 
 voir follen, 
 ibr follet, 
 fte follen, 
 
 I may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 t? 
 Iji 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 i6) follte, 
 bu folltcfr, 
 er follte, 
 roir follten, 
 tbr folitct, 
 fte follten. 
 
 I might 1 . 
 
 thou mightst I <u 
 he might i ^ 
 we might f "§ 
 you might j « 
 they might j •** 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) t)abe 
 bu b«beft 
 er fyabc 
 roir baben 
 ibr babet 
 fte fyabett 
 
 I may have been 
 ^ obliged, &c. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I might have been 
 obhged, &,c. 
 
 id) batte ~] 
 bu batteft [ 
 er batte [ 
 roir batten f 
 ibr battet 
 fte fatten J 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE, 
 td) roevbe ^ (if) I shall 
 
 bu roerbefl 
 er voerbe 
 nu'r roerben 
 ibr roerbet 
 fte roerben 
 
 obhged, &c. 
 
 be 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 d) roevbe > ) 
 
 §j^|bu roerbeft | ^ 
 
 ' o)J§|o>« roerben j ~ 
 £ o jibr roerbet ,». 
 
 (il) I shall have 
 been oblige.^ 
 &c. 
 
 Iflc roetben 
 
oWiffed. 
 
 ULAR VERBS, § 83. 
 
 373 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Wanlim 
 
 PRESENT TENSE, 
 
 folien, 
 to be obliged. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 foUenb, 
 being obliged. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 (jefollt Ijalien, 
 to have been 
 obliged. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 flefottt, 
 obliged. 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE, 
 
 trti 
 
 ttMirbe "j 
 ronrbeft | 
 
 
 a> . 
 
 Hi 
 
 „ 
 
 4 
 
 cr 
 
 nnirbe J 
 
 z 
 
 2 - 
 
 wit n>iivben f 
 
 
 2 =v 
 
 ibi 
 
 roiirbet ( 
 
 
 
 fie 
 
 ttfirben J 
 
 
 ~* 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 id) 
 
 triivbe "l 
 
 ~ 
 
 r« 
 
 
 ttriirbefl | 
 roiirbt I 
 
 r roiirben f 
 
 3 
 
 -3 U 
 
 toi 
 
 — 
 
 = O 
 
 r 
 
 toiirbet 1 
 tuiirben J 
 
 (33 
 
 21 
 
874 
 
 PARADIGMS OF IRRE 
 
 aastffctt. 
 
 E (3 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) roeifi, 
 t>n roeijjf, 
 er metjr}, 
 wir iviffen. 
 ibr rutffct. 
 
 |te nn|)ett, 
 
 I know, 
 thou knowest. 
 he knows. 
 we know, 
 you know, 
 they know. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id? rcufke, 
 t>u routjtejt, 
 er tuujjre, 
 auv imtjjrett, 
 
 tt)V tDUJjtCt, 
 
 )it roufjtett, 
 
 I knew, 
 thou didst 
 he knew, 
 we knew, 
 you knew, 
 they knew 
 
 know. 
 
 d) babe 
 Mi baft 
 ev hnt 
 ton baben 
 ibr babet 
 fie bftben 
 
 PERFECT TENSE 
 
 1 
 
 I have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 they have 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) bcifte 
 mi battefl 
 er ^atte 
 rotr batten 
 ibr batfet 
 fie batten 
 
 !- 
 
 I had 
 thou hadst 
 he had 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe ^ 
 mi luirft 
 er nmb 
 wtv wevbett 
 tbr roerbet 
 fie roerben 
 
 \i 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 ri 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) trerbe 
 
 bn nnvft 
 
 er nurb 
 
 wir roerben f «5. 
 
 tbr roerbet I jf 
 
 fie toerben j & 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) ttnffe, 
 bu lviffejr, 
 er roiffe, 
 toil rotffen, 
 ibr nuffet, 
 fie nnffeti, 
 
 I may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 iH) nniftte, 
 bit tuiifltefl, 
 er nnitjte, 
 roir nmfitert, 
 ibr luiifhet, 
 \k roujjtcu, 
 
 I might 
 thou mightst 
 he might 
 we might 
 you might 
 they might 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) babe 
 bit bflbcfi 
 er babe 
 wir baben 
 ibr babet 
 fte baben 
 
 I may have 
 known, &c. 
 
 \6) batte 
 bu brtttefi 
 er bit tie 
 mix hatten 
 ibr battet 
 fie tyaUm 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I might have 
 known, &c. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roevbe "| 
 bu roerbeft | .j- 
 er iverbe I JL 
 wir roevben j -"g" 
 ibr rocrbct 
 
 (if) I shall know. 
 &c. 
 
 (Te rcevbeit 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) rcevbe 
 bu tuerbeft 
 er luevbe 
 rotr roerben 
 ibr tuerbet 
 fie werben 4 
 
 s (if) I shall ha? s 
 -5 known, &c. 
 
to kcow^ 
 
 GULAR VERBS. § 83. 
 
 375 
 
 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE- INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE 
 
 FIRST FUTTRE. 
 
 id) roiirte 
 
 Mi rciirbeft 
 tr nu'trbe 
 tt>ir ttriirbcn 
 tbv nntvbet 
 
 fte tviirbcn J 
 
 
 SECOND FTJT7RE. 
 
 id) tmivbe 1 g g ^ 
 bu roiirbeft | •» j§ $ 
 er ttfirbe I -» -a c 
 rotr toiirben f ^ = £ 
 tf>r nuirbct I § J § 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 1. wanting. 
 
 2. roiffe mi, 
 know thou. 
 
 3. luiffe er, 
 let him know. 
 
 1. kuiffen rotr, 
 let us know. 
 
 '2. kotffet it)v, 
 know ye. 
 
 3. toiffen lie, 
 let them know. 
 
 fie untrbett 
 
 PRESENT TENSE, 
 
 iviffen, 
 to know. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 getinigt haben, 
 to have known. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 nnffettb, 
 knowirg. 
 
 PERFECT, 
 
 getvu&t, 
 known. 
 
376 
 
 PARADIGMS OF IRREGULA 
 
 omn, to be 
 
 % 
 
 ? 
 
 K 
 
 !a 
 
 
 r i 
 
 
 2 
 
 * 
 
 (3 
 
 «> (3 
 
 Si* 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 ic^> roill, I will. 
 
 
 id) roolk, I may ] . 
 bit too lie jl, thou mayst | s 
 
 bit twillft, thou wilt. 
 
 
 er_ twill, he will. 
 
 
 er roolle, he may ,3 
 
 twir toolkit, we will. 
 
 
 twir toolkit, we may | '£ 
 
 ibr toolkt, you will. 
 
 
 ibr twoliet, you may « 
 fie roollen, they may J -^ 
 
 fte roollett, they will. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) twollte, I was 
 
 ] 
 
 id) twoflte, I might 
 
 A 
 
 bu iwollteft, thou wast 
 
 bio 
 
 bu twollteft, thou mightst 
 
 
 er two lite, he was 
 
 1-5 
 
 er toollte, he might 
 
 ^ 
 
 twir roollten, we were 
 
 1* 
 
 twir roollten, we might 
 
 p 
 
 ii)r roolltet, you were 
 
 ibr roolltet, you might 
 fte roollten, they might t 
 
 JB 
 
 fte roollten, they were 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id? f)abc 
 
 I have 
 
 fcJD 
 
 id) f><iht 
 
 I may have been 
 -i-r willing, &c. 
 
 bu baft 
 
 *-? thou hast 
 
 'I 
 
 du babefl 
 
 er l)at 
 
 ^ he has 
 
 er babe 
 
 S3 
 
 twir babcn 
 
 " 2 we have 
 
 twir babett 
 
 '2 
 
 tbf babet 
 
 « you have 
 
 s 
 
 ibr babet 
 
 cs> 
 
 fte babett J they have 
 
 £ 
 
 fte babett 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 tit ijatte 1 I had 
 
 bit 
 
 id; ^cittc ~] I might have been 
 
 Ml batteft 
 
 +?■ thou hadst 
 
 | 
 
 bu bntteji 
 
 *? willing, &c. 
 
 er ^>atte 
 
 , ^ he had 
 
 73 
 
 er fyiitte 
 
 " 
 
 twir batten 
 
 ' 2 we had 
 
 twir batten 
 
 • » 
 
 ibr battet 
 
 « you had 
 
 
 ibr battet 
 
 03 
 
 fte batten u 
 
 they had 
 
 ,0 
 
 fte fatten t 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe "| I shall 
 
 * 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 (if) I shall be wil« 
 
 on rotrft 1 jj thou wilt 
 
 I 
 
 bu roerbeft 
 
 ^ ling, &c. 
 
 er vutib i j3 he will 
 
 
 er roerbe 
 
 J 
 
 twir roerben [ » we shall 
 
 '> 
 
 iwir roerben 
 
 ibr roerbet 1 2 you will 
 fte roerben J they will , 
 
 § 
 
 ibr roerbet 
 
 2 
 
 •° 
 
 fte roerben 
 
 
 SECOrrD FUTURE TENS! 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSF. 
 
 id) roerbe "| g I shall 
 
 a 
 
 id) roerbe 
 
 « (if) I shall have 
 
 bit twir ft 1 v» thou wilt 
 
 a> be 
 
 bu roerbeft 
 
 >g been willing, &c 
 
 er roirb I ^ he will 
 
 r a .B 
 
 er roerbe 
 
 oa- 
 
 twir roerben (3 we shall 
 
 vrs 
 
 twir roerben 
 
 '5 
 
 ibr roerbet | 1 you will 
 
 > £ 
 
 ibr twerbet 
 
 e» 
 g 
 
 fte roerben , 
 
 £ they will . 
 
 .A 
 
 fte roerben 4 
 
 3» 
 
 
JGULAR VERBS. 
 
 §83. 
 
 3*77 
 
 Willing* (£!fe RemartPu.) 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 td) tviivbe ■* 
 bu miirbefi 
 er wuxtt 
 wit nmrben 
 ifev tuiivbet 
 fte nmvben . 
 
 ^=3 3 W) 
 
 © o q 
 2 -Si 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 tcfe witvbe 1 
 bu tuiivbeft | 
 er wiirbe 
 wit roiuben f 
 i^r nutvbet 
 fie nmvben 
 
 I j 
 
 J I 51 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 1. Wanting. 
 
 2. SffioUc bU, wiK 
 
 thou. 
 
 3. SBoIIeer, 
 
 willing. 
 
 INFINITIVE, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE, 
 
 tuollen, 
 
 to be willing. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Qcrootlf f>abcn, 
 to have willed. 
 
 PARTICIPLE 
 
 roollenb, 
 willing 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 aettjollt, 
 willed 
 
3*78 REMARKS ON butfett, UtllH 
 
 (9) Remarks on iff fen. * 
 
 This vcr; is ojmmonly rendered, to dare, though the primary sense 
 seems to be that given above, viz, To be permitted: the signification, 
 to dare, is one in which it is now seldom used. The verb is also 
 employed (only in the Imperfect Subjunctive, however,) to denote 
 what probably may be, and may then be translated by such words as 
 might, need, would, &c. : thus, Gfg bitrfte je£t ju fptit fein, it may or 
 might be too late now : (S'g biirfte ine(Ietd)t luafjt fein, it might per- 
 chance Is true. It also signifies, to need, to have occasion, &c: as, (St 
 barf nuv reben, he needs only to speak ; (5r barf fid) banUer nid)t toun* 
 tern, he must not or should not wonder at that. When used without an 
 infinitive after it, one must be supplied to complete the construction: 
 thus, (5: bavf uidjt in bag £aug (fommen), he ventures not {to come) 
 into the house. 
 
 (10) Remarks on fonrten. 
 
 The original signification of fonnen was to know, or to know how ; 
 nence the present sense, to be at liberty to do a thing, to be able ; 
 as, id) farm tefen unb fd}teiben, I can (know how to) read and write. 
 Its chief power now, is to indicate bare possibility, and hence it is 
 often aptly translated by the English, may: as, Qx fann eg fcerjtanben 
 Ija&en, he may (possibly) have understood it. It differs, therefore, 
 from bjtvfen, when it (bitvfen) is used (in the Imperfect Subjunctive) 
 to express possibility ; for biirfeu not only signifies that the thing 
 may be, but that it probably is or will be. Jtcnnen like biirfen, has 
 sometimes an infinitive understood after it, to complete the con- 
 struction. 
 
 (11) Remarks on mogen. 
 
 SJlogcn marks possibility under allowance or concession from an- 
 other : as, (Sx mag lad) en, he may laugh ; that is, he has permission 
 to laugh, no one hinders him. ©r mag eht Braver SWann fein, he may 
 (I grant) be a brave man; where the possibility of his being a brave 
 man, is a thing conceded. Kindred to this are the other significa- 
 tions (chance, inclination, wish, &c.) usually attributed to this verb : 
 thus, eg modite regnen, it might rain ; that is, the causes that seem to 
 forbid, are likely not to operate ; id) modite eg bejroeifcln, I am dis- 
 posed or inclined to doubt it, that is, / might, doubt it altogether, but 
 for certain circumstances seeming to forbid : mege eg ber £tmmel ge« 
 ben, may heaven grant it ; id) mag eg nid)t tlmn, Id: not like to do 
 it, that is, I am not permitted by my feelings to do it cheerfully, &c 
 
[often and woUtn. § 83. 379 
 
 (12) J&emarks on muff en. 
 
 The German muffen and the English must, are very near equiva- 
 lents. The predominant power of the word is everywhere that of 
 obligation or necessity, and this being kept in mind, it will often be 
 convenient to employ in translating it, such words, as, be obliged, am 
 to, have need to and the like. Often an infinitive is understood with 
 it : as, id) mu{j gitviicf, I must (go) back. 
 
 (13) Remarks on foil en. 
 
 The prime and prevalent use of fotten is to indicate obligation or 
 necessity. Whal particular word or phrase shall be employed to 
 translate it, in any given case, must be determined by circumstances. 
 [t is only necessary always to adhere to the 'primary idea ; for in 
 whatever way expressed, that primary sense must be kept in view. 
 The following examples will be sufficient to show this: 
 ©it feUft bci6 tf;un, thou art to (i. e. art obliged to) do that : 
 @v foil gel;en, he is to (i. e. is bidden to) go : 
 <Sc(( id) c6 Ijaben ? am I to (i. e. am I bound or am I permitted to) 
 
 have it 1 
 3)te STotte foil gefdilcigen toerbert fetn, the fleet is said or reported to 
 
 (i. e. must, according to report) be beaten. 
 <Sie fetten ilui nid)t bcletbigt fyaben, you are supposed or admitted not 
 to (that is, you could not of necessity, in my opinion) have 
 offended him. 
 2Ba3 fell ber JQut ? what means the (i. e. what must be the meaning 
 
 of the) hat ? 
 ©enn er femmen fettle, fo to£H id) e$ tt)m fagen, if he should come (i. 
 e. should be obligedby circumstances to come) I will tell liim so. 
 
 So with an infinitive understood: toaS .fed i&)V what am I t€ 
 (do)? tva3 foil ba^? what signifies that? (i.e. supplying fetn, wha' 
 is that to be ?) 
 
 Qx tofiji uid)t roatf er tl;un foil, he does not know what to do. 
 
 (14) Remarks on m o 1 1 e n. 
 
 SBetum implies future purpose: thus, id) frill geljen, I will (to) gv, 
 i. e. my purpose is to go. The expression of mere futurity would 
 be, id) tuerbe gefyen. Kindred to this is another signification of 
 frellen : as, ct n>ill bid) gefefyett fyaben, he wills to have seen you, that 
 is, he will have it or affirms, that he saw you. 
 
wm •* 
 
 380 EXAMPLES ON THE USE OF bill 
 
 i,&c. $83. 
 
 (15) Examples, 
 further illustrating the uses of the preceding verbs. 
 
 3d) barf eg fjitn. 
 
 (£g bi'trfte »io(fcid)t watjr fetn. 
 
 (£g burfte tdol)l gefd)el)en. 
 
 ©it batfft eg nur forbern. 
 
 (Sr faun toeber lefen nod) fd)retben. 
 
 3d) fann mid) trren. 
 
 3d) fonnte ifnt nid)t ijevjtef;en. 
 
 JWnnen @tc Ijeute ju mir fommen ? 
 
 3d) mag bag md)t. 
 
 3d) mod)te gerne toiffen, hneotel Uljr 
 
 eg ijt. 
 3d) mod)te ttofyl dm8 ba»on f;a* 
 
 ben. 
 (5g mag fetn. 
 3d) mod)te tteber. 
 Sftogc er lange feben ! 
 3d) mnjj eg tl;un. 
 @r ntujjte fid) feuteg 23etrageng fd)d* 
 
 te eg ntd)t fo fommen ? 
 SBenn id) fterben mitjjte, fo toftrb* 
 
 id) rg ntd)t tf;un. 
 3d) wollte gerne gefyen. 
 
 3d) null ju ftufie gefyen. 
 
 3d) roottte, bap toir geljen fcttten. 
 
 <£ie fotlen fd)retben. 
 
 SBag fott bag ^etpen ? 
 (§g fell jid) jugetragen Ijaben. 
 ©er jtontg foil angefommen fetn. 
 SBenn er morgen fterben foflte. 
 SBenn bag fo fein follt *. 
 
 I am allowed to do it. 
 
 It might perhaps be true. 
 
 It might easily happen. 
 
 You need only ask for it. 
 
 He can neither read nor write, 
 
 I may be mistaken. 
 
 I could not understand him. 
 
 Can you come to me to-day ! 
 
 I do not like that. 
 
 I should like to know what 
 
 o'clock it is. 
 I should like to have som« 
 
 of it. 
 It may be. 
 
 I had rather ; I would rather. 
 May he live long ! 
 I must do it. 
 He should be ashamed of his 
 
 conduct. 
 Should it not so have happened? 
 If I should die, I would not do 
 
 it. 
 I would willingly (i. e. would 
 
 like to) go. 
 I will go on foot. 
 I was for our going. 
 You should write ; you are to 
 
 write. 
 What does that mean ? 
 It is said to have happened. 
 The king is said to have arrived. 
 If he should die to-mr rrow. 
 If that should be so. 
 
verbs. § 84. 381 
 
 § 84. Passive verbs. 
 
 (1) Tie passive voice is formed by adding to the auxiliary fterben 
 ' y to become,) through all its moods and tenses, the I erfect Participle of 
 the main verb, thus: 
 
 
 Indic. Active. 
 
 Indic. Passive. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 id) lobe, I praise, 
 
 id) tocrbe gelcbt, I am praised. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 idb Icbte, I praised, 
 
 id) tourbe gelcbt, I was praised. 
 
 Per/. 
 
 id) fyafce getobt, 
 
 i&l bin gelcbt toorben, 
 
 
 I have praised, 
 
 I have been praised. 
 
 Plup. 
 
 id) l)atte gelcbt, 
 
 id) toar gelobt ftorben, 
 
 
 I had praised, 
 
 I had been praised. 
 
 1. Fui. 
 
 id) tterbe Icben, 
 
 i6^ toerbe gelcbt ftcvben, 
 
 
 I shall praise, 
 
 I shall be praised. 
 
 2. Ful 
 
 . id) toevbe gelcbt l;aben, 
 
 ii) tterbe gelcbt roorben fern, 
 
 
 ,1 shall have praised, 
 
 I shall have been praised, &c. 
 
 (2) It will be noted, that wherever the perfect participle of the 
 main verb (as gelcbt above) is joined with the participle of the auxi- 
 liary, the latter is written ftovben, not getocvben, whereby an offensive 
 repetition (of the syllable ge) is avoided. Sometimes toorben is alto- 
 gether omitted in the past tenses, but this should be avoided. 
 
 (3) The German, by confining toerben with the past participle to 
 the expression o£ jiassivily and using fetn, when the participle is to 
 be taken as a mere adjective, has a manifest advantage over the Eng- 
 lish Passive. Thus, if we wish to say, in German, he is feared, it 
 will be, er ft t r b gefixrditet ; if the intention, however, be merely to 
 mark the state or character of the person as one who is feared, that 
 is, whose character or conduct inspires fear generally, the German 
 will be, er i fi gefurditet, he is (a) feared (man.) The form of ex- 
 pression in English, it will be observed, is the same foi both ideas : 
 •'he is feared." 
 
 (4) The Germans, however, employ the passive form far less fre- 
 quently than do the English. They prefer other methods: thus, man 
 fagt, one says, i. e. it is said; ber (£d)luftel f)a( jti) gefunber the lev 
 has been found. 
 

 382 
 
 PARADIGM Off A PASSIV: 
 
 § 85. PARADIGM OP 
 (Bciobt tocrfccit, 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 6 
 
 i 
 
 Is 
 
 id) roevbe "1 
 tu voivft 1 ^ 
 er rotrb 1 -g 
 roir voevben j *s 
 ibi nun-bet ^ 
 fie roerbeu J 
 
 I am 
 thou art 
 he is 
 we are 
 you are 
 they are 
 
 -6 
 
 V 
 
 i 
 p. 
 
 id)- roerbe 1 I may 
 bu roerbeft | ^ thou mayst 
 er roerte I *|» he may 
 roir roerbeu ['•s we may 
 ibv roerbet ^ you may 
 fte roerbeu J they may 
 
 1 
 '1 
 
 J3 
 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 i 
 
 1! 
 II 
 
 tcb nun-be ] 
 bit tvui^efl 1 j. 
 er tvurbe ( *g 
 roir rour&eu f ^ 
 ibr rourbet ° 
 fte rourbeu J 
 
 I was 
 thou wast 
 he was 
 we were 
 you were 
 they were . 
 
 1| 
 
 1 
 
 id) roi'trbe ") I might "l . 
 bit roiirbefi | ^- thou mightst | *» 
 er roiirbe 1 *g he might ! -g 
 roir roiirben f *S we might ( 0, 
 ibr rourbet *° you might 
 fte rourbeu J they might J ^ 
 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 Cm 
 
 11 
 
 tct) bin ^ = 
 bu bift | £ 
 
 ei *. { K I I 
 rotr fiub f~ 
 
 ibr fcib o 
 
 fte fiub J g, 
 
 I have ' 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 they have , 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 id) fei 
 bu feieft 
 er fei _ 
 roir feicn 
 ibr feiet 
 fie feien 
 
 = I may have been 
 ■g praised, &c. 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 1 
 
 ii 
 II 
 
 id) roar 
 bu roavft 
 er roar 
 unv roaren 
 ibr roavet 
 fte roareu 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 I had 
 thou hadst 
 he had 
 we had 
 you had 
 they hat*. w 
 
 C 
 
 QJ 
 
 i(^) rodre ") = I might have be«.a 
 bit rodreft | -g praised, &c. 
 er rodre 1 £ 
 roir roar en f^ 
 ibr rodret © 
 fte rodrcn J £> 
 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 11 
 
 id) roerbe 1 =f 
 du roirft | -g 
 er rotrb I, £ 
 roir roerbeu {£ 
 ibv roerbet | 3 
 fie roerbeu J «, 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 ~6 
 
 $ 
 
 ■1 
 
 V 
 
 ^0 
 
 id) roerbe 1 g (if) I shall be 
 bit roerbeft 1 £ praised, &c. 
 er roerbe i g 
 roir roerben [ ~ 
 iJj'r roerbet | % 
 lie roeibeu J ^, 
 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 s 
 
 II 
 
 II 
 
 id) roerbe ' 
 bu roirft 
 er rohb 
 roir roerbeu 
 tbr roerbet 
 fte roerbeu , 
 
 I 
 
 I shall 1 c 
 thou wilt j ; 
 he will i s 
 we shall f s 
 you will * 
 they will J J 
 
 u 
 I 1 
 
 id) roerbe 
 bu roerbefi 
 er tverbe 
 roir roerbett 
 ibr roerbet 
 fie roerben 
 
 g (if) I shall have 
 'H been praised, 
 
?ARAD^f ©P A PASSIVE VERB. 
 
 A PASSIVE VEKB. 
 to be praised. 
 
 §85. 
 
 383 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. | PAKTIC, 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 • 
 
 1. wanting- 
 I. uni^e Mt "1 
 3. ircerbe cr | ^ 
 1. loerben wit J»!s 
 '2. iverbet ihr | « 
 3. n>erbeu fte J 
 be thou praised, 
 he. 
 
 vl e I o b t roerbeit, 
 to be praised, 
 
 
 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 
 
 gelobtiuprbenfcin. 
 
 to have beeu 
 
 praised. 
 
 (jelobt, 
 
 p raised 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 
 FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 
 id? tturbe ]s J£ 6 
 bu wiirbejl | -g j& 
 cr wfirfce i § 2_- 
 rotr rcurben [ — c v 
 tbr roiirtti | i» "S'S 
 fie rourbeu J s> *-< &. 
 
 
 rocrbengelobtrcer: 
 
 ten.- 
 
 to be about to 
 
 be praised. 
 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 
 
 
 id) »nrbe 
 
 bu rmtrbeft 
 cr roiirbe 
 tmr rsurten 
 $r raurbet 
 fte tr-urbert . 
 
 s £cj 
 
 S « ~T3 
 
 — ^ 5 °« 
 
 <35 >«*J3 
 
 
 
 
384 REFLEXIVE VERBB. § €• 
 
 § 86. Reflexive Verbs. 
 
 (1) A verb is said to be reflexive, when it represent' the subject 
 as acting- upon itself. We have several such in English : he deports 
 himself well; he bethought himself; they betook themselves to the 
 woods; where the subject and the object, in each case, being identi- 
 cal, the verb is made reflexive. It is manifest, that any active transi- 
 tive verb may thus become a reflexive verb. 
 
 (2) Strictly speaking, however, those only are accounted reflex * 
 ives, that can not otherwise be used. The number of these, in German, 
 is much larger than in English. Some of them require the reciprocal 
 pronoun to be in the Dative, but most of them govern the Accusative : 
 thus, (with the Dative,) id) btlbe mir ntcfyi ein, I do not imagine ; (with 
 the Accusative,) id) fd)dme mid), I am ashamed. Further examples 
 are the following : 
 
 WITH THE DATrVE. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 (Sid) cmmafjen, to presume; usurp. (Sid) anfd)tcfen, to prepare, 
 
 ©id) au$bcbingen, to condition. ©id) dufiern, to intimate. 
 
 ©id) etubilbcn, to imagine. ©id) bcbcutfen, to be thankful for. 
 
 ©id) getrauen, to be confident. ©id) bcbenfen, to pause to think. 
 
 ©id) fd)meid)eln, to flatter one's ^>ii) begeben, to repair to ; to 
 self. happen. 
 
 ©id) ttotnefymen, to propose to ©id) bcfyelfen, to put up with ; to 
 
 one's self. make do 
 
 ©id) fcorfteUen, to represent to ©id) freuen, to rejoice. 
 
 one's self. 
 
 <^ld) nubevft>ved)en, to contradict, ©id) toiberfejjen, to resist. 
 
 (3) Since the action of these verbs is confined to the agent, they 
 are rightly regarded as intransitives ; for the verb and the pronoun 
 under its government, are to be taken together as a single expression 
 for intransitive action: thus, id) freue mid), I rejoice myself that is, I 
 rejoice, or delight in. 
 
 (4) In like manner, reflexives often become the equivalents of 
 passives : as, ber ©diliiffel t;at fid) gefunben, the k« y has found itself 
 that k, the key is found or has been found &c. 
 
 (5) In some instances a verb is found to have, both in the simple 
 and in the reflexive form, the same signification : as, irren and jiffy 
 irren, to err ; to be mistaken. 
 
mm 
 
 AEFLEXIVE VERBS. $ 86. 
 
 385 
 
 (6) It is worthy of remark, also, that some transitives, upon pass- 
 ing into the reflexive form, undergo some change of signification : thus, 
 from berufen, to call, comes fid) berufen, to appeal to. It is generally 
 easy, however, in these cases, to account for such changes. The 
 following are additional examples : 
 
 Q3ebcnfen, to think upon ; 
 33efd)etben, to assign; 
 gmben, to find ; 
 fturd)ten, to fear ; 
 aftten, to guard ; 
 SJlacfcen, to make ; 
 SteUetL to place; 
 sCeranrroerfen, to answer for; 
 V J3 erg el) en, to pass away ; 
 Slerlaftcn, to leave; 
 
 fid) bebenfen, to pause to think. 
 
 fid) bcfdieiben, to be contented 
 with, 
 fid) finben (in. ertta3), to accommo- 
 date one's self to a tbing. 
 fid) furd)tcn, to be afraid of. 
 
 fid) fjitten, to beware. 
 
 fid) mad)en (an etftaS), to set 
 about a thing, 
 fid) ffrtten, to feign, pretend. 
 
 fid) Jjercmftuoricn, to defend one'a 
 self, 
 fid) »ergeljen, to commit a fault. 
 
 fid) certain, to rely ujoa- 
 
 17 
 
• ■ 
 
 386 PARADIGM OF A REFLEXIVE VERB, § 87. 
 
 § 87. PAKADIGM OF A 
 (£trf> frciicit, 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 id) freue mid), 
 bit fmteji bid), 
 er frettet [fit, 
 ,auv ftcueii un§, 
 tbv freuct end), 
 3 iic frcueu fid?, 
 
 lis 
 
 * (3 
 
 s<3 
 
 I rejoice, 
 thou rejoices*. 
 he rejoices, 
 we rejoice 
 you rejoice. 
 they rejoice. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 id) frcite mid), 
 bit fi't- ucft bid), 
 er freue fid), 
 voir freueii uu3, 
 ii)r freuct cud), 
 lite freueu fid), 
 
 I may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 lliey may 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) freuete mid), 
 cu fmtetcfi btdb, 
 er freuete fid), 
 wir freueteu iinfl, 
 
 it)r fienefet end), 
 jk freueteu fid), 
 
 I rejoiced. 
 thou didst rejoice. 
 
 he rejoiced, 
 we rejoiced, 
 you rejoiced, 
 they rejoiced. 
 
 id) babe mid) 
 Mt baft bid) 
 er bat fid) 
 >» it baben mil 
 
 ibr babet end) 
 fu babeu fid) 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 I have 
 
 \id) freuete mid), I might 
 bit freueteft bid), thou mights: 
 er freuete fid). he might 
 voir freueteu uitS, we might 
 ibr freuetet curb/ you might 
 )k freueteu fid), they might 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 ^ thou hast 
 5 he lias 
 £ we have 
 « you have 
 they have 
 
 id) babe mid) 
 mi babeft bid) 
 er babe fid) 
 voir baben itnS 
 ibr baber ?nd) 
 \k baben fid) 
 
 I may hai e re« 
 
 ^ joiced, &e. 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte mid) 1 I had ) 
 mi bat re ft bid) [ ^ thou hadst | -a 
 
 er batte fid) ' I 5 he had IS 
 
 aur batten xmi [«£■ we had f .§. 
 
 ibr battel eud) | ^ you had | V. 
 
 ,: ie l;atteii f;d) J they had J 
 
 FIRST F'JTURE TENSE. 
 
 id) roerbe mid)" 1 ) I shall 
 
 mi roirfl bid) i . thou wilt 
 
 er nurb fid) ( 5 he will 
 
 t»ir werben unS f 5 we shall 
 
 ibr roerbet eucb '^ you will 
 
 \\i roerben fid) J they will 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 id) batte mid) "] 
 bu bcittefr bid) I «* 
 er f> a 1 1 e fid) I g 
 »Dir batten un6 f •£- 
 ibr battel nid) I « 
 fie batten fid) J 
 
 I might have 
 rejoiced &c. 
 
 SECO.ND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 icb rcerbe mid)l ~~ I shall 
 Mi rotrjr bid) | -$ thou wilt 
 er wirb fid) | -»• he will 
 wir voerbeu uu£ fs we shall 
 ibr roerbet end) | g_ you will 
 fie vuerbeu fid) J '£> they will 
 
 r"o 
 
 11 
 
 rt 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (if) I sliall re- 
 joice, &c. 
 
 id) roerbe mid)') 
 bu voerbeft i>id) | ^ 
 er roerbe fid) I 2 
 voir voerbeu uu3 | 2 
 ibr roerbet end) t * = - 
 ue roerben fid) J 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 (if) I shall have 
 rejoiced, &c. 
 
 id) roerbe mid)^ = 
 Mi voerbeft bid) | -§ 
 er joerbe fid) ! -» 
 mir roerber un§ [ ts 
 ibr roerbet cuci) I £ 
 ft? voerben fid) J % 
 
PARADIGM OF A REFLEXIVE VERB. § 87. 381 
 
 REFLEXIVE VERB. 
 to rejoice. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 rif.Sl FUTURE. 
 
 id) UMtvte ntirf) "| £ . 
 bit tuiirfceft bid) \ ^ *" 2 
 er roiivbe fid) I | 2 , 
 voir tuurben utt§ f 2 § g 
 it)r roiir&et end? ^ -£'5 
 fie nmrDen fid} J M "^ 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 icf) roiirbe mirf) )s £ o 
 bu tiuirbefl fctd) | -| _§=3 
 er nun be ltd? I -=> -5-0 
 h»tt wurbeu ntrt f ~ g & 
 ihr tuiirbtt end? | £_ xfc 
 fie murDcn ftrf> J & « g 
 
 OPERATIVE. INFINITIVE, PARTIC. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 1. wanting. 
 >. freue (eu) btcfe 
 rejoice thou,&c. 
 ;J. rreue (er) fid), 
 
 1. freueu (wtr) 
 UtlS, • 
 
 2. ficuef (i6r)cttct), 
 
 3. fmieu (\ii) fid;. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 ficb fretien, 
 to rejoice. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 )icb oefmtt ^abett, 
 to have rejoiced. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ftd) frettrub, 
 rejoicing. 
 
 PERFECl. 
 
 Wanting^ 
 
388 COMPOUND VERBS. § 88. § 89. 
 
 § 88. Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 (1) Th -J impersonal verb, properly so called, is one destitute of 
 the first and stcond persons: being confined to the third person sin- 
 gular, and having for its grammatical subject the pronoun eg, without 
 definite reference to any antecedent, as, 
 
 eg regnet it rains; eg bV?t, it lightens; 
 
 eg fdmett, it snows; eg ft ri, it freezes; 
 
 7.6 bounert, it: thunders; eg t iut, it thaws; 
 
 pg tyagelt, it hails; eg tagt, it dawns. 
 
 (2) It must immediately appear, that a verb may be impersonal* 
 and yet belong to any of the classes of verbs described in preceding 
 sections. Thus some are transitive : some are intransitive ; some 
 art; passive ; some are reflexive ; &c. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Crg argcrt mid), it vexes me, i. e. I am vexed; 
 
 eg ftiert tfni, it chills him, i. e. he is chilled or frozen; 
 
 eg buugevt mid), it hungers me, i. e. I am hungry; 
 
 eg veifi, there is a hoar frost; 
 
 es fyetfit, it is said ; 
 
 eg teirb Utet bcitton getebct, it is much talked about; 
 
 eg Betftefjet fid), it understands itself, i. e. it is understood ; &c. 
 
 eg fragt fid), it asks itself, i. e. it is asked, it is the question ; 
 
 eg gtebt 95ieufdieu, it gives or ?/teZc?s men, i. e. Zhere are men. 
 
 § 89. Compound Verbs. 
 
 (1) Various derivative verbs in German are produced by the union 
 of simple words with prefixes. * Most of these prefixes are separalle^ 
 that is, may stand apart from the radicals ; some, however, are found 
 to be inseparable', some are either separable or inseparable, according 
 to circumstances. 
 
 (2) The prefixes are themselves, also, either simple or compound ; 
 as, i) c v fommen, to come here or hither; b; e x u b e x fommen, to come 
 
 * Under the name of'Prefixes are here comprehended all those invariable 
 wnds, (as adverbs and prepositions,) which are combined with other words to 
 vary or modify their signification They are, also, often called Particles. The 
 simple words with which they are united, are generally verba ; but often nouns 
 end adjectives are, by prefixes, converted into verbs. 
 
SIMPLE PREFIXES SEPARABLE. §.90. S89 
 
 over here, or Jiitl er. In most instances, the prefixes may be trans- 
 lated severally as above; but often they are found to be merely in- 
 tensive or euphonic. * 
 
 §90. Simple Prefixes separable. 
 
 *nf. 
 
 2lus, 
 Set, 
 
 S3ar, 
 
 from, off, down; 
 
 to, at, in, on, towards 
 
 on, upon, up ; 
 out, out of, fro* ; 
 by, near, with ; 
 there, at ; 
 
 there, at ; 
 
 £itt, 
 
 Chnpor, 
 Sort, 
 
 in, into ; 
 
 up, upward, on high ; 
 
 onward, away, forward ; 
 
 ©egcn, 
 
 towards, against ; 
 
 3n, 
 «£etin, 
 
 in, within ; 
 home, at home ; 
 
 §*h 
 
 hither, here ; 
 
 
 thither, there, away ; 
 with; 
 
 3iari); after; 
 
 iftiet.er, down, downwards, under ; 
 Co, on, over, on account of; 
 
 35or, for, before ; 
 
 SScg, away, off; 
 
 $u, to, towards ; 
 
 jctt, to set or put down ; tc 
 
 depose. 
 Slufattiien, to catch at, i. e. tc 
 
 begin. 
 Sliifgebett, to go up ; to rise. 
 SluSucbnten, to take out ; to choose. 
 23 rifle ben, to stand by ; to assist. 
 SDabletben, to remain there, or at, 
 
 to stay ; to persist. 
 SDomtc&en, to reach there, i. e. to 
 
 offer. 
 @tnfaufen, to buy in ; to purchase. 
 (Smvovbcbeit, to Lift up. 
 gor I fat) veil, to drive or bear on; 
 
 to continue. 
 ©egenrjvitten, to hold against; to 
 
 resist ; to compare. 
 3m»ofjnett, to dwell in. 
 •^eimfe&rett, to turn homewards j 
 
 to return. 
 4?crbvingen, to bring hither, or 
 
 along, 
 ^tngefyen, to go thither, or away. 
 SRitne&men, to take with, or 
 
 along. 
 Stacbfotgcn, to follow after; to 
 
 succeed. 
 SRte&emtfsett, to pull down. 
 Dbliegen, to lie on, i. e. to apply 
 
 one's self to ; to be incum- 
 bent on. 
 SSorgebeii, to go before; to sur- 
 pass. 
 SKegbleiben, to stay away. 
 Sugeben, to give to ; to grant. 
 
 * This is likewise often the case in English : thus, ex (which literally signi- 
 fies out or out of,) has, in some words the signification very, exceedingly or 
 the like ; as, exasperate, to make very angry: so a, (literally, to. at ;) in the 
 word ameliorate is merely euphonic ; the derivative form (ameliorate) mean- 
 ing nothing more than the sirj pie one, meliorate. 
 
390 
 
 COMPOUND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. § 91. 
 
 § 91. Compound Prefixes separable. 
 
 2lnb>:in (nn + f>cim, to -home) ; 
 
 &<iUi (ba -f bet, there-by) ; 
 
 JDaber (ba -f- ber, there-hither) ; 
 
 JDafitn (ba + bin, there- thither) ; 
 
 SDngegen (ba ■+- a, Qen, there against) ; 
 
 2)«niej>et (ba + iitcbcr, there-below) ; 
 
 SDavan (bar -j- an, there-to) ; 
 
 33avauf (i>M + auf, there-on) ; 
 
 S£)areiu <.bar + etn, there-in) ; 
 
 2)at>cn 0>a -f ben, there-from) ; 
 
 Jt>a»cr (ba -f »er, there-before) ; 
 
 ^aruiber (ba + tmber, there-agaiiist) ; 
 
 £>a&u (ba + jit, there-to) ; 
 
 ©ajtoifd) it (ba -f jaufefeen, there-between) 
 
 Qfinbet (ein + ber, into-hither); 
 
 ©ntgegen (ent -f gegen, apart-towards) ; 
 
 ©ntjraej (cnt + Jtuei, apart-two) ; 
 
 ^erab (bcr + ah, hither-down) ; 
 
 £>eran (bet + an, hither-to) ; 
 
 £>evauf (l)er -f auf, hlther-on) ; 
 
 4?erauf3 (her -f auS, hither-out) ; 
 
 Ǥerbei (ber + bet, hither-along) ; 
 
 ^eveiit (ber + etn, hither-into) ; 
 
 «£>evntebcr (ber + nieber, hither-down) 
 
 «£criiber (ber -f iibcr, hither-over) ; 
 
 Return (l)er + tint, hither-around) ; 
 
 ■!(penmfe; (ber + ltnfcr, hither-under) ; 
 
 pernor (ber -f- oov, hither-forward) ; 
 
 Jg>?v$Vl (bev + jji, hither-to^ ; 
 
 .£>inab (bin -f- ab, thither-down); 
 
 ^>iuan (bin + ait, thiiher-to) ; 
 
 ^tuaaf (bin + auf, hither-on or up) ; 
 
 «£tnau8 (bin + auS, thither-out) ; 
 £>inetn (bin + etn, thither-into) ; 
 
 6iutcn (t)tnt(en) + an, beliind-to) ; 
 
 9lnbeimfrellcn, to put home fo 
 
 i. e. to refer to. 
 i&aoitftebeit, to stand close by, 
 ©afjerffbleirben to sneak along 
 SDabtnetleu, to hasten away. 
 f£agegeufeiit, to be against. 
 2)anieberfcblaijeu, to beat down. 
 iDaranfVfcett, to put or lay there- 
 to, i. e. to risk, to stake. 
 SDaraufgebeu, to give there-or\ 
 
 i. e. to give an earnest ; 
 Saroinreben, to talk there-in, i. e. 
 
 • to interrupt. 
 S>auonlaiifeu, to run off or away. 
 2)tvoovltoi]en, to lie before. 
 25uuuberbaben, to have objections) 
 
 against. 
 SajHtbun. to do (in addition) 
 
 thereto ; to &dd. 
 ©ajroifcbeitrebeti, to speak there 
 
 in the midst. 
 C?iiiber£teben, to draw along. 
 (sSiitgegengebett, to go towards; to 
 
 go to meet. 
 ($:nr$roetbrecben, to break or burst 
 
 asunder. 
 •gerabfetjeu, to wit down; to 
 
 lower. 
 ^eraufitbren, to br..'; on or along, 
 ^erctnffabrcn, to dr ? or urge on. 
 .£jeran§fabvcit, to d" c out. 
 .£>evbeivufcn. to call , or towards. 
 Jperetnfabven, to drr ji or into. 
 ^ernieberblicfen, to look under, 
 i^eriiberfommen, to come over, 
 ■gknimgebcn, to give or hand 
 
 around. 
 «£>eninterfabren, to drive down. 
 i£)en>t>vtreteit, to step forward. 
 «£>er$u!reten, to step towards. 
 i£jtitabtreteit, to step down, 
 •jpttiantretett, to step up to. 
 ^iiianfjtcbeit, to pull up. 
 ^ptitauSruevfen, to throw ouu 
 £>inetugte§en, to pour into. 
 .§intanfe§en, to put behind; to 
 
 undervalue. 
 
COMPOUND PREFIXES SEPARABLE. §91 
 
 S91 
 
 £tnt?rbci (Winter + 6er, after-hither) ; 
 
 igiuiiibev (bin -(- iibeV, thither-over ; 
 
 <§Htmm (bin -|- tint, tliither-around) ; 
 
 £tuuutor (bin + untci, tluther-under) ; 
 
 «£imucg 
 
 £iuju 
 
 Uebereiit 
 
 Umber 
 Umbin 
 
 SSoriin 
 
 aswuuf 
 
 S301MU3 
 
 ajortct 
 
 SBovber 
 SKoviiber 
 
 (bin + lvcg, thither-away) ; 
 (bin + $11, thither- to wards) ; 
 (iibcr + ein, over-into) ; 
 
 (run -f- ber, around-hither) ; 
 (lint -f l)iit, around- thither) ; 
 
 (»W + an, before-to) ; 
 (»or + auf, before-on 
 
 or up) 
 
 (yin 1 + a\v°, before-out) ; 
 
 (»ov -f- bei, before-by) ; 
 
 (»ur -f ber, before-hither) 
 (ooi* + iibcr, before-over) ; 
 
 SSortucg (i50v + meg, before-away) ; 
 
 gutw (Jit -f »or, before-to) ; 
 
 ;..dtdf (jtl + viitf, back to) ; 
 
 Bufammett (je -f faiuuu-ii, to-geth';r; 
 
 v^tittetbcrfcbctt to see afterwards. 
 
 .£>itriibcvtrarteit. to carry over. 
 
 ^tunmflattent, to flutter there 
 about. 
 
 •§tniMUerfvri'itgeit, to leap down 
 there. 
 
 .^iinvfipicbinei!, to take away 
 
 J^iiijitetleit, 10 hasten away. 
 
 UebevctuEommen, to come over 
 into, i. e. to agree. 
 
 Umbevfdjiutcu, to gaze around. 
 
 Umbutfbitucn, to be able there- 
 about ; to forbear. 
 
 CCorauftdh'ii, to place before. 
 
 Siovaufftcuieit, to mount on be 
 fore ; to ascend. 
 
 SSovauSfeben, to see or spy oitf 
 before hand ; to anticipate. 
 
 SBorbeircitcti, to ride along before , 
 to ride past- 
 
 SBorJjerfcbeti. to foresee. 
 
 S3oriibcrfabvett, to drive along 
 past in a coach. 
 
 SBorwegnebnten, to take away be- 
 fore ; to anticipate. 
 
 jgtrboitrmn, to do before ; to escel. 
 
 3nrMt>f)mt, to return. 
 
 Sufammenfefent, to put together 
 
392 PARADIGM OF A COMPOUND VERB SEPARABLE. § 92. 
 
 § 92. PARADIGM OF A COil 
 %tnf<m$ew, 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 ^ liid) fange an, 
 < 2 bu ffingft an, 
 ( 3 er fangt an, 
 llroir fangen an, 
 2 , 1 1> v fanget an, 
 3 fte fangen an, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 I begin, 
 thou beginnest 
 he begins. 
 we begin, 
 you begin, 
 they begin. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 id) fange an, 
 Mi fa ik] e ft an, 
 er fange an, 
 roit fangen an, 
 ibr fangei an, 
 fie fangen an, 
 
 1 may 
 thou mayst 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 4 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 1 !tct> ft no, an, 
 '2 bit ftmjft an, 
 3 er ftng an, 
 !|rott ftngen an, 
 
 2 tbr ftnqet an, 
 
 3 fte fingtn an, 
 
 1 began, 
 thou didst begin, 
 he began. 
 we began, 
 you began, 
 they began. 
 
 id) ftnge an, 
 bit ft in] eft an, 
 er fin ge an, 
 mix ftngen an, 
 tbr ftnget an, 
 fie ffngen an, 
 
 I might 
 thou mightst 
 he might 
 we might 
 you might 
 they might 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 rid) babe 
 sijtai baft 
 Set bat 
 1 rotr babett 
 2tbt babet 
 3 ( fte babeit 
 
 1 «- 
 
 it 
 
 I have 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 
 they have J 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Itcb bafte 
 '2 Mt baftejt 
 3 cv batte 
 
 1 rotr batten 
 
 2 tbr battet 
 
 3 fie batten 
 
 1 had 1 
 
 thou hadst | • 
 he had ! § 
 we had f ff 
 you had 
 they had J 
 
 iM 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE 
 
 ijtd) roerbe ") 
 
 s 54 
 
 ^ 3[er rotrb i S 3 
 roit roerben j«£. 
 ibr roerbet I 5 
 fie roerben J 
 
 I shall 
 thou wilt 
 he will 
 we shall 
 you will 
 they will 
 
 id) babe 
 bu babefl 
 er babe 
 roit babeit 
 ibr babet 
 fte baben 
 
 1 « I may have be- 
 | ~ gun, &c. 
 
 id) batte 
 bu &attefi 
 er batte 
 roit fatten 
 ibr battet 
 fie fatten 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 ] ^ I might have be« 
 I | gun, &c. 
 
 \i 
 
 be- 
 
 gin, &c. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 . C 1 id) roerbe 1 e I shall ") 
 g ^ 2 bit rotr ft ! |» thou wilt | 
 55 / 3 er rotrb i ^ he will [ 
 
 
 ro tr roerben ; ^ we shall f"" 
 ibr roerbet I «j you will j > 
 ite wet ben J 5 they will J J: 
 
 FIRST FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 id> roerbe ) (if) I shall 
 
 bit roerbtfl I = 
 
 er roerbe ! s 3 
 
 rotr roerben f ««. 
 
 ibr roerbet j 5 
 
 fie roerben J 
 
 SECOND FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 Id) roerbe ") = (if) I shall hav# 
 bu roevbefl | ^ begun, &c. 
 er roerbe I Js- 
 roir roerben 1 ^ 
 tbr roerbet «, 
 fte roerben J 5 
 
PARADIGM OF A COMPOUND VERB SEPARABLE. § 92. 393 
 
 POUND YEKB SEPARABLE. 
 to begin. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE, 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 id) un'trbe *) i 
 
 bu rourbefi | = "°u 
 
 er roiirfre ! g= r-^ 
 
 tvir m fir ben [ 5_ § c - 
 
 tbr ttmrbd | § is'Sa 
 |*te luurben J _ 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 bu n>:'irbefl | 
 et n>nrbe 
 
 3«a 
 
 nnr lriir- en [^ gg 
 l&r ivn.pet | « is ffl 
 fie r^avben J 5 J«i 
 
 PRESENT TENSE, 
 
 1. wanting- 
 L fange (cu) an, 
 begin thou, &c 
 3. fange (er) a a. 
 
 1. fallen (nnr) an 
 
 2. fanget (tbr) an, 
 
 3. fangen (fie) an, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE 
 
 anfangen, or 
 
 anjufamien, 
 to begin. 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 angefattgen ba= 
 
 ben, 
 to have begun 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 angefattgen ruer= 
 
 ben, 
 
 to be about to 
 
 begin. 
 
 aufangenb, 
 
 beginning. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 ar gefangen, 
 begun. 
 
 IT 
 
S94 INSEPARABLE PREFIXES. § 93. § 94. 
 
 § 93 Observations on the Paradigm. 
 
 0) An inspection of the Paradigm above will show, that the so 
 paiatim of the prefix from the radical part of the verb, takes place 
 in the Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative, Infinitive (when preceded 
 by ju,) and the Perfect Participle. In the Indicative and Subjunc- 
 tive, however, the separation is not made, when, in dependent sen- 
 tences, the verb is placed at the end of a clause or period : thus, do 
 lie Sonne biefen SJlevgcn cutfging, fo ucvfdwanb bcr dhbd. when the sun 
 rose (aufgtng) this morning, the fog disappeared. 
 
 (2) In regard to the position of the particle when separated, it 
 must be noted that, in the Indicative, Subjunctive and Imperative, it 
 stands after the radical ; often, also, after the several words depen- 
 dent upon it : thus, id) fange baS 93ud) an, (where a n belonging to 
 f an g e, comes after the object,) I begin the book. 
 
 (3) In the Infinitive and the Perfect Participle, on the contrary, 
 the particle comes before the radical : being separated from it, in the 
 Infinitive, by $u, (when that preposition is employed,) and, in 
 the Participle, by the augment g e , which is peculiar to that part of 
 the verb: thus, anjufcuigen, (an+jn-f-fangen) to begin; to commence; 
 ttorgefteiU, (ycr+ge+ftel(t) placed before one ; represented. 
 
 (4) It remains to be added, that particles, when separated from 
 the radicals, receive the full or principal accent ; and, that the radicals 
 (if verbs) have the same form of conjugation, old or new, regular 
 cr irregular, as when employed without prefixes. 
 
 § 94. Inseparable Prefixes. 
 
 The Prefixes of this class, as the name implies, are always found 
 in close union with their radicals. They allow not even the augment 
 syllable g e , in the Perfect Participle, to intervene ; but reject it 
 altogether : * as, Ubtdt (not begebeeft) covered, from bebecfen, to 
 cover. Neither is $ u (when used) allowed to come between the 
 prefix and the Infinitive ; but stands before the two combined into 
 one word: as, nt empfangen, (not empjufangen,) to receive: except in 
 case of compound prefixes, wherein the first component is a separable 
 and the second an inseparable particle ; $ u being then inserted be- 
 tween the two particles; as, cutjuerfennen, (from anerfennen). The 
 inseparable prefixes are always unaccented. 
 
 * To this, however, must be excepted the case of the Prefix m t p ; which* 
 in a few instances, allows the augment <u to be prefixed : thus, (from mijj' 
 Ocuten, to misinterpret.) we have, in the Perfect Participle, (jenupfceiitet. 
 
OBSERVATIONS. § 95. § 9C. § 97. 
 
 395 
 
 lifter 
 
 (Snip, 
 
 Gat, 
 ©?< 
 
 (Be, 
 S3er, 
 
 mux 
 3«, 
 
 afte 
 
 near 
 
 § 95. Simple Prefixes inseparable. 
 
 Slftcrrcfccn, to talk behind (onegback) 
 
 to slander. 
 Q3efpininen, to come by, i. e to get, 
 
 to obtain. 
 '(Sntpjtufrcn, to find or feel within, to 
 
 perceive. 
 Chltgebeii, to go away or off; to escape. 
 GvfKivcu, to make clear fox {one); to 
 
 explain, 
 ©ebcufen (same as ben fen), to think 
 
 of. 
 SJiijjt'ciifcn, to misinterpret. 
 Q3evfct;lafcn, to sleep away, i. e. lose 
 
 by sleeping. 
 against ; ffi&ibcrftcbcii. to stand against ; to resist, 
 
 apart, asuu«t?r; SevfdnKtreu, to cut apart, or in pieces, 
 
 § 9G. Compound Prefixes inseparable. 
 
 beliind ; 
 
 w, over, to make ; 
 
 in, w vjnn ; 
 
 apart tway, to deprive of; 
 forth, 'vr, on behalf of; 
 
 (mainlr intensive or euphc 
 
 vie. ; 
 wrong, cironeously ; 
 away, a, loss ; 
 
 Slnbe (an + be, t» 
 
 Sluet 
 Staff t 
 
 21u»er 
 
 2lm>er 
 SBeonf 
 
 SJitpuer 
 QSorbe 
 
 U) 
 
 near) ; 
 
 (an + cr, U — for) ; 
 (<\iif + er, i'o — for) ; 
 (aii§ -f cr, out — for) ; 
 
 Qlnbetrcffcu, to hit or touch near to ; to 
 
 concern. 
 3TiievrVniten, to acknowledge ; to own. 
 SliifcrlHiiieii, to build up for ; to erect 
 3tuScriuat)lcH, to choose out for; to 
 elect, 
 (an + oer, to — away); Shtmtmiteit, to give away in trust; 
 
 to confide to. 
 (be + rtitf. near — on or up) ; SBeauftiagcn, to bring (duty) upon, i. e. 
 
 to commission. 
 (mif + oer, wrong — away); 2J2til»evjtet)cn, to understand wrong, 
 
 i. e. to mistake. 
 (cor + be, before — near) ; SSorbeljaltett, to hold or keep ahead 
 i. e. to put off; to reserve. 
 
 § 97. Observations. 
 93 e has in German the same power which it has in English. 
 It is, therefore, in most cases, better transferred than translated. Its 
 uses will he easily learned from examples. Tints, from 
 tflaoicn, to moan. 35cffageti, to feemoan. 
 
 (gttviieit, to strow. fflejtvcuen, to fiestrow. 
 
 gfrigen, to follow. SBrfefgen, to follow after, i. e. to obey. 
 
 Sltbetten, to labor. SSearbctten, to labor upon ; elaborate 
 
 fcctdien. to laugh. SBefa&cn, to laugh at. 
 
 ftiiiflcl, a wing. SBeflugetn, to furnish vdth vings. 
 
 ©liicf, happiness. 93etj(itcfen, to make happy, 
 
 gvet, free. SSefreien, to set free. 
 
 In some instances, it "s merely euphonic. 
 
306 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. § 97. 
 
 (2) GNtp and ent. (Snip is, probably, cn'ly another form of 
 e u t : occurring, however, only in three verbs; (empftuben, to feel; 
 nnpfcmgen, to receive ; empfefylen, to recommend :) and bearing a sense 
 but remotely related to its original. The prime and predominant 
 power of ent is that of indicating separation, departure, privation. 
 
 In some instances it has the kindred sense of approach or transi- 
 tion from one point or condition towards another. Examples. 
 
 ©eben, to go. 
 3tc()en, to draw. 
 S3iitben, to bind. 
 £ciupt, the head 
 
 Jtrcift, power. 
 
 23lcbe, dim-eyed, dull, bashful. 
 
 SSreunen, to burn, 
 <2prccben, to speak. 
 
 (Sntgefyen, to go away, to get orT. 
 (Sntjicfyen, to withdraw. 
 (Siitbtnben, to unbind. 
 (§utl)aupten, to deprive of head, to 
 
 behead. 
 (Jnifr&ften, to deprive of power 
 
 weaken. 
 Ghttbloben, to divest of shame, be 
 
 bold. 
 Cnttbremien, to take fire, to kindle. 
 (Sntfpred)cn, to answer, or 
 
 correspond to. 
 (Snt is sometimes, also, merely intensive or euphonic: as, entteercu 
 (from leer, empty,) to empty out. 
 
 (3) (£ r and tier. (St, as a genera] thing, conveys the idea of 
 getting ox gaining for some one, by means of that which is expressed 
 by the word connected with it ; as, e r b i 1 1 e n, to get, or try to get* 
 by begging. It finds its exact opposite in tier; which marks what 
 is against or away from some one's interest or benefit; as, tierbitten, 
 to beg off, to decline. The force and use of these particles are best 
 illustrated by examples. 
 
 Ch'bciben, to get or gain by bathing 
 Ghfmben, to find out for one's self, 
 
 invent. 
 Gh-ftefyen, to arise, originate. 
 Qrvbauen, to erect, to produce. 
 23erfagen, to speak against, to deny. 
 93crmciuern, to wall against, stop 
 
 by wall. 
 SSerfptelen, to play away, to lose 
 
 by gambling. 
 93erfiil)ren, to lead away, to seduce, 
 33evfaljen, to oversalt, spoil m 
 salting. 
 
 33aben, to bathe. 
 $tubeit, to find. 
 
 ©tefycrt, to stand. 
 Q3aueu, to build, 
 ©agett, to say or speak. 
 SJlauem, to wall, or make a wall. 
 
 Spielen, to play. 
 
 Rubrcn, to carry, or lead. 
 €>al$en, to salt. 
 
PREFIXES SEPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE. § 98. 39Y 
 
 (4) (§x and iK r are, also, both employed mco averting nouna 
 and adjectives into verbs expressive of transition from one state or 
 condition into another : thus, 
 
 dtfolten, (fait, cold) to take cold. 93ercbetn, (ebcl, noble) tc ennoble 
 
 Ga-fiUmen, (fiiftu, bold) to become 33ergoitettt, (®ott, God) to deify. 
 
 bold, dare. 
 
 G'vfalnnen, (la(;m, lame) to become 33eraften, (alt, old) to grow old or 
 
 lame. obsolete. 
 
 ZStUaxm, (flat, clear) to make 93cremen, (ehi, one) to make one* 
 
 plain. unite. 
 
 In some instances, moreover, e r and e r are only euphonic or 
 intensive. 
 
 § 98. Prefixes separable and inseparable. 
 
 (1) The Prefixes of this class, when separable, are always under 
 the full accent ; when inseparable, the accent falls upon the radical. 
 
 (2) Their effect, when separable, is, in union with radicals to 
 produce certain intransitive compounds *, in which each of the parts 
 (prefix and radical) has its own peculiar and natural signification. 
 
 (3) Their effect, when inseparable, is, in connection with the ra- 
 dicals, to form certain transitive compounds ; which, for the most 
 part, are used in a figurative or metaphorical sense. 
 
 (4) We subjoin a list of the prefixes of this class : illustrating 
 each by a couple of examples ; the first being one in which the pre 
 fix is separable ; the second one in which it is inseparable. 
 
 Oliver, throuo-h • i Surdi'bthtgen, to press or force through; 
 
 ^ino), tnrougn , ^ 2)utd)brin'gen, to penetrate. 
 
 c . . i i • j S <5tu / tcraeT)en, to go behind; 
 
 Smter, behind ; } | tet erg^en, to deceive. 
 
 ... 5 Ue'berfefcen, to set or put over ; 
 
 Ucber, over; } Ueberfefc'en, 
 
 Urn, around; 
 
 to translate. 
 5 Um'gefyen, to go around ; 
 
 \ Umgeb/en, to evade. 
 
 { Uu'terfcbieften, to sh 
 
 \ Uittevfcbte'bm, to de 
 ,™. . . ' . 5 SBte'berfielm, to fetch or bring back ; 
 
 ffiieber, again ; br.ck ; } m zbtx1)o<Un, to repeat. 
 
 n , , ( Uu'terfcbieften, to shove or push under ; 
 
 unter, under ; j Uitterfcbie'&en, to defer ; alsc, to substitute. 
 
 * There are, however, some compounds ot b u v eft and nm, in which, 
 though these particles are separable, the verbs are, nevertheless, transitive. 
 Still, it will be found, that in such cases the signification of the compound is 
 figurative ; as, untbrtngen, to oring about (one's death;) i. e. to kill. 
 
398 ADVERBS FORMED FROM NOUNS. § 99. § 100. $ 101. 
 
 § 99. "Verbs compounded with nouns and adjectives. 
 
 (J) A variety of compounds is produced by the union of verba 
 •vithi-nuns ai.d adjectives. These follow the sauie general laws 
 which govern those produced by means of prefixes. Some of them, 
 accordingly, are separable ; as, 
 
 ^efyifdilacjen, to miscarry ; 
 
 from 
 
 w 
 
 and 
 
 fdrtagen. 
 
 ^vcifpvccbcn, to acquit ; 
 
 tt 
 
 fvei 
 
 „ 
 
 fpvcd)eu. 
 
 ©ieidifommen, to equal ; 
 
 tt 
 
 gfeid) 
 
 tt 
 
 fcmmeiu 
 
 Scgrcifjelt, to tear away ; 
 
 tt 
 
 Us 
 
 „ 
 
 it i pen. 
 
 ©tattjtubcu, to take place ; 
 
 tt 
 
 jlatt 
 
 v 
 
 fiubeit. 
 
 ^2) Some are inseparable) as 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 $Tc(;lccrcii, to exult ; 
 
 from 
 
 M 
 
 and Iccfcn. 
 
 §ritl)ftitcfen, to breakfast; 
 
 „ 
 
 m 
 
 „ 
 
 ftfufcit. 
 
 ^u&gfdttt»attjett, to fawn ; 
 
 » 
 
 fudis 
 
 it 
 
 fdnvanjen. 
 
 <£>anb()aku, to handle ; 
 
 n 
 
 fyanb 
 
 tt 
 
 ija&en. 
 
 giebangefn, to ogle ; 
 
 tt 
 
 Ke6 
 
 „ 
 
 CilKJcIu. 
 
 SHebfofen, to caress ; 
 
 „ 
 
 tieb 
 
 „ 
 
 fofeu. 
 
 SJlutfymcijjen, to suspect ; 
 
 it 
 
 mutf) 
 
 a 
 
 ma pen. 
 
 53c((jic()cn, to perform ; 
 
 tt 
 
 »rfl 
 
 „ 
 
 $ief;en. 
 
 2BiUfa()ren, to gratify ; 
 
 „ 
 
 tottt 
 
 „ 
 
 fafjim 
 
 SBeiffagett, to foretell ; 
 
 „ 
 
 toeig 
 
 „ 
 
 fagen, 
 
 (3) These verbs take the augment syllable g e in the perfect 
 participle : except yettjicfyen, which has ielljogen. In some cases, 
 however, verbs compounded with DoU, also, take the augment; 
 as, aoUgcgoffen, from toettgiejjen, to pour full. 
 
 § 100. THE ADVERBS. 
 
 (1) Adverbs in German, as in other languages, servo to modify 
 1he signification of verbs, participles, adjectives and, often, also that 
 of one another : denoting, for the most part, certain limitations of 
 time, place, degree and manner. Hence are they usually classified 
 according to their meaning. 
 
 (2) They are indeclinable ; and formed, either by derivation or 
 composition, from almost every other part of speech : of some, how- 
 ever, the origin is wholly unknown. 
 
 Arranged according to derivation, adverbs are divisible into the 
 following classes : 
 
 § 101. Adverbs formed from nouns. 
 
 Adverts are formed from nouns by affixing the letter $. This 
 termination $ is nothing more than the sign of the genitive singukii; 
 
ADVERBS FORMED FROM ADJECTIVES. § 102. 
 
 399 
 
 which case, not only of nouns, but also of adjectives* partieif les, 
 &c. is often made to perform the office of an adverb. * Exam 
 pies: 
 
 SRergrnd, in the morning ; 
 &beubg, in the evening; 
 %&$$, in the day ; 
 %i)til3, in part, or partly ; 
 %ku}e, swiftly; 
 SuvchgehenbS, generally ; 
 
 3ufet;cnb6, visibly ; 
 
 from ber Sftergen, morning. 
 
 „ bev 3tbcnb, evening. 
 
 „ bev Sag, day. 
 
 „ ber %iy:\{, part. 
 
 „ ber glug, flight. 
 
 „ burchgefyenb, passing 
 through. 
 
 „ $ufeC;enb, looking at 
 
 § 102. Adverbs formed from adjectives. 
 
 (1) Adverbs are formed from adjectives by the addition of the 
 suffices (id), i) a f t and U n g g ; which, except the last, are also 
 regular adjective terminations. These endings are chiefly expressive 
 of maimer ; and may be translated sometimes by a corresponding 
 Miffix v as the English ly or ishly), and sometimes by some equi- 
 alent phrase. Examples : 
 
 9Ba1jrlidi, fcraly ; verily ; 
 93p£ijaft, maliciously ; 
 SBeiStid), wisely ; 
 
 ftveilicn, sure ; to be sure 
 JBlinblingS, blindly ; 
 
 from roctljr, true. 
 
 „ bofe, evil ; wicked. 
 „ torife, wise. 
 „ fret, free ; sure. 
 „ fclhib, blind. 
 
 ^2) The letter $, also, as above stated, added to adjectives, gives 
 rl e to a class of adverbs : * thus, 
 
 SJccrito, on the right ; 
 Sinfy, on the left ; 
 Sluberd, otherwise ; 
 23ereir3, already; 
 SBefonberS, particularly ; 
 t&kts, continually ; 
 
 from vecht, right. 
 „ linf, left. 
 „ anber, other. 
 „ bereit, ready. 
 „ befenber, particular. 
 „ fret, continual. 
 
 (3) Here note, also, that almost all German adjectives, in the 
 absolute form, that is, in the simple form without the terminations oj 
 
 * The letter 8 is, also, sometimes affixed to adverbs ending in lit a I ; as, 
 oouivJ.s formerly; bamalS, at the time; lurimalS. many times. For nu- 
 meral adverbs ending in nul, Set, &,c. See the Section on Numerals. 
 
*00 
 
 ADVERBS FORMED FROM PRONOUNS § 103. 
 
 declension, are employed as adverbs : thus, er remit fcfynetl, hi runa 
 rapidly ; ev (jaubett efyvlid), he acts honestly. 
 
 § 103. Adverbs formed from pronouns. 
 
 (1) These are, chiefly, ba, there; from ber, bie, ba$, this or that ; 
 it>o, where ; from ft>er, ft>a3, who, what ; i)er, hither, and fytn, thither ; 
 Prom some corresponding demonstrative pronoun no longer found. 
 
 (2) The pronominal adverbs in combination with other words, 
 give rise to a number of compounds. Thus ba and wo, united with 
 prepositions, serve often instead of the dative and accusative (neuter) 
 of the pronouns ber, Wtr and welcl)er, respectively. It will be no- 
 ticed, that when the other word begins with a vowel or with the let- 
 ter it, ba and roo are written bar and Wor ; that is, that r is inserted 
 for the sake of euphony. The follovving are compounds of ba and 
 wo : 
 
 JDabet. thereby, 
 
 i. e. by this or that, 
 ©afitr, therefor, 
 
 i. e. for this or that. 
 IDamit, therewith, 
 
 i. e. with this or that. 
 £)avin, therein, 
 
 i. e. in this or that. 
 Davunter, thereunder or among, 
 
 i. e. under this or that. 
 2) arum, thereabout or therefor, 
 
 i. e. for this or that ; therefor. 
 
 SDatcm, thereon, 
 
 i. e. on this or that 
 SDarauf, thereupon, 
 
 i. e. upon this or that. 
 ©avaug, therefrom, 
 
 i. e. from this or that. 
 £>a»ou, thereof, 
 
 i. e. of this or that. 
 3)aju, thereto, 
 
 i, e. to this or that. 
 JDaburd), there-through or thereby 
 
 i. e. through or by this or that 
 
 SBcbei, whereby, 
 
 i. e. by which. 
 SBofiir, wherefor, 
 
 i. e. for which. 
 SBomit, wherewith, 
 
 i. e. with whicbL 
 SBoriu, wherein, 
 
 i. e. in which. 
 SBoruuter, where under, among, 
 
 i. e. under this or l*»at. 
 SBonim, whereabout. 
 
 i. e. about or for wJ*»ch; 
 wherefor : why, 
 SBorait, whereto, 
 
 i. e. to which. 
 SBorauf, whereupon, 
 
 i- e. upon which. 
 SBoraug, wherefrom, 
 
 i. e. from which, 
 SBo&ou,. whereof, 
 
 i. e. of which. 
 SBoju, whereto, 
 
 i. e. to which. 
 $B c buret), whereby, 
 
 L e. by or through vhia* 
 
*» 
 
 ADVERBS F0RM2J) BY COMPOSITION. § 104. § 105. 401 
 
 (3) In like manner t)er and r/tn appear, also, combined with 
 other .vords. Between these two particles a distinction exists, 
 wherever they are used, whether alone or in composition with othei 
 words, which should be well understood and always remembered. 
 They are, in signification, exact opposites : fyev indicating motion or 
 direction towards the speaker; f)tn implying motion or direction 
 away from the speaker. The following are examples : 
 
 «&era&, down hither (i. e. where £inab, clown thither (i. e. away 
 the speaker is). from the, speaker). 
 
 «£erauf, up hither. <§inauf, up thither. 
 
 <£>erau3, out hither. ^>Btau3, out thither. 
 
 herein, in hither ; into this place. «£>tncin, into that place. 
 
 «§ierl)er, or fyieljer, hither here; <£>ied)tn, thither; this way for- 
 tius way. ward. 
 
 ^eruber, over hither. «£>tnuber, over thither. 
 
 §erunter, under hither. «£>munter, under there. 
 
 2>af;er. from there hither, i. e. 2)af)ht, from thither (to) there, 
 thence i. e. thither. 
 
 SBofyer, from which p.ace hither, SGBoI; in, from which place thither, 
 i. e. whence. i. e. whither. 
 
 (4) We have no words in English, corresponding exactly in use 
 and force with fyer and l)in ; and therefore, though everywhere in 
 German their force may be felt, it cannot always be expressed by 
 single words, in translation. Hence are they often treated as ex. 
 pletives. 
 
 § 104. Adverbs formed from verbs. 
 
 (1) Adverbs are formed from verbs by suffixing to the radical 
 part the termination 1 i d). All adverbs so formed, however, are 
 equally employed as adjectives : thus, 
 
 ©tcutBltcfy (from glcmb-f-en, to believe), credibly. 
 (gtevMidi (from ftevb-f-en, to die), mortally. 
 Jtldglid) (from flag-f-en, to lament), lamentably. 
 SKerfltd) (from merf+en, to note; perceive), perceptibly. 
 
 § 105. Adverbs formed by composition. 
 
 (1) Besides the classes given above, a numerous list of adverbs 
 in German is produced by the union of various parts of speech. 
 Thus, the word SSetfe (mode, manner), combined with nouns, 
 forms a class of adverbs employed chiefly in specifying things indi 
 
iOI COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. § 106. 
 
 rick ally or separately: thus, fcnrittiocife, step by step: rtjeiF.rcife, 
 part by part; trcpfeittDelfe, drop by drop; tocgenhJcife, wave by wave; 
 like waves, SBeife is also added to adjectives; as, bicki[d)an>cifc, 
 thie\ shly; gtutfttcbertoeife, fortunately. 
 
 (2) Sometimes an adverb and a preposition are united ; examples 
 of which may be found above under the head of adverbs formed 
 from pronouns. 
 
 (3) Sometimes adverbs are formed by the union or the repetition 
 cf prepositions : as, burdiauS, throughout ; thoroughly ; burcfy unb 
 burcb, through and through. 
 
 (4) Sometimes a noun and a pronoun joined together, serve as 
 an adverb ; as, memerfeite, on my side ; bleffeite, on this side ; aller* 
 bingS, by all means. 
 
 (5) Sometimes one adverb is formed from another by the add'- 
 tion of a suffix; as, vucfUugg, backwards: sometimes by the unioL 
 of another adverb ; as, uimmcrmcOr, nevermore. 
 
 (G) Sometimes the several words composing a phrase, are, by 
 being brought into union, made to perform the office of an adverb : 
 thus, furtoafjl (for fur toatjr), verily ; fonft (for the obsolete fo ue iji, 
 if it is not), otherwise ; else. 
 
 § IOC. Comparison of adverbs. 
 
 (1) Many adverbs, chiefly, however, those expressive of manner 
 are susceptible of the degrees of comparison. The forms for these 
 are the same in adverbs as in adjectives 
 
 (2) It must be observed, however, that, when a comparison, 
 strictly speaking, is intended, the form of the superlative produced 
 by prefixing am (See Obs. § 38.), should always be employed; as, 
 er fdH'cibt enn fdionfien, he writes the most beautifully (of all). 
 
 (3) If, on the other hand, we purpose, not to compare individuals 
 one with another, but merely to denote extreme excellence or emi- 
 nence, there are three ways in which it may properly be done : first, 
 by using the simple or absolute form of the superlative ; as, er grttfjt 
 freunbtiebfi, he greets or salutes in a manner very friendly, very cor- 
 dially ; secondly, by employing aufS (auf-f-ba$) with the accusative, 
 or gum (ju-f-bem) with the dative, of the superlative ; as, aufg 
 freuubtidifte, in a manner very friendly ; jum fdieuften, in a manner 
 very beautiful ; lastly, by adding to the simple form of the super- 
 lative, the termination e u 6 ; befteng, the best or in the best manner 
 (jod)jien 3, at the highest or at the most. 
 
TABLE OF THE PREPOSITIONS. § 107. § 108. 4-03 
 
 § :.07. THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 (1 ) The prepositions in German, that is, the words employed 
 merely to denote the relations of things, are commonly classified ac- 
 cording to the cases with which they are construed. Some of them 
 are construed with the genitive only ; some with the dative only : 
 some with the accusative only ; and some either with the dative or 
 accusative, according to circumstances. 
 
 (2) They may also, on a different principle, be divided into two 
 general classes : the Primitive and the Derivative. The primitive 
 prepositions always govern either the dative or the accusative : the 
 derivative prepositions are found, for the most part, in connection 
 with the genitive only. 
 
 § 108. Table of 
 (1) Prepositions construed with 
 
 tiie Prepositions. 
 (2) Prepositions construed with 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 THE dative. 
 
 Sinftatt, or 
 
 
 Dfretfjaflj, 
 
 SfoS, 
 
 Men, 
 
 ftcut, 
 
 
 Srefr, 
 
 Slufjcr, 
 
 
 gingerljatb, 
 
 
 Urn — tottfen, 
 
 Set, 
 
 Ob, 
 
 SMefieit, or 
 
 
 Uiifmt, 
 
 ^inncn, 
 
 
 btefiette> 
 
 
 Ungeadbtet, 
 
 Ghttgegen, 
 
 ©ammt, 
 
 £aib, fyalbcn, 
 
 or 
 
 ttnterljalb, 
 
 ©egeniibcr, 
 
 
 Ijalber, 
 
 
 U invert, 
 
 ©emap, 
 
 (Sett, 
 
 3nnerl)af&, 
 
 
 ffiermittelft o 
 
 
 
 3enfett, or 
 
 
 mitteljt, 
 
 mt, 
 
 33cn, 
 
 jeufeitS, 
 
 
 33ermo3t, 
 
 
 
 Jtraft, 
 
 
 9Bal)renb, 
 
 Stad), 
 
 3 u, 
 
 8attgS, 
 
 
 2Begen, 
 
 
 
 Sauf, 
 
 
 3ufc(ge. 
 
 mm, 
 
 Sutoibet 
 
 (3) Preposit 
 
 ons construed with 
 
 (4) Prepositions 
 
 construed wit 
 
 THE 
 
 4C 
 
 :usative. 
 
 THE DATIVE 01- ACCUSATIVE 
 
 ®nrd>, 
 
 
 DCnte, 
 
 §ln, 
 
 Heber, 
 
 pv, 
 
 
 tgenbet, 
 
 »nfc 
 
 Unter, 
 
 @eg?n, or 
 
 
 lint, 
 
 Winter, 
 
 Sor, 
 
 #«> 
 
 
 SBiber. 
 
 3r, 
 
 3iutfd)en. 
 
-.04 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. ^lflt). § 110. 
 
 § 109 Prepositions construed with the genitive. 
 
 We now give again the prepositions governing the several case* 
 respectively, with their proper definitions: subjoining, also, some 
 few observations on such of them as seem to require further expla- 
 nation. And first, we mention those construed with the genitive. 
 
 Snftatt, or ftatt, 
 
 HHejfeit, or bief* 
 fetts, 
 
 faoSbm, or IjaU 
 ber, 
 
 3nnerl;alb, 
 
 Senfeit, or jen* 
 feits, 
 
 toft, 
 
 fiangg, (also 
 gov. Dat.) 
 
 %aut, 
 
 £re|, (also 
 gov Dat.) 
 
 instead, 
 without; out- 
 side, 
 on this side. 
 
 on account of. 
 
 within ; inside, 
 on that side ; 
 beyond. 
 by virtue of. 
 along. 
 
 according to. 
 
 above. 
 
 in spite of. 
 
 Urn — toillcn, 
 
 Ungccicbtet, 
 Unterbalb, 
 
 Unfern, 
 
 ttffloeit, 
 
 SBermitteljr, or 
 
 mttteljt, 
 33ermcge, 
 SBafjrenb, 
 
 SBegen, 
 
 for the sake of. 
 notwithstanding, 
 below ; on the 
 lower side, 
 near ; not far 
 
 from, 
 near ; not far 
 
 from 
 by means of. 
 
 by dint of. 
 during. 
 
 on account of. 
 
 Sufclge, (also in consequence 
 gov. Dat.) of. 
 
 § 110. Observations. 
 
 (1) Slnftatt is compounded of an (in) and <&tatt {place;) and 
 these components may sometimes be separated : thus, an be<3 33ruber£ 
 (£tatt in the brother's stead. In this case the part, <& t a 1 1 , takes 
 its proper character, which is that of a noun. 
 
 (2) 45afben, like toegen and urn — ttutfen, expresses motive. Strict- 
 ly speaking, however, i) a lb en seems to point to a motive that is 
 direct, immediate and special; to e g e n indicates an object less definite 
 and more distant; while am — rotden looks to the will, wish or wel- 
 fare of that which is expressed by the genitive. These distinctions, 
 however, are not always regarded even by writers of reputation. 
 
 (3) <§alben or fyatber is always placed after the noun which it gov- 
 erns : the form, Ijalt e it being preferred, when the noun ha? an article 
 or pronoun before it; and fyalb e r , when it has not : thus, te$ ©elbeg 
 fyalben, for the sake of money ; 93ergnugen3 fyalber, for the sake of 
 pleasure. Ǥatben is often united with the genitive of the personal 
 pror.ouns; in which case the final letter (r) is jinitted and it3 place 
 

 OB 
 
 §111. §112. 
 
 405 
 
 8 applied by t: thus, memettjat&cn, (instead of mctnerfyaTBen,) fot my 
 sake ; beineti)afl)en, for thy sake ; fctnettjcilbeu, for his sake, &c. So? 
 too, it occurs in the compounds beftyafl), on account of that; \w$; 
 kitt\ on account o e which: wherein, as in aujjerfyatb, innerljalb, obev? 
 halb, nntevtialb, the form ft a I b e it is shortened into h a I b. In the 
 last four, I) a lb has the sense part or stile; as, aujkvhalb, outside, &c. 
 
 (4) SBegeit may either come before or after its noun: as, toegeii ber 
 gtcf en ©efoijr, on account, of the great danger; fetn.ee ©cfmtbl;cit rec- 
 ant, on account of his health. 
 
 (5) Um — roiUcn is always separated by the genitive which it gov- 
 erns: thus, urn ©cttc3 linden, for God's sake. 
 
 (6) Ungeacbtet may either precede or succeed its noun: as, unge* 
 aditct alter ^inberniffe, notwithstanding all hindrances ; feineg glctjjeS 
 ungeaditct, notwithstanding his industry. 
 
 (7) 93ermoge, by dint or means of, indicates physical ability : as, 
 Uetmoge beg gleipe^, by means of industry. It thus differs from fvaft, 
 which points rather to the exercise of moral power : as, fvaft nteineS 
 Slntteg, by virtue of my office. 
 
 (8) 3ufolge, when it comes after the word whieh it governs, takes 
 the latter in the Dative : as, bent 23efel;le jufclge, in consequence of 
 (or pursuant to) the order. 
 
 (9) SditgS and tvc£ may, also, govern the Dative. 
 
 § 111. Prepositions construed with the dative. 
 
 Slug, 
 
 out ; out of. 
 
 Maty, 
 
 after; to; ac- 
 
 Slufjer, 
 
 without; outside 
 
 
 cording to. 
 
 
 of. 
 
 mm, 
 
 next ; next to. 
 
 Set, 
 
 by; near; with. 
 
 Jttebfl, 
 
 together with. 
 
 93innen, 
 
 within. 
 
 £>b, 
 
 over; at. 
 
 (Sntgegen, 
 
 towards ; oppo- 
 
 ©crnimt, 
 
 together with. 
 
 
 site to. 
 
 ©eti, 
 
 since. 
 
 ©egen fiber, 
 
 over against. 
 
 *Bon, 
 
 from; of. 
 
 ©entdfj, 
 
 conformably 
 
 3u, 
 
 to , at. 
 
 
 with. 
 
 3unnber, 
 
 against ; con- 
 
 ma, 
 
 with. 
 
 
 traiyr. 
 
 
 §. 112. Observations. 
 
 
 (1) 91 it S indicates the place, the source or the materitd whence 
 any thing is produced ; as, au$ bent £attfe, out of the house ; iu$ 
 Stebe, out of love ; auS Sfctdbt* ijat ©ott bte SBelt gemadjf out of no 
 thing has God made the world. 
 
406 OBSERVATION 
 
 (2) SI u fj e r differs from curt, in that it denotes situation rather 
 than transition: thus, au3 bent £aufe marks wiofu/n from or out of 
 the house, while aujjerbem £aufe signifies position in respect to the 
 bouse; that is, outside of the house; abroad: hence comes, also, 
 the signification, besides ; exclusive of; as, Dliemanb Clttfcs mir tt>ar 
 fcugegen, no one besides, or except me was present. 
 
 (3) 93 c i shows the relation of proximity or identity in respect to 
 persons, places, times, &c. : as, ev mct/nt bet feinem SBvuber he resides 
 toftA his brother ; bei bem «£anfe, by or ?:ear the house ; bei ber ©(bo* 
 i>fung" a/ the creation; bet meinev Stnfunfr, at or upon my arrival ; bfi 
 bent sptcito, m Plato, that is, in the works of Plato. 33 e i is also 
 used in making- oath or protest; as, bet ®ctt ; bet meiner (Sfyrc ; by 
 God ; by, or tijoon my honor : a use easily derived from the primary 
 signification of the word. It should be added that the German bet 
 (unlike the English by) is not properly employed to denote the cause, 
 
 jneans or instrument of an action : this is done by the words bnvd) 
 fcen, or mit: id) faljre mit ber (Sifenbatm. 
 
 (4) 53 i it u c it is used in denoting a limitation of time ; as, bin* 
 nen adit Xaqm, within eight days. 
 
 (5) (5* n t a, e g e it always comes after its noun ; and denotes the 
 relation of parties moving towards one another so as to meet: hence 
 it gets the significations opposite to, over against : thus, bit Slnabe 
 (dnft feinem 33ater mtgegen, the boy runs towards, that is, to meet his 
 father ; bent SBiube entgegeit, against the wind. 
 
 (6) ©cgenubct marks an opposite position of things ; and 
 like enfgegen, comes after its noun ; as, bent £aufe gegenuber, opposite 
 to, ox fronting the house. 
 
 (7) s JJt i t signifies sometimes the relation of union ; sometimes 
 that of instrumentality ; as, er arbettet mit feinem Q3ater, lie works 
 with his father; mit einent SMeffer fd)iteibcn, to cut icith a knife: some- 
 times, also, it indicates the manner of an action; as, mit ©emali; mit 
 Stji. 
 
 (8) dl a d), in all its uses, has its nearest equivalent in the Eng- 
 lish word after ; as, je'fm 2Jltnuten nad) titer, ten minutes after four ; 
 tud) englifdier SWobe, after the English fashion ; ber 9?afe nad), after 
 (that is, following after) your nose ; bem (Strome nad), after (that is, 
 in the direction of) the stream ; ber 33efdireibnng nad), after (that is, 
 according to) the description ; mir gefyen nad) ber (Stabt, we are going 
 after (that is, in the direction of, towards, or to) the city ; bag (£duff 
 :\i nad) Simerifa befttmmt, the ship is bound after (that is, for) Ame- 
 rica, &c. 
 
 (9) When direction towards a person, instead of a place , is im*i. 
 
PREPOSITIONS CONHUbH^ THE ACCUSATIVE 
 
 Bated, j u is employed ; as, tit tterbe j it memem SSater gefjen, 1 sh 
 
 go to my father. Sometimes it a d) is used in connection with j u ; 
 as, cv lief nad) ber <2iabi $u, he ran (literally, after to) towards the 
 city. When it denotes direction with, as in the phrase, bem Stvcme 
 ncni\ following, or going with the stream, it is put after the noun 
 which it governs : so, also, when it has the kindred sense, according 
 to ; as, meiiter Sdeiuung itadi, according to my opinion. If, however, 
 in the latter case, a genitive depends on the noun under the govern- 
 ment of the preposition, nad) precedes; as, nad) ber 93efd)rctbung be3 
 ©emitter, according to Schiller's description. 
 
 (10) 9? c fc ft and fa mint have the same general signification, 
 together with ; but, strictly speaking, differ in this, that fcunmt not 
 only indicates conjoint, but, also, simultaneous action : thus, Slaren 
 fammt fcincn Solmen feflen iijre <§dnbe auf fein feavtyt (egen, Aaron to- 
 gether with (i. e. simultaneously with) Ms sons shall lay their hands 
 upon his head. 
 
 (11) D b is seldom used except in poetry. 
 
 (12) 23 c it marks the source or origin of a thing, and has the 
 name latitude of signification as its English equivalent from : thus, 
 fcer SSBinb xotlftt titm Often, the wind blows from the East; bag @e* 
 bUbt tft ttoti iljm, that poem is from (by) him. With an or auf fol- 
 lowing, it indicates the extent of a period of time : r-en bev evften 
 Sinbfyeit an, from earliest childhood on ; tion fciner Sugenb auf, from 
 Ins youth up. 
 
 (13) 3 a primarily is a mere sign of transition; but is made to 
 denote a variety of cognate relations, from a state of motion to a 
 state of rest. Examples best illustrate its use : thus, tdv unit ju met* 
 ucin SSater geljeii, I will go to my father; totr rcifen jit SOBaffer unb ju 
 fcaubc, we travel by land and by water ; jn (JJferbe, on horseback ; ju 
 lyiiJK, on foot ; jit £aufe f at home ; ju jencr 3cit, at that time ; ev i)at 
 midi jum (for $u bem) barren gcmadU, he has made me (to become) a 
 fool ; cv tlmi eo mtr ju Stefce, he does it to (shoiv) love for me. It ia 
 sometimes used as an adverb ; as, gel) jit, go on ; ju t?icl, too much ; 
 mad)e bte Xfyuv $u, shut the door to. 
 
 (14) 3 lift t bev, against, contrary to, comes after the word, 
 which it governs. 
 
 § 113. Prepositions construed witii the accusative. 
 
 ^urdi, through. 
 
 (soitber 
 
 apart; without, 
 
 §ur, for ; in place of. 
 
 tint, 
 
 about ; around. 
 
 ($cgen or gen, towards. 
 
 SSiber, 
 
 against 
 
 Oljue, without 
 
 
 
>BSERVATIONS. §• 
 
 § 114. Observations. 
 
 (1) 2) u r d) has its exact equivalent in the English word through : 
 as, buvd) bte &tabt gef;eu, to go through the city ; buret) 3&vcit 33et* 
 jlanb, through your aid ; bag ganje 3cil;r buvd) (where, as often in 
 English, the preposition comes after the noun), the whole year 
 through. 
 
 (2) © e g e u (contract form, geu) indicates motion towards ; and 
 hence often has the signification opposite to ; but whether it marks 
 direction towards, in a manner friendly or otherwise, must be deter- 
 mined by the context. In this respect, it differs from toibev, against, 
 which denotes an opposition, doing or designing evil. 
 
 (3) £) () u e and f o n b e r are of the same import ; but the latter 
 is seldom used, and then only, when the substantive has no article 
 before "t. 
 
 (4) It m, like the English word about, indicates the going or 
 being of one thing around another ; and hence denotes also near- 
 ness, change of position, succession, &c. : thus, um beu £tfd) fi^cn, 
 to sit about the table ; totrf beineu Sftantet um bid), throw thy cloak 
 about thee ; um jwet Ufjr, about (literally, close about, i. e. exactly) 
 two o'clock ; cincu £ag_ um beu aubevn, one day about another, that 
 is, every other day ; c3 ift um \i)\\ gefdjefyen, it is clone about him, that 
 is, it is all over with him ; um @elb fpiclen, to play about {for) mo- 
 ney ; um jef)u Siafrcc juugcr, younger about (by) ten years, &c. Be- 
 fore an Infinitive preceded by ju (that is, before the Supine, as it is 
 sometimes called), um denotes purpose ; as, um Sfnten 511 jeigeu, in 
 order to show you ; um ju fd)retbeit, in order to write, or for the pur- 
 pose of writing. 
 
 § 115. Prepositions construed with the dative or 
 accusative. 
 
 Wit, 
 
 on ; at ; near. 
 
 UeBev, 
 
 over; above. 
 
 Sfof, 
 
 on ; upon. 
 
 Uuter, 
 
 under ; among. 
 
 ^titter, 
 
 behind. 
 
 33or, 
 
 before. 
 
 5n, 
 
 in, or into. 
 
 3uufdjeu, 
 
 betwixt ; be- 
 
 Wtbtn, 
 
 beside. 
 
 
 tween. 
 
 
 §116. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 
 These prepositions govern either the accusative or the dative ; bui 
 not without a difference of signification : for, when motion towards, 
 that is, motion from one point to another, is indicated, the accusative 
 
§116. 
 
 409 
 
 is required : when, however, motion or rest in any given place or 
 condition is signified, the dative is used; thus, bet jfrmbe latift in ben 
 ®artcn, the Loy runs into (motion towards) the garden ; ber JTna&e 
 (an ft in bent ©arten, the Loy runs in (motion within) the garden, 
 This is the general principle ; which will be found, with more or 
 less distinctness, everywhere to prevail in the use of the pre- 
 positions of this class. We subjoin a list of examples. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 -3(n einem Orte rocfmen, 
 Ace. 3ln einen greunb fdbteiben, 
 Dat. (S'r atbeiiet an einem 23 u die, 
 Ace. 5ln ztwati benfen, 
 
 Dat. Grr ift an bev SluSjefjruna, ges 
 fterben, 
 
 to dwell in or at a place. 
 to write to a friend. 
 he is working on a book. 
 to think on (i. e. turn one's 
 thoughts towards) something, 
 he died by consumption. 
 
 Aec. 
 
 3di ftelte ben £if* an bie 
 
 I put the table against (towards) 
 
 
 3Banb, 
 
 the wall. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ©dnvadi an 33erjhi.nbr, 
 
 weak in understanding. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 93t$ an ben 3lbenb, 
 
 even to or until evening. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Sim Sftorgm nub am Sl&cnb, 
 
 in the morning and in the 
 evening. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 3(nf bem £r)urme, 
 
 on (i. e. resting on) the tower. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 3lnf ben 3!^urm, 
 
 upon (i. e. climbing) the tower. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 3luf bera Sanbf iBotjnen, 
 
 to live in the country. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Sluf ba€ Saub reifen, 
 
 to travel into the country. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Stuf bcv $e$, 
 
 at the post-office. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 9luf ber ©dmte, 
 
 at school. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Sdtf cine (Sache benfen, 
 
 to think (turn thoughts) on a 
 thing. 
 so much for a, or per man. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ©o Diet auf ben 3Jlann, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 93iS auf mer ST;ater, 
 
 even to four dollars. 
 
 Aec 
 
 3fof beutfdje 2trt, 
 
 in (i. e. following after) the Ger 
 man way 
 
 Aec. 
 
 Stnf 23efefu, 
 
 pursuant to an order. 
 
 Aec 
 
 9luf 2Jlontag, 
 
 next Monday. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Gh ftefyt f> inter mit, 
 
 he stands behind me. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 (5r trat 1) inter mid). 
 
 he stepped behind me. 
 
 Dat 
 
 3* wcJme in ber "Stabt, 
 
 I live in the city. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 3di gelje in bie Stabi, 
 
 I am going into the city. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 (5r ftaub neben mit, 
 
 he stood near to me. 
 
 Ace 
 
 (It ftcKte jicb ne&en mid), 
 
 he placed himself near me. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ucber ber -Slvbeit, 
 
 over [i. e. while at) the work 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Ueber mcine Jfriifie.. 
 18 
 
 beyond my strength. 
 
410 THE CONJUN 
 
 Acc. UeBer bag 3at)r, 
 Aec. 3>n £ctg fiber, 
 Dat. 3d) ftanb unter einem 33aume, 
 Acc. 2>er <§itttb frtedjt unter ben 
 £ifd), 
 Dat. (So mitt id) mid) uidit i>ov bir 
 aer6ergen, 
 Dai 3d) ftanb ycr bent £aufe, 
 Acc. 3d) gefye »or bie £l)ur, 
 Dat. 3d) fajj jwifd)eu jvuei Qfmup 
 ben, 
 Acc. °vdi iiettte mid) jmtfd)en beibe, 
 
 beyonathis (i. (■. next) year. 
 the day over, i. e. during the day 
 I stood under a tree, 
 the dog creeps under the table. 
 
 then will I not hide myself from 
 thee. 
 I stood before the house. 
 I go before the door. 
 I sat between two friends. 
 
 I placed myself between the two 
 
 § 117. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 (1) Conjunctions are words used in connecting sentences. As, 
 however, there are various kinds of connections existing among sen- 
 tences, it has been customary to classify the conjunctions according 
 to the nature of the connection which they are employed to indicate 
 Hence we have (among other classes) the following : 
 
 Copulatives: as, nub, and; aud), also. 
 
 Disjunctives : as, entroeber, either ; obcr, or. 
 
 Adversative* : as, aber, but ; however ; atfctn, but ; bod), vet. 
 
 Negatives : as, meber, neither ; nodi, nor. 
 
 Comparatives: as, toie, as; fo, so; thus; ati, than; a,letd)mie, just 
 
 Conditionals' as, menu, if; fattS, in case that; mo few, provided 
 
 that. 
 
 Causals : as, benn, for; meif, since; because. 
 
 Conclusives : as, barum, therefore ; bafyer, hence ; bepbatb, there- 
 fore 
 
 Concesshes: as, oBmoT)!, cbfdion, obgtetcb, roenn; although. 
 
 Finals : as, bap, that ; anf bafj and bamit, m order that ; urn j«/ 
 
 in order to- 
 
 (2) We give below a list of the conjunctions that most commonly 
 occur in German : premising only that some of the words here set 
 down as conjunctions are also employed as adverbs ; for it will of 
 coarse be kept in mind, that the offxe performed by a word, deter- 
 mines its name and character. For numerous examples illustrating 
 their uses, See Lesson 69. 
 
TIONS. § 118. 
 
 411 
 
 Witt, but 
 Ullein, but 
 
 vlU\ as j than: when. 
 ?lll\\ so then ; consequently ; also. 
 Stud), also; evw. 
 s ?Cnf bau, in order that. 
 5315, until. 
 J)a, since. 
 
 IDafyer, therefore ; hence. 
 5)afera, in case that ; if. 
 2)ajj, that; in order that 
 ©amtt, in order that 
 5)avum, therefore ; on that account 
 2>enn, for; because; than. 
 2)ennccb, still; nevertheless. 
 3)efH)alb, therefore ; on that ac- 
 count 
 ©etfe, the (L. 32. 10). 
 SDocb, yet; however; still. 
 (5"fye, before-that; ere. 
 CS'nhvcbev, either. 
 %o\i$, in case that 
 [Jolglidb, consequently. 
 3e, — bejrc, the— the 
 Sebed), yet, nevertheless. 
 Snbem, while; because; since. 
 9Jltt()in, consequently. 
 
 jJtacfybem, after-that 
 
 Stech. nor; ror yet. 
 
 8lim, therefore; then. 
 
 9lur, but; only. 
 
 £)b, whether; if. 
 
 CiV\(eicb, though; although. 
 
 Cbfdieu, though; although. 
 
 Obrooljl, though; although. 
 
 £)ber, or. 
 
 £)r)ne, without ; except 
 
 Cljngeacrjtcr, notwithstanding. 
 
 @o, thus; therefore; if. 
 
 (Soubcvn, but. 
 
 Hub, and. 
 
 Ungead) tzt, notwithstanding. 
 
 3Q3ar)tenb, whilst. 
 
 SBafyrenb bem, whilst. 
 
 SSdfyrenb bap, whilst that 
 
 SBeber, neither. 
 
 SBenn, if; as. 
 
 SBeil, because. 
 
 SBenngtctd), although. 
 
 SBennfdicn, although 
 
 2Bie, as; when. 
 
 2Stett>ol)(, though. 
 
 2Bc, if. 
 
 SBoferu, if; in case that 
 
 § 118. INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 (1) Interjections, as the name implies, are commonly thrown into 
 a sentence; without, however, changing either its structure or its 
 signification. They are merely the signs of strong or sudden emo- 
 tion; and may be classified according to the nature of the emotion 
 which they indicate : some expressing joy ; some sorrow ; some 
 surprise, and so on. The list below contains those only that most 
 commonly occur. 
 
 etch ! alas! ^r)! p! oh! o! 
 
 afj! ah ! fcfut! fy! 
 
 et! eigh! fcft! hist! 
 
 I;a! ha! toetje! wo! alas! 
 
 fa', ho! 
 
 faifa! hurrah! 
 
412 sriVTAX 05 THE AR'X'i.'CLE^^B^^P§ 120. 
 
 f)eba! ho there! judVfjcifa! huzza! 
 
 t;a.t! hold! h>o(>(an! well then! 
 
 tjella! holla! l;ut! hoa! quick! 
 
 Intj'cb! hush! fid)! lo ! 
 
 leibev! alas ! (nun ! hem! 
 
 (2) It may be added thai other parts of speech and even whole 
 phrases, are often employed as interjections, and in parsing are treat- 
 ed as such. 
 
 § 119. SYNTAX. 
 
 Syntax is that part of Grammar which unfolds the relations and 
 ofces of words as arranged and combined in sentences. 
 
 The essential parts of every sentence are the subject, which is that 
 of which something is affirmed ; and the predicate, which is that which 
 contains the affirmation. 
 
 The subject is either a noun or that which is the representative or 
 equivalent of a noun ; the predicate is either a verb alone, or a verb 
 in conjunction with some other part or parts of speech. All other 
 words entering into a sentence, are to be regarded as mere adjuncts. 
 The following sentences exhibit the subject and the predicate under 
 several varieties of form : 
 
 Subject. Predicate. 
 
 God exists. 
 
 Man is mortal. * 
 
 To be, contents his natural desire. 
 
 Throwing the stone was his crime. 
 
 Sentences are either simple, that is, contain a single assertion ci 
 proposition ; or compound, that is, contain two or more assertions 01 
 propositions. Of the various parts of a sentenr^ whether principal 
 or adjunct, we come now to speak more m detail; so as to show the 
 relation, agreement, government and arrangement of words in con- 
 struction. 
 
 § 120. THE ARTICLES. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 The article in German, whether definite or indefinite, h generally 
 employed wherever the corresponding article would be used in 
 English. 
 
 * In the sentence God exists the verb exists is the predicate : affirming, as 
 it does, existence of the Almighty. But in the sentence, man is mortal, mortal- 
 
-** 
 
 SYNT^^^H: ARTICLE. § 120. 413 
 
 Observations. 
 
 This rule is of course founded upon the presumption that the 
 itudent is familiar with the usage of the English in respect to the 
 article. In the specifications that follow, therefore, he is to look 
 only for the points in which the German differs from the usage of 
 our own language. 
 
 ( 1 ) The Germans insert the definite article : 
 
 (a) Before words of abstract or universal signification; as, bet 
 Stteufdi ift fierblid), man (i. e. every man) is mortal; b a 3 ®elb ift befyn* 
 bar, gold is ductile ; b a 8 Seben ift fur$, life is short ; b i e £ugeub 
 fiifivt jam ©liicfe, virtue leads to happiness ; 
 
 (b) before the names of certain divisions or periods of time : as, 
 bcr ©onntag, Sunday; berSKeritag, Monday; bev 2)cjembcr, December 
 ber Slitauft, August; ber ©envmer, Summer: 
 
 (c) before certain names (feminines) of countries ; as, bie Xwcizl, 
 Turkey; tie ©clnreij, Switzerland; bie Sombarbei, Lombardy: 
 
 (d) before the names of authors, when used to denote their works; 
 as, id) lefc ben Sofftng, I am reading Lessing: 
 
 (e) before the proper names or titles of persons, when used in a 
 way denoting familiarity or inferiority ; as, grape b t e 3)lcme, greet 
 (or remember me to) Mary; fcige bem Shttfycr, baf id) il;n ju fefyett 
 lvinifdie, tell Luther, that I wish to see him: also, when connected 
 with attributive adjectives: as, bte Heine (Soptjie, little Sophia: 
 
 (f) before words (especially proper names of persons) whose cases 
 are not made krown either by a change of termination, or by the 
 
 '.-.ence of a preposition; as, bcuS Sebcn ber ^ftvficn, the lite of 
 .inees; bie $rau bed @ecrate$, the wife of Socrates; ber Sag ber 
 DuKbe, the day of (the) vengeance^: 
 
 (g) before the names of ranks, bodies, or systems of doctrine: as, 
 has 5parlamcnt, Parliament; bte SRegierung, government; bie SJlenar* 
 due, monarchy ; b a 6 (5(;ti[tenf()um, Christianity : also in such phrases : 
 as, in ber <Stabr, in town; in ber birdie, at church; bte metjien 
 9Keufdieit, most men. 
 
 (h) before the words (signifying) half and both : as, bte Ijalbe 
 (not fyalbe bie) 3a()t, half the number; bte betben (not beiben bie) 
 58 ruber, both the brothers : 
 
 (i) before words denoting the limit, within which certain specified 
 numbers or amounts are confined ; wherein in English, th*i indefinite 
 article would be used: as, jttehnat b te 2£edu, twice a wett.«: 
 
 ity is what is affirmed of man ; and the verb (is) is ihe mere link that t croecta 
 Ifrie subject and ih<- predicate together. It is thence called the copula. § 158. 
 
414 SYNTAX OF THE NOUjjtfP^^l; 
 
 (2) Note, further, that the German differs from the English in 
 omitting the definite article, — 
 
 (a) before certain law appellatives, as: 23cffagtcv, {the) defendant; 
 iltdgev, (ike) plaintiff; StyycUaut, (the) appellant; Supplicant, (the) 
 petitioner : 
 
 (b) before certain common expressions such as, in better Orbnung, 
 in (the) best order ; Uebevbrtnger bicfed, (the) bearer of this; and cer- 
 tain adjectives and participles treated as nouns; as, evfterer, (the) 
 former ; le^tever, (the) latter ; befagter, (the) before-said (person) : 
 
 (c) before certain proper names of places: as, .Djtinbien, (the; 
 East Indies; SBeftinbien, (the) West Indies; and before the names of 
 the Cardinal points: as, Often, (the) East; 2Beftcn, (the) West; (Siiben, 
 (the) South ; Sfcorben, (the) North : 
 
 (d) before a past participle joined with a no«n, which, in English, 
 precedes the participle: as, baS ycrlovene 5pavabied, (literally, the lost 
 Paradise) Paradise Lost. 
 
 (3) Note, again, that the Germans in using certain collective 
 terms preceded by adjectives, employ the indefinite article where the 
 English would use the definite : as, cm f;ed)tt>ctfcr. dlatl), the (lit a) 
 most learned Senate ; eiue leblid)e Untocr jitat, the (a) honorable Uni- 
 versity. 
 
 (4) In German, also, the indefinite article stands before (not after y 
 as in English,) the words, such, half: thus, cin feldicr Sftann, (not 
 feldher em SJlaun), such a man ; ein fyalbctf Satyr (not fyalbeS cin 3afir), 
 half a year. In questions, direct or indirect, like the following: (Sinen 
 tt>ie langen ©pajicrvttt Ijat cr gemadjt, how long a ri^e has he taken; 
 it must be noticed that the article stands before tvte ; thus, etnen tote 
 langen (a how long) and not, as in English, how long a. 
 
 (5) The German differs again from the English in not using an 
 articie at all in the phrases answering to the English ; a few ; a thou- 
 sand; a hundred. 
 
 § 121. THE NOUN. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 A ncu- or pronoun which is the subject of a sentence must be m 
 the nominative case : as, 
 
 £>ev 2Jlenfd) benfr, ®ctt lenfr, man devises, God disposes. 
 2)tc 33erge bonnent, the mountains thunder. 
 
 Observations, 
 (1) The subject or nominative in German, is seldom omitted, ex 
 
USE OF HIE NOMINATIVE. § 122. § 123. 415 
 
 eept in the case of the pronouns agreeing with veibs in the second 
 person (singular and plural) of the Imperative: as, 
 
 Zck (bit), read ! ©rfjet uub fagct (3I;r) ii)m, go and tell him. 
 See. however, § 136. 2. 
 
 § 122. Rule. 
 
 A noun or pronoun which is the predicate of a sentence, must be 
 In the nominative case : as, 
 
 ©r ftar ein groper jlomg, he was a great king. 
 
 SMcfcr Jfrtabe ift ^anfmaun gcluerben, this boy is become a merchant. 
 
 QUeranbcr Ijicjj ber ©rope, Alexander was called the Great. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) This rule applies, where the subject and the predicate are 
 connected, as above, by such verbs as fetn, to be ; lucrbeu, to become ; 
 Ijeifjen. to be called; blet&en, to remain, &.c. 
 
 (2) So, also, the rule becomes applicable when any of those 
 verbs which in the active govern two accusatives (§ 132. 2.), are em- 
 ployed passively : as, (Stceto nutrbe ber Stater bet SBatevlanbeg genamtt, 
 Cicero was called the father of his country ; Qrv ift Slier anber getauft 
 toevben, he has been christened Alexander. From this remark, how- 
 ever, must be excepted the verb I c 1} t e u : since it has no passive. 
 
 § 123. Rule. 
 
 A noun used to limit * the application of another noun signifying 
 a different thing, is put in the genitive ; a *, 
 
 £>cr Sauf ber (Sonne, the course of the sun. 
 JDcr (Sefm meitted ^rcunbcc, the son of my friend. 
 JDie (Srjiefnutg ber Jtinbcr, the education of the children. 
 3Me 2Gaf>( eine» greunbeS, the choice of a friend. 
 
 Observations. 
 (1) If, however, the limiting noun (unless restricted itself by 
 an adjective or some other qualifying word) signify measure, num- 
 ber, weight or quantity, it is then put in the same case with that 
 which it limits ; as, gtnei ®la3 9Bcin (not SBehteg), two glasses (of) 
 wine ; fceby iPfunb £f)ee (not Sijecs), six pounds (of) tea : but (with 
 
 * How the limitation is made, is easily seen: thus, brr Saitf ber (Senile, 
 the course of the sun. Here we speak not of any course indefinitely, buf 
 of the sun's course definitely: the word bet (Sonne, is the genitive, Limit 
 ing fcer 8<rnf, which is the governing word. 
 
416 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN" §«l23. 
 
 a restrictive term), fed) 3 $funb b i c f c 5 Xf;ccs5 ; jtoei ©tuS b t e f e I 
 
 5Btiue3. 
 
 (2) It should be observed that the two nouns under this Rule 
 must be of different significations; for two nouns standing for the 
 same thing, would be in the same case, forming an instance of appo- 
 sition. See § 133. (1). 
 
 (3) The noun in the genitive, that is, the limiting noun, is com- 
 monly said to be governed by the other one. This genitive is either 
 subjective or objective ; subjective, when it denotes that which does 
 something or has something : objective, when it denotes that which 
 suffers something, or which is the object of what is expressed by the 
 governing word. To illustrate this, we have only to take the ex- 
 amples given above : bet Scuif bet (Sonne, the course of the sun ; bte 
 ©rjieljfung ber Jttubev, the education of the children ; where, in the 
 first example, the sun is represented as performing or having a 
 course, and is consequently subjective; and, in the second example, 
 the children are represented as being the objects of education, and 
 the word is consequently objective. This objective genitive, it should 
 be added, occurs only after verbal nouns, and chiefly those ending 
 in the suffixes e r, which marks the deer, and u n g, which marks 
 the doing of an action. 
 
 (4) It seems hardly necessary to observe that under this rule 
 come all words which perform the office of nouns ; as, pronouns, ad- 
 jectives used substantively, &c. ; thus, bie ©nctbe ber ©rofjett, the fa- 
 vor of the great. 
 
 (5) We say often in English, He is a friend to, or an enemy to, 
 or a nephew to any one ; where, were these phrases put into German, 
 we might expect the dative to be used. But, in such cases, the Ger- 
 man always employs the Genitive : thus, er ijl ein ?i;einb feineS 33ater* 
 (anbc*3, he is an enemy of his native country. 
 
 (6) We say in English, the month of August, the city of Lon- 
 don, and the like : where the common and the proper name of the 
 same thing are connected by the preposition of. The Germans pui 
 the two nouns in apposition. See § 133. (2). 
 
 (7) So, too, in English we say, the fifth of August ; but, in Ger- 
 man, the numeral is put in direct agreement with the name of the 
 month : as, ber fiiufte Slnejuft, the fifth {of) August, or August fifth. 
 
 (8) In place of the genitive, the preposilion y o n, followed by 
 the dative, is, in the following instances, generally used : 
 
 a. When succeeded by nouns signifying quality, rank, measure 
 weight, age, distance and the like ; as, ein Tlann tun fyoljem (Stanbe, 
 
w 
 
 USE OF THE GENITIVE. § 124. § 125. 417 
 
 a man of high standing; em <Sduff yen jtoet fjnnbert Itcimen, a ship of 
 two hundred tons; ein ©clinch t »on fitnf SjSfttnib, a weight of five 
 pounds ; cm 2ft cum vcu cidUjig Safyren, a man of eighty years ; erne 
 Sfceife mm brei Sftciten, a journey of three miles; ein (Snglcmbet yen 
 ©eburt, an Englishman by birth, &c. 
 
 6. When followed by nouns denoting the material or substance 
 of whhh any thing is made : as, ein JBecfoer yea ©ilber, a cup of sil- 
 ver, i. e. a silver cup ; cine Ufjr yen ©otbe, a gold watch, &c. 
 
 c. When followed by nouns whose cases are not indicated by 
 the terminations of declension nor by the presence of the article: as, 
 £>er <Scbein you Dleblid^eit, the appearance of honesty ; ein 33ater yon 
 fcdi3 Jtinbern, a father of six children ; bie Jtontgin yon (Sngtcmb, the 
 queen of England ; bie ©renjen yon $ranfteicn, the boundaries of 
 France ; bcr 33 if di of yen jtonjicmj, the bishop of Constance 
 
 d. When followed by a word indicating the uhole, of which the 
 word preceding expresses but a part : as, etner yon inetnen 33efannien, 
 one of my acquaintances ; iyeld)er yen beiben ? wliich of the two ? 
 
 § 124. Rule. 
 
 A noun limiting the application of an adjective, where in English 
 the relation would be expressed by such words as of or from, is put 
 in the genitive : as, bie meifien SBerlufte jtnb eine3 (Srfafccg fdfyig, most 
 losses are capable of reparation ; bie @vbe ift yotf ber ©ute be3 «&«nt, 
 the earth is full of the goodness of the Lord. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The adjectives comprehended under this rale are such as follow 
 
 33?b£irftig, in want; needing. Seer, void. 
 
 33enet()igt, needing ; wanting. £o3, free; rid. 
 
 ©ettmjjt, conscious. 2#ddittg, having; in possession. 
 
 (Singcbenf, mindful. 2fti'tbe, tired; weary. 
 
 ftahig, capable; susceptible. ©ait, satiated ; weary. 
 
 greft, glad. ©dmlbtg, guilty; indebted. 
 
 ©etrain', aware. Zlmtytft, partaking. 
 
 ©ewartig, waiting; in expecta- Ueberbviiffig, tired; weary. 
 
 tion. S3erbdd)tig, suspicious. 
 
 ©ctoifi, sure; certain. SSertnftig, having lost ; deprived o£ 
 
 ©eioefmt, used to ; in the habit. 93o(i, full. 
 
 ftunbig, ha ring a knowledge; 5Bertr>, worth; worthy. 
 
 skilled. SBurbtcj, worthy. 
 
 £eblg, empty : void. Duttt, rid ; free from. 
 18* 
 
418 
 
 dYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 125. § 126. 
 
 (2) After geiuaf/r, getootjnt, log, mube, fatt, soft and tocrtl), the 
 accusative is often used: as, er roarb feinen 93 ruber gpwafyr, he was 
 aware of (the presence of) his brother, i. e. he observed his brother. 
 
 § 12*5 Rule. 
 
 A noun limiting the application of any of the verbs following, is 
 put in the genitive : 
 
 Sid) ten, to mind, or regard. 
 33ebfrrfen, to want. 
 93egeftren, to desire. 
 93 raud)en, to use. 
 Gfntbefyren, to need. 
 fSittratljen, to do without 
 (Srmangelu, to want, or be without 
 (5rtt>al)nen, to mention, 
 ©ebcnfeu, to think, or ponder. 
 ©emefen, to enjoy, 
 ©etoaljren, to observe. 
 
 «£>arreu, to wait 
 £cid)en, to laugh. 
 $PJIegen, to foster. 
 ©djonen, to spare. 
 <Svcttcn r to mock. 
 93erfe()len, to miss, or fail. 
 93ergeffen, to forget. 
 9Cal)veu, to guard. 
 ffialjruefymeit, to observe. 
 2Balren, to manage. 
 SBarten, to attend to, or mind. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 93eburfen, begefyrcn, braud)eu, entbefyren, errodfjnen, geniefjen, pflegen, 
 fd)oneu, verfefjten, fcergepn, toaljrnetjmen, toafjren and voaxten, take more 
 frequently, in common conversation, the accusative. 9ld)teu, fyaxxev 
 and ttarteu are more commonly construed with a u f, and tad)en, 
 gotten and toaltcn with ii b e r , before an accusative. 
 
 § 126. Rule. 
 
 The following reflexive verbs, take in addition to the pronoun 
 peculiar to them, a word of limitation in the genitive : 
 
 Sid) cmmafen, to claim. 
 
 „ annelnnen, to engage in 
 
 „ bebtenen, to use. 
 
 „ befleifjen, to attend to. 
 
 „ befleif igen, to apply to. 
 
 „ begeben, to yield up. 
 
 „ bemadittgen, to acquire. 
 
 „ bemeiftern, to seize. 
 
 „ befcfyetben, to acquiesce in. 
 
 n beftnmm, to ponder. 
 
 „ entciufjeru, to abstain. 
 
 &ify eutbteben, to dare, or be 
 bold 
 
 „ entbrcd)en, to forbear. 
 
 „ entfyalten, to refrain. 
 
 „ eutfcttagen, to get rid 
 
 „ entftnneu, to recollect. 
 
 „ erbarmcn, to pity. 
 
 „ erfred)en, to presume. 
 
 „ erinneru, to rememler. 
 
 „ erfufyneu, to ventur6 
 
 „ ertoeljren, to resist. 
 
ft* 
 
 •*- » 
 
 USE OF THE GENITIVE. § 127. 
 
 419 
 
 $>i& freuen, to rejoice. 
 ,. getrojrcn, to hope for. 
 „ ruljmen, to boast. 
 „ fdmmen, to be ashamed. 
 „ uberfieBcn. to be haughty. 
 „ untcrfangen, to undertake. 
 
 <&id) untertohtbcn, to undertake. 
 
 „ fcermejfen, to presume. 
 
 „ fcvfefyen, to le aware. 
 
 „ foejjrert, to resist. 
 
 „ toeigmi, to refuse. 
 
 .. nnmbent, to wonder. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The genitive is in like manner put after the following impe?< 
 tonals : 
 
 (§6 gcluflct mid), I desire, or am pleased with. 
 
 (5$ jammcvt mid), I pity, or compassionate. 
 
 ($$ rcuet mid), I repent, or regret. 
 
 (S$ lofmt fid), It is worth while. 
 
 § 127. Rule. 
 
 The verbs following require after them a genitive denoting a 
 thing and an Accusative signifying a person. 
 
 Gnhvefyrteii, to wean. 
 2cgfprcd)cn, to acquit 
 Sftcifyneu, to remind, 
 ttcberfutjren, to convict. 
 Uebevl)cben, to exempt. 
 tteberjeugen, to convince, 
 ffievjtdiern, to assure. 
 SBcvtrojlen, to amuse, or put off 
 with hope. 
 SBitvbigen, to deem worthy. 
 3ciljeit, to accuse; to charge. 
 
 Stoiffagen, to accuse. 
 18 etc ()r en, to inform. 
 33erciuben, to rob. 
 ffiefduttbtvjcn, to accuse. 
 (5'ntbinben, to liberate. 
 (Entblcjjen, to strip, 
 dntfyeben, to exempt 
 ©ntlaben, to disburden. 
 (5'ntfleiben, to undress. 
 Qntlaffen, to free from. 
 Grntlcbtgen, to free from. 
 (SntjVfcen, to displace. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 @r Ijat mid) meineS ©etbe$ beranbt, he has robbed me of my money. 
 2)er 93ifd)cf tjat ben ^Jrcbtger feineS SlmteS cntfe#t, the bishop has 
 removed the preacher from his office. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The verbs above, when in the passive voice, take for their 
 nominative the word denoting the person : the genitive of the thing 
 remaining the same : as, er ift eineS 33evbred)en$ angeflagt toorben. Im 
 has been accused of a crime. 
 
420 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. § 128. § 129. 
 
 § 128. Rule. 
 
 Nouns denoting the time, place, manner, intent or cause cf an ao 
 tion, are often put absolutely in the genitive and treated as adverbs ' 
 as, 
 
 'DeS SJlorgenS gel)e id) an0, in the morning I go out. 
 
 2Jlan fudit ifyn alter Drten, they seek him everywhere. 
 
 3d) bin 2Bi((eu$ {;tn'$ugc{;en, I am willing to go there. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) This adverbial use of the genitive is quite common in Ger- 
 man. See § 101. In order, however, to express the particular 
 point, or the duration of time, the accusative is generally employed, 
 or a preposition with its proper case ; as, 3d) fterbe nddifteu ilUciuag 
 an (3 ber <Stabt gefyen, T shall go out of town next monday. 
 
 § 129. Rule. 
 
 A noun or pronoun used to represent the object, in reference to 
 which an action is done or directed, is put in the dative : as, 
 3di banfe bit*, I thank (or am thankful to) you. 
 Qx gcfdltt iMcIeu Seutcn, he pleases many people. 
 (S'v ift bent XCbt entgangen, he has escaped from death. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The dative is the case employed to denofe the pe^on or the 
 thing, in relation to which the subject of the verb is represented as 
 acting. Compared with the accusative, it is the case of the remote 
 object: the accusative being the case of the immediate object. Thus, 
 in the example, id) fdn'icb meinem 23ater einen QSrtef, I wrote (to) my 
 father a letter, the immediate object is a letter ; while father, the per- 
 son to whom I wrote, is the remote object. The number of verbs 
 thus taking the accusative with the dative, is quite large. 
 
 (2) On the principle explained in the preceding observation, may 
 be resolved such cases as the following : eg iijut mir leib, it causes 
 me sorrow, or I am sorry ; eg rrurb mir tm <£>er$en wet) t()im, it will 
 cause pain to me in the heart, (it will pain me to the heart,)&c. 
 
 (3) A right regard to the observation made above, namely, that 
 Lie dative merely marks that person or thing, in reference to which 
 an action is performed, will serve, also, to explain all such examples 
 »b these : 3fynen bebentet biefeS £tyfer nid)tS, to you (i. e. so far ss you 
 
USE OF THE DATIVE. § 130. § 131. 421 
 
 are concerned) this sacrifice means nothing; bie Xt)xamxt r bie Chtrem 
 Streit gejlejfen, the tears which have flowed in relation to (i. e.from) 
 your dispute ; mir tchide ein (Sdiiip ba$ $Pferb, a shot killed a horse 
 for mo, i. e. killed my horse ; fade mir nidbt, .Kleiner, fall not for me, 
 little one. In such instances as the last two, the dative is often 
 omitted in translating. 
 
 (4) The Rule comprehends all such verbs as the following : anU 
 tooften, to answer ; bcmfett, to thank ; bienen, to serve ; breijen, to 
 threaten ; fejjlen, to fall short ; ffttdien, to curse ; fclcjen, to follow ; 
 frojjrten, tc do homage ; geMljten, to be due ; gefalleu, to please ; ge* 
 fyeren, to pertain to ; gefyercrien, to obey ; geimgen, to satisfy ; gerei* 
 fyn, to be adequate ; gleid)en, to resemble ; £)eifen, to help, &c. 
 
 (5) This Rule, also, comprehends all reflexive verbs that govern 
 the dative : as, id) mape mir fetnen Xitel an, toeldjen id) nid)t ijabe, I 
 claim to myself no title, which I have not; as, also, all impersonate 
 requiring the dative : as, ea foeliebt mir, it pleases me, or I am pleased : 
 c3 mangett mir, it is wanting to me, or I am wanting, &c. 
 
 (6) The dative is, also, often used after passive verbs : as, ifnteit 
 tourbe roiberjianben, it was resisted to them, i. e. they were resisted ; 
 *jcn ©etfiern roirb bet SEBeg bap befdut|t, the way thereto is guarded 
 by angels ; tfmi roirb gelclmt, (literally) it is rewarded to Mm, i. e. he 
 is rewarded. 
 
 § 130. Rule. 
 
 Many compound verbs, particularly those compounded with e i, 
 » e r, e n t, a n, a b, a u f, bet, it a d), 8 o v, j u and w i b e t, require 
 after them the dative ; as, 
 
 3d) f;aBe ifjm ©elb ange&oten, I have offered him money. 
 
 § 131. Rule. 
 
 An adjective used to limit the application of a noun, where m 
 English the relation would be expressed by such words as to or for, 
 governs the dative : as, 
 
 <Sei beinem -§errit getreu, be faithful to your master. 
 
 £)a3 SBetter tft iiug uicbt guuftig, the weather is not favorable to us 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) Under this Rule are embraced (among others) the following 
 adjectives : afynlicb, like ; angemeffen, app-opriate ; angenefjm, agree- 
 able ; aufie&ig, offensive; befamtt, known ; befcbteben, destined; eigen, 
 peculiar; fremb, foreign; gem&fj, according to, - gemein, common; 
 
422 tSE OF TRE ACCUSATIVE. § 132. 
 
 geroaijfcn, competent; gn&big, gracious; rjettfam, healthful; Itefc 
 agreaable ; nal)c, near ; ubevtegen, superior ; toiUfommen, welcome 
 toibvig, adverse; bienftbar, serviceable; gcfyorfam, obedient; uiijjlid), 
 useful. 
 
 § 132. Rule. 
 
 A noun or pronoun which is the immediate object of an active 
 iransitive verb, is put in the accusative : 
 
 SQBir tteben unfere $rcunbe, we love our friends. 
 
 S)« $unb betoad)t ba$ $au$, the dog guards the house. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The accusative, as before said, being the case of the direct 
 or immediate object (§ 129. 1.) is used with all verbs, whatever their 
 classification in other respects, that have a transitive signification. 
 Accordingly, under this rule come all those impersonal and reflexive 
 verbs that take after them the accusative ; all those verbs having a 
 causative signification, as, fatten, to fell, i. e. to cause to fall ; as 
 also nearly all verbs compounded with the prefix be.* 
 
 (2) Sefyren, to teach ; nennen, to name ; fyeipen, to call ; fdietten, 
 to reproach (with vile names) ; taufen, to baptize (christen) ; take 
 after them two accusatives : as, er hljxt mid) bie beutfcfce <2ptadbe, he 
 teaches me the German language ; er neunt ifm feinen dtttkx, he calls 
 him his deliverer. See Lesson LIIL 
 
 (3) The accusative is used with such terms as to t e g e u, to 
 weigh ; f e ft e n, to cost ; g e It e n, to pass for ; to e r t i), worth ; 
 f d) to e x, heavy ; ret di, rich ; I a n g, long ; to e i t, wide ; to mark 
 definitely the measure or distance f indicated by these words ; as, 
 btcfer <&ted ift ehten %u$ tang, this stick is a foot long ; er ift oter 
 QJionate alt, he is four months old. 
 
 (4) As words expressing time indefinitely are put in the genitive 
 (§ 128. 1.), so 'those denoting a particular point, or duration of time, 
 are put in the accusative ; as, id) toartete ben gtoeiten Sag, I waited 
 two days. 
 
 (0) A substantive construed with a participle, is sometimes put 
 absolutely in the accusative ; as, btcfen Umftanb auSgenemmen, finbe 
 id) idUs recbt, this circumstance excepted, I find all right. 
 
 * The exceptions are begegnen, bef>agen, bejlefjcn, berutjen, befravven and 
 beoxutfen. 
 
 t In the ea,! ier German, these words of measure or distance were puJ 
 in the genitive : as, finer, ©panne loeit, a span wide. 
 
apposition. § 133. § 134. 423 
 
 § 133. Rule. 
 
 A noun or pronoun used merely to explain or specify that which 
 is signified by a preceding noun or pronoun, must be in the same 
 case : as, 
 
 Qjicere, ein grejjier Oftebiter, Cicero, a great orator. 
 
 3l)m, meinem 2Bcf}ttf>dtcr, to him, my benefactor. 
 
 3)er Sftcitf; meineg ©rubers, beg 9ted|tgge(el;riett, the advice of my 
 brother, the lawyer. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The explanatory noun is said to be in apposition with that 
 which it explains . the latter being called the principal term. Be- 
 tween these two, that is, between the principal and the explanatory 
 term, there often intervenes some connective particle. Thus, cv ijat 
 fieri aid ©efefcge&ei Oerbient gcrnadir, he, as a lawgiver, has rendered 
 himself meritorious ; mem Dhicubar, namltdb bet 93auev, my neighbor, 
 namely, the farmer. This latter mode of specifying (that is, with 
 the word n&mUdb), is far more common in German than in English. 
 
 (2) The proper names of months, countries, towns, and the like 
 appellatives are put in apposition with their common names ; where, 
 in English, the two words stand connected, for the most part, by the 
 preposition of; as, ber SDlenat 9(ucuift, the month (of) August ; bie 
 @tabt fieuben, the city (of) London; bie Uniuerfitat Drforb, the uni- 
 versity (of) Oxford. 
 
 § 134. THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 A pronoun must agree with the noun or pronoun which it repre- 
 sents, in person, number and gender : as, 
 
 2)er SDlann, toelcbcr toeife ijt, the man who is wise. 
 2)ie ftrctu, toeldie ffrtjjig ift, the woman who is diligent. 
 2)ag $itib, » eld) eg He in ift, the child that is small. 
 
 Observations. 
 (1) The neuter pronoun, e g , is used in a general and indefinite 
 way to represent words of all gender and numbers : as, eg tji ber 
 ■Dtftaun, it is the man ; eg ift i>k %xau, it is the woman ; eg ijt bag jtiub, 
 it is the child; eg ftnb bie Scanner, they are the men, &c. In like 
 manner, also, often are used, the pronouns bag, (thai) ; b i e g, {this) 
 K> a g. (what) ; as also the neuter adjective a 1 1 e g, (all) ; as, bat 
 fatb metne 3tid)ter, th«?e are my judges. 
 
4:24 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 135. 
 
 (2) When the antecedent is a personal appellation formed by one 
 of the diminutive (neuter) terminations, dun and letn, the pro- 
 noun instead of being in the neuter, takes generally the gendei 
 natural to the person represented: as, too tit \l)X <2 6 (nidi en ? 3ft ei 
 (not ea) im ©arten '? Where is your little son 1 Is he in the garden 1 
 The same remark applies to 2BeiO {woman) and ftraitenjimmet (lady)* 
 When, however, a child or servant is referred to, the neuter is 
 often employed. 
 
 (3) A collective noun may in German, as in English, be repre- 
 sented by a pronoun in the plural number: as, bie ©eiftiidifeit xoat 
 fur t()re Siedite feijt beforgt, the clergy were very anxious about their 
 rights. 
 
 (4) The relative in German can never, as in English, be sup- 
 pressed:* thus, in English, we say, the letter (which) you wrote; but 
 in German, it must be, bet 33rtef, treidien bn fdiricbeji 
 
 (5) The neuter pronoun e 6 , at the beginning of a sentence, is 
 often merely expletive, and answers to the English word "there" in 
 the like situation : as, eg mat niemanb i)iet, there was no one here ; 
 eg fommen Sente, there are people coming. 
 
 (6) The English forms, he is a friend of mine; it is a stable of 
 ours, &c, can not be literally rendered into German; for there we 
 must say, er ift mein Smtnb, he is my friend; or, er ift eutet meiuet 
 ftreuube,. he is one of my friends, &c. See L. 28. 3. 
 
 (7) The definite article in German is often used, where in Eng- 
 lish a possessive pronoun is required : as, e* nrinf te itjm mtt bet ^cuib, 
 lie beckoned to him with his (Ike) hand. 
 
 (8) The datives of the personal pronouns are often in familiar 
 style employed in a manner merely expletive: as, id) lebe mir bei« 
 D^ctnteeut, I like Rhenish wine for me, i. e. I prefer Rhenish wine 
 See § 129. 3. 
 
 $ 135. THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule. 
 Adjectives, when they precede their nouns (expressed or under 
 stood), agree with them in gender, number and case ; as, 
 25tefe fcridne ©ante, this handsome lady. 
 @m gutter imb geterttet SSater, a good and just father. 
 £>ett jwolfteit biefeS SWcuatg, the twelfth (day) of this month, &o. 
 £!et tit eitt Sftipyerftanb, — e it tjanbgreiflicfyer, here is a misunder- 
 standing, — a palpable (one). 
 
 Tie antecedent is sometimes omitted, and sometimes follows the relative ; as, £ t fo J<nttii, Unutt 
 nifct, {Ctese) that think thus, do not know him ' ^ ' ^** 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 135. § 136. 425 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (i) This Rule of course has reference to those adjectives which 
 aie use 1 attributively; for predicative adjectives it "will be remem- 
 bered, are not d^clinec.. For the several circumstances under which 
 adjectives are varied in declension, consult § 27. § 28.-, &c. 
 
 (2) This Rule applies equally to adjectives of all degrees of 
 comparison; as, bejfere 23i'ater, better books; ber bz\te 2i$ei:i, Ihe 
 best wine ; be$ bejien 2Qeine3, of the best wine, &c. So, too, it tip- 
 plies equally to all classes of adjectives ; as, adjective pronouns, 
 numerals and participles. 
 
 (3) The word "one" which, in English, so often supplies the place 
 of a preceding noun after an adjective, cannot be translated literally 
 into German : its office being rendered needless in the latter tongue 
 by the terminations of declension. See last example under the Rule 
 
 (4) So, also, the English "one's" is the proper equivalent of the 
 German f e t n, in such cases as the following : gifct e$ dwaS GsbteteS, 
 a!3 fetnen §einben ju sergefcen ? is any thing more noble than to for- 
 aive one's enemies ] 
 
 (5) When the same adjective is made to refer to several singulai 
 nouns differing in gender, it must be repeated with each and varied 
 m form accordingly ; as, etn gelefyricr <2o(nt unb etne getefyrtc £od)ter, 
 a learned son and a learned daughter. The adjectives are, also, often 
 repeated, though the nouns be all of the same gender. 
 
 § 136. THE VERBS. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 A verb agrees with its subject or nominative in number and per- 
 son; as, 
 
 Seber StugenMtcE ift fejifeat, every moment is precious. 
 2)te 23dume btuf;en im ftrupng, the trees bloom in spring. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) When the subject is the pronoun c 8, b a 5 or b t e 8, used in- 
 definitely (See § 134. 1.), the predicate, if a noun, determines the 
 numbei and person of the verb ; as, c$ {tub btc gvucbte SfyveS £Jjurt& 
 these are the fruits of your actions. 
 
 (2) In -the second person (singular and plural) of the imperative 
 snood, the pronoun which forms the subject is commonly omitted ; 
 
 .s, gefcet Bin uttb faget Sefyamri tnieber, teas? 31jr fe£;et uub f)6vet, go and 
 toll Jc hn what ye see and hear. 
 
 f3) VTien the verb has two or more singular subjects connected 
 
426 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 137. 
 
 by unb, J t is generally put in the plural ; as, <§afj unb Cnferfudit 
 ft ub fyefti^e Seibcufcbaften, hatred and jealousy are violent passions. 
 
 (4) When the subject is a collective noun, that is, one conveying 
 the idea of many individuals taken together as unity, the verb must 
 (generally) be in *he singular; as, ba$ cngfifdie 93df (;at grope 
 §rei!)eit, the Englisn people have (has) great liberty. In a few cases 
 only, as, eiu *}>aar, a pair ; eine Sftenge, a number ; em IDufceub, a 
 dozen, the verb stands in the plural. 
 
 (5) When a verb has several subjects, and they are of different 
 persons, the verb agrees with the first rather than the second, and 
 the second rather than the third ; as, bu, beat JBruber unb id) tociicn 
 fpajieren geljen, thou, thy brother and I will go take a walk ; bu \inb 
 beta 33ruber ttermogct luel, you and your brother avail much. 
 
 § 137. USE OF THE TENSES. 
 Rule. 
 The Present tense properly expresses what exists or is taking place 
 at the time being ; as, tie tt>cu)ve Xapfcvfctt befd)ufct \>m ©d)U>ad)eti, 
 true valor protects the weak. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The Present in German, as in other languages, is often, in 
 lively narrative, employed in place of the Imperfect ; as, 
 
 S)te ©eune gef)t (for ging) uuier, bci fteljt (for ftcutb) et am S'fjor, ic, 
 the sun goes down, while he stands at the door, &c. 
 
 (2) The Present is not unfrequently used for the Future, when 
 the true time is sufficiently clear from the context ; or when, for 
 the sake of emphasis, a future event is regarded and treated as al- 
 ready certain ; as, 
 
 3d) vcife morgen a&, I start (i. c. will start) to morrow. 
 
 2Ber tt>eip, ton mergen fiber un3 befiefjtt, who knows who commands 
 
 (i. e. will command) us to-morrow ? 
 Salb fef;cn ©ie mid) nueber, soon you (will) see me again. 
 2)ie3 (gcblofi crfteigen toix in biefer fflafyt, this castle scale we (i. e, 
 
 will we scale) this very night. 
 
 (3) It should be noted that the Present is, moreover, the propel 
 tense for the expression of general or universal truths or proposi- 
 tions ; as, bie 93ogcl ffiegen in bcr Shift, birds fly in the air. 
 
 (4) In English we have several forms of the Present tense ; as, 
 I praise, I do praise or J am praising. In German there is but 
 one form (id) lobe) for the expression of these several shades of 
 uceardncr. 
 
USE OT THE TENSES. § 138. § 139. 427 
 
 (5) The Present in connection with the adverb f d) c n (already] 
 often supplies the place of a Perfect ; as, nrir tootynen fdum ftcbett 
 3a()ve l)iev, already dwell we here (i. e. have ice dwell) seven years. 
 
 (6) Jn English, we say often, "I do walk, I did walk," and the 
 .ike : where the verb do (Present and Imperfect) is employed as an 
 auxiliary. This cannot properly be done with the corresponding 
 verb (t i) u n, to do) in German. 
 
 & 138. Rule. 
 
 The Imperfect tense is used to express what existed, or ivas taking 
 place at some past time indicated by the context : as, id) fditicb an 
 <2te, aU id) Sfyren SBrief ev(;ie(i, I was writing to you, when I received 
 your letter. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The Imperfect is the historical tense of the Germans. Its 
 proper office is to mark what is incomplete, or going on, while some- 
 thing else is going on. It is the tense adopted by the narrator, who 
 speaks as an eye-icilness ; though it may be used by such as have rot 
 been eye-witnesses of the events narrated : provided the statement 
 be introduced or accompanied by such expressions as, he said (facjte 
 er), it is said, or they say (fagt man). When the speaker has not been 
 an eye-witness, the Perfect should be used. 
 
 (2) From the use of the Imperfect in expressing the continuance 
 of a thing i. e. what was going on at a given time, comes the kindred 
 power which it has, of expressing repealed or customary action : as, 
 ev pjlcgie ju fagen, he used to say, i. e. was in the habit of saying. 
 
 (3) The Imperfect in German, like the Present, has but one form; 
 which, according to circumstances, is to be rendered by any one of 
 the three English forms of that tense. 3d) 1 o b t e, therefore, is either 
 1 praised, did praise, or was praising. 
 
 § 139. Rule. 
 
 The Perfect tense is that winch represents the being, action oi 
 passion, as past and complete at the time being : as, bie ©cniffe ftnb 
 uno/femmen, the ships have arrived ; er iji i?ovii}e 2Sod)e gejlovbcn, he 
 died last week. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 O) The German Perfect, as a general thing, corresponds closely 
 to omi- Imperfect, wnen used as an aorisl ; that is, when used to ex- 
 press an event simply and absolutely, and without regard to othei 
 events or circumstances. Hence often it happens, that where in Eng- 
 
423 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 140. § 141. § 142. 
 
 lish we iue the Imperfect, the Germans employ their Perfect: thuv 
 id) ijabe beiueit Q3ruber cjefteru gcfcr/en, abcx nidtf gefprcdien, I saw your 
 brother yesterday, but did not speak to him. 
 
 (2) The auxiliary participle (ftwtben) in the perfect passive, is 
 sometimes omitted. (See § 84. 2.) 
 
 (3) We may remark here also, that, though in English we have 
 a doubie form for the Perfect, (thus, I have written and I have been 
 writing) tin Germans have but the one. By which of the English 
 forms, therefore, the German Perfect is, in any given case, to be ren 
 dered, must be determined by the context. 
 
 § 140. Rule. 
 
 The Pluperfect tense is used to express what had taken place at 
 some past time denoted by the context : as, 
 
 D£ad)bem bie (£cnne untergegangen roav, ging er roeg, after the sun had 
 
 gone down, he went off. 
 (Erfycitte rocUjvenb unferer Untervebung gcfd)lafen, he had slept during 
 our conversation. 
 
 § 141. Rule. 
 
 The first Future tense is employed merely to express what shall oi 
 Usill take place hereafter ; while the second Future is used to denote 
 what shall have occurred at some future period. 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The Future tenses are used as in English, and also to indi- 
 cate a probability, in which case they are translated by other tenses 
 »n connection with an appropriate adverb ; as, (£3 roirb 3(;r 53ruSet 
 fettt, it is probably your brother. 
 
 (2) When a future action is represented, or is mentioned, as a 
 thing necessary to be done, as in the English phrases, / am to go, 
 he is to have and the like, the German employs a distinct verb ex- 
 pressive of obligation or necessity : as, id) fo(l eg fyafcen, I am (shall 
 be obliged) to have it. @r fott fpred)en, &c. 
 
 § 142. Rule. 
 
 The Indicative mood is used in affirming or denying that which i* 
 conceived to be certain or undoubted ; as, 
 
 (&x rotvb morgeit jurMfommen, he will return to-morro~v. 
 
 Observations. 
 (1) Since the proper office of the Indicative is to express reality, 
 it is employed in all absolute or independent senten res. Even in 
 
UgE OF THE MOODS. § 143. 429 
 
 ■ondJtiona] sentences, moreover, it is used, if the condition is as- 
 uitiiea as a fact ; as, bift fcu rcid), fo gi(> Did, art thou rich (i. e. ij 
 art rich), give much. 
 (2) Sometimes the Indicative is employed instead of the Impera- 
 tive, where, that which is enjoined, is treated as something- already 
 in progress ; as, b it trrttft Dot, thou steppest forward, i. e. step 
 (ticou) forward. This is regarded as the strongest form of command 
 
 § 143. Rule. 
 
 The Subjunctive mood is used when that which is expressed by 
 the verb, is conceived to be uncertain, though possible ; as, 
 3d) tyabe gefyort, bap er bte getiutnfdite ©telle evfjalten l)abe, I have 
 
 heard, that he has obtained the desired situation. 
 3d) roihifd)e, bap er gliicflid) toetbe, I wish that he may become happy 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The Subjunctive, from its very nature, stands chiefly in de 
 pendent clauses ; and, in these appears, under various circumstances. 
 Thus, it is employed: 
 
 (2) When the design of the speaker is merely to repeat or quote 
 a statement, without vouching for its accuracy ; as, er fagt, ber 53anm 
 fclftfie, he says, that the tree blossoms; er melbete mtr, bap er ftd) oer* 
 fjeivatfjet ijabe, he told me, that he had been married. When, on the 
 contrary, the design of the speaker is to set forth the thing repeated 
 or quoted, as something real and undoubted, the Indicative must be 
 used ; as, er toili e$ ntdjt gtanben, bap feht S3ruber geftorben tft, he will 
 not believe, that his brother is dead. 
 
 (3) In like manner, the Subjunctive is used in subordinate clauses, 
 after such verbs as 1) often, to hope ; furd)ten, to fear ; roiinfdien, to 
 wish; lootteit, to desire; Bitten, to ask; ra%n, to advise; tocrbteteu, 
 to forbid ; crmafynen, to exhort ; since the event, in such cases, may 
 be supposed to be always more or less uncertain ; as, er fiird)tet, bap 
 er (Strafe erfyatte, he is afraid, that he may be punished. 
 
 (4) So, also, the Subjunctive is employed in clauses which indi- 
 cate an end, object, wish or result ; and which are introduced by bap, 
 auf bap, bamit, or by a relative ; as, fprid) taut, bamit er ticl) oerftetje, 
 Bpeak loud, that he may understand you ; er fndit Slrbeit, tt>eid)e Unn 
 Q3rob gebe, he seeks work, which may give him bread. 
 
 (5) In cases such as those explained in the observations above, 
 the student must note, that that tense of the Subjunctive is employed, 
 which corresponds with the one used by the subject of the depen* 
 <lent clause, at the time when he said or did that which is affirmed o« 
 
430 8TNTAX OF THE VERB. § 144. 
 
 Idm : as, er fagfe, cr fyabe biegmat feine 3eit, he said, that he had (li 
 terally has) no time at present; cr fyatte mir gefagr, bajj er eg getfyan 
 fjabe, he had told me, that he had done it. 
 
 (6) The Subjunctive appears, also, in asking- indiiect questior? ; 
 as, id) fragte ifyn, ob cr mir bag ©clb gebcn foune, I asked him, whether 
 he could give me the money. When the question is made directly^ 
 of course the Indicative is used. 
 
 (7) The Subjunctive is sometimes employed as a sort of softened 
 Imperative, to express a wish or permission ; as, gebe eg bcr £tmmel, 
 may heaven grant it! biefcv ffiaum trage nie nrieber ftntdbt, let this (or 
 may this) tree never again bear fruit ! er tljue toag er ttutf, let him do 
 what he will ! 
 
 § 144. Rule. 
 
 The Conditional mood is used, where a condition is supposed. 
 which may or may not be conceived to be possible ; as, 
 
 SBdve id) retcb, fo ttutrbe idh tljm fcine 93ttte utdit abgefditagen l)aben, 
 were I rich, I would not have refused his request. 
 
 SBenn cr nodi lebte, fo ttuirbe er 50 2>ai)ve alt fein, if he yet lived, he 
 would be fifty years old. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) Besides the two tenses ranged in the paradigms (See p. 328 
 and following) under the head of the Conditional, it must be observ- 
 ed that the Imperfect and the Pluperfect of the Subjunctive are 
 equally often employed in expressing conditional propositions. In 
 point of time, indeed, there is no difference between the Imperfect 
 of the Subjunctive and the fiVt Conditional, and between the Plu- 
 perfect of the Subjunctive and the second Conditional. Ordinarily, 
 where both forms are employed in the same sentence, the Subjunc- 
 tive will be found in the clause expressing the condition, while the 
 form peculiar to the Conditional appears in the other ; as, id) hntrbe 
 eg tfynn, toenn eg mogltd) todre, I would do it, if it were possible ; toenn 
 er ()ter ware, toiirbe er bi<i) befucbt fyaben, if he were here, he would 
 have visited you. 
 
 ^2) When the condition is assumed and treated as a fa /, it is 
 expressed, not by the Conditional, but by the Indicative ; as, biji bit 
 retcb, fo gicb niet, art thou (i. e. if thou art) rich, then give much. 
 
 (3) Sometimes the a erb expressing the condition is merely un- 
 derstood ; as, id) Ij&tte bte @ad)e anberg gemacbt, I should have done 
 it otherwise (if it had been committed to me) ; in feiner ftaae £atte irf> 
 
USE OF THE CONDITIONAL AND IMPERATIVE. § 1 15. 4S] 
 
 li ni&t getljan, (if I had been) in Ms situation, I would not have 
 do no it. 
 
 (4) Sometimes, in the way of exclamation, the condition is ex- 
 pressed, while that which depends upon it is omitted : in which case 
 the whole expression being of the nature of a wish or petition, is 
 often introduced (in translation) by " O, " " I wish that, " and the 
 like : as, (jdtte Id) bod) biefeit SKatrn me gefef;en ! as, O, that I had never 
 seen this man ! literally, had I never seen this man (how happy 1 
 should be) ! toaxt er becti am fieben ! O, that he were yet alive ! 
 
 (5) The Conditional is frequently employed in questions designed 
 to elicit a negative answer ; as, todre eg bemt Voal)x ? could it be true 1 
 (it could not be true ;) bu ttdrejl fo falfd) gewefen ? would you have 
 been so faithless ? (you would not.) 
 
 (6) Not unfrequently the Conditional of the auxiliaries mogen, 
 butfen, fctten, fonnen and meften, is employed to render an expres- 
 sion less positive, or to give it an air of diffidence ; as, id) tooftte, <8ie 
 bcgletteten mid), I could wish (instead of, I wish) you would accom- 
 pany me ; id) medite fdurer $u iibevreben fern, I should be hard to be 
 persuaded, or, it would be difficult to persuade me ; burfte id) Sie urn 
 bag SKcflct bitten ? might I (be permitted to) ask you for the knife 1 
 
 § 145. Rule. 
 
 The Imperative mood is used in expressing a command, entreaty 
 or exhortation ; as, 
 
 SurdUe ©ctt unb efyve ben Jtonig, fear God and honor the king. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The Imperative is sometimes employed to indicate a condi- 
 tion, on which something is declared to depend ; as, fei ftolj unb ba 
 toirji toenig SldUung ftnben, be haughty (i.e. if you be haughty) and 
 you will find little regard. 
 
 (2) In order to make a request in a manner modest and polite, 
 instead of the Imperative, the Subjunctive of mogen and ivclten is 
 often employed ; as, bit tooHeft fetner nie aergeffen, pray, never forget 
 him ; mogen ©ie meiner gebenfen, may you remember, or -emember 
 me, I pray. To express a decided command, however, the Indicative 
 is frequently used. See § 142. 2. 
 
 (3) Sometimes, by a peculiar ellipsis, the past Participle is em- 
 ployed in place of the Imperative; as, utr nidit lang gefvagt ! do not 
 ask long ! where the full phrase would be, eg tcerbe nur utcbt lang go* 
 fragt, let it not long be asked ! 9tn bie Sltfcett gpgangen let ihem go 
 to their wo rs ! 
 
432 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. $ 146. 
 
 § 146. Rule. 
 
 The Infinitive mood either with or without the particle ju (to) 
 preceding, is used to represent the being, action or passion, in a 
 manner unlimited: as, 
 
 ©tcvbcn ijt DliditS, hod) teben imb ntdit fefyen, bag ift ein Ungtutf, 
 to die is nothing, yet to live and not to see, that is a misfor- 
 tune indeed. 
 3>t SGBunfd) getobt ju tt>erben, the wish to be praised. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) The Infinitive without $u, (to) appears, 
 
 a. When, as a verbal substantive (§ 146. 3.), it is made either 
 the subject or the object of a verb: as, ©eben ift feliger aU -Sftefymen, 
 to give is more blessed than to receive ; bag nemtt er arbeiten, that 
 he calls working. 
 
 b. When it stands alone, as in a dictionary : as, loben, to praise ■ 
 lieben, to love. 
 
 c. After the verbs 
 
 tyetpen, to bid: as, id) fyiefi itnt gel; en, I bade him go. 
 fyelfen, to help: as, er t;ttft mtr fditeiben, he helps me to wrile. 
 letnen, * to teach : as, er lefyrt bag Sl'mb lefen, he teaches the child tt 
 
 read. 
 levneit, * to learn : as, ruir letnen tanjen, we learn to dance. 
 fp;en, to hear: as, id) fytive fie ftngcn, I hear them sing. 
 fe f ;?n, to see: as, idi fe£;e ifjrt fommert, I see him come. 
 fiUjicn, to feel : as, id) fiiijte ben 5pu(5 frbtagen, I feel his pulse beat. 
 ftnbeit, to find: as, id) fanb bag 23udi auf bent £tfdbe liegen, I found 
 
 the book lying on the table. 
 
 a. After the auxiliaries of mood, mogen, fonnen, laffen, biirfen, folfen, 
 xcciiin and miiffen, and after toerben, when employed as an auxiliary 
 in forming the future tense. 
 
 e. After the verbs following, in certain phrases, 
 bleiben, to remain : as, er Mcibt ftt^en, he continues sitting, 
 
 fafjven, to so in a carriage : as, id) fafjve fyajieren, I ride out for an 
 
 airing. 
 
 * Sebrett and lemon form exceptions to the observation in the text : admit- 
 ting, as they do sometimes, the particle git between them and an Infinitive 
 succeeding The student will note, also, that the Infinitive after all these verbs. 
 is, in English, often best rendered by a participle : as, er finite fetn Q5lnr gat)icn, 
 ne felt his blood boiling- 
 
<jefjen, 
 
 to g\> or walk: 
 
 fabin, 
 
 to have: 
 
 egen, 
 
 to lay : 
 
 mad)eu, 
 
 * to make : 
 
 neuuen, 
 
 to name : 
 
 retten, 
 
 to ride: 
 
 ifcun, * 
 
 to do: 
 
 (2) 
 
 The Infinitive vx 
 
 USE OF THE INFINITIVE. § 146. 433 
 
 as, er getjt fcettcht, he goes begging, 
 as, er Jjcit gut rebcn, he has easy talking, 
 i. e. it is easy for him to talk. 
 as, id) lege mid) fd)!afen, I lay myself down 
 
 to sleep. 
 as, er machfe mid) ladjen, he made me 
 
 laugh. 
 £><*§ ttenne id) fpictcit, that I call playing. 
 as, id) reite fpajieveu, I ride out for exer- 
 cise, 
 as, er tljut ni&)t$ at$ fdjelten, he does 
 nothing but scold. 
 \u is employed : 
 
 a. After nouns and adjectives, which, in English, are followed either 
 by the preposition to with the Infinitive or by of with a participle : 
 as, id) wax frcf> ifyn ju fetjen, I was glad to see him ; @te fya&en fiujt ju 
 fyicten, you have a desire to play; id) fcurmiibeeg ju ijoreit, I am tired 
 of hearing it : 
 
 b. After verbs, to express the end or object of their action : as, 
 id) femme mit %i)nm $u fpredbert, I come to (i. e. in order to) speak 
 with you: in which case also, the particle um often comes before 
 git, to render the expression more forcible : as, liefcet bie Sugeub, um 
 glucflidi ju feilt, love virtue, in order (um) to be happy. 
 
 c. After the verbs following and others of like import: 
 Qlufcutgen, to begin. Sogern, to delay. 
 Stuf()6reu, to cease. ©etvofmeu, to accustom. 
 S3efefj(eit, to command. ©ieueu, to serve. 
 23itteu, to beg. <£>tntetd)en, to suffice. 
 Gttrarteu, to expect. SBarnen, to warn. 
 <§ofen, to hope. SBetgeru, to refuse. 
 §urd)ten, to fear. (Srfeuuen, f to acknowledge. 
 JDrefjeu, to threaten. 93efenueu, f to confess, 
 ©id) freueu, to rejoice. <2dieiiten, to appear. 
 
 ©id) fdhdmen, to be ashamed. SBitufdieu, to wish. 
 
 <&i§ tubmen, to boast. SSerlangen, to desire. 
 
 * -ZCTJacfcen however, cannot, as in English, be used to signify to make or 
 cnuse by force : thus, to translate the English phrase, make him go out, the 
 Germans say, lati (not madje) iftu hinau£a,ebeit The Infinitive without $U 
 comes after tfjan, only when iticbtS alS precedes, in the example above. 
 
 t (Srfeiuien and befennen are construed mainly with the preterite of the In- 
 finitive: as, er. evfeimt, fid? fldvvt ju tjabttt, he acknowledges that he has been 
 in error. 
 
 19 
 
434 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. § 147. 
 
 93cteuen, to regret. S'rlauben, to permit 
 
 $Pflkgen, to be wont. ©eftatten, to allow. 
 
 gortfaJjren, to proceed. 93erbienen, to deserve. 
 
 Untcvlajfcn, to neglect. SBBagen, to venture. 
 
 $abcn, to have. SHMffen, to know, 
 
 (gem, to be. Jftufcen, to be of use. 
 
 «£>elfen, to help. Sfcontmen, to avail. 
 femciben, to avoid. 
 
 d. After the prepositions oljne (without) and jratt or anflatl [«* 
 a'«zc? of): as, clme ein SBort ju fagen, without saying a word; anflatl 
 jit fdbreibcn, instead of writing. 
 
 (3) The Infinitive in German, as intimated before, often performs 
 the office of a verbal Substantive. It is then commonly preceded by 
 the neuter of the article, and has all the various cases: as. ba3 fcfigen 
 fdhabet bem Sugnet ant meijten, lying injures the liar most; id) bin be$ 
 ®cl)en3 nri'ibe, lam weary of walking; jumOleifen bift bu nid)tgefd)itft. 
 you are not fit for journeying. 
 
 (4) The Infinitive active, in German, after certain verbs, as, fein, 
 laffcn, ocvbietcn, befctjlen, &c. is not nnfrequently employed passively: 
 thus, laj? it)u rufen, which (literally) means, let him call, may, also, 
 signify, let him be called ; csj ift feme 3ctt ju jjerlteren, there is no time 
 to lose, or to be lost. 
 
 (5) The Germans often employ the Indicative or Subjunctive, 
 preceded by bajii, where, in English, the Infinitive, preceded by to, is 
 used : as, icb toeifi, ba$ cr ber, -JJlami ift, I know him to be (literally, ] 
 know that he is) the man. 
 
 (6) The Infinitive, in English, preceded by the words hoio, where, 
 what, when, and the like, after such verbs as, tell, know, say and teach^ 
 cannot be rendered literally into German: the Germans, in such 
 cases, always using the Indicative or Subjunctive of such verbs as 
 (often, miiffen, lo.nnen : as, id) toeijji, line id) eg tlum mup, I know how 
 to do it, or (literally) I know how I must do it ; tefyreu <§?ie mid), ttaa 
 id) fagen foil, teach me what to say. For the use of the Infinitive of 
 uiogen, ivollcu, follcn, &c., in place of the past Participle See § 74. S. 
 
 § 147. THE PARTICIPLES. 
 
 (1) The Participles, in German, are varied by cases : following 
 the same rules of inflection as the adjectives. Having the nature of 
 adjectives, the Present in a few, and the Preterite in many instances, 
 readily admit, the degrees of comparison. 
 
 (2) The use of the Participle, as such, however, in German, is 
 
t'SB OF THE PARTICIPLES. § 148. 435 
 
 far more restricted than in English. For, in English, it is commonly 
 used to form a distinct clause of a sentence ; and is thus made to 
 indicate the lime, cause or means cf effecting that which is expressed 
 in the main clause : thus, we say : Walking (that is, by or when 
 walking) uprightly, we walk surely. This mode of expression can 
 rarely, if ever, be adopted in German ; into which language, if we 
 desire to translate the above sentence, we must say : toenit ttur aup 
 richtuj toanbeln, fo toanbeln lint ftcfyer, that is, when we walk uprightly, 
 r we walk surely. 
 
 (3) So, too, we say in English : Having given him the money, he 
 went away ; but, since there is nothing in German to correspond to 
 this English compound Participle, it would be a gross error to at 
 tempt to render the sentence literally. Resort must be had, as in the 
 other case, to a different structure : thus, cite er il)m bag @efb gegeben 
 Ijatte, ging er lueg, that is, after or when he had given him the money, 
 he went away. In this way must all similar cases be managed : we 
 must employ a verb in each clause and connect the two together by 
 means of suitable conjunctions; such as, toeit, fornix, ate, ba and 
 inbeni. 
 
 § 148. Rule. 
 
 The Present Participle, like an attributive adjective, agrees with 
 its noun in gender, number and case ; and may, also, govern the 
 same case as the verb whence it is derived : as, 
 
 2)et ladjenbe ftriifylmg, the smiling spring. 
 
 ,J?iU)Ienbe3 ©ctvanfe, cooling drink. 
 
 5)ie atteg bctebenbe Sonne, the all animating sun, i. e. the sun tha* 
 animates all. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) This Participle is seldom, if ever, otherwise employed with a 
 noun than in an attributive sense. Its predicative use is found al 
 most altogether in those words, that have so far lost character a 
 Participles, as to be commonly recognized only as adjectives : as, 
 
 9leijenb, charming. SritcEenb, oppressive. 
 
 itrdnfenb, mortifying. ^liepenb, flowing. 
 
 ©iitnefymenb, captivating. £inrcijjenb, overpowering. 
 
 ©rmgeitb, pressing. 
 
 •Such a combination, therefore, as, I am reading, we are walking 
 and the like, which is so common in English, is wholly inadmissible 
 in German ; save in the instance of those Participles that have lost, 
 
436 SYNTAX OF TIIE P IRTIOlPLES. § 149. 
 
 as just s.iid, their true participial character : as, bie %lctt) tjl brtngenb, 
 the necessity is pressing. 
 
 (2) The Present Participle, in connection with the article, ia 
 often used substantively : the noun being understood ; as, bcr £e* 
 fenbe, the reader, (literally) the (one) reading ; bk (Sterbenbe, the 
 dying (female). 
 
 (3) This Participle, however, cannot in German, as in English, 
 be, by means of an article, turned into an abstract verbal noun. But 
 in order properly to render such phrases as, the reading, the writing, 
 into German, we must use the present of the Infinitive : thus, ba& 
 £efen, bci3 <Sdn-eiben. 
 
 (4) The Present Participle, as stated in the Rule, may govern 
 the case of its own verb ; but it must be noted that the word so gov- 
 erned, always precedes the Participle : ba& nnS ttcvfelgeube ©efdi itf, the 
 us pursuing fate, i. e. the fate that pursues us. In some instances, 
 the words are actually unitfd, forming compounds: as, etyrliebeitD, 
 honor-loving, that is, ambitious ; gefefcgcbenb, law-giving, &c. 
 
 (5) The Present Participle is sometimes used with the power of 
 an A iverb ; that is, to express some circumstance of manner or con- 
 dition : thus, tceineub fprcid) er ju mtr, weeping (i. e. weepingly) he 
 spoke to me ; er fe|te fid) fd)toeigenb nieber, keeping silent (i. e. si. 
 lentlij) he sat down. 
 
 § 149. Rule. 
 
 The Preterite Participle is not only used in the formation of the 
 compound tenses, but may, also, be construed with nouns, after the 
 manner of Adjectives : as, 
 
 3d) Ijcibe fyeute bag S5ud) gelefen, I have read the book to-day. 
 
 din geliebteg St'inb, a beloved child. 
 
 35er 2Jlann tji getefytt, the man is learned. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) This Participle, in its character as an Adjective, is far mora 
 frequently employed in German than in English. Indeed, many Pre. 
 terites in German, having lost all character as Participles, are now 
 used exclusiv ily as Adjectives. 
 
 (2) The Preterite, like the Present Participle, is sometimes used 
 in an adverbial manner: thus, bag 33ud) ift uertcren gegangen, the 
 be ok is lost (literally, gone lost). 
 
 (3) This is especially the case with certain Participles employed 
 with the verb femmen; as, er fommt gefatjren, he comes driven, i. e. 
 driving in a carriage ■ er femmt geritten, he comes ridden, i. e. riding 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. §150. §151. 43"? 
 
 on horseback ; ct fommt geflogcn, he comes flying ; er fommi gelaufeit, 
 he comes running, &c. 
 
 (4) Kindred to this, is its use, when connected with a verb, to 
 express the condition or state of the subject : as, jej3t fterb' id) be* 
 rulugt, now I die content ; in feine £ugenb gefyitUt, trctjt er brv 23ers 
 leumbuitg, wrapped in his virtue, he defies calumny. 
 
 (5) The Preterite Participle usually in connection with the accu- 
 sative, is in some phrases employed absolutely : as, Me Slugen gee 
 Jpinunel gcvi&tet, his eyes being directed towards heaven ; ben ©ettrinn 
 abgercdwet, the profit being deducted ; Mefeu Sail auSgenemmen, this 
 case being excepted. 
 
 (6) This Participle is sometimes elliptically used for the Impera- 
 tive. (See § 145. 3.) 
 
 § 150. Rule. 
 
 The Future Participle is used, when the subject is to be repre- 
 sented as a thing that must or ought to take place : as, 
 (Sine ju lobenbe Xtyat, a deed to be (i. e. that ought to be) praised. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) What is called the Future Participle in German, is produced 
 by placing ju before the present participle as above. It can be 
 formed from transitive verbs only, and is always to be taken in a 
 passive sense. It is chiefly to be found in the case of compound 
 verbs: thus, I;ed)$uer/venber <£>err, the-highly-to be-honored i. e. the 
 honorable, Sir. 
 
 § 151. THE ADVERBS. 
 Rule. 
 
 Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives and other adverbs : as, 
 
 (§x fdirettt felten, he writes seldom. 
 
 Qx I;at ben ©egenftcntb ttorirefflid) bef)anbett, he has treated the sub. 
 
 ject admirably. 
 £>iefc$ Q3udi ijl fefyr gut, this book is very good. 
 dx arbeitet nid)t gem, he works unwillingly. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 Almost all adjectives in the absolute form are, in German, em- 
 ployed as Adverbs. See § 102. 3. For remarks on the position of 
 Adverbs in sentences, see the section on the arrangement of words 
 § 158. 
 
438 RYNTA2 OF THE PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. § 152. 
 
 § 152. THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 The Prepositions cmflatt, crufett;ctt&, bieffcitS, &c. (See the List 
 § 109.) are construed with the genitive. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) When the same Preposition governs several nouns in the 
 same construction, it is put before the first only ; as, id) bin veu meu 
 iter <£>eimatf), ineincm 33atevlanbe unb mrfnen ftveunben getvenut, from 
 my home, my country and my friends, am I separated. 
 
 (2) For the right use and position of some of the Prepositions, 
 much attention is required. See the Observations on those con- 
 strued with the genitive : § 110. 
 
 § 153. Rule. 
 
 The Prepositions au$, cntper, bet, &c. (See List § 111.) are con- 
 strued with the dative. (See Obs. § 112.) 
 
 § 154. Rule. 
 
 lTie Prepositions burd), fur, gegen, &c. (See List § 113.) are con- 
 strued with the accusative. (See Obs. § 114.) 
 
 § 155. Rule. 
 
 The Prepositions cm, cmf, 1) inter, &c. (See last § 115.) govern 
 the aative or accusative : the accusative, when motion or tendency 
 towaras is signified, but in the other situations the dative. (See 
 Ots. § 116.) 
 
 § 156. THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 Rule. 
 
 Conjunctions connect words and sentences in construction, and 
 show their mutual relation and dependence ; as, 
 Seljcmn unb SBilijelm get;en jur <Sd)ule, John and William are going 
 
 to school. 
 Sd) fal) eg ; bafycr toeijj id) eg, I saw it ; therefore I know it. 
 (Sr ijl alter aU id), he is older than I. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) Under the general name of Conjunctions in this Rule, must 
 be included all words performing the office of Conjunctions, whether 
 
USE OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. § 156. 439 
 
 properly such or not. Of these connective words three classes aie 
 to be distinguished : 1. those that do not affect the order of the 
 words of a sentence in which they occur (§ 160. 8.) ; 2. those that 
 Always remove the copula to the end of the sentence (§ 160. 7.) ; 
 3. and finally, those that do or do not remove the copula to the end 
 according as they stand before or after the subject (§ 160. 8.). 
 
 (2) The true force and use of the Conjunctions is best learned 
 from examples ; of which see a large collection in Lesson 69. We 
 subjoin, however, a few remarks in explanation of the following : 
 
 a. 5(6cr, atfein, fonbern. 9lber is less adversative than either of 
 the others. It is often merely continuative. Sltteut always intro- 
 duces what is contrary to what might be inferred from what pre- 
 cedes: as, er ift fe(;r fletpig, cittern cr lernt fefjr toenig, he is very in- 
 dustrious, but he learns very little, (gonbern serves to introduce 
 what is contradictory. It is used only when a negative precedes ; 
 nidit ebct, fonbern fteittmfittyfg, not noble, but pusillanimous; eg iji 
 toebet fdnuavj, nod) Brautt, fonbern griht, it is neither black nor brown, 
 but green. 
 
 b. 5)ajj, also cutf bap, introduces a clause expressing the end, ob- 
 ject or result.: as, idi toeip, bap er fcmtnt, I know that he is coming. 
 This form of expression is more common in German than in English. 
 When bap is left out, the copula comes immediately after the sub- 
 ject. See Note, page 445. 
 
 c. S)od) introduces something unexpected or not properly proceed- 
 ing from the antecedent: as, er iji fet>r reid), nnb I;at bod) weriffl geavbettet 
 he is very rich, yet has he worked little. It is sometimes elliptically 
 employed to indicate certainty, entreaty and the like: as, fagen ©ie 
 mir bed), tell me, pray. 
 
 d. 3e, like the definite article in English, is put before compara- 
 tives to denote proportion. It, then, has befto for its correlative: thus, 
 Je fWpiger cr ift, befto gelefyrter toitb er, the more diligent he is, the more 
 learned he becomes. 2)efto sometimes comes before je : as, un 
 Stva\t\vni ift befto fdioner, je ttottfommener eg ift, a work of art is the 
 more beautiful, the more perfect it is. Sometimes je is employed 
 Lefore both comparatives: thus, je mefyr, je beffer, the more, the better. 
 Sometimes befto stands before a comparative without je answering 
 to U : as, id) er\Mvtete nidit meincn $reunb ju futben, befto gtoper aber 
 Irirrrmeine §veub?, als id) i(jn fat), I did not expect to find my friend, 
 but the greater was my joy, when I saw him. 
 
 * Dbgletd), cbfdien, cfcrocl;!, indicate concession. The parts are 
 »f ven separated, especially by monosyllables : such as, id) bu, er, eS, 
 
440 SYNTAX OF TIIC INTERJECTIONS. § 157. 
 
 ttiv, \t)X, fte. Often two or three such little words come between : as, 
 cb er gleicrt ait ift, jc, although he is old, &c. ; ob id) mid) ^leid) freue, it., 
 although I rejoice, &c. 
 
 / (go, after such conjunctions : as, roetl, aU, ba, ttenn, nadibem, ofo 
 gteidi, obfdyon, obroot)l, fteringletd) and roiewol)t, introduces the subse- 
 quent clause. This is chiefly the case, when the antecedent clause 
 is long, or consists of several members : Ex. SGBeil bid) ©ott bie$ 2Ule3 
 getoafyr. tuerben lief, fo ift -iftiemanb (o toeif* als bu, since God hath given 
 thee to know all this, so (therefore) is no one so wise as thou. <5o 
 commonly, however, denotes comparison : as, ber .ftnabe ift fo gut, 
 aU ba3 Stabdien, the boy is so (as) good as the girl. So in the phra- 
 ses, feroo()I aU audb, or fewest ate, so (as) well as : fobaib aU, so (as) 
 soon as, &c. With aud) (fo — aud)) following, it signifies however ; 
 as, fo grof bie ©ditecfeu beg jtriegeg aucb, jc, however great the ter- 
 rors of war, &c. ; fo re id) er and) ift, jc, however rich he is, <fec. 
 
 «• The following are the more common correlatives : "as, 
 
 Grnnveber, 
 
 either, 
 
 ober, 
 
 or. 
 
 SBebcr, 
 
 neither, 
 
 nod), 
 
 nor. 
 
 SBeun, 
 
 if, 
 
 fa 
 
 so, or then 
 
 2>a, 
 
 when, 
 
 fa 
 
 then. 
 
 3e, 
 
 the, 
 
 \*f 
 
 the. 
 
 3e, 
 
 the, 
 
 befto, 
 
 the. 
 
 (gobatb, 
 
 as soon. 
 
 ati, 
 
 as. 
 
 (Seroeljl, 
 
 as well, 
 
 aU, 
 
 as. 
 
 2Bie, 
 
 as, 
 
 fa 
 
 so. 
 
 ©0, 
 
 so, 
 
 fa 
 
 so. 
 
 9K<f)t, 
 
 not, 
 
 fonbern, 
 
 but 
 
 mi&it attem, 
 
 not only, 
 
 fonbern, 
 
 but. 
 
 9iid)t nur, 
 
 not only, 
 
 fonbern aud), 
 
 but also. 
 
 § 157. THE INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 Interjections have no dependent construction. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 (1) Interjections stand generally before the nominative or the 
 vocative ; as, £) ! tfjeuerfter SSater ! But sometimes the genitive, 
 and sometimes the dative, is preceded by an Interjection : as, £), bet 
 ftmtbe ! the joy ! 2Bef) mir ! Woe to me ! 
 
COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158. 441 
 
 § 153. COLLOCATION OF WORDS. 
 
 (1) In the arrangement of words in sentences, the German differs 
 widely from the English. Many differences of collocation, accord- 
 ingly, have already been noted and explained in various other parts 
 of this work. But, as every word and member of a sentence in Ger- 
 man, takes its position according to a definite law of arrangement, 
 and cannot, without great offense against euphony, be thrown out of 
 its proper place, we subjoin here some general instructions on this 
 topic. 
 
 (2) The essential parts of every sentence, as already remarked 
 (§ 119.), are the Subject and the Predicate. That which is used 
 (properly some part of the verb of existence, f e in) to couple the 
 subject and the predicate, is called the Copula. Now, arranging 
 these three parts in their natural order, the subject will come first, 
 the copula next, the predicate last : thus, 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 fcf)on. 
 
 beautiful. 
 
 jiarJ. 
 
 strong. 
 
 (3) When, as in the case of simple tenses, the copula and the 
 predicate are both contained in a single word, that word holds the 
 place of the copula ; while the place of the predicate either remains 
 vacant, or is occupied by the object of the verb. Examples : 
 
 Subject. 
 £>te 23(ume 
 The flower 
 
 Copula. 
 
 if* 
 is 
 
 <$a$ $ferb 
 The horse 
 
 was 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Copula. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 2)te ©fame 
 
 mi)t 
 
 — 
 
 The flower 
 
 blooms. 
 
 — 
 
 mix 
 
 lefen 
 
 bcuJ 23ud). 
 
 We 
 
 read 
 
 the book. 
 
 3Me ©clbaten 
 
 fed) ten. 
 
 — 
 
 The soldiers 
 
 fight. 
 
 — 
 
 3d) 
 
 W 
 
 biefen 3ftamt. 
 
 I 
 
 see 
 
 this man. 
 
 (4) In the case of compound tenses, however, the auxiliary takes 
 the place of the copula ; which place is also held by the auxiliaries 
 of mood (§ 74.) : the place of the predicate being occupied by the in- 
 finitive or participle. If the verb be a compound separable (§ 90), 
 the particle stands in the place of the predicate, wliile the radica 1 
 forms the copula. Examples : 
 19* 
 
442 
 
 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158. 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Copula. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 3d) 
 
 I;abe 
 
 getefen. 
 
 I 
 
 have 
 
 read. 
 
 2Bir 
 
 ftnb 
 
 getoefen. 
 
 We 
 
 have 
 
 been. 
 
 ©r 
 
 fann 
 
 fd)reibcr„ 
 
 He 
 
 can 
 
 write. 
 
 <£te 
 
 toutben 
 
 gefef;eiu 
 
 They 
 
 were 
 
 seen. 
 
 (Bx 
 
 Qtl)t 
 
 aug. 
 
 He 
 
 goes 
 
 out. 
 
 (5) ^Tien any of tl ose verbs which assume the place of the co» 
 pula, are emplc yed in the compound form, the Participle or Infini- 
 tive belonging to them stands after the proper predicate. Examples* 
 
 Subject. 
 
 Copula. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 (Bx 
 
 if 
 
 t()6rtd)t getoefen. 
 
 He 
 
 has 
 
 foolish been. 
 
 dx 
 
 to lib 
 
 gelefen fyaben. 
 
 He 
 
 will 
 
 read have. 
 
 €te 
 
 t)ixikn 
 
 fditeiben fatten. 
 
 <£te 
 
 ftnb 
 
 gefyih't toorben. 
 
 <$x 
 
 toirb 
 
 gefefyen to orb en feiu. 
 
 (§x 
 
 ifi 
 
 ciuSgegangen. 
 
 (6) The object of a sentence comes between the copula and the 
 Predicate ; and, if there be two objects, that of the person precedes 
 that of the thing. Examples : 
 
 Subject. Copula. 
 
 1st Object. 2d 
 
 Object. 
 
 Predicate. 
 
 <$r 
 
 Ijcit 
 
 etnen 23ricf — 
 
 
 gefd)rieben. 
 
 (Sr 
 
 fcfyret&t 
 
 metnen 33rief — 
 
 
 a*. 
 
 (St 
 
 tft 
 
 feinem $reunbe — 
 
 
 getoogen. 
 
 •Ste 
 
 ftnb 
 
 ernes 93erbred)en3 — 
 
 
 feefdntlbigt tocrben. 
 
 3d) 
 
 fyabe 
 
 bem ,f nctben ein 
 
 33ud) 
 
 gegeben. 
 
 (Sx 
 
 i)*t 
 
 ben @ofnt enter €mnbe 
 
 befdmlbigt. 
 
 3d) 
 
 fycibe 
 
 metnen §rennb — 
 
 
 urn Sftatf) * gefragt. 
 
 * Itm 9?atb with fraa,en fonns a phrase, (nm dlcitl) nac\cn, to ask for advice, 
 wliich belongs to a class of phrases in German, in which a noun or adjective 
 is made to play the same part in respect to a verb, that is sustained by a se- 
 parable paiticle. This will account for the position of nm Matt) in the sen- 
 tence : it being treated just like a separable prefix. Other phrases belonging 
 to Uu£ class are : 
 
COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 158. 443 
 
 (7) Should both objects, however, be persons, the accusative 
 conies first: except the oblique cases of the personal pronouns (id), 
 tu, er, fie, c$, lvtv, tfjr, fie), which always take the precedence. 
 Examples : 
 
 Subj. Copula. 1st Object. 2d Object. Predicate. 
 
 3d) I;abe bcineu <Scf)n meiuem greunbe empfoftfen. 
 
 3d) l)abe bit* mehten @ofnt enipfof;(ciu 
 
 (£r totrb i(;m feiue £rd)ter ge&en. 
 
 (8) When two personal pronouns form the objects of a sentence, 
 the accusative comes before the dative and the genitive. Examples * 
 
 Subj. Copula. 1st Object. 2d Object. Predicate. 
 
 <&k fyaben e3 mir gegeben. 
 
 SBir ncljmcn unS fctner an. 
 
 dr I;at ftd) mir empfefytcn. 
 
 (9) Adverbs of degree and manner, or nouns governed by pre- 
 positions and serving in the place of adverbs, when they refer ex- 
 clusively to the verb, stand immediately after the object. Examples 
 
 Subj. Copula. Object. Adverb. Predicate. 
 
 (Bx befjaubctt feineu ©egenfianb fcottrefflid). — 
 
 (St l;at feincn ©egenjianb Bortrefffid) fceljanbeft. 
 
 Qt I;at bag (Mb mil greubeit auSgegefceu. 
 
 (10) Adverbs of time, and phrases used instead of adverbs of 
 time, commonly come before the object and before adverbs of place. 
 Examples : 
 
 Subj. Copula. Adverb. Object. Predicate. 
 
 3d) Ijci&e geflevn einen ffirief gefdmeben. 
 
 @r tfl t>or brei £agen in Sonbon — angefemmen. 
 
 (11) Adverbs of place, and nouns with prepositions, used as 
 isuch, generally come immediately before the predicate. Examples: 
 
 Subj. Copula. Object. Adverb. Predicate. 
 
 3d) $abe cinen SBttef au$ SBnlin ertyatten. 
 
 3d) toerbe mctnen Selju nad) S|$art$ fd)icfcn. 
 
 Bfilfe Ieiften, to render aid. VLnti ?ebett brtn«en f to deprive of life. 
 
 Bu ^ftlfe Eoinmeu, to come to the aid. £fofc bieteit, to bid defiance. 
 
 Ra iDlittag cffeit, to dine. B" S:t)etl werbeu, to fall to one's part 
 
 goifte tragm, to take care. SRatb (\tbtn, to give advice. 
 
 3n ©runb'e fleben, to perish. ©*&6f aebert, to grant a hearing. 
 
 %u ©runbe vtrbten to ruin. ©efaljt laufcu, to run a risk. 
 
 3u§ SESevf ff^cu, to execute. * ©till ftebett. to standstill. 
 
 3h Staiibe brtttgrh. to accomplish. S*fi baltea, to hold fast. 
 
 5ld)t Qebnt, to pay attention. 
 
444 COLLOCATION OF WORDS. § 159 t 
 
 (12) Nouns and pronouns with the prepositions appropriate to 
 the verb employed in the sentence, generally come immediately be- 
 fore the predicate. Examples : 
 
 jet) babe menials fiber hm ©egenftanb niit ifjm gefyrcdjen. 
 3d) irevbe menials in niehiem Seben ju il;m getjen. 
 
 When, however, the preposition with its noun is merely used to 
 denote the cause or purpose, &c, of what is expressed by the verb, 
 it stands before the object. Examples : 
 
 SBir rranfen geftern aitS SOlangcl an 53ier SBaffer. 
 3d) fennte tljni v>er Steuben feine Slntttort geben. 
 
 § 159. Inversion. 
 
 (1) In all the cases preceding, the natural order of the leading 
 parts has been preserved ; that is, the subject first, the copula next, 
 and the predicate last. But for the sake of giving special emphasis 
 to particular words, this order is often inverted. Thus, the real, or 
 logical subject is made emphatic by being put after the copula : the 
 pronoun e 3 taking its place as a grammatical subject: as, eg tjebt 
 bie $ret|eit tl)ve $alme auf, liberty uplifts her standard. When, again, 
 either the copula or the predicate is to be rendered emphatic, they 
 exchange places : thus, (predicate emphatic) ftetben mi'iffcn Side, die 
 must all. The chief places in which the copula receives the stress, 
 are, 
 
 a. in direct questions ; as, fdbreibt bev SRann ? 
 
 b. in imperatives; as, r \^,ien <Ste nut iljmj 
 
 c. in the case of mbgeu, vvhen used to express a wish ; as, tttb'ge tt 
 bev £>immel geBen!" 
 
 d. in cases where surprise (generally with bod)) is to be expressed; 
 as, ift bed) bie (Stabt rote gefeljrt ! 
 
 (2) When, on any one of those words which, in the natural or 
 -ler, come between the copula and the predicate, we wish to lay spe 
 i.ial emphasis, it must be put either before the other Avords standing 
 between the copula and the predicate, or else before the subject. In 
 • rus latter case, however, the subject and the copula exchange places: 
 thus, mtr ven (5'blem faun (S'bleeS ftammen ; where the common order 
 would be: (i*bleS fami nur r>en @blem ftammen. These inversions, 
 however, chiefly occur when principal and subordinate sentences are 
 connected by conjunctions. 
 
skitterces : principal and subordinate. § 160. 445 
 
 § 160. Sentences: principal and subordinate. 
 
 (1) A principal sentence is one that expresses by itself an inde- 
 pendent proposition : thus, It was reported; He deserves ; John toils. 
 
 (2) A subordinate sentence is one, that serves as the complement 
 to a principal sentence ; and without which it conveys no complete 
 idea. Thus, in the expressions, It was reported, that the town was 
 taken ; He deserves, that we should defend him ; John toils, although 
 he is rich : the first, in each case, is the principal and the second the 
 subordinate sentence. 
 
 (3) In the natural order, the principal precedes the subordinate 
 sentence. But this order is often reversed; in which case the order 
 of the subject and the copula in the principal sentence, is also re- 
 versed. Tims, in the natural order we say, id) tueip, bap er e$ ntd)t 
 ttum fann, i" know, that he can not do it. Putting the subordinate 
 sentence first, it will stand: bap er e» nid}t t^un fann, toeip id), that he 
 can not do it, know I. 
 
 (4) When, however, the subordinate sentence comes in after the 
 copula (i. e. before a part only) of the principal sentence, the natural 
 order of the latter remains unchanged : as, id) fanb, aU id) in Scnbcn 
 anfam, metnen Sveuiib nidit. 
 
 (5) In subordinate sentences, the common order of the leading 
 parts, differs from that of principal sentences, in making the copula* 
 come last, i. e. in making the copula and the predicate exchange 
 places. Examples : 
 
 Copula. 
 
 Grr, treldiet mir bin S3rief brad)te. 
 
 He, who to me the letter brought. 
 
 2)er, beflen #cr§ rein iji. 
 
 3d) iueip, too id) ifnx gefel)en fyaBe. 
 
 (£r fagt, bap er eg nidit ttjun fann. 
 
 dx ift arm, toeil er fei)r trage iji 
 
 (6) The subordinate sentence is usually connected with the prm 
 cipal one by means of some conjunctive word. The conjunctive 
 word so employed, is either a relative pronoun, a relative adverb, or 
 some conjunction proper, expressing cause, condition, purpose, iimi- 
 tation or the like, See the examples under the preceding paragraph, 
 
 (7) The conjunctions employed in connecting principal with sub 
 ordinate sentences, are, aU, auf bap, beoer, bie, ba, bafern, bamit, bap, -f 
 
 • The copula is sometimes entirely omitted ; as, £vts iMurt), Dad er mir g^bci > t"« b°°k that he (hat 
 
 | ZM6 is sometimes omitted ; in which case the copula stands, not at the end, but just as iff a priacip* 
 ••ntence : thus, tr fagt, tr fount ftfartibcn. 
 
446 J.3I0MATIC PHRASES. 
 
 s tei»eit, tfy, falls inbem, je, je nadjbem, nadjbem, nun, ol>, ofigTcid), oSfdjon, 
 *oir>or)I, feitbcm, ungead)tet, n>dl)rcnb, tocil, ttenn, :}: roenn nid)t, luenn gteid), 
 toenn fd)on, voenn aud), rote, tine and), tinevoofyl, n>o, tvofcrn, oB$tt>ar. These all 
 remove the copula to the end of the sentence. 
 
 (8) The following are the conjunctive adverbs, which are used to 
 connect subordinate sentences with principal ones, after the manner 
 of real conjunctions: aupcrbem, bal)er, bann, alSbann, barum, be^rocgen, 
 bej$an>, bennod), be'ffcmmgead)tet, bepgletdjen, befto, etncrfettS, anberfctts, enb* 
 ltd), ferner, frlgltd), gIetd)ii>or;!, pentad), inbeffen, (mbe£j), nad)r)er, faum, mttrjin, 
 nld)t6beftoti)enigcr, ntd)t allein, ntd)t nur, ntdjt Mcp, nod), nur, foil ft, if)cU3, 
 tngteid)en, in fo fern, in fo roett (fo roctf), jcbodj, itbrigcnS, iibcrbicS, inctmefjr, 
 ti)or)l, jnbent, gti)ar. These all reverse the order of subject and copula, 
 when they stand before the subject ; when, however, they come after 
 the copula, the natural order of the sentence obtains. 
 
 3e met)r man r)ar, befto mefir »erlangt The more one has the more one 
 
 man, desires. 
 
 Sr tft franf, batjer Mcittt er ju #aufe. He is sick, hence he stays at home. 
 
 S f ?ad)I;cr gtng er ttneber rr>cg. Afterward he went away again. 
 
 (9) £ntetn, benn, fonbern, unb and obcr always stand at the head of a 
 sentence without influencing the order of the other words. Stber and 
 ndinltd) may, also, occupy the first place without changing the position 
 of the other words. 
 
 (10) Where a mood-auxiliary, or any such verb as takes the infinitive 
 without ^u, occurs together with an other infinitive, the copula stands 
 before the two infinitives: thus, roenn id) e3 Ijdtte trjun muffen it., not 
 tttim id) trjun muffen Ijdtte. 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 There are in German, as in other languages, numerous idiomatic 
 phrases. Many of these can not be rendered literally into English with- 
 out a great sacrifice both of sense and sound. Still their meaning and 
 application must be familiar to the student. We give below, therefore, 
 a somewhat extended list; adding, to each, either some equivalent 
 phrase in our own language, or, where it will bear it, a regular ti ans- 
 lation. In every case, however, it will be highly advantageous to the 
 student to put the phrase first in a perfectly literal dress, and then 
 deduce from it, if possible, the thought, which it is employed to convey. 
 
 % When wenn is left out the subject and copula stand as in a ques- 
 tion: thus, wenn id) e3 gefdjrteoen fjdrte, :c, or (without roenn) $drte id) e$ 
 gefdjrtefcen, fo rcihbe id) eS 3|nen gefagt tyar-eit. 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 447 
 
 §Td)ten ©te e3 ntdjt |o gertng. 
 
 5Itt ber ©ad)e i|l nid)t3 au3sufc£cn.. 
 
 Stops Ungewiffe. 
 
 Set tlocfftnfterer 9tacf)t. 
 
 S3ci ber S.nte tjl ein 2Tber. 
 
 SDarauf i}T e>3 eocn angclegr. 
 
 £>a3 ©djljf lag vor Slufcr. 
 
 DaS 33ud) loft fuf) lefen. 
 
 £)a3 ldjjt jtcfo feljen. 
 
 2)ai> (}af feme STrt 
 
 <D«$ Krfjt ftel) malt 6Iafen. 
 
 J)a3 Sate id) mtv hub gcba$L 
 ^-SDem tjl md)t ju (jelfen. 
 
 S)cn iTuncrn jteljert. 
 
 ®er 9lame null mtr nidjt fcei fallen. 
 
 SDie £aare ftanben ntir ju Serge. 
 
 2>ie Senjler gefyen in ben ©arten. 
 
 £)ie SBaare ftnbct feincn Slogang. 
 
 2)ie SBaare jtnbet ftarfen ST&fafc. 
 vLgite nttt SBeilc. 
 
 Gin Gr^-Sd)urfe. 
 
 Gin vcrnetymer Sftann. 
 
 Ginem gjferbe bie ©poren geSen. 
 
 Gtnem auf ben 8eiJ& geljen. 
 
 Ginem an bie £anb geljen. 
 
 ©inert IjerauSforbcrn. 
 
 ©inert anfar)ren. 
 
 Ginen anfeinem®eottrt3tage anlunben. 
 
 Gincn auftietjen. 
 
 <Ste ifr unter bie £au'6e gefommen. 
 -~Gr pra^Ii gern, or fdmeibet gem auf. 
 
 Gr ld'§t e3 fid) fefjr angelegen fein. 
 
 Gr fat) mid) parr an. 
 
 Gr fteflt ftd) unroiffenb an. 
 
 Gr r)at ftd) loSgemadjt. 
 
 Gi ^Tt iTocl §ait«. 
 
 Gr mufjie fdjroiiren.' 
 
 Gr roeig roeber au3 nod) ein. 
 - Gr riedjt ben Sraten. 
 
 Gr T)at ftd) ba»on gemadjr. 
 
 Gr (apt viel barauf ge^en. 
 
 Gr tjat ftd) nut feinen (SWauMgern afc* 
 gefnnben. 
 
 I)o not think so light of it. 
 
 ]Vo fault can be found with it. 
 
 Upon an uncertainty. 
 
 At the dead of the night. 
 
 There is a %uff in the matter. 
 
 This was the very aim. 
 
 The vessel rode at anchor. 
 
 The book is readable. 
 
 That looks well; that will do. 
 
 That is unbecoming; unseemly. 
 
 That cannot be done in a trice. 
 
 I thought so soon enough. 
 
 There is no remedy for it. 
 
 To get the worse of it. 
 
 The name does not occur to me. 
 
 My hair stood on end. 
 
 The windows look into the garden. 
 
 There is no demand for the article. 
 
 The article finds a ready market. 
 
 Slow and sure (hasten slowly). 
 
 An arrant knave. 
 
 A man of rank ; a leading man 
 
 To clap spurs to a horse. 
 
 To attack or assault one. 
 
 To go to one's aid. 
 
 To challenge or call out one. 
 
 To address one harshly. 
 
 To make a present to one <tn his 
 
 birth-day. 
 To quiz one. 
 She has got/ married. 
 He is fond of talking big. 
 He makes it his business. 
 He stared me in the face. 
 He affects ignorance. 
 He has got ofT. 
 He is a poor manager. 
 He was put to his oath. 
 He is sadly put to it. 
 He smells the rat. 
 He has run away. 
 He spends a great deal of money. 
 He ha3 come to term with bis 
 
 creditors 
 
448 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 (£r $ctt e3 fo in ber SSCrt. 
 
 ©r tyctt enbtid) feine SBaare en ben 
 
 SWcmn gcBradjt. 
 (Sr madjt eg gar p bunt. 
 <£r get)t nur baranf au3. 
 (£g wtrb nidjt angefjen. 
 (£S fie ^t feljr barnadj au<?. 
 £g gel)t mtr nidjtg al). 
 (Eg gcl)t Bunt ju. 
 (£g ret^t in ben SBeutel. 
 SSIau Iajjt nidjt fdjim auf ®riht. 
 3d) fytlte siet auf meine (Sdjroejler. 
 3d) fann tf)n gut leiben. 
 3d) fann mid) nidjt barauf Bejtnnen. 
 3d) frage nidjtg barnadj. 
 3d) fann ben 9ftann nid)t augflefjen. 
 Set) tljate eg felBer nidjt. 
 3d) VDitt eg mit iijm nid)t fo genaunefjmen. 
 3d) Bin bafjinter gefommen. 
 3d) laffe eg gel)en roie eg ttttt. 
 SBagi Ijat er »or ? 
 3f)m fatCt jebe tteinigfeit auf. 
 SnJBefdjtag nefymen. 
 Sebermann mag ifm gut leiben. 
 $eljrcn <5ie fid) nid)t an tljn. 
 $ein SBIatt »or bag 5DJauX nefjmen. 
 $ur$ angeBunben fein. 
 Sangen <5ie $u, meine £erren. 
 Saffen 'Bit mid) jufrieben. 
 Siftein 3^ad)Bar lap rnir fagen. 
 3Jlit nid)tg, bir nidjtg. 
 ©efeen @ie Sfrcn §ut auf. 
 <5te fjat ifjn barum geBradjt. 
 <Ste ergriffen bag £afenpanier. 
 Bit geBen miv immer bie ©djulb. 
 Bit t'jjun ber <5adje ju »iet. 
 2Bag gefjt bag mid) an? 
 SSag t)iff£ mir 1 g ? 
 2Ba3 fattt Stjncnein? 
 9Sag wotltc idjbod) fagen? 
 SSBeit gefeflt. 
 
 SBenn id) fte ju fefjen Befomme. 
 jQ5enn 1 g mir fef)I fdjtagt. 
 Benn tdj anberg red)t baron Bin. 
 
 It is Ilis wa/. 
 
 He ha3 found a laarket at last. 
 
 He is too bad ; he £oes too far. 
 
 He aims at nothing else. 
 
 It will not do. 
 
 It looks very much like it. 
 
 I "want for nothing. 
 
 These are strange goings on. 
 
 It costs a great deal of money. 
 
 Blue does not look well on green, 
 
 I set a great store by my sister. 
 
 I like him well. 
 
 I cannot recollect it. 
 
 I do not care for it. 
 
 I cannot bear the man. 
 
 I would not do it myself. 
 
 I won't stand upon it with him. 
 
 I have found it out. 
 
 I let things go as they will. 
 
 What is he about? 
 
 Every trifle catches his attention. 
 
 To seize (goods). 
 
 He is liked by every one. 
 
 Never mind him. 
 
 To speak fearlessly. 
 
 To be irritable. 
 
 Help yourselves, Gentlemen 
 
 Let me alone. 
 
 My neighbor sends me word. 
 
 "Without any ado. 
 
 Put your hat on. 
 
 She made him lose it. 
 
 They took to their heels. 
 
 You always blame me. 
 
 You are carrying the thing too far 
 
 What is that to me ? 
 
 What am I the better for it f 
 
 What an idea ! 
 
 What was I going to saj' ? 
 
 You are quite out. 
 
 If I get a sight of her. 
 
 If I do not succeed. 
 
 If I am not mistaken 
 
EXERCISES IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 
 
 In the following list, together with the vocabularies, Eng. 
 lish as well as German, the pupil will find an ample stock of 
 words for the construction of the proposed sentences (see p. 19) 
 according to any one of the several Lessons. Thus, for instance, 
 on the 
 
 MODEL ACCORDING TO LESSON X, 
 
 the sentence, Ex. 1G, ,/£iefer Splitter iji ber ®ot)tt jcne$ Salter?/' 
 may be changed as follows : %i\\zx 33auer tft ber greunfc btefeS 
 ^iillerS; or, 3ener Glider gieBt tern Salter ba$ .ftorn; or, Diefct 
 Sauer serfauft tern SRfitter ta3 $ontj or, £er Wilder »erfauft bte^ 
 fern Saner ba3 9fteM; or, the sentence may be so varied as to 
 embrace the instructions of several of the preceding Lessons, 
 either with or without the introduction of words w T hich have 
 not already occurred in former Exercises. 
 
 MODEL EXERCISES ACCORDING TO LESSON XII, 
 
 Exercise 20. 1. 3^ Satcr %\i em ®Ia3 unb einen jammer auf 
 tern Stfcfjej or, 9JMn Srnber tjat ein $ener in fetnem Dfen; or, 
 Unfer greunb §at mem ©la3 unb %l)xm <3rut)I; or, Wl tin £>mtb 
 ftett swiften metnem ^reunbe unb itnferem Setter. 
 
 A similar course may be pursued with any other sentence in any 
 given Exercise; a less or more advanced lesson being selected, as a 
 model, according to the progress or capacity of the pupil. 
 
 EXERCISES ACCORDING TO LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 Exercise 68. 1. &5a3 $at ber WlMtv in ben Eetnen ©atfen? 
 2. Sr Ijat Witty tartn. 3. SBer |at tie ®urfen? 4. Die J?i3d)e 
 BaBen fie. 5. SBer tjat bte ftlfrerne 2i$tpu£e ge^aBt ? 6. SBo ftnb 
 tie ©djaufeln unt ber <Sd)aumteffet ? T. Bet$e ©emalre fjafcen 
 feteSftalergeljaft? 
 
450 
 
 WORDS PJ1. EXERCISES 
 
 I. Professions and Trades. £antfterfe uttb ©etteroe. 
 
 Sfpof&e'fer, m. -3,° apothecary. 
 Slrjt, w. -e$s p^. Sterjte, physician. 
 SSarb.er', m. -3,^. -c, barber. 
 Sau'mctfter, m. -3/ pi. -, architect 
 SMlbVuer, m. -$, pi. -, sculptor. 
 23tfd)of, m, -3, pi. Sifcfjofe, bishop. 
 SB5ttd)er, m. -3, #*• -; cooper. 
 SBraucr, ra. -3, jo/. -, brewer. 
 S3ttd)'bmber, m. -3, bookbinder. 
 3Sud)'bructer, m. -3, _pJ. -, printer. 
 (Eapetfan, »*. -3, p^. -, chaplain. 
 Gfytrurg', m. -en, pi. -en, surgeon. 
 £)ad)'beder, m. -3, jo£. -, slater. 
 §drber, m. -3, pi. -, dyer. 
 §tfd)'[)dnbler, m. -3, pi. fishmonger. 
 gletfdjer, m. -3, pi. -, butcher, 
 gutjrmatm, pi. -leuie, wagoner. 
 ©etft'ltd)e, m. -n, clergyman, 
 ©erber, m. -§>, pi. -, currier, 
 ©tafer, m. -3, pi. -, glazier. 
 @olb'fd)mteb, m. -e3, goldsmith. 
 £anb'j"d)ut)mad)er, m. -3, glover. 
 |)irt, m. -en, pi. -en, herdman. 
 Impymieb, m. -e3, farrier. 
 Susoelier'f m. -eo, jeweler. 
 ^o^Ter, m. -3, pi. -, collier. 
 Pilfer, ra. -3, pi. (See &ottd)er.) 
 $unftler, m. -3, pJ. -, artist. 
 $up'ferfd)mieb, m. -e3, brazier. 
 .ftup'ferftedjer, m. -3, graver. 
 Sflctfjer, m. -3, jo£. mower. 
 9)?arft'fd)reter, ra. -3, ^. -, quack. 
 2D?aurer, m. -3. jp£. -, mason. 
 5>le|T'erfd)mieb, m. -e3, cutler. 
 fWefcger, m. -3. (See gleifd)er.) 
 Sftuftfant', ra. -en, musician. 
 
 Sitter, w. -3, old age. 
 Slmmc,/* -, pi. -n, nurse. 
 SSrctur,/. -, pi. SBrnute, bride. 
 SBrciu'tigant, »i. -I, bridegroom. 
 Gt'f)cfratt,/. -; jp/. -en, wife. 
 &'r)emann, pi. -manner, husband. 
 (Snfet, m. -:-, pi. -, grand son. 
 En'trlm, pi. -nen, grand daughter, 
 gami'lie,/. -, pi. -It, family, 
 ©eburt',/.-, birth. 
 
 9?ad)t'rodd)ter, ra. -3, watchman. 
 Sfta'fyerin, />£. -nen, seamstress. 
 sftatur former, ra. -3; naturalist. 
 Dbft'fydnb. levin, fruitwoman. 
 spapfi, m. -eg, pZ. $apjte, pope. 
 §)eiTud'enmad)er, hair-dresser. 
 SPfctrrer, m. -3, pi. -, vicar, parsoA 
 §)fer'bclj<mbter, ra., horsedealer. 
 spijitifcpi/, m, -en, philosopher. 
 §)re'biger, m. -3, _p£. -, preacher. 
 Sh'tefrer, ra. —3, pi. -, priest. 
 SRebner, m. -3, pi. -, orator. 
 ©attler, ra. -3, #/. -, saddler. 
 (Bd)au'ipteler, m.-$,pl.-, actor. 
 <5d)loffer, ra. -3, jdJ. -, locksmith. 
 ©djmteb, m. -c3, -3, p£. -e, smith. 
 ©crmeiDer, m.-i, pi.-, tailor. 
 <Sd)ont'ftein[eger, chimney-sweep. 
 •v£5d)rtfi'fteuer, m. -3, pi. -, author. 
 <5d)uryf(td'er, ?«. -3, ^^. -, cobbler. 
 ©crjul'le()rer. m. -3, schoolteacher, 
 ©eiler, m. -3, /?£. -, rope-maker. 
 ©peceret'^dnbler, grocer. 
 ©tid'ertn, pi. -nen, embroideress. 
 £aa/lor)ner, m. -3, day-laborer. 
 Xape^i'rer, m. -3, jo^. -, upholsterer 
 Srobter, m. -3, j?/. -, fripperer. 
 2ud)'^dnbler, wi. -3, jo^. -, draper. 
 U^r'mad}er, m. -3, watchmaker. 
 SBdfd/erm, pi. -nen, washer-woman, 
 SBeber, m.-x, pi.-, weaver. 
 2Sed)3ler, m. -3, money-exchanger. 
 SBunbarjt, jo/. — argte, See S^irurg. 
 Sa^nar^t, pi. -drjie, dentist. 
 .Sucferbacfer, confectioner. 
 
 II. Man. £>er 
 
 ert] 
 
 ©ema^I', m. 
 ©emal/lin,/. 
 ©rop'mutter, 
 ©roB'water, - 
 Sugcnb,/. -, 
 3una,fr an,/. 
 Singling, m. 
 ^itnutjetf,/. 
 9kd)fommen 
 9)atk, m. -n 
 
 consort. 
 
 -t$>, pi. -t, 
 . -, pi. -nen, , 
 
 -mutter, grandmother. 
 -Setter, grandfather. 
 
 youth. 
 -, pi. -ei'.f virgin. 
 
 -3, young man. 
 -, childhood, infancy, 
 pi. descendants. 
 ;, pi. -n, godlather. 
 
 * For declension and formati m of plural, see p. 80 ; connected view oj 
 declensions, page 104. 
 
IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 
 
 453 
 
 §)atr)e, /. -; pi. -rt, godmother. 
 fPflc'gewtter, pi. -setter, fosterfather. 
 ©djmager, brother-in-law. 
 ©cfyroct'gcrirt, sister-in-law. 
 <5d)nne'ger mutter , mother-in-law. 
 <Sd>nne'gerfor)tt, son-in-law. 
 <Sdya> te'gers ate r, fath er-in-law. 
 (Brief mutter, stepmother. 
 €>ticffor)n, m.-t$, stepson. 
 
 ©ttefsater, m. -S, stepfathei 
 ttr'enfel, great-grand sun. 
 Ur'grojjttater, great-grand father. 
 25erto'bimg, pi. -ert/betrothment 
 
 3)or'far)ren, pi. ancestors. 
 23 .life, /. -, pi. -n, orphan. 
 SBtttroc,/. - pi. -n, widow. 
 SBittroer, m. —$., pi. -, widower. 
 SvoiUiug, m. -i, pi. -e, twin. 
 
 III. The Human Body. !Der m enf d)li cl) e ^torper, 
 
 2Iber,/ ~,pl. -n, vein. 
 Sltm, m. -eg, -g, pi. -C arm. 
 Slug/apfcl, pi. -apfel/ eye-ball, pupiL 
 Sfa'gcnbrawte, pi. -n, eye-brow. 
 Slu'gentteb, n. -eg, pi. -er, eye-lid. 
 Slu'gertroiniperrt, pi. eye-lashes. 
 SB.tcfcn, m. -g, pi. -, cheek. 
 33ctd'enbavt, pi. -bdrte, whiskers. 
 23a;:, m.-ti, -g, pi. SSarlc, beard. 
 23cin, n. -eg, -o, pi. -e, leg. 
 SBlut, n. -eg, -g, blood. 
 fBruji,/. -,!>/. SBriijie, breast. 
 S3 u fen, m. -g, pi. -, bosom, 
 ©aumert, m. -o, pi. -, thumb. 
 Gl'bcgcn, m. -4, pi. -, elbow, 
 gerfc,/. -, pi -rt, heel. 
 gleifd), n. -eg, flesh, 
 ©alie, /. -, gall, 
 ©aumen, m. -g, pi. -, palate. 
 ©cl)hn', n. -eg, -g, pi. -e, brain. 
 ©dent 7 , n. -eg, -g, pi. -e, joint. 
 ©crip'pe, w. -o, p'. -» skeleton, 
 ©cfid)/, n.pl. -e, -er, sight. 
 ©cfid)tg'pant't, m. -eg, -g, pi -jitge, 
 
 lineament, feature, 
 ©tieb, n. limb, member. 
 £alg, m. -eg, pi. £alfe, neck. 
 $aut, /. -, p£. $cmte, skin. 
 k>zx\, n. -eng, pi. cm heart. 
 £ufte,/. -,pl. -it, hip. 
 $er)lc,/. -, p£. -n, throat. 
 
 IV. Maladies, Rem sdies. $ r a n I () c 1 1 e n, £ e i I m 1 1 1 e I, 
 
 $me, «. -3, jpi .fTutce, knee. 
 $noct)en, ?rc. -3, pi. -, bone. 
 $6rper, wi. -g, pi. — , body. 
 £ebcr,/. -, />?. -n, liver. 
 £ivpc,'/. -# pi. -n, lip. 
 Cungc, /. -, jo', -n, lungs. 
 Sftagen, ?n. -g, ^) 7 . -, stomach. 
 Wlaxt, ?i. -eg, -g, marrow. 
 W\\\, f. -, joZ. -en, spleen. 
 Sftunb, m. p 7 , SJtfmber, mouth. 
 2/hlgfeI,/. -, p'. -n, muscle. 
 Sfatfett, m. -3, pi. -, nape. 
 9fogd, w. -g, £>/. 5Raget> nail. 
 9?afe,/. -, pi. -n, nose. 
 9krp, in. -en, jo', -en, nerve. 
 Sftteren, />£. -, loins. 
 fRtppc, /. -, pi. -rt, rib. 
 SJiicfgrctt, ?». & n. spine. 
 @d)abcl, m. -g, pi. -, skull. 
 (5d)enfcl, ?». -g, p/. -, thigh. 
 ©d)laf, vi. pi. <E5d)Iafe, temple. 
 ©d|tag'aber, /. -, pi. -n' artery. 
 ©d)itltcr,/. -, pi. -n, shoulder, 
 ©ettc, /. -, ^^. -n, side, 
 ©tint,/ -, pi. -ert, forehead. 
 SBabe, / -, ^. -n, caK 
 SSkngc. / -, pi. -n, cheek. 
 Siit)nfleifd}, ii. -e§, gum. 
 3el)e,/ -, joZ. -n, toe. 
 Sunge,/ -, jp^. -n, tongue. 
 
 Slnfaff, m. -eS, -«, jo^. -fade, fit. 
 S3alfam, 7W. -3, pi. -e, balm. 
 S31attern, ^/. the small-pox. 
 53anfcr)ett,/-, blindness. 
 S3ranntn)ein, m. brandy. 
 23rcd)'mtttel, n. -§, pi. — , vomitive. 
 Sieber, n. -$, fever. 
 ©efd)n)ulft', ©efd)roiiI|le, swelling. 
 >iir'r n. -e§, -g, pi. -e, ulcer. 
 
 ®td)t, f. -, gout. 
 £>et(ung, / -, pi. -en, cure. 
 |)et'ferfeit, / -, hoarseness. 
 lutften, m. -3, cough. 
 Sekppe, / jalap. 
 JTolif,/-, colic. 
 $rampf, m. ^rampfe, cramp. 
 ^rebg, m. -eg, pi. -e, cancel 
 5Jhfern, pi. measles. 
 
452 
 
 WORDS FOR EXERCISES 
 
 Sfttttel, n. -g, pi. -, remedy. 
 3?arbe, /. -, pi. -n, scar. 
 SfJer'venftebcr, n. -<&, nervous-fever, 
 Dfynnuub;,/. -, fainting. 
 tyodtv, pi. (See Slattern.) _ 
 Duetfd)ung, /?£. -en, contusion. 
 Stecept'i w. pZ. -e, prescription, 
 ©albe,/. -/ p£. -n, salve. 
 <5d)artadjjieber, scarlet-fever. 
 (5d)ic'len, n. -v, squinting. 
 ©■rfttttpfcK, to. -3, cold. 
 
 ©dwtnbet, to. -#, dizziness. 
 ©d)roinbfud)t, /. -, consumption. 
 ©tammcttt, n. -y, stammering. 
 <Stummf>eit, /. -, dumbness. 
 (Sud)f, bie faitenbe, epilepsy. 
 Saubfjett,/. -, deafness. 
 Ue'belfettf/. -, nausea. 
 lln'papUd^eit, indisposition. 
 SSerren'fuug, pi. -en, dislocation. 
 SBctf'ferfudjt,/. -, dropsy. 
 SBunbc,/. ~, pi. -tt, wound. 
 
 V. Articles of Dress, etc. ^leibuncjSjtucfe, n* 
 
 STcrmcI, to. -y, pi. -, sleeve. 
 Strmbanb, pi. -lumber, bracelet. 
 3ltk$, to. -\ft$, pi. -\Jt, satin. 
 S3ctrd)cnt, to. ~$, pi. -e, dimity. 
 83atift' ; m. -zi, pi. -c, cambric. 
 Shum'rootfe,/. -, cotton. 
 SBein't'lctbcr, £>£. pantaloons. 
 S3efa|'» to. -cy, />£. -fa$e# trimming. 
 SBcnfet, m, -a, p^. -, purse, bag. 
 Grille,/. -, p.. -n, spectacles. 
 33rujt nabcl,/. -, jdZ. -n, broach. 
 §3ur;le,/. -, pi. -n, brush. 
 QDegetlf m. -$, p£. -, sword. 
 ©iamant, to. diamond. 
 (Sl'fenbctn, ». -ey, -y, ivory. 
 gad)er, m. -3, p/. -, fan. 
 §tor, m. -e3, -3, jt>Z. glcre, crape. 
 %x<xk, to. jo£. Srctife, dress-coat. 
 gremfe,/. -, jt>£. -n, fringe. 
 gutter, n. -$, lining. 
 ©efd)mei'be, n. -y, jewelry, 
 ©ranat', m. -en, pi. -en, garnet, 
 ©iirtel, m. -y, pi. -, sash. 
 -§>aanubel, /. -, pi. -n, hair-pin. 
 £>ctlybanb, n.pl. -bd'nber, neck-lace. 
 £alytud), n. pi. -tud)er, neck-cloth. 
 £aube, /. -, pi. -n, cap. 
 £c;nb, n. -ey, -y, _p£. -en, shirt. 
 £ofen, pi. breeches. 
 •^o'fenirager, to. suspenders. 
 jlamafd)'en, pi. gaiters. 
 JTamm, m.pl. famine, comb. 
 $appe,/. -, pi. -n, cap. 
 .S'letb, n. -ey, dress, gown. 
 $opfpui}, to. -ey, head-dress. 
 .Srctgen, to. -y, pi. -, collar. 
 Cein'rcanb, /. -, linax 
 
 CocEe,/. -, pi. -n, curl. 
 s JD?uffeltn', m. -ey, ^)/. -e, mnslin. 
 $U'tl}e,/. -, jd£. -n, (See $appe.) 
 Sfa'belt'tffen, n. -y, pin-cushion. 
 9?al/nabet, /. -, pi. -n, needle. 
 D'berrocf, to. pi. -rbcfe, frock-coai 
 During, to. -ey, pi. -e, ear-ring. 
 spctyverf, w. -ey, 3, jt>Z. -e, fur. 
 |>erle, /. -, jsJ. -n, pearl. 
 spoma'bc,/.- -, j!?£. -n, pomatum. 
 $ted)'f(dfd)d)en, «. smelling-bottle. 
 Sting, to. -ey, -i, pi. -e, ring. 
 ©ctmmet, to. -y, p/. -e, velvet, 
 ©djeere,/. -, pi. -n, shears. 
 ©d)lafrocf, to. dressing-gown, 
 ©cfjleier, to. -3, ^>£. -, vail. 
 <Sd)lo|l, w. -ey, jd£. ©cfylbffer, clasp. 
 (Sdnrnlle, /. -, £>£. -n, buckle. 
 (Sdmiirbrufr, /. -, pi. -briifle, stays 
 ©d)niir'nabel,/. -, pi. -n, bodkin. 
 <Sd)oo£, to. -e3, jo/. <3d}6BC lap. 
 <5d)urje, /. -, pi. -n, apron. 
 ©etbe,/. -, joZ. -n, silk, 
 ©ocfe,/. -, jt?^. -n, sock. 
 <Son'nenfd)trm, m. parasol. 
 ©pifeen, pi. laces. 
 ©per en, to. -£, p^. -, spur. 
 ©tednabel,/. -, _pt -n, pir. 
 ©tie'felfned)t,TO. boot-jack. 
 ©trump f, to. pi. (Strum; fe, stockiog 
 ^affet, to. -ey, -y, ^/. -e, taffeta. 
 Za\d)t,f. -, pi. -n, pocket. 
 Un'tert)ofen, pi. drawers. 
 SBefte, /. -, pi. -u, vest. 
 SBtd)fe, /. -, pi. -n, blacking. 
 Saftn'Ourfte, /. tooth-brush. 
 3a^n'|lod)er, n. toth-pick. 
 
IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 
 
 453 
 
 VI. Town and House, etc. £ t e <5 1 a b t it tt fc b a 6 £ a tt £, K. 
 
 •Balfen, m. -3, p£. -, beam. 
 
 53anf, / -i pi. -en, bank. 
 
 SBaum'gartcu, _p£. -gcirten, ovchaid. 
 
 23aum'fd)ule, /. -, pi. -n, nursery. 
 
 SiMiotyef,/ -, pi. -en, library. 
 
 SSorfe, /. -, pi. -n, exchange. 
 
 33rett, ». -co, -3, pJ. -er, plank. 
 
 Sftritdfe,/. -, pi. -rt, bridge. 
 
 SBrunnen, m. -3, pi -, well. 
 
 (Eapel'le,/. -, jdZ. -n, chapel. 
 
 Gafer'ne, /. -, pi. -n, barrack. 
 
 Qad), n. -eg, £>/. £)dd)er, roo£ 
 
 !£ad)'rhtne,/ gutter, spout. 
 
 £)ecfe, /. -, ^ I. -n, ceiling. 
 
 £)orf, «. pi. 2)i>rfer, village. 
 
 (Srb'gcfd)OH, w. ground-floor. 
 
 gen'tferlctfcen, m. -3, joZ. -Idbcn, 
 window-shutters. 
 
 glecfen, ?». -3, #£. -, borough. 
 
 gu|'boben, ra. -3, pi. -bbben, floor. 
 
 &a\fe,f. -, pi. -n, lane. 
 
 ©cfang'ntp, n. -eg, jpZ. -e, prison. 
 
 G5en>cid)3'l)au3, n. pi. -l;dufer, green- 
 house. 
 
 ©eroblbe, n. -3, pi. -, vault. 
 
 ©lode,/.-,/^. -n, bell. 
 
 ©lotf'enfpiel, n. -eg, chime. 
 
 ©offe,/. -,pl. — it, kennel. 
 
 £auptftabt, /. -, £>Z. -fidbte, metrop- 
 olis, chief town. 
 
 £ecfe,/. -, pi. -n, hedge. 
 
 $of, ?n. pi. &ofe, court, yard. 
 
 4?utte, /. -, pZ. -n, cottage, hut. 
 
 Ralf, m. -eg, -3, lime. 
 
 ^amin, n. -eg, £>/. -e, chimney. 
 
 hammer, /. -, pi. -n, chamber. 
 
 teller, to. -3, pi. -, cellar. 
 
 Jlird^ofi m. -eg, pi. -t)ofe, burying- 
 place, church-yard. 
 
 $ird)fptel, n. -eg," -3, pi. -e, parish. 
 
 $ird)tfnmn, ra. -e3, -3, pZ. -taurine, 
 tower, belfry of a church. 
 
 iUoftcr, n. -3, ^/. JUcfter, cloister. 
 
 £ud)e /. -, p/. -n, kitchen. 
 
 £anb!)auy, n. country-house. 
 ^anb'ftrafJe,/. -, pi. -n, highway. 
 WtantXtf. -, pi. -n, wall. 
 SJici'erfyof, in. -:$, -3, p/. -pfe, farm. 
 2)iobeln, pi furniture. 
 SJibrtel, in. -3, mortar. 
 Sftiittje, /. -, pi -rt, mint, coin. 
 Dfen, m. ~3,_pZ. Oefen, stove. 
 §)alaft, m. -zi, pi SPaldjie, palace. 
 spflaftcv, n. -3, pavement. 
 3) oft, /. -, pi -en, post-office. 
 spumpe,/. -, p£ -en, pump. 
 9tctt^aug, n. -eg, #£ pufcr, town 
 
 house, council-house. 
 SRtegel, m. -3, pi. -, bolt, door-bar 
 ©aal, m. -c3, -3, pZ. ©ale, saloon 
 Sctcrtftei', /. -, pi. -en, vestry. 
 ©d)au'|piell)au3, n. theater. 
 ©cl)clle,/. -, pi -n. bell (small), 
 ©cbeunc, /. -, granary, barn. 
 ©dvtaf'jimmer, n. -3, "bed-room. 
 ©d)lof', n. -ffe3, castle, lock. 
 ©d)tcfer, m. -3, pi -, slate. 
 ©d)ornftetn, in. (See olanun.) 
 ©pcid)er, in. -3, pZ. -, loft, garret. 
 ©pital', n. -~e$,pl. —idler, hospital 
 ©tabttl)or, n. -e3. pi -e, city -gate. 
 (Stabt'vicrtcl, ^.quarter of (the) towru 
 ©tall, m. -e3, pi. ©tdlle, stable, 
 ©totfroerf, n. -e3, -3, pi -e, story, 
 ©tube,/. -, pi -ih chamber. 
 £retbbau3, n. hot-house. 
 £rep'pena,eldnber, n. stair-case-rail. 
 S^itrm, m. £l)itrnte, tower, steeple. 
 Umge'&ungen, pi environs. 
 SJor'jimmer, n. ante-chamber. 
 iBorftabt, /. -, pi -fidbte, suburb. 
 SBanb,/. -, SSanbe, wail (of house) 
 SBeinberg, m. -e3, pi -e, vine-yard. 
 SBiefe,/. -, pi -n, meadow. 
 3eugl)au3, n. pi. -Ijaufer, arsenal 
 Btegel, m. -%,pl -, tile. 
 Ste'gelftein, m. -c3, pi -c, brick. 
 3oIll)au3, n. custom-house. 
 
 "V IT. FlTRNl TURE, ETC. 9ft B t I X t XI, JC. 
 
 Scdjer, m. -3, _pL -, tumbler, cup. 
 23ett, n. -e3, -3, pZ, -en, bed. 
 SBett'bctfc,/. -, pi -n, coverlet. 
 SBett'labe, /. -, pi -n, bedstead. , 
 SSetttud), n. -eg, i)Z. -tul)er, sheet. 
 SBla'febalg, wi.^Z. -bdlge, bellows. 
 
 S3ii'd}erbrett, n. book-shelf. 
 Su'd)erfd)ran!, m. book-case. 
 23u'geletfcn, n. smoothing-iron. 
 Safferol', n. -3, pi. -e, sauce- pan, 
 £>ecfel, m. -3, i?Z. -, c <>ver. 
 ©inter, m. -3, pi -, bucket. 
 
454 
 
 WORDS FOR EXERCISES 
 
 %a$, n. -fTe3,pi. gaffer* cast. 
 $e'fcerbett, n. -e§, feather-bed. 
 fttu'itftafyl, m. pi. -fta()(c, steel. 
 geu'erjlein, m. -eg, -3, pi. -e, flint, 
 geu'erjcmge, / -, pi. -n, tongs. 
 Seu'c^eug, n. -eg, tinder-box. 
 Sugfcanf, /. -, pi. -bant'e, foot-stool. 
 ®ebecf', to. -eg, -j,pL-t, cover. 
 ©emal'be, n. -Z>,pl. -, picture. 
 £>anbtud), to. -eg, pi. -tud)er, towel. 
 £>erb, m. -eg, -3, pi. -e, hearth. 
 QoliiofyU, f. -, pi. -w, charcoal. 
 $ajW)en, to. -g, pi. -, box. (L. 24. 1.) 
 ^effel, m. -3, pi. -, kettle, 
 iter^e, /. -,pl. -n, taper, candle, 
 fftftc,/. -,pl. -a, chest. 
 iTome'ce,/. -, chest of drawers. 
 $opf fi|Jen, to. -3, pi. -, pillow. 
 $orb, m. -e3, -3, pi* .ffbrbe, basket. 
 $ron'leurf)ier, in. chandelier. 
 $rug, in. —t§> f pi. ^ritge, pitcher. 
 •ftitbet, in. -g, pi. -, pail, tub. 
 $ud)'encicfd)trr, to. kitchen utensil. 
 £ampe,/. -, pi.--*, lamp. 
 £ctter'ne, /. -, pL -n, lantern. 
 £id)t, to. -eg, _?;/. -cr, (See $cr$e.) 
 Siclu'pu^e,/. -;pi. -n, snuffers. 
 Sftorfer, »*. -3, joZ. -, mortar. 
 §)fanne,/. -, pi. ~.\, pan. 
 $PfefferMd)fe,/. -, pepper-box. 
 9>fropfcn, /to. -g,pi. -, cork. 
 tJfropf'en^ie^er, m. cork-screw. 
 
 9>fu$I, m. -?,^Z. spfiitjTe, bolster. 
 spolftcr, to. -3, pi. -, bolster. 
 3>ult, to. -eg, —3, pi, -e, desk. 
 3ft a I) men, m. —3, pi. -, frame. 
 ©al.faf, to. pi. -faffer, salt-cellar 
 ©d)ad)tel, /. -, (See tfdftdxn.j 
 ©d)aufet,/. -, pi. -n, shovel, 
 ©djaum'toffcl, m. -3, skimmer. 
 ©d)trm, in. —eg, -g, pi. -e, screen. 
 <Sd)ranf, in. pi. ©cfyrcmfe, cupboard 
 @d)ub'labe, /. -, pi. -n, drawer, 
 ©djiir'etfen, to. -3, pi. -, poker. 
 ©d)n)e'fet()bl^l)en, n. match. 
 ©ctfe, /. -, pi. -n, soap. 
 ©enftopf, m. -iopfe, mustard-pot. 
 ©emet'te, /. -,pi. -n, napkin. 
 ©teb, to. -eg, -3, pi. -e, sieve. 
 ©opfj.t, w. -$ f pi. -3, sofa, 
 ©tein'frijle,/. -, pi. -n, coal. 
 ©up'penfdjun'cl,/. -, tureen. 
 Seppid), in. -3, pi. -e, carpet. 
 Xie^ct, m. -g, pi. -, skillet. 
 £t["d)tud), to. pi. -tiirfjer, table-elotl 
 £opf, vro. -eg, pi. Sopfe, pot. 
 £rtd)ter, m. -3, pi. -, funnel.' 
 2Bcmb'leud)ter, m. -3, pi. -, sconce. 
 SBarm'flafcbe,/. -, warming-pan. 
 SBctfd/becf en, to. -3, pi. -, washbowi 
 SBiege, /. -, pi. -n, cradle. 
 Bucferbofe,/. -, pi. -n, sugar-box. 
 timber, m. -3, tinder. 
 
 VIII. Dishes, ©eriefcte. 
 
 Sonfect', n. comfit, sweet-meats, 
 ©t, «. -eg, pi. -cr, egg. 
 (Si'erfudjen, m. -g, pi. -, omelet. 
 (£rfrifd)'ung,/. -, refreshment, 
 gleifd/briifje,/. -, pi. -n, broth, 
 ©ctfbniifl, to. -eg, -mailer, banquet 
 •Spain'mclfleifd), to. -eg, mutton. 
 |>ant ntelfeulc, /. -, leg of mutton. 
 JTatbfleijcb, to. -eg, veal. 
 ^albgcotetet'te,/. cutlet. 
 
 $Iop, ?ro. -e3, pi. $lo§e, dumpling. 
 Sftubel,/. -, pi. -:t, vermicelli. 
 Dd/fenbraten, m. roast-beef. 
 Dd)'fenfletfd), -eg, beef. 
 $Pfann' hid) en, m. -g, pan-cake. 
 ©d)infen, m. -g, pi. -, ham. 
 ©d))X>et'nef(eifd), to. -eg, pork. 
 ©uppe,/. -rpi. -tt, soup. 
 Sorte, /. -, pi. -n, tart. 
 SBurft,'/. -, pi. ©aifte, sausage. 
 
 IX Grain and Vegetables. ©etreiDe unb ©emiife. 
 
 SSlu'mcnfotjI, w. -£3> cauliflower. 
 Scb ; ne,/. -, pZ. -it, bean. 
 (£rbfe,/. -, pi -tt, pea. 
 ©erfte, /. -, barley, 
 ©urfe,/. -, pi. -n, cucumber. 
 $afcr, to2. -g, oats, 
 ^irfe, «. -«, millet 
 
 ■ftnobtctud), to?. -eg, -3, garlic. 
 
 ^otjl, m. -eg, -3, cabbage. 
 
 $orn, to. -eg, pi. Corner, corn, grain 
 
 $rcmi, to. -eg, -3, pi. itni'ter, kerb 
 
 ^reffe,/. -, cress. 
 
 £infe, /. -, pi. -n, lentil. 
 
 9ftcttg, to. -eg, maize. 
 
IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 
 
 Hi 
 
 Sfteer'retttg. '.u. horse-radish. 
 
 SPajlma'fe,/. -,pl. -n, parsnip. 
 
 fPeterfi'lie,/. -, parsley. 
 
 jpjknje,/ -, pi. -it, plant. 
 
 §)tlj, m. -z%, pi. -e, mushroom. 
 
 0taMet/d)en, n. -i, turnip-radish. 
 
 KetPf m. -?3, rice. 
 
 Slettigi m. -e8, -$, pi. -e, radish. 
 
 Sftoggeiti m. -3, rye. 
 
 SRiibC, /• -# pZ. -»» (brassica rapa); 
 aclbe Sftitbe, carrot, rot^e Stitbc, 
 baet; Weipe 9iii&C, turnip. 
 
 (Salbet,/. -/ sage. 
 ©au'erampfer, m. —3, sorrel. 
 
 Sijroamin, m. -z§, (See $ilj), 
 Seli'crie, m. -3, celery, 
 ©parcel, m. -i, asparagus. 
 ©pinat', m. -t§, -3, spinage. 
 £fji)'mun, m. -o, thyme. 
 Sriiffel,/. -,pl. -tl ( truffle. 
 23et$ett, m. -3, wheat. 
 SBurjcI, /. -, pi. -it, root. 
 Snjiebel;/. -, jpZ. Hti onion. 
 
 X. Fruits and Fruit-Trees. Dfcjl unE Dfcjt&aume, 
 
 STnatuS,/. -, jpZ. -fe, pine-apple. 
 2lp'fcU\utm, m. apple-tree. 
 Sfpfelfi'nc* /. sweet-orange. 
 Slprtfo'fe,/. -i, pi. — n, apricot 
 SMmbaum, m. pear-tree. 
 SSrom'bcere,/. black-berry. 
 Guro'ne,/. -, pi. -n, lemon. 
 "Datrcl, /. -, pZ. -it, date. 
 (ErD'beere,/. -, jpZ. -it, strawberry. 
 ^a'felnupi /. -, pi. -ituffe, hazelnut. 
 £ei'Delbeere,/. -> pi. -en, bilberry. 
 $tm'bcere,/. -, pi. -it, raspberry. 
 3fo$au'm$beere, /. -, pi. -it, currant. 
 $afta'iite,/. -, pi. -it, chesnut. 
 
 SWanbet, f: -, pi. -it, almond. 
 SKaul'bcettr'/. -» £>Z. -it, mulberry. 
 STOelo'itCi /. -, p£ -n, melon. 
 3)?t$pcl,/. -,pl -it, medlar. 
 9>jtr'tl<^e f /. -, pi. -it, peach. 
 spflcrn'meitbaum, m. plum-tree. 
 5>omeran'$e, g. -, p:. -n, orange. 
 Dutttc, /. -, pi. -it, quince. 
 Stoft'ne,/. -, pi. -It, raisin, 
 ©tad/eloeere,/. -, goose-berry. 
 ©traud), m. -ti, pi. ©trdtt$e» bush. 
 SBafliutp,/. -, _p£. — itiiije, walnut. 
 53etnftocf, m. grape-vine. 
 SBein'traubC//. -,pl. -it, grape. 
 
 XI. Forest-Trees. SBalfcfeaume. 
 
 Sfljorn, m. -3, pi. -e, maple. 
 SMrfe,/. -, pi. -it, birch. 
 83ud)e,/. -, pi. -it, beech. 
 Std)e,/. -, pi. -n, oak. 
 (Sfd)e,/. -, pi. -n, ash. 
 (Sv?pe,/. -,j9Z. -it, aspen. 
 $td)te,/. -,_?;Z. -it, pine. 
 8drd)e,/. -, j?Z. -n, larch. 
 
 £htbe, /. linden tree, lime-tree. 
 3>appel,/. -, pi -it, poplar. 
 3?ittbe,/. -, pi. -it, bark. 
 ©tamm, m. trunk. 
 Statute, /. -i .pZ. -n, fir. 
 Ulme, /. -, pi. -it, elm. 
 SBetbe,/. -, ^. -it, willow. 
 Sumo,, rru -t§, -3, pi. -i, bough. 
 
 XII. Flowers, etc. 33 1 u m e n , ;c. 
 
 2Ii:ri'id, /. -, pi. -it, auricula. 
 Dtftelf j. -, pi. -n, thistle. 
 ©etjjblatt, n. honey-suckle. 
 Sa^min'/ ?n. -z$, -%, jessamine. 
 Sesfo'ic/. -, pZ. -it, gillyflower 
 Si'lic, /. -, j?J. -;t, lily. 
 SuiB'itebe,/. -, _pZ. -n, daisy. 
 Sftc^n'ttunte,/. -,pl. -n, poppy. 
 2ftgrif;e, /. -, pZ. -n, myrtle. 
 S'lelfc,/. -, pZ. ~n, pink. 
 
 9tc|fct»/. -, p^ -it, nettle. 
 Sitt'terjpont, m. -c§,— 3, lark-spur. 
 iftofe,/. -, pZ. -n, rose, 
 ©djluff elblumc, /. -, pi -n, cowslip, 
 ©on'nenMume,/ -, sun-flower. 
 Sulpe, /. -, pi. -:t, tulip. 
 ttttfrcmt, n. -e3, -3, weed. 
 ©eild)en, n. -3, pi. -, violet. 
 SSergtjj'meiimiifctf w. -eg, -g, forget 
 ine-not. 
 
456 
 
 WORDS FOR EXERCISES IN COMPOSING GERMAN. 
 
 XIII. Birds, etc. SSbgcI, K* 
 
 SIbler, m. -g, pi. -, eagle. 
 Slmfclf /. -/ % I. -It; blackbird. 
 33acl/|Mje, /. -, _pZ. -n, wagtail. 
 23ud)finf, m. -en, _pZ. -en, chaffinch. 
 £)if telftnf, m. goldfinch. 
 £>of)le,/. -, pi. -tt, jackdaw. 
 2) r off el,/. -, £>Z. -n, thrush. 
 (Sifter,/. -,#Z. -n, magpie. 
 (Ente, /. -, .pZ. -n, duck. 
 <£ule,/. -, jpZ. -n, owl. 
 Salfe, m. -n, j»Z. -n, falcon. 
 $ctfan', tw. -en, pi. —en, pheasant. 
 Ste'bermctug,/. -, pi. -maufe, bat. 
 S'litgcl, m. -g, pi. -, wing. 
 ©an£,/. -, pi ©ctnfe, goose. 
 £abid)t, m. -eg, -g, pi. -e, hawk. 
 £>cinfling, in. -eg, -g, pi -e, linnet. 
 £utjn, w. -eg, -3, jpZ. £ul)ner, hen. 
 Jfcma'vtewjogel, m. canary-bird. 
 ihctfye, /. -, pi -n, crow. 
 5?ud)lein, n. -g, pi. -, chicken. 
 .ftuchicf, m. -g, .pZ. -e, cuckoo. 
 £evcl)e,/. -, pL -n, lark. 
 
 9cad/ttgatt, /. -, nightingale. 
 Spapagei, m. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, parrot 
 9)fctu, m. -en, .pZ. -en, peacock. 
 Stabe, «i. -n, pi. n, raven. 
 SKaub'sogel, tw. bird of prey. 
 dltbijufyn, n. partridge. 
 9fiet!)cr, m. -g, pi -, heron. 
 9eotf/fef)td)en, n. -g, jt?Z. -, redbreast 
 ©cfynaM, m. -g,pZ. ©djttabel, bill. 
 ©d)roalbe,/. -, pZ. -n, swallow. 
 @d)ivan, m. swan. 
 ©perltng, m. -g, sparrow. 
 (Stord), m. -eg,-g,j?Z. @tord)e, stork. 
 ©traujj, m. -eg, pZ. -e, ostrich. 
 Xaubt,/. -,pl. -n, pigeon. 
 £rutf)al)n, m. -eg, turkey. 
 £ur'teltaube,/. -, turtle-dove. 
 2Sad)tel, / -, pi -n, quail. 
 2Balb'fd)nepfe,/. -, wood-cock. 
 SffiajT'erfyufyn, n. moor-hen. 
 SQ5aff'erfd)nepfe, /. -, -, pi. -n, snipe. 
 Sautt'fimig, -eg, -g, pi -e, wren. 
 
 XIV. Quadrupeds. SBterfiijjtge £ I) t e r e. 
 
 2tffe, m. -n, jdZ. -n, ape. 
 SSar, m. -en, 2?Z. -en, bear. 
 SBtber, m. <-$, pi. -, beaver. 
 £)ad)g, m. -eg, £>Z. -e, badger. 
 (£id/pntd)en, n. -g, joZ. -, squirrel. 
 ft*rettd)en, n. -g, j?Z. -, ferret. 
 gud)g, m. -eg, #Z. gu<$fe, fox. 
 giillen, t*. -g, pZ. -, colt. 
 ©emfe, /. -, pi -n, chamois. 
 £afe, m. -n, pi -n, hare. 
 £trfd), m. -eg, #>Z. -e, deer. 
 Sgel, m. -g, £>Z. -, hedge-hog. 
 
 ^anin'djen, n. -g, pZ. -, rabbit. 
 
 £amm, n. lamb. 
 
 £oroe, m. -n, £>Z. -n, lion. 
 
 Sftarber, m. — g, pi. -, pole-cat. 
 
 Sftctul'efel, m. -g, pi. -, mule. 
 
 SWttulraurf, m. -eg, j>Z. -rourfe, mole 
 
 9?cf), ti. -eg, -g, j?Z. -e, roe. 
 
 <Sd)\T)ein, w. -eg, -g, jjZ. -e, hog. 
 
 £tger, m. -g, _pZ. -, tiger. 
 
 SSBoIf, m. -eg, -3, _pZ. sffiolfe, wolf. 
 
 Siege,/. -, pi. -:i, goat. 
 
 XV. Fishes, etc. $ifd)e, n. 
 
 Slat, m. -eg, -g, pi. -e, eel. 
 Qlujrer, /. -, pi -n, oyster. 
 S3arfd), m. -eg, joZ. -e, perch. 
 33Mthtg, m. red-herring. 
 SorcI'Ic,/. -, joZ. -n, trout, 
 ©arne'le,/. -,i?Z. -n, shrimp. 
 £ai, w. -eg, -g, joZ. -e, shark. 
 faring, m. -eg, -g, pi. -e, herring. 
 |)ed)t, m. -eg, -g, pZ. -e, pike. 
 Rummer, ??i. -g,jt?Z. -n, lobster. 
 i?a'&eljau, w«. -eg, pi -e, haddock. 
 
 ^avpfen, m. -§,pl. -, carp. 
 
 ^rebg, m. -eg, jdZ. -e, craw-fish. 
 gad)g, m. -eg, _pZ. -e, salmon. 
 9Jhifd)et, f.-,pl.-a, shell. 
 ©aim, 7«. -eg, -g, _pZ.-e, (See Sad)g, 
 <Sd)elfufd), w- -eg, j?Z. -e, haddock. 
 ©d)Ub'frote,/ -, jdZ. -n, turtle. 
 ©d)leil;e,/. -, jl>Z. -n, tench, 
 ©tor, m. -eg, -3, pi -e, sturgeon. 
 2Ballftfd), m. -eg -g, pi. -e, whala 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 -*sJ-o— <>— »-&- 
 
 The following selections are from various sources; all excellent. 
 however, and embracing a great diversity of style and matter. The 
 student, therefore, who has become familiar with i]\a grammatical 
 course laid down in the preceding part of this book, will enter upon 
 these reading lessons with no little pleasure. With the aid of the vo- 
 cabulary, which is sufficiently full, and the references to the grammar, 
 which are quite numerous, he can, indeed, find no serious difficulty. 
 Many more references might have been made; but he who duly con- 
 sults those already given, will not. it is believed, be in want of further 
 guidance in the use of his grammar. 
 
 I. U ® t> 1 1 m« 
 
 1. £)er &trfd). 
 
 2)er |>trfd) far; einft in eincm flaren SBadje feht SBttb. SBafjrttdj, fagte er, 
 id) itfcertreffe affe £{)iere an Stnftanb «nb $rad)t! 2Bte Ijerrltd) rctg t m ba3 b 
 ©eroctfj empor! — £)odj meine Stipe, rote magcr unb fcctgridj! ®aum ^atte 
 er bag (L. 44. 1.) gcfagt , [o erMtcfte cr d etnen Somen, bcr® ouf ir)n togging. 
 9)(tt grlipter f ©d)netle trugen iljn fetne vcrad)teten Si'tjle in ben nadjften SGalb ; 
 aber pteMid) t) t e 1 1 e it bie ©efrraud)e feine t-retten Corner auf, unb er fonnte 
 ftd) ntdjt lotfrotnben. ©er Soroe erreid)te nnb tobtete ir)u. 
 
 ©d)d'£e* bie £)tnge ntdjt nad) ber aujjjern (Seffalt, fonbern mid) bent tunc rii 
 SBertije ; fonjr roirft bn oft bein Uracil ju fcereuen fyaBen. SReifjuer. 
 
 2. £)er Sanberer unb" bag Srrltdjt. 
 Sin SSBanberer far) beg facing h auf feinem SBege unroett Don ftd) cirt Srrlid)t p 
 a.ing iljm gerabe nad), tarn »om red)ten spfabe al> unb scrfanf baburd) in 
 cben tiefen ©ttmfcf. &ct, serrounfd)teg SntgMlb! rief er an 3, roarttm map* 
 tcfl bu mid) ^terr)er fiif;rcu? — 3d) bid) gefuftrt ? erroieberte bag Snltdjt ; urn 
 33erjett,ung» id) serbtene bicfen 2)orrourf ntdjt. 3)u gtngjl ntir ja» freirotCtaj 
 nad). SHemasb als bn fcll)[t k gab bir ben S^att) mix 1 ju folgen. 
 
 SSetpiter. 
 
 * L. 51. 4; b L. 42. k; ° L. 36. 3; <* L. 53. 5; e L. 39; r L. 32. 5: 
 * L. 50. 5 ; * L. 61. 8 ; * L. 69. 20 ; J L, 34. 1 , k L 29. 3' ' L 64, 6. 
 
 20 
 
458 READING LESSONS. 
 
 3. £)er rottbe STpfeUaunt. 
 3n I en r)oT;)ten ©tomm einc3 roilben SIpfcI&aumeS lie § Id) eiu ©djroaurt 
 SSienen nteber. ©ie fu'Uten il;n m mit ben ©d)d£,en ifyreo" •ponigd, unb bet 
 ffiaum roarb fo ftolj barauf, ba^ cr atfe anberen SBd'ume gegcn ftd) seradjtete. 
 £)a rief il;m cm Otofenfiotf *u: Glcnber ©tol* auf gcliefiene ©ujjigfeitcn! 
 3fi betite grudjt banmt wentger tyer&e? 3n bicfe treioe ben £onig fyerauf, 
 roenu bu c£ fcermagfi, unb baun crjl roirb bev B 2ttenfdj btdj fegnen! Seffntg. 
 
 4. £)er ©ped) t unb bie £au Be. 
 
 (Sin ©pedjt unb eine £auoe fatten etnen §)fau Befudjt. 2£ie geftel bit unfit 
 £3trtfj? fragte ber ©pedjt auf bent ftMroege. %\t er nidjt ein rotbttgee $e- 
 fd;3pf £ ©etn ©totj, feme unforralidjert ftuyt, feme rjdfjlidje ©limme, jtnb fte 
 nidjt unertrdglidj? „2mf ailed biefe*," antroortete bie gute £auoe, „f>atte icfj 
 feme Beit m fefyen ; benn id) fatte genug an ber ©djonljeit fcineS 3?opfev, an 
 ben ijerrlidjen Saruen feiner Sebcrn unb an fetnent majeftdlifdjen ©djrocife m 
 fcerounbern." Sflettlner. 
 
 5. iiDie 2Befpen int £onigtopfc. 
 
 (Sin ©d)roarm SBefpen war in etnen §onigtopf gefrodjen? unb licfj cfl fid) 
 ba roofjl fdjmecfen. 2)odj jefjt, al3 fte roieber fort inottten,q fonntcn fte nid>i ; 
 benn bie ici^t ©itjjiigfeit §fttte ^liigel unb gitpc unoraud/kr gemad)t. IWdalirij 
 tammerten fte nun ukr iljr naty§ <£nbc. — Sine ein^ige SSefpe Ijatte fid) *or" 
 ftd)tig am Sfanbe erMten, jroar roeniger genoffen, akr ftdj aud> T nid)t gefan* 
 gen. • 3i)t bauert mid), ©dnoejl'ern, fprad) fte, inbem fte fort flog ; akr itjr 
 fcdttet and) bie ©djroierigfeit beS £erau3fommen3 * kbenfen fatten, cl;e ii;r end) 
 fa iief Ijinein roagtct. 
 
 2>er 2Beg mm fitnbr)afteu SSergnugeit ift letdjt. £>od) bejro fdjrocrcr faHt eS, 
 ton ir)m ftdj IoSmrcipen. ©aran ben!e u ntan T sorter, benn nadjfyer ift z% m 
 fpat unb frud)tlo$. SRefjmex. 
 
 G. '2)ie £aul>e unb bie .ftrdtye. 
 
 ©in mutljttrittiger .ftnak roarf nad) einer fdjneeroeipen Zault mit naffei 
 (Srbc, unb ba§ gldn^enbe ©cftcber berfcikn w rourbe fdjmutjig unb fd)roarj. S^un 
 Kjt bu bod) and) geroorben rote unfer x einer! fagte eine alte ^ra^e ^o^nladjenb ; 
 benn bie S3iifen ^aoen eS nid)t gern, ba§ man fiejfer fein will, aU fte, unb freunt 
 ftd) iikr ben Unfatt ber ®uten. 
 
 SBte euer x einer geroorben? erroicberte bie £auoe. ^eine^rocge^ ! S'c6 fd;eint 
 nur fo ; id) roerbe at>er nid)t fo Mei6en! 
 
 Unb fte Miet) aud) nid)t r fo. ©ie tabete, fte rcinigte ftdj, unb roar roiebei 
 fo gldnjenb wetp, ate m^or ; after bie ^ra^e olieo, roie fie war, unb rourtc 
 t$ * and) geolieoen fein, roenn fte au<^ ein 3a^r lang geoabet unb gepu^-t ^attc. 
 
 4>altet bie ^erjen nur rein; gegen bie ©erlaumbung roirb fd)on dtatf}, unb 
 bie Unfc^ulb ge^t am (£nbe bennod) gcred-tfertigt unb geldutert ^eryor. £6I;r. 
 
 m L. 28.5; n L. 42; • L. 59. 3: l 1 L 48.2; q L. 45.15 r L. 21.8; 
 
 • L. 29. 10; l L. 49. 4; ° L. 55. 3; v L. 19; w L. 41. 6; x L. 25. 13- 
 
 * L. 56. 1 ; » L. 23. 10. 
 
READING LESSONS. 459 
 
 7 ©er (Sinftebler unb be; 33dr. 
 
 (Sin Gtnfiebler fatte cinen jungen SSaren aufgejogen' unb burd) gutter, 
 6d)ldge unb mand)e 5Ku^c ilm fo jat)m trie eincn £unb gemack. Dft BracBte 
 nun bcr 33dr feincm (Srjte^er ettt anfctmiid)ed ©tittf 2Bitbprct b kirn, trug 
 $ol$ unb SSaffer fyerBei, Bctoadjte feine £utte, furj, cr leijletc it)m ©Icnfte 
 after 2Irt. (Sinft lag an cincm <Sommcrtage c ber Ginficbler im ©rafe batjirt* 
 gefirecft unb fff)Iief. 9ceBen it)m fag fein 85d'r unb roetyrte tie gltegett nB, 
 bit fdjaarenwetfe d ben ©reid umfdjradrmten. SSorjitglidj qudlte ttjn cine; wcfyl 
 jetjnmal - $atte ber 33dr ftc fortgejagt, unb immer fctm fie roieber. 
 Sefct, aid ftc fid) aBermatd auf bie ©tint beS <3'd)tafenben f fefcte, rief ber S3ar 
 untoillig and: SSarte! warte! id) ttnfl bid) roegkeiBen leken!* — Set biefeit 
 SSortcn ergrtff er eincn Stein, jiette rid)tig unb jerfdjmetterte bie f?Hege, aBcr 
 freilid) aud) mit ityr ben $opf bed Sltten. f 
 
 SBdr)Te bir feinen einfdltigen, feinen atfju rokn Scenfdjen jum h gretmbe ! 
 @eIBji ■ mit bcm Befien StBiften fann er bir j oft mek aid bein drgfier $einb 
 fcBaben. Saoater. 
 
 8. © i e 9? a d) t i g a 1 1 unb ber ©impel 
 
 ©te 9fod)tigaH ging einfr auf Oveifen unb jur h ©efeflfdjaft na^m fie einen 
 ©impel mit.P ©ie jTogen iiBer Xt)al unb SBerg unb famen nad) etlid)en £agen in 
 eincn fdjonen SSalb, in roeldjem fie fid) nieberlicgen. $aum Batten fie fid) auf 
 eincn 33uf<fj gefek, fo "oerfammelte fid) aud) fdjon eine ganje ©djaar »on bin 
 SSogeln bed SalbeS, um k bie Srcmblinge ju fekn. SICe Benmubertcn ben 
 ©impel unb toBten feinen fdjroarjen $opf, ben grauen Stiicfen unb ba$ fd)one 
 fRofy fcincr §3rufh 3)ad mu£ ein fefjr tiorne^mcr 9tctfcnber f fein, fprad) ciner 
 in bcm anbevn. ©cr anbere ©ogel tfi fct)r unBebcutenb. 2Bar)rfd)cinltd) tfi cr 
 ber ©icner. 9jjan brdngte fid) immer neugieriger urn ben fd)on Bcftcbcrien 
 ©impel |er, unb brdngte bie ^adjtigaft fo aftmdttd) in eine unBeoBad)tete Qctfe. 
 
 Gnblid) erfud}tcn bie SJogel ben ©impel, cr moge bod) and) einmctt feme 
 Sttmme t)8ren Iaffen. • ©enn man sermutkte, ba$ fein ©efang feinem itteibe 
 gletdjj fommen muffe. (£r Uej? fid) Bercbcn - unb fang. 5IBcr bie SSogel, bie 
 ikt sorbin Beirunbert fatten, lacken indgetjeim unb fagtcnficl) n r)aIBIaut in 1 3 
 e € f :\-: SBctd) 1 elenbe ©timme! ©enn cr nur lieBer gefd)tt?icgen ^dtte. 
 
 ?ci;t er^cB bie Wa^tigaff in it)rem ^erBorgenen 2BinfeI ike ©timme. ©ad 
 Iff hai ? riefen bie 33ogeI mit SBerounberung unb $reube. 2BeId)q ^errlt^cr ©e* 
 fang! SBie? ber unfd)einBare trembling ftngt fo fd)on? D, greuub, bu 
 uBertrifff! afte ©anger an SieBIic^feit unb ©tarfe bti ©efanged. ©eine ©timme 
 tefdjamt bein Sfudfekn. 
 
 llrtkile nid)t mty bem SCeufsern. Sn eincm unfd)einBaren Meibe tjt oft ba3 
 ffltenf!e latent »er Bergen. ©vimm. 
 
 * L. 51. 3 ; b L. 59. 3; c L. 24. 4 ; d L. 52. 5 ; e § 50 ; f L. 33 ; * L. 
 49*, k L 42. ./; ' L. 29. 5; J L. 64. b ; k L. 49. 5 ; - L. 49. 6 ; m L. G3; 
 » L ,D. 6; ° L. 42 A:; p L. 66. 7; q L. 13. 3. 
 
160 REAuING lessons. 
 
 n. fwa&diru 
 
 1. 1) c r r o I; e (2 b c I jr e i n. 
 
 (£.n ro^er Gbelfhin lag im ©anbe jtx>ifd)en oielen aitbeten gcmeirten ©tcincit 
 Sin 5l'na6c fcmmelie son biefen m feinem Spiel unb oradue fie nad) £aufe ■ 
 jualetci) mit bem (Ebclftein, after er fannte biefen nidjt 2) a fat) bcr SSater bed 
 5?naben fern Sptele $u unb kmerfte ben roijcn Sbeljrcm, unb fagte m feinem 
 Sofyne: gib mir biefen Stein! — Solved b ttjat ber Stnabi unb ladjelte, bcnu 
 ti bac§te, mad mill bcr Slater mit bem Stein rnadjeu? 
 
 £>iefer c aoer nafym unb fdjliff ben Stein in regelmajHge Stfacljen unb (Eden, 
 unb f errlt$ jrratjttc nun ber gefd)liffene £)iamant. 
 
 Sief)e, fagte barauf ber Slater, Fjier ifi ber (Stein, ben bit d mir gaoeft. £>a 
 erfraunte ber $naBe u&er bed ©efteined ®lanj unb fycrrlidjed $unfcln, unb ricf 
 and: Sftein Skater, voic oermod)ieft bit bicfed? 
 
 £>er Slater fprad): %$ crfannte bed ro^cn Stcined Sugcnb nub serBorgenc 
 ilrdfte, fo kfrcit 1 id) tlm son bpt scrljiillenben Sd)ladc. — 
 
 Darnad) aid bcr Stmbt ein Sunglmg geroorben roar, gab ir)m ber Slater ben 
 serebelten Stein aid Sinntulb e son bed Sefcend SUertt) unb SBiirbe. 
 
 Xlrummadkr. 
 
 2. 2) e r m ftp i g t 2K a g n e t. 
 
 Sin $naoe er^ielt'etnen fet)r guten Magnet jum ©efdjenf. (Er rooUte tfm 1 
 fd)imen unb seroarg it)tt f son allem (Eifenrocrfe entfernt, fergfdlttg in eincm 
 Sdjranfe. 3?ad) Ianger Beit fyolte er ifm roieber einmal Ijeroor, urn 9ieugiertgen j 
 feme $raft m jeigen. ©r tyiclt f&n an Gtfen; affeiit ber Magnet jog nun gar 
 ntd)t mel;r, roeii er ( burd) bie lange trdge Stu^e atte trdft se'rlcmi (jaitc. 
 
 2o&r. 
 3. S3ofer Umgang. 
 
 ©osfjroti, ein roeifer Sloifdlef)rer, erXauote aud) feinen erroadjferttit Sofjnen 
 unb £!3d)tern nid)t, mit SSftenfdjen ummgetyen, beren SBanbel nid)t ganj rein unb 
 ftttfam roar. SJaterdjcn,* fagte eined £aged h bie fanfte Sulalia ju tym, aid 
 er ifr unterfagte, in <55efeHfcl>aft tt^> SBruberd bie leidjtjmnige Sue tuba §u Befit* 
 dxrt, Sldierdien, bu mufn und roo^I fur fer)r finbifd) Batten, rocil bu glaufcjl, 
 Mefer 2Beg Fonne und gefaBrlidj rocrben. SIBer bcr Slater nalnn fti{[fd;n>eigenb 
 erne fd)on ertofdjene &o$U spin jtamin unb reid)te fie ber £od)ter Ijin. Sie 
 Brenat ttid)t; £inb, fagte er, nimm fte nur. £)a$ tl;at (Euialia, unb ftck, bie 
 jarre, roctye •'panb roitrbe fa}nmMg unb unserfc^end and) bad roiijle ©eroanb. . 
 2)a{; man bort) gar nid)t sorftdjtig genug fein fann, fagte Sitlalia serbrlc§lidj, 
 roenn man $ol)lcn Itxtytt I 3a mol)I, fprad) ber Slater, ©u ficl;ft mciu ilinb, 
 ban bie $oi>Ie, roenn fie and)' nidjt fcremtt, bod) fd)rod'r^l. Sllfo tn itingang 
 mit Sittcnlcfcn. ffltban. 
 
 » L. 43. 2; b L. 41. 9 ; c L. 10. 2; d L. 27. 2; « L. 43. b; f L. 28. 5 
 i L. 24. 2, h L. 61. 8; J L. 53. 3: j L. 33 
 
READING LESSONS. 461 
 
 4. ©iebreiSBtitfe. 
 
 (Hn frimm.r 5Hann rourbe" etnjt gefro'gt, roofer ea fomme, bag cr, tro^ b 
 offer 2)ransfal< bea c £ebena. tod) feld)cn ©Icidpuulj in fid) bercaljren forme. 
 £er d antroortete: 1)ai femmt baber, bay e id) meine Siugen toc^l in Stdji 
 nef/me, benn attea SBofe fomrai burd) bie ©inne jura §cr;,en, aber cutd) baa 
 ©utc. — Slitf bie noettere $rage, Bote cr baa madje/ fagte er: Seben SWorgen, 
 tr>e icb an bie ®ef($aftt unb unter bie 5Rettfc$en ger)e, rid)te id) meine Slugen 
 bebadnfam aitf brci £)inge: SrfienS * "r)ete id) fie gen &immel unb crinncre mid), b 
 bag mettt £auptgefdjaft unb bay 3ie( meinea Cebena unb ©trebena borr oben 
 fei Sweitena » fenf 1 id) fie jut Grbe unb bebenfc, roie rocnig 9laum id) be* 
 barf, urn' einfi mein ©rab barinj ju finben. Drittena cnblid) fd)au id) urn 
 mid) unb betrcdjte bie SRenge berer, v benen eo nod) fd)Iimmer erger/t, 1 ala mir. 
 Shrf biefe SSeife getrojle id) mid) altea Seibea unb lebe rait SBell unb 9?ccufd)en 
 jufrieben in ©ott. 2Iuerbad)cr. 
 
 5. £>ie .ftornatjren. 
 
 Gin Canbmamt ging mit feinem f'teincn ©obne auf" ben SIcfcr §tnatta ( urn 
 %vl feben, ob baa $orn balb reiffei. ©icf)# 2>ater, fagte ber unerfafjrene 5tnabe, 
 roic aufrcdjt einige $alme ben $opf» tragen! Diefe muffen roo&I red)t sorncfynt 
 fcin; bie anbern, bie (Id) *er ibnen fo tief buden, finb geroijjj t>tcl fd)Ied)ter. 
 £cr ivater pjlutfte ein $aar 2(c()ren° al unb fpradj: ^bridjtea £irtb, ba [te§ 
 rinraall £>iefe Sleb.re b,ier, bie \id) fo jiolj in bie &tyt frrecfte, i(i ganj taub 
 unb leer; biefe aber, bie fid) fo befd)eiben netgte, ijtuoflP ber fd)onjtcn Corner. 
 
 Sragtq einer gar $u tjodj ben Jtopf, 
 
 (So i|i er roofyi ein eitler £ropf. <Sd)mib. 
 
 6. £>er erjte ©abbatf). 
 
 2>cr fedjate Sag ber Sdjopfung neigte fid) ju feinem Snbe* ©ie (Sonne rjattc 
 ibje 33ab,n soflenbet. 1)cl$ Dunfel bea 9lbenba begann fid) iiber bie jugcnMidje 
 (£rbe $u serbrciten. ©er erjtgeborene ©ofyn ber <5d)bpfung jtanb auf " einent 
 £iigel GEbena, neb en iljm (Eloaf), fein Sdjuijengel unb 33cgtciter. 
 
 (Ea n>arb r immer bunfler unb bunfler ringa urn ben £itget; bie ©d'mmcrung 
 ttanbclte fid)* in 9cad)t, unb serptfete roie ein buftigcr ©djleier bie &tym unb 
 Scaler. — T>k Sieber ber 2>ogeI unb bie frozen Saute ber £b,iere sjerfhimraten, 
 (Scibft* bie fpietenben Sitftd)en u fdjienen cirt'jufc^lurnraern. 
 
 3Baa ijt baa ? fragte ber SWenf^ mit Ieifer ©timrae feinen ^immlifd)en S3e^ 
 gleiter* SSirb bie junge <Sd)opfung aufb.oren unb in it)r altea ?ttd)ta per* 
 finfen ? 
 
 (Eloa^ Iad)elte unb fpradj: (£$ ifl bie $lv%t ber (Srbe. 
 
 • L, 58; b L. 60; c L. 42; d L. 44. 3; « L. 50. 6; f L. 55. 6; * § 51 ; 
 » L. 29. 9; s L. 49. 5; L. 28.6; k L. 41. 3; 1 L. 47. 7 ; m § 116; n L. 
 26. 10; ° L.59. 6; p L 61; q L. 53. 3. Obs.; ■ L. 46. 3. 4; ■ L. 29. 10 
 * L. 29 5; H L. 24. 
 
462 READING LESSONS. 
 
 9cun erfdnenen ttc I)humlifd)cn L'idjtcr: ber 2)conb ging auf unb bag £eer bcr 
 ©tcrne trat foersor in Ijcitercm ©lan-e. 
 
 Dcr ?Wcnfd) fat; aufraartg" gen £immel mtt fu§em ©rfraunen; ber Engef 
 beg £errn aber blicfte mtt SSofctgcfatlen auf b ben entporfdjauenben Softi bcr 
 ©rbe fcernteber-. Die 9tad)t marb [tiller j bie 5?ad)tigaaen fdjlugcn ftarfer unb 
 tonenber. 
 
 eioab beriiljrte ben 5ftcnfdjcn mit feincm <5iafie. £r lagcrte ftd) an bem $fr 
 gel unb fd)lummcrfc. Der erjfe £raum fant ju if)m tjerniebcr. Serial) UU 
 bete i§m bie ©cfafyrtin. c 
 
 9(1^ nun bte$corgenbammerung begann, beriiljrte Sloal) ben ©duummcrnbeu.' 1 
 Sr crmadjte unb fitblte fid) burd)ftromt »on flraft unbSeben. Slug ber Dam* 
 merung crimen fid) bie £iigel unb Skater; bag junge £id)t tarn l)cvnicber unb 
 ppfte auf ben SBellen ber ©trome (Sbcng, bie (Sonne ftieg emfcor unb bxafyt 
 ben Sag. Dcr SKenfd) crblidre bag neuerfd)ajfcne SSeib, bie Gutter ber£ebcn* 
 bigen. — ©taunen unb SSonne crfittlten fcin £crg. 
 
 ©telje! fprad) Sloal) — aug bcr 9M)e roirb bag ©otrlidje gefcoren. ©arum 
 joHjl bu biefen Sag ber 9?uf)e° unb bem ©ijitlidjen ^eiligcn. 
 
 JTrummad)cr. 
 
 7. Sob unb ©d)laf. 
 
 SBriiberlidj umfd)tungen burd)manbclten ber ©ngel beg ©djlummerg unb bcr 
 2'obegengel f bie (Erbe. (£g marbs Slbenb. ©ie lagerten fid) h auf cittern' §u* 
 gel md)t fern toon ben SBotymmgcn bcr j SSJcenfdjen. (Sine rocf/iuutfuge ©tille 
 rMltete ringg umljer; aud) bag 2lbenbgtodd)cn k im fernen Dorflein toertfummre* 
 
 ©till unb fdmxigenb, tine eg if)re SBeife ift, 1 fa£en bie beiben m mobdtliatigctt 
 ©cnien ber 2ftenfd)r;eit in traultcber Umarmung, unb fd)on nafjete bie 9kd)t. 
 
 Da erljob ftd) bcr (Sngel beg ©d)lummerg ton feinem bemoogten Cager, unb 
 ftreuete mit leifcr #anb bie unftd)tbaren ©d)lummerforn!etn. Die Slbenbaunbe 
 trugen fte $u ben fttUcn 2BoI)nungen beg miiben Sanbmanueg. 3?un umftng ber 
 fitjje ©d)laf bie S3emol)ner [ber Ianblid)en £>iitten, »om ®reife, ber n am ©tabe 
 gel)t, big in bem ©augling in bcr SBiege. Der .ftranfe sergap feincr ©d)mer* 
 $en,° ber Srauernbe feineg ihtmmcrg, bie Slrmutb, i^rer ©orgen* Sifter? Slugen 
 fdjloffen ftd). 
 
 3ei?t, nad) sotfenbetem ©cfdjaft, legte ftd) ber n>ol)ltr;atige Sngel beg ©djlttm* 
 merg roieber ju feinem ernfrerenq SSruber* „2Benn bie 5D?orgenrotr)e ermad)t'\ 
 rief ermtt frot)ticf)cr Unfd)ulb, „bann preifen 1- mid) bie StJcenfdjen alg ib.ren Sreunb 
 unb 2Bot)ttt)atcr ! D, meldje fyreube, ungefeljen unb t)etmltcf) rpci^ljut^un! 23ie 
 gtiidtid) ftnb roir unftd)tbarm SBoten beg guten ®eifteg» 2Bte fd)bn unfer fttUer 
 SBeruf!" 
 
 ©o fprad) ber freunblid)e (Sngcl beg ©d)Iummcrg. Sljn fa^ ber Sobegengel 
 mtt flitter SBcb.mut^ an, unb eine £f)rane, rtue bie llnfterbnd)en fte" roeinen, 
 
 * 52. 6; b § 116; e L. 23. 5; J L. 33; • L. 64; { L. 24. 4; * L. 
 46.4; h L. 29. 9; ^.20.3; J § 120; k L. 24. 2; l L. 53; ra L. 65 2; 
 L.39; °L,62.5; p L. 61. 9; q 32. 5; ' L. 33. l.c; • L 41. 7. 
 
READING LESSORS. -lO'or 
 
 txat in fein gn ";•,, bmtfleS SSfage. »%&}," fprad) er, w&ag id) mdu, ftit bu ( tc^ 
 
 frcuctt* farm. SKidj nennt bie Srbe il;rcn geinb uab 
 
 . ! — " ; ,D, meiu SSruber,* crrotebcrte bet Sngel bc-3 @d)lafe*i 
 
 •toirb itutr aud) &eim Srraad)eu b ber ©ute in bir fcinen grcanb unb iBeljltljdier 
 
 . :.r bid) fcgitcn? ©inb toir nidjt SSriibcr, unb £3c-tcn Glue? ? 
 
 Barer* ? " 
 
 er ; ba glanjte ka$ Sluge be3 ScbeSengclS, unb jartltd)cr u 
 p»cb d bie brubcrlid)en ©enien. &rumntad)er. 
 
 ill. QimT$x>im* 
 
 1. £iner cber ber STnbere. 
 
 Bur Beit £einridj3 IV., £6nig3 ton granfreidji ritt einmal ein SBauerleui 
 
 sen }■:'.- nad) 3>ari^. 9iid)t me|r toeii sen bcr otabt fcegegnctc er 
 
 :itcr. e So war ber iunig. ©cut ©cfclgc lt>ar f abfiuulid) 
 
 in etui; tung gebtiebcu. »SBo$et fcco 8Beg3, raein gteunb ? §afci 3$r 
 
 ©efdjdfte yi 3>ari3?« 
 
 »3a,« ftttttoorreie bcr Saner; »aud) modjte id) gem eitunat uitfcrn gitten 
 fionig feSen, ber- fein ©off fo $arilid) tiefct.* 
 
 S)er fientg ldd>eltc unb fagte: »2>ap fann £u<§ Stat$ roerben." 
 
 ,-5Tbcr n'cnn id) nur rciifjte, ttetdjer eS ifi unter ben sielen $ijfungett, son 
 benen cr umgeben fein roivb." & 
 
 ,,X:.i jotfi idj end) fagen : Sfyr bur ft nur 2M)tung gefcett, ttetdjcr ben 11 £ut 
 cuf bem Jfopfe befyalten nnrb, ttann aHe Sinbern fid) c^rerbtettg toerben entblopt 
 fafeen." 
 
 SHfo Titten fie init einanber in §)ari-3 ^inein, unb jttxw ba$ SauerUitt oaf 
 ber rcduen ©eite be$ &i>mgd ; benn »a3 bie licbe Einfatt, e3 fei' mit Sffcjidjt 
 obex curd) 3ufaKi Ungcfd)icftccj t^un fann, bad tt)ut fie. £>er Sauer gab bem 
 Jloxig auf afle feme gragen gefprddjtge Suttwrrt. Sr er§d$ue it)iu 3£and)e3 
 iibcr ben ^etb&aUi auo feiner ^aucfyaltung unb nne er jutweilen beS ©ountftgS 
 and) fein £ub>. iu bem Scpfe ^aoe, unb raerfte lange nid)tv. %U er a&er fa§, 
 nrie afle genjter fid) bfmeten unb aHe ©trapen fid) mit 5?tenfd)en anfulltcn, line 
 Sebermann e^rcrbietig k au^ixui^ ba ging i^m ein £id;t auf. „£}?ein §:nv" 
 fagte er ju feinem unbefannten SBcgleiter, ben er mit 5tengftlid)feit unb 35ern>un« 
 berung anfd)autc, w enttoeber feib 3^r ber Jftittig ober id) bin 1 5 ; benn tt>tr briK 
 |a^cn aHein ned) ben ^ut auf bem &?tfe." 
 
 ^a Iad)elte ber SSttig unb fagte: „Sd) bin 1 c, /;m SSamt SI)r Sucr Otopteui 
 in ben ©tail gejlellt unb (£uer ©ef^dft befcrgt K^bt, fo fommt ju mir auf ir.etn 
 2^::"; id) tpitt Sud) bann mit einer SHittttg^fuppe cufroarten unb 6ud) ben 
 ©aur^in jeigtu. So^atm ^auT £cM. 
 
 * L. 62 ; b L. 49. 4 ; c L. 1G 4; d L. 29. 6 ; e L. 64. 6 ; f L. 48. 2 ; * L, 
 58. 2; h L. 42. h; * 55. 1. 3; L. 14. 6; k L. 34. 7; J L. 70; m L. 28. 8. 
 
464 READING LESSONS. 
 
 2. ©#erj unb ( £rnjl 
 
 SBntyrenb* eined ©eturgdmarfd)cd im b jle&eitjctyrigm 5Triege, gtnn c Sriebrid; 
 ber ©rope einmal, ungebulbig iibcr bad langfame & l orruefen bed ©efd)ii£cd, 
 burd) benSngroeg jn ^u0e bergan; mit Ujnt bei ©cneraHieutencutt ©raf Bfymtt? 
 tan. SBdtyrenb biefed serbriejjlidjen ©anged rbanbelte ben ftijnig, um d fid) bie 
 Sangeroeilc ju wtreiben, bte Cufi an, ben ©rafen, einen fel;r religiofen SSlarm, 
 ein roenig ju necfen. Sr erfunbigtc fid) e nad) beffen 1 SBeid;t»aier in 33erlin, ob 
 fid) bcrfelbe nod) rooljl befinbe unb liep einem ©trom son <Sd)erjreben unb 
 Bf atrereien freien Sauf. 
 
 „(£ro,& 2JfojejMt finb »ict roitpiger, aid id), unb and) feljr siel gelefyrter," 
 erroieberte ©cfymettau, aid er enblid) einmal ju 28orte fommen fonnte. nUtbtr* 
 bied," fugle er tyinju, „finb ©ie and) metn itbmg ! ©er geifiige .ftampf ijl alfo 
 j»ifd)cn 3f)nen unb mtr in jeber 9tud'fid)t ungleid). ©ennod) fomtefa <Sic mil 
 meinen ©lauBen nid)t neljmen. Unb geld'nge h ed and) ; nun! fo fatten Sie mir 
 jroar unermeplid) gefdjabet, after jugleidj bod) and) ftd) felbcr nid)t unbebeutenb 
 mit." 
 
 ©er $onig Miefc fle^en 1 unb mad)te Sronte gegen ©djmettau, bad SMifcenj 
 bed k Unroittend in ben md'd)tigen Slugen. — „33ad foil bad Ijeiflen SKonjieur 
 <5d)mettau? fagte er. „3d) follte mir fjjaben, roenn id) ifym 1 feinen ©lauben 
 ndtynte? 23ie meint cr m bad? 
 
 SWit unerfdjittterlickr 9cul)e entgegnete ber ©eneral : „£ro. SDfaiejMt glaufien 
 jejpt eincn guten Officer an mir iu Ijaben, unb id) Ijoffe <Ste irren nicbt. jlonn* 
 ten <Sie mir aber meinen ©lauben nefymen, ba fatten Bit ein erbdrmlidjed ©ing 
 an mir — ein SRofyr im SSMnbe, roorauf nid)t ber minbefte SJerlajj ware, roeber 
 fcei 9Beratl)fd)lagungen, nod) in ber <5d)Iad)t." 
 
 ©er $onig fdjmicg unb ging eine Bcitlang im flitren Sftadjbenfen roeiter, 
 ©ann fagte er mit freunblid)er ©timme : »<3agc er mir bod) <3d)mettau, road ijl 
 eigentlid) fcin m ©laube ? " 
 
 z,3d) glauoe," fagte ©djmettau freubtg, „an gottlid)e iBorfefwng, bte jebeS 
 £aar auf meinem £aupte jdljlt ; an bie gottlid)e (Erlbfung oon alien meinen 
 (Jimben, unb an ein eroig feliged Sekn nad) bcm k £obe." 
 
 „T>a$ gtauBt tl)r° roirlltdj?" fagte ber $bnig, „bad glauSt er fo rerljt mit 
 Setter 3u»erftdjt?" 
 
 „3a, roalnljaftig, ®io« SOtaiejiaV 
 
 ©er .ffonig fapte Beroegt <Sd)mettau 1 d £anb, britcfte fte p i^m r jrarf unb 
 fagte : „<£r ijl ein glucfltdjer SJcenfd)!" ©ann ging er nad)bcnfenb roeiter, unb 
 Itie, feit jencr <3tunbe, fyat er <od)mettau 1 d religiofe Slnfid)ten tierfpottet* 
 
 » L. 60; b 20. 4; c L. 53. 5; d L.49. 5; e L. 29. 9; f L. 44.3; « L. 27. 
 3. note; h L. 55. 6; i L. 49; J L. 49. 4; k L. 42; l L. 64; m L. 27. 4; 
 » L. 28. 6; ° L. 27. 3. Obs.; p L. 28. 5; q L. 41. 4 b. ; r § ]2a 3. 
 
READING LESSONS. 4.6ii 
 
 1. £>ie einjige Slrt, feme* $reil)eit ju beljaupten, be|M)t bavin, me ttwad 
 SXuverc^ ju mollen, aid man foil j bann barf man tfyun, load man will. 
 
 2Jcutfd)eIIe. 
 
 2. Gin anted ©croiffen ifl bcffer aid jmet Seugcn. (£d »er$er}rt ©ctnen 
 Summer, mie bie ©onne bad ©id. ©d i|l etn 33runnen, roenn £)id) b biirjtet, 
 fin ©tab, wenn £u ftnfefi, ein <5d)irm, roenn ©id) bie ©onne ftid)t, ein fftvity* 
 fijfcuim 3'obe. £ippel. 
 
 3. tfleine greuben laben, roie £audbrob, immcr cijne Qsfcl; grope 8 wit 
 Bucferbrob, jeitig mit (Sfel. 9Ud)ter. 
 
 4. 2>er Srieb bed ©cmiJTcnd, unb bie innerlidje @djamt)aftigfeit »or bent 
 ®ofen finb bie ©djufcengcl b^ ®uten. d DIjne ©cmutl) tji ber Sccnfd) eine 
 twige £itgc. ©ellert. 
 
 5. $urd)te bie Einfamfcit nidjt. <5ic iftljarmlod roie ber rente Sftonbfdjein, 
 beffen 6 ©tl&erjireifen im spalajre bed ©ottlofcn $8Hifd>e ©efpenfier, unb in ber 
 §iute bed Srommen fpielenbe Gngel bed £tmmeld abbilben. SSagner. 
 
 6. 9Hntm mit Sr)rfurd)t bie SMbcI in bie |>anb, benn fie ent^d'It ©otted 
 SBort. SBiffe, bie f feincn Stirrer fatten auf bem gefa^rvotlen SBege bt^ 2e* 
 Bend, bie fcinen Urojr fatten in bitterer 9? on), unb feinen Seifranb in il)rer let/* 
 ten Stunbe, benen f mar bie 23ibel $in)rer, Srojr unb 33ei|lanb. <3icbe, bie 
 SBibcl ift eine Clutter, roelcfye alle glauMgen 5?inber ndljret unb jriltct, tnd fie 
 errcid)cu bad rcifcre * Sitter einer l)6f;eren * SBelt. £>armd. 
 
 7* ©fe ©u ein ©efdjdft unternimmfr, fceraSfaume nie f - £>eir.j gar^e @*ele 
 ju ©ott, bem Urquefl ailed ©uten, inbrihtftig ' $u erf)el>cn, unb i*:t usi Scifi&Jtb 
 unb urn ©tarhma, Deiner eignen fdjroadjen itrdfte bemun)ig * anjufie*;v:n* 
 
 (Eampe* 
 
 8. SBenn ©it auf bie ©djauMljne j bt^> gefdjdftigen Cebend trittfr, fj> k 
 wolle nid)t gldnjen, fonbern nittjen unb gludltdj fein. Sampe. 
 
 9. <Dte itunft ifr Iang, bad Seben furs, bad Urn)eil fdjwierig, bie ©elege*« 
 fyit fliid)tig. ©on)e. 
 
 10. -SieleS l roimfd)t ftdj ber Sftenfd), unb bod) Bebarf er nur wentg; 
 
 <Denn bie £age finb furs, unb IJefdjrdnft ber ©terblidjen m ©djicffal. 
 
 ®on)e. 
 
 11. (£ind red)t roiJTen unb auditBen grbt ^ere 23ilbung aid ^alb^eit im 
 ^unbertfaltigen. ©ot^e. 
 
 » L. 19. 2; b L. 57. 2; • L. 10. 3; d L. 33; • L. 39. 3; { L. 40. 6; rL 
 32. 5; h L. 53. 8; i L. 34. *; j § 116; k L. 53. 2; J L. 65 ; m L. 61. 9- 
 
46G READING LESSONS. 
 
 12. £>er Sfurcfjtfame erfdjretft »or ber ©efafyr, bcr tJeigc in ityr,* ber 2ftu=* 
 tl;ige nadj ifyr* 9Ud)tcr. 
 
 13. 23tr tyabei; Sllle fdjon geroeint. jeber ©tiidlidje etnmat »or SBet), icbcr 
 Uoalucflidje einmal »or Sufi. Oiicfytcr. 
 
 14. Styrfurdjt befie^tt tie Sugenb au&) b tm Settlerfieib* ©filler* 
 
 15. 333er c auf bcr <£rbe otyne SSeflimmung lebt, glcid)t einem @d)tffc, J auf 
 iem iroefnen £anbe; unb roer nid)t in bag grope SRab ber 9ftenfd)I)eit eingrcift, 
 ber gleid)t ben jtnnernen £afd)enul)ren ber $inber, Me roo^l 3eiger unb Sijfet" 
 blatter, aber feine medjanifdjen ©ingeroeibe tjaben. £effing* 
 
 16. 3ur Srroerbung eineS ©littfeS gc^ort %lti$ unb ®el>ulb, unb jur £r- 
 Jjaltung beffelben e gefyort Sftdjngung unb 3Sorffd)t. Sangfam unb ©djrttt fur 
 ©djrttt fteigt man etne Sreppe t)tnauf; aber in einem Slugenbltife fa lit man 
 l)inab unb bringt 2Bunbcn unb ©d)merj genug mit auf bie (Srbe. £>ebet. 
 
 17. ©o f getpip ber ©fatten bem £id)te folgt, d fo geroip folgt bie Xljat 
 bem SGBitten, roenn er * nur rein tft* Sortie* 
 
 18. Senu Du mit ©einen ©efdlligfeiten roartefl, bis ©id) ber ftreunb an* 
 fprid)t. fo erniebrigfi £>u bie ©efaEigfett sum Sllmofen nnb beinen grcunb 
 jum» Settler* StUift. 
 
 19. 3m Ungtutfe erfd)eint bie Sugenb in iljrem tyetfjlen ©lanjc. Sftan 
 fonnte fagen, ba$ fie SleljnlidjeS mit ben roitrjreid)en 95 flans en r)abe, bie man 
 britdEt, um h i^r iDoljlriedjenben Salfam abjugennnnen* £topjlocf. 
 
 20* STufmerffdmfeit auf unfere einjelnen £>anblungen fdjiitpt una »or Jtcbcr* 
 eilung. »or 9cadjjid)t gegen unfere SSegierben, s>or ®leid)gultigr"eit gegen unfere 
 Seller. SMelanb, 
 
 21. Urn fftvfyt an einem fernen, freunblidjen ©eflabe ju finben, mup ber 
 ©differ erfi einen $ampf mit ben emporten 2Bogen bejletjen. SSiirfert* 
 
 22. SCcandje §)fian$e fannnur auf einer anbern befrel)en unb fid) ert)alteru 
 ©o manner Sftenfd)* SlUun ertyalt er fid) nidjt, burd) anbere nur bejrebt er. 
 
 2Burfert* 
 
 23. S5ieXe tfenntniffe madjen einen S^eil ber Sebadjtfamfeit unnotljig. 
 
 9£einicfe« 
 
 24. £>a3 unfefytbarfte Sftittel fldjStebe jit erroerben, ijr ©efdtligfeit. * 
 
 2P clanb. 
 
 25* T)k 0teligion ijl ba3 leijte 3iel\ rootyin alle unfere ©ebanfen unb £anb* 
 (ungen geljen miiffen. 2Ber bie3 nod) nidjt gelernt l)at, ber rocij? md)ts, ber 
 fennt roeber fid) felbjU nod) ©ott, unb tft feiner' etgentlid)en ©liidfeligfeit 
 fd^ig* ^lopflocf. 
 
 • L. 28. 5 ; b L. 69. 5; c L. 40 ; d L. 64. ,\ ; • 41. 4; f L. 69. 3 ; «L 
 42./; h L. 49. 5; ' L. 61; j L. 29. 4, 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 467 
 
 26. ©or alien ©btgen wa$e iioer ©id), bag £>a nie bte inncre 3uvcrftd)t 
 |u 2>ir fel&cr, * bag ©ertrauen auf ©ott unb gutc 2ftcnfdjcn scrlicrji ! ©ofcatb b 
 2)etn ©efd^rte ober@eWe auf Seiner ©tint 2flifjmut§ unb ©erjtorijlutta. liefl 
 — fo ill Stfleg aug. <Se$r oft aocr iff man im Unglitc! ungcredjt geg n bte 5)ten* 
 fd)en. Sebe Heine oofe Saune, iebe ftetnc Sfticne von flalte bcutct man auf fid); 
 man meint, jeber fc^c * eg uug an, bay »t* tciben, unb rocidje c von ber SJttte 
 juriitf, bie wiv tym tijun fonnten. ^nigge. 
 
 e ID i <$ $ £< 
 
 1. 2TiaiIieb. 
 
 SBie ^errlid) Icudjtet 
 2)iir bie ^atur! 
 
 SBic gldnjt bie ©ennci 
 Sieladjt bie Slur! 
 
 (£g bringen bie Sliifycn 
 Slug jebem 3wcig, 
 
 Unb iaufenb ©ttmmcit 
 S(u3 bent ©c|Mud). 
 
 Unb greub 1 unb 2Bonne 
 2Tu3 jeber SSruft. 
 
 D (Srb 1 unb Sonne, 
 D ©(tic! unb Sttjt 
 
 2. ©ie £f)ettung ber (Erbe. 
 
 Sftcljmt f)in bie SEScIt! rief S«t3 von feinen £6f)cn 
 ©en SWcnfdjen ju, neljmt, fie d foil eucr fcitt. 
 
 (£ufy fd)enf 1 id) fte jum* (Srb 1 unb em'geu Oetjen; 
 £)od) tljeilt cud) oritbcrltd) barein. f 
 
 ©a eilt, wag £d'nbe fyat, fidj einsuridjten, 
 (£g * regte fid) gefdjafttg Sung unb 3Ht. 
 
 £>cr SIcfergmann griff nad) beg gclbcg Sriidjten 
 £>er Sunfcr fcirfdjie burd) ben 23alb. 
 
 £>er $ aufmann nimmt tvag feine ©peidjer faffen, fc 
 ®er SXbt wdtytt ftd) ben ebeln gtrnettetiL 
 
 2)er ^onig fpcrrt bie SSriiden unb bie ©trapeit* 
 Unb fprid)t : ber 3e§ente • ifr mein. 
 
 ©an$ fpdt, nad)bem bie S^eitung langft gcfd)e$cit,j 
 3£a§t ber $oer, er fam aug tveiter gem 1 . 
 
 Sid)! ba war iiberall nidjtg meljr ju feljen, k 
 Unb aUcg ijatte feinen £errn ! 
 
 ©ot$e. 
 
 • L. *3. 3 ; b L. 09. 3. note; « L. 55. 6. ; d L. 28. 5 ; • 42. j. ; f L. 28 
 6; * L 28. 9; h L. 38. c; * § 45. 2; i L. 40. 8; k L. 49 6, 
 
468 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 SBeV mir ! fo fott benn id) attein son Sltfen 
 
 Skrgeffen fein, tcr) beirt getreu 1 jter <5tfyn? 
 ®o liejj er laut ber itiage 9ft uf ■ erfdjaflen, 
 
 Unb roarf ftd) f)in »or 3o»i3 £$ron» 
 
 SBenn bu im Sanb ber £rd'ume bid) tterroeilei, k 
 
 23erj"e§t ber ©ott, fo fyab 1 re nidjt mit mir,. 
 2Bo roarjl bu benn, aU man bie SBelt getfyeilet? k 
 
 3d) roar, fprad) ber $oet bei Mr. 
 
 2flein Siuge tying an beinem SIngefidjte, 
 
 3ln beine§ QimmtH £armonie mein Dfir; 
 Bcrjeii) 1 bent ©eifte, ber son beinem 2id)te 
 
 33eraufd)t, ba% 3rbifd)e d serlor! 6 
 
 2Ba3 tfmn? r fprid)t 3eu$ — bie SBett ifr roeggegeben, 
 £)cr £erbjt, bie 3agb, ber Wlaxtt ijr ni(f)t me^r f mein* 
 
 23 i lift bu in meinem £>immel mit mir leben, 
 (So off bu fommfr, er h foil bir offen fein. 
 
 ©differ 
 
 3. $offnung. 
 
 S3" reben unb traumen bie J 3J?enftfjen aid 
 
 23on beffcrn fitnftigen £agen; 
 5ftad) einem gliitf lidjen, golbenen Qid 
 
 ©iel)t man k fie rcnncn unb jagen. 
 2)ie 2Belt roirb ait unb roirb roiebcr jung, 
 2)od) ber Sftenfd) tyojft immer $erbefferung» 
 
 Die £offnung fiityrt * ityn in 1 3 m Seben ein, 1 
 
 Sie umflattert ben frbf)lid)en ^naben. 
 2)en Sungling Iodt f it)r 3auberfd)ein, B 
 
 (Bit roirb • mit bem ©rei3 ntdjt begraben ; 
 £)cnn befd)Hejjjt er im ©rabe ben miiben £auf, 
 $lod) am ©rabe pfianjt er — bie £offmmg auf. 
 
 (£6 ifi fcin Iccrer, fdjmeidjelnber SBatyn, 
 
 ©rjeugt im ®el)trne bed Srjoren. 
 3m £crjcn fihtbet e$ laut fid) an : 
 
 3u roa3 r ©efferent ftnb roir geboren. 
 Unb raa3 q Die innere <Stimme fpridjr, 
 2)a3q taufd)t bie ijoifenbe <3ccle nidjt. 
 
 ©filler* 
 
 * L. 61. 9; b L. 40. 8 ; c L. 64 b. ; d L. 33. 2; • L. 38. 2; f L 
 34. 10; * L. 69. 3; h L. 28. 5; * L. 28. 9; J L. 42; k L. 19; » L 
 61. 4; m L. 20. 4; n L.53. 5; ° L. 58; p I.. ]8; ql«. 40. 1. 3; r 49. 6. 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 4. 2>a8 2fmen ber £?ieine. 
 
 ©en 5IIter bltnb, fufjr 23eba bennod) fort 
 3u prebigen bic rteue frot)e S3otfcf>aft» 
 $on Stabt $u <5tabt, Pon 2)orf ju 2)orf iraETte 
 Sfn feinev ^iit)rer^ §anb ber fromme ©rei3 
 Unb prebigte b.i3 2Bori mi: SimglingSfeuer.' 
 
 (£in)l leitef tfjn fctrt $nabe in etn tyaX,* 
 2)a3 tikrfat 1 roar mit geroalfgen ©teinen. 
 £ctd)tftmug mefjr, at* bo6b)aft, fprad) ber $nabc : 
 w (£r>rn)urb 1 ger iSatcr, stele 9)?enfd)en prtb 
 Stferfaminelt Ijier unb loarten auf bie $rebigt." 
 
 ©er blinbe ©rei3 er^ub ftd) c alfobalb, 
 23dr)tt' eiuen £ert, erflart 1 if)n, voanbt 1 i§n an, 
 (£mar)nte, roarnte, frrafte, trojxete 
 ©o ber^iid), bag bie £I)ranen mitbigtid) 
 S^)m d nieberftoiTcn in ben grauen SSart. 
 2113 cr befdjUefjenb braitf bad ©arerunfer, 
 2Bie ftcb/S gejtemt» a gebetet unb gefprod)cn: f 
 *£)ein ifi bai 9?etd> unb Dein bie flraft unb Dein 
 £)ie £erriid)feit &t3 in bie Grotgfeiten," — 
 £>a riefen ring3 im Sijat sicl taufenb Stimmen : 
 Strnen, efyrroiirbtger SJatcr, Slmen, SImen ! 
 
 <Der $nab 1 erfd)raf ; rcunutrr)ig fniet er nicber 
 Unb beid)tete bem £eiligen bie ©iinbe. 
 .,<Ser/n," fprad) ber ©reU, „b/a jr 2)tt benn nid)t getefen : 
 SBenn Sftenfcfyen fd)roetgen, vocrben <3teine fdiret'n ? — 
 9?id)t fpotte fimftig, ©ofjn, mit ©otte3 SBort! 
 Sebenbig tjl e<3, fraftig, [d)neibet fd)arf, 
 Sffiie ein $roeifd)neibig <5d)roert. llnb foUte gteid) 
 2)a3 ?D?enfd;enr)er5 fid) ifym jum £ro|3 perjteinern, 
 ©o rotrb im <3tein cin ^cnfdjenfyerj ftd) regen." 
 
 46d 
 
 $ofegarten. 
 
 6. £)ie SBorte beS ©Unbend 
 
 £>rei SBcrte nenn 1 id) eud), inljaltfdjroer, & 
 (5ie geljen son Sftunbe ju 9ttunbe, 
 
 2)odj ftantinen fte rttcf)t Pon au£en t)er ; 
 Da3 £er$ nur giebt bason Jlunbe. 
 
 £em 2>knfd)en tjl after 2Bertt) geraubr, h 
 
 9Benn er nidjt meljr 4 an bie brei 2Dorte glaubt. 
 
 »L. 24. 4; b L. 20. 3; c L. 29. 9; d § 129; • L. 57. 6; ' L. 40 
 ; * L. 24. 7; h L. 64. 1; { L. 34. 10. 
 
470 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 £)cr Sftenfd) tft fret gefdjaffen, tft fret/ 
 Unb roitrb 1 * er in ^Tetten geooren. 
 
 2a§t cud) uid)t irren beS 3>3&el$ ©efdjret, 
 9?id)t ben CSJUpraud) rafenber b Sloven! 
 
 ©or bem @elat>en, roenn er bte $ette oridjt, 
 
 ©or bem freien Sftenfdjen erjittert nidjt ! 
 
 Unb bte £ugenb, fte c tft fein leerer tSdjafl, 
 2)er Sftenfd) fann fte d itoen int Seoen ; 
 
 Unb follt er and) e flraudjeln ukratf, 
 (£r fann nad) ber gottlidjen flrecen, 
 
 Unb roaS fein ©erftanb ber 2>erjlanbigen f ftefcti 
 
 £)a$ iioet& in ©infalt ein finblid) ©emitter 
 
 Unb ein ©ott ijl, cin tyeitiger SBilfe leot, 
 2Bte and) ber menfdjUdje roanfe ; h 
 
 &od) it&er ber 3ett unb bem Staume roefct 
 £cf>enbig ber I)5d)|1e ©ebanfe, 
 
 Unb od SltfeS in erotgem 2Bcd)fcl freift, 
 
 (£<3' fce^arret im SBedjfel ein rugger ©eijl. 
 
 ©ie brei SCBorte kroatyret j end), tnr)altfc^r»er, 
 ©te pffanjetj son 9ftuube ju 9ftunbe, 
 
 Unb ftammen fte gtetd) nidjt son au$tn T)er, 
 (£uer Snn'reS gieot bason $unbe. 
 
 2)em Sftenfdjen if! nimmer fein SBertfj gerauot, 
 
 ©o k lang er nod) an bte brei SCBorte glaubt. 
 
 S#tHer« 
 
 7« ©cfunben. 
 
 3d) ging im SBatbe 
 (So fitr mii^ f)in, 
 
 Unb mdt>tsS ju fudjen, 
 2)a3 roar mein <Simt. 
 
 3m ©fatten fa§ 1 id) 
 (Sin S3Iitmd)en frefjn, 
 
 Sie (Sterne teud)tenb, 
 2Bie Sleuglein fd)on. 
 
 3d) rooflt 1 e$ fcredjen, 
 2)a fagt e$ fein : 
 
 (Soft idj jum Selfen 
 ©ekodjen fein ? 
 
 3d) gruo 1 3 mit alien 
 ©en SBiirjIein auS, 
 
 Sum ©arten trug id) 1 $ 
 %m Mfcfdjen $au3, 
 
 Unb pflanjt eS roiebet 
 21m frirten Drt j 
 
 9Zun jroeigt e$ immer 
 Unb Hit^t fo fort* 
 
 • L. 56. 2; b L. 32. 9; • L. 28. 12 ; *L 28. 5; • L. G9. 5; f I* 
 33; • L. 53. 5; h L. 55. a. ; > L. 28. 9; J L. 50. 5; k L. 69. 3. note. 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 "OR THE EXERCISES AND READING LESSONS. 
 
 
 ABBKEVIATIOFS. 
 
 adj. 
 
 adjective. 
 
 pi. 
 
 plural. 
 
 adv. 
 
 adverb. 
 
 prep. 
 
 prepositi on. 
 
 art. 
 
 article. 
 
 prn. 
 
 pronoun. 
 
 c. or conj 
 
 . conjunction. 
 
 v. a. 
 
 active verb. 
 
 cornp. 
 
 comparative. 
 
 v. a. & n. 
 
 active and neuter verb. 
 
 /■ 
 
 feminine gender. 
 
 v. av.x. 
 
 auxiliary verb. 
 
 imp. 
 
 imperfect tense. 
 
 v. imp. 
 
 impersonal verb. 
 
 int. 
 
 interjection. 
 
 v. ir. 
 
 irregular verb. 
 
 rru 
 
 masculine gender. 
 
 v. n. 
 
 neuter verb. 
 
 n. 
 
 neuter gender. 
 
 v. r. 
 
 reflexive verb. 
 
 V- 
 
 participle. 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 2Tal, m. -c3, pi. -c, eel. 
 
 SIbbtlben, v. a. to portray, represent. 
 
 Slbcnb, m. -%, pi. -c, evening, eve, 
 west ; -ctfecfcbcn , n. -4, pi. -, 
 vesper-bell, evening-bell; -rotI> 
 n., -vetfye, /. evening-red, even- 
 ing-sky; -roinb, m. ~-t&, -£-, pi. -e, 
 evening-wind, zephyr. 
 
 STber, conj. but, however. 
 
 Sfberntal or ahxnute , adv. again, 
 once more, anew. 
 
 STbfafjrcn, see fifjren, p. 348, v. n. ir. 
 to set off, set out, depart. 
 
 Slbgeannnen, v. a. ir., to win from, 
 gain. 
 
 SIbfommen, v. n. Ir., to come off, de- 
 viate, lose. 
 
 STbmatten, v. a. to harass, weary. 
 
 Slbpfiiicfen, v. a. to pluck off, gather. 
 
 Slbreifen, to depart, set out. 
 
 Slbfagen, to countermand, refuse, 
 decline, renounce. 
 
 )rei'ben, see fd)reiben, p. 354; v. 
 a. ir., to cc py, transcribe 
 
 2Ibftd)t, /. -, pi. -en, view, inten- 
 tion. 
 
 Stbftdjlltd), adj. designed, purposely 
 (see L. 34. 7). 
 
 2lb|tctgcn, see jleto.cn, p. 356; v. ir. 
 n., to descend, dismount, put up. 
 
 SIM, m. -ii,pl. Stcbic, abbot. 
 
 Sfbivebjcn, v. a. to keep off, ward off. 
 
 5(d)! int. ah! 0! oh! alas! 
 
 %&)\z, f. -, pi. -It, axle, axis. 
 
 3Td)t, eight, 
 
 %&)t,f. -, care, attention, outlawry; 
 iit $d)t ncljmcit, to take care. 
 
 2Td)tct, n. -3, pi. -, eighth. 
 
 &d}ten, v. a. to regard, attend to. 
 value, deem, esteem, take for. 
 
 -Sldjumo., /. -, esteem, respect, esti- 
 mation, regard, attention. 
 
 2ld)^cf)n, eighteen. 
 
 %dv:, in. -o, pi. Slecfer, field, acre. 
 
 Stcferdmcmn, m. -c<3, pi. -leute, 1ms 
 bandmau, tiller. 
 
 SIblev, m. -i, pi. -, eagle. 
 
 Slbolpf), m. Adolphus. 
 
 2(ed)t, adj. genuine, authentic. 
 
 Slefjrtltdj, adj. like, similar. 
 
4T2 
 
 «^— Sin! 
 
 2fol— 2lrm 
 
 STetyre, /. -, pi. -it, ear (of grain). 
 
 Slengftlicfyfett, /. -, anxiety, unea- 
 siness. 
 
 Sftbcrn, adj. silly, foolish. 
 
 STlbredji, m. Albert. 
 
 Slttein, adv. alone, only; c. but. 
 
 SHfer, all (L. 65. 11), every. 
 
 Slllerbejr, best of all, very best. 
 
 SIficrlet, adj. various, of all sorts. 
 
 SKbndljUg, by degrees, gradually. 
 
 Slttglt, adv. too, too much, over, 
 
 SUmofcn, to. ~g, pZ. -, alms charity. 
 
 SHg, co7y. than, but, when, a?, like, 
 except, besides, namely, atg 
 eben, just as. 
 
 Sllfo, adv. thus, so; c. therefore. 
 
 Sllfo balb, immediately, directly. 
 
 Silt, ac?/. old, ancient, aged. 
 
 Sllter, w. -g, pi.-, age, old age. 
 
 Slmbop, m. -eg, j»Z. -e, anvil. 
 
 Slmen, m£. amen. 
 
 SIme'rtfa, -g, America. 
 
 SlmertrVner, in. -g, p?. -, American. 
 
 Stmt, to. —eg, pi. Slemter, charge, of- 
 fice, employment, business. 
 
 Sin, prep, in, at, on, by, to, unto, 
 with, up, about, against. 
 
 SInbcr (ber, Die, bag Slnbere), adj. sec- 
 ond, other. (L. 65.) 
 
 SInbcrgy adv. otherwise, differently. 
 
 2inberit)atb, adj. one and a half. 
 
 Slaeibo'tc, /. -, pi. -n, anecdote. 
 
 Stnfangen, see fangen, p. 348; v. ir. 
 a. & ii., to begin, act, open, do. 
 (L. 51. 4.) 
 
 Slnfleljen, v. a. to implore, entreat. 
 
 Slnfuiien, v. a. to fill up. 
 
 Shigefyoren, v. to. to belong. 
 
 Slngel, /. -, pi. -n, fishing-hook, 
 angle. 
 
 Slngenefmt, adj. agreeable, pleasant. 
 
 Singeftd)t, to. -eg, -g, pi. -er, face, 
 countenance. 
 
 Slnfyaltenb, adj. constant. 
 
 Slnl)angen, see fyangen, p. 350; v. ir. 
 to., to be attached to. adhere to. 
 
 SMer, m. -g, pi. -, anchor. 
 
 Slnflagen, v. a. to accuse. 
 
 Slnfommen, see fommen, p. 350 ; v. ir. 
 to., to arrive; - <tuf, to depend 
 upon. 
 
 Slnhutbcn, anfimbtgen, v. a. to pro- 
 claim, announce, declare, publish. 
 
 Slnhmft,/. -, arrival. 
 
 SfnUtngcn, v. to. to arrive, come at. 
 
 STnfdjauen, v. a. to look at, regard. 
 
 Slnj*cl)itlbtgen, v. a. to charge with, 
 accuse of. 
 
 STnfcijen, sec feljen, p. 354; v. ir. a., 
 to look at, behold, view. 
 
 Slnfefjnltd), adj. considerable, import- 
 ant, of consequence. (L. 34. 7.) 
 
 9tn[tcl)t, /. -, pi. -en, sight, view, 
 opinion, prospect. 
 
 Slnfprcdjen, v. a. ir., to accost, ad 
 dress, speak to, beg, ask. 
 
 Slttfyrud), m. -eg, pi -fpriicfye, claim, 
 demand; in -nefymen, to call for, 
 claim, request. 
 
 SlnjMr, /. -, pi. -en, preparation, 
 institution; SlnjMtcn or Slnfiall 
 madjen, to make preparations, 
 prepare. 
 
 Slnfranb, in. —eg, gracefulness, sta- 
 tion, stand, behavior. 
 
 Slnftatt, prep, instead of, in lieu. 
 
 Slnftvengenb, adj. toilsome. 
 
 Slntrocrt, /. -, pi. - en, answer. 
 
 SlnttDorten, v. a. to answer. 
 
 Slnsertrauen, v. a. to intrust to, 
 confide to. 
 
 Slnwanbeln, v. n. to come upon. (£g 
 ttmnbclte itm bte Suft an, the desire 
 came upon him ("he took a fan- 
 cy," "he took it into his head.") 
 
 Slmi)enben, v. a. to apply, employ, 
 make use of, apply to. 
 
 Stnwefenb, adj. & p. present, thos€ 
 present. 
 
 Sln-,kf)en, see jiefjen , p. 358 ; v. ir. a, 
 to draw, put on, attract, interest. 
 
 Sip f el, m. -3, pi. Slepfet, apple. 
 
 Slpfelbaum, m. -eg, -g, pi. -bdume, 
 apple-tree. 
 
 SlpritVfe,/. -,pl. -n apricot. 
 
 SIprifofenbaum, m. -eg, -g, pi. -Ban* 
 me, apricot-tree. 
 
 SIpril', m. -g, April. 
 
 Sir be it,/. -, pi. -en, work, labor. 
 
 SIrbetten, v. to., to work, labor. 
 
 Sir better, m. -g, pi. -, workman, "la* 
 borer. 
 
 SIrg , adj. bad, "w icked. 
 
 Slrm, adj. poor, indigent. 
 
 Slrm, in. -eg, pi. -e, arm. 
 
 Slrmee',/. -, pi. -n, army. 
 
 Slermel , m. -g, pi. -, sleeve, 
 
 SIrmutfy, /. -, poverty. 
 
Hrt— 2fo3 
 
 2fo3— 33au 
 
 173 
 
 SSTrt, / -, pi. -er* species, kind, na- 
 ture, quality, propj'iety, way. 
 
 Slrttg a-ij. polite agreeable. 
 
 -5hU/ 1.1. -ed. jw/. Sierjte, physician, 
 doctor. 
 
 5l[d)i,/. ashes. 
 
 8tlap, to. -ffcvf p?. ffc, satin. 
 
 Sftmofpfyd're, /. -, atmosphere. 
 
 Slucb, cow/ also, too, even. 
 
 vl;;f, pr«p. on, upon, in, at, to tip; 
 -einmal, at once, all at once; 
 |, in order that. 
 . :.lt, in. -Co, stay, sojourn, 
 delay. 
 
 2ii.fr evCcrn, v. a. to summon, chal- 
 lenge, ask, invite. 
 
 Sfnfgabe , /. -, pi. -n, exercise. 
 
 Shifaefrcn, see ge^en, p. 348. v. ir. n. 
 to rise, open, see &idjt. 
 
 SdifKitten, v. a. ir. to stop, hinder, 
 detain. 
 
 Sfnffroren, v. n. to cease, end. 
 
 Stufmerffam, adj. attentive. 
 
 Sfofmcrf famfeit , /. -,pl. -en, atten- 
 tion. 
 
 STufpffanjett, v. a. to plant, mount, 
 set up. 
 
 tfttfred)!, adv. upright, erect. 
 
 3InjTd>neibcn, see fdjneiben, p. 354; v. 
 ir. a. to cut up, cut open. 
 
 ^uffpcicknt, v. a. to store up. 
 
 Sluffrcben, see ftefyen, p. 856; v. ir. 
 n. to arise, get up, stand open. 
 
 Sluflletgen, see jletgen, p.3oG-, v. ir. 
 n. to mount, ascend, rise. 
 
 Shifwdrtc? , adv. upward, upwards. 
 
 Slufivartcn, v. n. to wait on, attend, 
 serve. 
 
 vhtfiekn, v. a. ir. to bring up, ed- 
 ucate draw up. 
 
 Stage , n -3, pi. -n, eye, bud; -n* 
 blttfi to. twinkling, moment; -n 
 bUcfUd), iustaneous, instantly. 
 
 Sfcuglctn,' «. -3, pJL -, eye (L.24. 2). 
 
 21 Uu , jor^jD. out, out of, from, of, 
 by, on, upon, in ; adv. over, out, 
 at an end, finished. 
 
 $tUvVtf)Xttn, v. a. & r. to stretch, ex- 
 tend, expand. 
 
 . f$en , see brefd)en, p. 346 ; v. 
 to thrash out. 
 
 3fu«unben, see ftubeit, p. 24S; v. ir. 
 a. to find out. 
 
 9Iu£fu^ren, v. a. to accomplish. 
 
 SfuSge&en, see gekn, p. 3±8; «. tV 
 
 a., to give out, spend. 
 STuSgefyen, see gctyen, p. 348; v. ir 
 
 n., to go out, go abroad, proceed. 
 Sluc-grabcn, v. a. ir., to dig out, ex 
 
 cavate. 
 Cluofviltcn, v. ir. n., to hold out, sus 
 
 tain. 
 Slnoiufen, v. n. ir., to call out, ery 
 
 out, exclaim. 
 SUtofefjcn, n. -$, face, appearance. 
 -Slupen, ado. out, on the outside, 
 
 without, abroad. 
 §lett§ere (ber, bte, bete), adj. outward, 
 
 exterior, outside. 
 Sluperlialb, prep. & adv. abroad, 
 
 without, out of, outside, beyond. 
 SfaSfprecben, see(pred)en, p. 356; v. a. 
 
 & ?i. ir., to pronounce, utter, ex- 
 press. 
 Sluftra'Ucu, n. -v, Australia. 
 2Iu»ubcn, v. a. to exercise, practice, 
 
 execute, perpetrate. 
 2v f u3n>anbera, v. n. to emigrate. 
 $lu3rueid)en, v. a. ir., to give way, 
 
 turn aside, evade, avoid. 
 2irt,/. -, pi. State, ax, hatchet. 
 
 IB 
 
 2kd), to. -e3, pi. 23ad)e, brook. 
 
 53acfen, v. ir. v., to bake, dry, p. 346. 
 
 SBdcfer, to. -§, jt?£. -, baker. 
 
 SBaben, v. a. to bathe. 
 
 SkJjttf /. -, pi. -en, way, road, ca- 
 reer, course, 
 
 Setter, to. -n, jdZ. -n, Bavarian 
 
 23atcvn, w. -$, Bavaria. 
 
 SBalb, adv. soon, early, nearly. 
 
 ©all, m.-t$,pl. Salle, ball. 
 
 SBalfam, to. -3, pl.-t t balm, balsam. 
 
 SBanb, ?i. -eg, j»Z. SSanber, ribbon, 
 string, m. pi. 23dnbe, volume. 
 
 SBanbigetti v. a. to tame, break. 
 
 SBanf, /. -,pl. SSd'nfe, bench, seat. 
 
 93anner, to. -3, j?£. -, banner. 
 
 23dr, 7W. -en, jt>^. -en, bear. 
 
 Sarfc, /. — , pi. -n, bark, bai'ge. 
 
 23art, to. -e£, -5, 7?/. SSttrtc, beard. 
 
 -53aucn, v. a. to build, raise; fig. auf 
 einen -, to rely upon one. 
 
 SSauer, to. -3>, pi. -n, peasant. 
 
 23duerlem, n. -3, pZ. -, peasant. L 
 24. 1. 
 
 SBamrt; to. -ee, 2>^. Sftumc, tree, 
 
4?4 
 
 S3au— Set 
 
 IBei — 53ef 
 
 SSaumeijler, m -8, joZ. -, architect. 
 
 ©aumrooUe,/. -, cotton. 
 
 S3ecf ertf »i, -4, p/. -y basin. 
 
 SBebadjt'fam, aij. considerate. 
 
 S5eba "tjt'famf eit . /. -, circumspection, 
 caution, prudence. 
 
 SBebau'ern, v. a. to pity. 
 
 SSebccf'en, v a. to cover, shelter. 
 
 33ebenf'en, a. a. ir., to consider, re- 
 flect upon, mind. 
 
 SSebten'te, m. -n, pi. -n, servant. 
 
 Sebitr'fcn, see hixxfm, p. 346; v. it. n. 
 to need, want. 
 
 33ebitrf'tig, adj. wanting, in want of. 
 
 S3efet)l', to. -e£, pi. -e, command. 
 
 23efefy'len, v. tr. «., to command, or- 
 der, charge, desire, p. 346. 
 
 SBefte'bert, plumaged. 
 
 SBcftn'ben, see fhtben, p. 346 ; v. ir. a. 
 to find, think; v. ir. r., to be; 
 tine - fie fid), how do you do ? 
 
 SBefki'tfen, v. ir. r. to be studious of. 
 
 SSefrei'en, v. a. to free, deliver. 
 
 Sege'ben, see get>en, p. 348; v. ir. v., 
 to betake. 
 
 SBegcg'nen, v. w. to meet. 
 
 SBegefj'crt, see gehen, p. 348; v. a. ir., 
 to commit. 
 
 S3egef)'ren, v. a. to desire, demand. 
 
 ©egter'De,/. -, pl.-w, desire, lust. 
 
 SSegtn'nen, v. a. & n. ir., to begin, 
 do, undertake. 
 
 23cgtet'ten, v. a. to accompany. 
 
 23eglet'ter, to. -3, pi. -, companion, 
 attendant, follower, guide. 
 
 SBegra'ben, see graben, p. 350; v. ir. 
 a., to bury. 
 
 23egret'fen, see greifen, p. 350; v. ir. 
 a., to feel, comprehend, under- 
 stand. 
 
 S3ef)al'ten, see tjatteu, p. 350; v. ir. a, 
 to keep, retain. 
 
 SBefyan'beln, v. a. to treat, manage. 
 
 SBetyar'ren, v. n. to continue, persist, 
 insist, persevere. 
 
 SSefycmp'ten, v. a. to affirm, maintain, 
 pretend. 
 
 SiBei, prep, at, near, beside, by, on, 
 with, to, in, in the presence of. 
 
 S3eid)ten, v. a. & n. to confess. 
 
 23etd)rMter, m. -§, pi. — Jodtexv con- 
 fessor. 
 
 SSetDe, tdj. both, twfl ; feittei Son -/ 
 neither of the two 
 
 Setfommen, see fomtnen, p. 350; v. 
 ir. n., to get at. 
 
 SBeirt, n. -e£, pi. -c, leg, bone. 
 
 23 cifptcl/. n.-z§, pi. -e, example, in- 
 stance, pattern ; jum -, for exam- 
 ple, for instance. 
 
 Setjkttf p. 346; v. a. to bite. 
 
 SBeiffcmb, to. -e3, —§, assistance. 
 
 SBetftefKn, v. n ir., to assist. 
 
 S3eiftlmnien, v. n. to agree with, a* 
 sent to. 
 
 SSeiwofmen, v. w. to be present at 
 assist. 
 
 33efcmn'ie m. <fc/.-n, pl.-n, acquaint 
 ance. 
 
 SBefla'gertf v. r. to complain. 
 
 SBela'genmg, /. -, -en, siege. 
 
 S3elet'btgen, v. a. to offend, insult. 
 
 33etlen, v. n. to bark. 
 
 SBcbt/ncn, v. a. to reward. 
 
 SMoft/mmg, /. -, pi. -en, reward. 
 
 33emer'fen, v. a. to perceive, mark, 
 observe, note. 
 
 S3emoo|i', adv. mossy. 
 
 SBenet'Dcn, v. a. to envy. 
 
 33eno'tf;tgt, adj. in need, in want. 
 
 S3erat(/fd)lagung,/.-,pZ. -en , consult- 
 ation, deliberation. 
 
 SSerau'ben, v. a. to rob, plunder. 
 
 S3eraufd)t', frenzied, intoxicated. 
 
 SBere'ben, v. a. to persuade. 
 
 Sere ttS, adv. already. 
 
 SBereu'en, v. a. to repent, regret. 
 
 33crg, to. -eg, pi. -e, mountain. 
 
 SSergcm', bergauf, adv. uphill. 
 
 SBergen, p. 346; v. ir. a., to save, 
 conceal. 
 
 SBerli'n, n. -3, Berlin. 
 
 SSeruf , to. -e8, -3, pi. -e, vocation, 
 
 SSeruijmt', adj. celebrated. 
 
 33eriij)'rett, v. a. to touch, handle, 
 mention, hint at. 
 
 SBefd)d'mett, v. a. to shame, Jig. to 
 excel, be superior to. 
 
 33efd)et'ben, adj. modest. 
 
 SBefd)lte'ijen, to decree, determine, 
 resolve, to finish. 
 
 S3efd)ran'ten, v. a. to confine, limit, 
 bound, restrain. 
 
 SSefd)rei'l>en, see fd)reiBen, p. 354 ; v 
 ir. a., to describe. 
 
 SBefd)itl'Dtgen, v. a. to accuse. 
 
 S3 e fen, to. -3, pi. -, broom. 
 
 SBefte'gen, v. a. to vanquish, conquer. 
 
S*efi— Sift 
 
 mi— 53rc 
 
 4T5 
 
 SBefifc'eit, nee fi^en, p. 354 ; v. ir. a., 
 to possess. 
 
 SBefor'gen* it. a. to take care of, pro- 
 vide, apprehend, fear. 
 
 SBeft.m'fui, adj. constant, durable. 
 
 SBejtat'tgen, v. a. to confirm. 
 
 SBefrc (ber, tie, ba»), adj. best. 
 
 S3e|lc^'€n» see ftcbcn, jr>. 356; u. ir. a. 
 & n., to suffer, be, endure, con- 
 sist of, encounter; - auf, to in- 
 sist \ipon. 
 
 S8efteflen» v. a. to order, appoint. 
 
 Scftell'ung, /. -, pi. cr., order, com- 
 mission. 
 
 SBcjlim'mung, /. -, pL-tn, determin- 
 ation, destination, destiny. 
 
 SBcftra'fcn, v. a. to punish. 
 
 33ejii'd)en, r. a. to visit, see, frequent, 
 go to see. 
 
 SBeten, v. a. ct* n. to say a prayer, to 
 pray. 
 
 SBctrad/ten, v. a. to look upon, con- 
 template, consider. 
 
 23etrad)t'nng, /. -, pi. -en, view, con- 
 sideration. 
 
 SSctra'gcn , see tragen , p. 356 ; v. ir. 
 a. to amount to; v. ir. r. to be- 
 have one's self. 
 
 SBctra'ijcn, n. -d, conduct, behavior. 
 
 S3ctrii'bt# adj. afflicted, sad. 
 
 SSetrii'gen, p. 346; to/cheat, deceive. 
 
 Sett, n. -e£, pi. -en, bed. 
 
 23ettcln, v. n. to beg. 
 
 Settler in. — o, pi. -, beggar. 
 
 Scttlevflctb , n. -e$, -$, pi. -er, beg- 
 gar's dress. 
 
 23euud)'en, v. a. to watch, guard. 
 
 Seroaff'ncn, v. a. to arm. 
 
 SeiiMl/rcn, v. a. to keep, take care 
 of, preserve, guard. 
 
 23en>e'gen, v. a. to move, excite. 
 
 23eroegt, adj. moved, touched. 
 
 Scivofy'ncr, m. -3, pi. -, inhabitant. 
 
 Senntn'bern, v. a. to admire, wonder. 
 
 ©CWUn^erung, /. -» admiration. 
 
 SBfWlipt, adj. known, conscious of, 
 -fcin, n. consciousness. 
 
 SBejtcb/ttgen , v. a. to charge, accuse. 
 
 SBejudj'ttgen, see beddnigen. 
 
 3&ibel,/ -,pl. -it, Bible. 
 
 SBiene,'/ pi. -n, bee. 
 
 33tcr, 11. -zi, -i, pi. ~e, beer. 
 
 SilD , ii. -eo , pi. -er, image, idea, 
 representation, portrait, picture. 
 
 Gilbert , v. a. to form, cultivate, civ* 
 ilize, improve. 
 
 SBilbung,/.-, pL-m f culture, learn- 
 ing, accomplishment. 
 
 SBinbe, /. pi. -n, band; -tooxt f n. 
 
 conjunction. 
 SBtflbea, p. 346; v. ir. a. to bind, tie. 
 Stvne,/ -, pi. -tt, pear. 
 33tr[d)ch , v. a. to shoot, go a shoot 
 
 ing, shoot with a rifle. 
 Sto, adv. & conj. till, until; bid an 
 
 -auf, -jn, up, to, as far as 
 SBttlc,/. pi. -tt, request, entreaty, 
 
 petition, suit. 
 23trtcn,_p. 346 ; v. ir. a. to beg, pray, 
 
 request, entreat, invite. 
 Sitter, adj. bitter, sharp. 
 IBlafeit, p. 346 to blow. 
 SBlatt, n. -co, pi. ©latter, leaf. 
 ©latter, /. -, pi. -n blister; tie -n, 
 
 pi. the small-pox. 
 Sunt, adj. blue. 
 SBtci, n. -etf, -i, lead. 
 SBletben, p. 346; v. ir. n. to remain, 
 
 continue, perish. 
 S31chb, apj. pale, faded. 
 SBIci|lift, m. -Cc, pi. -c, pencil. 
 Slid, vi. -e$, pi. -e, look, glance. 
 Sliden, v. n. to glance, look. 
 SSltnb, adj. blind" 
 
 23lt£en, v. n. to lighten, flash, gleam. 
 Slume, /.-, pi. -n, flower; -ngartcn, 
 
 m. flower-garden. 
 SBliimdjcn, n. — ?, pi. -, floweret. 
 Stiitfye, /. -, pi. -n, bloom, flower. 
 Slutig, adj. blood}*. 
 23ebcn, m. -o, pi. Siiben, ground, 
 
 soil, bottom, loft, garret 
 S3 oil en, m. -$, pi. -, bow. 
 Sc'fyne, /. -, pi. -n, bean. 
 Sobver, m. -$, pi. -, auger. 
 236fe, adj. <k adv. bad, ill, wicked, 
 
 hurtful, angry, sore. 
 Soefyaft, adj. malicious, wicked. 
 53ote, m. -n, pi. -n, messenger. 
 SBoifdjctft, /. -, pi. -en, message. 
 S36ttd)er, in. -0, pi. -, cooper. 
 23ratt;l)en, v. a. to want, need, use. 
 Srauer, m. -3 pi. -, brewer. 
 Siviun, adj. brown. 
 23 ran fen, v. n. to rush, roar, buzz. 
 33red)en, p. 346 v. ir. a. & n, to 
 
 break. 
 SSreit, adj. brf;aa, large, wide. 
 
476 
 
 23mu— £al) 
 
 Xcit)— Xcm 
 
 Bremen, ft. -g, Bremen. 
 
 33renncn, p. 346; %. ir. a. & n. to- 
 burn, scorch, parch, distil, cau- 
 terize, brand. 
 
 ©rcit. n -eg, pi. -zx f board. 
 
 23rtcf, m. --eg, pi. -t, letter; -papier, 
 letter-paper. 
 
 SSrtitgen, p. 346. v. e>. a. to bring 
 carry, convey, bear; an fid) -/ tc 
 acquire, get possession. 
 
 Srob, n. -cv, pZ. -e> bread, loaf. 
 
 83viufc,/. -,pl. -tt, bridge. 
 
 SSritber, m. -3, £>/. SSri'tDer, brother. 
 
 SBriiberitd), adj. brotherly, frater 
 nal ; -umfd)lungeu, in fraternal em 
 brace. 
 
 SSrudcn, v. n. to roar, low. 
 
 Srutmen, tn. -$, pi. -, well, spring 
 fountain. 
 
 S3n:f:,/. -, pi. SSrujle, breast. 
 
 23ruftnabel//. -, pl.-\\, breast-pin. 
 
 S3ud), «. -t$,pl. S8ft$er» book, quire- 
 -feittber, w. bookbinder; -fydnbler, 
 m. bookseller, stationer. 
 
 SPud)e,/. -, />£. -eit, beech. 
 
 S3 it & en, v. r. to stoop, bow. 
 
 £Bunbeggcn?B, m. -en, jA.-txi, confed- 
 erate, ally. 
 
 SSitrgcr, m. -v, pi. -, citizen. 
 
 SBurfte,/. -, jd/. -n, brush. 
 
 33ufd) , m. -eg , pi. 23ufd)e , bush, 
 thicket. 
 
 Sutter, /. -, butter. 
 
 Sfjaraf'ter, m. -g, jp^. -te're, charac- 
 ter. 
 d {) r i ft' ent)e it, /. -, Christendom. 
 Eouftne,/. -, _p?. -n, cousin. 
 
 ©a, adv. cfe eora/. there, present, 
 then, at that time, when, as, 
 while, because, since. 
 
 ©abei', adv. by that, thereby, there- 
 with, thereat, near it, present. 
 
 T>ad), n. -eg, pi. ©ctdjer, roof. 
 
 ©aburd) , adv. by this, by that, 
 through it, through that place. 
 
 ©afli'r, adv. for it, for that, instead 
 of that. 
 
 ©at)er', adv. & c. thence, hence, out 
 of that, therefore. 
 
 ©ar/at', adv. thither, there, away, 
 
 down, gone, past; -ftrccfen, to 
 
 stretch out, spread out. 
 Dame, /. -, pi. -n, lady, 
 ©rtnut ', adv. & cenj. therewith, with 
 
 it (this, that), by it, by that, in 
 
 order, 
 ©dmmerung,/. -, twilight, dusk. 
 ©ampf, m. -eg, pi. ©ampfe- steam, 
 
 vapor, smoke-, fume. 
 'Dam, m. -n, pi. -n, Dane. 
 ©anf, ra. -eg, thanks, reward. 
 ©anf bar, adj. thankful, grateful, 
 ©anfen, v. a. & n. to thank, 
 ©ann, adv. the i, thereupon. 
 ©aran', adv. thereon, thereat, on t, 
 
 at it. by it. 
 ©arauf' r adv. rhereon, thereupon, 
 
 on that, on St, upon it, at that, 
 
 to that, it, after that; ff.I) — fd)roin** 
 
 gen, to leap i.pon, swing upon. 
 ©araug', adv. tl.ereout, out of that* 
 
 therefrom, thence, from this, of 
 
 this, 
 ©arein', adv. therein, into it ; fid) - 
 
 tt)ei!en, to share therein. 
 Sarin', adv. therein, in that, in this, 
 
 in it, wherein. 
 ©arnad)', adv. after that, upon that, 
 
 for that, for it. 
 ©arum, adv. around that, for that, 
 
 for it, therefor. 
 ©a#, art. the; prn. i^nt, which. 
 ©ap, conj. that; - nid)t, lest; Y\§ -, 
 
 till. 
 ©auern, v. n. to l{«it, crntinue; v. a. 
 
 & imp. to grieve, cause to pity; 
 
 iftr bauert mtdj, you grieve me, 
 
 I pity you. 
 ©aupfyin, m. -g, dauph'n, crown- 
 prince, eldest son of the kings of 
 
 France. 
 ©ason', adv. thereof, therefrom, of 
 
 that, of it, from it, whereof, by 
 
 it, off, away; -jagen, to hushes 
 
 away. 
 ©a^u', adv. thereto, to that, forth.. I 
 
 for it, at that. 
 ©ecfel r ra. -g, pi. -, cover. 
 ©ed'en, v. a. to cover, screen. 
 ©ein, prn. poss. thy. L. 12. 2. 
 ©emani, see ©iamant. 
 ©emoftfjeneg, ra. Demostnenes. 
 ©eniutB,/. -, humility, meekness 
 
£em — ©rem 
 
 Dwm— «r 
 
 411 
 
 jDrntftt&tg, adj. humble, meek. 
 !Denfen, p. 316 ; v. ir. a. <fe n., to 
 
 think (of, upon, an, auf), to mind, 
 
 reflect upon. 
 Denfi>vu.^, m. -eg, -g, pi. -fpritdje, 
 
 sentence motto, maxim. 
 £)enn, con/ for, then, than; eg fci - 
 
 baf, unless, if, provided. 
 !£tmtod), conj. yet, however, not- 
 withstanding, nevertheless, 
 lev, zrt. the; />r«. this, that, who. 
 ©eret'nfb aiv. onee, in the future. 
 JDerjenuje, btejenige, bagjentge, pm. 
 
 demonstr. he, that. 
 Derfelfce, btcfcli»c, baffelfcc, jorn. the 
 
 same, he, she, it, that; efren-, 
 
 the very same. 
 £>cgf>alb, adv. therefore, for this 
 
 reason, on that account. 
 jDeffetttrotffen, prep. &pm. therefore, 
 
 on that account, 
 ©cfto, adv. the; - (Jcffcr, thebettei*, 
 
 so much the better. 
 SJeuten, v. a. to explain, interpret; 
 
 -, v. n. to point. 
 5Deutltd>i adj. clear, distinct. 
 T)cutf:[\ adj. German. 
 SDctttfdjlattb, n. -g, Germany. 
 £)tanunt', m. -en, pi. -en, diamond. 
 3Mtf, adj. thick, big, large, stout. 
 2)te&, m. -eg, jd/. -;, thief, 
 ©tcner, m. -Z, pi. -, servant. 
 ©ieitfli m. -eg, pi. -;, service, office, 
 
 employment; -e ncfymen, to enter 
 
 service. 
 SMenfhnabdien, m. -g, pi. -, servant- 
 girl. 
 Sttegfettg, adv. on this side. 
 SDtefer, Dtefe, ©tefeg, pm. demons. 
 
 this (L. 10). 
 ©ino,, w. -c5,-3, #Z. -e, thing, affair, 
 
 matter. 
 2)od), co?y. yet, however, never- 
 theless but (I* 09. 11). 
 Sold); ra. -eg, p/. -i, dagger 
 £>om, m.-z.i,pl.-i, cathedral, dome. 
 £>cnnern, v. n. to thunder. 
 £)p£peU, adj. double, twofol-d; adv. 
 
 doubly, twice. 
 jDorf, n. -eg, pi. Dorfer, village. 
 1)orn m. -eg, pi. -ert, <fe Dorner, thorn. 
 ■£>ovt, aJy. yonder, there; -o(?en, 
 
 there, above, up there. 
 f £)rdno,en, v. a. to throng, press. 
 
 ©rcmjfctt, n. -:g, -g pi -c, calamity. 
 
 £>rauf, see £)arauf. 
 
 IDre^ett, v. a. <£ r. to turn, revohe. 
 
 ©ret, three; -mal, ac/y. three times, 
 
 ©reigig, thirty. 
 
 £)refdjen,jE>. 316; «. Jr. a. to thrash. 
 
 £)refd)er, m. -g, jt>/. -, thrasher. 
 
 5DregbeR, n. -g, Dresden. 
 
 Drtitgen , v. n. ir. to press forth 
 crowd, urge, penetrate. 
 
 Drirtel, n. -g, pi. *-, third. 
 
 2)rtttcng, thirdly. 
 
 2)rol)en, v. n. to threaten. 
 
 £>rnd, m. -iZ, pi. -:, pressure. 
 
 SDriicfcn, v. a. to press, squeeze, op- 
 press. 
 
 ©It, pm. thou. 
 
 jDltfttg , adj. vaporous, fragrant. 
 
 Dumm, adj. dull, stupid. 
 
 ©Uttfct, adj. dark, obscure. 
 
 iHutfel, n. -g, darkness, obscurity. 
 
 £>imfel§eit, /. --, darkness. 
 
 Suit;:,' m. -eg , pZ. ©Uttjlei vapor, 
 steam. 
 
 "Dnrd), prep, through, by means of. 
 
 £)urd)ftvo'men, v. n, to permeate. 
 
 £)itrd)n)an'Dcln , v. n. to wander, or 
 pass through, or over, to tra- 
 verse. 
 
 ©iirfen , to be allowed, be permit- 
 ted, be able, need. (L. 45. 1. & p. 
 346.) 
 
 SDttrfiett, SDiirfteit, v. n. & imp. to 
 thirst, be thirsty. 
 
 m 
 
 ©fcett, adj. & adv. even, level, plain, 
 even, just, exactly, precisely, aid 
 — , just as. 
 
 Sde,/. -, />/. -n, corner, edge. 
 
 (£bel, «dy. & adv. noble, precious, 
 choice ; -miUptg, adj. noble, mag- 
 nanimous. 
 
 (Ebelftein , m. -eg , pi. ^z, precious 
 stone. 
 
 (£ben, n. -3, Eden, paradise. 
 
 £f)e, adv. ere, before. 
 
 (£l)er, ady. sooner, rather. 
 
 £(U'e, /• -, pi- -n, honor. 
 
 (£[)rcrcietuv ac?/. reverent, respectful 
 
 (l^rfurdjt,/.-, veneration, awe, rev 
 erence. 
 
 S^rlid), adj. honest, faithful. 
 
4T8 
 
 S()r— (Sit 
 
 C£fet — CEnt 
 
 Sfjrftuirbic!, adj. reverend, venerable, 
 
 C£i ! int. eli! hey ! ay ! 
 
 (£id)e,/. -, pi. -it. oak. 
 
 Sictcn, adj. own, self, proper, pecu- 
 liar, singular, strange, accurate; 
 -1>eitf /. property, peculiarity; 
 -nit^tg , adj. selfish ; -ftitnig , adj. 
 capricious, willful, obstinate. 
 
 (EtfjCMiuf), proper, exact, real. 
 
 (Stlcn, '*;. 01. to hasten, hurry, speed. 
 
 Sin, art. a, an; adj. one. 
 
 Ghnn'Dcr , adv.- one another, each, 
 other. 
 
 Einertet, the same. 
 
 (2irtf.il?, /. -, simplicity, silliness. 
 
 ©ittfalttg, adj. simple, silly. 
 
 Gtnfiibvcn, v. a. to introduce, im- 
 port, conduct. 
 
 (Singewcibc, n.—%,pl. -a, inwards, 
 entrails, intestinos. 
 
 Sng.iveg , m. -e3 , pi -e , defile, nar- 
 row pass. 
 
 Sirtgvetfcvt , v. n. ir. to catch, lay 
 hold of, exert influence, inter- 
 fere. 
 
 Siniger, (Sirrige, &mige3, prn. some, 
 any. 
 
 (Stnnmt, adv. once, one time. 
 
 (£uu"iit):en, v. a. & r. to set right, ar- 
 range, adjust; [t;b enricfyten, to 
 accommodate, establish one's self. 
 
 (£incv adj. one, one thing, one and 
 the same. 
 
 Stnfam, adj. solitary, lonely. 
 
 Gtnfamfctt , /. -, pi. -en, solitude, 
 retiredness. 
 
 (Siufu)hnnmern, v. n. to fall into a 
 slumber, fall asleep. 
 
 Gctttfammeln, v. a. to gather in, col- 
 lect. 
 
 Siltjiebleri on. -4# pi- -» hermit. 
 
 (2 in ft, adv. once, one day, one time. 
 
 (i trifle He n , v. a. to suspend, stop; 
 v. r. to appear. 
 
 {Stnroclnicr, m. -3, pi -, inhabitant. 
 
 'i'i.r.cln, adj. single, isolated. 
 
 CElttjigi adj. only, single, alone. 
 
 Gi-3, n. -eg, ice, ice-cream; -Mx, on. 
 polar bear. 
 
 CSifen, n. -i-, iron; -rscrf, n. -3, iron 
 work. 
 
 Sifern, adj. iron. 
 
 (Site!, adj. idle, vain, frivolous. 
 
 ©item, v. n. to fester. 
 
 (Sfet, ?«. -§, aversion, disgust. 
 (Sfenb, ?i. -e3, misery, distress. 
 Gtenb, adj. miserable, wretched. 
 Gkplp.nt, m.*-zn, j)l -en, elephant. 
 Stfe,/. -,jp/. -it, ell. 
 (Eloaf), m. Eloah. 
 (Sltern, jA. parents. 
 (Sinpfan'gen, p. 346; v. ir. a. to re- 
 ceive, take, accept. 
 (Snrpfeiyicn, p. 346 ; v. *r. a to recom- 
 mend. 
 ©mpor', adv. on high, upward, up 
 
 aloft. 
 (Smpo'ren, v. a. to stir up, excite ; - ; 
 
 v. r. to rebel, revolt. 
 (Smpo'rer, m. -3, pi. -, rebel. 
 (Smpor'ragcn , v. n. to tower up. 
 (Srnpor'fdjauen, v. n. to look or gaze 
 
 up. 
 Sm'pcv'ftetgen, v. n. ir. to rise, mount. 
 (Snbe, w. -3, pZ. -n, end, aim. 
 (Snbltdj , adj. finite, final ; adv. at 
 
 last, finally. 
 (Sng or Gnge, ad;, narrow, tight. 
 Gngcl on. -o, />^. -, angel. 
 (Snglanb, n. -i, England, 
 ©nglanbev, on. -§,pl. -, Englishman. 
 Snrjltfd), adj. English. 
 SntiloBen, v. a. to uncover, bare. 
 GnilU^i', adj. destitute, deprived 
 
 of, p. see entWiij?en. 
 (Snfe, f. -, pi. -n, duck, 
 ©ntfernung, /. -, pi. -en, distance, 
 
 removal, departure. 
 CEntfenti', adj. distant, remote. 
 Sntgc'gen, j9r<rp. & «<&. against, op 
 
 posite. 
 (Sntgeg'engetyen, v. «. ir., to go to 
 
 meet. 
 ©ntgeg'nen, f. n. to answer, reply. 
 vSm^U'ten, F. a. ir. to contain, com 
 
 prehend; v. r. ir. to abstain from., 
 
 avoid. 
 SntJje'iscn, see tyefcen, p. 350; v. ir. % 
 
 to exempt from. 
 GiUle'Dtrjen, v. a. to release. 
 (Sntrin'nen, see rinnen, p. 352; v. i;. 
 
 n., to run away, escape, 
 ©ntfa'geit, v. n. to renounce, resign. 
 Gntfd)la'fcn, see f;ftlafcn, p. 351; ». w. 
 
 w., to fall asleep, expire. 
 ©mf^la'gen, see fcislagen, p. 354; v. 
 
 ir. r., to get rid of, divest. 
 ©vtifd)tie i?en. see f;{)Hep(n, p 354; »? 
 
Gntji— (Sri 
 
 (M— Sfel 
 
 479 
 
 ir. a., to unlock, disclose ; v. r. to 
 
 resolve, determine. 
 Giufte'bcrt, see ficben, p. 356, v. ir. 
 
 v., to arise, originate. 
 EntWe'Der, coaj. either. 
 Gmurci'en, v. a. to disunite, set at 
 
 variance; v. r. to quarrel. 
 Q.x, prn. he, it. (L. 28. 5.) 
 Srbar'mcn, v. r. to pity, have mercy. 
 n'ltd), ac?/'. pitLul, miserable, 
 
 wretched. 
 Erfce, u. -g, inheritance, patrimony. 
 Srbettf v. a. to inherit- v. n. to de- 
 volve by inheritance. 
 CErlit'ten, v. a. ir., to get, or try to 
 
 get by entreaty. 
 Erfrit'terung, /. -, pi. -en, animosity. 
 Grblict'cn, v. a. to descry, see, view. 
 
 f. -, pi. -e.t, pea" 
 (EvCv, /. —, pi. -n, earth, ground. 
 Ereig'nen, v. r. to happen, chance. 
 Sr^n'ben, see ftuben, p. 348; v. ir. a., 
 
 to invent. 
 Srfiil'len, v. a. to fill, do, fulfill. 
 ©rge'beiti see geben, p. 348; v. ir. r., 
 
 to surrender, submit, devoted, 
 
 addicted, given. 
 Grgc'bcn, v. n. ir., to happen, befall ; 
 
 r. imp. to go, fare with. 
 Gvarei'fcn, see greifen, p. 350; v. ir. 
 
 a., to seize, catch 
 Griul'ren, see fyaltert, p. 350; v. ir. a. 
 
 & n., to keep, maintain, save, 
 
 receive, get, gain. 
 (iriul'iumt,,/. -, preservation, main- 
 tenance, support. 
 Grbe'oen, v. a. ir., to raise ; v. r. ir., 
 
 to rise, arise. 
 Grin'acnt, v. a. to remind, mention ; 
 
 v. r. to remember, recollect. 
 Srfal'ten, v. r. to catch cold. 
 (irfcu'ucrt, see fennen, p. 350; v. ir. 
 
 a., to perceive, distinguish, re- 
 cognize. 
 (Erfla'rett, v. a. to explain, interpret, 
 
 define, declare. 
 (5vn:i':ern, v. a. to climb. 
 Erhm'bijett, v. r. to inquire, make 
 
 inquiry. 
 Erlau'bcn, v. a. to permit, allow. 
 Srlie'grn, see ViiQtn, p. 350; y. ir. n., 
 
 to sucevmb, be subdued, sink 
 
 under 
 
 (Erli>fd)'ert, v. n. ir., to go out, be ex- 
 tinguished, expire. 
 
 ©rlo'l'ungi f. -, pi. -en, redemption, 
 deliverance, salvation. 
 
 (Srinor'bcrt, v. a. to murder. 
 
 Grmafy'uen, v. a. to exhort, admonish, 
 remind. 
 
 ©rnie'brigen , v. a. to lower, abase; 
 v. r. to humble one's self. 
 
 Snttf/ SrttfHjaji, SwjfcaoHi adj. earn- 
 est, serious, grave, stern. 
 
 Srntc, /. -, pi. -n, harvest, crop. 
 
 Gro'bercr, m. -$, pi. -, conqueror. 
 
 (Errei'cbcn, v. a. to reach, attain. 
 
 Grret'ien, v. a. to save, rescue. 
 
 Grrtd/ren, v. a to erect, build up. 
 
 Grfat;', m. -eg, compensation. 
 
 (frf.1v, I' I en, v. n. ir. to sound, resound, 
 spread. 
 
 Grfd)ct'itert,p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to appear. 
 
 Grfdjie'pen, see <Sd)tejjett# p. 354; v. 
 ir. a. to shoot. 
 
 Grfd)re'cfen, v. a. to terrify, fright- 
 en; v. r. ir. to be terrified, be 
 frightened. 
 
 @rfe§ eiti v. a. to supply, replace. 
 
 Grjr, adj. & adv. first, prime, at 
 first, before, only, not till. 
 
 Srfiau'ncn , v. n. to be astonished, 
 amazed. 
 
 Grfreitc, adv. first, in the first place. 
 
 Grfu'cT/eu, v. a. to entreat, request. 
 
 £rtrin'fen# see trinfcit, p. 356 ; v. ir. n. 
 to be drowned, drown. 
 
 Grroa'd)cn, v. n. to awake, appear 
 
 Srroad&'fen* adj. full gro.vn, adult. 
 
 Gnuar/nei!, v. a. to mention. 
 
 Gnoar'rert, v. a. to expect, await. 
 
 Gnved'en, v. a. to awaken, rouse. 
 
 Gnret'd)en, v. a. to soften. 
 
 Errod'feit* see tt>eifen*^>. 358 ; v. ir. a, 
 to show, do, render; v. r. to 
 pro ve. 
 
 Gnrjcr'ben, v. a. ir. to acquire earn, 
 gain, obtain. 
 
 Grroer'bung, /. acquisition. 
 
 Grroie'berH/ v. a. to answer, reply. 
 
 Gr.ar/{en, v. i. to tell, narrate, re- 
 port. 
 
 Gr.cu'ycn, v. a. to beget, produce, 
 engender. 
 
 Grueiber , m. -£, pi. -, instructor, 
 master, governor. 
 
 ©rjtt'tcm, v. n. to tremble, shake. 
 
480 
 
 (5<3— Seint> 
 
 gcinb— gl«f 
 
 <§.$, prn it, so. 
 
 (£fcl, m. -e, pZ. -, ass, donkey. 
 
 (Effen, j». 348; v. ?V. a. to eat. 
 
 (Efftg, ra. -u, vinegar. 
 
 (Etlidje, acT;'. some, any, several. 
 
 (Srwag, prn. something, somewhat, 
 
 some, any, a little, 
 ©ltd), you, to you. 
 ©iter, eitcre, eu'er, prn. your. 
 dula'ixaf. Eulalia. 
 QtiiU,/. -, pi. -v., owl. 
 ©uro'pct, w. -§, oreno, Europe. 
 Surcpd'er, ra. -3, joZ. -, European. 
 <£»., your. L. 27. 3. 
 ©wig, ad/', eternal, everlasting. 
 ©wigfeit, /. -, eternity. 
 
 9 " 
 
 gaM,/. -,pl-n, fable. 
 
 gdd)er, m. -$pl. -, fan. 
 
 gdf)tg, adj able, apt, fit, capable. 
 
 $al)ren, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to drive, 
 carry, convey; v. ir. n. to move 
 quickly, run, start, rush, to go 
 in a carriage, to sail, navigate. 
 
 fallen, p. 348; v. ir. n. to fall, de- 
 cline, fail. 
 
 $alfd)t)eit, /. -, pi. -en, falsehood. 
 
 gami'lie,/. -, pi. -n, family. 
 
 §ang en, p. 348 ; v. it. a. to catch, 
 take, seize. 
 
 Sarfce,/. -, pi. -n, color. 
 
 gdrben, v. a. to color, dye. 
 
 garbcr, m. —5, pi. -, dyer. 
 
 gap, «. -ffey, pZ. gaffer, cask, barrel. 
 
 ftaft, adv. almost 
 
 gaj'fen, v. a. to seize, contain; v. r. 
 
 fas!; to collect ones seT, recover. 
 .$Xltt, adj. putrid, lazy, idle. 
 
 ryar.lfyett, /. -> laziness, idleness. 
 
 g.ebruct'r, m. -3, pi. -e, February. 
 
 §ed)ten, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to fight, fence. 
 
 gcber, /. -, pi. -n, feather, pen. 
 
 gcgen, v. a. to sweep, cleanse. 
 
 Sel;lcn, v. n. to fail, miss, err, mis- 
 take, to be wanting, want, to be 
 deficient; Wa3 fe(;lt 3I)nen? what 
 ails you ? 
 
 gefyter, w?. -3 pZ. -, fault, error. 
 
 gcig , adj. coward, faint-hearted. 
 
 gein, etc//, fine, delicate, pretty. 
 
 gehlb, adj. hostile, inimical. 
 
 geinb, in. ~e3, pi. e, enemy. 
 
 geinblid), <ic//'. hostile, inimical. 
 
 gembfeligtctt,/. -, pi. -en, hostility. 
 
 gelb, n. -eg, />/. -*r, field, plain; 
 -Hume,/, wild-flower ; — frud)t, pro- 
 duce of the fields ; -fyerr, in. com- 
 mander in-chief ; -we bet; m. ser- 
 geant. 
 
 gelDban, m. -eg, -3, agriculture. 
 
 gelg, m. — frtt§, pZ. -fen, gelfen, m. 
 -g, pi. -, rock, cliff. 
 
 genfter, n. -g, pi. -, window. 
 
 gent, adj. far, remote, distant. 
 
 Seme,/. -, #Z. -it, farness, distance 
 
 gertig ad/, ready, prepared, done. 
 
 %t\Jd,f. -, pZ. -n, fetter, chain. 
 
 Seffeln, v. a. to fetter, shackle, chain, 
 captivate. 
 
 geft, adj. fast, fixed, steadfast. 
 
 gett, adj. fat, greasy. 
 
 geuer, w. -g, #/. -, fire. 
 
 gtnbcn , p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to find, 
 think ; <StCttt -, to take place ; v. 
 r. ir. to be found, offer, com- 
 prehend. 
 
 ginger, m.-$,pl.-, finger; -fyut, m. 
 thimble. 
 
 girnewem, m. -eg, pi. -I, wine of 
 the last year, old wine, ftrn, from 
 the loot of »orn, fern. 
 
 gtfd), m. -eg, pi. -z, fish. 
 
 gifd)cn, v. a. to fish. 
 
 gt|a)cr, to. -3, pi. -, fisherman. 
 
 glad), adj. fiat, plain, level. 
 
 glddje, /. -, pi. -n, plain, flatness, 
 tract, surface. 
 
 gtad)g, m. -feg, flax. 
 
 glafdje,/. ~,pl. -n, flask, bottle. 
 
 gted)ten, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to braid. 
 
 gleifd), n. -eg, flesh, meat. 
 
 gleifdjer, ra. -g. £>Z. -, butcher. 
 
 gtetp, m. -eg, diligence, industry. 
 
 gletptg, adj. diligent, industrious. 
 
 gltege, /. -, pi. -it, fly. 
 
 gliegen, jo. 348 ; v. ir. n. to fly; fjcdi) 
 -, to soar. 
 
 glter)cn, p. 348 ; v. ?>. n. to flee, shun. 
 
 S4ieBcn,^. 318 ; v. ir. n. to flow, run. 
 
 %Wtt,f.-,pL -n, flute. 
 
 gluten, to curse, imprecate. 
 
 gtud)ttg, adj. flying, transient, 
 .glug, ?n. -e^, -o, pZ. gliige, flight. 
 
 gtugcl, m.-i,pl. -, wing. 
 
 Slur,/. -, jpZ. -en, field, plain, floor 
 
 S'lup , 7«. — ;~fe v3 , i?Z. %\\\\[i , river, 
 stream ; — pferb, hippopotamus. 
 
glu — %xtu 
 
 %nn— (Bar 
 
 481 
 
 fiflufy / -, i>2. -en, flood, deluge, 
 inundation, tide. 
 
 golgc, /. -, J3^- -U, sequel, conse- 
 quence. 
 
 $clgen, v. n. to follow, succeed, obey. 
 
 gctglid), conj consequently. 
 
 %on\i(,f. -,pl. -It, trout. 
 
 9fort, adv. forth, gone off, away. 
 
 gortolitfyen, v. n. to continue blos- 
 soming. 
 
 Bi-rtf.ibven, to continue, go on with, 
 drive off, depart. 
 
 ftprtfltegen, v. n. ir. to fly away. 
 
 gortjagen, v. a. & n. to drive away, 
 turn away, 
 
 gort[d)Ieppen, v. a. to drag away. _ 
 
 S*ortft>otIen, v. n. ir. to wish, or in- 
 tend to go. 
 
 grage,/. -, pi. -n, question. 
 
 gragen, v. a. & n. to ask, question, 
 interrogate. 
 
 granffurt, n. -<&, Frankfort. 
 
 S'ranfretd), n. -3, France. 
 
 gran;, m. Francis. 
 
 granjo'fe, m. -n, pi. -n, Frenchman. 
 
 Sranjo'ftfcfi, adj. French. 
 
 %xquXj f. -, pi. -en , woman, wife, 
 lady, madam, mistress. 
 
 9fwttlem, n.-$,pl. -, young lady, 
 miss. 
 
 Srcd) , adj. impudent, bold, saucy, 
 audacious. 
 
 gret, adj. free, exempt, disengaged, 
 vacant, independent, open, pub- 
 lic; -fprcdumg,/. acquittal. 
 
 S'rctgebig , adj. liberal, generous. 
 
 gretfjett, /. -, pi. -en, liberty, free- 
 dom, privilege, license. 
 
 grettid), adv. certainly, to be sure, 
 indeed. 
 
 gretttntltg, adj. voluntary. 
 
 grembc, ?n. &f. foreigner, stranger. 
 
 grembltng, m. -3, pi. -e, stranger, 
 foreigner. 
 
 greffen, p. 348 ; v. ir. a. to eat, de- 
 vour, corrode. 
 
 gveube,/. -, pi. -n, joy, pleasure. 
 
 Sreubenjioter, m. -3, pi. -, disturber 
 of joy, marfeast. 
 
 greubtg, adj. glad, joyful, cheerful. 
 
 grewen, v. r. to rejoice; itler nmni, 
 cuf ettt>a£, to rejoice in, be glad; 
 v. imp. to afford joy, pleasure; 
 eg freut mid), I am glad. 
 
 greunb, m. -ev, pi. -c, friend. 
 
 greunbin,/. -, pi. -nen, female friend. 
 
 greunbltd), adj. friendly, kind. 
 
 §reunbfd)aft, /. -, pi. -en, friendship. 
 
 gricbc, m. -n3 (grieben, m. -g), peace. 
 
 grtcblid), adj. peaceful, peaceable 
 
 grtebric|, m. Frederic. 
 
 % rterefi, v. n. & imp. ir. to freeze^ 
 be chilled; e3 fricrt mid), 1 air. 
 cold. 
 
 %T0$ f adj. glad, joyful, joyous. 
 
 5'ibMiu}, adj. joyous, joyful, cheer- 
 ful. 
 
 gfromm, adj. pious, gentle. 
 
 gronte,/ -, pi. -en, front; -niadjen, 
 to face. 
 
 gntd)t,/. -, pi. griidne, fruit. 
 
 £5?ritd)tIog, adj. fruitless, useless. 
 
 grilling, m. -g, pi. -e, spring. 
 
 giigen, v. a. to join, unite; v. r. ac- 
 commodate one's self to, submit. 
 
 giirjlcn, v. a. & n. to feel, be sensi- 
 ble of, perceive. 
 
 Su^ren, v. a. to cany, convey, lead, 
 guide, manage, wear. 
 
 £yiit)rer, m. -g, pi. -, guide, leader. 
 
 git II en, v. a. to fill, fill up. 
 
 gfiinf, see §. 45, (1). 
 
 gunfte, adj. fifth. 
 
 gituf:.er)n, see § 45. 
 
 ^unfeln, v. n. to sparkle, glitter. 
 
 %VLX, prep, for, instead of, by, after; 
 - linb -, forever and ever. 
 
 gurd,Ucn, v. a. to fear, be afraid; v. 
 r. to be in fear. 
 
 Surd)l: [a in, adj. timid, timorous. 
 
 guv ft, m. -en, pi. -en, prince. 
 
 gtirttJOrt, n. -eg, pi. -r»6rter, pro- 
 noun, 
 
 gufj, in. -eg, pi. gu§e, foot. 
 
 gutter, n. -g, jt>Z. -, food, fodder, 
 provender, case. 
 
 m 
 
 ©ctbcl, /. -, j^. -n, fork. 
 
 ©ang, ra. -eg, -g, jt^. ©ange, going, 
 
 walk, way, direction, course, 
 ©ang,/. -, /)'. ©anfe, goose, 
 ©am, adj. whole, all, entire, totai, 
 
 full, perfect, complete, quite, 
 
 - redjt, quite right. 
 ©at, adj. & adv. prepared, entirely, 
 
 very, even, 
 ©avn, n. -eg, pi -e, yarn 
 
 Ql 
 
482 
 
 ©at— ©el) 
 
 ©e$— ©cm 
 
 ©arten, ra. -g, joZ. ©drten, garden; 
 -blnme, /. garden-flower. 
 
 ©drtner, m. -g, pi. -, gardener. 
 
 &a\t, m.-t$,pl. ©dfte, guest; -frennb, 
 m. guest, host; -Jjaug, n. hotel. 
 
 ©Ctlil, m. -eg, js/. ©ante, horse, nag. 
 
 ©eMttbe, m. -g, />& -» building. 
 
 ©eben, p. 348 ; to give. 
 
 ©ebie'ren, £>. 348; v. jr. a. to com- 
 mand, order. 
 
 ©cbir'gc, n.-i, pi.-, chain of mount- 
 ains, mountains. 
 
 Gebtrgo'inarfd), m. -eg, pi. -mdrfd)c, 
 mountain-march. 
 
 ©ebc'rcn, adj. born. 
 
 ©ebraud), m. -eg, pi. ®ebrdud)e, use, 
 custom, usage, practice. 
 
 ©ebred/en, see bred)en, p. 346; v. ir. 
 imp. to be wanting, be in want 
 of, want. 
 
 ©ebiil/ren, v. n. to be due, belong 
 to ; v. r. & imp. to be fit, becom- 
 ing. 
 
 ©ebddjt'tttjji, n. -[fzQ, memory. 
 
 ©ebcm'fe, in. -ng, pi. -n, thought, 
 idea, notion, meaning, purpose. 
 
 ©cben'fen, see benfen, p. 34(3 ; v. ir. 
 n. to think of, remember, men- 
 tion, intend. 
 
 ©cbid):,, n. -eg-, -$, pi. -c, poem. 
 
 ©ebrdn'gf, p. pressed, crowded. 
 
 ©ebulb', /. -, patience, indulgence. 
 
 ©cbul'btg, adj. patient, forbearing. 
 
 ©efctfyt 7 , /. -; pi. -en, clanger, peril. 
 
 ©efaljv'Ud), adj. dangerous. ' 
 
 ©efctfyr'ie, m. -n, pi. -it, companion, 
 consort. 
 
 ©efabr'iin, /. -,pl. -XltXl, new, com- 
 panion, consort. 
 
 ©efatjr'soi!, adj. fraught with dan- 
 ger, dangerous, perilous. 
 
 ©efai'ten, see fallen, p. 348 ; to please; 
 eg gefdllt mtr, I like it, 
 
 ©efai'ltgfctr, /. -, pi. -en, complais- 
 ance, kindness, favor, service. 
 
 ©efang'nip, n. -ffeg, pi. -ffe, prison. 
 
 ©efd'|-j, n. -eg, pi, -z, vessel. 
 
 ©efte'oer, n. -3, plumage, feathers. 
 
 ©efol'ge, w. -0, train, retinue. 
 
 ©egcu, prep, toward, to, against, 
 for, about, near, compared to; 
 -tljetl, n. contrary. 
 
 ©eljen, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to go, walk 
 fare, be ; rote Qeljt eg ? how are you I 
 
 eg geljt mir roof)l, I am well; bet 
 93tnb gefyr, the wind blotvs. 
 
 ©efyirtt', n. -,eg, jp£. -e, brain. 
 
 ©efyor'djen, v. n. to obey. 
 
 ©efjb'rcrt, v. n. to belong. 
 
 ©e|or'fam, a<#. obedient, dutiful, 
 m. -g, obedience, duty. 
 
 ©epl'fe, m. -n, pi. -it, assistant. 
 
 ©eige, /. -, pi. -n, violin. 
 
 ©eifr, m. —eg, jdZ. — er. ghost, spirit 
 soul, genius. 
 
 ©eiftig, adj. spirituous, spiritual, 
 intellectual. 
 
 ©etj, m. -eg, avarice; -I;atg, m.-eg, 
 miser. 
 
 ®et$ig, adj. avaricious, covetous. 
 
 ©ef rod/en, see frtcdjen. 
 
 ®el6, adj. yellow. 
 
 ©elb, n. -eg, pZ. -er, money, coin. 
 
 ©ele'genl;etf, /. -, pi. -en, "occasion, 
 opportunity. 
 
 ©eleijrt', adj. learned, skilled. 
 
 ©elte'fjen, see letf;en. 
 
 ©e(iug,'en, #.348 ; v. ir. n. to succeed, 
 prosper, speed. 
 
 ©elten, p. 348. v. ir. n. to be of value. 
 
 ©cmdl'se, n. -g, pi.-, picture, paint- 
 ing. 
 
 ©emein', adj. common, ordinary, 
 vulgar. 
 
 ©emfenjdger , m. -g, pi. -, chamois- 
 hunter. 
 
 ©einihb/, n. -eg, pi. -er, mind, soul, 
 heart, nature. 
 
 ©en, prepj. toward, to. 
 
 ©cnerai', m. -eg, -g, pi. ©enerale, 
 general, commander. 
 
 ©enerat'lieutenant, m. -g,jt>Z. -g, lieu 
 tenant-general. 
 
 ©enc'fen, p. 348 ; v. ir. n. to reccTer. 
 
 ©ertie'pett, p. 350; v. ir. a. to enjoy, 
 take, taste, eat, drink. 
 
 ©entug, to.-, pi. ©enten, genius. 
 
 ©cnu'g, adv. sufficient, enough. 
 
 ©emYgen, v. n. to suffice, satisfy. 
 
 ©era'be, adj. straight, right, plain, 
 immediately, dirrctly, just, es 
 aetly. 
 
 ©erbcr, to. -g, pi. -, tanner, 
 
 ©ered)t , adj. just, righteous. 
 
 ©erefdjen, v. n. to tend, redound. 
 
 ©ert'ebt, w.-eg, pl.—z, judgment, tri- 
 bunal. 
 
 ©mt, adv. willingly, gladly, cheer 
 
®er— ©etv 
 
 ®e»— (55ra3 
 
 483 
 
 fully, v: ith pleasure; -IjaBen, to 
 
 like, be fond of. 
 ©erfte,/. -, barley. 
 ©efang, ra. -eg, pi. ©efdnge, song, 
 ©cfdjafi:', n. — Co, pi. —z, business, 
 
 employment. 
 ©cfcl)0 ['tig, ac//.busy,busied,bustling. 
 ©tfdje'tyen,^?. 350; v. ir. n. to happen, 
 
 take, place, chance, be done. 
 ®efd)ent', n. -d, pi. -e, present, gift. 
 ©efdjid)'te»/. -, pi. -tt, history, story, 
 ©efdjicfr, adj. fit, apt, skillful. 
 ®efd)0pf, 51. -Co, pi. -e, creature. 
 ©efcijrei', n.-zi, cry, clamor, scream, 
 
 lamentations. 
 ©ef<i}U$', n. -eg, pi. -z, artillery, 
 
 cannon. 
 ©efdjwei'gen, see fcfyroeigen, p. 354; 
 
 v. ir. n. to pass over in silence. 
 @efd)ttnnb', adj. swift, fast, rapid, 
 
 quick. 
 ©efcfyvDur', n. -eg, pi. -z, sore, ulcer. 
 ©efell'[d)aft,/. -, pi. -en, company, 
 ©efei;', n. -eg, pi. -:, law, decree. 
 ©ejpenji', n. -co, />£. -cr, ghost, 
 
 specter, spirit, phantom, 
 ©efprd'djig, adj. affable, talkative. 
 ©efia'Oe, n. -t$,pl. -z, shore, coast, 
 ©eftalt',/. -i pi. -en, figure, form. 
 ©cftctn', n. -z$, pi. -c, stone, rock. 
 ©ejiern, adv. yesterday. 
 ©eftraud/, n. -co, pi. -c, bushes, 
 
 briars, thicket. 
 ©cfitiiD' adj. sound, healthy. 
 ©ejunb'jjeir,/ -, pi. -en, health. 
 ©Ctret'De, n. -g, corn, grain. 
 ©Ctreu', adj. faithful, loyal, true, 
 
 honest, devoted. 
 ©etfcjV, confident, courageous, with 
 
 confidence. 
 ©etro'fien, v. r. to console one's self, 
 
 trust in, to be not afraid of. 
 ©enxtfjr', adj. perceiving; -roerben, 
 
 to see, perceive, 
 ©eroalt', f. -, pi. -en, power, force. 
 ©etMl'ttcj, adj. powerful, mighty, 
 
 very large, prodigious. 
 ©ewanb'i n. ~zz. pi. -©evodnber, gar- 
 ment^ drapery cloth, dress. 
 ©eUKil/, n. -eg, pi. -t, horns, bran- 
 ches, antlers, 
 ©ennn'nen, p. 350; to win, earn. 
 ©eivijj', adj. jertain, sure, fixed. 
 ©en) if' fen, n. --g, pi. -, conscience. 
 
 ©eftofyn'ticb, usual, common. 
 
 ©ewofynt', used, accustomed. 
 
 ©CtoM'be, n. -g, pi. -, &-x, vault, 
 arch, 
 
 ©enjiirj', n. -eg, pi. -e, spice, aro- 
 matic. 
 
 ©ejie'mcn, v. imp. to become, be- 
 seem, be fit. 
 
 ©iejjCtt, p. 350; v. ir. a. to pour, 
 spill, cast. 
 
 ©iftig, adj. poisonous, venomous. 
 
 ©impel, m.-g, pi.-, chaffinch, sim- 
 pleton. 
 
 ©lair,, m. -eg, splendor, luster, 
 brightness, glance. 
 
 ©lan^en, v. n. to glisten, glitter. 
 
 ©lag, n. -eg, pi. ©lafcr, glass. 
 
 ©lafer, in. -&, pi. -, glazier. 
 
 ©lafcrn, adj. glass, glassy. 
 
 ©latt, adj. smooth, even, plain. 
 
 ©laube, in. -ng, faith, belief, credit. 
 
 ©lailben, v. a. to believe, think. 
 
 ©Idiibig, adj. believing, faithful. 
 
 ©Idubtgc, m. &f. believer. 
 
 ©letd), adj. like, alike, equal, level, 
 plain,straight, just, immediately 
 
 ©Ieid)fommeit, to equal. 
 
 ©letdjen, p. 350; v. ir. n. to equaL 
 equalize, level, resemble. 
 
 ©letdjgulitgfeit, /. -, pi. -en, equal- 
 ness, equivalence, indifference. 
 
 ©leid)mutl), m. -zi, equinimity, 
 calmness. 
 
 ©U'tcf, n. -:Z, fortune, happiness, 
 prosperous condition. 
 
 ©lud'Ud), adj. happy, fortunate, 
 prosperous. 
 
 ©liiiifeligfcit,/.-, happiness, felicity. 
 
 ©ncibig, adj. gracious, merciful. 
 
 ©olb, n. -eo, gold; -fd)mieb, m. gold- 
 smith. 
 
 ©olben, adj. gold, golden. 
 
 ©ott, m. -co, God.' 
 
 ©bhlni), adj. divine, godly, godlike. 
 
 ©Oitlog, adj. godless, impious, 
 wicked. 
 
 ©rab, n. -eg, pi. ©vdbcr, grave, 
 tomb, sepulchre. 
 
 ©raben, m. -g, pi. ©raben, ditch, 
 trench, canal. 
 
 ©raben, p. 350; v. ir. a.&n. to dig, cut 
 
 ©raf, m. -en, pi. -en, earl, count. 
 
 ©rdnje, see ©renje. 
 
 n. -fcg, p. ©rdfer, grass. 
 
iSi 
 
 ©ran- -£auf 
 
 $an$ — £cr 
 
 ©ran. adj. gray, grizzle ~ 
 
 ©reifen, v. a. c£* n. ir. to gripe, 
 grasp, seize, lay hold of. 
 
 ©rei^, adj. gray, hoary; - m. -feg, 
 />£ -fe, an old. man. 
 
 ©mr.c,/. -, />/. -n, limit, border. 
 
 ©nert)cn'lanb, n. -g, Greece. 
 
 ©rcb, ac?/. eroarse, clumsy, gross, 
 rude. 
 
 ©i OH, at(y. great, large, vast, huge, 
 high, tall, eminent, grand. 
 
 ©rube,/. -, pi. -n, pit, cavity. 
 
 ©rim, adj. green, verdant, fresh. 
 
 ©nmb, m. -eg, pi. ©ritnbe, ground, 
 bottom, foundation, reason. 
 
 ©iiitftig, adj. favorable, propitious. 
 
 ©ufias, rn. Gustavns. 
 
 ©Ut, adj. good, well, sufficiently, 
 good-natured, kind, pleasant, 
 convenient; -, n. -eg, pi. ©liter, 
 good, possession, estate, commo- 
 dity. 
 
 ©iite,/. -, goodness, kindness. 
 
 ©ttttg, adj. kind, benevolent. 
 
 £a, int. ha! 
 
 4>aar, n. -eg, pi. -e, hair, wool. 
 
 -£>aben, v. ir. aux. to have, possess. 
 
 fyabityt, 1,1. -eg, pi. -e, hawk. 
 
 £abgburg, n. Hapsburg. 
 
 4>aber, m. -g, quarrel, brawl. 
 
 •£>aDcrn, v. n. to quarrel, brawl. 
 
 £>afen, m. -g, pi. -pafcit, harbor. . 
 
 £>afcr, m. -g, oats. 
 
 £>agcr, adj. haggard. 
 
 £alb, adj. half. 
 
 £alb, tyalben, b,alber, prep, by reason 
 of, on account of. 
 
 ■£>allf,ett, /. -, pi. -en, mediocrity. 
 
 £>aiblaut, adv. in an under tone. 
 
 £a!m, m. -eg, pi. -e, stalk, halm. 
 
 £alten, j9. 350 ; v. ir. a. to hold, 
 keep, support, contain, stop, 
 maintain, manage, value, deem, 
 estimate, think, celebrate, treat. 
 
 jammer, m. —<,pl. f>dmmer, hammer. 
 
 £ummern, v. a. to hammer. 
 
 |>anb,/. -, pl..§>CL\\U, hand; -fl;ur), 
 m. glove, gauntlet. 
 
 £anbcln, v. a. to handle, treat; v. n. 
 to act, trade, deal. 
 
 handling,/. -, pi. -en, action, deed. 
 
 k>o.nff m. -eg, hemp. 
 
 £>angen, p. 330; v. ir. n. to hang, 
 dangle. 
 
 £armtog, adj without grief, harm- 
 less. 
 
 harmonic',/.-,/)?, -n, harmony. 
 
 ■turt, adj. hard, severe, rigorous. 
 
 £<a(e, m. -n, ^£. -n, hare. 
 
 £>affen, v. a. to hate. 
 
 £>aiUu'b, adj. ugly, wicked, dirty. 
 
 baft,/.-, haste. 
 
 £aupt, n. -eg, ^Z. £>d'upter, head. 
 
 ■£>auptgefd)dft, n. -eg, -g, _pJ.-e# main 
 business. 
 
 £auptmann, m. -eg, pi. -manner, 
 — leutc, captain. 
 
 £auptfrabt, /. -, pi. -ftdbte, capital 
 metropolis. 
 
 §>o\x§, n. -feg, pi. ^xutfer, house, 
 household, family; - frau, /. 
 housewife. 
 
 £augbrob, n. -eg, pi. -e, household 
 bread, domestic-bread. 
 
 ■£>augl)aluutg, f. -, pi. -en, house- 
 keeping, household, family. 
 
 £eben, p. 350; v. ir. a. to lift, raise, 
 elevate. 
 
 £eer, n. -eg, pi. -c, army, host. 
 
 £eil, ac[/. healed, sound, unhurt; 
 n. -eg, welfare, health. 
 
 £eiltg, adj. holy, sacred. 
 
 £>etltgen, v. a. to hallow, consecrate. 
 
 £ctmbrtngcn, v. a. ir. to bring home. 
 
 £>etmliti}, adj. secret, private. 
 
 |)einrid), m. -g, Henry. 
 
 £>et f p', adj. hot, ardent, torrid. 
 
 £er P 'en, p. 350; '<;. ir. a. & n. to call, 
 bid, enjoin, to be called, be said, 
 mean, signify, be considered; 
 roag foil bag -'i what doe:- that 
 mean ? what do you mean by 
 that? eg fyeigt, i' G is sa *d, they 
 say; bag l)ti$t, that is to say, that 
 is; rote l)ei£en ©te'f what is ycur 
 name ! 
 
 •fetter, adj. serene, clear, fair, 
 bright, cheerful. 
 
 £>elfen, p. 350 ; v . ir. n. to help, m> 
 sist, save, avail. 
 
 $til, adj. clear, bright, light. 
 
 ■per, adv. hither, hitherward. 
 
 £>cval', adv. down from, down, 
 downward. 
 
 £eran', adv. on, near near to, tip, 
 upward. 
 
Jper — £ut 
 
 £im — $vti,n 
 
 485 
 
 $eran'riti!en, v. «. to advance, ap- 
 proach, march on. 
 
 $evauf, adv. up, upward. 
 
 £erau['tmben, v. a. ir. to force or 
 press up. 
 
 ^eruuc'fommevw f. n. ir. to come out. 
 
 ■pevauo jcfyreiten, v. n. ir. to step 
 forth. 
 
 f>erb # ^crBci adj. acerb, bitter, eager, 
 harsh, sour. 
 
 $trbei', utfy. hither, near, on. 
 
 §erbei'brinaen# v. a. ir. to bring for- 
 ward, produce. 
 
 #erbei'yubjen, v. a. to lead near, 
 bring on. 
 
 $efbei'tragen ; v. a. ir. to bring or 
 letch to or in. 
 
 §erb|t, m. -:v, harvest, autumn. 
 
 fiernie'Der, adv. down, downward. 
 
 4?enue'Derblitfen, v. to look dow T n. 
 
 fKruie'oerfommeu, v. n. ir. to come 
 down. 
 
 £err, m. -en, pl.-zn, master, gentle- 
 man, lord, sir. 
 
 $ttrlid)» adj. magnificent, glorious, 
 splendid. 
 
 £eirltd)fd:, /. ' -, pi. -en, magni- 
 ficence, glory, splendor. 
 
 .pen -\X)i\\, v. n. to rule, reign, govern, 
 prevail. 
 
 ^rj'tamuieil, v. n. to descend, issue 
 from, come from. 
 
 £eruoev, adv. over, across. 
 
 Remitter, adv. down. 
 
 §er»or'ge&tB» v. n. ir. to go forth, 
 proceed, follow. 
 
 ■peiycr'boum, v. a. to fetch out. 
 
 ^eryor'neteit, v. n. ir. to step forth, 
 appear. 
 
 §cr$, n. -ett$ ( pL-ta, heart, courage. 
 
 ^ei'slid), adj. hearty, cordial. 
 
 |«riogi m. -tv, pi. -e, duke. 
 
 f>erjog3l)Uii m. -t$, pi. -t;ute, ducal 
 hat. 
 
 £e|Te, m. -it, pi. -n, Hessian. 
 
 §eu, n. -e$, hay. 
 
 •peud)elet',/. -,pl.-zn, hypocrisy. 
 
 |>euleit, v. n. to howl. 
 
 £eute, adv. to-day, this day ; - ju 
 %a$t, now-a-days. 
 
 $>ev, adv. here, in this world; -I)er, 
 hither, here. 
 
 $Url)cr'fejpmett» v. n. ir. to come 
 hither. 
 
 £>immeb m. -3, pi. -, heaven, hea- 
 vens, pi. sky, zone, climate. 
 
 $tmmltfav adj. heavenly, celestial. 
 
 ■ptit, adv. thitner, away, gone, lost, 
 on, along, down. (L. 52.) 
 
 ■pUUtf'f ado. down, down there 
 (see beruntcr, Ijiimutcr), 
 
 £unab'fa!ieu, v. n. ir., imp. to fall 
 down. 
 
 ■ptiniuf'/ adv. up, up there. 
 
 ■lunauf'fMgen, v. n. ir. to step o? 
 climb up. 
 
 £iuauo', adv. out, out there. 
 
 £»tnauo'gcben, v. n. ir. to go out. 
 
 •ptnetn'retten, v. n. ir. to ride into. 
 
 4>inciii'ivagen, v. r. to venture in. 
 
 lumuijmen, v. a. ir. to take, receive. 
 
 ■ptnmeljen, v. a. to reach, hand; -, 
 v. n. to suffice. 
 
 $injul)i, /. -, view, respect. 
 
 Winter, prep. &• adv. behind, after, 
 back, backwards. 
 
 £tflitberi adv. over, across, beyond. 
 
 &mai'fugen, v. a. to add to, join, 
 adjoin. 
 
 £iv[a), m. -e3, pi. -e, stag, hart. 
 
 4>obd, m. -i, pi. -, plane. 
 
 |>od), adj. high, lofty, sublime 
 
 £od)ft, adv. most, extremely. 
 
 ■pof['en, v. a. & n. to hope, expect, 
 trust. 
 
 £onmmg,/. -* pi* -Mt hope, ex- 
 pectation. 
 
 porting, m. -3, pi. -e, courtier. 
 
 ■pbfye, /. -, pi. -n, hight, highness, 
 elevation; ut-.pbb v e, up, upward 
 
 ■pot)!/ adj. hollow, concave. 
 
 •petjntactyen, v. n. to laugh in scorn, 
 scoff. 
 
 £5Ui[d), adj. hellish, infernal. 
 
 |>cden v. a. to fetch, go for; -laffftlj 
 to send for. 
 
 |>ol$, n. -e3, pi. -? & £otjer, wood 
 timber; -fyauer, woodcutter. 
 
 ^oljevn, adj. wooden. 
 
 £onig m. -t$, honey. 
 
 £onigicpf, m. -eo, pi. -, -tt'Jjfe 
 honey-jar. 
 
 •poren, v. a. <k n. hear, give ear. 
 
 ■porn, n. -e£» pi. Corner, horn. 
 
 £>ub(d), adj. pretty, fair. 
 
 £>uf, m. -a, pi. {, hoof. 
 
 ■piigel, m. ~%, pi. -, hillock, MIL 
 
 #ul}it, n. -i§, pi. $itbner, fr wi 
 
48G 
 
 £ul-3ag 
 
 Sag— tfauf 
 
 £tilfe, /, -, aid, help, succor, as- 
 sistance, relief. 
 
 -£>iilf(og, udj. helpless. 
 
 $unb, »i. -eg, p/. -e, dog. 
 
 £imbd)cu, (L. 24. 1). 
 
 ■£>unbcrt, see § 45, (1). 
 
 |>unberifdlttg, hundredfold, a hun- 
 dred things. 
 
 pungent, v. n & imp. to hunger. 
 
 #iipfen> v. n. to leap, hop, skip. 
 
 #ut, m. -eg, jpZ. £ute, hat, bonnet; 
 -matter, m. -g, ^>/. -, hatter. 
 
 §>ittte,/. -,pl. -it, hut, cot, cottage. 
 
 3 («MW). 
 
 3d), ^n. I. 
 
 Sf)r, jom. your, to her, her, its, 
 you, their. 
 
 Smmer, adv. always, ever. 
 
 3n, /»"£/>. into, in, at, within, to, of. 
 
 Sttbi'tutfttg, adj. ardent, fervent. 
 
 Snbem', conj. while, when, because, 
 since. 
 
 3lu)altgfd) trier, adj. significant, full 
 of meaning. 
 
 Snnere, adj. inner, interior, intrinsic, 
 fig. heart, soul. 
 
 Snnerfyctll), prep, within. 
 
 Snnerltd), adj. inward, internal, in- 
 trinsic, hearty, mental. 
 
 Sttfel, /. -, pi. -n, island, isle. 
 
 Snggefyetm', adv. privately, secretly. 
 
 Sntereffant', adj. interesting. 
 
 Sntere ffe, n. -g, pi. -n, interest. 
 
 Srbifd), adj. terrestrial, earthly; bag 
 3rbifd)e, earthly portion, posses- 
 sion. 
 
 Srrert, v. n. to err, go astray ; v. r. 
 to mistake, commit an error. 
 
 3rrltd)t, n. -g, pi. -er, ignis fatuus, 
 "Will-o'-the-wisp, Jack-o'-lantern. 
 
 SSlcmb, n. -g, Iceland. 
 
 Stalie'ner, m. -g, pi. -, Italian. 
 
 StaUe'ntfd), adj. Italian. 
 
 3 (Sonfonant)* 
 
 3a, adv. yes, why, indeed, on any 
 account ; bu tijatft eg ja fretnntltg, 
 why you did it voluntarily; ay 
 yea; jaroofyl, certainly. 
 
 Sacfe,/. -, pi. -n, jacket. 
 
 Sagb, /. -, chase, hunt. 
 
 "Sagb^unb, m. -eg pi. -e, hunting- 
 dog, pointer, hound. 
 
 3ctgen, v. a. & n. to chase, hunt; in 
 tie $tud)t -, to put to flight. 
 
 Sdger, m. — g, pi. —, hunter. 
 
 Safjr, n. -eg, pi. -e, year; -Sjelt,/. 
 season. 
 
 Santmern, v. a. & n. to lament, 
 mourn, pity, feel pity. 
 
 S^ttuar', m. -$, January. 
 
 3e, adv. ever, always ; -nacljbein, 
 according as. 
 
 Scber, prn. every, each. 
 
 Sebermann, prn. every body. 
 
 Sebod)', conj. however. 
 
 Sefjo'vafy, m. -g, Jehovah. 
 
 3emcmb, prn. somebody, any one. 
 
 Setter, jerte, jetted, prn. that, yorj, 
 yonnder, the former. 
 
 Seitfettg adv. on the other side. 
 
 3e$t, adv. now. at present. 
 
 Sottig, (gen. of Suptter), of Jupiter. 
 
 Sugenb, f. -, youth. 
 
 Sugenbltd), adj. juvenile, youthful. 
 
 Sung, adj. young, new, recent. 
 
 Sungling, m. -*&, pi. -e, youth, lad. 
 
 Sitngltnggfeuer, n. -g, youthful 
 ardor. 
 
 Sunt, m. June. 
 
 Sunfer, m. -g, pi. -, young noble- 
 man, squire. 
 
 Suptter, m. -g, Jupiter. 
 
 m 
 
 $affee, m. -g, coffee. 
 $dftg, m. -g, pi. -e, cage. 
 Rafyn, m. -g, pi. $af)ite, boat. 
 $atfer, m. -g, pi. -, emperor. 
 ■ftaiferin, /. -, pi. -nen, empress. 
 Malb, n. -g, pi. flal&er, calf. 
 Malt, m. -eg, pi. -e, lime. 
 Malt, adj. cold, chill, frigid. 
 Mattz, /. -, cold, coldness, 
 ^ameet', -eg, pi. -e, camel. 
 $amerab', m. -en, pi. -en, comrade 
 $amtn', n. -eg, pl.-t, chminey, fire 
 
 place, fire-side. 
 $amm, m. -eg, pi. Mammt, comb. 
 ^ampf, m. -eg, pi. Mampft t combat 
 Maxim, /. -, pi. -n, can, jug. 
 Man\d,f. -, pi. -n, pulpit. 
 Martian', m. -g, pi. -e, capitain. 
 Marl, m. -g, Charles. 
 $dfe, m. -g, pi. -, cheese. 
 $aufen, v. a. to buy, purchase, 
 tafmann, m.-§, pl.-ltuti, merchant. 
 
tfaum— $orfc 
 
 &> 
 
 *3 
 
 487 
 
 Jlaum, adv. scarce, scarcely. 
 
 $ef)vcn, v. a. to brush, sweep. 
 
 $etdjen, v. n. to pant, gasp. 
 
 JTt\\n (feiiter, feme, fcuteg), adj. pm. 
 no, not any, no one, none. 
 
 ^etnegroegg, adv. in no wise, by no 
 means, not at all. 
 
 teller, in. -g, pi. -, cellar. 
 
 Refiner, m. -g, pi. -, waiter. 
 
 tfennert, p. 350; v. ir. a. to know, 
 be acquainted with. 
 
 fienntmg, /. -» pi. -e, knowledge, 
 science, acquirement. 
 
 $erfer, m.—%,pl. -, prison, dungeon. 
 
 Sii\}d, m.-$,pl.—, kettle. 
 
 fifttCf/. -i />£. -U, chain. 
 
 Btufym, see ,ftct.-()cn. 
 
 fieule, /. -, />/. -, club. 
 
 5tiub, ?4. -eg, p?. -er, child, infant. 
 
 $inbifd)i adj. childish, childlike. 
 
 $tixtf)t,f. -, pi. -tt, church. 
 
 itivfebbaum, m. -eg, pi. -Mume, 
 cherry-tree. 
 
 lUrfcfye, /. -i jt>/. -n, cherry. 
 
 $lagen» v. n. to complain, lament. 
 
 itlage/. -, p£. -tt, complaint, lamen- 
 tation, plaint. 
 
 $lagtid)» ac//*. lamentable, mournful, 
 pitiful. 
 
 Rlax, adj. clear, bright, fair, plain. 
 
 $Ieib, «. -eg, jd£ -cv, garment, 
 dress, garb. gown. 
 
 .fvlelrt, adj. little, small, trifling. 
 
 $(cmpner, m. -g, pi. -, tinman. 
 
 $lettent, v. n. to climb, scramble. 
 
 Mill.}, adj. prudent, ingenious wise, 
 judicious, skillful. 
 
 Ifrtctk, m. -n, pi. -n, boy, lad, 
 
 $?nccl)t, m.-iv,pl. -e, servant, slave. 
 
 £itopf, m. -eg, pi. $rti)pfe, button. 
 
 5htogpe,/. -,pl. -n, bud, eye, 
 
 Sto<§, m. -eg, pL Jlodje, cook. 
 
 tod)iu (L. 23. 5.). 
 
 Coffer, m. -g, pj. -# coffer, trunk. 
 
 $ol/le, /. -, pi. -it, coal. 
 
 ,5nnnmen, p. 350; v. ir. n. to come, 
 arrive at, get to. 
 
 $5tttg, ra. -g, jo?'., -e, king; -retd), 
 n. kingdom. 
 
 $imtgirt,/. -, £>Z. -nert, queen. 
 
 ^biractt, v. n. ir. to be able, be per- 
 mitted, know. (L. 45. 5. & p. 350). 
 
 £opf, ra. -eg, j?J. $5pfe, head. 
 
 Hori), ra. -eg, pi. $orbe, basket. 
 
 ihu'it, ». -eg, pi ..Torner, grcan, corn. 
 -atjre,/. ear of corn. 
 
 ^crper, »i. -3, _p'. -, body. 
 
 Soften, v. n. to cost. 
 
 ftrctft, /. -, pi. $rafte, strength, 
 iorce, vigor, faculty, power. 
 
 $raft, prep, by virtue of. 
 
 Jt'rdfttg, adj. strong, powerful. 
 
 $ragen, ra. -s, pi. Jfragcn, collar 
 
 $rd|e,/. -, pi. -it, crow. 
 
 ^Trantif), m. -eg, p£. -e, crane. 
 
 $rftltf» adj. sick, ill, diseased. 
 
 ^rd'nfen, v. a. & r. to grieve, vex 
 
 $retbe,/. -, chalk. 
 
 ^Tretfen, v. n. to move in a circle, 
 turn round, revolve, whirl. 
 
 Rxtu\, 11. -eg, pi. -e, cross, crucifix; 
 -jug, ra. crusade. 
 
 Jtricdjcit, p. 350; v. ir. n. to creep, 
 crawl. 
 
 $rieg# ra. -eg, jo?, -e, war. 
 
 .ftrtcger, ra. -g, jt>£. -, warrior. 
 
 •Shieggutg, ra. -eg, ^rieggjitge, cam- 
 paign. 
 
 ou\- totul', m. & n. -eg, pi. -e, cro- 
 codile. 
 
 $roite, /. -, pi. -n, crown, coronet, 
 head, top (of a tree). 
 
 $rug, m. -g, pi. Jlritgc, pitcher. 
 
 Pilfer, ■■/!. -:■, pi.—, cooper. 
 
 Stul) t f. -,pl.'^t, cow. 
 
 Stix{){, adj. cool, fresh, cold. 
 
 ^:i!v.t, adj. bold, hardy, dauntless. 
 
 Summer, ni. -:-, sorrow, grief. 
 
 itUiiDe, /. -, pi. -it, knowledge, in 
 formation, news, notice. 
 
 olii tftig, adj. future, next, coming; 
 ing TCUnftigc, for the future. 
 
 $imji, /. -, pi. Stwfte, art, skill. 
 
 ^nitfilcr, m. -g, pi. -, artist. 
 
 Jtupfer, n. -g, copper. 
 
 ^upfent, adj. copper, of copper. 
 
 fi.ux\, adj. & adv. short, brief, short 
 ly, in short. 
 
 .$lul|"d)ev, m. -g, pi. -, coachman. 
 
 Sa'Dert, v. a. to refresh, recreate. 
 i]vul)el't, v. n. to smile. 
 Saa)eu, to laugh, smile, 
 Scidjerlidj, adj. ridiculous. 
 £aci)g, m. -[eg, pi. -e, salmon. 
 £ager, n. -g, pi. -, & ^dger, coaen, 
 bed, camo. 
 
488 
 
 2ag— 2 eft 
 
 Seib— So3 
 
 Sagern, v a. to lay down, store, en- 
 camj), lie down. 
 
 Sa y m, adj. lame, halt, halting. 
 
 Samm, w. -eg, joZ. Sdmmer, lamb. 
 
 Scmb, w.. -zi,pl. Member, land, ground, 
 soil, country; -In.fi, /. country- 
 air; -ntartn, in. peasant; -jlrajjc, 
 /. high-road, highway. 
 
 Sdnblti), adj. rural, country-like. 
 
 Sctnbfdjaft, / -, pi. -en, landscape. 
 
 Seng, adj. long, tall, during; -cod" 
 lig, tedious, tiresome. 
 
 Scnge, adv. long, a long time. 
 
 Sangeroeile, /. -, ennui, heaviness, 
 tediousness. 
 
 SdngS, adv. along. 
 
 Sangfctm, adj. slow, dull, heavy. 
 
 Sdngfi, adv. long ago, long since. 
 
 Sa|Jcn, to let, permit, allow, give, 
 suffer, fit, become. (L. 45. 11. & 
 p. 350.) 
 
 Safifr;ier,w.-e$,jt>?.-e,beast of burden. 
 
 Safrerfyaft, ac?/. vicious, wicked. 
 
 Sdftig, adj. burdensome, trouble- 
 some. 
 
 Sanf, m. -e3, pi. Schtfe, run, course, 
 currency, current. 
 
 Saufen, jo. 350 ; v. ir. n. to run. 
 
 £attne, /. -, pi. -n, humor, temper, 
 whim, freak. 
 
 Sctut, m. -e3, _pZ. -e, sound, tone. 
 
 Saut, ad/. <& a^y. loud, aloud. 
 
 Sdntern, v. a. to purity, refine, clear. 
 
 Seben, v.n to live; ra.-3, life, vivacity. 
 
 Seben, n. -i, life. 
 
 Scbett'oig, ««§?. living, alive, quick. 
 
 Sebcr, ».,-§, jt>/. -, leather. 
 
 Sebtg, aJ/. empty, void, vacant, free. 
 
 Seer, adj. empty, void, vain. 
 
 Segen, v. a. to lay, put, place ; v. r. 
 to lie down. 
 
 Sef)en, n.-i,pl.- t tenure, possession. 
 
 Cefren, v. «. to teach, instruct. 
 
 Sefyrer, m. -3, pi.-, teacher, instruc- 
 tor, professor, master. 
 
 Schrerm (L. 23. 5). 
 
 Settling, m. -e3, pi. -e, apprentice. 
 
 Se^rreui), adj. instructive. 
 
 Seib, m. — ee, p/. -er, bo.ly. 
 
 Sei:l)t, ad/, light, easy, fickle. 
 
 Seii)tj"i;tiug, adj. light, light-minded. 
 
 Seib, adj. sorrowful, troublesome; 
 e3 ij't mir -, e3 ir;ut mir -, I am 
 sorry for it. 
 
 Seib, n. -e3, hurt, pain, sorrow. 
 Setben, p. 350; v. ir. a. & n. to sul 
 
 fer, endure, bear, tolerate; n. —3, 
 
 pi. -, suffering, misfortune. 
 Seibenfinff, /. -, pi. -en, passion. 
 Seifyen, p. 350; v. a. to lend, borrow, 
 Setpjig, n. -§, Leipsic. 
 Seife, adj. low, soft, light. 
 Seiffert, v. a. to do, render, perform, 
 
 accomplish, execute. 
 Setten, v. a. to guide, lead 
 Serdje, /. -, pi. -:x, lark. 
 Semen, v. a. & n. to learn ; auSnHrt* 
 
 big -, to learn by heart. 
 Sefen, p. 350 ; v. ir. a. & n. to read 
 
 gather. 
 Sei}t, adj. last, ultimate, final. 
 Sen, m. -en, pi. -en, lion. 
 Seuijten, v. n. to shine, light, give 
 
 light. 
 Send)ter, m. -3, pi. -> candlestick. 
 Seute, p£. people, persons. 
 Sid)t, n. -e£, pi. -e & -er, light, 
 
 candle; e3 gtng ir)m ein - anf, he 
 
 began to see, understand. 
 Sieb, adj. dear, beloved, pleasing* 
 
 e3 Ifl mir -, I am glad. 
 Stebe,/. -, love, affection. 
 Steben, v. a. & n. to love. 
 Sieber, comp. of lieb & gem, adj. 
 
 dearer; adv. rather, sooner. 
 Stebltd)feit, /. -, loveliness, amiable- 
 
 ness, sweetness. 
 Sieb, n. -e$, pi. -er, song, hymn. 
 Stegen, p. 350 ; v. ir. n. to lie. 
 Stnbe,/. -, pi. -n, linden-tree. 
 Stnf, adj. left, left-handed. 
 Sob, n. -e3, praise, commendation, 
 So ben, a. a. to praise, commend. 
 Sod), n. -e3, pi. Sdd)er, hole. 
 So (fen, v. a. & n. to call, decoy, bait, 
 
 allure, entice. 
 So jf el, m. -$, pi. -, spoon. 
 Sofyn, in. & n, -z$,pl. Sorme, reward, 
 
 wages, pi. hire, pay, salary. 
 So3, adj. & adv. loose, free, rid. 
 Se[d)papicr, n. blotting-paper. 
 Soogefyen, v. n. ir. to come off, begin, 
 
 go off; ctuf©tnen-i to attack one. 
 Sotfretjlcn, v. a. ir. to tear off, Lreak 
 
 loose; v. r. ir. to disengage one'i 
 
 self by force. 
 So^roinben, v. a. & r. ir. to untwist^ 
 
 tear away, disengage one's self. 
 
Sow— Sftaf 
 
 gwaj?— ate 
 
 4sy 
 
 £olt>e, m, -ti, _pZ. -it, lion. 
 Sucitt'bc, /. Lucinda. 
 (•uft,/. -•, pi. Sufte, air, breeze. 
 £ liftmen, n. -3, jo?. -, breeze. 
 2ugf,/. -; />£. -n, lie, falsehood. 
 Siigeit, p. o50; ?'. ir. a. & n. to lie, 
 
 tell a lie. 
 2u|l# /• -, j»£. Stifle, pleasure, joy, 
 
 enjoyment, delight, inclination, 
 
 fancy, desire. 
 
 UJfadjen, v. a. to make, fabricate, 
 
 produce, represent. 
 38ad)t, /. -, pi. ?)idd)te, might, force. 
 SRad) tig, a$. mighty, powerful; eincr 
 
 ©pradje - fettl, to be master of a 
 
 language. 
 3)?db<$en, n. -g' _p£. -, maiden, girl. 
 9ftagbeburg, n. *-g, Magdeburg. 
 Sftager, at//, meager, lean. 
 Magnet', m. -g, jo£. -c, load-stone, 
 
 magnet. 
 SRaljteit, p '652 ; v. ir. a. to grind. 
 2)fal;rd)cn, n. -g, pi. -, tale, legend, 
 SKat, 7». -;$,pl. -e, <£ -en, May. 
 SRatlteb, n. -eg, May song. 
 SDMg, m. maize, Indian corn, 
 Sftajcjtal', /. -,pl. -en, majesty. 
 SWaiefhVttfd), ad/, majestic. 
 3»at, 7u -g, _pZ. -c, time. (§ 50.) 
 Scaler, m. -4, jt>£. -, painter. 
 5Ralta, 7i. -g, Malta. 
 Scan. (L. 19). 
 
 SDtanckr, inand)e, mcmd)eg, prn. ma- 
 ny a, many a one, much. 
 SJiand)e, pi. many, some, several; 
 
 manges, many things. 
 ■Kanbet,/. -, pi. -n, almond. 
 2ftamt, m. -eg, p£. Scanner, man, 
 
 husband. 
 SJJcmnfyeim, 7r. Manheim. 
 SWantel, 771. -g, y. Mantel, cloak 
 §Kd*rdjen, see 9ftabrd)en. 
 Sftarft, m. -eg, ^ 2JMrfte, market, 
 
 mart, market-place. 
 Wl armor, m. -g, ^£. -e, marble. 
 Sforfc&dl, 7/i. -eg, -g, pi. 5Karfd)dHe, 
 
 marshal. 
 93tori# 7/?.. -eg, j»J. -e, March. 
 SKajer, /. -, pi. -n, speck, spot; btc 
 
 -n, measles 
 
 ffftajjtg, adj. moderate, temperate. 
 SRdjjigung,/. -, pi. -en, moderation 
 
 temperance. 
 Sftajr, »*. -eg, jpZ.-ett, mast. 
 ©ktro'fc, ?/i. -n, _p*'. -n, sailor. 
 SRaultyietf w. -g, /j» ; . -e, mule. 
 SDiattrer, 7?.i. -g, pi. —, mason. 
 5fted}a'nifd> adj. mechanical. 
 SEKeer, ». -eg, p£ -e, sea, ocean, 
 5Heeregn?oge,/.-,_pZ.-tt, wave, billow 
 Witty, n. -eg, pi. e, flour, meal, dust. 
 SJJtebj, adj. more, longer. 
 SPldjrere, «$• pi. several. 
 SKeiben, p. '652; to avoid, shun. 
 Wltin, meinc, meitt, ^wi. my, mine. 
 Sfteittett, v. a. & n. to think, suppose. 
 SJietttUltCi /. -,■ pi. -en, opinion, 
 
 meaning, intention, mind. 
 SKeigel, m. — g, jp£. -, chisel. 
 SKcifter, m. -g, pi. -, master. 
 9?Mben, v. a. to announce, notify. 
 SJfelo'ne,/. -, pi. -n, melon. 
 2)tenge, /. -, pi. -n, multitude, great 
 
 many, great deal, plenty. 
 SSftettfd), m. -en, pi. -en, man, human 
 
 being, person, mankind. 
 SKenfdjentyerj, n. -eng, pi. -en, human 
 
 heart. 
 9Jcen[d)()ett,/. -, humanity, mankind. 
 9)?enfd)lid>, adj. human, humane. 
 Sfterfcn, v. a. to mark, note, perceive 
 
 observe. 
 Sfleffen, p. 352 ; v. ir. a. & n. to mea- 
 sure, survey, compare. 
 SKepr, n. -g, pi. -, knife ; -fdjmteb, 
 
 m. cutler. 
 SP^cfftngetti adj. brass, brazen. 
 SJUene, /. -, pi. -it, mien, air, look 
 
 countenance. 
 Wdti,/.-, milk. 
 9ftttbigitc§, mildly, charitably. 
 SDftttbefh- adj. smallest, lowest. 
 Sftintfr'er, m. -%,pl. -, minister. 
 SJitpbraud), m. -g, SPttfjbrducfye, abuse, 
 
 misuse. 
 SJUjjjlid), adj. doubtful, precarious. 
 Sftifjlm'gcn, p. 352 ; v. ir. n. to go 
 
 amiss, fail. 
 SJUtJmutfy, m. -eg, ill-humor, melan- 
 choly, sadness. 
 $SfttJ3»er|ie§eit, see fter)e:t, p. 356.,* ft 
 
 ir. a. to misunderstand. 
 5fttt, pr<?/). with, by, at, upon, und^v 
 
 to. 
 
190 
 
 9Rlt— 9kd) 
 
 9kd)— ftid)t 
 
 SDHtncfjnUn, v. a. ir. to take along 
 with. 
 
 9ttitfd)ulcr, m. -g, -pi -, fellow- 
 scholar, 
 
 3Rttfd)Uleritt, f. (L. 23. 5.) 
 
 SJitttaggfirppe, /. -, pi. -n, dinner. 
 
 Sftittet, w.— g, pi.-, middle, medium, 
 mean, means, expedient, remedy. 
 
 SJtitten, adv. in the midst, in the 
 middle of, in the heart of, amidst. 
 
 WloQzn, to have a mind, like, wish, 
 be able. (L. 45. 7. £ p. 352. 
 
 Sftonctt, m. -eg, pi. -e, month, moon. 
 
 Sftonb, rn. -eg, pi. -e & -en, moon, 
 month. 
 
 SJtont'fdjeitt, rn. -eg, -g, moon-light, 
 moon -shine. 
 
 5?icn[tcitv (French), Sir, Mr. 
 
 3)Jorgen, m. -g, pi. -, morning, 
 morn, Orient, East ; adv. to- 
 morrow. 
 
 Sftorgenbammerung, /. -, day-break, 
 morning-twilight. 
 
 9ttorgenltd)t, rc.-eg, pl.-zx, morning- 
 light. 
 
 SD^orgeitrot^e, /. -, aurora, morning- 
 dawn, twilight. 
 
 'Sftube, adj. weary, tired, fatigued. 
 
 s Nuf)t,f.~-,pl.-n, toil, pain, trouble. 
 
 Soulier, m. -g, pi. -, miller. 
 
 CP?imd)en, n. -g, Munich. 
 
 SRutib, rn. -eg, pi. Sftunbe (timber), 
 mouth. 
 
 SJfturren, v. n. to grumble, growl. 
 
 SKuftt',/. -, pi. -en, music. 
 
 Suiting; adj. idle, dormant. 
 
 Wuztil, m. -g, pi. -n, /. -, pi. -n, 
 muscle. 
 
 SRiiffen, v. n. ir. must, to be obliged, 
 be forced (L. 45. 8), p. 352. 
 
 yjlviix), m. -eg, courage, spirit, mood. 
 
 9ftut(;tg, adj. courageous. 
 
 QfttltljftntUg, adj. petulant, pert. 
 
 JWutter, /. -, pi. Gutter, mother. 
 
 iftad), prep, after, behind, in, at, to, 
 for, toward, upon, according to. 
 
 9?ad)t>ctr, m. -g, pi. -n, neighbor. 
 
 5Rad)barin (L. 23. 5). 
 
 9?ad)bem', conj. after, when. 
 
 iftcd)benfen, see benfen, p. 346; v. ir. 
 n. to meditate, reflect. 
 
 9kd>en, m. -g, pi. -, boat, skiff. 
 
 S^ctdjgefyen, v. n. ir. to go after, follow. 
 
 3?ad)l)cr', adv. afterward, after that> 
 hereafter. 
 
 9?ad)tctfftg, adj. negligent, careless, 
 slovenly, inattentive. 
 
 $ad)rtd)t, /. -, pi. -en, account, ad- 
 vice, intelligence, news, tidings. 
 
 9?ad)fet-en, v. n. to sed after, run after. 
 
 9lad)\i&)t, /. -, forbearance, indul- 
 gence. 
 
 yiad)\t, prep, next, next to. 
 
 3?ad:r, / -, pi. dladju, night. 
 
 yia&)tiQa{l,f. -, pi. -en, nightingale. 
 
 JlaM,f. -, pi. -it, needle. 
 
 9?agel, m.—$,pl. SWgel, nail, pin, peg. 
 
 DZa^e, adj. near, nigh. 
 
 ■Wafyen, v. n. & r. to approach, draw 
 near. 
 
 9?afyen, v. a. & ?i. to sew, stitch. 
 
 Wtyxtxi, v. a. & n. to ioster, feed, 
 nourish. 
 
 Sftantc, m. -ng, pi. -n, name; title, 
 renown, reputation. 
 
 S^ap, adj. wet, moist. 
 
 9ktur',/. -, pi. -en, nature. 
 
 9?ebel, m. -g, _p/. -, mist, fog. 
 
 Stfeben, jorep. by, near, beside, be- 
 sides, by the side of, next to, 
 close to, with. 
 
 Sweden, v. a. to banter, tease, pro- 
 voke, irritate, vex. 
 
 Sftejfc, m. -n, pi. -n, nephew. 
 
 9lt\)mm,p. 352; v. ir. a. to take, re- 
 ceive ; fid) in $ld)i -, to beware. 
 
 9?eib, m. —eg, envy, jealousy. 
 
 Sfteibifd), a$. envious, grudging. 
 
 S^etgen, v. a. to bend, incline; v. r. 
 to approach, bow, turn. 
 
 ^etgung, /. -, pi. --en, inclination, 
 proneness, disposition. 
 
 9Mn, ady. no. 
 
 $telk,f. -,pl. -n, pink. 
 
 9iennen, p. 352 ; v. ir. a. & r. to namo, 
 denominate, call. 
 
 Sfemnfteber, w. -g, pi. -, nervous 
 fever. 
 
 9? eft, n. -g, ^>Z. -er, nest. 
 
 9?eu, a$'. new, fresh, recent, modern, 
 aufg 9?eue, won 9teucm, anew 
 afresh, again. 
 
 Sfteuerfdjaffen, ad;', new-created. 
 
 9?engieiig, adj. curious, iuquisitiva 
 
 Sfeultd), adj. late, recent. 
 
 9tojig, § 45. (1). 
 
m&)t— Deft 
 
 tyaax — $reu 
 
 49i 
 
 9li(f}i, adv. not. 
 
 prw. nothing:, naught. 
 ?ilo. at?v. never at no time. 
 S$teberf(tCBen, v. n. ir. to How clown, 
 
 or under. 
 
 ■ v. n. to kneel clown. 
 SftieDerlaffcn, v. a. ir. to let down ; v. 
 
 r. ir. to settle, sit down, alight. 
 9itcmaU-, adv. never, at no time. 
 Sttemcmb, prn. nobody, no one. 
 3fa)d), adv. yet, still, more; conj. nor. 
 SRorbctt, in. -v, north. 
 
 . -5, Norwegian. 
 $ti>if), adj. needful, necessary; c3 
 
 tfyut -, it is necessary; /."-, pi. 
 
 9co!f)wt, need, distress, ealamity. 
 jftun, adv. now, at present, well, 
 
 well then, 
 Sftuv, adv. only, jnst, but, ever. 
 9tut;en, nii£cn, v. a. & n. to use, make 
 
 use of, be of use, be useful, 
 92iU;ltd), adj. useful, profitable. 
 
 c 
 
 D6, conj. whether, if though; cdo-, 
 as if; prep, over, on account of. 
 
 £bn\, above, on high. 
 
 Dberon, m. Oberon. 
 
 Dbevfyaib, prep, above. 
 
 Dbcvft, m. -en, pi. -en, colonel. 
 
 Dbgleid/, conj. though, although, 
 notwithstanding. 
 
 DMate,/. -, pi. -n, wafer. 
 
 Db\t, n. -cv, fruit, fruits; -garten, 
 m. orchard. 
 
 jDd)3, vi. -fen (or Ddjfe -a), p/.-n, ox. 
 
 Dber, t-o??;'. or, or else, either, or. 
 
 Dfen, m. -3>, pi. Defen, stove. 
 
 Djfen, adj. open. 
 
 Dfftucv', m. -3, pi. -t, officer. 
 
 Dejfnen, v. a. to open. 
 
 ■Oft, adv. oft, often, frequently. 
 
 Cljctm, m. -it pi. -e, uncle. 
 
 3Df)ne, without, destitute of. 
 
 Dljr, n. -5, pi. -en, ear. 
 
 Deb ». -e3, i>" -e» oil. 
 
 IDnfel, m. e, pJ. -, uncle. 
 
 DrbentUd), adj. orderly, regular. 
 
 Drt, m. -t$,pl. -e, & Derter, place. 
 
 £)}i, m. East. 
 
 Dften, m. -$, East. 
 
 JDefierreid), w> -3, Austria. 
 
 iDejlerrcidjer, w*. -3, pi. -, Austrian. 
 
 §)aar, m. ~i§, p£ -e, pair, couple., 
 
 a few. 
 9)alaft', »w -Cv, pl.-U\tc, palace. 
 Javier', n. »t$,pl.-Z, paper. 
 SPara'kl, /. -, £>/. -it, parable. 
 ^Vuiv', ». Paris. 
 
 $Paffen, «>■ «• & w. to lit, suit. 
 
 §)atrio'ii|"d), adj. patriotic. 
 
 Spasnct, n. Pa via. 
 
 §)erle, /. -, pi. -en, pearl. 
 
 §)ej! f /.-,j?£.-en, pestilence, plague. 
 
 9)etfcl)aft, //. -c£, _p£ -e, seal. 
 
 9) fab, m. -t$, -<■, pi. -c, path. 
 
 tyfan, m. -co 1 & -en, pi. -c &-en; 
 peacock. 
 
 spfejfer, vi. -a, pepper. 
 
 spfeifen, p. 3o2; v. ir. a. & n. to pipo, 
 whistle. 
 
 SPfetl, m. -ev, j3?. -e, arrow. 
 
 §)ferb, «. -t$, pi. -c, horse. 
 :,/. -,pl.-Vl, peach. 
 
 SPflanje, /. -, p/. -n, plant, veget- 
 able, 
 
 £ :, «. a. to plant, set, trans- 
 pi.: 
 
 spflaume,/. -, pi.-?., plum. 
 
 . i>. a. to take care of, nurse, 
 1 bo; v. n. to be accustomed, 
 indulge. 
 
 . / -,pl.~ZXi, duty, obligation. 
 
 §)fliiiJen, v. a. to pluck. 
 
 spfunb, ». -c^, j"/. -c, pound. 
 
 9>ilfett, n. -c, Pilsen. 
 
 5>infel, m. -i, pi. -, paint-brush, 
 pencil. 
 
 §):an, m. -cv, pi. -e & 9Hane, plan, 
 design. 
 
 ^loylld), ac?/. sudden, instantaneous 
 on a sudden, at once. 
 
 9)ijbel, m. -y, mob, populace. 
 
 $>oet, m. -en, 7J>^. -en, poet. 
 
 5 J)cle, m. -n, p/. -n, Pole. 
 
 9)oli'ren,. u. a. to polish. 
 
 ^orjctta'n, n. -i, porcelain, china. 
 
 %>vctct)t, /. -, pomp, state, splendor, 
 j, adj. magnificent, splendid. 
 
 §)rafttfdj, adj. practical. 
 
 |)reblgcn, v. a. & n. to preach. 
 
 sprebtgt, /. -, pi. -en, .';ermon. 
 
 ^reifen, p. 352 ; v. ir. a. to praisej 
 commend, call. 
 
 9)rcu^c, vi. -v, pi. -n, Prussian 
 
492 $mt— fteg SFteg — Rub 
 
 9>rcufien, w. -3, Prussia. SRegen, m. -3, pZ. -, ra'n, shower, 
 9>romc'tt)CU3, m. Prometheus. -frf)trm, m. -umbrella. 
 
 QJalt, ». ~e$, joZ. -e, desk. SRcgie'ren, v. a. & n. to reign, rule, 
 SPuIaer, w. -3, pi -, powder. govern. 
 
 9)ufcen, v. a. & r. to dress, attire, SJtegte'nmg, /. -. pi -en, reign, gov- 
 trim, clean. ernment. 
 
 Regiment', n. -c3, pi -er, regiment. 
 
 d 3Mcf), «<#. rich, wealthy, opulent; 
 
 Ditto., ». a. to pain, torment, «t "«*' *'• " e ' em P iie > "•H 
 
 plague. - w k i n § com : 
 
 • e yiCtf, aq/. ripe, mature. 
 
 $jc> 9£eifen, w. «. to grow ripe, ripen. 
 
 ~' M 9lel$e, /. -, pl.-n, row, rank, file. 
 
 SKaue, wi. -n, />•?. -rt, raven. range, order, series, turn. 
 
 JRacfye, /. ~, vengeance, revenge. -Stein, «<#. clean, pure, clear, in- 
 
 Siacfyen, v. a. to revenge, avenge; nocent. 
 
 v. r. to revenge one's self, take Steimgen, v. a. to purify, cleanse. 
 
 vengeance. Sftetfe,/. -, pi. -n, journey, voyage. 
 
 Skb, w. +e§ ; -3, £>£ Siaber, wheel. Stcifen, v. n. to travel, journey, 
 
 sftanb, m. -eS, ~3, pi. Stanbcr, edge, Stetfenb, ad/, traveling ; ber 9icifenbc, 
 
 brim, brink, margin. the traveler. 
 
 Stcmg, m. -e§, _p£. SUnge, rank, order, Stettf, m. -e£, rice. 
 
 rate, dignity, quality, row. flttittn, p. 352; v. ir. a. & n. to ride, 
 Stctfen, m. -3, pi. -, turf, sod, clod. go on horseback. 
 
 Stafcn, v. n. to rave, rage, bluster, better, m. -$, pi. -, horseman. 
 
 fflaty, m. t§, counsel, advise, means, SMigW, /. -, pi. -en, religion. 
 
 expedient ;bagegenrotrbfef)onSktfj, SReligtos', adj. religious. 
 
 for that there is redress (a re- Stennen, v. n. ir. to run, race. 
 
 medy); bajii faun tljm Statt) werbeit, SRepublu',/. -, pi -en, republic. 
 
 in tills he can be helped, this he Steinrtiitljtg, adj. repentant. 
 
 can do. Stettotutio'n,/. -, pl.-ti\, revolution, 
 
 dlaub, m. -e 3, robbery; -ttogel, m. O^hein, m. -z$, Rhine. 
 
 bird of prey. 3ttd)tcn, v. a. & r. to direct, raise, 
 Stall ben, v. a. to rob, spoil, steal. arrange, adapt, judge, execute, 
 
 Stauber, m. -$, pi -, robber. criticize; ju $runbe -, to ruin, 
 
 9? ami) en, v. a. & n. to smoke. destroy. 
 
 JRaum, vx. -zi, pi. Dianme, room, Sfcidjter, m. -$, pi. -, judge. 
 
 space.. Sttd)ug, adj. right, exact, just, true 
 
 §f?ec|i, adj. right, just, true, real, 9tiz\t,m.-n, pi -n, giant j-ngeturge, 
 
 legitimate, rightly, wel, very. n. Giant Mountains. 
 
 SPiecbt, n. -zi, pi -z, right, claim, Sting, m. -zi, pi -z, ring. 
 
 title, privilege, immunity, law, SttngS, adv. around. 
 
 justice. Stocf, m. -z%,pl. SRotfe, coat. 
 
 9led)tfeutgen, u. a. to justify, vindi- Stoggen, m. -$', rye. 
 
 eate, exculpate. dlo'tj, adj. raw, crude, rough, rude, 
 
 SteDe, /. ~, jcZ. -n, speech, harangue, 9?r^r, w. -Z§, pi -e, reed, cane. 
 
 oration, discourse. Olont, w. -^, itome. 
 
 S^eben, «. a. & n. to speak, talk, dis- JJbfe,/. -, p/. -n, rose. 
 
 course. fRo\zn(toztt -z$, pi -ftijie, rose-b iso, 
 
 fJiebner, in. -§, pi. -, orator. dlo\h n. -\\zi, pi \\z, horse, steed. 
 
 Diegel, /. -, pi -n, rule, principle. jfto'p'ieut, w -o, jo/. -, horse. ^L. 24) 
 
 Siegctniaptg, adj. regular. $0|ltg, adj. rusty. 
 
 Eftegen, v. a. Jc r. to stir, move, Sftotf), ac?;'. red. 
 
 rouse, be active. dtub'ux', m. -3 pi. -t, ruby. 
 
Stuff — ^d;aj7 
 
 e^aii— @d)i 
 
 493 
 
 $U(J, m. -z$, pi. -e, stroke, pull, fit, 
 jolt, jerk. 
 
 Stiicfen, m. -3, pi. -, Lack, ridge. 
 
 Sftitdit.vt, /. -, pi. -en, view, respect, 
 consideration, regard. 
 
 SMtrfivcj, m. -e3, pi. -e, return. 
 
 3cuf, m. -cv, pl.-z, call, cry, clamor, 
 sound, voice. 
 
 SRufeit, jo. 352 ; v. ir. a. & n. to call, cry. 
 
 dluijc, /. -, rest, repose, quiet, tran- 
 quillity, peace, sleep. 
 
 9tuljeti|'fen, n. -$, pi. -, pillow. 
 
 SRitfyen, v. n. to rest, repose. 
 
 SiutHO., quiet, peaceable 
 
 0tut)m, m. -:1, glory, renown, fame. 
 
 Oinbmon, v. a. to praise, glorify, ex- 
 tol; v. r. to glory in, boast of. 
 
 SRu\\t, m. -n, pi. -n, Russian. 
 
 Stu^lanb, n. -<>, Russia. 
 
 m 
 
 ©afcBatf), to. -e3, -3, pi. -e, sabbath. 
 <ScLd)t, f. -, pi. -n, thing, matter, 
 
 affaii-, concern, business. 
 ©ad)jen, n. -$, Saxony. 
 ©<t(f# »«. -zi, pi. ©arte, bag, sack. 
 Sagcri, v. a. &l n. to say, tell, speak. 
 Sttl$, «•-*$! pL -t§ salt. 
 ©amntcl.i, v. a. to collect, gather; v. 
 
 r. to assemble, collect one's self. 
 5anb, to. -eS, sand. 
 'Banff, adj. gentle, soft, mild. 
 ©anger, m. -#, pi.-, singer, songster. 
 ©orbi'nierii n. -3, Sardinia, 
 ©attei, m. -i, pi. Battel, saddle, 
 ©attler, to. -:■, pi. -, saddler, 
 ©af , w. -e>3, jo/. 3iU : e, leap, jump, 
 
 sediment, position, thesis, point, 
 
 sentence, period, stake. 
 ©aufen,_p. 352 ; v . ir. a. & ?i. to drink 
 
 (of beasts). 
 ©aufer, m. -3, pi. -, drunkard. 
 ©angling (©augleirt), m. -$, pi. -e, 
 
 suck ing, babe. 
 ©djaar, /. -, pi. -en, troop, band, 
 
 horde, multitude. 
 ©d)aarera»eife, adv. (L. 52. 5), in 
 
 bands, by swarms.. 
 ©djaben, in. -$, pi. ©d)dben, loss, 
 ©djaben, v. n. to hurt, injure, dam- 
 age, prejudice. 
 ©cl>af, n. -eg, pi. -e, sheep, 
 ©djajfen, p. 352 ; to create, procure, 
 
 carry, convey. 
 
 ©d)aff, m. -c3, pi. ©djdlle, sound, 
 ©djdntenj v. r. to be ashamed, 
 ©djamljafttgf ett# /. bashfulness, mo- 
 desty, a shrinking from. 
 ©djanbe/. -, shame, disgrace, 
 ©cbarf, adj. sharp, acute, severe, 
 ©djarladjfteber, n. scarlet-fever. 
 ©(fatten, to. -i,pl.-, shadow, shade, 
 
 phantom. 
 ©djafcj to. -c3, pi. ©d)d§e, treasure 
 ©d)Ct§en, v. a. to prize, value, esti- 
 mate, esteem. 
 <3a)ciiibui)iK,f-,pl.-n, stage, theater. 
 ©djauett, *>. #• to look, see, view. 
 ©d)aufe(,/. -, pi. -n, shovel. 
 ©djdnnten, v. a. to skim; v. n. to 
 
 foam, froth. 
 ©djctuftrieler, to. -i, pi. -, actor. _ 
 ©d)etnen, #. 352; v. ir. n. to shine, 
 
 appear, seem. 
 ©djelien,^. 354 ; v. ir. a. & to to scold, 
 
 chide. 
 ©djenfen, v. a. to give, present. 
 ©ijerett, jd. 354; v. tr. a. to shave, 
 
 shear, 
 ©djetj, to. -cS, p?. -e, jest, joke. 
 ©d)er,rebe, /. -, pi. -n, pleasantry. 
 ©d)iden, v. a. & n. to send, dispatch, 
 ©dncffal, n. -o, pi «c, fate, destiny, 
 
 change. 
 ©tt)ic§en, j?. 354; v. in a. & w. to 
 
 shoot, discharge, dart, rush. 
 ©djiff, n. ~ii, pi. -e, ship, vessel, 
 
 nave (of a church). 
 ©d)tjferi to. -4, pi. -, mariner. 
 ©d)Ubwad)e,/. -,jo^ -n, sentinel. 
 ©d)inbeni p. 354; ». ir. a. to flay. 
 ©djirnt, m.-ti,pl.-i, screen, shelter, 
 
 shield, protection. 
 ©d?lfld)t,/. -, /tf. -en, battle. 
 ©d)Iad)tcn, v- a. to ■ laughter, kill. 
 ©d)Iacfe, /. -,pl.-n, dross, refuse. 
 ©djlaf, in. -£g, sleep, rest. 
 ©d}lafen,_p. 354; v. ir. n. to sleep, rest. 
 ©djlag, to. -ti, pi. ©djlagc, blow, 
 stroke, kind, sort, stamp, apo- 
 plexy. 
 ©djtogeit, p. 354 ; v. ir. a. to beat, 
 
 strike, slay, coin, warble, 
 ©djknge, /-, pi. -n, serpent, snaka 
 ©d)Ici)t, adj. bad. base, mean 
 ©d)Ietd)en, p. 354 ; v. ir. n. to sneak, 
 
 slink, move slowly. 
 ©d)Ieier, m. -0, _pZ. -, veil 
 
*94 
 
 @$1— 6d}ul 
 
 (Sd}ii — (Bid) 
 
 $od)leijen, j». 354; ?;. ir. a. to grind, 
 
 polish, furbish. 
 < B(\)lk^zn, p. 354- ; i;. er. a, & w to shut, 
 
 lock, close, conclude. 
 <Sd)Umm, a$. ill, bad, evil, sad, 
 
 arch, sore, unwell. 
 ©cljloij, v - -\ft$rpl- £>dj (offer, lock, 
 
 castle. 
 (Sd)lo|fer, or od)loffer, (L. 26.) 
 ©glummer, m. -3, slumber, nap. 
 ©d)(mumerfonUctn, «. -i, pi. -, seeds 
 
 of slumber. (L. 24). 
 €>d)(utmnern, v. n. to slumber, 
 ©'djlujfel, »t. -it pi- -t key. 
 'Sdjmcden, v. a. & n. to taste, relish; 
 
 fid) C0 gut -laffen, to eat or drink 
 
 with good appetite ; i. c. to relish 
 
 greatly. 
 ©d)meid)et|aft, adj. flattering. 
 <Sd)mctd)eln, v. n. to flatter, wheedle. 
 
 caress. 
 <Sd)metd)ler, m. -§, pi. -, flatterer. 
 Sd)mcl}en, p. 354; v. ir. u. to melt, 
 
 dissolve ; reg. a. to melt. 
 <Sd)mer;„ m. -e#, pi. -en, pain, ache; 
 
 fig. affliction, grief. 
 (Sajinetiau, m. tSchmettau. 
 <5d)nuei), -ti, pi. -e, smith. 
 *3d)mietien, v. a. to forge, fetter, 
 
 chain. 
 6d)mMen, v. a. to adorn. 
 (3d)inui?ig, adj. foul, dirty. 
 Sdjnce, m. -$, snow. 
 '&d)Mt\vti$, adj. snow-white. 
 (Sdjtieibett, p. 354; to cut. 
 <£d)iietDer, m. -4, pi. -, tailor. 
 (Sdjitell, adj. quick, swift, sudden, 
 ©djltelle, / -, rapidity, swiftness. 
 @d)on, adv.. already, even. 
 (3d)0lt, adj. beautiful, fine, fair. 
 (5d)oncn, v. a. to spare, save. 
 ©d)bnt)ett, /. -, pi. -en, beauty. 
 <Sd)bpfung,/. -, pi. -en, creation. 
 ©cfyrcmf, m. -e£, pi. <3d)ranfe, shrine, 
 
 chest. 
 ^dretbpapter, n. writing-paper. 
 <Sd)reiben, p. 354; to write. 
 ©dn-eten, p. 354; to cry, scream. 
 ©d)riit, m. -eg, pi. -e, step, stride, 
 
 pace, stalk. 
 <Sd)u(), m. -e3, pi. -< t shoe. 
 <3d)ul)mad)er, m.-$, pi-, shoemaker. 
 (Sd)ittD,/.-, pi. -en, guilt, debt. 
 €5d)iiiDig, adj. guilty, indebted. 
 
 ©djule, /.-, pi. -n, school. 
 
 £>d)u(er, vx. -o, pi. -, scholar 
 
 Sd;iilcnn (L. 23. 5). 
 
 ©d)utjen, v. a. to shelter, defend, 
 
 ©d)il§cngel, vi. —i, pi. -, guardian- 
 angel. 
 
 <Sa)n)al'cn, n. Suabia. 
 
 (Btywa&i, adj. weak, feeble, imbe- 
 cile, faint. 
 
 ©d w.i per, m, -6, pi. <Sd)avaacr, bro- 
 ther-in-law. 
 
 ©djWQgerht, /. -, pi. -ncn, sister-iii 
 law. 
 
 @d)n)al6e,/. — , pi. -n, swallow. 
 
 <5d)iuantni," m. etf, pi. dcdjwammt, 
 sponge. 
 
 ©d)iuan, m. -e$, joZ. @d)tt>ane, swan. 
 
 <3u);.M;ifcn, v. n. to stagger, fluc- 
 tuate, waver, hesitate. 
 
 (Bdhvann, m. -t$, pi. <Sd)n>a rme, 
 swarm, crowd, throng, cluster. 
 
 ©d) roars, adj. black, dark. 
 
 @d)UHU'$en, v. a. to blacken, black. 
 
 (Sdyaicbcn, v. v. to wave, to hang, to 
 be suspended. 
 
 ©d)webe, m. -n, Swede. 
 
 ©d)roeuen, n. Sweden. 
 
 (Sd)ivet'tnb, Swedish. 
 
 (Sd)n.vcif, m. -t%, pi. -e, tail, train. 
 
 <Sd)iyeti]cn, v. n. ir. to be silent, keep 
 silent, stop. 
 
 (Sd)U)cKcn, v. a. to swell, make swell, 
 raise; v. n. p. 354; to swell, rise, 
 heave. 
 
 <Sd)n>cr, adj. heavy, difficult, hard; 
 eS faflt -, it is difficult. 
 
 <5d)rocvnut'i£, /. melancholy, sadness. 
 
 (5d)n>er'i, n. -t$, pi. -cr, sword. 
 
 (Sd)iDejrer,/. -, pi. -n, sister. 
 
 <5d)nneng, adj. hard, difficult. 
 
 <Sd)ix>icrtgfeif,/.. -, pi. -en, hardness, 
 difficulty. 
 
 (B'cl)numm30oel, m. web-footed-bird. 
 
 ©cb/aummen, p. 354; to swim. 
 
 (Sd)tt)6ven, p. 354; to take an oath. 
 swear, vow. 
 
 (Bclasc, m. -n, pi. -n, slave. 
 
 (5ed)3, six. 
 
 ©ee^unb, m. -e§, pi. -e, seaL 
 
 (Seek, /. -, pi -n, soul. 
 
 ©egeln, v. a. & n. to sail. 
 
 ©egnen, v. a. to bless. 
 
 ©efjen, p. 354; to see, look, view, 
 behold. 
 
©e^r — &o 
 
 Gee — '8pi3t 
 
 495 
 
 Set)i, aa'f. very, much, greatly, ex- 
 tremely, very much. 
 
 ©eibe,/. -, pi. -n, silk. 
 
 ©etl, «. -cc, p/. -c, rope. 
 
 (Setter, in. -$, pi. -, ropemakcr. 
 
 ©cin (feiner), pr«. his, one's, its, of 
 his, of it. 
 
 ©cut, v. n. & aux. ir. to be, exist; 
 e$ fei, he it (L. 69. 10). 
 
 ©eit, adv. & prep, since. 
 
 ©cttbcm', adv. since. 
 
 ©ette,/. -, pi. -n, side, page. 
 
 ©elbfr, prep. & adv. self, even; - or 
 fetter, (L. 29. 3.) 
 
 8c tig, o«(/. blessed, blissful, happy. 
 
 ©ettcn, adj. rare, scarce, seldom. 
 
 ©enf, ;«. -Cv, mustard. 
 
 ©enf en, v. a. to sink, lower, let 
 down, lay. 
 
 ©e§en, v. a. to set, put, place; v. n. 
 to leap, pass over; v. r. to sit 
 down, perch. 
 
 ©euf;cn, o. n. to sigh, groan. 
 
 ©Kb, prn. one's self, himself, her- 
 self, itself, themselves. 
 
 Sit, prn. she, it, they, you. 
 
 8 id en, seven. 
 
 ©ieknjdtyrtg, adj. (of) seven years', 
 seven years old. 
 
 ©ico,, m. -e3, pi. -c, victory. 
 
 ©iegel, n. -, pi.-, seal; - lad, in. 
 sealing-wax. 
 
 ©iegetli v. n. to conquer. 
 
 (Sitber, n. -3, silver. 
 
 ©ilbern, a$. silver. 
 
 ©ilberjlreifett, m.-$,pl.-, silver-ray. 
 
 ©ingen, _/?. 354; to sing, chant. 
 
 Sittfen, p. 354, to sink; - taffen, to 
 let fall; ben 2Kutr) - tflflett, to be 
 disheartened. 
 
 Sinn, itg. -e3, ^£. -c, sense, mind, 
 intention, meaning, acceptation. 
 
 ©tnnlutb, n. -e£, pi. -cr, emblem, 
 symbol, allegory. 
 
 ©ttte,/. -, pi. -n, custom, manner; 
 ©ttten, pi. manners, morals. 
 
 SittenloS, adj. immoral. 
 
 <Sittfcun, adj. modest, decent, pro- 
 per, discreet. 
 
 ©t£en, p. 354 ; to sit, to be impri- 
 soned, fit. 
 
 ©maragb', m. -e3, pi. -en, emerald. 
 
 ©p, adv. & conj. so, thus, in such a 
 manner, such, so as, as, if, when. 
 
 ©obatb', adv. as soon as. 
 ©ofa, n. & m. -}, pi. -o, scfa. 
 ©ogtetdj', adv. instantly, immedi 
 
 ately. 
 ©or)rt, m. — e-3, pi. ©oljrie, son. 
 ©olefyer, prn. such. 
 ©jetbat', in. -en, jpJ. -en, soldier. 
 ©elDner, m. -3, p£ -*# mercenary. 
 ©ellcn (L. 45. 9). 
 ©ommer, ™. -3, 7^. -, summer. 
 ©ommertctg, m. -it, pi. -e, summer 
 
 day. 
 ©onber, prep, without. 
 ©onbern (L. 21. 4). 
 ©omte,^. -, pi. -a, sun ; -nf;()ctn, m. 
 
 sunshine; -afctjtrin, m. parasol, 
 ©otmtag, m. -::•, pi. -c, Sunday. 
 ©artfi, adv. else, otherwise, in other 
 
 respects, bes'des, moreover, at 
 
 other times, formerly (L. 69. 28). 
 ©oplja, see ©ofa, 
 ©opbron, m. Sophron 
 ©orge, /. -, pi. -n, care, concern, 
 
 sorrow ; - tragert, to take care, 
 ©orgfaltig, adj. solicitous, careful 
 ©patten, v. a. <fc n. to split 
 ©pantcn, n. Spain. 
 ©pantfeb, adj. Spanish. 
 ©pat, adj. late. 
 ©paten, m. -6, pi. -, spade. 
 ©pajte'ren, v. n. to walk; -geljen, to 
 
 take a walk. (L. 49). 
 ©peebt, vi. -;•;■, pi. -:, wood-pecker, 
 ©peer, m. — t§,pl. c, spear, lance. 
 ©pctdicr, m. -$,pl. -, granary, ware- 
 house, store-house. 
 ©pet]":,/. -,pl.-\\, food, dish, meal. 
 ©perlirtg, m. -5, pi. -c, sparrow. 
 ©perren, v. a. to shut, close, bar, 
 
 scop, block up. 
 ©■(.-(lare,/. -, pi. -it, sphere. 
 ©ptegel, 111. -*>, pi. -, looking-glas3, 
 ©ptel, n. -e£, pi -c, play, game, 
 
 sport, diversion. 
 ©pietcn, v. a. & n. to play, act. 
 ©ptcter, m. -Z, pi. -, player, per 
 
 former. 
 ©pitmen, p. 354; to spin. 
 ©pt$, fpifctg, adj. pointed, 
 ©ptjptg, appointed, sharp. 
 ©pctten, v. a. to mock, deride, scoff 
 
 banter, ridicule, 
 ©potteret,/. -,pl. -en, gibe, mockery 
 
 derision. 
 
4% Spra — ©til ©tint- — £ab 
 
 ©pradjc, /. -, pi. -n, language ©ttmme, /. -, pi. - .1, voice. 
 
 ©pred)en, p. 356 ; to speak, talk, say, ©ttrn, /.'«-, -en, front, forehe'id. 
 
 pronounce, declare, uttei*. ©toe!, m. -eg, pi. ^btbife, stick, caneu 
 
 ©pmfyvort, -eg, pi. ©prtd)tt>5rtcr, ©tolpern, v. n. to stumble, trip. 
 
 proverb, adage, saying. ©tulv adj. proud, haughty; in. -eg» 
 
 ©prhttfen, p. 35(J. ; to leap, spring. pride, haughtiness, arrogance. 
 
 ©taat, m. ~-t&, pi. -en, state. ©t5renfrieb,ra. disturber of the peace. 
 
 ©tab, m. eg,j)/.©tdbe, staff, stick,rod. ©torer, m. -Z, pi. -, disturber. 
 
 ©tad)et, in. -g, pi. -n, sting. ©trafen, v. a. to punish, reprove. 
 
 ©tabt,/. -, jo^. ©tdbte, town, city; ©trai/(e;!, v. a. & n. to beam, emit 
 
 -lob en, n. city-life. rays, dart beams. 
 
 ©ictt;I, in. -eg, ;;/. (Stable, steel. ©tra^e,/. -, pi. -n, street. 
 
 ©tafytcvn, adj. steel. ©traud)eln, v. n. to strunble, make 
 
 ©tall, /ft. -t$,pl. ©tatte, stable, stall, a false step, fail. 
 
 sty. ©tratttf, m. -eg, pi. ©traugett, ostrich 
 
 ©tamm, m. -eg, jp£ ©tdmme, stock, ©treben, v. n. to strive, struggle. 
 
 trunk, stem, stalk, race, family. endeavor, aspire. 
 
 ©tarf, adj. strong, stout, loud. ©trecfen, v. a.&r. to stretch, extend, 
 
 ©tarfe,/. -, pi. -n, strength, force. lengthen. 
 
 ©tarfunav/.-^Z.-en, strengthening, ©trett, -eg, combat, fight. 
 
 corroboration. ©trctten, p. 356; to fight, contend, 
 
 ©tattlid), adj. stately, splendid. litigate, 
 
 ©taub, m. -eg, dust, powder; fid} ©ireuen, v. a. to strew, scatter 
 
 attg bem -e ntad)en, to run a way. sprinkle, spread. 
 
 ©taimen, v. n. to be astonished, ©ironi, m. -eg, pi. ©trome, stream, 
 
 stare; - n. -g, astonishment, torrent, flood, current. 
 
 surprise. ©tiicf, ft. -eg, pi. -e, piece, head. 
 
 ©tedjen, p. 356; to sting, prick, ©iubi'ren, v. a. to study. 
 
 pierce, cut, engrave. ©tltfyl, m. -eg, pi. ©tittle, chai) 
 
 ©tekn, p. 356; to stand, remain, stool, seat, pew. 
 
 stop ; eg ftefyt bei 3fynen, it depends ©tumm, adj. dumb, mute, silent. 
 
 uponyou; eg ftet)t Ujmgut, that be- ©iumpf, adj. blunt, dull. 
 
 comes him well. ©tunbe, -, pi. -n, hour, lesson. 
 
 ©tel)len, p. 356 ; to steal, pilfer. ©mm, in. -eg, pi. ©titrate, storm, 
 
 ©tetgen, p. 356; to mount, ascend, alarm, tumult, assault. 
 
 descend. ©titr^en, v. a. & n. to throw, preci- 
 
 ©tetl, adj. steep. pitate, Overthrow, fall, rush. 
 
 Stein, m. -eg, pi. -e, stone, rock, ©ud)en, v. a. to seek, search, look 
 
 chessman, man, pawn. for, try. 
 
 ©telle, /. -, pi. -it, place, stand, ©itb, m. -eg, south. 
 
 spot, situation, office. ©itben, in. -g, south. 
 
 ©telicn, v. a. to put, place, set. ©umpf, m. -eg, pi. ©itmpfe, pocl, 
 
 ©tempel, in. -g, pi. -, stamp. fen, marsh, bog; -sogel, m. mo- 
 
 ©terben, p. 356 ; to die, decease. rass-bird. 
 
 ©terblid), adj. mortal, desperate. ©ihtbe,/. -,pl.-v., sin, trespass. 
 
 ©tan, m. -eg, pi. -e, star. ©imbfyaft, adj. sinful. 
 
 ©tiefel, m. -g, pi. -n, boot. ©up, adj. sweet, agreeable, 
 
 ©ttel, in. -eg, pi. -e, handle. ©ugigfett,/.-, sweetnes?, saccharin© 
 
 ©till, adj. still, silent, quiet, calm. substance, pi. r-txi, sweets. 
 
 ©tiL'c,/. -, stillness, silence, quiet- g« 
 
 ness, calmness, tranquility. ^ 
 
 ©tttien, v. a. to still, appease, nurse, Zalah m. -g, pi. -e. tobacco. 
 
 silence. £abet, in. -g, fauit, blame. 
 
 ©til/fd)tteia,enb, adj. silent, tacit. £abetn, v. a. to blame, censure. 
 
Za$ — Zxntt 
 
 %i\&}— 2usJ 
 
 497 
 
 Sag, m. -c3, pi. -e, clay; -loftier, 
 
 vi. day -laborer. 
 Sd'glid), Sagtdg'Ud), adj. daily, 
 talent', n. -2,^pl. -c, talent. 
 Sane-, m. -Zt, trash. 
 Jaime, /. -, }>l. -n, fir, fir-tree, pine. 
 Santc,/. -, jo/, -en, aunt. 
 San;, m. -c$, />/. Same, dance. 
 5£an$ett, v. a. & n. to dance. 
 Slopfer, a<#. valiant, brave, gallant. 
 SajVbe, f. -, pi. -n, pocket; -ntud), 
 
 n. pocket-handkerchief. 
 SafdKimbj, /. -,pl. -en, watch. 
 Saffe,/. -, jd^. -it, cup, saucer, dish. 
 Saab, adj. dcaf;fg. empty. 
 Saubc,/. -, jo/, -a, dove, pigeon. 
 Saad)en, v. a. & n. to dive, duck, 
 
 dip, iramerge, plunge. 
 Saud>cr, m. -o, pi. -, diver. 
 $aufd)Ctt, v. a. to delude, deceive, 
 
 disappoint, cheat. 
 SanfcnD, adj. thousand, ; -mat, a 
 
 thousand times. 
 Sell, m. Tell. 
 Seller, m. -3, pi. -, plate. 
 Seppid), m. -$, £>/. -e, carpet. 
 Sert, m. -zi, pi. -e, text. 
 itljal, «. ^e$, #2. Sljdler, dale, vale, 
 
 valley. 
 Scaler, in. -%, pi. -, thaler. 
 S£fati /. -, /)/. -en, deed, action, fact. 
 Sfjatig, adj. active. 
 S^ee^m. -z, tea. 
 Sfyctl, ?n. -e3, _p£. -e, part, share, 
 
 portion, deal. 
 S^eilen, v. a. to divide, part, share. 
 Sfjctlung, /. -, pi. -en, division, par- 
 tition, sharing. 
 Shier, n. -c3, pi -Z, animal, beast. 
 Sl;or, m. -en, pi. -en, fool, simpleton. 
 Sf)6rtd)t, adj. foolish, silly. 
 Sljrdne,/. -, pi. -n, tear, drop. 
 Sfjrcn, ?n. -ec>, p/. -e, throne. 
 3 bun, jo. 356; to do, perform, act; 
 
 zi tl)ut ntd)tc, it is no matter; c3 
 
 tbut 5cctl), it is necessary ; z$> t^ut 
 
 mil letb, I am sorry; rvcf) -, to 
 
 hurt. 
 tym, or Styiire, f. -, pi -en, door. 
 Sicf, adj. deep, low, pre found, high. 
 Sieger, Siger, m. -3, pi. -, tiger. 
 Stflu, m. -$, Tilly. 
 Stnte, /. -, pi -n, ink, tint; -nfaf, 
 
 ink-stand. 
 
 Stfd), »i. -zi, pi. -z, table, board. 
 Sifdjler, m.-i, p>L-, cabinet-maker. 
 Sol en, u. n. to rage, to din. 
 Sodjter, /. -, pi. Softer, daughter. 
 Sob, m. — ;3, death, disease. 
 SobeSengel, m. -£, pi -, angel of 
 
 death. 
 Sob?, adj. dead, lifeless. 
 Soften, v. a. to kill, slay. 
 Sen, m. -e3, pi S&ne, sound, tone 
 
 accent, stress, fashion. 
 Soncn, v. a. & n. to tune, sound, 
 
 sound sweetly, to ring. 
 Scpf, m.-zZ,pC%^\z, pot. 
 Sxdge, adj. idle, lazy, slothful. 
 Sragcn, p. 356 ; to bear, carry, wear. 
 
 produce, yield, suffer, support. 
 Srauen, v. n. to trust, confide in, 
 
 have confidence in. 
 Sraucrn, v. n. to be in mourning, 
 
 grieve, to be afflicted. 
 Snuicrnb;, w. &/.-:, pl.-n, mourner. 
 Sranltdj, adj. confiding, familiar, 
 
 cordial, intimate. 
 Sraum, m. -ec, pi. Srdume, dream. 
 SrQUmen, v. a. & n. to dream, fancy. 
 Sraurig, adj. sad, sorrowful. 
 Sreffen, n, 356; to hit, strike, hit 
 
 off, befal, meet. 
 Sreiben, p. 356; to drive, put in 
 
 motion, perform, float along. 
 Sreppe,/. -, pi. -n, staircase, stairs. 
 Sreten, p. 356; to tread, step, enter. 
 Sreu, adj. faithful, trusty, true. 
 Sricb, m. -z&, pi. -z, impulse, action, 
 
 drift, motion, instinct. 
 %XUlttXlfP. 356; to drink. 
 Srocfen, adj. dry, arid, barren, cold. 
 Sropf, m. -c3, pi Srbpfe, ninny, 
 
 simpleton. 
 Srojr, in. —z$, consolation, comfort, 
 
 encouragement. 
 Srofien, v. a. to comfort, console. 
 Srbfter, m. -3, pi. -, comforter. (L. 
 
 23. 5. 6.) 
 Sro£, prep, in defiance of, in spite 
 
 of, notwithstanding. 
 Src£en, v. n. to dare, br-rrft. defy. 
 SrugbilD, n. -e3, pi -er, x>^"tom. 
 Sru?, m. -z§, defiance, dui;ag; juri 
 
 -, in defiance. 
 Sud), n. -e3, pi. Siidier, clotb r hand* 
 
 kerchief, neckclcth. 
 Sugenb, /. -, pi. -en, virtue, q iftlity 
 
498 
 
 Xu$ — Urn 
 
 Urn— Unf 
 
 £ngcnb1)aft, adj. virtt.ous. 
 SCitrfe, m. -n, pi. -n, Turk. 
 Xmhi'ff Turkey. 
 Xywm', tii. -en, pi* -in, tyrai.t. 
 
 it 
 
 Hebel, adj. & adv. evil, ill, bad, 
 badly wrong, sick, sickly ; - WoU 
 len, tc bear a grudge. 
 
 Ueben, v a. to exercise, practise, 
 sxecuW, do. 
 
 Ue5er f prep. & adv, over, above, 
 beyond, besides, on, upon, at, 
 during, past, across, concerning. 
 
 Heberatt', adv. everywhere. 
 
 UeBerbVeS; adv. besides, moreover. 
 
 UeBetbriifftQ, adj. tired, wearied, sa- 
 tiated, disgusted. 
 
 He'berei'tung, f.-,pl.-m, precipit- 
 ancy. 
 
 Hebcrfufjren, v. a. to lead over, trans- 
 port; uberfiit/ren, v. a. to convict, 
 convince. 
 
 Hebergc'ben, v. a. ir. to surrender, 
 deliver; v. r. to surrender, retch, 
 vomit. 
 
 He'berk'gen, adj. superior. 
 
 Hebevmorgen, adv. day after to-mor- 
 row. 
 
 Hebernad/ten, v. n. to pass, or spend 
 the night. 
 
 Uekrnefymen, see nefjmen, p. 352; to 
 receive, accept, undertake. 
 
 Heberrocf, m. -e3, pi. -rode, overcoat. 
 
 Heberfd'en, v. a. to sow over, strew 
 over, cover with. 
 
 tteberfdjuf), m. -e3, pi. -fd)ub)e, over- 
 shoe. 
 
 Ueherfe^'en^ v. a. to translate. 
 
 Hebertref fen, v. r. ir. to surpass, ex- 
 cel, exceed. 
 
 Heberjen'gen, v. a. to convince. 
 
 Heberjte'ben, v. a. ir. to cover, fig. to 
 invade. 
 
 Hebung, /. -, pi. -en, exercise, exer- 
 cising, practising, practice. 
 
 Ufer, n.-$, pi. - f shore, coast, bank. 
 
 ttljr /. -, pi. -en, clock, watch; nne 
 suet - ijl e§, what time is it? 
 (L. 65. 1.) 
 
 Hr)rmad)er, m. -3, pi. -, watchmaker. 
 
 Um, prep., adv. & conj. about, round, 
 near, at, for, by, past, over, as 
 for ; - Ui, in order to. (L. 49. 5.) 
 
 Urn - iuiHen (L. 60. 5). 
 
 Hmctt'mung,/. <-, pi. -en, embrace. 
 
 Hmfan'gcn, v. a. ir. to embrace, en- 
 circle, surround. 
 
 Itmflttt'tern, v. a. to flutter or hover 
 about, flow round. 
 
 Umgang, m. -eg, -3, pi. -'gdnge, inter- 
 course, commerce, conversation, 
 company. 
 
 Hinge' 5 en, v. a. ir. surround, environ, 
 inclose. 
 
 Hinge (/en, v. n. ir. to go about, re- 
 volve ; mit 3emcmbem -, to have 
 intercourse with, associate with. 
 
 Hml)cr', adv. around, about, round 
 about. 
 
 Hmfyin', adv. about; id) lamt ntd)t -, 
 I can not forbear, I can not help. 
 (L. 45.) 
 
 Hm|d)ltn'gen, v. a. ir. to embrace 
 closely, enclose, surround. 
 
 Hmfd)lun'gen, p. embraced. 
 
 Hmfd)tt>dr'inen, v. a. to swarm around, 
 buzz around 
 
 Hmfonft', adv. gratis, without pay, 
 for nothing, in vain, vainly, to 
 no purpose, without cause. 
 
 Hmftanb, m. -eS, pi. -frdnbe, circum- 
 stance, condition. 
 
 Hnangene(;m, adj. unpleasant, dis- 
 agreeable. 
 
 Hnbanbig, adj. indomitable, unman- 
 ageable, intractable. 
 
 Hnbebentenb, adj. inconsiderable, in- 
 significant, unimportant. 
 
 Hnbefannt, adj. unknown, unac- 
 quainted with. 
 
 Hnbeobad)tet, adj. unobserved. 
 
 Hnbraud)bar, adj. unserviceable, 
 useless. 
 
 Hnb, conj. and. 
 
 Hneingebenf, adj. unmindful. 
 
 Hnerfaljren, adj. inexperienced. 
 
 Hnerme|3lid), adj. immeasurable, im- 
 mense, vast. 
 
 Hnerfcbiitteriid), adj. immovable. 
 
 Hnertrdglid), Itncrtrdg'Ud), adj. iutoler 
 able, insufferable, insu portable. 
 
 Hnfall, m.-t$>, pi. Hnfdlic, mischance, 
 misfortune, disaster. 
 
 ttttfcfylbctr, adj. infallible, certain. 
 
 Hnfern, prep, near, not far from. 
 
 Hnfonnltd), adj. deformed, dispro- 
 portionate. 
 
Unf—Urw Urts— Setfi 499 
 
 llngar, m. -n, pi. -n, Hungarian. Untvtbcvjicl)dd), adj. irresistible. 
 
 Ultgeadjtet, prep, notwithstanding. Umiuile, in. -n3, indignation, dis- 
 Ungebulbig, adj. impatient. pleasure, anger. 
 
 Ungemad), n.-ti, discomfort, fatigue. Unnulltg, adj. indignant, angry. 
 
 Ungemetn, adj. uncommon. ttltroofjl, adj. & ado. unwell. 
 
 Ungevcd)t, adj. unjust, unrighteous. llnjdfyl'bar, adj. innumerable. 
 
 Ungcfd)icft, awkward, unapt, un- Un\dl)ltg' see UitjCtylbat. 
 
 bandy. ttnaufrtebert, adj. discontent, discon- 
 Ungefcl)en f adj. unseen tented, dissatisfied. 
 
 11 ng c vo ob nt, adj. unaccustomed. Urqucll, m. -t$, pi. -ett, fountain 
 Utigleid)* adj. uneven, unlike, dis- head, original source. 
 
 proportionate, odd. Urfctdje,/. -, pi. -n, cause, reason. 
 
 Unglud, n.-ct, misfortune, disaster, Hrtbctt, n. -:<-, -c, judgement, sen- 
 adversity, calamity. tence, verdict. 
 
 flRglutflid), adj. unlucky, unhappy, Urtfyeilen, v . a. & n. to judge, be 01 
 
 unfortunate, disastrous. opinion, decide. 
 
 lbu)b|Ud), adj. uncivil, impolite. 
 
 UiUraut, n. -eo, weed, tare. § 13. 3.&. s» 
 
 Unnbttyig, adj. unnecessary. 
 
 Unvcdit, adj. wrong, unjust; n. -e3, Setter, m. S, pi SSater, father. 
 
 wrong, injustice. 23aterd)en, n.-i. (L. 24. 2). 
 
 Unrein, adj. unclean, impure. SScrrerlcmb, n. native country, fathei 
 Unfdjetnbar, adj. insignificant, un- land. 
 
 sightly. ©aterun'fer, n. -3, Lord's Prayer. 
 
 UnfdjulD, /. innocence. SJene'Dtg, n. Venice. 
 
 Un|d)ulDtg, adj. innocent, guiltless. SSera&'fctumett, v. a. to neglect. 
 
 tlnfer, prn. of us, our, ours; -cincr, SSeradj'ten, v. a. to despise, scorn. 
 
 one of us. SScrftn'berung, /. -, pi. -ett, change, 
 Uttjtdjer, adj. insecure, unsafe, un- alteration, variation. 
 
 certain, dubious. 3$erart'laffm% /. cause, occasion, 
 
 tttlftdjtbar, adj. invisible. Skvber'gen, v. a. ir. to hide, conceal; 
 Unficvb'ltd), ad,;', immortal. v. r. ir. to abscond, 
 
 llmcr, prep, under, below, beneath, SJerbcf ferung, /. -, pi. -en, amend- 
 
 anioug, amongst, between, be- ment, improvement. 
 
 twixt, amid, amidst. SJerlun'cen, v. a. ir. to bind up, tie 
 ttnterDiu'd'en, v. a. to oppress. up, unite, join, oblige, 
 
 ilntevfyalb, prep, below. Skrbor'gen, adj. hidden, retired. 
 
 llntcrncb/nicn, v. a. to undertake, 25erbrc'd)en, n. -3, pi. -, crime. 
 
 attempt; n. -6, undertaking. S3erbre'd)er, m. -3, pi. -, criminal, 
 
 ttnterrid/ten, v. a. to instruct. Serbret'ten, v. a. to divulge ; v. r. 
 UiUevfa'gen, v. a. to forbid, prohibit. to spread, be propagated, extend. 
 
 Uutcr[d)ieD, m. -zv,pl.-t, difference, 33erbrin'gen, v. a. ir. to spend, con- 
 distinction, sume. 
 
 ttlttenfyan, adj. subject to, dependent; SJerbdd)'ttg, adj. suspected, suspi- 
 
 m. -en, pi. -en, subject. eious. 
 
 UntertDer'fen, v. a. ir. to submit, 2>crbcr'ben,p. 35G; to corrupt, render 
 
 subdue. unfit, spoil, 
 
 llntveu, adj. unfaithful, faithless. SJerbie'nen, v. a. to gain, earn, merit, 
 Hn»ergc§lid), adj. memorable, not deserve. 
 
 capable of being forgotten. SJerbrie'jjen, v. imp. p. 356 ; to grieve, 
 Uiroerfef)eii3, adv. unexpectedly, un- cause, disgust, trouble. 
 
 awares. SJerbrieplid), or jjerfcrit^ltd), adj. 
 Unwa^vfdjeinlid), adj. improbable. morose, peevish, troublesome, 
 
 'lnix>eit, prep, near, not far from. irksome, vexatious. 
 
500 
 
 $crl>- 
 
 Ecrf—Slci 
 
 SJere'belu, v. a. & r. to improve, en- 
 noble 
 
 SSereb'lung, /. -, pi. -en, improve* 
 meat. 
 
 5>erct)'vcn, v. a. to honor. 
 
 Scret'ntgcn, v. a. to unite 
 ©erei'nigt, united. 
 
 SSerfal/ren, v. a. n. to act, proceed. 
 
 JSerfcty'lcrt/ v. a. to miss. 
 
 23;vfcr'tigen, v. a. to make, perform. 
 
 £iergcffen, p. 356 ; to forget. 
 
 SJergna'gen, n. -§, pi. -, pleasure, 
 diversion, delight, comfort. 
 
 3?eri}rtf ten, v. a. arrest, imprison. 
 
 SSer^dU'ntjjttJort, n, -e3, j^. —sorter, 
 preposition. 
 
 S5ert;ayt' # at#. hated, hateful. 
 
 SSerf'itl'ien, v. a. to veil, cover over, 
 wrap up. 
 
 SSerfal'ten, w. r. to take cold. 
 
 SSerfau'fen, v. a. to sell, vend. 
 
 SSerlan'gen, v. a. & n. to ask, demand, 
 desire, long for; e3 aerlangt mid) 
 jit nuffen, 1 long to know; n. -$, 
 desire, demand. 
 
 SSerlap', m. -\[t$, reliance, inherit- 
 ance, succession. 
 
 ©erla|'jen, v. a. ir. to leave, forsake; 
 v. r. ir. ctuf etnen -, to rely upon, 
 depend on; adj. destitute, aban- 
 doned. 
 
 SBerleum'buttg, /. -, pi. -en, calumny, 
 slander, defamation. 
 
 SSeriie'ren, p. 356; to lose. 
 
 Serlujl, m. -ee, pi. -e, loss, damage. 
 
 SSermte'tfyen, v. a. to let. 
 
 Sermit'lelft, prep, by means of. 
 
 ^enno'ge, prep, by dint of. 
 
 33evmo'gen, v. a. & n. ir. to be able, 
 to have the power; etnen ju etrocti 
 -, to prevail upon one to do ; n. 
 -i, ability, power, faculty, prop- 
 erty, wealth. 
 
 SBerau'ifyen, v. a. to suppose, pre- 
 sume, think. 
 
 SSentunfi'//. -, reason, sense. 
 
 SJcntUiifiig, adj. rational, reason- 
 able; sensible, judicious, discreet. 
 
 23 crp (ltd/ten, v. a. to bind by duty 
 or oath, to oblige. 
 
 23cvrcttf)', m. -e3, treason. 
 
 33erra'ifyer, m. -3, pi. -, traitor. 
 
 Serfam'meln, v. a. r. to assemble, 
 ireet, congregate. 
 
 S3erfd)al'(en, v. n. ir. to cease sotmd- 
 ing, die away. 
 
 3}erfd)en'fen, v % a. to give away. 
 
 ^erfcl)ioen'oeri|"d), adj. prodigal, lav 
 ish, profuse, wasteful. 
 
 3$erfd)n)itt'0en, v. n. ir. to disappear, 
 vanish. 
 
 SJerfeip'en, v. a. to answer, reply, 
 respond. 
 
 ©erfm'fen# v. n. ir. to sink down. 
 
 S3erfpot'ten, v. a. to scoff, deride. 
 
 23er|pre'd)en, v. a. ir. to promise. 
 
 SJerjlanb'f m. -eg, understanding, 
 intellect. 
 
 23erftdr/Dtg, adj. sensible, intelligent, 
 judicious. 
 
 23erjte't)cn, v. a. & n. ir. to under- 
 stand, apprehend, mean. 
 
 2$ er fret' item/ v. a. & r. to petrify. 
 
 £}er|M'iimg, /. -, pi. -en, dissimu- 
 lation. 
 
 SSerjhmt'men, v. n. to become silent, 
 cease to sound. 
 
 SSer|u'u)en, v. a. to try, attempt, ex- 
 perience, taste, tempt. 
 
 Serine i'Digen, v. a. to defend. 
 
 £>ertrctu'en, v. a. & n. to entrust, 
 confide ; n. -3, confidence, trust 
 
 SJertrei'ben, v. a. ir. to drive away, 
 chase, expel. 
 
 SBerur'fadjen, v. a. to cause. 
 
 $ermanb'te, in. &f. -n, pi. -n, rela- 
 tion, kin, kinsman. 
 
 SJerwei'ten, v. n. & r. to tarry, stay, 
 delay, retard, loiter. 
 
 23ern>itnfd)t', adj. accursed, detest 
 able. 
 
 3$erjet/ren, v. a. to consume, eat. 
 
 ©er^ei'fyen, see jeif)en, p. 356 ; to par 
 don, forgive, excuse. 
 
 Serjei'fyung, /. pardon; unt - Miten, 
 to beg pardon; unt SBerjetljmu} (»4 
 fcitte implied], your pardon. 
 
 SJerjwei'feln, v. n. to despair. 
 
 SJerjwet flung, /. -, despair, despe- 
 ration. 
 
 Setter, m. -$, pi. -n, cousin. 
 
 2Hef), n. -eg, beast, brute, cattle; 
 -fydnbler, m. dealer or trader in 
 cattle. 
 
 2Hel, adj. & adv. much, many, a 
 great deal; -meljr, adv. & co*ij. 
 more, much m:>re, rather. 
 
SSlcl— SCag 
 
 2S;il)— S3eg 
 
 501 
 
 S^Icfteidu', adv. perhaps, possibly, 
 may be. 
 
 SJier# four; -mat, four times. 
 
 SKertel, fourth. 
 
 ©terjeljtt, fourteen 
 
 SMerjig, fourty 
 
 SJogcI, m. -i, pi. 2*oget, bird, fowl. 
 
 Self, «. -ec, #J. Golfer, people, na- 
 tion. 
 
 SMtetefjver, m. -3, pi. -, teacher of 
 the people. 
 
 25ott, adj. full, whole, entire. 
 
 2>olfen'Den, v. a. to end, finish, ac- 
 complish, perfect. 
 
 SSotl, prep, of, from, by, on, upon. 
 
 f8ox, prep, before, from, of, ago, 
 since, in preference to. 
 
 SJorgeftem, adv. day before yester- 
 day. 
 
 SSorfyaben, v. a. ir. to design, intend, 
 purpose. 
 
 JBorljer', adv. before, previously, 
 beforehand. 
 
 ©LH'lun', adv. before, heretofore, a 
 little while ago. 
 
 Sortg, adj. former, last. 
 
 ©orneljm, adj. distinguished, noble, 
 of rank, gentle. 
 
 SJorritcfen, v. a. & n. to move for- 
 ward, march on ; n. — c, advance. 
 
 SSorfefyung, /. -, providence. 
 
 £)orfe£en, v. a. to set before, place 
 or put before, prefix. 
 
 8Jorftd)t, /. -, foresight, precaution, 
 providence, circumspection. 
 
 5Sor[td)tig, adj. cautious, circum- 
 spect. 
 
 SJorrourf, m. -e§, -•$, pi. -tuiirfe, re- 
 proach. 
 
 53or$ug'lid), adj. preferable, excel- 
 lent; — , adv. especially, particu- 
 larly, chiefly. 
 
 SBadjen, v. n. to be awake, watch, 
 
 guard. 
 2Bad)fam, adj. watchful. 
 SB ad) fen, p. 358; to. grow, increase. 
 2Bcd)3li)um, m. & n. ~e3, growth, 
 
 increase, vegetation. 
 23a jfe, /. -, pi. -n, arms, weapons. 
 SBagen, m. -$,pl.-, wagon, carriage, 
 
 chariot, coach. 
 SBagen, v. a. & r. to venture. 
 
 SBafjIen, v. a. to elect, clioose. 
 
 2Ba(m, in. -eg, illusion, conjecture, 
 conceit. 
 
 SBafyr, adj. true, genuine. 
 
 §©itljrcnb,_prep. & conj. during, while. 
 
 gBafyrijafttg, adj. true, real. " 
 
 3Ba|r|eit # /. -, -en, truth, verity, 
 
 2Ba|rlidj» adv. forsooth, in truth, 
 verily, certainly. 
 
 SBa^vfcljeinlid), adj. probable. 
 
 SBctife, m. &/. pi. -n, orphan. 
 
 SBalb, m. -zi>, pi. SBalber, forest, 
 wood ; -I)orn, n. French - horn, 
 bugle-horn. 
 
 SSalObaum, m.-zi,pl. -6dume, forest- 
 tree. 
 
 SSallen, v. n. to undulate, wave, 
 wander. 
 
 SBalljitfd), m. -eg, pi. -e, whale. 
 
 SBalten, v. n. to manage, reign. 
 
 SBanbel, m. -4, conduct, behavior. 
 
 SBanbeln, v. n. to go, walk, change. 
 
 SBanberer, m. - 3, pi. -, traveler, 
 pedestrian. 
 
 2Banbem, v. n. to wander. 
 
 SBanfcn, v. n. to totter, stagger, he- 
 sitate, waver. 
 
 ©unit, adv. when; barm 1Mb -, now 
 and then, sometimes. 
 
 SEBarm, adj. warm, hot. 
 
 S3avm(mumen, m. -i, hot springs. 
 
 SBarnen, v. a. & n. to warn of, ad- 
 monish, against. 
 
 SSarnung,/. -, pi. -en, warning. 
 
 SBarten, v. a. & n. to stay, attend 
 to, nurse, wait. 
 
 SBaruin', adv. why, wherefore. 
 
 2Ba6, prn. what. 
 
 2Ba[d)en, v. a. & n.p. 358; to wash. 
 
 SBaffer, n. —$,pl. «-, water. 
 
 SSefcea, p. 358; to weave> work, 
 float, wave, entwine. 
 
 Sffieber, m. -c, pi, -, weaver. 
 
 2Sed)fel, m. -I, pi. -, vicissitude, 
 change. 
 
 95k (fen, v. a. to wake, awake. 
 
 SBeber, conj. neither. 
 
 95kg, m. -eg, pi. -e, way, passage, 
 walk, road, manner, means. 
 
 SBegtdeiben, v. n. ir. to stay away, 
 stay out, be omitted. 
 
 SBegen, prep, because of on account 
 of, for, by reasc n of. 
 
 SBegfliegen, v. n. ir ^o fly away 
 
502 2Be$— SM'D 2Btb— 2Bor 
 
 SBcggcfyen, v. n. ir. to go away. SBtberftef/en, v. a. n. ir. to resist, 
 SBeglaufen, v. n. ir. to run away, withstand. 
 
 SBegne^nten, v. n to take away. SBtberjrre'ben, v. n. to strive against, 
 ST'Cl), adj. & conj. sore, painful; — struggle against. 
 
 tyitn, to ache, pain, hurt; eg ti/ut SBtbrtg, adj. contrary, adverse, re 
 
 itnn roel), it hurts him; roef) mtr ! pugnant, loathsome. 
 
 wo is me ! SBie, adv. & conj. how, as, when, like. 
 
 SBefymtnl), /. -, sadness, wofulness, SBteber, adv. again, anew; -fommeiti 
 
 sorrowfulness. to come again, return. 
 
 SB e^tttittfyig/ adj. sad, sorrowful, wo- SBteberfd)eut, ra. reflection. 
 
 ful, mournful, melancholy. SBteberfcfyett, v. a. ir. to see again. 
 
 SBetb/ n. -eg, pi. -er, wife, woman. SBiege,/. -, joJ. -n, cradle. 
 
 SBetCy, adj. soft, tender, weak. SBiett, n. Vienna. 
 
 SBctl, «<iu. <fe conj. while, during, SBtefe, /. -, />/. -it, meadow. 
 
 as, as long as, when, because, SBietttel'fte (§ 45. 5). 
 
 since. SBtlb, adj. wild, savage, fierce. 
 
 SBctn, m. -eg, pi. -?, wine, vine. SBtlbpret, n. -eg, game, venison. 
 
 SBetneitf v. rc. to weep, cry. SBiHe, ra. -no, will, mind, purpose. 
 
 SBctfc, adj. wise, sage. SBtliforn'men, ad/', welcome. 
 
 SBetfe, /. -/ /;/. -it, mode, manner, SBtitb, ra. -eg, pi. -c, wind, air. 
 
 way, fashion, method, melody, SBinben, p. 358; to wind, wring, 
 
 tune. twist; v. r. ir. to wind, writhe. 
 
 SBetg|>ett, f. -, wisdom, prudence. SButfel, m.-i, pi. -, corner, nook. 
 
 SBetp, adj. white, clean. SBirfltd), adj. actual, real, true. 
 
 SBett, adj. & adv. distant, remote, SBtrtf), m. —t%, pl.-t, host, landlord, 
 
 far, far off, afar, wide, large ; ctug innkeeper, master of the house. 
 
 it»eiter Sent 1 , from afar. SBiffen, p- 358; to know, have 
 SBeiter, farther, else; - gct;en, to go knowledge of. 
 
 on. 2Bt|?ig, adj. witty, ingenious. 
 
 SBetjen, m. -g, wheat. SBo, adv. where, if. 
 
 SBelcfyer, prn. who, that, which, SBogc,/. -, pi. -it, billow, wave. 
 
 what, some. (L. 3D.) SBo|ei', ady. whence, from what 
 SB elf en, v. n. to wither, fade, dry. place. 
 
 SBelle, /. -, pi. -en, wave, billow. SBol)tn', adv. whither, which way. 
 
 SBett, f.-i pi- —ert, world. SBol)l, ac/v. well, indeed, probably; 
 
 SBeltberuijntt, ad;, far-famed. 2Btf|)IgefaIIen, n. -g, jjieasure, de- 
 SB clfmeer, n. ocean. light. 
 
 SBentg, adj. &adv. little, few, some; SBofylriedjeitb, adj. fragrant. 
 
 tin -, a little. SBol/liljatcr, m. -g, pi.-, benefactor. 
 
 SBenn, adv. & conj. if, in which SBcfyltfyatig, adj. beneficent, chari- 
 
 case, when, whenever. table. 
 
 SBer, prn. who, he who, whoever. SSoMifyuit, v. n. ir. to do well, do 
 SBerben, v. n. ir. (L. Aij., to become, good, benefit. 
 
 grow, turn, be, prove, happen. SBoljitcn, v. n. to odge, dwell, abide, 
 SSerfen, p. 358; to throw, cast. reside. 
 
 S'Beriij), adj. worth, dear. SBo^mmg, /. -, pi. -en, dwellirg. 
 
 SBcul;, ra. -eg, worth, value, price. SBolf, ra. -eg, pi. SBMfe, wolf. 
 
 SBcfen, n. -g, pi. -, being. SBclfe,/. -, jȣ.. -n, cloud. 
 
 SBefer, /. Weser. SBclte, /. -, wool. 
 
 SBegpe,'/ -*, p2. -n, wasp. SBollen (L. 45. 10). 
 
 SBetter, n. -g, jo^.-, weather, storm. SBomte, /. -, pi. -n, delight, plea- 
 SB ibcr, prep, against, contrary to, sure, bliss. 
 
 in opposition to. SB or in', adv. wherein, wheiwnto, 
 SBiberfpred/en, v. n. ir. to contradict. in which, in what. 
 
 
Sort— 3e»4 
 
 3ie5— 3uy 
 
 503 
 
 SBort, n. -eg. p?. -e (Sorter), -word; 
 ut -c fomnten, to have an oppor- 
 tunity to speak. 
 
 SBorterbud), n. -eg, pi. -Muter, dic- 
 tionary, lexicon, vocabulary". 
 
 5Bpoon', adv. whereof, of "which, of 
 ■what, of whom. 
 
 23 unb.tr \l, in. surgeon. 
 
 SBunbe,/. -,pl. -it, wound, hurt. 
 
 3Bunf$, in. -eg, pjl. SOBunfdje, wish, 
 desire. 
 
 SBimfdjett, v. a. to wish, desire. 
 
 ■IBiirfce, /• -, pi- Ht, dignity, honor. 
 
 SBitrMg, a$. worthy, deserving. 
 
 SBiirbigen, v. a. to deign, vouchsafe, 
 value, estimate. 
 
 SBltrm, m. -eg, pi. SSurmer, worm. 
 
 SMrje, f. -, pl.-w, seasoning, spice. 
 
 SBurtfein, n.-i, pi.-, root. (L. 24. 2.) 
 
 SBurjreid), adj. aromatic, spiced. 
 
 SBitrljett, v. n, to rage, chafe, foam, 
 rave. 
 
 Satyr adj tough, tenacious, sticky. 
 
 StyltXl, v. a. to number, tell, count. 
 
 Bafnn, adj. tame, domestic. 
 
 8>tl?n, m. -eg, pi. Bafyne, tooth. 
 
 Bcmge, /. -, pi. -n, tongs. 
 
 Bart, adj. tender, soft, delicate. 
 
 Bartlid), see jart. 
 
 Bauberfdjetrt, m. -eg, pJ. -e, magic- 
 light, fascinating appearance. 
 
 Befynte, m. -\x, pi. -it, tithe, tenth. 
 
 Bcfynmat, ten times. 
 
 Beidyacn, v. a. to draw, delineate. 
 
 Beigcn, v. c to show, point out. 
 
 Better, m. -g, p/. -, pointer, hand. 
 
 Beif, /• -, pi. — en, time, period. 
 
 Bcttig, adj. early, seasonable. 
 
 BfctlvtJtg, a little while, short time. 
 
 Beitung,/. -, pi. -en, news, tidings, 
 pi.; newspaper, gazette. 
 
 8crfcre'd)en, v. a. & n. ir. to break 
 to pieces, iracture; fid) ben ixopf 
 -, to rack one's brains. 
 
 Bcvfd)mct'tcvn, v. a. to crash, crush, 
 shatter, dash to pieces. , 
 
 'ren, v. a. to destroy, demolish. 
 
 Bertre'ten, v. a. ir. to crush by trad- 
 ing on, tread down. 
 
 QtmSt m. -n, pi. -n, witness. 
 
 3iU$, m. Jupiter. 
 
 Qittyxi, v a. & n. ir. to draw, pull, 
 
 cultivate, to go, march, migrate 
 Biel, n.-iK, pi.-:, term, limii-, aim, 
 
 butt, scope, goal. 
 Bielcn, v. n. to aim, take aim. 
 Bifferblatt, n. -eg, pi. -blatter, dial, 
 
 dial-plate. 
 Bimmcr, n. -g, pi. -, room, appart* 
 
 ment; -mann, in. carpenter. 
 Binn, n. tin, pewter. 
 Binnern, adj. tin pewter, made of 
 
 pewter or tin. 
 Bittern, v. n. to tremble, quake. 
 Bolllter, in. -g, pi. -, toll-gatherer. 
 Bn, prep. & adv. at, by, to, ior, in, 
 
 on. 
 Bncfer in. -g, sugar 
 Bucferbrob, n. -eg, -3, pi. -e, sugar 
 
 bread, sweet biscuit. 
 Bufa!!, in. -eg, pi. Bnfaffe, chance, 
 
 accident, adventure; burd) -, by 
 
 chance. 
 Bufol'ge, prep, according to. 
 Bufrte'ben, adj. content, contented, 
 
 satisfied. 
 Buge^oren, v. n. to appertain, be- 
 long to. 
 Bugletcb/, adv. at the same time, at 
 
 once, together. 
 Busier, n. -eg, pi. -e, draught 
 
 animal. 
 Bufommen, v. n. ir. to come to, ap- 
 proach ; v. imp. to belong to, be- 
 come. 
 BuIeFt', ado. at last, lastly, after all, 
 
 finally. 
 Biun.nl)en, v. a. to shut, close. 
 Bnrncn, v. n. to be angry. 
 Bur ltd', adv. back, backward. 
 BurM'fetjren, v. n. to return. 
 Buriui'nKtdjcit, v. n. ir. to recede, 
 
 retire, withdraw. 
 Burufen, v. a. & n. ir. to give a call, 
 
 call to. 
 Bufvun'metrdeljcn, v. a. ir. to draw 
 
 together, contract. 
 Bufcl;en, v. n. ir. to look at, behold, 
 
 connive at. 
 Butragen, v. a. ir. to carry to, to 
 
 bring ; v. r. ir. to ha ppen, chance, 
 
 come to pass. 
 Btwerldfjtg, adj. positive, reliable. 
 Buyerftd)t, /. -, confidence, trust, 
 
 assurance. 
 
504 
 
 3w— 3»el 
 
 3mi— 3n)5Tf 
 
 Suuor", aaz,. colore, first, heretofore, 
 
 formerly. 
 Buttor'fommert, v. n. £r. to anticipate. 
 
 prevent, obviate. 
 Bufteilen, adv. sometimes, at times, 
 
 occasionally. 
 3utt)t'ber, prep. & adv. contrary to, 
 
 against, offensive. 
 Bttcm^g, twenty. 
 ,3roair,igfte, twentieth, 
 Qvoax, conj. certainly, it is true, to 
 
 be sure, indeed. 
 $Hset, two' -mat, adv. twice. 
 
 Bftcifcln, v. n. to doubt. 
 
 Sweig, m. -e3, pi. -e, branch, bough. 
 
 twig. 
 Bwetgen, v. a. to graft, branch. 
 SroeifdjneiMg, adj. two-edged. 
 ,3it>ette, second. 
 8tt>eiten3, adv. secondly. 
 Brotefad), two-fold. 
 Broirtgen, p. 358 ; to constrain, force 
 
 compel. 
 3tt>tfd)en, prep, between, among. 
 3»iilf/ twelve; -mat, twelve time^ 
 
VOCABULAR ¥ 
 
 FOR TRANSLATING ENGLISH INTO GERMAN. 
 
 Able, fctyig, gefd&tdft, see tinmen (L.45). 
 Above, oben, itber. 
 Accompany, begleiten. 
 Accomplish, auSfiifyren, au3rid)ten. 
 According, nad), gemdJ3, jufolge, -as, 
 
 je nad}bem. 
 Account, bie Sftedjmmg ; on - of, m* 
 
 gen, auf 2Jbfd)lag. 
 Accuse, anflagen, befdjulbigen. 
 Acquaintance, bie Set'anntfdjaft, ber 
 
 Sefannte. 
 Acquainted, befannt, "certrant, htnbig. 
 Across, Ereujtireifej itber, queriiber. 
 Act, fyanbeln, jut benetjmen. 
 Action, bie £anblung. 
 Actor, ber ©diaufpieler. 
 Adage, ba3 ©pridjraort. 
 Adapt, fid) fdncferu 
 Adhere, anfjangen. 
 Adherent, anfyangenb, SMd'nger. 
 Advice, ber iftatf), bie 9?admd)t. 
 Affair, ba§ ©cfd)dft, bie <5ad)t. 
 Afraid, furd)tfam, bange, to be -, 
 
 furcfytert. 
 After, nad), nadjbem; -noon, ber 
 
 9tod)mittag. 
 Again, roieber, nod) einmal. 
 Against, nnber, gegen. 
 Agreeable, angenerjm. 
 Ail, fdvncr-en; what ails you ? was 
 
 fe^lt 3bnen? 
 Aim, battel, ber Qvotd, bie SIbftdjt; 
 
 uetcn. 
 Air, bie guft. 
 All, afleS, ganv itberfjaupt. 
 Ally, ber SBunbeSgenof. 
 Almond, bie 5Dianbel 
 Almost, fafr, beinak. 
 Alone, alletit 
 Along, langS, entlang 
 
 Already, berettS, fd)cru 
 
 Also, ctud), gletdjfau'S. 
 
 Although, obgleid). 
 
 Always, burner, ftet<3. 
 
 American, ctmerifantfd), STnterifaner. 
 
 Among, unter, jroifclen. 
 
 Anchor, ber Stttfer. 
 
 And, unb. 
 
 Angle, bie Slngel. 
 
 Animal, baS £()icr. 
 
 Another, em anberer, nod) enter. 
 
 Answer, bie Stntwort, antroorteru 
 
 Anticipate, jUtoorfomrttCtL 
 
 Anvil, ber SJmfccjj. 
 
 Any, -body, Senwmb ; -thing, etr»a$. 
 
 Any one, fsemanb, irgenb Scmanb. 
 
 Appear, erfdjeincn, fd)eineit 
 
 Apple, ber Styfel. 
 
 Apprentice, ber 2ef)iling. 
 
 Apricot, bie Stprifofe. 
 
 Architect, ber SBaiunetjrer. 
 
 Arm, ber 9(rm. 
 
 Army, bie Slrmce, ba3 .RriegSrker. 
 
 Around, Jjerum, urn, linger. 
 
 Arrest, sertyaften. 
 
 Arrival, bie SInfimft. 
 
 Arrive, ctnf c m ni c n. 
 
 Arrow, ber ^>fciL 
 
 Art, bie Rvm.% 
 
 Artist, ber $imftter. 
 
 As, alg, ba, toeil, rote, fo. 
 
 Ashamed (to be), fid) fd)dmeiL 
 
 Ask, fragen, bitten. 
 
 Asleep, etngefdjlafen. 
 
 Assent, betfttmmen. 
 
 Assist, bcifteben, fjelfen. 
 
 Assistance, ber 25ctftanb, tic $iV(L 
 
 Assistant, ber ©ebjttfe. 
 
 At, in, an, bet, in, wf iifcev vot, au$ f 
 
 mit, gegen. 
 Attentive, aufmerl [am. 
 Auger, ber Sourer. 
 
 22 
 
506 
 
 AUG BIN 
 
 BIR CAL 
 
 August, bcr Slugufr. 
 Aunt, Me SJhtfyme, Zante 
 Austrian, ber SDefterreidjer. 
 Avail, fyelfert, nu£cr, fid bebicncn. 
 Avoid, meiben, yermctbcu. 
 Away, meg, fcrt. 
 Ax, tie Slrr, bad fdtil 
 Axis, bie s M)\z. 
 
 B 
 
 Bad, fditecbr, bbfe, fd)dblid). 
 
 Bag, ber <Sacf. 
 
 Baker, bcr 33dcfer. 
 
 Ball, bcr Sad, bad Santfejl. 
 
 Bark, bie 23arfe ; beflen. 
 
 Barley, bie ©crjle. 
 
 Barrel, bag Sap, bie Sonne. 
 
 Basin, bag SBetfctt. 
 
 Basket, bcr ftoxb. 
 
 Bavaria, Sa^errt. 
 
 Bavarian, ber Satjer, Bctiertfd). 
 
 Bean, bie Scfyne. 
 
 Bear, ber SSd'r; eriragen, gebdren. 
 
 Beast, bag Sfyier; - of burden, 2afr* 
 
 thicr; - of prey, ^aubt^ier. 
 Beat, [d)tagen, flopfen. 
 Beautiful, fd)5tt. 
 Beauty, bie Sd)onr)eit. 
 Because, roeit, beproegen. 
 Become, roerben, jtdj fdjicfen, gqiemen. 
 Bee, bie Siene. 
 Beech, bie 33itfl;e. 
 Beer, bad Sier. 
 Before, sjor, beuor, elje, sent, sorter, 
 
 berettS, fritter. 
 Beggar, ber Settler. 
 Begin, begtrmen, artfangen. 
 Behave, )i§ betrctgen. 
 Behavior, fag Sktragen. 
 Behind, t; inter, l;i:ttcn, jurucf. 
 Believe, glauben. 
 Belong, gcl^rcn, anget)5rcn. 
 Be-low, unter, unterljalb. 
 Bench, bie Scmf. 
 Beneath, unter. 
 Benefactor, ber 23ol)It§arer. 
 Berlin, Serlin. 
 Beside, Besides, neb en, au§er, anger* 
 
 bcni; to be- one's self, aujjer fid) 
 
 fein. 
 Between, jroifcfyeu, unter. 
 Beyond, iiber, jenfettg, auper, b/ataug. 
 Bind, binben, (by oath) perpfltdjtciL 
 
 Bird, ber SSogel; - of prey, bet 
 
 Otaubsogel. 
 Bite, beipcrt. 
 Black, fd)roar$, bunfel; -smith. Get 
 
 ©robfd)mieb. 
 Blame, tabein; ter£ctbet 
 Bleat, blcfcn. 
 
 Blessirjg, ber Segen, bie SBo^Ityat. 
 Blind, blinb. 
 
 Blotting-paper, bag Cofcbpapicr 
 Blue, blau. 
 Board, bag Srett. 
 
 Boast, gropffmn, prablen, ftd) rii^aun 
 Boat, ber £af>n. 
 Body, bcr £eib, £brper. 
 Book, bag SBitci). 
 Bookbinder, ber Sucbbinber. 
 Bookseller, ber Sud)§dnbler. 
 Boot, ber ©tiefel. 
 Bow, ber Sogen. 
 Boy, bcr Jlnabe. 
 Braid, fledjten, roe ben. 
 Brass, adj. rrtefftngen. 
 Brave, tapfer, bra», cbel 
 Bread, bag Srob. 
 Break, bred)en, ^erbred)cn. 
 Breastpin, bie SruftnabeL 
 Bremen, Sremen. 
 Brewer, bcr Srauer. 
 Bridge, bie Sritcfe. 
 Bring, bringert. 
 Broom, ber 23 e fen. 
 Brother, bcr 33ruber;|- inlaw, bet 
 
 ©djroager. 
 Brown, braun. 
 Brush, bie Siirfte. 
 Bud, bie tncgpe, bad Sluge. 
 Build, tauert. 
 Building, bag ©ebdube. 
 Burdensome, Idfttg. 
 Burn, brennen. 
 Bury, begraben. 
 
 Business, bag ©efdjdft, bie <3acr,e. 
 But, aber, fonbern, aupcr, nur, alg. 
 Butcher, ber §leifd)er. 
 Butter, bie Sutter. 
 Button, ber tepf. 
 Buy, faufen. 
 By, son, burcb, ju, nad), mit, ftur 
 
 net en, bei, ouf. 
 
 G 
 
 Cabinet-maker, ber 2/.fd)ler. 
 Cage, ber $dftg, 
 
 
CAL — COM 
 
 COM — DEC 
 
 501 
 
 Calf, bad Jhlb, 
 
 Call, r it feu, nenitttt. 
 
 Camel, bad ffaineel'. 
 
 Can, tie .flanne ; fiinnen, tm Stanbe fein. 
 
 Candle, bad £id}t, bie tferje; -stick, 
 
 ber Seudjier. 
 Cane, ber Srocf, bad 9to$r. 
 Cap, tie ^appc, 5Wfi$e. 
 Capable. fa§ig, titd)tig. 
 Captain, ber iuuptmann, tfapttan. 
 Care, bie ©orge, ©orgfalt; to take 
 
 -, ©orge tragen, pflegen. 
 Carpenter, ber Bunmcrmanrt. 
 Carpet, ber Seppid). 
 Carriage, ber SSagen. 
 Cask, Dad ga§. 
 Castle, bad ©djtojj. 
 Cat, bie £a$e 
 Catch, fangen, ergrcifen. 
 Cathedral,' ber £>om. 
 Cattle, bad 2Het). 
 Cause, bie Urfad)e, Gac^e; »erurfadjen, 
 
 beroirfen. 
 Celebrated, bcrvifjmt. 
 Certain. geroijj, ju»erld'ffi3# geiptglic^. 
 Chain, Die 5Tcric ; feffeltt- 
 Chair, ber ©tutjt, ©effel. 
 Chalk, bie Jtretbe. 
 Charles, ilarl. 
 Cheat, betriigen. 
 Cheese, ber itafe. 
 Cherry, bie $irfcl)e. 
 Child, bad fflnb. 
 Chisel, ber 2Mj?el 
 Church, bie £ird)e. 
 City, bie ©tabr. 
 Clean, rein. 
 
 Climb, flimmert, flettcnt, erftctgen. 
 Cloak, ber SKanteL 
 Cloth, bad 3cug, £ud). 
 Clothes, bie ^teibimg. 
 Cloud, bie SBolfe. 
 Coachman, ber $utfd)er. 
 Coarse, grob. 
 Coat, ber fRoS. 
 Coffee, ber tfafite. 
 Cold, fait, froftig; bie flalte. 
 Collar, ber tragen. 
 Cologne, $o!tt. 
 Color, gfarbe ; farbert. 
 Come, fommen. P. 350, getartgert. 
 Comforter, ber Xrojlex 
 Command, ber 33efeb,l; Befer)Ien, ge* 
 
 bieten. 
 
 Commi. begefjen. 
 
 Company, bie ©efefffefjaft, ber33cfuc$. 
 
 Compel, rtot^tgen, jrotngen. 
 
 Complain, ftdf beflageru 
 
 Conceal, perbergen. 
 
 Conduct, bie 2lupr)rung, bad 33e* 
 
 tragen. 
 Confide, sertrauert. 
 Confirm, beftdttgen. 
 Conjunction, bad SSinberoort. 
 Conquer, fie gen. 
 Conscious, bcroitpt. 
 Consequent, folgenb, foIgUdj. 
 Contented, jnfrtebcn. 
 Contradict, roiberfpredjen. 
 Convict, iibcrfufjrcn. 
 Convince, itberjeugen. 
 Cook, ber Roti, bie itodjtit. 
 Cooper, ber Somber, Pilfer. 
 Copper, bad flupfer; adj. fupfcriL 
 Copy, abfdjreiben. 
 Cost, Fojren. 
 
 Cotton, bie Saumrootle. 
 Country, bad 2anb;-man, ber £anb* 
 
 mann, 23auer. 
 Courage, ber 2Jhti$, bie Sapferfeit. 
 Cousin, ber Setter, bie Goujine. 
 Cover, ber Decfei; beden, bebecfen. 
 Cow, bie tfufc. 
 Crane, ber .ftranid). 
 Crawl, friecben fd)leid)en. 
 Creep, frtedjen. 
 Crime, bad 2>crbrcd)eru 
 Criminal, ber 33erbrcd)er. 
 Crocodile, bad ftrofobilf. 
 Cup, bie Za)(t. 
 
 Cut, ber ©d)nitt ; fdnteiben, |aucru 
 Cutler, ber 9)tefferfd)mieb. 
 
 D 
 
 Dagger, ber 'DoTdj. 
 
 Dangerous, gefdfyrlicr). 
 
 Daughter, bie £od)ter; - in-law, 
 bie ©djnnegertodjter. 
 
 Day, ber Sag ; to-day, r)eure ; - be- 
 fore yesterday, porgefrem; -la- 
 borer, ber £aglcr)ner. 
 
 Dead, tobt. 
 
 Deaf, taub. 
 
 Deal, ber Xfjeit; a great -, fer}r ptcL 
 
 Dear, tfjeuer, rcertr). 
 
 Death, ber Sob. 
 
 Deceive, betriigen, Ijintergeljen, tau* 
 fdjen. 
 
508 
 
 DEE EAR 
 
 EAR-— FIN 
 
 Deed, bie £ v al. 
 
 Deep, ttef. 
 
 Defeat, uberrotnten, fd)lagen. 
 
 Defy, £roij btetcn, tro$en, tterfcb / mdT>n. 
 
 Deserve, serbtenen. 
 
 Design, bag Sorfyaben. 
 
 Desk, bag 3>ult. 
 
 Despa'r, »cr.vn>etfcltt. 
 
 Destiny, bag ^erl;dngnip, bte SBeflim* 
 
 mung. 
 Destitute, entbtbjjr, fnlffog. 
 Destroy, jerftorcn, ju ®runbe rtdjten. 
 Devoted, ergeben. 
 Dictionary, bag SBortcrfruclj. 
 Die, bcr (Stempet, bte SBitrfel; jlerkn, 
 
 umfommen. 
 Difference, ber ltnterfd)teb. 
 Different, t>erfd)teben. 
 Difficult, fd)U)er, fdjnnerig. 
 Dig, graben. 
 Dignity, bte SSitrbe, ber SJcang, bag 
 
 31 mt. 
 Diligence, ber $lei£. 
 Diligent, fictpig, emftg. 
 Discontented, unutfriebert. 
 Distinct, beutltd). 
 Disturber, ber ©torer. 
 Ditch, ber ©raben. 
 Do, t^un, mad)en, serrtdjten, ftdj fce* 
 
 ftnben. 
 Dog, ber £tmb. 
 Door, bie Satire, or Sfyitr. 
 Doubt, ^roetfelrt. 
 Down, unten, nieber, tytnafc, fjinunter, 
 
 r)erunter. 
 Draught-animal, bag 3ugtr)ter. 
 Draw, jiefyen, ^etcfyrtert. 
 Dresden, £)regberu 
 Dress, bag $leib. 
 Drink, ber Zranh bag ©etrd'nfe; fau* 
 
 fen, trlnfaL 
 Diive, tretben. 
 Dr}-, trocfen. 
 Duck, bte <£ntc. 
 Due, gebvifyrenb, angemeffen. 
 Dull, bumm. 
 During, rodfjrcnb. 
 Duty, bie 9)flid)t, ©cfyulbtgtett. 
 Dyer, ber gdrber. 
 
 E 
 
 Eagle, bcr STblet. 
 
 Ear, bag C$r. 
 
 Earn, serbtenen, getrinrten. 
 
 Earth, bte St be. 
 
 Easy, -ily, letd)t, rvu)tg, fret. 
 
 Eat, effcn, freffeu. 
 
 Eel, ber 9fal. 
 
 Eight, ad)t. 
 
 Either, etner »cn Beit en, entroebet. 
 
 Elephant, ber ©lepbant. 
 
 Emerald, ber ©maragb. 
 
 Emperor, ber $aifcr. 
 
 End, bag Snbe. 
 
 Enemy, ber $etnb. 
 
 English, bte ©ngldnber; engltfdj. 
 
 Englishman, ber (Sngtdnbcr. 
 
 Enjoy, fid) erfrcuen, gentepett 
 
 Enough, genug, fytnldngltd). 
 
 Entire, gam, tootlftdnbig. 
 
 Envious, neibtfd). 
 
 Envy, benetben. 
 
 Escape, entrinnen, entfommeru 
 
 Esteem, fd)dt?en, acfyten. 
 
 Eternity, bte (Enrigfett. 
 
 Europe, Suropa. 
 
 Even, eben, gerabe, fogar, felbfr. 
 
 Evening, ber Slbenb, bte Slbenbjeit. 
 
 Ever, je, jentalg, tmmer. 
 
 Every, -where, alicntfyalBen, nberatt. 
 
 Exercise, bte Uebung, bte Slufgabe; 
 
 it ben. 
 Expect, erftarten. 
 Eye, bag Sluge, Del)r. 
 
 Fail, fef)Ten, untertaffen. 
 
 Faithful, treu, rebttrf). 
 
 Fall, ber %aU; fallen; to- asleep, 
 
 etnfcr)Iafen, entfcfylafen. 
 Fan, ber $dd)er. 
 Far, entfernt, fern. 
 Fast, fefr, gefdjroinb, fdntcfl. 
 Father, bcr 35ater; - in law, bei 
 
 ©cfmuegemtcr ; -land, bao 2nuev 
 
 lanb. 
 Fault, bcr SeJIer, bte (Sduilb. 
 Favorable, gi'mfttg. 
 Fear, bte gurdH; fitrc^tcru 
 Feather, bte Setter. 
 Fellow-scholar, ber SJcttfdjuler. 
 Few, roenig; a -, ehttge. 
 Field, bag gelb. 
 Fifty, fttttfjig. 
 Fifteen, fitnf;cr)rt. 
 Fight, fednen, ftrciteu. 
 Final, -ly, enbltd). 
 
FIN GEN 
 
 GEN HAS 
 
 509 
 
 Find, fiubcn, antreffen. 
 
 Fine, fc hi, (a 1 on. 
 
 Finger, bcr gtngir. 
 
 Fire', ba^ geuer. 
 
 First, erfle. 
 
 Fish, bei $ifdj; ftfdjen. 
 
 Fisherman, bcr 5'tfd)er. 
 
 Fit, pa (Ten. 
 
 Flatter, fdjmeicMtt, liebfofen. 
 
 Flatterer, ber od)metd)ter. 
 
 Flattering, fdjmeidjenjctft, fdjmcidjelnb 
 
 Flax, ber S'ladjd. 
 
 Flee, fite^en. 
 
 Florin, ber ©ulben. 
 
 Flour, ba« m>:bl 
 
 Flow, jlic§en, ftromen. 
 
 Flower, bie SSlume, SBluttje. 
 
 Flute, bie glote. 
 
 Fly, bie ft-licge; jltegett, flie^cn. 
 
 Foam, bcr Sdjaum ; febdumen. 
 
 Follow, folgen, n«d)folfien. 
 
 Fool, bcr Zijox, Sftarr. 
 
 Foolish, ttjoridjt, ndrrifd). 
 
 Foot, ber Sujjj; on-, jit $ujj. 
 
 For, fur, nart, mit, um . . . rmtfen, 
 
 an, cud, rodfyrenb, auf, ut, benru 
 Forest, bcr (Yorfr, SBalb. 
 Forget, vergeffen. P. 356. 
 Fork, bie ©abet. 
 Four, tuer. 
 Fowl, bad £>iir)n. 
 Franc e, % v a nfr c i d). 
 Francis, tfran^. 
 Frankfort, ftranffurt. 
 Free, befrcten, fret. 
 French, fran^oftfd), bie ^ranjoferu 
 Frenchman, ber ^ran^ofe. 
 Friend, ber S'rcunb, bie ^reunbht. 
 Friendly, freunbltcr). 
 From, yon, and. 
 Fruit, bie grud)t, bag Dbft; -tree, 
 
 ber Dbftbaum. 
 
 G 
 
 Gain, gerrmmen. 
 
 Gallant, tapfer bras. 
 
 Garden, ber ©arten. 
 
 Gardener, ber ©drtner. 
 
 Gather, fammeln, lefert. 
 
 General, atlgemein; ber $elb^err, 
 
 ©eneral. 
 Generally, gercclmUd); im STffge* 
 
 metnen. 
 Generous, grogtr.uityig, fretgeMg. 
 
 Gentlem-in, £>err, bcr gebitbete, feme 
 Wtamu 
 
 German, betttfdj, bcr "Dcutfdje. 
 
 Germany, S)eutfd)tanb. 
 
 Get, ertyaiten, bef'ommen, fcminen, ge* 
 Iangcn, geraityen, laffen; to -rid of, 
 led h)crben; to - at, beifommen. 
 
 Giant, bcr 9?tcfe; -Montains, 9ttcfen*' 
 g'ebirgc. 
 
 Girl, ba$ SWdbdjen. 
 
 Give, geben, utenfen. 
 
 Glad, frof;, l;citcr, jufvicben; to be -, 
 
 fid) freuen. 
 Glass, bad ©(ad, ber Spiegel. 
 Glazier, bcr ©lafer 
 Glove, ber £anbfd)ur). 
 Go, gc^cn. P. 348. 
 Gold, bad ©elb; golbcn; -smith, ber 
 
 ©oibfd)micb. 
 Gone, roeg, fort. 
 Good, gut. 
 Goose, bie ©and. 
 
 Govern, rcgicren, lenfen, fceljenf.^tu. 
 Gracious, gndbig, giitig. 
 Gradual, -ly, md) unb nad), fruf c * 
 
 roetfe. 
 Grain, bad ftonx, ©etreibf 
 Grass, bad ©rad. 
 Grateful, banfbar. 
 Grave, bad ©rab. 
 Gray, grau. 
 Great, grog. 
 Greece, ©riedjentanb. 
 Green, griin, frifd), unrcif. 
 Grieve, franfen. 
 Grind, mab/Ien. 
 Grow, road) fen. 
 Guide, ber giibjer. 
 Guilty, fd)utbig. 
 
 H 
 
 Haggard, fjager. 
 Half, r-alb. 
 Hamburg, Hamburg. 
 Hammer, ber jammer; ^dmmem 
 Hand, bie £anb. 
 Handkerchief, bad Safdjentud). 
 Handle, ber <Stte(. 
 Hang, jjangen, beijangen. 
 Happen, fid) ereignen, gefd)e$e» 
 Happy, gliidlid). 
 Harbor, ber £afen. 
 Hard, Ijart, fd)roer. 
 Hasten, eilen. 
 
fit-3 
 
 HAT IF 
 
 ILI 
 
 -LAM 
 
 flat, ber |>ut ; -maker, ber £utmad)er. 
 
 Hate, fyaffcn, serabfcrjeuen. 
 
 Hateful, script, gcfyafftg. 
 
 Hatter, ber £>utmad)er. 
 
 Have, fyctben. 
 
 Hay, bag $etf. 
 
 He, er, berjentge. 
 
 Head, ber 51'opf. 
 
 Health, bie ©efunbfjett 
 
 Healthy, gefmtb. 
 
 Hear, fyoren. 
 
 Heaven, ber &immel. 
 
 Heavy, fd)n)er. 
 
 Help, bic$tlfe; fyelfen, seeronnen(L.45). 
 
 Helpless, fytildog. 
 
 Hemp, ber &anf. 
 
 Here, Ijier Merger. 
 
 Hers, ber, bie, bag Ujrtge. 
 
 Hessian, ber &t\[t- 
 
 High, fjod). 
 
 Him, ifym, bent, ifni, ben. 
 
 Himself, felbft, ftcf>. 
 
 His, [eirt, ber fetntge, or feine. 
 
 Hit, fd)lagen, treffen. 
 
 Hold, y alten. 
 
 Hole, bad £odj, Me £of)Ie. 
 
 Home, nad) £aufe ; at -, ^u |>aufe. 
 
 Honest, efyrltd), rcd)tfd)afFen. 
 
 Honey, ber -t'ontg. 
 
 Honor, bte (Sljrc; efjrett. 
 
 Hope, bte £>offnung; fyojfen. 
 
 Horse, bag 3>ferb, $ojj; on -back, 
 
 &u 9>ferbe. 
 Hostility, bte ^ctnbfeltgfett. 
 Hotel, ber ©aftrM, ba$ ©ajlfjaug. 
 Hour, bte ©nmbe. 
 House, bag £>aug. 
 How, rote, auf ft)eld)e Strt. 
 Howl, fyeuten. 
 Hundred, fyunbert. 
 Hungarian, ber Ungar; ungartfd). 
 Hungry, fyungrtg ; he is -, eg Ijungert 
 
 ib,n, or ib^t ijungert. 
 Hunter, ber Sager. 
 Hurt, roef) tljun. 
 Husbandman, ber Sanbmann. 
 Hypocrisy, bte §cud)elet. 
 
 I 
 
 I, id); I say I ^oren ©te bofyl ^orert 
 
 <Sk eirtmal. 
 Idle, mu§tg, trage. 
 Idleness, bte £rdg$eit, Sraul^eit. 
 (f, ttenn, faflg. 
 
 Ill-natured, bbfe. 
 Image, bag SBUb. 
 Immediate, gletd), augenbttcHtd), fo< 
 
 gletd). 
 Immortal, Hitfktv lid). 
 Impolite, unpfUd). 
 Improbable, unroaljrfdjetttftdj. 
 In, in, bet, an, jit, auf, mix, unter, 
 
 nacb, itber, herein, f)tnetn. 
 Indobnt, lafftg, trage. 
 Industrious, fletfug. 
 Inhabitant, ber (£tnroor)ner. 
 Injure, fdjaben, beleibtgen, beeintrdd>* 
 
 tigen. 
 Injurious, tmgcred)t, nad)tl)ctltg. 
 Ink, bte £inie ; -stand, bag Suttcnfajj. 
 Innocence, bte Uit[d)ttlb. 
 Innocent, unfdntlbtg. 
 Inquire, fid) erhmbtgen, fragert. 
 Insecure, unfid)er. 
 Insist, beftefyen. 
 Instead of, ftatt, anftatt. 
 Instruct, unterrtd)tcn. 
 Instructive, bclel)renb, ler)rrctd). 
 Interesting, anjiefyenb, intereffant. 
 Into, in. 
 
 Iron, bag (Etfen; eifern- 
 It, eg. 
 Italian, ttaliemfd); ber Staltener. 
 
 Jacket, bte Sacfe. 
 
 Journey, bte 3Mfe. 
 
 Joy, bie $reube. 
 
 June, ber Sum) or Sunt. 
 
 Just, gered)t, red)tfd)affen, ekn. 
 
 K 
 
 Kettle, ber fleffel. 
 Key, ber <Sd)tuffe(. 
 Kind, bie©attung, 5Irt ; what kinu 
 
 of (L. 13.), adj. guttg, freunbltd). 
 Kindness, bte ©itte. 
 King, ber $bmg. 
 Kingdom, bag ^b'nigretd). 
 Knife, bag SDieffer. 
 Know, nriflen, fennen. 
 
 Labor, bte STr^ctt- 
 
 Laborer, ber Abetter, Scgtofyur 
 
 Lady, bte grau, Qamt. 
 
 Lamb, bag Santtru 
 
 Lame, laljm. 
 
LAN MAN 
 
 MAR MY 
 
 511 
 
 Landscape, tie Sanbfcfyaft. 
 
 Language, btc ©pvadje. 
 
 Large, grog, roett, breit. 
 
 Last, Icrt. 
 
 Laugh, baa Sadjen, ©clavier; ladjeru 
 
 Law, baa ©efe§. 
 
 Lay, (egen. 
 
 Lazy, faut, troige. 
 
 Lead, bay 23let. 
 
 Lead, [itf}rcn. 
 
 Leader, bcr giiljrcr 
 
 Leaf, b^ Slatt. 
 
 Learn, Icrnen, crfat;rert. 
 
 Learned, gelcfyrt. 
 
 Leather, bad I'eber; lebcrn. 
 
 Leave, laffcn, certaffen. 
 
 Length, tic Ccinge ; at -, enblid). 
 
 Less, Heiner, iueniger. 
 
 Let, lajfer., &ermieii)en. 
 
 Letter, bcr 33ud)|"iabe, SBrief; -paper, 
 
 ba^ 33rtefpapier. 
 Liberty, bte gretyeit; at -, see birr* 
 
 fen (L. 15). 
 Lie, bte Citgcj titgen. 
 Lie, licgen. 
 Life, bay tfc&cn. 
 Light, baa Std)i; to come to -, and 
 
 jfcagcaltdjt foramen. 
 Lighten, leuduen, bli|etL 
 Like, gleid>, dfmttd); gefatfen; the -, 
 
 berg!etd)cn ; he would - to, er 
 i gem. 
 Lime, bay j?alf. 
 Little, fletn, gcrtng, rocntg. 
 Live, kbni, wcl;ncn. 
 Lock, bay <8dylojj; aufdjHejjett, fdjlicf- 
 
 (en; -smith, bcr <5d)lo[fcr. 
 Lofty, l)odi, crfjaben. 
 Lcug, lang, Iange. 
 Look, baa 2tnfer)en fyxfien; au3ft$en; 
 
 to - for, fudjeru 
 Lose, wrlieren. 
 Load, -ly, laut. 
 Love, bte Siebe; Iteften. 
 Low, niebrig, britUen. 
 
 M 
 
 Magdeburg. 9)cagbe£urg. 
 
 Maize, ber aftaia. 
 
 Make, mad)cn, Krrtdjten, Iaffen. 
 
 Man, ber SL'ienfd), SOhnn. 
 
 Manheim, 9Jianitr)etm. 
 
 Many, fciet ; L. 65 ; - a, manner. 
 
 Marble, bet 57carmor. 
 
 March, bcr ^Jiarj. 
 
 Mark, b<L$ ,3eid)cn, 3iel. 
 
 Mason, ber >Dcaurer. 
 
 Mast, ber Waft. 
 
 Master, bcr Si'tciflcr, £>crr; - of a 
 language, cuter ©pracfje md'efytig. 
 
 Matter, bte <Bati)t ; what is the -? 
 Way gtbt e3? 
 
 May, bcr 2Kat. 
 
 May, mogen/ fennen, bitrfcrt. 
 
 Mayence, Sftatnj. 
 
 Meadow, bic SBtefe. 
 
 Mean, gemcin, fd)lecr)t; baa Sftiitel- 
 by means of, yernuttet|r. 
 
 Measles, bic SWafern. 
 
 Measure, baa 3Rajj; meffen. 
 
 Meat, baa B'Ict(d). 
 
 Meet, to go to -, entgegen gcr)en, tref- 
 fen, regegncn. 
 
 Melon, bte ketone. 
 
 Melt, (d)mcl}cn. 
 
 Memory, bay ©cbadjtmg. 
 
 Mention, enMtvaen. 
 
 Merchant, bcr ilaufmann. 
 
 Messenger, bcr 33ote. 
 
 Migrate, jiejjen. 
 
 Milk, bte Mdj. 
 
 Miller, ber 9)Utffcr. 
 
 Mind, baa ©craittfy, ber (Stmt 
 
 Mindful, aufmcrffam, etngebenf. 
 
 Mine, me in, mctntge. (L. 35). 
 
 Miser, bcr ©cicala. 
 Miserable, ci'enb, erbarmttd). 
 Misfortune, bay Unglitef. 
 Miss, baa gvdnktn. 
 Misunderstand, falfcr) tterfkr)ett, ntifj* 
 
 tterfreljen. 
 Modest, befdjetbert. 
 Money, baa ®clb, bte SJJun^e. 
 Month, bcr Sftonat. 
 Moon, bcr Sftonb. 
 More, baa Wltfyx; mer)r. 
 Morning, ber SWorgen. 
 Mother, bte Gutter. 
 Mountain, bcr S3erg. 
 Much, »iel/ fct)r. 
 Mule, baa $caultr)icr. 
 Munich, §JUutd}en. 
 Murder, crmorbert. 
 Music, bte Mnftf. 
 Must, mi'tffen. (L. 45). 
 Mustard, ber <5enf. 
 My,- mein f meine. 
 
512 
 
 NAI OLD 
 
 OLD PEC 
 
 N 
 Nail, ber 9?ogcL 
 Name, ber dlanu. 
 Narrow, enge. 
 
 Native-country, ba$ $aterlanb. 
 Natural, naturltd). 
 Nature, bie 9fotur. 
 Near, nafyt, beinabie, faft, bet 
 Need, bebitrfen, notijig jjaben. 
 Needle, bte 9kbet. 
 Neighbor, ber 9?ad)bar, S^a^fte, bti 
 
 9£ad)bartn. 
 Negligent, nad)lafftg. 
 Neither, roeber, aud) nid)t; - . . . nor, 
 
 roeber . . . nod). 
 Nephew, ber 9ceffe. 
 Nest, ba$ 9cefr. 
 Never, nie, mentals. 
 Nevertheless. utd)tebeftoroentger, bef* 
 
 fennngcad)tet, bewtod). 
 New, neu, frifd). 
 News, bte keutgfeit, ^adjrtdjt. 
 Newspaper, bte ^ettuitg. 
 Next, nad)|l, felgenb. 
 Night, bie 3cad)t. 
 No, mit, ntd)t, fctrt. 
 Noboay 2t x iemanb. (L. 18. 5). 
 None, renter, fetne, feine$. 
 Nor, nod), aud) ntd)t. 
 North, 9£orben. 
 Norwegian, ber ^corroeger. 
 Not, rttd)t. 
 Nothing, ntd)r3. 
 Notwithstanding, ungeadjter, bett=* 
 
 nod), bod). 
 Now, mm, jeijt, foeberu 
 
 O . 
 
 Oak, bte Stdje. 
 
 Oaus, ber £afer. 
 
 Obedience, ber ©etjorfant. 
 
 Obedient, gefyorfam. 
 
 Obey, gef;ord)en. 
 
 Oblige, serp, : itd)tert, serbtnben, see 
 
 miiifen (L. 45). 
 Obstinate, etgenfmntg. 
 Of, sortf roegen, Krmittclfr - course, 
 
 rtatitrltd), es scrfteljt ftd). 
 Offend, bcletbtgcn. 
 Office, ba3 Slmt. 
 Officer, ber Dffkter. 
 Often, oft, bfterS. 
 Oil, bct$ Del 
 
 Old, alt. 
 
 On, an, auf, in, bet, ju, mtr, unrei, 
 
 sor, itber, son, roeg, setter, fort, 
 
 gcgen, nifolge. 
 Only, etujtg, allctn, mtr. erjl. 
 Opinion, bte feinting. 
 Oppress, untcnOruden. 
 Or, obcr. 
 
 Oration, bte SRebe. 
 Orator, ber SRebner. 
 Orchard, ber Dbftgarten 
 Order, befie lien. 
 Orphan, ber, bte Sctifc 
 Ostrich, ber Strattp. 
 Other, ber, bte, ba$ anbere ; every - 
 
 da}-, etnen Xag urn ben anDern; 
 
 -wise, anberS, fonjr. 
 Our, unfer, ber unfrtge. 
 Out, au£, brau^en; - of, auS, au^er. 
 Outside, auj3cr|alb. 
 Over, itber, auf, tjtnitber, T)eriiber, 
 
 ttoruber, sorbet, aUm, m fet;r, roeit, 
 
 bretr, itberfytn, burd), »or. 
 Owe, fd)ulDtg fetn, serbanfen. 
 Ox, ber Dd)$. 
 
 Pain, ber od)mer^. 
 
 Paint brush, ber §)tnfel. 
 
 Painter, ber Settler. 
 
 Painting, bai ©entdlbe. 
 
 Pair, bass §)aar. 
 
 Palace, ber 9)alaft 
 
 Pale, bletd). 
 
 Paper, ba$ papier; papteren. 
 
 Parasol, ber ©onnenfebtrm. 
 
 Parents, bte ©Item. 
 
 Paris, 9)artd. 
 
 Part, ber SL^eif. 
 
 Passion, bte !'eibenfcl)aft. 
 
 Past, aergangen, sorbet. 
 
 Patient, gebulDtg ; ber tfranfe, 9)a' 
 
 ttent. 
 Patriotic, patriottfd). 
 Pea, bte C£rbfe. 
 Peace, ber Srtebe. 
 Peaceful, friebfam, friebltd). 
 Peach, bte ^ftrftdje. 
 Peacock, ber s J)fau. 
 Pear, bte 33tme. 
 Peajl, bie 9>erle. 
 Pea&ant, ber L*anbmann, Skuer. 
 Peculiarity, bte (Stgentyett. 
 
-PUN 
 
 PUR RUB 
 
 ►13 
 
 Pen, Me geber, Sducibfeber; -knife, 
 
 bad tvebermcffcr- 
 Pencii, ber spinfet, Sleiirift. 
 People, bad SSolf, bie Seute; bcpol" 
 
 fern. 
 Pepper, ber $Pfeffer. 
 Perfect, sotifommen. 
 Perhaps, yiclletdn. 
 
 Perish, umfommen, ;,u ©runbe geljen. 
 Pestilence, bie $Pejr. 
 Physician, ber Qirji. 
 Piece, bad otiicf. 
 Pigeon, bie Taube. 
 Pink, etc sftctfe. 
 Pit. tie ©rube. 
 Pilsner, ber $rug. 
 Pity, bad SKttleibeir it is a -, ed ijt 
 
 ©d)abe; bemitletben, bebauern. 
 Plan, ber 9>lan« Sntwurf. 
 Plane, ber £cbcl. 
 Plate, ber Seller. 
 Play, fpielen, fc^erjen. 
 Player, ber ©pteler. 
 Pleasant, -ly, angenet)tn. 
 Please, gcfallcrt, ergo|en. 
 Pleasure, Dad SSergnugen. 
 Plum, Die ^flaume. 
 Pole, ber "].\ 
 
 Polite, fern, artig, fybflid). 
 Poor, arm, bitrftig, mager. 
 Porcelain, Dad ^axjeEan. 
 Post-mark, ber ©tempet 
 Pound, bad ^funb. 
 Pour, giejjen, etnfdjenfen. 
 Poverty, bie 21 mutt). 
 Powder, bad 9>utoer. 
 Power, bie 2Ra$t, ©ewalt, Jfraft 
 Powerful, -ly, mad)tig. 
 Practical, prafttfd). 
 Practice, bie Uebung. 
 Praise, bad Sob; loben, pretfen. 
 Preposition, bad $er$almtJ3»ort. 
 Pretty, l)ubfd), nett, aierltd). 
 Prince, Der $Prittj, giirft 
 Principle, ber ©runbfafc. 
 Prison, bad ©efdngnip. 
 Probable, wat)rfd)emlid). 
 Pronoun, bad gitrroort. 
 Promise, Dad 2)erfpred)en; perfpred)en ; 
 
 gelcben. 
 Pronounce, audfpredjen. 
 Proud, flolji trofcig. 
 Prussia, spreujjen. 
 Punish, bejlrafett. 
 
 Pure, rein, Tauter. 
 Purse, ber SBeutel. 
 Put, |Men, legen. 
 
 Q 
 
 Quarrel, }anfen, jtrettetl 
 Queen, bie jTbutgtn. 
 
 R 
 
 Rage, nuttljen. 
 
 Rain, ber SRegen; rcgnen. 
 
 Raise, beben, auffyeben. 
 
 Rapid, fdmell, gefd)tt>inb. 
 
 Rather, lieber. 
 
 Raven, ber 9t\t&e. 
 
 Read, lefen. 
 
 Realty, toirtltdj, in ber X$at 
 
 Receive, empfangen, ert>alten. 
 
 Recommend, cmpfet)len. 
 
 Recover, gefunb roerben, genefeiu 
 
 Red, rott). 
 
 Rejoice, fid) freuen. 
 
 Relation, ber, bie Skrroanbte 
 
 Reliable, juuerlafflg. 
 
 Remain, feletben. 
 
 Remember, fid) ertnncrn. 
 
 Renowned, berutjmt. 
 
 Resemble, gteid)en, al)nlid) fetn. 
 
 Reside, roobnen. 
 
 Resistance, ber Siberfianb. 
 
 Respect, ad)tcn, fd)at?en, tiodjadjten. 
 
 Result, bie gotge, ber ©rfolg. 
 
 Return, jurudfetiren, jurutfgebett, ju* 
 
 rudfd)id'en. 
 Reward, pergetten, betofnen. 
 Rice, ber 9tctp. 
 Rich, reid). 
 Ride, reiten, faf)ren. 
 Ridicule, Idd)erlid) madjen, ftd) ubet 
 
 . . . auftjalten. 
 Ring, berating, $retd, fllana. 
 Ripe, reif, jettig. 
 Ripen, reifen. 
 River, ber ftlujj, Strom. 
 Road, bie <Stra£e ; ber SBeg, 
 Rob, ran ben, berauben. 
 Robbery, ber 9kub. 
 Rock, ber geld, gelfen. 
 Roof, bad Qafy. 
 Room, ber Oraum, bie <Stube, bai 
 
 Simmer. 
 Rope, bad <Seit ; -maker, ber <3eile» 
 Rose, bie 9tofe. 
 Ruby, ber Stuiun. 
 
514 
 
 ftUL SHI 
 
 SHO SPA 
 
 Rule, bW ftegel, £crrfd)aft. 
 
 Run, lauf:n, rennen, rumen; - away, 
 
 bimtge^en. 
 Russia, Cftujjtanb. 
 Russian, ber SRuffe; rufftfd). 
 Rusty, roftig. 
 Rye, ber 9foggen, bag $orrt. 
 
 Sad, tranrig, betriibt. 
 
 Saddle, ber ©attel. 
 
 Saddler, ber (Battler. 
 
 Sailor, ber SWatrofc. 
 
 Sake. (L. 60.) 
 
 Salt, bag ©at}. 
 
 Same, berfelbe, biefelbe, baffetbe; the 
 
 very -, ber ndmltdje. 
 Satin, ber SWajj. 
 Satisfied, jufrteben. 
 Saxony, ©acfyfen. 
 Say, fa gen. 
 
 Scarlet- fever, bag ©d)arladjfteber. 
 Scholar, ber ©d)itler, ©elefyrte, bie 
 
 ©cfyulerin. 
 School, bie ©cr)ute. 
 Scold, fd)etten. 
 Sea, bie ©ee, bag Sfteer. 
 Seal, ber ©eefyunb. 
 Seal, bag 9>ctfd)aft, ber ©tempel. 
 Sealing-wax. bag ©iegetlacf. 
 Season, bie Safyreg^ett, red)te Beit. 
 Season of the year, bie Sa^regjeit 
 See, fe|ert. 
 Seem, fd)cinert. 
 Seize, ergreifen. 
 Seldom, felten. 
 Self, felbf). 
 Selfish, eigennittjtg. 
 Sell, perfaufen. 
 Send, fenben, fdjicf en ; to - for, r)olen 
 
 laffen. 
 Sense, ber ©inn, Skrjtanb. 
 September, (September. 
 Sergeant, ber $elbtt>ebel. 
 Servant, ber 2)iener; - girl, bag 
 
 2)tenjlmdd)en. 
 Several, perfd)tebene, mer)rere. 
 Sew, ridden. 
 Shall, fallen, iperben. 
 Sharp, -ly, fcfjarf. 
 Sharpen, fd)drfen, fd)leifen, jufpifeen. 
 Sheep, bag ©djaf. 
 Shine, fd)eiiten, leudjten. 
 Ship, bag ©c&iff. 
 
 Shoe, ber ©d)ur), bag $ufcifctt; - 
 
 maker, ber ©dmfymadjer. 
 Shoot, fd)iepen. 
 Shore, bag lifer. 
 Shriek, fd)reien. 
 Short, fur}. 
 Shovel, bie ©djaufel. 
 Show, jetgen. 
 Sick, franf, unroof)l. 
 Side, bie ©cite; on this-, biegfeitg; 
 
 on the other- jenfeitg. 
 Siege, bie 93elagerung. 
 Sight, bag ®eftd)t ; out of -, aug ben 
 
 Slugcrt. 
 Silk, bie ©eibe; feiben. 
 Silly, einfdlttg, albern. 
 Silver, bag ©tlber; filbern. 
 Similar, dt)nttd). 
 Since, feitbem, sorter, Weil, \>n. 
 Sing, fingen. 
 Singer, ber ©anger. 
 Sister, bie ©djroefter; -inlaw, bit 
 
 ©d)\t>dgerin. 
 Sit, fttjen, pafferu 
 Situation, bie ©telle. 
 Six, fed)g. 
 
 Sixteenth. fed)g^el)iite. 
 Skillful, gefd)idt. 
 Slaughter, fd)lad)teu. 
 Sleep, ber ©djlaf; fd)lafen. 
 Sleeve, ber Vermel. 
 Slow, tangfam. 
 
 Small, llein, gcring;-pox, bie Slattern. 
 Smile, ldd)eln. 
 
 Smith, ber ©tfjmteb, ©d)mib, ©djmibt 
 Smoke, ber diaud) ; raud)en. 
 Smooth, glatt. 
 Snow, ber ©d)ttee; fdjneien. 
 So, fo. 
 
 Sojourn, ber STufentl)att. 
 Sofa, bag 9tufjebett, ©op'lja. 
 Soft, weld), fanft,. leife. 
 Soldier, ber ©olbat. 
 Some, -body, jemaub ; -thing, etroasJ, 
 
 -times, juroetlett* mandjmal; - 
 
 where, irgenbroo. 
 Son, ber ©ofyn. 
 Song, ber ©efartg, bag Sieb. 
 Soon, batb, fritl). 
 Sorrow, ber Summer. 
 Sorry, traurig, betriibt; I am -„ t$ 
 
 tl)ut mir leiD. 
 South, ©itben. 
 Spade, ber ©paten. 
 
SPA SWO 
 
 TAB — TO 
 
 515 
 
 Spanish, fpantfd). 
 
 Spare, fdjottett. 
 
 Sparrow, bcr Sperling. 
 
 Speak, fpredjen, rsben. 
 
 Spin, fptnnen, brcpen. 
 
 Spirit, bcr ©etft, bie Seete. 
 
 Spite, t>er ©roil ; in - of, trofc. 
 
 Split, fpalten. 
 
 Sponge, ber Sdjtoamm. 
 
 Spoon, ber SoflfcL 
 
 Spring, ber Sprung, bte Quelle, ber 
 
 grueling; fprhtgen. 
 S able, ber Stall. 
 
 Stand, bcr Stanb, bte ©telle ; flet;en 
 Start, fabren, abreifen. 
 State, ber Staat ; -s-man, ber Slants 
 
 maun. 
 Stav, ber Sfufcnfyalt ; Mctben. 
 Stead, tie S telle. (L. 60.) 
 Steal, ftet)Ien. 
 Steel, bcr Statjl ; ftdptcn, ftaplern. 
 
 (L. 15. 5). 
 Steep, fteit. 
 Still, ftill, rut)ig, nod). 
 Sting, ber Stacfyel ; fledt>en. 
 Story, bte Q)efd)td)te, bay 2Ra$rd)cn. 
 Stove, ber Dfen. 
 
 Stranger, ber ^rembe, ttnbefanntc. 
 Stream, ber Strom. 
 Street, bte Strafe. 
 Strength, bte Sta'rfe. 
 Strike, fd)lagen, jio§en, Ijauen. 
 Strong, ftarf, frafttg, berb. 
 Study, jiubtren, nadjbenfen. 
 Stupid, bumm, albern. 
 Subject, ber llntertban; unterftjan. 
 Succeed, nad)folgcn, gelingen. 
 Succumb, erltegen. 
 Suffer, letbert. 
 Sugar, ber Sucfcr. 
 Summer, ber Sornmer. 
 Sun, bte Sonne. 
 
 Superior, itbertegen, pprjitgltdjei 
 Supply, erfe^en. 
 Sure, ftdjer, gerotj}. 
 Surgeon, bcr SwtbftTjt 
 Shallow, bte Sd)roalbe. 
 Svan, ber Sdjroatt. 
 Swede, ber Sd)roebe. 
 Sweep, febrert. 
 Swell, fdjroetfen, ctuffd)roeHen. 
 Swim, fdjwimmen. 
 Sword, Day ©cfyroert 
 
 Table, bte Safe!, ber Stfdj. 
 
 Tailor, ber ©djneiber. 
 
 Take, nefymen, ntad)en; to - cold, fid) 
 
 erfatten; to - off, abnepnun. 
 Tanner, bcr (Berber. 
 Tea, ber £$ec. 
 Teach, leljren, unterridjten. 
 Teacher, ber Scorer, bte £e$rerin. 
 Tedious, langroeiltg. 
 Tell, jal;ten, erjd^Ien. 
 Than, ctly, bemt. 
 That, pr». icner, roeldjer, ber. 
 That, conj. bap. 
 The, ber, bic, ba3, \t , . ., befro . . ., um 
 
 fo ; - more, - better, je mef)r, bejlo 
 
 beffer. 
 Thee, bir, bid); of-, beincr. 
 Their, ipj, iljre. 
 Them, ifynen, fte. 
 Themselves, fte felbfr, fid) fct&fr. 
 There, ba, bort, bafclbjr, bafjin, e3; 
 
 -fore, barjer, barum, alfo, 
 They, fte. 
 Thief, bcr Sieb. 
 Thing, bay Sing, bie Sadje. 
 Think, benfen, meincn, giaubenj to - 
 
 of, gebenfen. 
 Third, britte ; bay Srtttet 
 This, btcfer. 
 Thirty, bretfh'g. 
 Thorn, bcr Sorn. 
 Though, obfd)on, obgleid). 
 Thought, bcr ©ebanfe. 
 Thousand, taufenb. 
 Thrash, brefdjen. 
 Thrasher, ber Srefdjcr. 
 Threaten, broken. 
 Three, brei. 
 Thresh, see Thrash, 
 Through, burd). 
 Throw, roerfen. 
 Thunder, bonnern, roettent 
 Thus, fo, alfo, auf btefe 9lrt. 
 Thyself, bn felbfl, fetbfr, bid), bir 
 Tiger, ber£tger. 
 Till, m. 
 
 Time, bte Beit, ba3 STcal. 
 Tin, bay Stmt. 
 Tinman, ber .fUempncr. 
 Tired, mitbe, uberbrufftg. 
 To, ju, um, an, auf, mit, nad), fur, 
 
 gegett, bty; - and fro, bjn uui per 
 
516 
 
 TOB UPO 
 
 USE WHl 
 
 Tobacco, ber Safcaf. 
 
 To-day, fycute. 
 
 Toilsome, anftrengenb. 
 
 Toll-gatherer, ber 3otfner. 
 
 To-morrow, morgen. 
 
 Too, jii, aliju, and). 
 
 Tooth, ber Qafyn. 
 
 Toothache, bag Qcfyrvcotl). 
 
 Toward, gegen. 
 
 Traitor, ber 3)errdttjcr. 
 
 Translate, uberfe^en. 
 
 Trash, ber £anb. 
 
 Travel, reifen. 
 
 Traveler, ber SReifenbe. 
 
 Treat, befyanbeln. 
 
 Tree, ber S3aunt, <Stamm. 
 
 Tremble, jittent 
 
 Trouble, bie Unrufie, ber S3erbru§, 
 
 Summer. 
 True, voafyr, treu. 
 Trunk, ber Coffer, <3tantm. 
 Truth, bie SBa^r^ett. 
 Try, prufen, »erfucl)ett. 
 Turk, ber Xiirfe. 
 Turkey, bie Siirfct 
 Turn, Die SReil;e ; brefjen, ferec^feln. 
 Twelve, jttJolf. 
 Twenty, jroanjtg. 
 Twice, nweimaL 
 Two, jroet. 
 Tyrant, ber Sgramt, SBut^rtcfy. 
 
 U 
 
 Ugly, ^afjlicfy. 
 
 Umbrella, ber ^egenfd)irm. 
 
 Unaccustomed, ungercoljnt. 
 
 Uncle, ber Dfyeim, Dnfet. 
 
 Uncommon, ungemctn. 
 
 Under, timer unten, nteber, unterge* 
 
 orbnet. 
 Understand, tterftefjen, fregretfen; see 
 
 fonnen. (L. 45). 
 Unfavorable, ungihtftig. 
 Unfortunate, unglucfticfy. 
 Unhappy, unglucfltdj. 
 United, sereinigt. 
 Unpleasant, unangenefm. 
 Until, bi^. 
 
 Untrue, unroaljr, untreu. 
 Unwell, unwell. 
 Up, auf, aufrodrtg, $inauf, ^erauf, 
 
 envpor. 
 Upon, auf, an, iiber, Jet, aug, in, 
 
 nad), jufolgc. 
 
 Useful, ttfifclu$. 
 
 Vain, ettel. 
 
 Valiant, tapfer, ~bx(M. 
 
 Value, ber Sertfj. 
 
 Veil, ber ©dieter. 
 
 Venture, tuagen. 
 
 Very, fefyr. 
 
 Vessel, bag ©efd'g. 
 
 Vest, bie SB e fie. 
 
 Vex, plagen, qudten Perbriepeit 
 
 Vienna, SBien. 
 
 Village, bag ©orf. 
 
 Vinegar, ber CSfftg. 
 
 Violin, bie ®etge. 
 
 Virtue, bie Sugenb ; by - of, fraft. 
 
 Visit, ber 23efud) ; befucfyen. 
 
 Voice, bie <3ttmme. 
 
 w 
 
 Wafer, bie DMate. 
 
 Wagon, ber SBagen; -maker, bet 
 
 9Bagner. 
 Wait, roarten. 
 Waiter, ber $etlner. 
 Walk, ber ®ang, SEBeg, ©pajtergang; 
 
 gefyen. 
 Want, bag S3eburfm§; to be in-, 
 
 fcenotljigt fein, noff)tg $aben; SDcan* 
 
 gel leiben an ... 
 War, ber $rteg. 
 Warm, warm; -rspring, Sarm'brun'* 
 
 nen. 
 Wash, wafefyen ; -stand, ber 2Safd)tifdj. 
 Wasp, bie SBefpe. 
 Watch, bie ttfjr, £afd}enuf)r ; -maker, 
 
 ber Ufyrmacfyer. 
 Watchful, roadjfam. 
 Water, bag SEBaffer. 
 Wave, bte 2Bette, 2Boge. 
 Way, ber 2Beg. 
 We, roir. 
 
 Wealth, ber SRetdjtljum. 
 Wear, tragen, anfyaben. 
 Weary, ntitbe. 
 Weather, bag Setter. 
 Weave, roe ben. 
 Weaver, ber 2Beber. 
 Weed, bag Unfraut. 
 Week, bie SSBocfye- 
 Weep, roetnen, bettetnen 
 Well, Ydoi)l, gut. 
 Whale ber SMftfdj- 
 
WHA WOO 
 
 WOO YOU 
 
 517 
 
 What, toad, roeldjer, roeld) ein, wad 
 
 fur im» rote del. 
 Wheat, ber Sffietjen. 
 
 When, n?enn, roann, aU, ba. 
 
 Where, »o, r&oljin. 
 
 Wherein, feorin. 
 
 Whether, ob. 
 
 Which, roeldjer, roeldje, roeldjeg. 
 
 While, inbem, roaluenb. 
 
 Whistle, bte 9>feife, pfeifen. 
 
 White, mcip. 
 
 Who, voer, roehtcr, ber, bte; -ever, 
 
 lvcr and) tmmer. 
 Whole, 
 
 Why, roarum (L. 13. G). 
 Wild, roilb. 
 
 Will, ber SBifle; ttoffen. (L. 45). 
 Win, geroiraten. 
 Window, bag Senfter. 
 Wine, ber SDetn. 
 Wise, njeife, serftanbtg. 
 Wish, ber 2Bimfd); roiinfdjen; see 
 
 iDotten., (L.45). 
 Witli, mit, ntbft, fammt, Set, auf, fitr 
 
 an, burd). 
 Within, in, tnncr^alB. 
 Without, auger, ofyne. 
 Wolf, Der 2Bolf. 
 Woman, bag 23eit>, bte %xau. 
 Wood, bag §olj; -cutter, ber £>ols* 
 
 bauer 
 
 Wooden, 6ol$ern. 
 
 Wool, bte SBotte. 
 
 Word, bag Sort. 
 
 Work, bic Arbeit, bag SBerf; arfreiten. 
 
 World, bte SBelt, (£rbe ; -renowned, 
 
 roeltberiifymt. 
 Worm, ber SBurnt. 
 Worst, fdjiedjtejle, argfte. 
 Worth, bet SBertfj; ioerttj, roitrbig. 
 Worthy, roitrbig. 
 Wretched, elenb. 
 W T rite, febvetben. 
 Writing-book, bad <5d)reil>Bud); - 
 
 desk, ba3 ©djrcibpitlt; -paper bag 
 
 <Sd)reibpapter. 
 Wrong, unredjr, fatfcE). 
 
 Yarn, bad ®axru 
 Year, bad 3a$r. 
 Yellow, gelb. 
 Yes, 3a. 
 
 Yesterday, gefrern. 
 Yet, bod), bennocr), nod). 
 Yonder, bort. 
 You, tt)r, etc. (L. 27). 
 Foung, jung, frifd). 
 Your, euer, be in, 3&,r. 
 Youth, bte 3ugenb. 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Bed, lad Sett. 
 
 Citizen, ber ©urger. 
 
 Evil, bad itebet ; adj. itbet, ^ofe. 
 
 Pupil, ber Bogltng, <Sd)itler. 
 
 Renounce, entfagen. 
 
 Service, ber ©tenjl. 
 Spear, ber ©peer. 
 Yain, ettel ; in — , verge , oert&< 
 Weak, fd)road). 
 
GENERAL INDEX 
 
 % c, Ui changed to the umlauts, ft, 
 b, u, LS° 2. II.; in derivative 
 forms, § 11. 1. 
 
 Abbrevi itions, p. 261. 
 
 SIbe?, cttlctn, fonbern, distinguished, 
 § 256. 2. a. L. 21. A, 
 
 Abstract nouns, § 5. 2. 
 
 Accent, § 2. 10. L. 2. VI. 
 
 21d)tcn, L. 62. 6. 
 
 Accusative or dative after certain 
 prepositions, § 116. Rule for the 
 use of, § 132. Verbs requiring 
 two, § 132. 2. Used to denote 
 measure, distance or time, § 132. 
 3. Construed absolutely, § 132. 5. 
 
 Adjectives, formed by suffixes, >5 25. 
 ^ 26. Predicative and attributive, 
 p. 44. (Note).. Declension of, §27. 
 Old form of, § 28. § 29. L. 14. 
 New form of, § 30. §31. L. 15. 
 Mixed form of, § 32. L. 16. Com- 
 parison of, § 35. L. 32. Used as 
 nouns, § 34. 5. L. 33. 1. Com- 
 paratives and superlatives, § 37. 
 Irregular and defective forms of, 
 § 39. Compared by means of ad- 
 verbs, § 41. Their agreement 
 with nouns, § 135. L. 14. 4. Re- 
 petition of, for different genders, 
 § 135. 5. Requiring the gen., 
 L. 61. Requiring the dat., L. 63. 
 
 Adverbs, § 100. Formed from nouns, 
 §. 101. From adjectives, § 102. 
 From pronouns, § 103. From 
 verbs, § 104. By composition, 
 § 105. Comparison of, § 106. 
 Nouns used as, §. 128. L. 61. 8. 
 Syntax of, § 151. 
 
 Sitter, prefixed to superlatives, § 38. 
 2. L. 32. 7. Applied to number 
 and quantity, § 53. 3. Peculiar 
 use of, § 134. 1. 
 
 3113, L* 69. 3. 
 
 Stlfc, L. 69. 4. 
 
 Sim, with the positive of an adjec- 
 tive used for the superlative, 
 
 § 38. 1. L. 32. 6. This form cA 
 superl. when used, §. 42 
 
 ?In, § 116. L. 68. 1. 2. 
 
 STnber, L. 65. 1. 
 
 Slnbere, bcr, instead of ber jttseite, 
 § 45. 3. 
 
 Slnbertfyalb, instead of jivettel)afb, 
 § 49. (Note). 
 
 Sfoftett, § 110. 1. L. 60. 7. Before 
 infinitive, L. 49. 5. 
 
 Apposition, rule for, § 133. § 123. 
 6.7. 
 
 Attributive adjective, L. 14. 
 
 Articles, declension of, § 4. L. 8. 4 , 
 12. 4. Contracted with preposi- 
 tions, § 4. 2. L. 20. 4. Rule for 
 the use of, § 120. L. 42. Def. 
 art. in place of possess, pron., 
 § 134. 7. With fold), § 120. 4. 
 Before full) and beibc, § 120. 2. h. 
 Omission of, L. 43. 
 
 Slltd), answering to ever and even, 
 L. 69. 5. 
 
 Sfof, § 116. L. 68. 3. * 
 
 Auxiliary verbs, divided into two 
 classes, § 70. 1. Those of the first 
 class, fyaben, feinandroevben, when 
 and how used, § 70. § 71. Those 
 of the second class, when aud 
 how used, § 74. Infinitives of 
 the second class in place of the 
 participle, § 74. 3. 
 
 Salt), L. 69. 6. 
 
 SSar, suffix, § 25. 
 
 SBe, prefix, § 97. 1. 
 
 SSeftnbert, L. 29. 10. 
 
 Sebalten, L. 62. 
 
 Set, its use, § 112. 3. L. 60. 3. 
 
 Setbe, beibeS, L. 65. 2. 
 
 3BU, L. 69. 7. 
 
 Capitals, rules for, § 5. 2. (Note). 
 
 Cardinal numbers, § 44. Gender 
 of, taken merely as figures, 
 §44.7. 
 
 Cases, § 3. 4. 5. Of participles, 
 § 147. 1. L. 8; 60; 61; 62; 63. 
 
 & L. refers to Lessons, p. 19 — 260 nclusive ; § refers to the second 
 part, p. 263 — 446 inclusive. 
 
GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 519 
 
 (Ifoen, diminutives in, § 10. L. 24. 1. 
 Represented by pronouns masc. 
 or fern., § 134. 2. L. 28.^ 4. 
 
 Collective nouns, form of, § 11. 3. 
 Pronouns, referring to them, 
 § 134. 3. 
 
 Collocation of words, § 158. L. 53. 
 
 Comparison of adjectives, § 35. 
 L. Z-. Euphonic changes in form- 
 ing, § 3d. Comparatives and 
 superlatives, declension of, § 37. 
 L. 32. 5. Irregular forms of, § 39. 
 L. 32. 4. 
 
 Comparison of adverbs, § 106. 
 
 Composing German, Exercises in, 
 L. 25. "Models for, p. 449. 
 
 Compounds, formation of, § 2. 6. 7. 
 Accent of, § 2. 10. 
 
 Compound verbs, § 89. Separable, 
 § 90. L. 51. Paradigm of a com- 
 pound separable, § 92. Com- 
 pounds inseparable, § 95. L. 54. 
 
 Conditional mood, obs. on the sev- 
 eral uses of, § 144. 1. 2. 3, <fcc. 
 L. 50. 
 
 Conjugation of verbs, § 75. Regu- 
 lar, L. 37. Irregular, L. 47. 
 
 Conjunctions, § 117. Syntax of, 
 § 156. Examples, illustrating 
 tue use of, L. 6,). 
 
 Consonants, classification and pro- 
 nunciation of, L. 11. IV. V. 
 
 Correlatives, § 156. 2. g. 
 
 2)a, compounded with other words, 
 § 103. L. 52. 2. 
 
 SDafiir (ittCytS bafitr fomten), L. 45. 6. 
 
 2)utf, peculiar use of, § 62. 1. 
 § 134. 1. 
 
 £)ag, its use, § 156. 2. b. L. 69. 9. 
 
 Dative, after certain prepositions, 
 § 116. Peculiar uses of, § 129. 
 1. 2. 3, &c. % 134. 8. After verbs 
 compounded with er, tter, <&c, 
 § 130. After adjectives, § 131. 
 
 Declension, of the article, § 4. Of 
 nouns, § 12. Old form, § 13. 
 Isew form, § 14. Of adjectives, 
 § 27. Of comparatives and su- 
 perlatives, § 37. Of adjective, 
 article, noun, demonst. and poss. 
 pronouns, L. 30. 9. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns, § 61. 
 § 62. L. 10; 44. 
 
 <Denn, L. 69. 10 
 
 £er, (determinative) when abso- 
 lute, its form in the gen. plural, 
 § 63. 2. (relative) its use, § 65. 2. 
 
 ©erjentge, L. 41. 
 
 Derivation and composition of 
 words, § 2. Derivatives, secon 
 dary, § 2. 3. 4. 5. 
 
 iDero and Sijro, p. 312. (Note). 
 
 ©ejj (bcffcn)r when used, § 62. 4 
 
 De'lMlb, begraegen, L. 53. 6. 
 
 £)efto, L. 32. 10. 
 
 Determinative pronouns, § 63 
 L. 41. 
 
 £)iefer and jener distinguished, 
 § 62. 2. 
 
 £ ■icicc, bicv, peculiar use of, § 62. 1. 
 § 134. 1. 
 
 Dimidiative numerals, how formed, 
 § 49. 
 
 Diminutives, § 10. L. 24. 1. 2. 
 Gender of pronouns referring to, 
 § 134. 2. L. 28. 4. 
 
 Distinctive numerals, how formed. 
 § 51. 1. 2. 
 
 Diphthongs, sounds of, L. 2. III. 
 
 Distributive numerals, how formed, 
 §46. 
 
 Sod), § 156. 2. c. L. 69. 11. 
 
 2)ret and jraet, when decliued, 
 § 44. 4. 
 
 ©itrfen, conjugation of, § 83. 2. Re- 
 marks on, § 83. 9. 
 
 <5!kn, before a demonstrative, 
 § 62. 6. 
 
 (£t, termination, § 10. 
 
 (Etgen, L. 16 3. 
 
 (Sin, one, how declined, § 44. 2. 3 
 
 ©incmbcr, its use, § 60. 3. 
 
 Stttige, eilt.te, etraag, § 53. 
 
 (Emp and em, § 97. 2. _ 
 
 (£n, suffix, forming adjectives, § °.5. 
 L 15. 5. 
 
 (Sntgegen, § 112. 5. 
 
 ©r and »er, § 97. 3. 4. 
 
 (Srinncrn, L. 62. 1. 
 
 (Erji, L. 69. 14. 
 
 (£o, peculiar use of, § 57. 8 § 134 
 1. 5. 
 
 ©3 fci betm, L. 69. 10, 
 
 ©tract, L. 69. 15. 
 
 ©traaS, L. 65. 4. 
 
 ©ra., L. 27.3. (Note.) 
 
 Etymology, § 1. 
 
 Euphonic letters, § 2. 8. § 11. 2 
 
520 GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 ffcWett, L. 57. 5. > £er and f>in, § 103. 3. 4. L. 52. 
 
 Feminine nouns, indeclinable in the Sen, L. 70. 
 
 singular, § 12. 4. Exceptions to £>tn, L. 52. 
 
 this, p. 277. (Note). £od), form of, in the comparative 
 
 Foreign nouns, § 16. Old declension § 40. 1. 
 
 of, § 17. New declension of, § 18. £>?len laffen, L. 49. 6. 
 
 Partly of the old and partly of Humbert and taufcnb as collectives, 
 
 the new, § 19. § 44. 6. 
 
 %xav, ^rauiein, L. 70. Sljro and Dcro, p. 312. (Note). 
 
 gfir, L. 67. 2. 3mmer, L. 69. 19. 
 
 future tenses, observ. on the use Imperative mood, observations on 
 
 of, § 141. 1. 2. L. 38. 4. the several uses of, § 145. 1. 2. 
 
 ©an$ and fyalb, before names of pla- L. 50. 5. Past participle, in 
 
 ces, § 53. 2. ©anj unb gar, L. 19. 3. place of, § 145. 3. 
 &ax, L. 69. 16. Imperfect, observations on the use 
 
 ©e, prefix of nouns, § 2. 3. § 11. 3. of, § 138. 1. 2. 3. 
 
 Prefixed to the past participle, Impersonal verbs, § 88. L. 57. 
 
 § 69. 4. Inserted between the 3n, L. 68. 4. 
 
 prefix and the radical in com- 3n or inn, feminine terminations, 
 
 pound verbs separable, § 93. 3. § 10. 
 
 § 99. 3. Excluded from the per- Indefinite numerals, how formed, 
 
 feet participle of compound verbs £ 53. 
 
 inseparable, § 94- Indefinite pronouns, § 59. 
 
 ©eben, L. 57. 4. Indicative mood, for the imperative 
 
 ©egen, L. 67. 3. § 142. 2. L. 38. 
 
 ©egemtbev, L. 66. 5. Infinitive mood, use of, in place oi 
 
 Gender, the natural and gramma- a past participle, §74.3. Without 
 
 tical, § 6. 1. 2. Pvules of, §_ 7. p, § 146. 1. L. 49. With jit, 
 
 Gender of compounds and foreign § 146. 2. As a verbal substantive, 
 
 words, g 8. § 146. 3. Active form used pas- 
 
 Genitive, limiting a noun, § 123. sively, § 146. 4. L. 49. 6. Position 
 
 Limiting an adjective, § 124. of, § 158. 5. Answering after Met* 
 
 With the verbs ad)ten, <fcc, § 125. ben, gefyen &c, to our present 
 
 After reflexive verbs, § 126. After participle, L. 49. 
 
 the impersonal e3 gelufte: mid), Interjection, § 118. § 157. 
 
 &c., § 126. 1. After anflagen, be* Interrogative conjugation, L. 6. 
 
 lel;ren, <fcc, § 127. Nouns in, used Interrogative pronouns, § 66, 67. 
 
 as adverbs, § 128. L. 61. 8. With L. 13. 
 
 prepositions, L. 60. Srgenb, L. 65. 6. 
 
 ©cnug, L. 53. 7. Irregular verbs, commonly so cal- 
 
 ©cm, L. 69. 17. led, list of, § 78. 1. Thos prop- 
 
 ©letcl), L. 69. 18. erly so called, § 81, 82, 83. 
 
 £aben, when and how used as au 3fd), suffix, § 25. 
 
 auxiliary, § 70. 3. 4. § 71. 2. L. 48. Iterative numerals how formed, 
 
 Paradigm of, § 72. L § 73. § 50. 
 
 £aft, suffix, § 25. 3a, L. 69. 20. 
 
 £>atb, § 53. 2. 3e, used in forming distributives, 
 
 £atben or £>alber, § 110. 3. L. 60. 4. §46. Before comparatives, § 156, 
 £alben, roegen and urn - roiften with 2. d. L. 32. 10. 
 
 the genitive of personal pro- 3eber, §53. Sebroeber, § 53. 
 
 nouns, § 57. 1. L. 60. 6. 3egltd)er, § 53. L. 42. 3. 
 
 £au3, nad) or nt, L. 43. 2. Semanbem (dative), remark on tt« 
 
 $etjjen, L. 49. 1. obs. use of, § 59. 3. 
 
 £etr, suffix, § 10. 
 
GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 521 
 
 Se»cr and Mefer, distinguished, 
 § 62. 2. 
 
 SfyteS, peculiar use of, i$ 62. 1. 
 
 tfein, § 53. 3. L. G9. 22. 
 
 ^cinco won I'eibcn, L. G5. 2. 
 
 teit, suffix, § 10. 
 
 Roimen, conjugation of, § 83. 3. Re- 
 marks on, § 83. 10. L. 45. 5. 
 
 Caffcn, remarks upon, p. 338. (Note). 
 L. 45. 11. 
 
 £ctn, diminutives in, § 10. L. 2-1. 1. 
 Represented by a pronoun mas- 
 culine or feminine, § 131. 2. 
 
 Letters of union, § 2 7. 8. 9. Of 
 euphony between suffix and ra- 
 dical, § 11. 2. 
 
 m, § 25. 
 
 List, of (so called) irregular verbs, 
 § 78. 1. 
 
 gjtett, its use, § 59. 2. L. 19. 
 
 SPhmtcr, § 53. 
 
 $Rtty, its two form in plural, § 40. 2. 
 Witty, metyrere, $ 53. 
 
 SWtt, L. 6G. 6. 
 
 Mixed conjugation, how produced, 
 § 81. 
 
 Mixed declension of adjectives, §32. 
 L. 16. Rule for the use of, § 33. 
 
 SRogcitj conjugation of, § 83. 4. Re- 
 marks on, § 83. 11. L. 45. 7. 
 
 Moods, § 68. 5. Indicative, § 142. 
 Subjunctive, § 143. L. 55. Con- 
 ditional, § 144. L. 66. Impera- 
 tive, § 145. L. 50. 5. Infinitive, 
 § 146: 
 
 Multiplicative numerals, how for- 
 med, § 47. 
 
 SNuffert, conjugation of, § 83. 5. Re- 
 marks on, § 83. 12. L. 45. 8. 
 
 Vla;b, § 112. 8. L. 66. 8. 
 
 ta.ifv form of in superl., § 40. 1. 
 
 Negative conjugation, L. 21. 
 
 9iid}t3 bafur fonnen, L. 45. 6. 
 
 dim mty ? L. 21. 5. 
 
 ftotf), L. 69. 23. 
 
 Dilcnumbcm, dative, remark on the 
 ust of, § 59. 3. . 
 
 Nominative, the case of the subject, 
 § 121. Seldom omitted, § 121. 1. 
 
 Nouns, common and proper, § 5. 1. 
 Collective and abstract, §. 5. 2. 
 Gender of, § 6. Derivation of, 
 § 9. Declensioi of, § 12. Old form 
 of, § 13. L. 8.4. New form of, 
 
 § 14. L. 30. 2. Obs. on irregular, 
 § 15. Foreign, § 16. Proper, de- 
 clension of, § 20, 21, 22. Of 
 measure, number &c. § 123. 
 
 Numbers, § 3. 3. 
 
 Numerals, § 43. Cardinals, § 44. 
 Ordinals, § 45. Distributives, 
 § 46. Multiplicatives, § 47. Va- 
 riatives, § 48. Dimidiatives, § 49. 
 Iteratives, § 50. Distinctive*, 
 § 51. 1. 2. Partitives, § 52. Inde- 
 finites, § 53. 
 
 Tmn, L. 69. 24. 
 
 9htr, L. 69. 25. 
 
 Dbaletd), o&ja)on, o5roo$I, § 156. 2. e. 
 
 £>l, L. 66. 10. 
 
 Dfyte, L. 67. 4. Followed by the 
 infinitive, L. 49. 5. 
 
 Ordinal numbers, § 45. Rules for 
 forming, § 45. 2. 4. Interrogative 
 form, § 45. 5. 
 
 Paradigms of Jja&en and fetn, § 72. 1. 
 2. Of wer&ett, § 72. 3. Of a verb 
 of the Old form, § 78. Of irregu- 
 lar verbs, § 83. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 
 Of a passive verb, § 85. Of a re- 
 flexive verb, § 87. Of a com 
 pound verb, § 92. 
 
 Participles, their form and meaning, 
 § 69. L. 37. 1. 2. Declined like 
 adjectives, § 34. 4. L. 37. 4. Past 
 participle for the imperative, § 
 145. 3. L. 50. 3. Place of the 
 past part, of the mood auxiliaries, 
 supplied by the infinitive, § 74. 3. 
 Cases of, § 147. 1. Uses of part, 
 in German restricted, § 147. 2. 3. 
 Present part., its agreement with 
 its noun, § 148. Usually attribu • 
 tive, § 148.1. With the article 
 often used substantively, § 148. 2. 
 Not, as in English, an abstract 
 verbal noun, § 148. 3. Its po- 
 sition, § 148. 4. Adverbial power 
 of, § 148. 5. Preterite part., pe- 
 culiar uses of, § 149. 2. Used 
 absolutely, § 149. 3. Future part., 
 § 150. L. 50. 4. 
 
 Particles, p. 388 (Note), L. 51. 54. 
 
 Partitive numerals, how formed, 
 §52. 
 
 Passive verb, mode of forming, 
 § 84. 1. Paradigm of, § 85. L.58. 
 Advantage over the English, 
 
522 GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 § 81 3. Other methods express- L. 30 4. In the plural, § 21. 0/ 
 
 ing passivity, § 84. 4. countries &c, § 22. 23. 
 
 Perfect tense, obs. on the use of, Quantity, weight &e, words of, 
 
 § 139. 1. 2. 3. L. 38. 3. when qualified by numerals, 
 
 Personal pronouns, construed with rarely in the plural, p. 279 
 
 fyalben, rociicn and inn- widen, § 57. Note. L. 59. 
 
 2. Third pers. of, representing fRedu, with fy.iben, L. 3G. 2. 
 
 things without life, §57.3. Third Reciprocal pronouns, § 60. L. 29. G. 
 
 pers. plural used for the second Reflexive pronouns, § GO. L. 29. 
 
 in addressing persons, § 57. 6. Special form for, in the dat. and 
 
 L. '27. 5. used as reflexives, § ace, § GO. 4. 
 
 60. 4. L. 29. 1. Reflexive verbs, how produced, 
 
 Phrases, idiomatic, p. 446. § 86. 1. L. 29. 9. Some with the 
 
 Pluperfect tense, § 140. dat. and some with the ace. of the 
 
 Plural, nouns having no, § 15. 2. recip. pron., § 86. 2. Often equi- 
 
 Nouns, having two forms in the, valent to passives, § 86. 4. Para- 
 
 § 15. 3. radigm of a reflexive, § 87. 
 
 Possessive pronouns, forms of, 5?ctt}C, L. 46. 2. 
 
 § 58. 2. L. 12. 2. How declined, Relative pronouns, § 64. 65. L. 39. 
 
 when conjunctive, § 58. 3. When Can not (rvelcfyer excepted) be 
 
 absolute, § 58. 4. 5. 6. L. 35. joined with a noun like an ad- 
 
 Phiceof, supplied by the def. art. jective, § 65. 1. Never omitted, 
 
 § 58. 8. § 134.4. 
 Predicate, of a sentence, 119. § Repetition of the adject, when re- 
 Nouns, when used as, § 122. ferring to nouns of different 
 
 List of adjectives, always used genders, § 135. 5. 
 
 as, §. 27. 2. ©at, fdjaft, fet, terminations, § 10. 
 
 Prefixes of verbs, simple separable, ©am, termination, § 25. 
 
 § 90. Compound separable, § 91. ©d)on, L. 69. 26. 
 
 L. 51. When separated from the ©d)utb fein, L. 46. 2. 
 
 radical, § 93. Inseparable, § 94. ©djultug fein, L. 61. 5. 
 
 95. Compound prefixes insepar- ©etn, when and how used as an 
 
 able, § 9G. L. 54. Separable and auxiliary, § 70. 5. § 71. 3. 4. 
 
 inseparable, § 98. L. 54. 2. L. 48. Paradigm of, § 72. 2. § 73. 
 
 Prepositions, table of, § 108. Those ©ein, (possess.), peculiar use of, 
 
 construed with genitive, § 109.' § 135. 4. 
 
 110. L. 60. With dative, § 111. ©eit, L. 66. 11. 
 
 112. L. 20. 1. With accusative, ©etbft or fetber, § 57. 4. L. 29. 
 
 § 113. 114. L. 20. 2. With the dat, Sentence, essential parts of, § 119. 
 
 or ace, § 115. 116. L. 20. 3. Ex- § 158. 2. Simple and compound, 
 
 amples of the use of, L. 66. 67. 68. § 119. Principal and subordin- 
 
 Syntax of, § 152. 153. 154. 155. ate, § 160. L. 39. 
 
 Primitives, § 2. 2. Singular, nouns having no, § 15. 
 
 Pronouns, table of, § 55. Personal, ©o, § 156. 2 /. L. 69. 27. 
 
 § 56. 57. L. 27; 28. Possessive, ©old), when not declined, § 63. 4. 
 
 § 58. Indefinite, § 59. Reflexive (Note). 
 
 and reciprocal, § 60. L. 29. De- ©?tten, conjugation of, g 83. 6. 
 
 monstrative, § 61. 62. L. 10; 44. Remarks on, § 83. 13. L. 45. 9. 
 
 Deten ainative, § 63. L. 41. Re- As imperative, L. 50. 5. obs. 
 
 lative, § 64. 65. L. 39. Inter- Some, L. 39. 4. 
 
 rogative, § 66. 67. L. 13. Syntax ©pajieren gefyen, fat)ren, <fec, L. 49. 2, 
 
 of," § 1 34. Speech, parts of, § 3. 1. Those in ■ 
 
 Proper names, declension of, § 20. fleeted, § 3. 2. 
 
GENERAL INDEX. 
 
 523 
 
 Subject of a sentence, § 119. 
 § 158. 2. 
 
 Subjunctive mood, observations on 
 the several i 
 3., &e. L. 53. 
 
 Suffixes, used in forming nouns, 
 § 10. Used in forming adject- 
 ives. § 25. 
 
 Synoptical view of fem, Ivil'en, mx* 
 ben, § 73. 
 
 Syntax. § 119. 
 
 Saufenb and (junbett, employed as 
 collectives, § 44. 6. 
 
 Tenses. ^ 68. 6. L. 37. Mode of con- 
 jugating, £ 75. 4. L. 37. Termin- 
 ations of, § 76. Present, syntax 
 of, § 137. Imperfect, syntax of, 
 § 138. Perfect, syntax of, § 139. 
 Pluperfect, syntax of. § 140. 
 Futures, syntax of, § 141. 
 suffix, § 10. 
 
 %b\v.\, not used as an auxiliary, 
 § 137. 6. 
 . L. 68.5. 
 
 Um, §114. 4. L. 67. 5. 
 
 Urn— jDtffen, § 110. 2. 5. L. 60. 
 
 ttmfctn (niiftt — fonnen), L. 45. 6. 
 
 lk, sounds of, L. 2. 2. Use 
 of, p. 275. {Xote). 
 
 ling, suffix, § 10. 
 
 I, L. 36. 2. 
 
 ttntet, L. 68. 6. 
 
 »iet Stagen, L. 68. 6. 
 
 Variative numerals, how formed, 
 § 48. 
 
 Verbs, classification of, according 
 to form and meaning, § 68. 2. 3. 
 Moods and tenses of, § 68. 5. 6. 
 Auxiliary, § 70. Old and new 
 conjugations of, § 75. Paradigm 
 of one of the Old form, § 78. 
 List of those of the Old form, 
 § 78. 1. Paradigm of one of the 
 New form, § 80. Those of the 
 Mixed conjugation, § 81. 82. 
 Paradigms of biitfen, foramen, mo* 5 
 gen, miitfen, fotten, roiffen and root* 
 ten, §83. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Pas- 
 sive, §84. Paradigm of a passive, 
 § 85. Reflexive, £ 86. Paradigm 
 
 of a reflexive, § 87. Impersonal, 
 
 § 88. Compound, § 88. 89. 
 
 Paradigm of a compound, § 92. 
 
 Syntax of, £ 136. 
 33 hi, when declined, § 53. 3. I 65. 
 
 7. 8. 9. 
 £uclIci:M, L. 69. 30. 
 Son, § 112. 12. L. 66. 12. Before 
 
 names, § 23. 3. With the dative 
 
 instead of the genitive, § 123. 7. 
 33or, L. 68. 7. 
 
 Vowels, classification and pronun- 
 ciation of, L. 2. 1. 
 3Ba$, § 67. 3. § 134. 1. L. 13; 40. 
 2Ba$, for loaruin, § 67. 3. 
 SBa<3 ftir cut, § 66. 4. 5. § 67. 1. 2. 
 
 L. 13. 
 SEBegen, L. 60. 
 SBeltfyet (relative), genitive of, when 
 
 used, § 65. 1. 
 Sffiemg, when declined, § 53. 3. L. 
 
 65.' 7. 8. 9. 
 SSet and roaS (relatives), their use 
 
 and position, § 65. 3. 4. 5. L. 40. 
 
 As interrogatives,, § Q6. 3. L. 13. 
 SBetben, auxiliary of the first class, 
 
 § 70. 2. Paradigm of, § 72. 3. 
 
 § 73. L. 46. 
 3Bert$ fern, L. 61. 0. 
 SBic, L. 60. 
 
 SGBie bejmben <Ste jtdj, L. 29.10. 
 SBte »iel, § 45. 5. 
 SBtflen, conjugation of, § 83. 7. 
 
 Placed before an infinitive, L. 
 
 49. 7. 
 3Bo, compounded with other words, 
 
 § 103. L. 52. 
 2Bo$I, L. 69. 34. 
 SB o Lien, conjugation of, § 83. 8. 
 
 Remarks on, § 83. 14. L. 45. 10. 
 Sotben, for gerootben, § 84. 2. 
 3u, § 112. 9. 13. L. GO. 13. When 
 
 between the parts of a compound 
 
 verb, § 93. 
 3ufotge, § 110. 8. L. 60. 
 8« ©ntnbe ge^en, ridden, L. 43. 0. 
 3u £oirfe, L. 43. 2. 
 3roci and brei, when declined, 
 
 § 44. 4. 
 
PUBLISHED BY IVIS0N, PHINNEY A; CO., NEW YORK. 
 
 FASQUELLE'S 
 FREN CH SERIES. 
 
 By LOUIS FASQUELLE, LL.D., 
 
 Professor of Modern Languages in the University of Michigan 
 
 CHARACTERISTIC FEATURES. 
 
 1. The plan of this popular Series embraces a combination 
 of the two rival systems ; the Oral, adopted by Ollendorff, 
 Robertson, Manesca, and others, with the old Classical, or 
 Grammatical System. One of its principal features is a con- 
 stant comparison of the construction of the French and English 
 Languages. 
 
 2. Another important feature consists in the facility with 
 which the instructor or student can elect in the course of stud} 
 the practice and theory combined, or as much or as little of 
 either as he deems proper. 
 
 3. The " Course" commences with a complete though short 
 treatise on pronunciation, presenting the power of each letter 
 as initial, medial, or final, and also its sound when final and 
 carried to the next word, in reading or speaking. 
 
 4. The changes in the words are presented in the most simple 
 manner, and copiously exemplified by conversational phrases. 
 
 5. The rules of composition, grammatical and idiomatical, 
 are introduced gradually, so as not to offer too many difficulties 
 at one time. 
 
 6. The verbs are grouped by tenses, and comparisons insti- 
 tuted, showing their resemblance or difference of termination 
 in the different conjugations. 
 
 7. The second, or theoretical part, offers, in a conden^ea 
 form, a solution of the principal difficulties of the language. 
 
 8. The Rules are deduced from the best authorities, and ill us- 
 traded by short extracts from the best French writers. 
 
 9. A treatise on gender is given, containing rules for determin- 
 ing gender by the meaning of words, and also by the termination. 
 
 10. The Irregular, Defective, and Peculiar verbs are pre* 
 sented in an Alphabetical Table, producing a Complete Dic- 
 tionary of these verbs. 
 
PUBLISHED BY IVISON, PHINNET & CO., NEW YORK. 
 FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 
 
 I. FASQUELLE'S FRENCH COURSE : 
 
 OB, NEW MKTI10D OF LEARNING THE FltENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 Itevised and enlarged. 
 
 Embracing both the Analytic and Synthetic modes of In- 
 struction. By Louis Fasquelle, LL.D., Professor of Modem 
 Languages in the University of Michigan. 
 
 This work is on the plan of " Woodbury's Method with Get- 
 man." It pursues the same gradual course, and comprehends 
 the same wide scope of instruction. It is the leading book ir 
 the best literary institutions in the United States, and has als< 
 been reprinted in England, where it has an extended sale. 
 
 II. A KEY TO THE EXERCISES IN FASQUELLE'S 
 FRENCH COURSE. 
 
 III. FASQUELLE'S COLLOQUIAL FRENCH READER. 
 
 2C0 Pages. Duodecimo. 
 
 Containing Interesting Narratives from the best French 
 writers, for translation into English, accompanied by Conver- 
 sational Exercises. With Grammatical References to Fasquelle's 
 New French Method ; explanation of the most difficult passages, 
 and a copious Vocabulary. 
 
 IV. FASQUELLE'S TELEMAQUE. 
 
 12?)io. 
 
 Les Aventures de Telemaque. Par M. Fenelon. A New 
 Edition, with notes. The Text carefully prepared from the 
 most approved French Editions. 
 
 Tho splendid production of Fenelon is here presented in a beautiful mechanics 
 dress, with copious references to Fasquelle's Grammar, full cotes explanatory of dif&- 
 tulties in the text, and a full vocabulary. 
 
 V. NAPOLEON. BY ALEXANDER DUMAS. 
 
 Arranged for the use of Colleges and Schools ; with Conver- 
 sational Exercises on the plan of Fasquelle's Colloquial French 
 Reader, Explanatory Notes, and Idiomatical and Grammatical 
 References to the ** New French Method." By Louis Fasqusllb, 
 LLD. 
 
 2 
 
PUBLISHED BY IV1S0N, FHINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 
 
 FASQTJELLE'S FRENCH SEKIES. 
 
 VL FASQTJELLE'S CHEFS D'CEUVRE DE RACINE. 
 
 832 rages, 12-mo. 
 
 For Colleges and Schools. "With Explanatory Notes and 
 Grammatical References to the " New French Method." 
 
 This Edition contains five of Racine's best plays : Les Plai- 
 eurs, Andromaque, Ipiiigenie, Esther, and Athalie. The 
 Notes will be found, in all the plays, sufficiently full, without 
 being diffuse ; in Les Plaideurs, the only comedy written by 
 Racine, the explanations, however, are much fuller than the 
 others. 
 
 VII. FASQTJELLE'S INTRODUCTORY FRENCH COURSE. 
 
 ISmo. 
 
 A new work, on the plan of the larger " Course," adapted 
 to Beginners. 
 
 VIII. FASQUELLE'S MANUAL OF FRENCH CONVER- 
 SATION. 
 
 12?no. 
 
 A Complete Manual of Conversation, Idioms, etc., with refer, 
 ences to Fasquelle's Course. 
 
 Testimonials of Teachers and Professors. 
 
 Fasquelle's French Series has been recommended by Statb 
 Superintendents and Boards of Education, by hundreds of 
 distinguished Professors and Teachers, whose testimonials 
 ▼ould fill a volume. The following are specimens : 
 
 Joseph Wm. Jenks, Professor of Languages in the University 
 
 ef Urbana, 0., says: — ,l I hare taught many classes in the French language, and d 
 not hesitate to say, that 'Fasquelle's French Course 1 is superior to any other Frenc 
 Grammar I have met with, for teaching French to those whose mother-tongue 
 English. It combines, in an admirable manner, the excellences of the old, or classio 
 and the new, or Ollendorlfian methods, avoiding the faults of both. 11 
 
 Messrs. Guillaume II. Talbot, T. A. Pelletier, E. II. Vian, 
 
 H. Sest, and N. B. De Moxtrakchv, well known to the community as among th« 
 most eminent teachers in BOSTON, unite .n a testimonial in which they "heartily 
 and unanimously testify, that the work is held in high esteem and approbation among 
 us, and that we consider it the very best heretofore published on the subject of which 
 It treats. For the true interest of all engaged in the study of the spoken French, we 
 •^ould advise its nniversal adoption." 
 
 3 
 
Q 
 
 PUBLISHED BY IVTSON, PHINNEY & CO., NEW YORK. 
 
 FASQUELLE'S FRENCH SERIES. 
 
 Messieurs M asset and Villeplait, Professors of the French 
 
 Language in New York, write : — " We consider 'Fasquelle's French Course' a valu- 
 able and appropriate addition to the different grammars of the French Language. 
 The arrangement adopted is systematic, and so simplified as greatly to facilitate the 
 progress of the student." 
 
 Prof. Alphonss Brunner, of Cincinnati, says : — " Having 
 
 boon a teacher of my vernacular tongue — the French — for ten years, in my opinion, it 
 Is the best book yet prepared. I recommend it as superior to the old theoretical 
 grammars." 
 
 Prof. J. B. Torricelli, of Dartmouth College, writes : — " I 
 
 feaie pleasure in recommending to the teacher as well as to the private student, 
 ' Fasquelle's New Method,' as the best yet published. Its adoption in our Colleges 
 and Seminaries has given entire satisfaction. Mr. Fasquelle deserves the thanks of 
 all lovers of the French language." 
 
 Rev. Charles Collins, D.D., President of Dickinson College, 
 
 Pa. : — "We have introduced Fasquelle's French Series with very decided approbation." 
 
 Prof. Everett, of Bowdoin College, Me.: — "Fasquelle's 
 
 French Course is decidedly the best grammar ever published." 
 
 Edward North, A.M., Professor of Languages, Hamilton 
 
 Collese, N.Y. : — "Fasquelle's French Course I continue to use, and to like. It is 
 worthy of its immense popularity." 
 
 Rev. George B. Jewett, late Professor of Modern Lan- 
 guages, Amherst College: — "I have examined Fasquelle's French Series with mu^li 
 pleasure and satisfaction. They form an admirable series." 
 
 Prof. Charles Gobelle, Professor of Modern Languages, 
 
 Newbury Female Collegiate Institute, Vt. : — " I have been using Fasquelle's French 
 Course during the past two years in one of the best schools in New England. It )a 
 the very best book I know of for instruction in the French language." 
 
 Prof. T. Peyre-Ferry, Teacher of French in the New Jersey 
 
 Normal School, Trenton : — " Fasquelle's Course is the best work ever published of the 
 kind. It enables the pupil to acquire a practical knowledge of the French language.'' 
 
 Rev. G. W. Quereau, A.M., Principal of Conference Semi- 
 
 .nary, Greenwich, R. I. : — " Fasquelle's Course is our standard text-book in French. 
 We" use it because we think it best. I speak with some confidence, and am satisfied 
 that it is decidedly superior to any other book of the kind." 
 
 James B. Angell, A.M., Professor of Modern Languages in 
 
 Brown University, writes: — " I gladly testify to the excellence of Fasquelle's French 
 Course, which I have used in my classes for three years." 
 
 P. N. Legendre, Professor of French, New Haven, Ct., 
 
 lays: — " Never has a work come under my notice, that blends so happily and har- 
 moniously the great rival elements of the language. My pupils study it with pleasure." 
 
 E. J. P. Wohrange, Professor of Modern Languages in the 
 
 N. Y. Central College, writes : — "'Fasquelle's Course' is at, the same time original 
 tad complete in itself, superseding all systems now in use." 
 
 The JST. Y. Daily Times says : — " Prof. F. is somewhat of 
 
 6a enthusiast as to his method of teaching, and being blessed with as much sense as 
 experience, makes a better arranged text-book, and grades the difficulties more hap 
 p!)y than any other modern teacher." 
 
 The Philadelphia Daily News speaks of the "Napoleon," as 
 
 " a very concise and interesting French history which, edited as it is by Prof. Fas- 
 quelle.'can not fail to prove a very popular school-book. The narrative is in Dumas 
 most brilliant and attractive style." 
 
 The N. Y. Independent says of the " Napoleon" : — " It com 
 
 bines the advantages of a stirring biography to invite the student, a good French 
 «tyle and grammatical and critical exercises and annotations." 
 
 ' 
 
! 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proces 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Nov. 2006 
 
 , nn PreservationTechnologies 
 
 LEAOJt A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 003 225 004 A